GAZETTEER NO. 14 =OGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution ATLAS - GAZETTEER COLLECTION UNITED STATES BOARD ON GEOGRAPHIC NAMES H. Thompson Straw, Chairman Meredith F. Burrill, Hxecutive Secretary Department of State... ....... Department of the Army. .......- Department of the Navy. .......- Post Office Department. ........ Department of the Interior. ..... . Department of Agriculture. ....... Department of Commerce. ...... . Government Printing Office ....... Lilia Or OWE. so bog! 0 6 6 6.0. c Department of the Air Force @: tors Toki pe™ utallatet mre: Central Intelligence Agency Vacant Sophia A. Saucerman, deputy F. C. Shepard, member Walter M. Leech, deputy W. G. Watt, member Charles D. Rouse, deputy Norman R. Grant, member C. B. Gelston, deputy Arthur A. Baker, member John B. Bennett, deputy Edward P. Cliff, member Fred W. Grover, deputy Lawrence W. Swanson, member Lewis Heck, deputy John W. Dollins, member Walter W. Ristow, member Leo LaMontagne, deputy H. Thompson Straw, member Robert Y. Ota, deputy DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR Dovetas McKay, Secretary OFFICE OF GEOGRAPHY Merepitu F, Burriu, Director Communications should be addressed to the Executive Secretary Nv PLEASE RETORN \ To” Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution INSTITUTION S. Cc le ATLAS - GAZETTEER COLLECTION "Woods Hole Oceanegraphic Institution Data Library Referer iGo Colles On, . G Av.Z7 Er TE E R NO. | 4 GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA With a Foreword by Meredith F. Burrill and a List of Expeditions by Kenneth J. Bertrand and Fred G. Alberts Revised Edition OFFICIAL STANDARD NAMES approved by the UNITED STATES BOARD ON GEOGRAPHIC NAMES Prepared in the Office of Geography, Department of the Interior Washington, D.C. © January 1956 For sale by the Sunenmendert of Documents, U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Price $2.25 (paper cover) 0 0301 0094905 3 NNN MUNI Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States Government Page 3 12 oy 20 23 31 34 34 Page * 50 59 59 63 65 72 89 101 106 111 111 112 126 131 Column 1 1 1 Column 2 1 CORRECTIONS——ANTARCTICA Paragraph——Line last——2 first——7 last——2 last——5 second——24 first—-—14 third——2 last——10 Entry——Line Bailey Mount——1 Bertram Glacier——2 Bienvenue, Cape——4 Black Ridge——1 Bolle, Mont——1 Bruce Cape——1 Colbeck, Cape——4 Davis Islets——5 Detroit Plateau——4 Downshire, Cape——1 Drygalski Mountains——4 Dudley, Mount——3 Ferrar Glacier——29 Fort Rock——2 Board Meredith Nathanial Beckman Salveson slighting Canisto Covandonga Belleny BAILEY MOUNT Scott Polar Inst. 140°15' E. BLACK RIDGE BOLLE, MONT BRUCE CAPE 1908 Budd Coast Russel Gl. DOWNSHIRE, Cape 72°50' Ss. side medcal Greenwhich I. Board, Meredith Nathaniel Beckmann Salvesen sighting Canisteo Covadonga Balleny Should Read BAILEY, MOUNT Scott Polar Research Inst. 140°31' E. BLADE RIDGE BOLLE, MOUNT BRUCE, CAPE 1902 Knox Coast Russell Gl. DOWNSHIRE, CAPE 72°00' S. sides medial Greenwich I. Page 131 132 135 143 143 148 154 157 163 173 174 182 183 192 194 201 209 211 211 224 224 224 Column Entry——Line Fort William——2 Fox Mount——1 Frost Glacier——7 Grace, Cape——9 Graham Coast——8 Habermehl Peak——3 Hatree, Cape——1 Herd Point——5 Horsburg Point——1 Johansen Islands——3 Jomfruene Island——12 Kreitzer Glacier——6 Kukri Hills——9 Lichen Peak——2 Little America——3 Madigan, Nunatak——1 McLennan Mount——1 Mentzel, Mount——4 Mercury Glacier——3 Neumayer Channel——1 Neumayer Escarpment——2 Neumayer Escarpment——4 Greenwhich I. FOX MOUNT boaswain J. Gist 1831 Muhlig-Hofman HATREE, CAPE R. D. Hard HORSBURG POINT 72°07! W. probably 72245) Gurikha 20 mi. Little America I. MADIGAN, NUNATAK McLENNAN MOUNT (PAC &, flowing W. George von Neumayer 11,800 ft. Should Read Greenwich I. FOX, MOUNT boatswain J. Grace 1832 Muhlig-Hofmann HARTREE, CAPE [move to correct alph. place] R. D. Herd HORSBURGH POINT 72°52" W. probable 71°45' E. Gurkha 6 mi. Little America I, MADIGAN NUNATAK McLENNAN, MOUNT Tile sO Ss flowing E. Georg von Neumayer 8,100 ft. [after “*Schwabenland”’ insert “«. in about 73°15" ‘Sa 1°25" w.??] ii Page 226 236 239 256 258 259 260 294 303 308 309 313 326 Column Entry——Line Nielson Glacier——1 Parpen Crags——4 Penelop Point——1 Renaud Island——3 Richard Black Coast——6 Ritscher Peak——4 Roberts Cape——1 Stygian Cove——9 Tofe Glacier——1 Tucker Inlet——2 Tu Rocks——4 Vedel Islets——5 Will Hayes Mountains——1 NIELSON GLACIER Surveyed and named by... PENELOP POINT Rabat... Briscoe USAD TD p2DUES: ROBERTS CAPE Cliffs TOFE GLACIER Diniell 58°33! W. Vadel WILL HAYES MOUNTAINS CHANGES IN ALPHABETIZATION Should Read NIELSEN GLACIER Named by... PENELOPE POINT Rabot... Biscoe USAS Tilia ZONES: ROBERTS, CAPE cliffs TOFTE GLACIER Daniell 58°53! W. Vedel WILL HAYS MOUNTAINS Correct the alphabetization of the decisions and cross-references listed below: Page 47 47 82 93 120 127 128 129 131 Entry Arrival Heights Arronax, Mount Cee Port Cornwallis Island Emm Rock Fish Islands Flagon Point Flatiron, The Foreland Islet iii Page 131 131 133 135 252 258 265 265 Entry Fort William Fortress Hill Frank Newnes Glacier Fryer Point Rabot, Mount Rex, Mount Rosamel Island Rosenthal Islets GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA CONTENTS The geographic name problem . The nature of the problem . Resolution of the problem . Statement of policy covering peocrapiich names Application of policy in decisions . Expeditions . List of expeditions . Geographic names Abbreviations Page = (vo) Aa PNW Fe 11 37 The following abbreviations are frequently, but not universally, used in the text of the name decisions included in this publication. Acadaenea.s Academy, Académie INOW, socone Admiral INAV, csdace Archipelago (ASSN ace Association IASSUeee Assistant AMEE 3 333s August Brig. Gen. . Brigadier General Captismcnerc Captain Cdr ee Commander Chanteeneer Channel COS Pits is Company Colweacsminn: Colonel CCN Sie sities: December Depts rasan: Department DIPS yeh ices. Director DISC een. discovered DE ee ovaxete Doctor 1 St apie aber east (2) eee elevation 1) ee east-northeast INK Ses omes Ensign MHS Socane east-southeast (9° SORE expedition lots ou te ae February 1 TS Abate ees Pret feet Gens sssn.c General GIP a ae Glacier Gov 0.5 voor Governor GOVES ane Government lsheyes deennoe Harbor ELON eee Honorable ABBREVIATED TERMS Tast, Peete ea Soest encoun iv Island Institute, Institution Islands January Junior Lieutenant Major mile, miles Member of Parliament Mount Mountain Mountains north northeast north-northeast north-northwest November northwest October Peninsula President Professor Point . Rear Admiral Royal Australian Navy Representative Royal Navy Royal Navy Reserve .. Royal Navy Volunteer Reserve . Right Honorable GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ABBREVIATED TERMS (Continued) Sie. deaetauee south Univers University SES eek southeast USCGHrerE United States Coast Guard Seq aes Secretary WSMC irr United States Marine Corps Sep September WSNieeereee United States Navy ea bes F NeEe USNR ..... United States Navy Reserve ae cate eee Societe USiy aoe. United States Some Vee ca eee V. Adm. ... Vice Admiral SSE. ....... south-southeast V. Pres. .... Vice President SSWeareacrre south-southwest SUA ae eee west SHI wise oor Strait WNW. ..... west-northwest SWer ee southwest WSwW...... west-southwest ABBREVIATIONS FOR COMMITTEE TITLES IBT=APCh a eee nee tee British Antarctic Place-names Committee SAGAN Gn aiken eae ne United States Advisory Committee on Antarctic Names, 1947- WS=SCAN eeu Washes c ere United States Special Committee on Antarctic Names, 1943-1947 ABBREVIATIONS FOR EXPEDITION TITLES AA Sl Ot 14 ee ania Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-14 ENN UNS) Oh eae ee ie erhate aaa tir Australian National Antarctic Research Expedition (various dates and leaders) IAT EON OXP ec siceu ies acnereiinvees Argentine expedition BANZARE, 1929-31 ........ BelgAE, 1897-99 BGLE, 1934-37 BrAE, 1898-1900 BrAE, 1907-9 Brat 910-3 eeee eee IBROX ae Mets fer at tacts BrNAE, 1901-4 ByrdAE, 1928-30 ByrdAE, 1933-35 Chil¥vexp ia oan sceee cones FrAE, 1903-5 FrAE, 1908-10 FrAE, 1948-53 EPOX Dey Netgear eae: ae GerAE, 1901-3 GerAE, 1911-12 GerAE, 1938-39 Gerstexp sii ets ao ee eaens NBSAE, 1949-52 NOTMEXDE ote e i otras RARE, 1947-48 RUSS SOX DA salaries estate ScotNAE, 1902-4 SGS, 1951-52; 1953-54 SwedAE, 1901-4 USAS, 1939-41 USEE, 1838-42 ............ USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47 USN Op. Wml., 1947-48 . British-Australian-New Zealand Antarctic Research Expedi- tion, 1929-31 . Belgian Antarctic Expedition, 1897-99 British Graham Land Expedition, 1934-37 British Antarctic Expedition, 1898-1900 British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9 British Antarctic Expedition, 1910-13 British expedition British National Antarctic Expedition, 1901-4 Byrd Antarctic Expedition, 1928-30 Byrd Antarctic Expedition, 1933-35 Chilean expedition Discovery Investigations (various dates and leaders) Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey (various dates and leaders) French Antarctic Expedition, 1903-5 French Antarctic Expedition, 1908-10 French Antarctic Expeditions, 1948-49; 1952-53 French expedition German Antarctic Expedition, 1901-3 German Antarctic Expedition, 1911-12 German Antarctic Expedition, 1938-39 German expedition Norwegian-British-Swedish Antarctic Expedition, 1949-52 Norwegian expedition Ronne Antarctic Research Expedition, 1947-48 Russian expedition Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, 1902-4 South Georgia Survey, 1951-52; 1953-54 Swedish Antarctic Expedition, 1901-4 United States Antarctic Service, 1939-41 United States Exploring Expedition, 1838-42 United States Navy Operation Highjump, 1946-47 1949-51; 1951-52 and . United States Navy Operation Windmill, 1947-48 iy races se! tid “Tah doo haa % sal) coll thi oth Oe AP AE Rye, bean: iy ; Y : : vo’ dP , f : HY Day ‘4 1 Buu Hi nee ‘ Sh Ube ie nea * = : tives mu if PAO KN } i y pact ) ‘ , * ¢. Pad i) * ' | yer | ray i a VTS Uo eo 44 ee | u her et ‘rats A i 73) 4 Wee ts diy j wi ‘i Bi ‘ 5 j it u , at M 1 Max yt Ve Ray i PRUE ts =a bh ¥ \e er i ee es 7 75, 1, -s \ vi 4) * pn is gen) wrt Late 4 Wea eager i Fa OA 4 We 7 \ Sieh vf ; uy ‘- 7] 4 ‘ 7 ist Cay “ ry cal he ‘ Wr ay ‘* Lani } ‘ a a ye ‘fps 7 Tay ted i = i r j he : vee 4 \ Caw Ny q 7 ae : meine on 1 nds, f TURF U i Pe) Le ab ; ae 4 ‘ * ie m ‘t's % 4 A t Weg nary ats ‘ ii 4 A ‘ Posi a eh " a or heer) i “tdi Oe : ; } | Joey j mA GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA The Geographic Name Problem The Nature of the Problem The geographic nomenclature of Antarctica was long in need of an overall systematic treatment, objective in approach and based upon thorough examination of all the evidence. The results of such treatment over a period of about three years were presented in Geographical Names of Ant- arctica, Special Publication No. 86 of the Board on Geographical Names, in May 1947, two supple- ments to which were issued in 1949 and 1951. The continuing program since that publication has now covered most of the geographic naming in Antarctica. As research has filled in many of the previous gaps in Knowledge, a number of names have been modified and minor amendments have been made in the policies. This revised publica- tion brings together the greatly enlarged body of names Officially standardized for use by the United States Government, together with new pertinent background information. Questions of political sovereignty have not entered into consideration of the name policy, or of individual names. This statement of non- political character of the geographic name policy and decisions is also applicable to all statements in this publication. The Board on Geographic Names has therefore considered each name on its merits in the light of historical studies of explora- tion and of successive improvements in the mapping of Antarctica. The names of “lands” and “coasts” have been considered without politi- cal connotation, and have been described and delimited as physical entities as far as present knowledge permits. The Antarctic continent presents many nomen- clature problems for varied reasons. Modern spe- cialized tools were not available to the early ex- plorers primarily responsible for initial activity in Antarctic naming, and the nature of Antarctica put great obstacles in their way. The great size of the continent and its relative inaccessibility make it difficult to develop accurate concepts of the whole and the relationship of its parts. Many of the natural features in Antarctica are markedly similar in appearance, and, conversely, the appear- ance of a given feature varies with the angle of view or from time to time. It has not been easy for explorers to describe and locate features unmis- takably or to identify a feature reported previously by someone else. The extraordinary hazards of travel and frequent poor visibility have restricted observation. Practically all of the interior that is known, and much of the coast, are masked with a cover of snow and ice through which protrude only the upper parts of mountains or mountain ranges. Although many glaciers are perfectly distinct, except perhaps at their sources, the relationship of ice masses to one another is commonly not obvious. Another contributing difficulty in identification of features has been that the available records of exploration do not always permit exact fixing of positions at the present. Chronometer errors in the early days of Antarctic exploration resulted sometimes in considerable errors in reported longi- tude; looming and mirages may have caused wide errors in latitude; flight positions have not always been determined with the precision necessary to permit full and accurate use of aerial photographs; and many features have been named upon being viewed either from such a great distance or from such an angle that their relation to the local topographic detail could not be seen. Superimposition of names on previously named features in Antarctica has been largely the result either of mistaken identity or location of features arising from the foregoing causes, of simultaneous exploration, or of lack of knowledge of previous naming. The records of early sealers and some other visitors to Antarctica have contributed little to the literature on Antarctic nomenclature. Explorers and cartographers of many nations and languages have contributed to the nomenclature of Antarctica, often without recording for posterity an explanation of their naming actions and often without full appreciation of everything that had preceded. In some instances the preceding events could not possibly have been known by explorers, since priority of occurrence was a matter only of weeks or even days. Prior to the study of Antarctic names resulting in the first publication, resolution of problems arising from these natural causes had been com- plicated in the case of a few important features by strongly expressed differences of opinion. Sub- sequent resolution of these matters is being facil- itated by the adoption of developed policy. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA The kinds of nomenclature problems encoun- tered in Antarctica fall largely in these classes: determination of the facts, circumstances and, in- sofar as possible the intent, of original and any subsequent naming; the choice between multiple names for a feature; the choice between alterna- tive generic terms such as land or coast; the correc- tion of generic terms for features whose nature was not accurately known at the time of naming, such as a peninsula which turns out to be an island; identification and fixing of location; defini- tive description; and determination of the appro- priateness of names for application to specific features. Resolution of the Problem The need for systematic overall treatment of Antarctic names was brought to the attention of the then United States Board on Geographical Names by the requirements of the 1939-41 United States Antarctic Service expedition and by the concomitant preparation of a chart of Antarctica and a companion volume of Sailing Directions by the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office. The chart and Sailing Directions were prepared under the direction of Rear Admiral (then Lieu- tenant Commander) Robert A. J. English, USN (Retired), who was Executive Secretary of the United States Antarctic Service Interdepartmental Executive Committee. Admiral English discussed informally many problems of nomenclature and specific name proposals with Lawrence Martin (Library of Congress), and W. L. G. Joerg (Na- tional Archives), who had concerned themselves for some time with Antarctic nomenclature. Also available to Admiral English was such general information on policy and background as the Board had developed up to that time, which unfortunately did not include a definite and comprehensive state- ment of policy specifically pointed to the problems of Antarctic names. In preparing the chart and Sailing Directions, it became evident that the resolving of name con- flicts which had arisen over many years and the examination of new name proposals would involve specialized research. The U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office on Nov. 27, 1939 formally referred to the then Board on Geographical Names for its consid- eration, all names then appearing on the chart. A Special Committee on Antarctic Names was appointed on July 23, 1943, with, as members W. L. G. Joerg, Chairman, Capt. Harold EK. Saun- ders, U.S.N., and, for a few months, Lawrence Mar- tin. The Committee met with the then Director of the Board on Jan. 5, 1944, made a preliminary appraisal of the situation, and considered several key names upon which it made recommendations. These recommendations were accepted and the names were approved and promulgated. In Ant- arctica, as elsewhere, it is necessary to examine the whole of the nomenclature before the relation of any one name to the general pattern becomes clear, and as further examination proceeded some of these decisions were appropriately revised. The Committee met at intervals during the early part of 1944 and worked out additional names, but the task progressively assumed ever- increasing size until staff assistance was neces- sary. A member of the then Division of Geog- raphy, Dept. of the Interior, was assigned in Dec. 1944 to research, compile, index and analyze evi- dence of exploration and specific names. In March 1946 the Special Committee on Antarctic Names agreed to devote two or three half-days a week to their part of the program. Kenneth Bertrand was assigned the staff work on Antarctic names, and after joining the faculty of Catholic University of America in Sep. 1946 he continued his investigations as part of his University research program. Fred G. Alberts, in charge of the pro- gram since October 1949, was joined in March 1951 by Gardner D. Blodgett. An act of Congress in July 1947 abolished the former Board and created the present one, respon- sible conjointly with the Secretary of the Interior for standardization of geographic names. Joerg and Saunders were appointed members of a new Advisory Committee on Antarctic Names that con- tinued without break the work of the former Spe- cial Committee. Bertrand was appointed a mem- ber of the Committee in October 1947 and rounded out an effective team. Meeting regularly one-half day or more each week for nine years, and irregu- larly after that, this group worked over a great quantity of data in the consideration of practically every name known to have been applied to, or proposed for, features in Antarctica. The Com- mittee was reduced to two by the death of Joerg in January 1952. The Office of Naval Research in May 1949, recog- nizing the value of an orderly Antarctic nomencla- ture, the availability of the members of the Com- mittee and the start that had been made in Special Publication No. 86, contracted for the completion of the study as a part of its program of support of basic research. Under that contract the greater GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA part of the remaining names were worked out, but not all. In two instances, Totten Coast and Norths Coast, the information gathered by Wilkes in 1840 on the occasion of the original application of the names Totten and North and the subsequent ob- servations by Mawson in the periods 1911-14 and 1930-31, though justifying the retention of these names, did not suffice for continuous delineation of the coast line. These “coasts” could not be delimited until the shore line was drawn on maps, and they were therefore defined as extending for an undetermined distance east and west of the respective landfalls that occasioned the original naming. The coast of Wilkes Land also presented a series of other name problems that could not be solved until the coast line was delineated. Aerial photographs of much of this coast were obtained by Operations Highjump and Windmill. A sec- ond contract was therefore made with the Office of Naval Research in December 1952 to produce a delineation of the coast between longitudes 98°E. and 160°K. (subsequently amended to 86°E. and 144°E.), using techniques described by Saunders in the April 1933 Geographical Review, and fur- ther, on the basis of this delineation to assign limits to ‘coasts’; to determine the proper appli- cation of names from the Wilkes expedition, and Operations Highjump and Windmill; to suggest locations where ground control should be obtained by future expeditions; and to correlate the findings of Wilkes, Mawson and others with those of Oper- ation Highjump. This project was brought to vir- tual completion early in the summer of 1955, in time for the new information to be incorporated in maps and charts, and used in planning, for United States participation in the International Geophysical Year. The delineation and newly fixed nomenclature was also made available to several other countries participating in the Inter- national Geophysical Year. The formulation of a statement of guiding policy was a prerequisite to an objective approach not only to overall problems of nomenclature but also to specific problems of individual names. Board policy, in making decisions on domestic geographic names, has long been not to use the names of living persons, but the application of this policy to Ant- arctica appeared neither desirable nor possible. In the absence of specific positive policy to the contrary, however, this question has been one of the most serious obstacles to the resolution of the problem of Antarctic place names. A statement of policy for Antarctic names was drafted by the then Director of the Board Meredith F. Burrill, and Bertrand and reviewed by the Special Committee in the spring of 1946. It was further refined after discussion with several Antarctic explorers and particularly with Admiral English. The resulting policy statement was approved by the then Advisory Committee on Geographical Names on July 9, 1946, and by the Secretary of the Interior on July 13, 1946. Two minor amend- ments, covering commemoration of universities and university people that have helped train polar explorers, were approved on April 4, 1947. A fur- ther draft with minor changes that did not alter the provisions was approved on May 9, 1947. Since that time the policy has been tested through appli- cation to the choice of names in the many contro- versial cases considered. Special Publication No. 86 was especially con- cerned with the area covered by United States Navy Hydrographic Office publication No. 138, Sailing Directions for Antarctica. Thus the extent of Antarctica was not in question, and no decision on the name Antarctica was included. This pub- lication covers the names in a wider physical area and therefore includes a decision on “Antarctica,” defined as the continent, together with the islands rising from the continental block. Since the terms “the Antarctic’ and the “Ant- arctic region” have both been widely employed in reference to the area physically associated with Antarctica, it did not seem advisable to the Com- mittee to decide upon one to the exclusion of the other. It did seem advisable, however, to state precisely to what the terms referred. The Com- mittee therefore uses the terms “the Antarctic” or “Antarctic region” as denoting the area south of the Antarctic Convergence, the line encircling the globe roughly between 50° and 60°S., where the colder, fresher Antarctic waters sink beneath the warmer, saltier sub-Antarctic waters. This revision includes the names of features in the Ant- arctic region with exception of those in the Ker- guelen Islands, which lie on the line of conver- gence and which are not as closely associated with this history of Antarctic exploration. In Special Publication No. 86, a small group of non-personal Scandinavian and German names were processed into English forms. Experience proved that confusion resulted when comparing charts carrying these revised forms with charts carrying the original foreign names. Correlation of the English and foreign forms in gazetteers was hindered by the fact that their alphabetical list- ings were far removed from one another. The Statement of Policy was therefore amended in 1952, and the section on translation and treat- ment of the generic term in non-personal foreign names has been revised to provide for retention of the specific term in most cases as originally given; retention of the original name if it is well estab- lished in international usage; substitution of an English generic for an included foreign generic, or GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA generic plus definite article that is not readily understood, e.g., “Rund Bay” and “Trilling Peaks” for “Rundvika” and ‘“‘Trillingnutane”’; addition of an English generic to the foreign name so that the Anglicized form will agree basically with the original name, particularly with names containing frequently used specific terms of a numerical or locational nature, e.g., ‘““Tvistein Pillars” and “Vor- posten Peak” for “Tvistein” and ‘Vorposten’; acceptance, in rare instances, of well established translated forms, e.g., “Ice Bay,’ that has become established for the feature originally named “Tsfjorden.” The definitive descriptions of the decisions on Antarctic names include reference to the actual naming and the attendant circumstances when known, to clarify as far as practicable the basis for approval. When the record is not explicit on the facts of naming but the attendant circumstances and association of names indicate a strong pre- sumption as to the identity of the person for whom a name is given, the feature has been described as “probably named for [such person].” The approval of surnames only, instead of full names, involved the question of naming for male relatives and friends on the basis of relationship or friendship and the commemoration of feminine relatives or friends because custom and usage for- bade commemoration of the explorers themselves. It was felt that orderly and appropriate geographic nomenclature for Antarctica would be achieved best by naming for persons who qualify under the policy. The Board on Geographic Names has essen- tially accomplished the bringing of order into the geographic names of Antarctica up to the present. A basis has been established upon which new geo- graphic nomenclature can be added, name by name, as exploration and survey proceed. This does not mean that every problem encountered has been solved. A few named features do not exist in the positions where they were thought to be. Some of these have been identified nevertheless and the error satisfactorily explained; others are still riddles that may never be solved. A great many positions assigned to features are correct in relation to nearby or associated features but un- doubtedly off in latitude and longitude. Most of these may some day be tied in to control points, of which there are relatively few so far. As more are established it will be possible to make much more use of the pictures, sketches, maps and charts that are already in hand. Photography is a valuable aid to identification of features to be named. Photographs may show many things other than the intended subject, and pictures of people or nearby objects have often furnished the necessary clues to the identity of distant features in the background. A few dark objects in a featureless white foreground and middle distance can be of great value, as can be a complete circle panorama from an identifiable spot, or the selection of a feature identifiable on aerial photographs as the site for an astronomical fix. In view of the publication of the extensive Antarctic Bibliography by the Department of the Navy in February 1951, the selected bibliography included in the Special Publication No. 86 has been omitted. While great care has been taken to focus on each name all the pertinent information that could be found, it is highly probable that the present pub- lication will bring forth additional data not now available. In the light of new evidence it may appear desirable to modify, as to description and perhaps as to name, some of the decisions listed herein. It is hoped that users of this present gazetteer who have pertinent information that appears not to have been considered will make it available for the record. Statement of Policy Covering Geographic Names A. Introduction These policies are for the guidance of the Board in deciding cases and should be helpful to ex- plorers and others in proposing names for natural features in Antarctica. The problem of geographic nomenclature in Antarctica is unlike that of any other area of com- parable size. Antarctica has no permanent settle- ments and even in the stations continuously occu- pied for a number of years the personnel is gener- ally rotated. There are undoubtedly many fea- tures that have never been seen by man, and even in the explored portions of the continent many of the features are unnamed. Antarctica has been visited and explored by the nationals of many na- tions, who, by their heroic efforts to broaden man’s knowledge of this land of ice and snow, have fully demonstrated the international nature of the world of science. Names, therefore, will be considered GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA without reference to the nationality of the person honored. Under the policy here set forth, decisions on Antarctic names will be based on priority of appli- cation, appropriateness, and the extent to which usage has become established. The grouping of natural features into three orders of magnitude, with corresponding categories of persons according to the type of contribution which they have made, is intended to provide the greatest possible objec- tivity in determining the appropriateness of a name. It does not, however, exclude the use of other than personal names when appropriate. Non-personal names are discussed under a sep- arate heading. B. Types of Natural Features The kinds of things that have been named in Antarctica are roughly grouped below in three categories. There is considerable latitude for judg- ment in classifving individual features, since it is practically impossible to set size limits for “large glaciers,” “great mountains,” or “large bays,” but this should facilitate rather than hamper the appli- cation of the principles and policies. Features having special significance or promi- nence in geographic discovery, scientific investiga- tion, or the history of Antarctica may be placed in the next higher category than their magnitude alone would warrant. 1. FIRST-ORDER FEATURES . Regions or “lands” . Coasts Seas . Plateaus . Extensive mountain ranges Major submarine deeps, ridges, plateaus, or swells g. Ice shelves h. Large glaciers mHoaeo0p 2. SECOND-ORDER FEATURES. . Peninsulas . Mountain ranges, except the most extensive . Great or prominent mountains . Glaciers, except the largest Prominent capes Islands Gulfs . Large bays Straits or passages Harbors . Extensive submarine reefs, shoals, or shal- lows ATM pe ho ao of 3. THIRD-ORDER FEATURES a. Minor mountains and hills b. Nunataks c. Cliffs d. Rocks e. Minor shore features f. Points g. Capes h. Glaciers i. Bays j. Coves k. Anchorages 1. Parts of these features m. Submarine reefs, shoals, and shallows of small extent n. Camps or camp sites and depots (not nat- ural features and not necessarily perma- nent) except the greater or more prom- inent ones C. Scheme for Application of Personal Names to These Features 1. FIRST-ORDER FEATURES a. The leader or organizer of an expedition to Antarctica b. Persons who have made discoveries of out- standing significance in Antarctica, or lead- ers of field parties, or captains of ships, that have made such discoveries c. Persons who, through their work with Ant- arctic expeditions, have made outstanding contributions to scientific knowledge or to the techniques of Antarctic exploration d. A person who has provided the major finan- cial or material support to an expedition, thereby making such an undertaking pos- sible 2. SECOND-ORDER FEATURES a. Persons whose outstanding heroism, skill, spirit, or labor has made a signal contribu- tion to the success of an expedition b. Persons who have made important contribu- tions in the planning, organization, out- fitting, or operation of expeditions to Ant- arctica c. Ship captains or leaders of field parties of such expeditions d. Persons whose contributions to the knowl- edge of the Arctic either have advanced our knowledge of Antarctica or have expanded the possibilities of Antarctic exploration e. Persons who have made outstanding con- tributions to equipment for polar explo- ration f. The directors or heads of learned societies that have given significant support or made material contributions to Antarctic explo- ration GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA g. Persons who by substantial contributions of funds or supplies have made possible an Antarctic expedition h. Persons who have done outstanding work in the utilization of data, identification of specimens, or interpretation of the results of Antarctic exploration 3. THIRD-ORDER FEATURES a. Persons who have assisted in the work of organizing or conducting Antarctic explo- ration, or who have assisted in analysis of information gathered in the course of such exploration b. Members of expeditions, including ship- based personnel c. Persons whose contributions to knowledge in their respective fields have facilitated the discovery, recognition, identification, or re- cording of Antarctic phenomena d. Teachers or administrators in institutions of higher learning who have contributed to the training of polar explorers e. Persons who have made material contribu- tions in any form to Antarctic expeditions, and who have by their words or actions dem- onstrated an interest in further scientific exploration rather than in seeking commer- cial exploitation of such contributions D. The Application of Non-Personal Names In accord with the tradition of Antarctic explo- ration, it is considered appropriate to apply non- personal names to natural features. Names in the following categories may be appropriately applied to a feature in any order of magnitude with which there is association. Examples of non-personal names are: 1. Names which commemorate events (e.g., Charcot’s “Point Délivrance”’ and Nor- denskjold’s “Hope Bay’’) 2. Names of ships from which discoveries have been made (e.g., “Cape Groénland” and ‘“‘Cape Norvegia’”’) 3. Names of organizations which have sponsored, supported, or given scientific or financial as- sistance to Antarctic expeditions (e.g., ‘““Royal Society Range,” “Admiralty Range,” ‘““Banzare Coast”), or names of institutions of higher learning that have contributed to the training of polar explorers 4. Names which are peculiarly descriptive of the feature name (e.g., ‘Deception Island,” “Mount Tricorn,” or “Three Slice Nunatak”). Descriptive names which are not unique or particularly appropriate and for which there are likely to be duplicates are, however, un- desirable . Any other non-personal name which because of its acknowledged importance occupies a major role in Antarctic exploration or Ant- arctic history E. Criteria of Appropriateness 1. Newly proposed names will be considered for features of the first, second, or third order, as described above, in the light of their appropri- ateness, as evidenced by the following factors arranged in order cf weight: a. Chronological priority of discovery, naming, or other relevant action b. Actual association of the person, ship, or- ganization, event, etc., with the feature c. Association of the person, ship, organiza- tion, event, etc., with Antarctic exploration d. Contribution of the person to the knowledge of Antarctica e. Association of the person, ship, organization, event, etc., with other polar exploration f. Contribution of the person to relevant fields of knowledge g. Extent to which financial or material con- tributions have contributed to the success of an expedition or to the collection of valu- able scientific data h. Previous recognition through a geographic name in Antarctica. To prevent confusion, it is considered advisable, in future naming in Antarctica, to apply the name of one person or the names of persons having the same surname, to no more than one feature of a kind i. The possibility of ambiguity or confusion with names already in use (1) The duplication of names already in current usage is undesirable and, ex- cept in special cases, is to be avoided (2) Since descriptive names are often am- biguous and easily duplicated, they should be avoided, unless a descriptive name is peculiarly appropriate (3) The duplication in Antarctica of names well Known in other parts of the world is undesirable even though qualified by adjectives such as “new,” “south,” and “little.” 2. Names already in use will be considered in the light of: a. Appropriateness, as outlined above b. Wideness of acceptance, as evidenced by use in scientific and popular map and other literature. Usage which is considered suf- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ficiently fixed and/or unanimous may be accepted as valid grounds for approval of a name which would not otherwise qualify. F. Fields of Knowledge Pertinent to Antarctica The following is a list of fields of knowledge in which outstanding contributions may be consid- ered justification for commemoration in an Ant- arctic place name. It is to be considered neither exclusive nor exhaustive, and no order of priority is intended. 1. Navigation and astronomy 2. Oceanography and hydrography 3. Surveying, photogrammetry, and cartog- raphy 4. Meteorology and climatology 5. Geodesy and geophysics 6. Glaciology and ice physics 7. Radio, radar, and allied fields 8. Geology, voleanology, and seismology 9. Geography 10. Botany and its subdivisions 11. Zoology and its subdivisions G. Recommended Language and Form In keeping with long-established policies based upon trends in the normal evolution of geographic names, consideration will be given to brevity, sim- plicity, and unambiguity in selecting the form of names derived by these procedures: 1. The application of full names and/or titles of persons will be considered appropriate only when required to avoid ambiguity, duplica- tion, or other confusion, or in the case of well known persons who were almost invariably referred to by their full names. Titles will be translated where their use is required. 2. The names of organizations, ships, and other non-personal names, when unduly long and cumbersome, will ordinarily be used in some shortened, though intelligible, form. 3. English generics will be used. Complete translation of names will generally be avoided, but well established translated forms may be accepted. 4. An English generic may be added, or may be substituted for an included generic term, in the case of non-personal, non-English, single- word names that include a generic or a defi- nite article, or both. H. Inappropriate Names Names in the following categories will not be considered, unless otherwise appropriate according to the principles stated herein, or unless such names are widely and firmly established as of the date of approval of these principles. 1. Names suggested because of relationship or friendship 2. Names of contributors of funds, equipment, and supplies, who by the nature and tone of their advertising have endeavored to capital- ize or to gain some commercial advantage as a result of their donations. This would not include advantages resulting from testing of donated equipment under Antarctic condi- tions. In cases of doubt, the decision shall be in favor of the individual whose name has been proposed. 3. The names of products, sled dogs, or pets will ordinarily not be considered as appropriate for application to natural features in Ant- arctica. Application of Policy in Decisions In applying the principles outlined in the pre- ceding pages, the Board on Geographic Names has attempted to disturb previous naming as little as possible, while giving recognition to the most ap- propriate associations of names and features. In general, old established names have been retained. Even when this resulted in two closely similar names for features in the same category, as two mountains or two bays, the names have been kept if particularly appropriate or without alternatives. In general, too, the Board has done little naming on its own part. It has shifted some names to features with which they are more logically asso- ciated, and in some instances after deciding be- tween two names for the same feature, the Board has applied the rejected name to another feature for which it is appropriate. For example, after rejecting Wilkes’ name “Cape Hudson” in favor of Cape Freshfield, a mountain range in the Thurston Peninsula area approached by Hudson was named for him. Some new names were supplied for prominent unnamed features to which reference has been necessary for purposes of this study, such as Bingham Glacier and Trail Bay. Other new names have been applied to commemorate mem- bers of expeditions or those who played a promi- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA nent part in furthering Antarctic expeditions or Antarctic exploration in general, but whose names had by some chance not been selected previously for application to Antarctic features. These in- stances of naming by the Board, however, are few in relation to the number of names considered. In a number of cases it has not been possible, with data collected from all available sources, to find or to identify features previously discovered and named by Antarctic explorers, due to factors referred to above. In most cases these are either minor features or are not required for general reference at this time. Where the data at hand have been insufficient for locating on the latest maps various features discovered by explorers who worked earlier in Ant- arctic history, and where explorers have been un- able to find features reported by previous explorers, no recommendations have been made to assign or to fix the specific or generic parts of names, the positions, or the types of features. A case in point is Bob Island in the Palmer Archipelago. This island, which apparently lies off the southeast coast of Wiencke Island in De Gerlache Strait, cannot be located with certainty on the rather definitive maps now available. This name should be assigned as originally intended if that becomes possible. Of two examples cited in Special Publication No. 85, Mount Saint Michael has subsequently been identified; Underwood Rock, whose identification is less certain, may be Broka Island. If it becomes apparent that the nomenclature cannot be applied as originally intended, some of the names might be assigned to local features which will serve as distinctive landmarks to future explorers and travelers approaching the area either by sea or from the air. Names in this category have therefore been placed on file for considera- tion after future definitive exploration. Over a period of hundreds of years the terms “land” and “coast” have been applied quite un- systematically in Antarctica. The definitions de- veloped by the Committee are set forth at this point. As applied in the decisions on Antarctic names, the term “land” refers to a major physical (geo- graphical) subdivision of the continent. It implies a concept of area, as opposed to linear extent, gained either through observation over a great extent or through recognition of the areal unity of the named area. Although full or precise de- limitation of these entities is of course not pos- sible from the information now available, it seems logical to assume that regions delimited on the basis of physical or areal unity will be used more and more as terms of reference in Antarctica. It should be noted that a “land” may include “coasts” that may be differentiated and separately named on its seaward margin, and it may include fairly extensive features such as peninsulas or plateaus. As applied in the decisions on Antarctic names, the term “coast” refers to a zone or strip on the seaward margin of the continent, possessing a recognized degree of unity resulting either from physiographic homogeneity, or from marked breaks in the configuration of the coast line, or from the history of its exploration. A “coast” is usually of indeterminate depth. It includes the small islands immediately off shore and marine features of the transition zone. Whenever a “coast” presents recognized physical unity, it has been delimited by physical features. In the de- limitation of each coast due account has been taken of the history of its exploration, and when physical unity is lacking or not known, “coasts” have been delimited on the basis of exploration history alone, subject to later modification when more physiographic data are available. The name Mac-Robertson Coast illustrates the procedures followed. It is so designated, instead of as Mac-Robertson Land, because it was seen mostly from the sea and from short flights over the coast line without deep penetration inland. The delimiting breaks in the shore line at Cape Darnley and William Scoresby Bay correspond with its exploration by Mawson, who named it. Simi- larly Lars Christensen Coast has been delimited to include the section discovered by the Nor- wegians, a somewhat more restricted application than has been suggested before but one that coincides with significant breaks in the coast line and does justice to the facts of exploration. Although it is customary to express distances in statute miles on land maps and in nautical miles on charts used by mariners, nautical miles are used in the texts of all decisions in this volume for several reasons. It is understood that in air navigation it is the practice to express distances and speeds in nautical miles, whether flying over either land or sea, and navigation around Antarctica will probably be principally by air or water for some time to come. The fact that a nautical mile is, to all intents and pur- poses, equal to one minute of latitude regardless of position on the earth, makes the scaling of distances from maps or the recording of distances in surface exploration on the land easier in terms of nautical miles. Furthermore, many of the geo- graphical positions on most of the various recon- naissance maps and miscellaneous charts used up to this time in the nomenclature work will be considerably revised as to positions of features as exploration proceeds. Since a nautical mile GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA is longer than a statute mile by only 15 percent, the difference is not of great consequence at this stage, particularly since practically no distances referred to in the texts of the decisions exceed 150 miles and in those cases are ordinarily only approximations. Expeditious treatment of new names is in large part dependent upon the adequacy of the data relevant to the features under consideration. Ex- perience has shown that much of the labor in the approval of a new name can be eliminated if the proposal is accompanied by full informa- tion on the name, the reasons for its choice, and a definitive description of the feature to be named. As a step in this direction a form has been prepared for proposal of new Antarctic names. Copies may be obtained from the Board on Geo- graphic Names. The fact that a few names now entrenched in usage and some others bestowed by nationals of another country cannot well be brought into con- formity with the general framework of the prin- ciples set forth herein need not be disturbing. The names given by Americans since enunciation of the policy in 1947 have been in conformity with its letter and spirit. There has been general ac- ceptance abroad of the principles underlying the policy, and any points of difference are not in- soluble ones. The British Antarctic Place-names Committee, which has cooperated closely with this Commit- tee since 1948, has been of inestimable aid. The two Committees, through free exchange of infor- mation and views, have arrived at nearly com- plete agreement on both policy and names. Simi- lar cooperation with committees and individuals in other countries has helped greatly in establish- ing the facts of naming and in reducing the num- ber of different names for the same features. The following list of more than 3,000 standard- ized Antarctic names is the bulk of those known to have been applied or proposed cn which there is adequate information. The list is the result of more than a decade of effort toward an orderly Antarctic geographic nomenclature attained by objective application of sound principles and re- flecting the history of Antarctic exploration. The list will require maintenance, improvement, and expansion. Further information is needed on the nature and the precise location of many fea- tures already named. New expeditions or new research can be expected to result in new names to be incorporated through the developed pro- cedures for the maintenance of orderly nomen- clature on Antarctica. Expeditions The following chronological listing of Antarctic exploration has been revised and brought up to date for this publication. First required as a ready reference for salient features of Antarctic history for use in the names study, the data proved so generally useful that much scattered informa- tion was filled in and the list published in the first edition of this publication so that dates, com- manders, ships, sponsors, and summaries of op- erations could be readily found for each expedition. Subsequently the second edition of the British Admiralty’s Antarctic Pilot in 1948 carried a list that was considerably longer, mainly because a larger area involving sub-Antarctic islands was included. The Committee’s acceptance, for this publication, of a physical concept of the Antarctic, namely the area within the Antarctic Convergence, excepting Kerguelen Islands, has necessitated the expansion of this revised list to include voyages earlier than the second voyage of Capt. James Cook with which the first list began. 424589 O -57 -2 It is difficult, because of the scanty and con- fusing evidence of several almost legendary voy- ages, to state positively which expedition marked the beginning of Antarctic exploration. It may be doubted whether Amerigo Vespucci was any- where near South Georgia in 1502. The South Shetland Islands, however, may have been sighted by Laurens Claess, boatswain of the Dutch ship Blijde Bootschap (commanded by Dirck Gherritz before its capture), and his Spanish captors when they were driven as far as 64°S. in 1603, and there is substantial evidence that the English merchant Antonio de la Roché discovered South Georgia and sought shelter there while running before a storm in 1675. Undoubtedly several merchant ships in the days of sail sighted, perhaps for the first time, portions of Antarctic islands while being driven from their courses by storms. Such was the Spanish merchantman Leon which sighted and circumnavigated South Georgia in 1756. Rarely, however, have permanent geographic names resulted from such occurrences. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Events since 1941 have emphasized the advis- ability of listing only those operations which have, either by design or accident, resulted in geographical or scientific discovery, or the naming of features in Antarctica. On the other hand, although they resulted in no geographical discov- eries there is ample justification for the inclusion of such historically important operations as Capt. C. A. Larsen’s establishment of the first whaling station on South Georgia in 1904-5 and the maiden voyage of the Admiralen, the first floating factory, in 1903-6. Of the many voyages by sealers during the first half of the nineteenth century, only those have been included for which sufficient information was available to complete the listing. More may be gleaned from the records of that period, as old newspapers, diaries, and logbooks are occasionally brought to light. This material, however, is not expected to add much to Antarctic nomenclature, for the areas that were probably visited by the sealers are now fairly well charted and the geo- graphical names are well fixed by usage. Tt is believed that most of the whalers credited with actual discovery of new land have been listed, but it is beyond the scope of this work fo list all the modern whaling cruises in the Antarctic. Widespread publicity accompanied the Antarctic visit of the Soviet floating factory Slava which reported sighting Princess Martha Coast on March 20, 1948, but such landfalls are commonplace among.whalers. The number of ships annually engaged since 1905 has risen until in the 1938-39 season 34 fioating factories and 281 whale-catchers operated in Antarctic waters. Antarctic whaling was virtually suspended and most of the factory ships were lost during World War Ii. Only nine factories were active during the 1943-46 season, but their number increased until 19 were in use during the 1950-51 season. Whaling has been most actively carried on in three areas, the Scotia Sea and surrounding waters, the southern Indian Ocean westward of Enderby Land, and the waters off the Queen Mary Coast. Errors detected in existing charts are generally reported by the whalers, but the ships usually operate at sea and only incidentally sight land. Whaling captains employed by Lars Christensen have been instructed to investigate and chart new land when in the course of their work an opportunity presents itself. From 1925 until World War II the Discovery Committee of the British Colonial Office carried on, under the title “Discovery Investigations,” a comprehensive program of oceanographic and bio- logic research in Antarctic waters focusing on the 10 study of whales and their habitat. In the course of these operations portions of the coast of Ant- arctica and several island groups were charted. The work of the Discovery II and its predecessor, the Discovery, has been outlined for each year of operation. The William Scoresby was principally engaged in the marking of whales, with incidental cooperation in the oceanographic work of the Dis- covery II; therefore, her activities have been listed only when they have included exploration or sur- veying. In 1949 the two ships, along with the staff and equipment of the Discovery Committee, were taken over by the newly created National Institute of Oceanography, in whose research pro- gram Antarctic work is only a part. Because they were not exploring expeditions and added no geographical names to the Antarctic recent voyages such as the 1941 cruises of the German commerce raiders “33” and “45,” which first carried warfare into the far south, and the counter voyages of H.M.S. Queen of Bermuda and H.M.A.S. Australia in 1941 and H.M.S. Carnarvon Castile in 1943 are not included. Argentina car- ried on extensive naval maneuvers in Antarctic waters in the summer of 1947-48, but only those vessels which were in some degree concerned with establishing or supplying Antarctic base camps are listed. As a result of the contested territorial claims in the Palmer Peninsula sector Great Britain, Argen- tina, and Chile have for the past several years maintained continuously-occupied bases in this area. While these bases have been ostensibly set up as meteorological stations and as focal points for geographical surveys, their maintenance has important political implications. Since 1904 Argentina has maintained a weather station on Laurie Island in the South Orkney Islands and since 1906, when H.M.S. Sappho investigated con- fiicting whaling rights, Great Britain has admin- istered the whaling industry on South Georgia. These operations as well as the more recent accel- erated activity have resulted in numerous admin- istrative cruises for the relief of personnel and/or inspection. Unless such operations have been defi- nitely associated with geographical discovery or scientific investigation they are not included in the list. Because of incomplete information on some of the latest activity and because no names later than 1954 have been included in the names section, except for a minute number of name corrections based upon preliminary reports of exploration, the list of expeditions is terminated with the 1954-55 season. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA List of Expeditions 1675. British expedition. LeapER: Antonio de la Roché. Sures: Unknown. Summary: Two commercial vessels returning from Peru via Cape Horn in April were blown eastward from their course and sighted snow-covered land, now believed to be South Georgia, in 55°S. The ships were forced by a storm to anchor there two weeks. 1738-39. French expedition. Leaver: J. B. C. Bouvet de Lozier. and Marie. Summary: Discovered Bouvetgya on January 1, 1739. Ships stayed near the island 12 days but ice and fog prevented a landing. Then cruised east along edge of pack to 38°E. before turning north on January 25. Sues: Aigle 1756. Spanish expedition. LEADER: Unknown. Sure: Leon. SumMMary: Sighted and circumnavigated South Georgia. Knowledge of expedition based upon narrative by passenger Ducloz Guyot. 1772-75. British expedition. LEADER: Capt. James Cook. Surps: Resolution and Adventure. Summary: Sponsored by the British Admiralty. A circumnavigation was made south of 50°S., ex- cept for the area south of New Zealand. Pene- trated south of Antarctic Circle three times. Roughly charted the north coast of South Georgia, making the first known landing there near Posses- sion Bay. Discovered that part of the South Sand- wich Islands southward of the Traverse Islands and roughly charted them. Cook’s voyage dis- proved existence of a ‘“Terra Australis” in latitudes north of 60°S. and thus profoundly modified con- cepts on which subsequent exploration was based. Farthest south reported, 71°10’S., 106°54’W., Janu- ary 30, 1774. 1800. United States sealing expeditions. LEADERS: Various. SuHtps: Various. Summary: Documentary evidence of sealing oper- ations in south Pacific and Atlantic Oceans exists, but desire for secrecy resulted in few contemporary announcements. Known records too scanty to re- construct actual routes. 1808. British whaling expedition. LEADERS: Captains James Lindsay and Thomas Hopper. Suips: Snow Swan and Otter. 11 Summary: Lindsay in the Enderby whaler Snow Swan sighted Bouvetgya October 6; Hopper in Otter sighted the island October 10. Attempts to land were unsuccessful. 1819. British expedition. Leaver: Capt. William Smith. Sure: Williams. SuMMaARY: Discovered South Shetland Islands on commercial voyage from Buenos Aires to Valpa- raiso, February 1819. Confirmed discovery in Oc- tober by second voyage. Landed on King George Island on October 16. 1819-20. Argentine sealing expedition. LeaDER: Capt. Carlos Timblon. Sai: San Juan Nepomuceno. SuMMarRyY: First ship known to have taken fur seals in the South Shetland Islands. 1819-20. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Unknown. Sure: Espirito Santo. SuMMaARY: Set out from Buenos Aires. Met Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer in Falkland Islands and later in South Shetland Islands. 1819-20. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. James P. Sheffield. Sur: Hersilia. SumMmMmarRyY: Sponsored by Edmund Fanning, Wil- liam A. Fanning and others. Hunted seals in South Shetland Islands. Met British in the Espirito Santo. 1819-20. ; British expedition. LEADER: Edward Bransfield, Master, RN. Sure: Williams. SuMMaARY: Roughly charted South Shetland Is- lands. Sailed through Bransfield Strait, reported sighting land to the south. 1819-21. Russian expedition. LEADER: Capt. Thaddeus Bellingshausen. Sues: Vostok and Mirnyy. SumMmMmaryY: Sponsored by Alexander I and Russian Navy. Made a circumnavigation, mostly south of 60°S., but no claims were made to have actually sighted the mainland. Discovered Traverse Is- lands, Peter I Island, and Alexander I Island. Bellingshausen made fairly accurate charts of the South Shetland and South Sandwich Islands, and was first to chart the south coast of South Georgia. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1820-21. United States sealing expedition. LEeaDER: Capt. Benjamin Pendleton. Suips: Fred- erick, Hersilia, Express, Free Gift and Hero. Summary: Financed by Edmund Fanning, Wil- liam A. Fanning and others. The vessels explored South Shetland Islands for sealing grounds: Capt. Nathanial B. Palmer in the Hero sailed south from Deception Island, drawing close to the Antarctic mainland on November 17,1820. In January 1821, Palmer further explored the west coast of Palmer Peninsula. [Eduard A. Stackpole’s The Voyage of the Huron and the Huntress, published shortly be- fore this volume went to press suggests a different interpretation of the Hero’s log for November IL, but time has not allowed reexamination of the original evidence. ] 1820-21. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Richard Sherratt. Trowbridge. Summary: Lady Trowbridge wrecked on December 25, 1820 off Cape Melville, King George Island. Sherratt sketched a rough chart of central part of South Shetland Islands while awaiting relief of his crew at end of season. Suip: Lady 1820-21. United States sealing expedition. LeapEers: Captains John Davis and Christopher Burdick. Surips: Huron, Huntress and Cecilia. Summary: The three vessels arrived in company at the South Shetland Islands on December 1, 1820. On December 8 they entered Yankee Harbor at Greenwich Island where the Huron and Huntress remained. Short cruises were made in the Cecilia along the south side of Livingston Island. Sailing northeastward on December 28, Davis circumnavi- gated the South Shetland Islands, transporting the crew of a wrecked British vessel, perhaps the Lady Trowbridge, from Cape Melville to Rugged Island. On January 30, 1821, Captain Davis in the Cecilia began a long cruise to the west and south. Coast- ing Livingston Island, he passed through Morton Strait and landed on the south coast of Smith Is- land on February 1. On February 2 he landed on Low Island, departing on February 6 and sailing past Hoseason Island toward high lands to the south. At 10 a. m. on February 7, 1821, he put men ashore at Hughes Bay, the first known in- stance of a landing on the Antarctic continent. Davis reported in his log, “I think this Southern Land to be a Continent.” That afternoon, the weather deteriorating, he departed for Yankee Har- bor, arriving after a rough passage on February 10. On a second cruise, this time by Captain Burdick in the Cecilia, between February 12 and 19, a second landing was made on Low Island and the mainland was again sighted. 12 1820-21. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Captain Clark. Suip: Lord Melville. Summary: Provided with a hut and supplies, the chief officer and ten men engaged in sealing along northeast side of King George Island, making what may prove the first wintering in the Antarctic. 1820-21. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Charles H. Barnard. Suips: Char- ity, Aurora, Jane Maria and Henry. Summary: Sponsored by James Byers of New York. Captains Barnard, Macy, Johnson and Bruno carried on sealing operations in the South Shetlands from Rugged Island and later from Yankee Harbor. Between January 5 and 27, 1821, Capt. Robert Johnson, in the Jane Maria, cruised southwestward to a reported position of 66°S., 70°W. where the land continued to the south, “but appeared to be nothing but solid islands of ice and snow”—probably the Biscoe Islands. 1820-21. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. James Weddell. Suips: Jane and Eliza. Summary: Carried on sealing operations in the South Shetlands. 1820-21. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Thomas Ray. Suips: Harmony and William and Nancy. Summary: Captains Ray and Folger, from Nan- tucket, carried on sealing in the South Shetland Islands. Their headquarters on Nelson Island was named Harmony Cove. 1820-21. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Jonathan Winship. Surps: O’Cain and Stranger. Summary: Captains Winship and Stranger of Boston conducted sealing operations in the South Shetland Islands with headquarters at Potter Cove. Nelson Island was called O’Cain Island by the early American sealers. 1820-21. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Alexander Clark. Suips: Clothier, Emiline, and Catherine. Summary: Captain Clark with Captains Jeremiah Holmes and Joseph Henfield, of Stonington, carried on sealing operations in the South Shetland Is- lands from headquarters at Clothier Harbor where the Clothier went aground and was wrecked on December 9, 1820. 1820-21. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. William B. Orne. Suips: General Knox, Nancy and Governor Brooks. Summary: Captain Orne with Captains Upton and Withem of Salem, Massachusetts, carried on seal- ing operations in the South Shetland Islands. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1820-21. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. William Smith. Snip: Williams. SumMmary: Carried on sealing operations in the South Shetlands. 1820-21. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Robert Fildes. Sure: Unknown. Summary: Carried on sealing operations in the South Shetlands. 1820-21. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Captain McFarlane. Surip: Dragon. SummMmarRY: Carried on sealing operations in the South Shetland Islands, principally on the north side of Livingston Island. 1820-22. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. George Powell. Snip: Dove. SumMMary: Charted north side of South Shetland Islands. Made joint sealing cruise with Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, resulting in discovery and charting of South Orkney Islands, December 1821. The names on Powell’s map of the South Shetland and South Orkney Islands, because of their early publication in 1822 and wide distribution, have been more widely accepted than those on later maps of contemporary explorers. 1821-22. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Benjamin Pendleton. Suips: Frederick, Alabama Packet, Express, Free Gift, James Monroe and Hero. Summary: Sponsored by Edmund Fanning, Wil- liam A. Fanning and Benjamin Pendleton. Car- ried on sealing operations in the South Shetland Islands from Deception Island. Because of scar- city of seals, beaches, especially on King George, Clarence and Elephant Islands were extensively explored by Capt. Benjamin Cutler, Free Gift, Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, James Monroe, and Capt. Harris Pendleton, Hero. Capt. Harris Pen- dleton in the Hero appears to have skirted the Palmer Peninsula on a southwesterly cruise from Deception Island in November 1821, and then sailed northwestward to Smith Island. Captain Palmer in the James Monroe met Captain Powell in the South Shetlands, and with him made a joint cruise eastward in December 1821 on which the South Orkney Islands were discovered and mapped. Evidence suggests that Palmer also made a cruise along the coast of the Palmer Peninsula. 1821-22. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. John Davis. Suips: Huron and Cecilia. Summary: Carried on sealing in the South Shet- land Islands. 13 1821-22. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. James Weddell. Surp: Jane. Summary: Visited South Orkney and South Shet- land Islands. 1821-22. United States sealing expedition. LEADERS: Captains Benjamin Morrell and Robert Johnson. Suips: Wasp and Jane Maria. Summary: Sponsored by James Byers of New York. Sailed separately for sealing in the South Shetland Islands. Returned in company. 1822-23. United States sealing expedition. LeaDER: Capt. Benjamin Morrell. Suip: Wasp. Summary: Sailed from New York to Bouvetgya to Kerguelen Islands to 64°52’S., 118°27’W. Sailed west to South Sandwich Islands, from whence Weddell Sea was penetrated to reported 70°14’S., 40°03’ W. Retired northward. 1822-24. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. James Weddell. Suips: Jane and Beaufoy. SuMMARY: Matthew Brisbane in the Beaufoy roughly charted the south coast of South Orkney Islands. Weddell penetrated Weddell Sea to re- ported 74°15’S., 34°17’W. South Georgia visited, thence north to Falkland Islands for wintering. Visited and charted South Shetland Islands before returning home via Tierra del Fuego. Weddell’s narrative, including a map of the South Shetlands, was published in 1825. 1824-25. British sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Edward Hughes. Suip: Sprightly. SumMMarRY: Sealing operations in South Shetland Islands. Hughes Bay along west coast of Palmer Peninsula was roughly charted by James Hoseason, first mate. 1828-31. British expedition. LeaDER: Capt. Henry Foster, RN. Sure: Chanti- cleer. SumMmary: Government sponsored scientific expe- dition. Magnetic and pendulum observations in South Shetland Islands, especially at Deception Island. Approached the north end of Palmer Archipelago, producing rough chart of this area. 1829-31. United States expedition. LEADER: Capt. Benjamin Pendleton. aph, Annawan, and Penguin. SUMMARY: Sponsored by Edmund Fanning, Ben- jamin Pendleton and public subscription. Com- bined sealing operations and scientific observa- tions. The Annawan, Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, and the Penguin, Capt. Alexander S. Palmer, car- ried on sealing at Elephant Island and westward in the South Shetland Islands during January and SHIPS: Ser- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA February 1830. The two vessels sailed westward on February 22, holding a course between 62°S. and 58°S. as far as 103°W., in an unsuccessful search of islands reported by Captains Swain, Gardiner and Macy. James Hights, geologist from Albany and the first American scientist to visit the Antarctic, was aboard the Annawan. He made remarkably accurate observations on the South Shetland Islands, published in 1833, and from evidence on the western cruise, surmised the existence of an extensive land area to the south. Meanwhile, Cap- tain Pendleton in the Seraph made an independent voyage to the west from the South Shetland Islands, reaching as far as 101°W. south of 60°S. 1829-31. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. James Brown. Sup: Pacific. Summary: Sealing operations carried on at South Georgia from December 1829 to March 1830. Vis- ited north part of South Sandwich Islands in De- cember 1830, making a landing on Zavodovski Island. 1830-32. British expedition. LEADER: Capt. John Biscoe. Lively. Summary: Made a circumnavigation, beginning in Falkland Islands. Land was discovered at Cape Ann, Enderby Land. Wintered in Hobart, Tas- mania. Returned south and proceeded eastward without sighting land until the peaks of Adelaide Island were viewed from a distance. Landed in Palmer Archipelago, probably at Anvers Island. Sailed north to Falkland Islands. SHIPS: Tula and 1831. Australian sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Samuel Harvey. SHIP: Venus. Summary: Sent out from Hobart, January 9, 1831, by Capt. J. Kelly to carry on sealing and whaling operations in the vicinity of Macquarie Island. Ship penetrated to 70°S., apparently in entrance to Ross Sea. Returned to Sydney December 31, 1831. 1833-34. British expedition. LraDER: Lt. Henry Rea, RN. Suips: Hopeful and Rose. Summary: Sent out by Enderby Brothers to con- tinue Biscoe’s explorations. A proposed westward circumnavigation was abandoned when the Hope- ful was crushed west of South Shetland Islands. 1833-34. British expedition. LEADER: Capt. Peter Kemp. Sure: Magnet. Summary: Sent out by Enderby Brothers, Kemp sailed south from Kerguelen Islands sighting land in vicinity of Kemp Coast. 14 1837-40. French expedition. LEADER: Capt. Dumont D’Urville. labe and Zélée. Summary: Sponsored by Ministry of Marine. During the 1837-38 season D’Urville sailed from Cape Horn across outermost part of Weddell Sea, thence north to South Orkney Islands before sail- ing southwest to South Shetland Islands and north tip of Palmer Peninsula. Moved to Pacific Ocean, March 1838. Returned from Oceania to the Ant- arctic in January 1840, exploring south of 60°S. between 125°E. and 145°E. Discovered Adélie Coast and made a landing on a small islet group close off coast. Discovered Clarie Coast before re- tiring north. Suips: Astro- 1839. British expedition. LEADER: Capt. John Balleny. Suips: Eliza Scott and Sabrina. Summary: Sent out by Enderby Brothers, Balleny sailed from New Zealand to Antarctic Circle at 178°E. Moved southwest to discover Balleny Islands, thence west toward Sabrina Coast, where “appearance of land” was noted. Retired north at 93°E. 1838-42. United States Exploring Expedition. LEADER: Lt. Charles Wilkes, USN. Surps: Vin- cennes, Peacock, Porpoise, Sea Gull, Flying Fish and Relief. Summary: Sponsored by United States Navy with congressional appropriation.- Squadron split in Tierra del Fuego, February 1839, one group going south and east via South Shetland Islands to Louis Philippe Peninsula; the other sailing southwest to a point off Thurston Peninsula, seeing no land. Work in Pacific Ocean followed. Ships returned to the Antarctic, December 1839, and sailed west along coast of Wilkes Land, charting a series of landfalls for some 1,500 miles between about 160°E. and 98°E. In this voyage Wilkes established the existence of an Antarctic land mass of continental proportions. Ships retired north February 21, 1840. 1839-43. British expedition. LEADER: Capt. James Clark Ross, RN. SHIPS: Erebus and Terror. Summ™Mary: Sponsored by British Admiralty, with cooperation of British Association and Royal So- ciety. Sailed south from Hobart to Cape Adare, discovering Ross Sea and Victoria Land, thence east along Ross Ice Shelf. Returned to Cape Adare and continued west, skirting coast to about 140°E. Wintered in Australian waters, returning to Ross Sea in December 1841. Sailed north, then east to Falkland Islands, arriving in April 1842. Season of 1842-43 spent exploring Erebus and GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Terror Gulf and attempting penetration of Wed- dell Sea. 1841-42. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. William H. Smyley. Sure: Ohio. SummMary: Sealing in South Shetland Islands and along west coast of Palmer Peninsula. Some of Smyley’s explorations in Palmer Archipelago may antedate investigation of the islands by Dallmann. A reading of —5° F. was reported by Smyley from the minimum thermometer, left at Deception Island by Captain Foster in 1829, which he found there. This was the lowest temperature reported for Antarctica until 1898. 1845. British expedition. LEADER: Lt. T. E.L. Moore,RN. Suip: Pagoda. SumMMary: Sponsored by British Admiralty. Sailed from Cape Town to Albany, Australia, for purpose of magnetic observations in south Indian Ocean. Observations made from about 4°E. to about 98°E., south of 60°S. No claim of land sighted. 1853-54. United States expedition. LEADER: Capt. John J. Heard. Surp: Oriental. SumMMary: Discovered Heard Island on November 25, 1853, while on voyage from Boston to Mel- bourne. 1853-54. British expedition. LEADER: Captain McDonald. Suip: Samarang. SumMMarRY: Discovered McDonald Islands January 3, 1854. 1855-56. United States sealing expedition. LEADERS: Captains Erasmus Darwin Rogers and Franklin F. Smith. Suips: Corinthian and Laurens, with tenders Atlas, Exile, Franklin and Mechanic. Summary: Sent out by Perkins and Smith, whalers of New London, Conn.; Rogers in the Corinthian made the first landing on Heard Island in March 1855. His report of numerous elephant seals to his employers caused Smith in the Laurens to join him at Heard Island. Together they engaged in extensive sealing operations, and exploration and mapping of the island. 1857. United States sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Henry Rogers. SHIP: Zoe. Summary: Shore party of 25 men engaged in ele- phant sealing operations; the first party to winter on Heard Island. 1873-74. LEADER: land. German expedition. Capt. Eduard Dallmann. SHIP: Gron- 15 Summary: Sponsored by Albert Rosenthal and the German Society for Polar Navigation. Dallmann combined sealing and exploration in the South Shetland Islands and along the west coast of Palmer Peninsula, especially in the Palmer Archi- pelago. Returned north via South Orkney Islands. 1874. British expedition. LEADERS: Capt. George S. Nares, RN, and Prof. C. Wyville Thomson. Surp: Challenger. Summary: Sponsored by the British Admiralty in cooperation with the Royal Society as part of a world-wide cruise, 1872-76, for oceanographic ob- servation. Antarctic waters were penetrated in February 1874 when Heard and McDonald Islands were visited. They published what long remained the standard chart of Heard Island. From Heard Island they sailed southward to 66°40’S., 78°22’E. on the outer margin of Prydz Bay. The ship re- mained south of 60°S., skirting the pack eastward to about 99°E., off Queen Mary Coast, then re- treated northward. The mainland was _ not sighted. 1874. German expedition. LEADER: Captain von Reibnitz. Suiv: Arkona. SumMMaryY: Investigated Kerguelen and Heard Islands as possible site for German base for the observation of the Transit of Venus. 1882-83. German expedition. LEADER: Dr. K. Schrader. Marie. SumMMaRY: This expedition, the German group of the International Polar Year Investigations, estab- lished a base and wintered at Moltke Harbor, South Georgia. Took meteorological, magnetic, and astronomical observations and charted Royal Bay area. SuHips: Moltke and 1892-93. Dundee (Scottish) whaling expedition. LEADERS: Captains Alexander Fairweather, Robert Davidson, Thomas Robertson and James Davidson. Suips: Balaena, Diana, Active and Polar Star. SumMMarRY: A whaling expedition sent out by R. Kinnes of Dundee on which the ship’s doctors, Wil- liam S. Bruce and C. W. Donald acted as natural- ists. Ships sailed from Falkland Islands to north- west part of Weddell Sea. Only the Active did actual exploring, discovering the channel between Dundee and Joinville Islands and making investi- gations in Erebus and Terror Gulf. Bruce on the Balaena succeeded in making incidental but valu- able observations. 1892-93. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen. SHIP: Jason. Summary: Sent out by Oceana Co. of Hamburg and Christen Christensen of Sandefjord. Larsen combined whaling, sealing and exploring in Erebus GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA and Terror Gulf, returning with fossils from Sey- mour Island. 1893-94. Norwegian sealing expedition. LEADERS: Captains C. A. Larsen, C. J. Evensen, and M. Pedersen. Surps: Jason, Hertha and Castor. Summary: Sent out by Oceana Co. and Christen Christensen. Sealing and exploring was carried on by Larsen in the Jason in the James Ross Island group and along the edge of Larsen Ice Shelf. Foyn Coast, Oscar II Coast, and Seal Nunataks were discovered by Larsen; Cumberland Bay, South Georgia, was visited. The Castor and Hertha worked in the South Shetland Islands and along west coast of Palmer Peninsula. Evensen in the Hertha sailed south to within sight of Alexander I Island. 1894-95. Norwegian expedition. LreaDErS: Capt. Leonard Kristensen and H. J. Bull. SuHip: Antarctic. Summary: Sent out by Svend Foyn, the group car- ried on sealing at Macquarie Island. Later sailed from New Zealand to Balleny Islands. Sighted Cape Adare January 16, 1895, after two months in pack. Landed on Possession Islands. Reached 74°S. off Coulman Island; returned to make a landing at Cape Adare. 1897-99. Belgian Antarctic Expedition. LeapDER: Lt. Adrien de Gerlache. Surp: Belgica. SuMMary: Sponsored by government grants and private contributions. Broad program of scien- tific observations from Tierra del Fuego through Palmer Archipelago via South Shetland Islands. Discovered and charted De Gerlache Strait, thence moved southwest to within sight of Alexander I Island. Belgica penetrated to 71°30’S. before being beset in pack. Ship drifted with pack in Bellings- hausen Sea for year before released; first scientific expedition to winter in Antarctic realm. 1898. German expedition LreapbErR: Prof. Karl Chun. Sup: Valdivia. SumMmary: Sponsored by German government. Antarctic waters penetrated in November and De- cember incidental to more extensive oceanographic observations. Proceeded from Cape Town to Bou- vetgya, thence to 64°15’S., 64°20’E., about 100 miles north of Enderby Land. Retreated to Kerguelen Islands. 1898-1900. British Antarctic Expedition. LrabER: C. K. Borchgrevink. Sure: Southern Cross. Summary: Sponsored by Sir George Newnes. Dif- ficult passage through pack from Hobart to Cape Adare where, in February 1899, a winter camp was set up for scientific staff. Ship returned in January 1900 and sailed south along Victoria Land 16 with landings at Coulman Island, Wood Bay, Franklin Island, and Cape Crozier. Ross Ice Shelf skirted from Ross Island to Bay of Whales where landing was made. Returned to New Zealand. 1901-3. German Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Prof. Erich von Drygalski. SHIP: Gauss. SumMMarRyY: Sponsored by government grant and support from Counts Baudissin and Posadowsky. Sailed south from Cape Town via Kerguelen Islands and Heard Island, penetrating Antarctic waters in 90°E. Wilhelm II Coast discovered Feb- ruary 21, 1902. Gauss frozen in pack 50 miles from coast until February 8, 1903. Attempts to sail west proving futile, ship retreated north. Much scientific observation, but little exploration accomplished. 1901-4. Swedish Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Dr. Otto Nordenskj6ld. Suip: Antarctic. Summary: Supported by private donors. Sailed south through South Shetland Islands to chart De Gerlache Strait; returned northeast to Weddell Sea via Antarctic Sound. Winter quarters set up on Snow Hill Island, from which Nordenskjold sledged southwest on Larsen Ice Shelf to Richt- hofen Valley. Ship’s crew under Capt. C. A. Lar- sen in the Antarctic wintered at South Georgia, charting Cumberland and Royal Bays and explor- ing north side of island. The Antarctic was beset and crushed February 1903, trying to return to Snow Hill Island. Following a second winter in camp, Nordenskjold sledged northeast through Prince Gustav Channel, meeting two men from the ship at Cape Well-met, Vega Island. Entire expedition rescued November 1903 by Capt. Julian Irizar in Argentine ship Uruguay. 1901-4. British National Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Suir: Dis- covery. Summary: Supported by government grant, Royal Geographical Society, Royal Society, and large private donations. Sailed from New Zealand, meeting pack near Antarctic Circle January 1, 1902. Landed at Cape Adare and other places in Victoria Land on way to Ross Island. Skirted Ross Ice Shelf eastward and discovered Edward VII Peninsula. Returned to Hut Point, Ross Island; winter hut built and ship frozen in. Con- ducted scientific observation and geographic ex- ploration. Several sledge journeys made; one 380 miles southward on Ross Ice Shelf, two westward via Ferrar and Taylor Glaciers onto 9,000-foot plateau of Victoria Land for 130 and 300 miles, respectively. Relief brought by the Morning, 1902-3, and by the Morning and Terra Nova, 1903-4. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Discovery freed in 1904 and sailed north via Bal- leny Islands, thence west along Oates Coast and north to New Zealand. 1902-3. British relief expedition. LEADER: Lt. William Colbeck, RNR. Sure: Morn- ing. Summary: Relief expedition for British National Antarctic Expedition at Ross Island. Scott Island discovered enroute from New Zealand. 1902-4. Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Dr. William S. Bruce. Surp: Scotia. SumMmMary: Sponsored by Coats family and other private donors. Sailed southeast from Falkland Islands to South Orkney Islands, thence east toward South Sandwich Islands and south to 70°25’S., 17°12’W., where the pack forced a retreat February 22, 1903 to winter quarters in South Orkney Islands. Laurie Island charted. Sailed southeast into Weddell Sea February 14, 1904; Coats Land discovered March 6, but landing im- possible. Retreated northward. 1903. Argentine relief expedition. Leaver: Capt. Julian Irizar. Snip: Uruguay. Summary: Dispatched by Argentine government; sailed south to Snow Hill Island, relieving shore party of Swedish Antarctic Expedition November 8, and rescuing ship party on Paulet Island No- vember 10. 1903-4. British relief expedition. LeapER: Lt. William Colbeck, RNR. Suips: Morn- ing and Terra Nova. Summary: Relief expedition for British National Antarctic Expedition at Ross Island. Aided in freeing the Discovery. 1903-5. French Antarctic Expedition. Leaper: Dr. Jean B. Charcot. Sup: Francais. Summary: Financed by Charcot, government erant, and private contributions. Sailed from Falkland Islands to South Shetland Islands, thence south along west coast of Palmer Peninsula. Palmer Archipelago charted; wintered there at Port Charcot, Booth Island: Sailed south Decem- ber 25, 1904; Biscoe Islands roughly charted and Loubet Coast discovered. Alexander I Island sighted before turning north to South Shetland Islands. 1904. Argentine expedition. Leaver: Cdr. Ismael F. Galindez. Suip: Uruguay. Summary: Sponsored by Argentine government; took over meteorological station at Laurie Island in South Orkney Islands. Station continuously operated since 1904 by annual Argentine relief parties. 17 1904-5. Norwegian-Argentine whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen, manager. Suips: For- tuna, Louisa, Rolf and Guardia Nacional. Summary: Financed by Compania Argentina de Pesca; engaged in whaling in vicinity of South Georgia. Established first whaling station in South Georgia at Grytviken. 1905-6. Norwegian whaling expedition. Leaver: Alexander Lange, manager. Surp: Admi- ralen. Summary: Visit of first floating factory, the Ad- miralen, to South Shetland Islands marked begin- ning of Norwegian whaling industry in the Ant- arctic and increased tempo of whaling activity in southern waters. 1906. British expedition. LEADER: Capt. M. H. Hodges, RN. Sure: Sappho. Summary: Sent by British Admiralty to investi- gate whaling situation at South Georgia. Charted portions of Cumberland Bay. 1907-9. British Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Lt. Ernest H. Shackleton, RNR. Sup: Nimrod. Sum™MaryY: Sponsored by Sir William Beardmore, the Misses Dawson-Lambton, and other private and public donors. Sailed south from New Zealand January 1908, entering Ross Sea and skirting Ross Ice Shelf eastward to Bay of Whales. Failing to reach Edward VII Peninsula, returned to Cape Royds, Ross Island, and set up winter base. Short gealogical trips made from base, including scaling of Mount Erebus. South Pole journey begun Octo- ber 29, 1908, southward on Ross Ice Shelf, ascend- ing polar plateau via Beardmore Glacier. Lack of rations forced retreat from 88°23’S., 97 miles from pole, January 9, 1909. Another journey made north to Drygalski Ice Tongue, thence northwest on Victoria Land plateau, locating magnetic pole at 72°25’S., 155°16’E. Ferrar and Taylor Glaciers explored. Ship returned in January from winter- ing in New Zealand; entire expedition embarked March 4, 1909. 1908-10. Second French Antarctic Expedition. LeapER: Dr. Jean B. Charcot. SuHip: Powrquoi- Pas?. Summary: Financed by government grant-in-aid with support and contributions of learned societies, government bureaus, and public and private do- nors. Sailed south from Punta Arenas to Palmer Archipelago via South Shetland Islands, thence south along west coast of Palmer Peninsula to beyond Adelaide Island. Marguerite Bay and Fal- liéres Coast discovered and area charted. Re- turned north to winter on Petermann Island, from whence short journeys were made onto Palmer GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Peninsula. Left winter base for Deception Island November 26, 1909, where ship was coaled; Decep- tion Island and Admiralty Bay, King George Island charted. Returned south; Charcot Island discov- ered and Alexander I Island sighted. Continued west across Bellingshausen Sea south of Antarctic Circle to beyond 120°W. before turning northward. 1910. British expedition. LEADER: Unknown. Sup: Wakefield. Summary: Searched for survivors of Australian liner Waratah. Lt. H. W. T. R. Seymour, RN, and four naval ratings lent by British Admiralty, car- ried out hydrographic observations in visits to Prince Edward, Crozet, Kerguelen, Heard and Mc- Donald Islands. 1910. British-Norwegian sealing expedition. LEADER: Capt. Anton Evensen. Suip: Mangoro. Summary: A landing was made on Heard Island March 25, 1910. 1910-12. Norwegian expedition. LEADER: Roald Amundsen. SHIP: Fram. Summary: Sponsored by Don Pedro Christopher- sen and other private donors; Fram lent by Nor- wegian government. Sailed from Norway via Madeira to Bay of Whales in Ross Ice Shelf, arriv- ing January 14, 1911. Before winter set in, quar- ters were built and depots laid for next season’s South Pole journey. Led by Amundsen, polar party left base October 19, 1911, sledging south on Ross Ice Shelf, ascending polar plateau via Axel Heiberg Glacier, and reaching vicinity of South Pole on December 14, 1911. December 15 occupied taking numerous astronomical observa- tions indicating party’s position as 89°55’S. Next day party continued south and on December 16 and 17 took 24 hourly observations with satisfac- tion that position attained was as near South Pole as could be determined by instruments available. Return journey begun December 17, reaching Bay of Whales January 25, 1912. Meanwhile, Lt. K. Prestrud left base on November 7, 1911, sledged south to 80°S., thence east to about 158°W., thence north to edge of Ross Ice Shelf from where he traveled northeastward to Scott Nunataks. He returned to base December 15, 1911. Bay of Whales later charted. Following oceanographic work in south Atlantic Ocean during winter of 1911, the Fram returned to Bay of Whales and expedition left January 29, 1912. 1910-13. British Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Sure: Terra Nova. SumMMary: Financed by private contributions with support of Royal Geographical Society. Sailed from New Zealand, reaching Ross Island January 3, 18 1911, where main base was set up on Cape Evans. After cruise to Bay of Whales and back, northern party was left on Cape Adare for winter; Terra Nova proceeded to New Zealand, discovering Oates Coast enroute. Remainder of season at main base occupied laying depots for polar journey. After preliminary journeys, which opened the 1911-12 season, polar party headed south via Ross Ice Shelf and Beardmore Glacier, with two supporting parties. Reached South Pole January 17, 1912, but Scott and four companions succumbed on re- turn journey. Northern party charted Robertson Bay area before being removed by the Terra Nova, January 1912, to Terra Nova Bay where they were marooned during winter of 1912. From there the party sledged south to Ross Island.. Meanwhile, geological party under Griffith Taylor explored McMurdo Sound region. Part of expedition re- turned home in 1912 and, after finding bodies of the polar party, remainder embarked on the Terra Nova January 1918. 1911-12. Japanese expedition. LEADER: Lt. Choku Shirase. Snip: Kainan Maru. SuMMarRyY: Sponsored by Count Okuma. From Japan to Ross Sea via New Zealand, sighting Ad- miralty Range March 6, 1911. On March 12, forced by ice to retreat northward from 74°16’S., 172°07’E., southeast of Coulman Island. Win- tered in Sydney, from which they departed Novem- ber 19, 1911, reaching Cape Adare January 3, 1912. Sailed southeastward and landed at Kainan Bay January 16. Then landed at Bay of Whales, from where 160-mile journey was made southeast on Ross Ice Shelf to 80°05’S., 156°37’W. Meanwhile, ship sailed east to 76°06’S., 151°20’W., off Edward VII Peninsula. From 76°56’S., 155°55’W., a party landed for sledge trip to edge of Alexandra Moun- tains. Okuma Bay visited on return to Bay of Whales, from where expedition embarked Febru- ary 4. 1911-12. German Antarctic Expedition. Leaver: Dr. Wilhelm Filchner. Suip: Deutschland. Summary: Sponsored by government grant and private contributions. From Germany to South Georgia via Buenos Aires, with oceanographic work enroute. Scientific work in South Georgia. Made survey among South Sandwich Islands. Left South Georgia for Weddell Sea December 11, 1911. Luitpold Coast discovered January 30, 1912. Ship stopped by Filchner Ice Shelf in 77°45’S. Attempts to erect base on ice failed when ice broke up dur- ing process. Depots laid on land ice February 24, and short reconnaissance journey made. Deutsch- land frozen in March 6, and began to drift with the ice on March 15. Ship drifted for nine months and 600 miles until freed November 26, 1912, in 63°37’S., 36°34’W. Returned to South Georgia. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1911-12. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. Ole JOrgensen. Suip: Thulla. Summary: Sought satisfactory anchorages for fac- tory ships in South Shetland and South Orkney Islands. Experimental whaling operation was car- ried on at South Sandwich Islands. 1911-14. Australasian Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Sir Douglas Mawson. Sup: Aurora. SumMMaRY: Sponsored by Australian State and Commonwealth governments, British government, scientific societies and private contributors. In- termediate base set up on Macquarie Island to operate radio station and conduct scientific inves- tigation. Sailed south from Macquarie Island, De- cember 25, 1911, to George V Coast, establishing Main Base on Commonwealth Bay January 8, 1912. The Aurora sailed westward, skirting coast of Wilkes Land as near as ice and storms would permit. West Base established on Shackleton Ice Shelf, about 17 miles north of Queen Mary Coast. The Aurora left February 20, 1912, to conduct sub- Antarctic oceanographic investigations. From Main Base five major surveys were conducted: (1) Mawson led Far Eastern Party along edge of continental plateau for 316 miles to 68°54’S., 151°33’E., (2) Southern Party sledged 301 miles to 70°36’S., 148°10’E., (3) Eastern Coastal Party sledged along coast, mostly on sea ice, across Mertz and Ninnis Glacier Tongues to 68°18’S., 150°12’E., midway between Cape Freshfield and Horn Bluff, (4) Near Eastern Party made two journeys, exploring area between base and Mertz Glacier, and (5) Western Sledging Party sledged across Adélie Coast to 138°E., back of Cape Robert. From West Base the Eastern Party made a major trek across Shackleton Ice Shelf to Denman Gla- cier, while the Western Coastal Party journeyed on land to Gaussberg. West Base evacuated Feb- ruary 23, 1913, but delayed return of Far Eastern Party due to fatalities caused small search party to be left at Main Base during winter of 1913. This group relieved by the Awrora in December 1913, following which the coast of Wilkes Land was again skirted to Wilhelm II Coast before re- tiring northward. 1912-13. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. Petter Sgrlle. Snip: Palmer. SumMmMmary: Whaling operations in South Orkney Islands. Made running surveys of Coronation, Signy, Powell, and Fredriksen Islands, plotting in detail the rocks and islets which fringe their coasts. Numerous soundings taken; sketch-plans made of important anchorages, notably Ellefsen, Paal, and Falkland Harbors, and Borge Bay. 19 1912-13. United States whaling expedition. LEADERS: Capt. Benjamin D. Cleveland and Robert Cushman Murphy. Suir: Daisy. Summary: A private whaling and sealing expedi- tion on which Murphy served as naturalist. Sailed east from West Indies, July 31, 1912, to Cape Verde Islands, thence south to South Georgia, arriving there November 24. Sealing carried on for four months at South Georgia. Murphy engaged in natural history studies and made accurate sketch- chart of Bay of Isles. Left South Georgia March 16, 1913. 1913-14. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. Hans Borge. Surp: Polynesia. Summary: In the course of whaling operations, Borge undertook additional charting of Borge Bay in South Orkney Islands, supplementing Sgrlle’s chart of previous year. 1914-16. British expedition. LeEaDER: Sir Ernest Shackleton. and Aurora. SuMMaARY: Sponsored by Sir James Caird and other private donors, with aid from government and Royal Geographical Society. The Endurance sailed for Weddell Sea from South Georgia Decem- ber 5, 1914. Caird Coast discovered January 12, 1915. Ship beset five days later in 76°34’S., 31°30’W., from where she drifted with the ice 573 miles northwestward until crushed October 27, 1915, in 69°05’S., 51°30’W. Crew lived on the ice, drifting northward until they took to boats on April 9, 1916, within sight of Elephant Island, which was reached April 15. From there Shackle- ton, with five others, sailed in open whale boat 800 miles to South Georgia where he chartered the whaler Southern Sky in an unsuccessful attempt to rescue his men. Attempts in Uruguayan trawler Instituto de Pesca and British schooner Emma also failed. Crew finally rescued on August 30, 1916 by the Yelcho, loaned by Chile. The Aurora, under Capt. A. Mackintosh, sailed from Hobart carrying the Ross Sea party of the expedition and reached Cape Evans, Ross Island, where base was set up January 16, 1915. Ship was beset and drifted out to sea in the pack before completely unloading. She drifted northward out of Ross Sea and northeastward between Oates Coast and Balleny Islands before being freed in damaged condition in March 1915; ship continued north to New Zealand. Meanwhile, the winter party at Ross Island succeeded in laying depots between the base and Beardmore Glacier in prepa- ration for Shackleton’s proposed transcontinental journey. They were rescued by the Aurora under Capt. J. K. Davis in January 1916. SuHips: Endurance GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1920. British expedition. LEADER: H.W. W. Hope. Suip: Dartmouth. SumMmMary: Sent out by British Admiralty; visited King Edward Cove, South Georgia. Made sketch of Cumberland Bay area. Sighted Shag Rocks. 1921-22. British expedition. LEADER: J. L. Cope. SuHips: Various whaling ves- sels. Summary: Financed by private enterprise and aided by Norwegian whalers who furnished pas- sage. Party of four assembled at Deception Island. Ice conditions preventing a landing at Hope Bay, the whalers landed the party, January 12, 1921, near Andvord Bay on west coast of Palmer Penin- sula. Two of party returned home, but T. W. Bag- shawe and M. C. Lester spent winter there. They unsuccessfully sought route across Palmer Penin- sula. Made meteorological, tidal, and natural his- tory observations. Bagshawe and Lester picked up by Capt. O. Anderson in the Svend Foyn I, January 138, 1922. 1921-22. British expedition. Leaper: Sir Ernest Shackleton. Surp: Quest. Summary: Financed by John Q. Rowett. Arrived at South Georgia January 4, 1922, via Lisbon and Rio de Janeiro. Shackleton died at South Georgia and Frank Wild assumed command. The Quest left January 17, 1922, sailing east to Zavodovski Island in South Sandwich Islands, thence east and southeastward until stopped by pack in 69°17’S., 17°09’E., February 12, 1922. Pack then skirted west-northwestward to Elephant Island where a running survey was conducted before returning to South Georgia, April 6. Scientific investigations made throughout cruise. 1923-24. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen. Snips: Sir James Clark Ross, accompanied by Star I and four other whale catchers. SumMary: First whaling expedition to Ross Sea. Finding the Bay of Whales unsuitable, the factory ship remained at Discovery Inlet, from December 31, 1923 to March 8, 1924, while the Star I skirted Ross Ice Shelf and coast of Victoria Land from McMurdo Sound to Robertson Bay. 1923-24. British whaling expedition. LEADERS: Soren Beckman and Gustav Mathisen. Surps: Whale catchers attached to the Sevilla and Roald Amundsen. Summary: Sent out by Charles Salveson and Co. of Leith, Scotland. Beckmann, operating with the factory ship Sevilla, and Mathisen, with the factory Roald Amundsen, independently pushed south along west coast of Palmer Peninsula to Falliéres Coast in attempt to find safe harbor for their float- 20 ing factories. Both thought they observed a trans- verse strait connecting with Weddell Sea. 1924-25. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. C. A. Larsen. Suips: Sir James Clark Ross and whale catchers. Summary: Whaling carried on in Ross Sea, where Captain Larsen died. 1925. Discovery Investigations (British). Leaver: N. A. Mackintosh. Summary: The Discovery Committee established a marine station with well-equipped biological laboratory at Grytviken, South Georgia in Janu- ary 1925. Laboratory work conducted each whal- ing season until 1931; staff periodically relieved. Survey of South Georgia harbors and anchorages carried out from this laboratory in the period 1926-30 under direction of Lt. Cdr. J. M. Chaplin, RN. 1925-26. Discovery Investigation (British). LrapER: Dr. Stanley Kemp. Sup: Discovery. Summary: Left Cape Town, January 17, 1926, for South Georgia where two months were spent in biological and hydrographical surveying of whal- ing grounds. Ship proceeded to Falkland Islands April 17, later returning to Cape Town. Scientific work conducted throughout cruise. 1925-26. German expedition. LEapDER: Dr. Alfred Merz. Suip: Meteor. SumMmMmaryY: Sponsored by Emergency Fund for Ger- man Science, Dr. F. Schmidt-Ott, Chairman. As part of oceanographic survey of South Atlantic Ocean, the Meteor, under Capt. F. Spiess who suc- ceeded to command on death of Dr. Merz, August 16, 1925, carried on investigations in vicinity of South Sandwich Islands before proceeding east- ward to Bouvetgya. Ship then penetrated south- ward to 63°50’S., 5°20’E. before retiring northeast- ward. 1926-27. Discovery Investigations (British). LEADER: Dr. Stanley Kemp. Suips: Discovery and William Scoresby. Summary: The Discovery left Cape Town October 1926, going southward into the pack; returned to Bouvetgya before heading westward to South Georgia, which was reached December 5, 1926. After investigating whaling grounds in the vicinity, the Discovery left in February for South Orkney Islands, South Shetland Islands, and Palmer Archipelago; made running survey, of part of Palmer Archipelago. Returning to South Shet- land Islands, a series of hydrological stations was run northward to Cape Horn and eastward to Falkland Islands. Meanwhile, the William Scoresby left Cape Town, October 21, 1926, for GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA South Georgia where it worked in conjunction with the Discovery. In February it sailed to Falkland Islands where investigations were made between the islands and South America. The ship returned to Cape Town via South Georgia. 1927. Norwegian expedition. LEADER: Eyvind Tofte. Sure: Odd I. Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. Left South Georgia January 6, 1927, and sailed west through Bransfield Strait to Deception Island. Enroute sighted largest iceberg ever recorded, an estimated 100 miles long, in 63°30’S., 52°00’W. Left Deception Island January 12, sailing south- westward inside of the Palmer Archipelago, thence westward in clear sea to Peter I Island, which was circumnavigated on January 17. Attempts to land unsuccessful, but running survey made. The Odd I then sailed south encountering the pack, which it skirted east and northeastward to Anvers Island before returning to South Georgia via De- ception Island. 1927-28. Norwegian expedition. LrEaDER: Capt. Harald Horntvedt. Suir: Norvegia. Summary: The Norvegia, sent out by Lars Chris- tensen, left Cape Town on November 19, 1927, and on November 30 reached Bouvetgya. Landing made next day. After charting the island, the ship steamed southward on January 1, 1928 and vainly sought Pagoda Rock. Damaged condition of ship caused withdrawal January 7 from pack ice margin at 60°01’S., 2°24’E. A line of oceano- graphic stations was run to South Georgia, arriv- ing there January 22. The Norvegia was laid up for repairs, but the staff continued work with aid of whalers operating in the vicinity. 1927-28. Norwegian expedition. LEADERS: Dr. Ola Olstad and Prof. Olaf Holtedahl. Suips: Various whaling ships. Summary: Transported by various whaling ships, Olstad and Holtedahl conducted individual re- search in biology and geology, respectively, in South Georgia, South Shetland Islands, and Pal- mer Archipelago. 1928-29. German expedition. LreapDER: Ludwig Kohl-Larsen. whaling ships. Summary: Party of three, transported by various whaling ships, charted extensive coastal areas and much of the inland glacier system of South Georgia. Suips: Various 1928-29. French Expedition. LEapER: E. Aubert de la Rule. Suip: Austral. Summary: Geological reconnaissance of Kergue- len Island. Visited Heard Island in whale catcher Kildalkey for geological observations in January 1929. 21 1928-29. British and United States expedition. LEADER: Sir Hubert Wilkins. Suip: Hektoria. Summary: Sponsored by American Geographical Society, William Randolph Hearst, Detroit Aviation Society, and private, public, and commercial do- nors. Two airplanes, supplies, and staff trans- ported to Deception Island by the floating factory Hektoria. Two reconnaissance flights made in vicinity on November 26. At 8:30 a.m., December 20, 1928, Wilkins and pilot Carl B. EHielson took off from Deception Island, flew south toward Trinity Island, crossed Palmer Peninsula and flew south along its east coast to Stefansson Strait and return, essentially over same route. This pioneer Antarctic flight lasted ten hours. On January 10, 1929, flight of 250 miles over northern sector of previous route repeated to confirm earlier obser- vations. Operations then postponed until next season. 1928-29. Norwegian expedition. LEADER: Capt. Nils Larsen. Suip: Norvegia. Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. The Norvegia arrived at Bouvetgya from South Georgia December 16, 1928. Made unsuccessful search for Thompson Island and the Chimnies for eight days, in clear weather. Failed to establish weather sta- tion on Bouvetgya. The Norvegia then proceeded west to Peter I Island, making a landing on Feb- ruary 1, 1929. Second landing made next day, and house erected. Following six days of obser- vation, the ship sailed west across Amundsen Sea, skirting pack ice to 140°W. From there, on Feb- ruary 20, she sailed north and thence eastward along the 60° parallel to South Georgia, which was reached on March 30. Dougherty Island could not be found in its reported position. 1928-30. Byrd Antarctic Expedition. LrapEeR: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.). Suips: City of New York and Eleanor Bolling. SumMmMary: Sponsored by John D. Rockefeller, Jr., Edsel Ford, many other private donors, as well as scientific organizations. Expedition left Dune- din December 2, 1928, with the Eleanor Bolling towing the City of New York to edge of the pack, where the latter was taken in tow by the C. A. Lar- sen to open water in Ross Sea, being released De- cember 23. Bay of Whales reached December 29, and base site selected January 1, 1929. After un- loading, two attempts made by City of New York to penetrate to Edward VII Peninsula, before leav- ing for New Zealand February 22. Meanwhile, the Eleanor Bolling made two trips with supplies; a third prevented by ice conditions. Several flights made from base in the three planes. The first on January 27 to Edward VII Peninsula, dis- covering Rockefeller Mountains. Two more flights to this area made on February 18. On March 7 GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA a plane was wrecked in the mountains, marooning party in bad weather until rescued on March 19. During March and October depot laying for geo- logical trip to Queen Maud Range accomplished. This party, which was out from November 4, 1929 to January 19, 1930, served as supporting party for the South Pole flight, provided weather reports, and mapped 175 miles of the front of Queen Maud Range. Flight made to the base of these moun- tains November 18, 1929 to lay gasoline depot. Byrd made South Pole flight on November 29 and 30, 1929, by way of Liv Glacier pass. On December 5, a flight eastward resulted in discovery of Edsel Ford Ranges and Marie Byrd Land. The City of New York reached Bay of Whales on February 18, 1930 after a stormy passage from New Zealand; entire expedition departed next day. 1929-30. British and United States expedition. LEADER: Sir Hubert Wilkins. Suips: Whaling ships and the William Scoresby. Summary: Sponsored by American Geographical Society, William Randolph Hearst, British Colonial Office, Detroit Aviation Society, and other private, public and commercial donors. Staff and supplies transported from Montevideo to Deception Island by whalers. Conditions being unsatisfactory at Deception Island, the plane was put aboard the William Scoresby and taken south along west coast of Palmer Peninsula December 12, 1929. The ship moved through Neumayer Channel and Bis- marck Strait, then southwest along Adelaide Island. Finding no ice suitable for taking off or landing, the ship returned to Neumayer Channel December 18. Next day Wilkins and pilot S. A. Cheesman took off from the water and flew south along the coast to Leroux Bay, where they crossed Palmer Peninsula to Richthofen Valley on the east coast before returning. The William Scoresby then cruised southwestward along the pack to about 67°45/S., 75°30'W. From there two flights made south on December 28 and 29, 1929. The first ended in fog just short of Charcot Island, but second encircled it in clear weather. The ship then worked back to Deception Island for fuel. The plane took off from Port Lockroy and flew over De Gerlache Strait to Deception Island. Refueled, the ship, with the plane, pushed southwestward to edge of pack, in the neighborhood of 70°S., 100°W. Short flight from there January 30, 1930, stopped by snow storm; longer flight made on February 1 to 73°S., 101°W. without seeing land. Expedition then returned to Deception Island. 1929-30. Norwegian expedition. LreapER: Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen. Suir: Nor- vegia. 22 Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. The Norvegia, after its party erected a hut on Bouve- téya, met the Thorshammer from which were transferred the captain, pilot, and two planes, and work began on November 8, 1929. A second hut was erected and Bouvetgya photographed from the air. The Norvegia then followed edge of pack east- ward to north of Enderby Land in about 60°S., 55°E., from where on December 1 she began to work south through the pack. On December 7, plane flight from the ship made in about 64°21’S., 53°14’E. On another flight, from about 65°10’S., 49°30’E. on December 22, the plane landed south- west of Cape Ann. The ship then retreated north and west, taking coal from the Thorshammer on January 4, 1930. Headed again for Enderby Land, the Norvegia met the Discovery with Sir Douglas Mawson on January 14. Next day she was stopped by ice within sight of land, but flight made over Ice Bay and westward, exploring coastal area be- tween 40° and 50°E. Ship moved west to 44°E. from where another flight was made southward. After riding out gale, the Norvegia sailed westward to Coats Land making series of oceanographic ob- servations. On February 1, Gunnerus Bank dis- covered. The Weddell Sea was entered on Febru- ary 16. Seal Bay discovered on the 18th, and flight made over Cape Norvegia and Princess Martha Coast. Another flight made on February 20. The ship rode out a gale for three days, then moved north to about 69°28’S. before being forced east- ward by the ice. She met the Thorshammer in 66°50’S., 12°00’E., took on coal, transferred planes, and headed northward for Cape Town March 2, 1930. 1929-31. British-Australian-New Zealand Antarc- tic Research Expedition. LEADER: Sir Douglas Mawson. Sup: Discovery. Summary: Sponsored by Australian, New Zealand, and British governments, Australian National Re- search Council, MacPherson Robertson, and other private, public, and commercial donors. The Dis- covery left Cape Town October 19, 1929, sailing southeastward with stops for scientific investiga- tion at Possession, Kerguelen, and Heard Islands. Banzare Bank discovered south of Heard Island. On December 16, ice halted southward progress in about 65°41’S., 79°30’E., and ship moved north and west for a more favorable southing. The Discovery pushed westward through storm and ice. Signs of land appeared on December 26 in 66°57’S., 71°57’E., and on the 31st a flight on which land was sighted was made from the ship in 66°10’S., 65°10’E. Land to the south sighted from ship on January 4, 1930, and confirmed by flight next day from 66°30’S., 61°07’E. This was named Mac-Robertson Coast. Storms prevailed until January 12 when Kemp Coast was sighted. Landing made on Proclama- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA tion Island January 13. Ship then sailed west beyond Cape Ann, meeting the Norvegia on Janu- ary 14. Driven westward by a storm to 43°W., the Discovery returned eastward where, on January 24 to 26, several short flights were made in vicinity of Proclamation Island. Lack of coal forced retreat on January 26 to Kerguelen Islands and Australia. The second season began when ship left Hobart, November 22, 1930. Mill Bank discovered enroute, observations made on Macquarie Island, and Hjort Rise discovered to the south. The Discovery pushed west to Adélie Coast, and landing made at Cape Denison January 7, 1931. Ship sailed west- ward along the pack fringing Wilkes Land, but bad weather resulted in few observations of land. Most notable were Cape Goodenough and Banzare Coast, seen from the air on January 15 and 16. Bowman Island was seen on January 28, and Leo- pold and Astrid Coast from the air on February 9. Westward from there Norwegian whalers and the Discovery were operating simultaneously, and many features were seen by both. On February 11 Cape Darnley was sighted, and MacKenzie Bay entered. A flight enabled drafting of sketch map. As ship skirted Mac-Robertson Coast, landings made at Murray and Scullin Monoliths on Febru- ary 13, and several flights added features to the map. After being driven north by storm, landing made at Cape Bruce February 18, and next day, due to coal shortage, expedition was terminated. 1929-31. Discovery Investigations (British). LEADER: Dr. Stanley Kemp. Sup: Discovery II. Summary: The Discovery II left England Decem- ber 14, 1929, to begin her first commission in Scotia Sea and adjacent seas. Oceanographic work begun in vicinity of South Georgia. A line of observations was run along submarine ridge connecting South Sandwich and Falkland Islands. The South Sandwich Islands were charted from February 26 to March 18, 1930. The ship arrived at Cape Town May 28, 1930, and during southern winter carried on oceanographic investigations in South African waters. In October 1930 the Dis- covery II left Cape Town for South Georgia, via Bouvetgya, making unsuccessful search for Thompson Island enroute. Heavy pack prevented survey of South Orkney Islands in December. While working in Bransfield Strait the same month, conditions were favorable for charting South Shetland Islands. During January and February 1931, cruise was made southwestward along Palmer Peninsula until stopped by pack ice around Adelaide Island. The ship turned west along edge of pack, slighting Alexander I Island, but not Charcot Island. Journey westward contin- ued to 101°00’W., where ship was forced southward through the pack until stopped by ice 20 feet thick in 69°49’S. No land seen; soundings showed 2,000 23 fathoms. Returning from this point over much the same route, Peter I Island was sighted. Ade- laide Island was still bordered by pack. After running lines northwestward to edge of continen- tal shelf, the cruise continued into Matha Strait, Marin Darbel Bay, and out of Pendleton Strait. Bismarck Strait was entered and ship passed northward inside of Palmer Archipelago. In February additional surveying carried out in South Shetland Islands. Except for determining position of west end of Coronation Island, pack ice again prevented work in South Orkney Islands. The first commission was thus concluded. 1930-31. Norwegian expedition. LEADERS: Maj. Gunnar Isachsen and Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen. Suip: Norvegia. SumMMary: Financed by Lars Christensen. The Norvegia left Cape Town October 4, 1930, moving south beyond Bouvetgya before beginning circum- navigation of Antarctica, between 55° and 65°S. She coaled from whalers and at Deception Island enroute. A series of oceanographic observations were completed, and unsuccessful searches made for Truls, Dougherty, and Nimrod Islands. Ice pre- vented close approach to Peter I Island. On Janu- ary 29, 1931 the circumnavigation of 11,500 miles was completed, in 102 days, in about 69°44’S., 1°34’E. While moving toward rendezvous with the Thorshavn, Maud Bank was discovered on Janu- ary 30. On February 9, in about 68°00’S., 33°53’E., the Thorshavn was met, planes were transferred to the Norvegia, and Riiser-Larsen took command. Ship moved westward against the pack until a flight was possible on February 16 and 17, 1931. This permitted mapping Princess Ragnhild Coast, discovered early in 1931 by Capt. H. Halvorsen in the Sevilla. Other flights farther eastward made on February 21 and 23. On February 25 the planes were transferred to the Thorshammer and Capt. Nils Larsen took the Norvegia north to Nor- way, making first an unsuccessful search for Pa- goda Rock. 1930-31. Norwegian whaling expeditions. LEADERS: Various. SHips: Various whaling ships. Summary: During the 1930-31 season several firms conducted commercial whaling off Lars Christensen and Mac-Robertson Coasts. On Janu- ary 12, 1931, land was seen by Capt. Arnold Brun- voll from the whale catcher Seksern, between 64°00’E. and 66°34’E. On January 19 and succeed- ing days, Capt. Reider Bjerkg, in the whale catcher Bouvet II, sailed eastward from about 64°E., in sight of land. He was followed by one day by Capt. Carl Sjovold, in the Bouvet III, who also sighted land on January 24, from 68°S., 74°E. He was in turn followed by Capt. Rolf Walter, in the Thorgaut. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1930-31. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. O. Borchgrevink. Sure: Antarctic. Summary: Borchgrevink, in the course of whaling operations, mapped along Kemp Coast and En- derby Land from 59°00’E. to 51°30’E. Aker Peaks discovered. Coast of Queen Maud Land mapped from 44°H. to 41°E. 1930-31. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Capt. H. Halvorsen. Suip: Sevilla. SumMMary: Financed by Lars Christensen. While carrying on whaling operations off coast of Ant- arctica, from February 9 to March 7, 1931, Prin- cess Ragnhild Coast was discovered. From March 8 to April 7, Halvorsen charted along Princess Ragnhild, Princess Astrid, and Princess Martha Coasts between 24°E. and 0°. His entire range of operations extended from 42°E. to 9°W. 1931. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Lars Christensen. Suip: Thorshavn. Summary: The oil tanker Thorshavn left Cape Town January 6, 1931, with Lars Christensen aboard to inspect operations of his whaling fleet as the tanker supplied fuel oil to the various float- ing factories and collected whale oil from them. Capt. H. Riiser-Larsen, also aboard, was trans- ferred with two seaplanes to the ship Norvegia, and Maj. Gunnar Isachsen and J. K. Eggvin, who had just completed circum-Antarctic cruise in the Norvegia, joined the Thorshavn, February 9, in 68°00’S., 33°55’E. Open water permitted far south- ern penetration between 70°E. and 75°E. Frequent sounding resulted in discovery of Fram Bank. Christensen directed Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen, in the whale catcher Torlyn, to attempt penetration into the pack ice. He worked far into MacKenzie Bay, reaching 68°50’S., 70°28’E., on February 13. On the 14th, the Torlyn worked north around Bjerkg Peninsula and westward along Mac-Robert- son Coast. Mikkelsen sighted the same physical features Mawson saw a day earlier. The Thorshavn returned to Cape Town later in February. 1931-33. Discovery Investigations (British). LEADER: D. Dilwyn John. Sup: Discovery II. Summary: The Discovery II arrived at Port Stan- ley from England on November 4, 1931. Beginning at western entrance to the Strait of Magellan six north-south lines of oceanographic stations were run from edge of pack ice on the south to beyond the line of Antarctic Convergence on the north. The easternmost line of stations lay along 20°EH. Additional lines were run between Falkland Is- lands and South Georgia, and others radiating from the latter. Following repairs the ship left South Africa, April 8, 1932, on its first circum- polar cruise. Echo soundings made each half 24 hour and oceanographic stations carried out nightly. The course was laid in great zigzags from edge of pack ice to north of 45°S. From Cape Town the course was laid southeastward to a point off Enderby Land, then northeast to Fremantle. From Fremantle the ship sailed to a point off Banzare Coast and back to Melbourne, thence south to a position north of Balleny Islands, then north to New Zealand. From New Zealand the course was laid southeastward to 62°S., 159°W., north of Ross Sea, then northeast into south Pa- cific Ocean to 41°S., 126°W., and southeastward to 63°57’S., 101°16’W., west of Peter I Island. From here a diminishing fuel supply dictated fairly direct course to the Strait of Magellan. Port Stan- ley reached October 9, 1932, where cruise was interrupted until following March. From October until Christmas, 1932, oceanographic work carried on in Bransfield Strait and Scotia Sea. From January 2 to 30, 1933, the South Orkney Islands were charted and geological and biological speci- mens collected. Further oceanographic work in Scotia Sea, Bransfield Strait, and Drake Passage followed. Final leg of circumpolar cruise com- pleted in March by great V-shaped course from South Georgia south to 69°22’S., 9°37’E., then north to a point west of Cape Town. 1932-33. Norwegian whaling expedition. LEADER: Lars Christensen. Suip: Thorshavn. Summary: The tanker Thorshavn, with Capt. H. Riiser-Larsen’s sledging party aboard (see below), left Cape Town January 25, 1933 for Enderby Land to service floating factories. Series of meteorological observations made. Ship returned via Bouvetgya. 1932-33. Norwegian expedition. LEADER: Capt. Hjalmar_ Riiser-Larsen. Various whaling ships. Summary: Party of three with dogs and supplies accompanied Lars Christensen on the Thorshavn. Enderby Land sighted February 8, 1933. Two at- tempts to land on the ice failed and party trans- ferred first to the Thorshammer, then the Torlyn on March 5, off Princess Ragnhild Coast, where party finally landed on the ice for a sledge journey westward along the coast. By March 8, however, the ice broke up. Sledge party rescued by the whaler Globe on March 11 SHIPS: 1933-34. Norwegian expedition. LEADER: Lars Christensen. Snip: Thorshavn. Summary: The Thorshavn left Cape Town De- cember 20, 1933; nearly circumnavigated Antarc- tica. Meteorological and hydrographical observa- tions made throughout cruise. Mac-Robertson Coast was sighted on January 9, 1934, in about 65°H., and flight made from the ship by Lt. Alf ' GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Gunnestad next day. On January 17, in about 86°E., a plane was transferred to a whale catcher which worked south through the pack to 65°22’S., 86°10’E., from where Gunnestad and Nils Larsen made two flights southward, discovering 150 miles of the Leopold and Astrid Coast behind the border- ing ice shelf. Beyond Ross Sea, in 134°11’W., the ship reached 71°44’S., but a flight from there showed only ice. Skirted pack ice to Peter I Island; thence to Drake Passage where Sars Bank was discovered. Reached Montevideo on February 27, 1934. 1933-34. United States expedition. Leaper: Lincoln Ellsworth. Snip: Wyatt Earp. Summary: Left New Zealand December 5, 1933; arrived at Bay of Whales January 6, 1934, for trans- Antarctic flight to Weddell Sea. Plane was dam- aged by breaking up of the ice January 13, termi- nating the expedition. 1933-35. Discovery Investigations (British). LEADER: Dr. N. A. Mackintosh. Suir: Discovery II. Summary: The Discovery II left England in Oc- tober; work begun at Tristan da Cunha enroute to South Georgia. During two-year period five sets of oceanographic stations were run northward from the pack ice along 80°W. to north of Cape Horn. First of these made in December, by sail- ing westward along pack ice margin and return- ing to South Georgia via the Strait of Magellan. On December 27, 1933, ship left for western cruise on a zigzag course across 200-mile-wide zone bordering the pack ice. At 160°W. the ship sailed north to New Zealand, returning to meet Byrd’s Bear of Oakland at 72°S., 171°W., on February 23, 1934. From there the zigzag course was repeated eastward along the pack ice to 80°W., where the second line of stations was run northward. From South Georgia the Discovery II next sailed south to South Sandwich Islands and east along 60°S. before steering southeastward to 64°38’S., 44°16’E., off Enderby Land. From there, on April 8, 1934, the ship returned to South Africa. After a refit, the ship left Cape Town August 1, 1934 for work in Scotia Sea and surrounding seas, running sev- eral lines across Scotia Sea, and the final three lines along 80°W. South Shetland Islands were charted by January 9, 1935. Stores and equip- ment for the British Graham Land Expedition were then transported to Port Lockroy in Palmer Archipelago. Returning to South Georgia, the ship left February 7 on a southeast course to 68°45’S., 9°20’W., at eastern entrance to Weddell Sea. From there pack ice was skirted in usual zigzag course to Enderby Land. Ship then sailed north to Cape Town. 424589 O -57 -3 25 1933-35. Byrd Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.). Suips: Bear of Oakland and Jacob Ruppert. SumMary: Sponsored by Edsel Ford, William Horlick, Col. Jacob Ruppert, Thomas J. Watson, National Geographic Society, and numerous other public, private, and commercial donors. The Jacob Ruppert, sailing from New Zealand Decem- ber 12, 1933, skirted the pack from 65°55’S., 151°10’W. eastward to 116°35’W. Three flights made southward from the ship without sight- ing land. Reached Bay of Whales January 17, 1934, and the Bear of Oakland arrived Janu- ary 30. On February 6 the Bear of Oakland set out to push eastward beyond 151°W. Grad- ually forced northward by the ice, she reached 75°06’S., 148°08’W., with Marie Byrd Land dimly seen to the south before retreating. During March depots were laid by plane, dog sled, and tractor 200 miles to the south, and advance weather base set up at 80°08’S., 163°57’W. Tractor trip to Mount Grace McKinley made from September 27 to October 18, 1934, to prepare for sledge journey to Marie Byrd Land. This geological party left on October 14, reaching Fosdick Mountains and returning December 29. The southern geological party left on October 16, reached Queen Maud Range on November 26, ascended to the plateau via Robert Scott Glacier, and returned to base January 11, 1935. On October 25, 1934, two trac- tors started south in support of the geological party. Halted by crevasses beyond 81°S., 193 miles from Little America, they turned eastward, reach- ing 79°07’S., 149°24’W. From there they moved northward along edge of continent and followed the eastern trail to base, arriving January 2, 1935. Seismic soundings taken on trip showed much of Ross Ice Shelf to be aground. Soundings by Dr. Thomas Poulter revealed existence of Roosevelt Island, buried by the ice shelf. Six major explora- tory flights were made from Little America from November 15 to December 15, 1934. The first was a triangular flight, extending 275 miles southeast- ward to 81°05’S., 146°30’W., thence north to 77°30’S., 146°30’W., and finally west to base. On November 16 a southeast flight was made to edge of continent and return. Another flight on No- vember 22 in same direction, across Rockefeller Plateau, reached 83°05’S., 119°00’W., and next day another southeast flight was made. On November 18 a flight eastward reached 78°S., 135°W., where the surface elevation exceeded 4,000 feet. On De- cember 15 a flight northeastward across Sulzberger Bay returned to base by way of Mount Grace Mc- Kinley. After wintering in New Zealand both ships returned in January 1935, the Bear of Oakland charting the edge of Ross Ice Shelf from Ross Is- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA land to Bay of Whales. Base was evacuated Febru- ary 6, 1935. 1934-35. Norwegian expedition. LEADER: Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen. SHIP: Thorshavn. SummMary: Financed by Lars Christensen. While servicing floating factories in the area east of Mac- Robertson Coast in February 1935, the Thorshavn pushed southward through thick ice into open water over the continental shelf, as shown by soundings. Ship continued south in clear weather. On February 19 Mikkelsen saw the ice shelf, and next day, after drifting westward, discovered an ice-free area in a small bay. Landing made there in 68°29’S., 78°36’E. by party including Mikkelsen, his wife, and seven seamen. On February 21 he followed the newly discovered Ingrid Christensen Coast southwestward, charting Vestfold Hills, Larsemann Hills, and Mount Caroline Mikkelsen. 1934-35. United States expedition. LEADER: Lincoln Ellsworth. Suip: Wyatt Earp. Summary: Financed by Lincoln Ellsworth, the ex- pedition left New Zealand September 19, 1934, arriving at Deception Island October 14, from where it was proposed to begin a trans-Antarctic flight to Bay of Whales. Take-off delayed by broken connecting rod. Snow melting from run- way required move to new location on November 29. Port Lockroy investigated, but Snow Hill Is- land selected and landing made there December 4. Flight begun January 3, 1935, but impending bad weather caused pilot to turn back over Seal Nunataks. Project then abandoned but, while sail- ing north to Montevideo, Dundee Island was se- lected as site for attempt next season. 1934-37. British Graham Land Expedition. LEADER: John Rymill. Suip: Penola. Summary: Sponsored by Colonial Office, British Admiralty, War Office, Royal Geographical So- ciety, and other public, private, and commercial donors. Leaving London September 10, 1934, the Penola reached Falkland Islands November 28, re- maining for repairs until December 31. Mean- while, expedition supplies had been transported by the Discovery II from Port Stanley to Port Lockroy, Wiencke Island, where the Penola ar- rived January 22, 1935. By means of aerial recon- naissance, base site was selected in Argentine Is- lands, 40 miles southwestward, where expedition wintered. Exploratory flight made from base to Matha Strait February 28, 1935. While awaiting firm ice, local biological, geological, and carto- graphical surveys were made by boat and plane. Open water south of Pendleton Strait confined survey work to area bordering Grandidier Channel. The Penola was freed on January 3, 1936, and re- 26 turned from Deception Island with lumber for a new hut on January 27. On February 16, after aerial reconnaissance, the ship moved south through Grandidier Channel and Pendleton Strait, rounding Adelaide Island on the west and south, and entering Marguerite Bay. The plane then flew south, inside of Adelaide Island, on February 26. Next day aerial reconnaissance revealed suit- able base just north of Neny Fjord, to which the ship sailed on February 28, 1936. Base established on one of the Debenham Islands. The Penola sailed on March 12 to winter in Falkland Islands. Exploratory flights made over Marguerite Bay on March 11 and 13, and another, between Adelaide Island and Palmer Peninsula, on March 31. After unsuccessful attempt in June to lay depots to the south, two sledging parties on July 20 com- menced survey northward finishing early in Au- gust. On August 15, flight made to north end of Alexander I Island, and better view of George VI Sound, seen first on March 13, was had. On Sep- tember 4, preliminary to a sledge journey, the sound was explored on a flight which penetrated it 40 miles, to 70°10’S. Sledge journey began next day. By October 17 the party, under A. Stephen- son, reached 72°00’S., 67°18’W., 200 miles from northern entrance, when they turned around. A second flight, on October 19, penetrated George VI Sound for 120 miles.. Supported by a depot laid by air on Wordie Ice Shelf, Rymill and E. W. Bingham began eastern sledge journey across Palmer Peninsula on October 26, 1936. Going south to Wordie Ice Shelf, they turned eastward in about 69°50’S. and traveled along south side of Fleming and Bingham Glaciers to the east coast of Palmer Peninsula, in vicinity of Cape Rymill, returning to base on January 5, 1937. On Febru- ary 1, flight made to Douglas Range on Alexander I Island. On February 13, final flight made north- ward to tie together the surveys made from the two bases. The Penola returned and expedition departed March 12, 1937, swinging southward along the pack fringing the northern end of Alex- ander I Island before sailing north. 1935-36. United States expedition. Leaver: Lincoln Ellsworth. Sure: Wyatt Earp. Summary: Financed by Lincoln Ellsworth. Expe- dition arrived at Deception Island from Montevideo November 4, 1935, proceeding on November 11 to Dundee Island, where a trans-Antarctic flight to the Bay of Whales was begun on November 21. After flying about 600 miles southwestward to be- yond Hearst Island, clogged fuel gauge forced re- turn. On November 23 the Polar Star again took to the air, with Ellsworth and pilot Herbert Hollick- Kenyon flying south along east coast of Palmer Peninsula to Mobiloil Inlet, then southwest across GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the peninsula range, Dyer Plateau, and George VI Sound to Hllsworth Highland. Landing made there on snow-covered surface in about 79°15’S., 102°35’W. After 19 hours in camp, flight was con- tinued on November 24, but bad weather forced landing after a half hour in the air. A storm and clearing away the snow kept party grounded until late December 4. Four hours later (23:10 Decem- ber 4) another landing made for astronomical ob- servations, at about 79°29’S., 153°27’W. Plane took off at 09:50, December 5, and came down again at 10:05, 16 miles from the Bay of Whales, with gasoline exhausted. Ellsworth and Hollick-Ken- yon hiked to Little America to await arrival of the Wyatt Earp. On January 15, 1936, the Discovery II came to their rescue, but before departing waited for the Wyatt Earp to arrive. 1935-36. Discovery Investigations (British). LEADER: G. W. Rayner. SuHip: William Scoresby. Summary: The William Scoresby left London in October 1935 to mark whales in Indian Ocean. In February 1936, attempting great circle route from eastern whaling grounds off Queen Mary Coast to western grounds off Enderby Land, Rayner found coast unusually free of ice. In vicinity of 103°E., the existence of Bowman Island and Mill Island was verified. Working westward, MacKenzie Bay was found ice-free and was entered to 68°45’S., 70°42’E. on February 24. Skirting Amery Ice Shelf to its north extremity, the William Scoresby continued west along the coast, landing at Scullin Monolith on February 26. Next day Kemp Coast was reached; William Scoresby Bay discovered and landing made. Immediate coastal area charted. On March 6, ship again in sight of land off Cape Ann. She arrived at Cape Town April 3, 1936. 1935-37. Discovery Investigations (British). LreapER: Dr. G. E. R. Deacon. Suir: Discovery II. Summary: Leaving London in October, the Dis- covery II called at Cape Town before starting work, November 9, 1935. The course led eastward to Crozet Islands, then south to 58°29’S., 58°00’E., meeting the pack. Pack ice skirted eastward to about 59°47’S., 98°00’E. when, on December 4, 1935, the Discovery II was called to Melbourne to begin search for Lincoln Ellsworth, presumed lost on his trans-Antarctic flight. She left Melbourne December 23 for Ross Sea, via Dunedin. After dif- ficult penetration of almost 400 miles of pack ice from January 6 to 14, with planes assisting to spot open leads, the ship arrived at Bay of Whales on January 15, 1936. Ellsworth found to be safe and the Discovery II left with him aboard on Jan- uary 22. Oceanographic work was carried out in Ross Sea, and landing made at Cape Crozier. Enroute to Australia, a running survey was made of Balleny Islands, from February 3 to 5. 27 Work resumed by sailing south from Melbourne along 146°E. Uncertain appearance of land noted to the south in 65°06’S., 127°02’E. on March 20, and in 65°05’S., 126°35’E. the next day. The pack ice was skirted in zigzag course from there to Shackleton Ice Shelf where, on March 26, a course was laid for Fremantle. After cruise across Indian Ocean along 32°S., from Fremantle to Cape Town, Antarctic work begun again on May 18, 1936, when ship cruised west and southward to beyond Bouve- tgya, then followed the pack ice eastward to 17°E. before returning to Cape Town for routine repairs. Ship departed again on September 15, 1936, sailing westward to 0°, then south to 53°S., 0°. From there she turned westward on September 28, fol- lowing zigzag course north of 60°S. to South Georgia, arriving October 15. An indirect traverse was then made across Scotia Sea, first northwest, then south to South Orkney Islands, thence west to Clarence Island, making landing, and north to Falkland Islands. In November work carried on between Falkland Islands and Patagonia. Most of December spent in vicinity of South Georgia. In January 1937, topographic and biologic survey made in South Shetland Islands, followed by simi- lar work in South Orkney Islands in February. Final cruise began at South Georgia, sailing south- eastward to the Antarctic Circle, along which zig- zag course was followed to 0°40’E., then north to 34°00’S., and eastward to Cape Town, which was reached April 7, 1937. 1936-37. Norwegian expedition. LrabDER: Lars Christensen.. SuHips: Thorshavn and Firern. Summary: Financed by Lars Christensen. Expe- dition left Cape Town December 28, 1936, with in- tention of photographing from the air the coast line of Antarctica from Shackleton Ice Shelf west to Princess Martha Coast. The floating factory Ole Wegger was met on January 14, 1936 in about 62°S., 86°E. The plane was transferred next day from the Thorshavn to the whale catcher Firern, as were also Captains Nils Larsen and Klarius Mikkelsen, aviator Viggo Widerge, and photog- rapher Nils Romnaes. On January 21 Gribb Bank and on January 25 Four Ladies Bank were dis- covered by the Thorshavn. Until January 25, when the Thorshavn joined the Firern, conditions were not entirely favorable. Aerial survey began next day, from 68°05’S., 78°55’E., with two flights in which coast line of Prydz Bay was photographed. On January 28 flights were made from about 68°26’S., 70°03’E. in MacKenzie Bay, covering Lars Christensen and Mac-Robertson Coasts to 66°E. Landing was made by a party from the Thorshavn at Scullin Monolith on January 30. Next day a third series of flights were made from 66°13’S., 57°50’E., off Kemp Coast. Two more flights were GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA made on February 1 from 65°47’S., 55°11’E., cover- ing a great part of Enderby Land. The Firern was then released, and the Thorshavn proceeded west past Cape Ann on February 2. Ice conditions were unsuitable for a take-off until February 4, at 68°11’S., 35°47’E. Ona flight from there, with Mrs. Christensen as passenger, Prince Harald Coast was discovered. Next day two flights were made from 67°50’S., 34°03’E., photographing the coastal area bordering Havsbotn, from 40°E. to 34°E. On last flight, February 6, from 69°15’S., 26°00’E., Sgr Rondane Mountains were photographed. The Thorshavn left for Cape Town on February 7, 1937. 1937-38. Discovery Investigations (British). LEADER: G. W. Rayner. Surp: William Scoresby. Summary: Beginning in September 1937, the Wil- liam Scoresby marked whales and carried on supplementary oceanographic work in south At- lantic Ocean and Bellingshausen Sea. Landing made on Saunders Island in South Sandwich Is- lands. Ship returned to London April 12, 1938. 1937-39. Discovery Investigations (British). LrapeErS: Dr. N. A. Mackintosh, succeeded by H. F. P.Herdman. Sup: Discovery II. Summary: The Discovery II, with N. A. Mackin- tosh in charge of scientific work, left London Oc- tober 7, 1937 and, after calling at Cape Town in November, began circumpolar cruise carrying out program of daily oceanographic observations, par- ticularly pertaining to the whale. A zigzag course, based on the edge of the pack ice, was maintained throughout by tacking first southeast then north- east. The first part, between about 20°H. and 90°E., was north of 60°S. After a stop at Fre- mantle, the ship headed due south, on December 29, 1937, to the pack ice off Budd Coast. From there, on January 11, 1938, the zigzag course east- ward was resumed, this time south of 60°S. Bal- leny Islands were sighted on January 21 and two days were spent in a running survey, in clear weather. Course then set for New Zealand, arriv- ing January 31, after a call at Campbell Island. On February 8, with H. F. P. Herdman in charge of scientific work, the ship left Dunedin for Antipodes Islands from which a course was set southward along 170°00’W. to the edge of the pack at 68°31’S. From there a zigzag course was followed south of 60°S. to Drake Passage. On March 20 the ship left Falkland Islands, sailing to the pack edge 90 miles south of South Orkney Islands before turning northeastward to South Georgia, arriving March 28, 1938. From there a course was laid eastward to 50°S., 0°, then south to the pack ice. Skirting the pack to 20°E., the Discovery IJ then sailed north to Cape Town, arriving May 4. After a refit, the Discovery II, on July 1, 1938, began a series of seven cruises over a rectilinear course from Cape Town 28 southwestward to 40°S. at 0°, then south on 0° to the edge of the pack ice, eastward to 20°E., and north to Cape Town. Regular observations across this area were made for period of nine months to show seasonal changes in pack ice, weather, sea temperatures, and marine life. On sixth cruise a landing was made on Bouvetgya, in January. On seventh cruise, beginning February 15, 1939, edge of pack ice had retreated sufficiently along Princess Astrid Coast to enable staff to sight land from the ship on March 3 and 5. The Discovery II left for London on March 29, 1939. 1938-39. United States expedition. LeapER: Lincoln Ellsworth. Sure: Wyatt Earp. Summary: Financed by Lincoln Ellsworth. Ex- pedition left Cape Town October 29, 1938 and on November 20, in 55°27’S., 75°19’E., encountered pack ice from which the ship did not emerge until open water was reached off Ingrid Christensen Coast on January 2, 1939. A short flight was made in the small seaplane on December 31, and land sighted from the ship next day. A second flight, on January 2, revealed the coast line from Vestfold Hills to Amery Ice Shelf. Between January 3 and 11 the coast line between Vestfold Hills and Rauer Islands was examined for ice suitable for a take-off by the large plane. Several boat landings and short flights were made. On January 11 the plane took off on the margin of the ice shelf east of Vest- fold Hills, flying southward over featureless, snow- covered continental plateau to 72°S., 79°E. The Wyatt Earp later skirted the ice shelf eastward, then emerged from the pack in 65°00’S., 80°05’E. on January 19. Hobart was reached February 4, 1939. 1938-39. German Antarctic Expedition. LeapDER: Capt. Alfred Ritscher. Suir: Schwaben- land. SumMmMary: Sponsored by German government and Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (German Re- search Society) of Berlin. The Schwabenland, a catapult ship carrying two flying boats, left Ham- burg December 17, 1938 on a quick dash to Ant- arctica for purpose of mapping, by means of aerial photography, and laying claim to a portion of the continent. On April 11, 1939, she returned to Cuxhaven after mapping Princess Martha Coast and Princess Astrid Coast between 12°W and 16°E. Area photographed extended from the shoreline across the coastal foreland up onto the continental plateau. Most southerly point claimed to have been reached was 74°25/S., 0°20’W. Arriving at edge of the ice shelf on January 19, 1939, the ship remained in area about three weeks. During this time there were only three periods when weather and ice conditions were favorable for flying. The flights were, accordingly, made from the ship in GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA three series as she slowly worked eastward, be- ginning from 69°10’S., 4°20’W. and ending near 69°05’S., 14°00’E. Meteorological, hydrographical, biological, and geophysical observations also made. 1939-41. United States Antarctic Service. LEaDER: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.). Sips: Bear and North Star. SumMary: Sponsored by United States govern- ment, and assisted in equipping expedition by pri- vate and commercial donors. The two expedition ships left the United States in November 1939, ar- riving at Bay of Whales January 11, 1940. West Base established there under Dr. Paul A. Siple. The North Star then departed for Valparaiso for equipment and supplies for the East Base, while the Bear, between January 19 and 30, pushed northeastward through the pack to 174°43’S., 143°52’W. Enroute, three flights to the east and south made from the ship. On February 1 the Bear left Bay of Whales, sailing westward along Ross Ice Shelf to Victoria Land, then northeast from Terra Nova Bay into south Pacific Ocean, thence eastward toward Palmer Peninsula. Dur- ing this cruise three flights were made south from the ship to Walgreen Coast, Thurston Peninsula, and Seraph Bay. . The first was made on February 24 from 70°43’S., 108°25’W., the second on Febru- ary 25 from 70°58’S., 105°33’W., and the third on February 27 from 70°04’S., 95°19’W. The Bear and North Star met at the entrance to Marguerite Bay on March 3, 1940. With aid of aerial reconnais- sance a site was selected on Stonington Island where East Base was established under Lt. Cdr. Richard B. Black, USNR. The ships left for the United States March 21. Winter at East Base was occupied with depot laying and aerial recon- naissance, preliminary to more extensive summer work. Flights were made to the east coast of Palmer Peninsula and this coast was photographed between Hearst Island and Cape Northrop on Sep- tember 21 and 28. From October 26 to December 30 a weather station was maintained on the plateau east of base to aid flying operations. Three flights were made over Alexander I Island. The first, on November 4, followed a triangular course, south- westward across northern part of the island, south- eastward to George VI Sound, and north along the sound to base. On December 22 a flight was made westward over northern Alexander I Island to Charcot Island, then south to Ronne Entrance and westward to 72°55’S., 78°50’W., where the plane returned to base. On December 28 a flight was made along the entire length of George VI Sound. From November 7 to January 28 Finn Ronne and Carl R. Eklund sledged the entire length of the sound. A second party, under J. Glenn Dyer, left base in company with Ronne, separating on the Dyer Plateau south of Wordie Ice Shelf on No- 29 vember 22. They sledged southeastward to tne Eternity Mountains, returning to base December 12. These operations were supported by supplies laid by plane and dog team. The third major sledge journey began on November 18 and led across Palmer Peninsula and south along its east coast to 71°51’S., 60°47’W. On December 30 the last major flight was made south into George VI Sound and southeast across Palmer Peninsula to Cape Dar- lington in 72°00’S., 60°43’W., thence south to Wright Inlet in 74°00’S., 61°15’W. Plane then re- turned to base following east side of Palmer Pen- insula to Trail Inlet. Three flights were made from West Base in February 1940. The first was to Ruppert Coast on the 8th. On February 12 a flight was made southwestward over Ross Ice Shelf to about 81°08’S., 176°15’W. The third flight, on February 29, followed a course southwestward to the mouth of Beardmore Glacier, then east along the front of Queen Maud Range, turning northeast, east, and northwest along the eastern edge of Ross Ice Shelf on the return to base. Major discoveries were Shackleton Glacier and an ice-drowned island similar to and lying southeast of Roosevelt Island. Depots were laid by tractor, tank and plane. Gaso- line dumps laid by plane greatly extended the ex- ploratory flights. Four long exploratory flights were made eastward and northeastward over Marie Byrd Land on December 9, 13, 16, and 18, 1940. All reached or exceeded 135°W. The flights of De- cember 9 and 18 revealed open water north of Rup- pert Coast. Westward flight along edge of Ross Ice Shelf was made on December 12. Three parties sledged from West Base into Marie Byrd Land in mid-October. The Biological Party visited Fos- dick Mountains on the eastern shore of Ross Sea. The Pacific Coast Party sledged to Mount Berlin, in Hal Flood Range, to establish ground control. The Geological Party sledged to the Edsel Ford Ranges. Cosmic ray and auroral observations were also carried out. The two ships returned to Bay of Whales in January 1941 for evacuation of West Base, and departed on February 1. They proceeded north to Scott Island and then eastward toward Marguerite Bay, arriving off Adelaide Island on February 24. Ice conditions, however, prevented entrance into Marguerite Bay. It was finally neces- sary on March 22, 1941, to evacuate East Base per- sonnel by plane to Watkins Island (formerly Mik- kelsen Island), in the Biscoe Islands. Personnel transferred on same day to the Bear and sailed northward. 1942. Argentine expedition. LEADER: Capt. A. J. Oddera. Mayo. Sum™Mary: Sponsored by Comisién National del Antartico and Ministry of Marine. Expedition called at Deception Island in January and Febru- SHIP: Primero de GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ary, making territorial claim to this sector. A beacon was installed and hydrographic survey made in Melchior Islands. 1943. Argentine expedition. LeapeR: Capt. S. Harriague. Mayo. Summary: Sponsored by Comision National del Antartico and Ministry of Marine. Ships sailed south from Ushuaia on February 18, 1943, passing west of South Shetland Islands enroute to Melchior Islands. Hydrographic survey of Melchior Islands completed. Sailed south to Stonington Island in Marguerite Bay, where materials left by the United States Antarctic Service were collected. Flights were made from Port Lockroy. Called at Deception Island. Sure: Primero de 1943-45. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey (Operation Tabarin). LEADER: Lt. Cdr. J. W. S. Marr, RNVR. SuHIPps: William Scoresby and Fitzroy. Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office and Admiralty. The two ships sailed south from Falkland Islands and on February 3, 1944 reached Deception Island, where Base B was established for territorial administration and meteorological ob- servation. Vessels then sailed to Hope Bay, ar- riving February 7, but ice conditions prevented un- loading materials for base there. The ships turned north into Bransfield Strait, then southwestward along the west coast of Palmer Peninsula in search of possible base site. With coal running short on the Fitzroy, the ships were forced to run for the sheltered harbor of Port Lockroy where Base A was set up on Goudier Islet. On February 17, 1944, the vessels returned to Falkland Islands. Meteor- ological observations as well as geological, topo- graphical, and biological surveys were made in the Port Lockroy area. 1945-46. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey. LeapER: Capt. A. Taylor, RCE. Suips: William Scoresby, Fitzroy and Eagle. Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office. Bases at Deception Island and Port Lockroy were visited in January and February 1945 and resup- plied and staffed with four men each as weather stations. A hut for future occupancy was erected on Coronation Island in South Orkney Islands. Base D was established by the Eagle at Hope Bay in February, but storms prevented complete un- loading of supplies on a return trip in March. Twelve men were stationed at Hope Bay, under Taylor, where a weather station was maintained and geological and biological investigations were carried on. James Ross Island and environs were surveyed in two sledge journeys. 30 1946-47. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey. LEADER: Cdr. E. W. Bingham, RN. Suips: William Scoresby, Fitzroy and Trepassey. Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office. The ships sailed from Falkland Islands January 9, 1946, and by January 17 the bases at Hope Bay, De- ception Island, and Port Lockroy were re-equipped and staffed by new personnel. Base C was estab- lished in the South Orkney Islands on Cape Geddes, Laurie Island, and additional supplies were landed at the hut on Coronation Island. Emergency stores were laid at the former base of the British Graham Land Expedition in Argentine Islands on way south to Stonington Island, where Base E was established on February 24, 1946. Weather sta- tions with four men each functioned at Deception Island, Port Lockroy, and Cape Geddes. Eight men were based at Hope Bay and ten men at Stonington Island. From November 1946 to January 1947 the plateau upland of Palmer Peninsula was charted between 68°00’S. and 66°30’S. by two Stonington Island sledge parties. Hope Bay sledge parties mapped Louis Philippe Peninsula from Cape Roquemaurel northeastward, as well as the coastal area northwest of Prince Gustav Channel. 1946-47. British whaling expedition. LEADER: Rupert Trouton (Capt. Reider Pedersen, John Grierson). Sure: Balaena. Summary: Sent out by United Whalers, Limited, the ship engaged in whaling off Queen Mary Coast and Wilkes Land from January to March 1947. Land was sighted from ship on five days between 109°E. and 111°E. Two amphibian planes used for ice reconnaissance and for spotting whales. Peaks were reported on flight of February 12, 1947 in about 66°S., 110°E. Scientific program included study of meteorology, ornithology, ice conditions, physiology of the whale and the suitability of whale meat for human consumption. 1946-47. British expedition. LEADER: Niall Rankin. Suir: Albatross. Summary: A private expedition to South Georgia for purpose of photographing wildlife. Operations carried on by three-man crew in a series of cruises from the base at Leith Harbor. Supplies were transported for the group by whalers. 1946-47. United States Navy Operation Highjump LreapERS: Rear Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.), and Rear Adm. Richard H. Cruzen, USN. Sures: Thirteen ships of ‘“Task Force 68.” Summary: Expedition split into three groups to photograph from the air a large part of the coast- line of Antarctica. Main objectives were to test equipment and train men under polar conditions. Central group under Admiral Cruzen consisted of the Mount Olympus, Yancey, Merrick, the ice- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA breaker Northwind, and submarine Sennet. This group established a base on Ross Ice Shelf at Bay of Whales, January 16, 1947. Six transport planes were flown to the base from the carrier Philippine Sea for 29 photographic flights over Ross Ice Shelf and lands bordering the shelf to the west and south, western Marie Byrd Land, and the polar plateau. A tractor journey to Rockefeller Mountains was made. A limited program of meteorology, glaci- ology, and geophysics was carried on. The base was evacuated on February 23, 1947 by the ice- breaker Burton Island. Eastern group under Capt. George J. Dufek consisted of seaplane tender Pine Island, destroyer Brownson, and tanker Canisto. This group rendezvoused near Peter I Island in late December. Bad weather curtailed flights over coastal area south of Bellingshausen Sea, and in latter part of January the group moved westward and in clearer weather photographed the coast south of Amundsen Sea, roughly between 100°W. and 125°W. This completed, the group returned eastward with flights over Charcot and Alexander I Islands, and by March had cruised east of the Greenwich meridian with flights over Princess Martha Coast. Western group under Capt. Charles A. Bond consisted of seaplane tender Currituck, de- stroyer Henderson, and tanker Cacapon. They rendezvoused north of Balleny Islands in Decem- ber, then cruised westward until March making 25 photographic flights over the continental margin from Oates Coast, in 164°E., almost half way around Antarctica to Princess Astrid Coast in 15°E. Numerous geographic discoveries made, including an ice free area close south of Queen Mary Coast. 1947. Argentine expedition. LreapER: Capt. Luis Miguel Garcia. Snips: King, Murature, Ministro Ezcurra, Don Samuel, Gran- ville, Patagonia, Chaco, and Fournier. Sum™Mary: Sponsored by Comision Nacional del Antartico and Ministry of Marine. The Patagonia and Don Samuel proceeded from Ushuaia January 24, 1947, calling at Deception Island January 29, to protest existence of Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey Base B. On January 31 a base was started in Melchior Islands. An amphibian flight was made southward from the Patagonia. Other ships assisted in base construction while Garcia in the Don Samuel sailed south to Marguerite Bay, call- ing at Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey Base E at Stonington Island. Automatic lighthouses were erected at Py Point on Doumer Island, and Cape Anna on Palmer Peninsula. Eight men, un- der Lieutenant Nadau, remained to staff the Mel- chior Islands base. A navigational beacon was erected in May by the Fournier on Anvers Island. The King and Murature carried on reconnaissance in South Shetland Islands, South Orkney Islands, and Weddell Sea. Personnel at the Argentine 31 weather station on Laurie Island in South Orkney Islands were relieved. 1947. Chilean expedition. LEADER: Capt. Frederico Guesalago Toro. Iquique and Angamos. Summary: Sponsored by Chilean Navy. The ships sailed from Valparaiso in January 1947. The Iquique visited the South Shetland Islands, calling at Deception Island, then sailed southward through De Gerlache Strait to Marguerite Bay. The An- gamos established a base at Discovery Bay, Green- wich Island in the South Shetland Islands before sailing south to Marguerite Bay in March. Five men wintered on Greenwich Island under Lt. Boris Kopaitic O’Neil. SHIPS: 1947-48. Argentine expedition. LEapER: Capt. Richardo Hermelo. Suips: Bou- chard, Granville, King, Pampa, Ministro Ezcurra, Murature, Chiriguano, Sanaviron, Seaver, Parker, Esiv Brunt and Charwa. Summary: Sponsored by Comisién Nacional del Antartico and Ministry of Marine. An ice recon- naissance in Bransfield Strait was begun in No- vember 1947 by the Bouchard, Granville, and King. Construction of a base at Deception Island was started in December. A survey flight by a navy plane was made from Piedrabuena airfield in Patagonia across Deception Island, Melchior Is- lands, Adelaide Island and Palmer Peninsula. Ac- tivities were carried on under escort of naval ves- sels on maneuvers in Antarctic waters. Naviga- tional lights were erected in Melchior Islands. A temporary hut was erected at Admiralty Bay, King George Island. A winter party under Lt. Roberto A. Cabrera was left at Deception Island, and another under Lt. L. Roque de Costillas at Melchior Islands. 1947-48. United States Navy Operation Windmill. LEADER: Cdr. Gerald L. Ketchum, USN. Surpes: Icebreakers Edisto and Burton Island. Summary: Objective of expedition was to secure ground control data for the aerial photography of Operation Highjump by landing at several points by means of helicopters. From Samoa the ships forced their way into the ice of Davis Sea in 92°E. in December 1947. Landing was made on Haswell Islet. Ships then cruised eastward along the edge of the pack with landings in about 105°E. and off Knox Coast. McMurdo Sound, Bay of Whales, and Peter I Island were visited before calling at Mar- guerite Bay. The expedition assisted in freeing the Port of Beaumont, Texas by breaking ice in Neny Bay before departing for home on February 23, 1948. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1947-48. Norwegian expedition. LreapDER: Capt. Nils Larsen. Snip: Brategg. Summary: Sponsored by Norske Hvalfangstsels- kapers Forbund (Federation of Norwegian Whaling Companies). Oceanographic research carried on from Peter I Island westward to 174°31’W., north of Ross Sea, following a zigzag course between the edge of the pack and 62°00’S. On returning a landing was made on Peter I Island for geological and zoological work. Ship departed February 13, 1948 for Deception Island. The oceanographic program was mainly planned by the Norske Geo- grafiske Selskabs Havforsknings Komite (Commit- tee of Oceanographic Investigation of the Nor- wegian Geographic Society). 1947-48. Ronne Antarctic Research Expedition. LreapER: Cdr. Finn Ronne, USNR. Sure: Port of Beaumont, Texas. Summary: Sponsored by American Geographical Society, Office of Naval Research, Air Force, and private donors, with aid of equipment borrowed from government agencies. Expedition sailed with three planes from Beaumont, Texas, on January 23, 1947, through Panama Canal, and arrived in Marguerite Bay March 12. Former East Base of the United States Antarctic Service on Stonington Island was reoccupied and the Port of Beaumont, Texas frozen in for the winter. Seismological, meteorological, and geophysical observations car- ried on continuously at base; cosmic rays and marine tides were studied. During flying season, weather stations were maintained on the plateau east of the base and at Cape Keeler on east coast of Palmer Peninsula. Two major sledge journeys, a geological trip to George VI Sound and a joint trip with the Falkland Islands Dependencies Sur- vey from Stonington Island to the east coast of Palmer Peninsula and south to Bowman Peninsula in 74°47’S., 62°22’W., were carried out with air support. Nine major exploratory flights were made, resulting in 14,000 tri-metrogon aerial photographs. Several landings made in the field for geographical fixes and refueling. On Novem- ber 7, 1947 a triangular course was flown over Weddell Sea in the vicinity of Hearst Island. On November 21 a flight was made south along the east coast of Palmer Peninsula, landing on the ice in Gardner Inlet in 74°48’S., 62°50’W. to refuel, and then southwestward to Mount Hassage on Joerg Plateau. The edge of Filchner Ice Shelf at the head of Weddell Sea was next examined. Plane was forced down by fog off Cape Knowles on return to base, which was reached on November 22. On November 27 a flight was made northward to Marin Darbel Bay, then southwestward over Alexander I Island. On December 3, George VI Sound was explored from the air southward to Batterbee Mountains, after which a flight was made 32 across central Alexander I Island. Second flight to head of Weddell Sea began December 8, but heavy overcast forced planes down off Cape Wheeler until December 12 when the flight was continued south and eastward along edge of the ice shelf to 78°30’S., 42°00’W. On December 22 and 23 flights were made northward beyond 66°S. on both sides of Palmer Peninsula. Last major flight occurred on December 23, flying southward along east side of George VI Sound, then west-southwest along its southern shore and landing at 74°30’S., 79°00’W. Plane then flew northeastward over Alexander I Island, then northwest to Charcot Island where another landing was made before returning to base. The expedition evacuated its base on February 20, 1948. 1947-48. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey. LEADER: Maj. K. S. P. Butler. Suips: Fitzroy and Trepassey. Summary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office. Base A, the meteorological station at Port Lockroy, was evacuated and closed for the winter April 9, 1947. Base B at Deception Island was rebuilt fol- lowing a fire and maintained as a weather station with five men; a plane table survey was carried on. Base C, Laurie Island, was evacuated March 17, 1947. Base D, Hope Bay, was relieved in February 1947. A weather station was maintained at Hope Bay and a survey of Prince Gustav Channel com- pleted. Depots were laid as far as Seal Nunataks in support of a long sledge journey south along the east coast of Palmer Peninsula which was begun October 27, 1947. This group was met near Three Slice Nunatak by a joint (Ronne Antarctic Re- search Expedition — Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey) assisting party from Stonington Island, which guided them across the peninsula to Stoning- ton Island. Base E, Stonington Island, was re- lieved February 5, 1947. A staff of 11 maintained a weather station there and, in cooperation with the Ronne expedition, a station on the plateau east of the base. They assisted Ronne’s geological party on first part of journey into George VI Sound and from October 9, 1947 to January 16, 1948 participated in a joint British-American sledge journey, with air support by Ronne, south- ward along the east coast of Palmer Peninsula from Joerg Peninsula in 68°12’S., 65°12’W. to Bow- man Peninsula in 74°47’S., 62°22’W. At Base F, Argentine Islands, a: new building was erected in January 1947 to replace the old hut of the British Graham Land Expedition which had been de- stroyed along with an emergency depot by a tidal wave. Four man staff at Base F operated a weather station, supplied seal meat for the other bases, and bred sledge dogs. Base G at Admiralty Bay, King George Island, was established as two man weather station in January 1947. Erection GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA of Base H on Signy Island was begun March 10, 1947, to replace Base C. Weather station at Base H staffed by four men. Signy Island was surveyed and ice conditions were recorded. 1947-48. Chilean expedition. LEADER: E. G. Navarrete. Surips: Covadonga, Ran- cagua and Presidente Pinto. Summary: Sponsored by Chilean government. A base at Discovery Bay, Greenwich Island, was vis- ited in December 1947, and a second base erected at Cape Legoupil on Palmer Peninsula. Party of government officials, including President Gonzalez Videla, visited in the Presidente Pinto in February. Wintering parties were stationed at both bases. 1947-55. Australian National Antarctic Research Expedition. LEADERS: Group-Captain Stuart A. Campbell, suc- ceeded by Phillip G. Law. Surips: Wyatt Earp (1947-48), Labuan (1949-51), Tottan (1952-53), Kista Dan (1954-55). Summary: Sponsored by the Antarctic Division, Australian Department of External Affairs. A 14 man winter party under A. V. Gottly landed on Heard Island in December 1947, making observa- tions in meteorology, cosmic rays, geology, biology and geophysics. ‘Topographic survey of the island was undertaken. After return for repairs the Wyatt Earp left Melbourne for the Antarctic in February 1948, but was prevented from reaching Commonwealth Bay on George V Coast by heavy ice. The ship cruised eastward to the Balleny Is- lands, landing on Borrodaile Island. A running survey was made of Young, Buckle, Borrodaile, Sabrina and Row Islands. Second attempt was made to reach George V Coast early in March, but aerial reconnaissance showed unfavorable ice con- ditions and the ship withdrew on the 14th. Relief of Heard Island personnel carried out by the La- buan in January 1949. Scientific program was continued by 11 man party under R. W. Allison. This group was in turn relieved by a 14 man party under J. W. P. McCarthy.in January 1950. Heavy storm damage forced retirement of the Labuan from service in 1951 after a 14 man relief party under F. T. Hannan was established on the island. Meteorological, geophysical and biological observa- tions were continued by a 14 man party under L. F. Gibbney which accompanied the Tottan in Febru- ary 1952. Routine observations were continued by a 13 man party under John M. Bechervaise, upon return of the Tottan in February 1953. This party was in turn relieved by a 9 man party under Dr. G. Budd which accompanied the Kista Dan in January 1954. Collecting supplies at the Ker- guelen Islands, the Kista Dan continued south- ward to Mac-Robertson Coast and landed on Feb- ruary 13 in a protected cove indenting the main- land in 67°36’S., 62°53’E., as previously selected 33 from United States Navy Operation Highjump aerial photographs as the base site for ‘Mawson station.” After the 10 man wintering party under Robert G. Dovers was established, the Kista Dan headed eastward, making solar and magnetic ob- servations close off Scullin Monolith and at “Mag- netic Islet” in Prydz Bay. The ship retired north- ward to Heard Island to collect the 1953 wintering party, and reached Melbourne in late March. Sci- entific work at the Heard Island station ceased on October 31 and the base was dismantled in early 1955, except for living quarters and emergency supplies. Observations in meteorology, geology, glaciology, cosmic rays, seismology, ionospherical physics and geophysics were undertaken at “Maw- son station.” Three major journeys, with empha- sis on topographic and geologic investigations, were completed by tractor parties. One extended about 160 miles westward to the head of Edward VIII Bay. The second extended about 130 miles southeastward to a prominent group of interior mountains sighted by Operation Highjump per- sonnel in March 1947 which lie south of the eastern end of Lars Christensen Coast. The third journey extended about 100 miles eastward to Scullin Monolith. Combined sea and land operations per- mitted solar observations to be completed at 13 localities between 57°05’E. and 77°54’E. Relief of the 1954 mainland wintering party by a 15 man party under Jéhn M. Bechervaise was completed in February 1955, and scientific observations were continued in the general base area. 1948-49. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey. LeapEeR: V. E. Fuchs. Suips: John Biscoe, Snipe and Fitzroy. SummMary: Sponsored by the British Colonial Of- fice. Base A, Port Lockroy was re-opened in Feb- ruary 1948 with a five man staff for geophysical observations. Base B, Deception Island, continued as a weather station with four men. Base D, Hope Bay, was relieved in March 1948, and staffed with seven men. Six sledge journeys made from Hope Bay to study geology and complete survey of Louis Philippe Peninsula. Base D was destroyed by fire which killed two men and was evacuated on Febru- ary 4,1949. Base E, Stonington Island, was staffed with 11 men to run weather station and carry out topographical and geological surveys. A depot was laid at northeast end of Alexander IIsland. Find- ing no practical route over or around the north end of Alexander I Island, a party sledged southward in George VI Sound to 71°35’S. Square Bay and southeast side of Adelaide Island were surveyed. Base F, Argentine Islands, was staffed by four men who continued a program of weather observation, dog breeding, and stocking seal meat for other bases. At Base G, Admiralty Bay, four men op- erated weather station and began geological sur- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA vey of King George Island. At Base H, Signy Is- land, three men operated weather station, studied elephant seals, and made survey of Signy and a part of Coronation Island. 1948-49. Argentine expedition. LEADER: Unknown. Surps: Pampa, Sanaviron and Chaco. Summary: Sponsored by Comisién Nacional del Antartico and Ministry of Marine. Wintering par- ties at Melchior Islands, Deception Island, and Laurie Island were relieved. Further work pre- vented by unfavorable ice conditions. 1948-49. Chilean expedition. LreaDER: Leopoldo Fontaine. Maipo and Lautaro. Summary: Sponsored by Chilean government. Severe ice conditions prevented a proposed estab- lishment of a base at Marguerite Bay. Bases at Discovery Bay on Greenwich Island, and Cape Legoupil on Palmer Peninsula were relieved and winter parties stationed. SHIPS: Covandonga, 1948-53. French Antarctic Expedition. LeapER: André F. Liotard, Michel Barré and Mario Marret. SHips: Commandant Charcot and Tottan. Summary: Sponsored by Expéditions Polaires Francaises, a government organization. Left Ho- bart on February 4, 1949, but spent 23 days in vain attempt to break through 40 miles of pack ice off Adélie Coast. Commandant Charcot then retired to Belleny Islands, landing on Sabrina Islet March 7. Meteorological and hydrographic studies were made and a survey carried out. Re- turned to France via Macquarie Island and Aus- tralia. Left Hobart on second attempt December 21, 1949. Reached Cape Découverte, Adélie Coast, on January 18, 1950. Base established at Cape Margerie on January 20. Ship laid depots at Cape Jules and Cape Denison before returning home. Studies at “Port Martin” base included meteor- ology, cosmic rays, seismology, hydrography and zoology. A sledging program was carried on along the coastal margin to the borders of Adélie Coast. Astronomical control was obtained along the east- tern half of the coast for use in identifying United States Navy Operation Highjump aerial photo- graphs which were later used in compiling maps of this coast. Biological studies made at newly discovered emperor penguin rookery at southern end of Géologie Archipelago. Liotard’s party was relieved by a 14 man party under Michel Barré in January 1951. Reconnaissance of the coast was made from Commandant Charcot and a depot laid in Géologie Archipelago to assist additional bio- logical and topographic studies in the area. Mag- netic and astronomical observations were made at Cape Denison. Journey to South Magnetic Pole 34 thwarted by tractor failure, but glacial and seis- mic studies were successful on later journey about 200 miles south from the base. Sledge party trav- ersed to Cape Pépin area. Fire destroyed main buildings of “Port Martin” base in January 1952 at the time the relief ship Tottan called. A seven man party under Mario Marret established another base in the Géologie Archipelago and made an in- tensive study of the nearby Emperor penquin rookery. Astronomical control and survey work completed along the western end of Adélie Coast. Party evacuated in January 1953 by the Tottan. 1949-52. Norwegian — British - Swedish Antarctic Expedition. LEADER: Capt. John Giaever. Sup: Norsel. Summary: Sponsored by Norsk Polarinstitutt, gov- ernment grants from Norway, United Kingdom and Sweden, Norske Geografiske Selskab, Royal Geographical Society, and Svenska Sallskapet for Anthropologi och Geografi. The Norsel left Lon- don on November 23, 1949 for rendezvous with the floating factory Thorshgvdi near the South Sand- wich Islands, January 13, 1950; sledge dogs and three “weasels” transshipped. Air reconnaissance from February 1 to 3 led to landing in a small bay about 40 miles northeast of Cape Norvegia. On February 10, ‘““Maudheim,” the base, was estab- lished on the ice shelf about two miles south of the bay in 71°02’S., 10°55’W. During next few days an air reconnaissance unit of five men and two planes made numerous flights, sketching and photographing the coast. The air unit and planes returned north in the Norsel on February 20, leav- ing a winter party of 15 men. The scientific pro- gram was divided with Norwegians chiefly respon- sible for topography and meteorology, British for geology and Swedes for glaciology and aerial pho- tography. Subsidiary base for scientific work was set up about 185 miles south of the main base at an elevation of about 5,000 feet, in 172°16’S., 3°49’W., from which a party under Schytt made a reconnaissance of the area in October and Novem- ber 1950. The Norsel returned to Maudheim on January 6, 1951, left three additional men and took back one of the 1950-51 group, departing on Janu- ary 30. The wintering party was reduced to 14 by the accidental death of three members. Air op- erations during this visit of the Norsel were held to a minimum by foul weather and damage to one of the two airplanes. The expedition was evacuated on January 15, 1952 by the Norsel, which had ar- rived on December 22, 1951. During the two field seasons the extensive scientific program included studies of ice, ice movement, snow accumulation, an ice-cap thickness profile to about 74°20’S. on the Greenwich meridian, geologic examination of all mountains and larger nunataks north of 73°50’S. between 2°00’E., and 12°00’W., triangula- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA tion covering about 23,000 square miles and aerial photography that should exteid the inland sur- vey to about 38,000 square miles, physiological re- actions of man to polar climates, geomagnetism and aurora, surface and upper air meteorology. 1949-53. Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey. LEADER: V. E. Fuchs. Suips: John Biscoe, Sparrow, Snipe and Burghead Bay. SumMmMary: Sponsored by British Colonial Office. Base A, Port Lockroy, evacuated and closed Feb- ruary 1949. Reoccupied January 1950 to February 1951, and continuously since February 1952, prin- cipally for meteorological and ionospheric obser- vations, the latter beginning in February 1952 with equipment transferred from Deception Island. Four men were stationed at Base B, Deception Island, to operate weather station and new power- ful transmitter for improved communications. Some geological and glaciological investigations as well as soundings and charting were carried on. Survivors of the fire at Base D, Hope Bay, were evacuated in February 1949. The rebuilt base was occupied in February 1952. In addition to meteorology, the survey of James Ross Island was completed and additional work done between Hope Bay and Stonington Island, with some geological work in both areas. A limited program of phys- iological investigation was carried on. Severe ice conditions prevented relief of personnel at Base E, Stonington Island. Program at Stoning- ton Island included study of emperor penguins on De Dion Islets. A long sledge journey was made through George VI Sound to open water at Eklund Islands. Base E was evacuated and closed by the John Biscoe in February 1950. Base F, Argentine Islands, was staffed with four men who operated a weather station and made short sur- vey journeys in the vicinity under handicap of mild weather and deteriorating ice. Base G, Admiralty Bay, was staffed with six men (five in the winters of 1951-53), who maintained weather observations, rude geological and topographical surveys, and carried on glaciological investigations. The Burg- head Bay in February 1952 triangulated the inner harbor of Admiralty Bay and made running sur- veys of the seaward coasts of Deception Island, Visca Anchorage, Admiralty Bay and Signy Island. Four men (five from 1951 on) at Base H, Signy Island, continued study of elephant seals, surveyed the south side of Coronation Island, operated weather station, and made investigations of geol- ogy, tides, ice and fauna. Base M at Grytviken was occupied in January 1950. Wintering parties included five men in 1951, three in 1952, two in 1953. The program included meteorological and sea ice observations, and twice-daily weather anal- ysis and forecasts, December 1950 to March 1951, and for a considerable period in 1952-53. 35 1950-51. National Institute of Oceanography Ex- pedition (British). LrapER: Dr. H. F. P. Herdman. Sup: Discovery II. Summary: This sixth two-year commission of the Discovery II, the first under the newly organized National Institute of Oceanography, was designed to complete the pre-war oceanographic work of the Discovery Committee in the Antarctic. The ship left England May 10, 1950, via Suez and the Indian Ocean for Australia with work enroute. In Au- gust a line of stations had been completed along 90°E. through the central Indian Ocean to the edge of the pack ice. The remainder of 1950 was devoted to work in waters east and south of Aus- tralia and New Zealand with a cruise eastward in November to 150°W., and thence south to the ice edge which was skirted westward for 1,000 miles before returning to Dunedin. A lack of data for winter conditions was filled in by a winter circum- polar cruise conducted in 1951. 1951-52. South Georgia Survey. LEADER: Verner D. Carse. Suips: Various whaling vessels. Summary: A private British expedition, consisting of a party of six, left Glasgow on September 16, 1951 in the whaling tanker Southern Opal and ar- rived at Leith Harbor, South Georgia, November 1. The object of the party was to map the south coast from Cape Disappointment to King Haakon Bay, and the interior south and west of Allardyce Range. The next day a base was set up in the jail at Grytviken. After making reconnaissance jour- neys north and south of Cumberland Bay, the party was taken on December 11 by the former catcher Stina to Royal Bay where they landed with supplies. Two sledges were man-hauled up Ross Glacier, hampered by poor weather. Ross Pass at the head of the glacier was reached on Decem- ber 15, and the party descended toward the south coast. Undine South Harbor was found to be about ten miles southeast of its charted position. Work was interrupted on January 1, 1952 when a party member was injured in a fall down a crevasse, necessitating a return to base. The return began on January 3, but a food depot was first left about five miles southeast of Undine South Harbor. Cumberland Bay was reached three days later via Ross Glacier, Cook Glacier and Nordenskjéld Gla- cier, and on January 7 the catcher Skua took the party to Grytviken. On January 25 the five remaining members of the party were landed by catcher at Fortuna Bay on the north coast. Poor weather again made surveying difficult, but a short journey was made west and north to the isthmus between King Haakon Bay and Possession Bay. The party returned to Stromness Bay at the end of February. During the third week in March a four man party was landed at Royal Bay to complete the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA work started in December. They failed to locate the depot left on January 3 and had to return to base a few days later. Meanwhile, Carse spent a week aboard a sealer off the south coast making compass controlled sketches of the bays, until exceptionally bad weather brought the sealing season to a sudden close. The party left South Georgia for the United Kingdom in the Southern Opal on April 18, 1952. 1953-54. South Georgia Survey. LEADER: Verner D. Carse. Surps: Various whaling vessels. Summary: A private British expedition consisting of Verner D. Carse, G. Smillie, A. Trendall and K. Warburton left Glasgow in the whaling tanker Polar Maid on August 29, 1953, arriving at Leith Harbor in South Georgia on October 10. As in 1951, a base was set up in the jail at Grytviken. In mid-October Carse made a brief preliminary recon- “naissance around the northwestern end of the is- land in the sealer Albatros, while Smillie and Tren- dall did geological work in the Dartmouth Point area of Cumberland East Bay. The first main journey began on October 29 without Warburton, who was ill at Grytviken, when Carse, Smillie and Trendall were landed at Sunset Fjord in the Bay of Isles. Next day they started up Brunonia Glacier with two sledges. On November 5 they reached its head and began the descent toward the head of Ice Fjord. From this point on there was little snow cover and they had to backpack all their equipment. Turning northward, they travelled along the rugged north coast of the island, reach- ing the head of Right Whale Bay on November 14. After ten days of survey and geological work in this vicinity, the party returned to Brunonia Glacier. From there they hoped to link their survey with the 1951-52 survey to the east, but between De- cember 3 and 16 continued bad weather prevented this, and they were forced to withdraw to Ample Bay in the Bay of Isles. The party returned to Grytviken by sea on December 19. Later that month Smillie and Trendall visited the east side of Cumberland East Bay for four days’ survey and geological work. Shortly after their return to base Warburton had to be invalided home. The second main journey began on January 11, 1954 when the party landed about two miles west of Cape Vahsel near the southeast extremity of the island. By January 25 the party had traveiled southwest to the vicinity close northeast of Drygalski Fjord. There ten days were spent studying the geology and making a local survey. On February 6 and 7 they travelled westward, intending to circle around the head of Drygalski Fjord and extend the survey toward Novosilski Bay. They were stopped short by ridges which extend from Salvesen Range down to the northern shore of Drygalski Fjord. Forced 36 to turn eastward again, they reached the coast at Cooper Bay on February 16. The following day they signalled a passing catcher and on the 18th arrived back at Grytviken. Smillie returned home, but Carse and Trendall remained in South Georgia for two months, continuing the survey and geologi- cal work. Favorable weather on March 9, 10 and 11 allowed them to land from a sealer on Annenkov Island. Between March 23 and April 4 they com- pleted the survey of the Cape Charlotte peninsula on the southeast side of Royal Bay. They sailed for home in the whaling tanker Southern Opal on April 17, 1954. Lack of snow, poor weather and the illness of one member of the party resulted in curtailment of the original plans, necessitating further work to complete the survey of the island. 1954-55. Argentine expedition. LEADER: Capt. Luis R. A. Capurro. San Martin. Summary: The ship sailed south in late December from Scotia Bay in the South Orkney Islands and entered the eastern part of Weddell Sea, taking advantage of ice conditions in that portion of the sea. The frontal ice cliffs were quickly surveyed and photographed from the ship and by helicopters in the area between 33°E. and 45°E. A scientific base was established in early January near the head of Filchner Ice Shelf in about 78°00’S., 38°33’W. Stancomb — Wills Ice Tongue was found to be non-existent, and no major glaciers were found by the expedition. A large open channel was found to parallel the ice front. Following completion of oceanographic, meteorologic and astronomic observations, the ship retired north- ward to the South Sandwich Islands. Suip: General 1954-55. United States Government expedition. LreapER: Cdr. Glen Jacobsen. Suir: Atka. Summary: Sponsored by the United States Navy and other government agencies. The ship sailed south from the vicinity of Scott Island in early January 1955 with a primary purpose of examining a site for the main United States base to be estab- lished as part of the International Geophysical Year operations of 1957-58. A large section of the Ross Ice Shelf forming the west side of the Bay of Whales was noted as having cracked away and drifted out to sea, rendering the former natural harbor of little use at this time. Little America IV, the site of United States Navy Operation High- jump, 1946-47, was also found to have been broken away. Failing in attempts to enter the ice-filled Sulzberger Bay, the Atka returned to survey the Kainan Bay area. Coastal reconnaissance was also made along the Princess Martha Coast in the region between 0°30’W. and 20°W., resulting in the delineation of several bays and ice tongues asso- ciated with the coastal ice cliffs in this area. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Geographic Names The following list includes decisions of the Board on Geographic Names, concurred in by the Secretary of the Interior, to January 1956. The names in capitals are official for United States Government use. Names following the words “not adopted” in- clude variant spellings and applications other than as approved. Such names are listed in italics and cross referenced when they would not immediately follow or precede the approved name in alphabeti- cal order. Names that have been dropped are listed in italics followed by the word VACATED. Explanation of abbreviations follows the table of contents. AAGAARD GLACIER: glacier about 8 mi. long, which lies close E. of East Gould Gl. and flows in a southerly direction into Mill Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°47’S., 64°31’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE during December 1947. Named by the FIDS for Bjarne Aagaard, Norwegian authority on Antarctic whaling and exploration. AAGAARD ISLANDS: group of islets about 1 mi. W. of Proclamation I., along the coast of Enderby Land; in about 65°50’S., 53°37’E. Disc. in Janu- ary 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson and named for Bjarne Aagaard. Not adopted: Bjarne Aagaard Islands, Bjarne-Aagaard Islands. ABBOTT, MOUNT: mountain about 3,000 ft. in el., which lies SW. of Mt. Melbourne and surmounts the southward projecting peninsula terminating in the Northern Foothills on the W. side of Terra Nova Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 74°50’S., 163°45’E. Probably first sighted by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Named by the BrAH, 1910- 13, under Scott for Petty Officer George P. Abbott, RN, member of the latter expedition. Ablation Bay: see Ablation Valley. ABLATION POINT: the E. extremity of a hook- shaped rock ridge, about 1,800 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to Ablation Valley on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 70°48’S., 68°22’W. The point was first photographed from the air on Noy. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. Named by FIDS after nearby Ablation Valley. 37 ABLATION VALLEY: a mainly ice-free valley on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 4 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which lies immediately S. of Abla- tion Pt. and opens on George VI Sound; in 70°48’S., 68°26’W. This feature was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W.L.G. Joerg. It was first visited and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and so named by them because of the relatively small amounts of snow and ice found there. Not adopted: Ablation Bay. ABRAHAMSEN, POINT: point which separates Lighthouse Bay and Prince Olav Hbr., the two western arms of Cook Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Charted by DI per- sonnelin 1929. Probably named for Captain Abra- hamsen, manager of the whaling station at Prince Olav Hbr. at that time. ACTIVE SOUND: sound, averaging about 2 mi. wide, extending in an ENE. direction from Ant- arctic Sound and joining the Firth of Tay with which it separates Joinville and Dundee Islands; in 63°25’S., 56°10’W. Disc. in 1892-93 by Capt. Thomas Robertson of the Dundee whaling expe- dition. Robertson named the feature after his ship, the Active, first vessel to navigate the sound. ACUNA ISLET: islet which lies 0.2 mi. S. of Point Rae, off the S. coast of Laurie I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°37’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named by him for H. Acuna, pioneer Argentine meteorologist at the South Orkney station. Not adopted: Acuna Island, Delta Island. ADAM, MOUNT: mountain about 10,000 ft. in el., which lies SW. of Mt. Wright in the Admiralty Range in Victoria Land; in about 71°25’S., 169°00’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for V. Adm. Sir Charles Adam, Senior Naval Lord of the Admiralty and Commander-in-Chief in the West Indies. Not adopted: Mount Adams. ADAMS, CAPE: abrupt rock scarp marking the S. tip of Bowman Pen. and forming the N. side of the entrance to Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 75°04’S., 62°20’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and named by him for Lt. Charles J. Adams of the then USAAF, pilot with the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Charles J. Adams. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ADAMS, MOUNT: peak about 11,800 ft. in el., which marks the summit of the mountain mass immediately S. of Bingley Gl. on the W. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 84°26’S., 166°45’E. The BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, originally gave the name Adams Mountains to the partially- defined mountains immediately S. of Bingley Gl. The BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, restricted the name Adams to the highest peak in these moun- tains, the peak serving as an easily identifiable landmark. Named for Lt. Jameson B. Adams, RNR, second-in-command of Shackleton’s expedi- tion. Not adopted: Adams Mountains. Adams Glacier: see John Quincy Adams Glacier. ADAMS ISLET: small rocky islet embedded in thick bay ice most of the year, lying at the W. side of McDonald Bay, about 9 mi. W. of Mabus Pt., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°31’S., 92°52’E. Disc. and charted by the Western Base Party of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named by him for the boatswain on the exp. ship Aurora. Not adopted: Adams Island. ADARE, CAPE: cape which marks the NE. extremity of Victoria Land and the E. side of the entrance to Robertson Bay; in about 71°17’S., 170°15’E. Disc. in 1831 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for his friend Viscount Adare, M.P. ADELAIDE ISLAND: large island, about 70 mi. long in a NESW. direction and 20 mi. wide, lying N. of Marguerite Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°15’S., 68°40’W. Disc. on Feb. 14, 1832 by a Br. exp. under Biscoe, and named by him for Queen Adelaide of England. The island was first surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. ADELIE COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica lying between the ice-covered cape in 136°12’E., and Point Alden, in 142°02’E. Disc. in January 1840 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, and named by him for his wife. Not adopted: Adélie Land. Adélie Land: see Adélie Coast. ADIE INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 10 mi. long in a NW.-SE. direction, lying E. of the base of Churchill Pen. along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°18’S., 62°35’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE during 1947. Named by the FIDS for R. J. Adie, South African geologist with the exp., 1947-49. A. Ditte, Mount: see Ditte, Mount. Admiralitats Gebirge: see Admiralty Range. 38 ADMIRALTY BAY: irregular bay, about 4 mi. wide at its entrance, indenting the S. coast of King George I. for about 10 mi., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°25’W. The name appears on an 1822 map of the Br. sealing exp., 1821, under Powell, and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Baie de lAmirauté [French]. Admiralty Inlet: see Admiralty Sound. ADMIRALTY RANGE: extensive mountain range, with peaks above 10,000 ft. in el., along the N. and NE. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°20’S., 168°30’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for the Lords of the Admiralty under whose orders the exp. sailed. Not adopted: Admiralitats Gebirge [German]. ADMIRALTY SOUND: a sound which extends in a NESW. direction and separates Seymour and Snow Hill Islands from James Ross I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°20’S., 57°10’W. The broad NE. part of the sound was named Ad- miralty Inlet by the Br. exp. under Ross, who disc. it on Jan. 6, 1843. The feature was determined to be a sound in March 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskj6ld. Not adopted: Admiralty Inlet, Détroit de ’ Amirauté [French]. Adolph Ochs Glacier: see Ochs Glacier. ADRIASOLA, CAPE: rock outcrop marking the SW. end of Adelaide I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°37’S., 69°20’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for an acquaintance in Punta Arenas. Not adopted: Adriasola Cape. Adventure Bay; Adventure Harbor: see Undine Harbor. Aetna Insel: see Etna Island. AGASSIZ, CAPE: the E. tip of Hollick-Kenyon Pen., a narrow ice-drowned spur extending E. from the main mountain axis of Palmer Pen.; in 68°30’S., 62°58’W. Disc. in December 1940 by the USAS who named it for W. L. G. Joerg, geographer and polar specialist. At his request it was named by the US-ACAN for Louis Agassiz, internationally famous American naturalist and geologist of Swiss origin, who first propounded the theory of conti- nental glaciation. Not adopted: Cape Joerg. AHLMANN GLACIER: southernmost of two gla- ciers flowing E. into Seligman Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 65°45’W. The glacier was photographed from the air in 1940 by the USAS. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Prof. Hans Wilhelmsson Ahlmann, Swedish glaciologist and geographer. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Aidwich, Mount: see Aldrich, Mount. Aiguille de Astrolabe: see Astrolabe Needle. AILSA CRAIG: precipitous islet about 1 mi. S. of Point Rae, off the S. coast of Laurie I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°37’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named by him after the island in the Firth of Clyde in Scotland. Not adopted: Ailsa Craig Islet. AINSWORTH BAY: open bay lying between Capes Bage and Webb, along George V Coast; in about 67°48’S., 146°45’E. Disc. in 1912 by the Main Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named, by him for G. F. Ainsworth, who served as leader and meteorologist with the AAE party based on Macquarie Island during 1911-13. AITCHO ISLANDS: group of small islands lying between Table and Dee Islands and extending across the central part of the N. entrance to Eng- lish Str., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°23’S., 59°50’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. The name appears to have been first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon this survey. AITKEN COVE: cove which lies immediately NE. of Cape Whitson, along the S. coast of Laurie I. in South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°32’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named by him for A. N. G. Aitken, solicitor to the expedition. Akar Peaks; Aker Range: see Aker Peaks. AKERLUNDH NUNATAK: nunatak which lies 1 mi. NW. of Donald Nunatak and midway between Bruce and Burn Murdoch Nunataks in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 60°11’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Gustaf Akerlundh, a member of the SwedAE, 1901-4. AKER PEAKS: series of mainly snow-covered peaks, the highest about 5,900 ft. in el. They rise WNW. of Edward VIII Bay in Enderby Land and extend about 30 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction; in about 66°43’S., 55°20’E. Disc. on Jan. 14, 1931 by a Nor. whaling exp. under O. Borchgrevink, and named by him for the farm of Dir. Svend Foyn Bruun of the Antarctic Whaling Co. at Ténsberg. Not adopted: Akar Peaks, Aker Range. ALAMODE ISLAND: largest and southeastern- most of the Terra Firma Is., with steep rocky cliffs surmounted by a rock and snow cone rising to about 1,100 ft. in el., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°43’S., 67°32’W. 39 First visited and surveyed by the BGLE under Rymill in 1936. So named by the FIDS, following a 1948 resurvey, for its resemblance to some form of confection served with ice cream on it. Alan Thomson, Mount: see Allan Thomson, Mount. ALBANUS GLACIER: valley glacier about 8 mi. wide and of undetermined length which flows W. between the Tapley Mtns., on the N., and Mounts Danforth and Zanuck, on the S., in the Queen Maud Range, and enters Robert Scott Gl. about, 20 mi. S. of where it merges with the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°50’S., 150°00’E. Disc. in De- cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Albanus Phillips, Jr., manufacturer of Cambridge, Md., and patron of the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted: Phillips Glacier. Albatros Insel: see Albatross Island. ALBATROSS ISLAND: island about 2 mi. SE. of Cape Buller, lying in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in about 54°02’S., 37°20’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who gave this name because he observed albatrosses there. Not adopted: Albatros Insel [German], Albatross Islet. ALBERT DE MONACO, CAPE: cape which forms the SW. tip of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°42’S., 64°15’W. Disc. by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann, but its relationship to Anvers I. was not known at that time. It was later charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Prince Albert de Monaco, a patron of the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Monaco. ALBERT MARKHAM, MOUNT: striking, flat- topped mountain, about 10,000 ft. in el., standing W. of Beaumont Bay and the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°25’S., 158°00’E. Disc. in December 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and named by him for Adm. Sir Albert Markham, a member of the Ship Committee for the expedition. ALBRECHT PENCK GLACIER: short, deeply en- trenched glacier which is a southern tributary of Fry Gl., on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°40’S., 162°30’E. First charted by the BrAH, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Dr. Albrecht Penck, internationally known geographer, who at that time was Dir. of the Inst. for Oceanog- raphy and of the Geographical Inst. in Berlin. The US-ACAN added the Christian name to the surname to differentiate this feature from Penck GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Glacier on the Luitpold Coast. Penck Glacier. Not adopted. ALDEN, POINT: ice-covered point with rock ex- posures along its seaward side, lying at the W. side of the entrance to Commonwealth Bay, and mark- ing the physical division between Adélie Coast and George V Coast; in about 66°49’S., 142°02’E. Disc. on Jan. 30, 1840 by the USEE under Wilkes, and named by him for Lt. James Alden on the USEE flagship Vincennes. ALDRICH, MOUNT: mountain about 8,050 ft. in el., which stands W. of Cape Kerr in the Britan- nia Range, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°06’S., 158°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him for Adm. Pelham Aldrich, who gave assistance to Scott in preparing the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Aidwich, Mount Aldwich. Aldwich, Mount: see Aldrich, Mount. ALECTORIA ISLET: low islet about 0.5 mi. off the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen. and some 10 mi. SW. of Pitt Pt., lying in Prince Gustav Chan.; in 63°59’S., 58°37’W. Disc. in 1945 by the FIDS, who named it after the lichen Alectoria which was pre- dominant on the islet at the time. ALENCAR PEAK: peak about 5,100 ft. in el., which lies 4.8 mi. E. of Mt. Rio Branco and is the more easterly of two snow-capped peaks situated toward the NW. end of the ridge separating Trooz Gl. from Beascochea Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°27’S., 63°50’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Adm. Alexandrino de Alencar, at that time Min- ister of Marine of Brazil. Not adopted: Mount De Alencar. ALERT ROCK: submerged rock marked by break- ers, lying about 1.5 mi. ESE. of Barff Pt., the E. side of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°22’W. Charted in 1929 by DI per- sonnel, who named it after the Alert, a small motor launch used during the survey. ALEXANDER, CAPE: cape which forms the S. end of Churchill Pen. and the E. side of the entrance to Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°44’S., 62°37’/W. Charted by the FIDS and pho- tographed from the air by the RARE in December 1947. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. Albert V. Alexander, M.P., First Lord of the Admiralty. Not adopted: Cape Foyn. ALEXANDER HUMBOLDT MOUNTAINS: ma- jor range of the Wohlthat Mtns. in New Schwaben- land which extends some 30 mi. in a N.-S. direction 40 and rises to about 10,500 ft. in elevation. The range is separated from Petermann Range to the E. by the Humboldt Graben; in about 71°45’S., 11°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named by them for Alexander von Humboldt, famed German naturalist and geographer of the first half of the nineteenth century. Not adopted: Alexan- der v. Humboldt-Gebirge [German]. ALEXANDER I ISLAND: large island lying W. of the base of Palmer Pen., from which it is sep- arated by Marguerite Bay and George VI Sound; in 71°S., 70°W. Shaped like the letter J, it is about 235 mi. long in a N.S. direction, 50 mi. wide in the N., and 150 mi. wide in the S. Disc. in 1821 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who named it Alexander I Land after the reigning Tsar. Its insular nature was proven in December 1940 by a sledge party under Finn Ronne of the USAS. Not adopted: Alexander Land, Alexander I Land. Alexander Land: see Alexander I Island. Alexander Wetmore Glacier: Wetmore Glacier. see Alexander v. Humboldt-Gebirge: see Alexander Humboldt Mtns. ALEXANDRA, CAPE: cape which forms the NW. tip of South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 38°02’W. This cape was named Cape North in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, but the name given by Cook has since become established for the cape about 10 mi. ENE. which forms the northernmost point of South Georgia. The name Cape Alexandra dates back to about 1912 and probable commemorates Queen Alexandra of England. Not adopted: Cape North (q.v.). ALEXANDRA, CAPE: cape which forms the SE. tip of Adelaide I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°45’S., 68°36’W. Disc. on Jan. 14, 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, and named by him for Alex- andra, then Queen of England. ALEXANDRA MOUNTAINS: series of low, sep- arated mountains in the NE. portion of Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°30’S., 152°00’W. Disc. in Jan- uary—February 1902 by the BrNAE, under Scott, during an exploratory cruise of the Discovery along Ross Ice Shelf. Named for: Alexandra, then Queen of England. Not to be confused with the Queen Alexandra Range in 84°S., 169°E. Not adopted: Alexandria Mountains. Alexandra Mountains; Alexandra Range: see Queen Alexandra Range. Alexandria Mountains: see Alexandra Mountains. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Alfa, Isla: see Alpha Island. ALFRED, MOUNT: ice-capped mountain, about 7,400 ft. in el., standing 5.5 mi. inland from George VI Sound and 8 mi. SSE. of Mt. Athelstan in the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island; in 70°18’S., 69°14’"W. This mountain was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W.L.G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 and 1949 by the FIDS, who named it after Alfred, Saxon king of England, 871-899. ALICE CREEK: cove forming the southernmost portion of Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for the wife of Edouard Lockroy, vice pres. of the French Chamber of Deputies who assisted Charcot in ob- taining govt. support for the expedition. ALICE GADE, MOUNT: mountain about 11,300 ft. in el., which marks the highest peak of an ex- tensive broken massif forming the SE. flank of Isaiah Bowman Gl., standing in the Queen Maud Range near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°50’S., 162°00’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for one of the daughters of the Norwegian minister to Brazil, a strong supporter of Amundsen. Alice Wedel-Jarlsberg, Mount. Wedel-Jarlsberg: see Allan McDonald Glacier: see McDonald Glacier. ALLAN THOMSON, MOUNT: conspicuous moun- tain surmounted by a dark peak about 4,200 ft. in el.; stands at the N. side of Mackay Gl. and about 4 mi. W. of the mouth of Cleveland Gl., in Vic- toria Land; in about 76°57’S., 161°47’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Named by the exp. for Dr. J. Allan Thomson, British geolo- gist. Not adopted: Mount Alan Thomson. Allardyce Harbor: see Rosita Harbor. ALLARDYCE RANGE: mountain range attain- ing a maximum elevation of 9,200 ft. in Mt. Paget, rising S. of Cumberland Bay in the central part of South Georgia; in about 54°25’S., 36°33’W. Al- though not shown on the charts of South Georgia by Cook in 1775 or Bellingshausen in 1819, peaks of this range were probably sighted by those ex- plorers. Named in about 1915, for Sir William L. Allardyce, Gov. of the Falkland Islands, 1904-14. ALLEGHENY MOUNTAINS: group of moun- tains, about 4,000 ft. in el., between the upper part of Boyd Gl. and its northern tributary, in the 424589 O-57-4 41 Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°15’/S., 143°08’W. Disc. on aerial flights made in 1934 by the ByrdAE, and mapped from aerial flights and ground surveys made by the USAS, 1939-41. Named by the USAS for Allegheny Col- lege, Meadville, Pa., alma mater of Paul Siple, leader of the USAS West Base. ALLEN, CAPE: cape which lies close W of Mt. Hope and marks the W. side of the mouth of Beard- more Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°33’S., 170°45’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, probably for Sir James Allen, M.P., New Zealand statesman who assisted in obtaining support for the expedition. ALLEN BAY: semi-circular bay about 1 mi. wide, lying NW. of Larsen Pt. at the N. side of the en- trance to Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°31’W. Charted in 1926 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery, and named by them prob- ably for H. T. Allen, member of the Discovery Com- mittee at that time. ALLEN POINT: the SE. point of Montagu I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°29’S., 26°15’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for H. T. Allen. ALLEN YOUNG, MOUNT: mountain about 9,450 ft. in el., which rises about 10 mi. WSW. of Cape Maude and Mt. Asquith in the Queen Alexandra Range, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°23’S., 167°25’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1902-9, under Shackleton, and named by him for Sir Allen Young, polar explorer who led the successful search for Benjamin Leigh Smith in 1882. ALLIGATOR ISLET: steep, rocky islet, about 0.5 mi. long and about 200 yards wide, rising about 500 ft. above the Shackleton Ice Shelf, and lying in the Bay of Winds about 4 mi. W. of Jones Rocks, off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°33’S., 97°33’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who so named it because of its shape. Not adopted: Alligator Island. All Johannesens Point: see Johannesen Point. ALLO, MOUNT: conspicuous, conical, snow- covered peak about 2,000 ft. in el., which rises from Cape Neyt near the NE. end of Liége I., in the Palmer Arch; in about 63°59’S., 61°46’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Alma McCoy, Mount: see McCoy, Mount. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ALMOND POINT: rocky point forming the E. side of the entrance to Whitecloud Cove at the head of Charcot Bay, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°51’S., 59°24’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of its distinctive shape. ALPHA ISLAND: small islet lying between Epsi- lon I. and Delta I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64’19°S., 63°00’W. The name Alpha, de- rived from the first letter of the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was sur- veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943, and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Alfa [Spanish], Isla Huidobro [Spanish]. Alzogaray, Islas: see Theta Islets. AMELANG PLATFORM: a relatively flat-topped upland platform, about 11,500 ft. in el., projecting N. from the polar plateau and overlooking the New Schwabenland piedmont; in about 73°50’S., 5°15’W. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named by them for Herbert Amelang, first officer of the exp. ship Schwabenland. American Geographical Society Bay: see Gard- ner Inlet. AMERICAN HIGHLAND: that portion of Ant- arctica back of the Ingrid Christensen Coast, con- sisting of an upland area of undetermined physical extent with an elevation of about 7,500 feet; in about 72°S, 79°E. Disc. and named by Lincoln Ellsworth on Jan. 11, 1939, in an aerial flight from his ship, the Wyatt Earp. AMERY ICE SHELF: broad ice shelf along Lars Christensen Coast between MacKenzie Bay and Prydz Bay; in about 69°S., 72°H. Cape Amery was applied to a coastal angle mapped in an aerial flight on Feb. 11, 1931, by the BANZARE. Since this now appears to be an ice shelf, the name is applied to the whole shelf. Probably named for William B. Amery, Rep. of the United Kingdom in Australia, 1925-28. Not adopted: Amery Shelf NCE: Amery Shelf Ice: see Amery Ice Shelf. Ames Glacier: see Boyd Glacier. AMES RANGE: range of isolated, snow-covered, flat-topped, steep-sided mountains, lying along the W. shore of Wrigley Gulf in Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°30’S., 131°00’W. Disc. by the USAS, 1939-41, and named by Byrd for Joseph Ames, father-in-law of R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, leader of the expedition. Not adopted: Joseph Ames Range. 42 AMIOT ISLANDS: group of islets bordered by southwestward-extending reefs, about 14 mi. WNW. of Cape Adriasola, Adelaide I.; in 67°32’S., 69°55’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char- cot, and named by him for A. Amiot, engineering director of the French Montevideo Co., Montevideo, Uruguay, which made repairs on the exp. ship Pourquoi-Pas?. Amirauté, Baie de l’: see Admiralty Bay. Amirauté, Détroit de ’: see Admiralty Sound. AMPHIBOLITE POINT: conspicuous, pyramidal point nearly 2 mi. NW. of Saunders Pt. on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°22’W. Named by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49. There is a large amount of amphibolite on this point. AMPHITHEATRE, THE: large bowl-shaped de- pression, about 0.75 mi. in diameter, at the S. side of the head of Northeast Gl. on Palmer Pen.; in 68°06’S., 66°34’°W. The feature lies adjacent to former bases of the BGLE, 1934-37, and the USAS, 1939-41, and was charted by USAS sledging parties which crossed Palmer Pen. via Northeast Gl. and Bills Gulch. Named by the FIDS following its survey in 1946. AMPLE BAY: bay about 1.8 mi. wide, marked by Grace Gl. at its head, situated about 2 mi. E. of Sunset Fjord in the SW. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°23’W. A sketch of this bay was made in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. The bay was named by DI personnel who charted it in 1929-30. AMUNDSEN, MOUNT: rocky summit about 4,000 ft. in el., protruding above the icecap about 10 mi. NNE. of Mt. Sandow, at the E. side of Den- man Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°18’S., 100°20’E. Disc. in December 1912 by Frank Wild and other members of the Western Base part of the AAE under Mawson. Named by Mawson for Roald Amundsen, Norwegian polar explorer and the first to attain the South Pole. Amundsen Bay: see Ice Bay. AMUNDSEN GLACIER: major glacier about 3 to 6 mi. wide and over 60 mi. long, which descends from the south polar plateau between Mt. Helmer Hanssen and the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. and flows N. to the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°35’S., 159°20’W. Disc. in November 1929 by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole. Named for Roald Amundsen by Laurence Gould, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA leader of the ByrdAE geological party which sledged across the terminal flow of this glacier in December 1929. AMUNDSEN SEA: marginal sea off the coast of Antarctica between Thurston Pen., which termi- nates in about 71°50’S., 100°50’W., and Cape Dart, in about 73°10’S., 123°00’W. Named for Roald Amundsen by a Nor. exp. under Nils Larsen which explored this area in February 1929. Not adopted: Franklin D. Roosevelt Sea, Roald Amundsen Sea. Amy Guest Island: see Guest Island. ANCHORAGE BAY: small bay in the W. side of Fortuna Bay, about 2 mi. S. of Cape Best, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°49’ W. Charted in 1929-30 by DI personnel and so named by them because it affords good anchorage. ANCHORAGE ISLET: islet which lies in the Léonie Is., about 0.5 mi. SE. of Lagoon Islet, off the SE. portion of Adelaide I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 68°13’W. Disc. by the FrAEK under Charcot, 1908-10. Named by the BGLE under Rymill, who visited this islet in Febru- ary 1936. ANDERSEN HARBOR: small harbor in the Mel- chior Is., Palmer Arch., formed by the concave W. side of Eta I. and the N. end of Omega I.; in 64°19’S., 62°56’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel, but this may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. The harbor was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Puerto Andersen [Spanish]. Andersen, Puerto: see Andersen Harbor. ANDERSON, CAPE: cape which marks the E. side of the entrance to Mill Cove on the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°34’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and named by him for his secretary, Nan Anderson. Not adopted: Cape Nan Anderson. ANDERSON GLACIER: heavily crevassed gla- cier, about 12 mi. long, flowing SSE. into the W. side of Cabinet Inlet between Cape Casey and Balder Pt., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°24’S., 63°55’W. Charted by the FIDS and pho- tographed from the air by the RARE in December 1947. Named by the FIDS for Sir John Anderson, M.P., Lord Pres. of the Council and member of the British War Cabinet. ANDERSON ICEFALLS: an icefall terminating in a cliff face about 100 ft. in el. and 5 mi. wide, lying SE. of Atkinson Cliffs along the N. coast of 43 Victoria Land; in about 71°21’S., 169°00’E. Charted in 1911 by Cdr. Victor L. A. Campbell’s Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Named by the BrAE, probably for Mr. Anderson of the firm of John Anderson and Sons, engineers, who owned Lyttelton Foundry, and who took great interest in the expedition. Not adopted: Anderson Ice Falls. ANDERSSON ISLAND: island about 9 mi. long and 4 mi. wide which lies 1 mi. S. of Jonassen I. at the W. side of the S. entrance to Antarctic Sound, off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°35’S., 56°35’W. This island was named Uruguay Island by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, after the Argentine ship Uruguay which participated in the rescue of the shipwrecked SwedAE in 1903. In 1904, the FrAE under Charcot, apparently un- aware of the Swedish naming, gave the name Uruguay to an island off the W. coast of Palmer Pen. Since it is confusing to have two islands in close proximity identically named, and because Charcot’s Uruguay Island has appeared more widely on maps and in reports, the US-ACAN accepts the decision of the Br-APC that the name given this island by Nordenskjéld be altered. The new name commemorates J. Gunnar Andersson, who was second-in-command of Nordenskjéld’s expedition. Not adopted: Uruguay Island. ANDERSSON NUNATAK: nunatak which stands above the coastal ice cliffs on the NW. shore of Hope Bay, about 1 mi. W. of Sheppard Pt., at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°22’S., 57°00’W. - Disc. by J. Gunnar Andersson’s party of the SwedAE, which wintered at Hope Bay in 1903. Named for Andersson by the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1945. ANDERSSON PEAK: ice-capped peak, about 4,000 ft. in el., with rocky exposures on its E. side, lying some 7 mi. N. of Cape Fairweather on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°53’S., 61°03’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, and named by them for Karl Andreas Andersson, zoologist with the SwedAE, who explored along this coast in 1902. ANDRESEN ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and about 1,300 ft. in el., which lies at the SE. side of Detaille It. in the N. part of Lallemand Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°56’S., 66°36W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char- cot, and named by him for the manager of the Magellan Whaling Co. at the company’s Deception I. base, who provided coal for the expedition. ANDREW GLACIER: glacier about 1.5 mi. wide, which lies 8. of Cape Kater and flows in an ENE. direction to the W. side of Charcot Bay, on the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°50’S., 59°40’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for Dr. J. D. Andrew, medical officer at the expedition’s Hope Bay base in 1946-47. ANDREW JACKSON, MOUNT: a massive moun- tain rising to about 13,750 ft. in el. and dominating the upland in the southern part of Palmer Pen.; in about 71°30’S., 63°30’W. It rises to a majestic summit peak on the S. and E., while the N. flank is occupied by a vast cirque. Disc. by members of the USAS, 1939-41, in aerial flights, and sighted by the ground survey party on the plateau. Named by USAS for Andrew Jackson, Pres. of the United States, 1829-42, who signed the bill author- izing the USEE, 1838-42, led by Lt. Charles Wilkes, USN. Not adopted: Mount Ernest Gruening. ANDREWS POINT: point:at the E. side of the entrance to Inverleith Hbr. on the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 62°50’W. Charted and named in 1927 by DI personnel on the Discovery. ANDVORD BAY: bay about 5 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, which lies between Cape Van Beneden and Cape Lacaze-Duthiers along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°49’S., 62°42’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for Rolf Andvord, Belgian consul at Christiania at that time. Not adopted: Andword Bay. Andword Bay: see Andvord Bay. Anglais, Détroit: see English Strait. ANGOT POINT: point which marks the S. tip of Hoseason I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 63°49’S., 61°43’W. Named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, for Alfred Angot, Asst. Dir. of the French Meteorological Service and member of the com- mission which published the scientific results of the expedition. ANILINE ISLET: small, flat-topped, rocky islet, about 15 ft. in el., lying 1 mi. SSW. of Dartmouth Pt. and about 150 yards off the E. shore of Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°28’W. The islet appears on earlier charts, but the name was given by FIDS in 1951 following a sketch survey. The name is one of a group in the vicinity of Dart- mouth Pt., derived from the chemical stains used in the preparation of histological examination of biological material collected by FIDS. ANN, CAPE: projecting cape on the coast of Enderby Land, surmounted by Mt. Biscoe which rises to over 1,500 ft. in el., about 66°13’S., 51°17’E. Photographed from the air on Dec. 22, 1929 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen in a flight from the 44 Norvegia, and on Jan. 14, 1930 photographed from the Discovery by the BANZARE under Mawson. Both expeditions believed the peak rising above the cape to be the same as that disc. on March 16, 1831 and named Cape Ann by a Br. exp. under Biscoe. The name Cape Ann, probably after Bis- coe’s wife, has been retained for the projecting cape; the surmounting peak was named Mt. Biscoe by Mawson. Not adopted: Cape Anne. ANNA, CAPE: prominent black cliff, about 2,000 ft. in el., forming the N. tip of Arctowski Pen., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°36’S., 62°26’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Anne, Cape: see Ann, Cape. ANNE, CAPE: point which marks the SE. ex- tremity of Coulman I., located in the Ross Sea near the coast of Victoria Land; in about 73°35’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for his wife. ANNE, MOUNT: mountain about 10,270 ft. in el., which stands on the S. side of Socks Gl. and W. of Beardmore Gl. in the Queen Alexandra Range; in about 83°56’S., 169°20’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. ANNENKOV ISLAND: irregularly-shaped island about 4 mi. long and about 2,000 ft. in el., lying some 8 mi. off the south-central coast of South Georgia; in about 54°29’S., 37°05’W. Disc. in January 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named it Pickersgills Island for Lt. Richard Pickersgill of the exp. ship Resolution. It was resighted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who, think- ing he was the discoverer of the island, named it Annenkov Island for Lt. Mikhail Annenkov, officer on the exp. ship Mirnyy. The island has since retained the name Annenkov; the name Pickers- gill has become established for a group of islands 15 mi. to the southeast. Not adopted: Annenkow Insel [German], Annenkov Islands, Pickersgills Island. Annenkow Insel: see Annenkovy Island. ANN ISLAND: islet in the Debenham Is., lying SE. of Barbara I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°06’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and named by him for a daughter of Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Advisory Committee. Ann Shirley, Mount: see Shirley, Mount. Anse des Baleiniers: see Whalers Bay. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ANTARCTICA: continent, together with the is- lands rising from the continental block, centering roughly on the South Pole and lying almost wholly within the Antarctic Circle. It is a relatively high and compact mass, and is snow covered except for the protruding peaks of mountains and mountain ranges. Not adopted: Antarctic Continent, Ant- arktika [German]. Antarctic Archipelago: see Palmer Archipelago. ANTARCTIC BAY: bay about 2 mi. wide which recedes SW. about 4 mi., lying midway between Possession and Fortuna Bays along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 36°57’W. Probably first sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. It was explored in 1902 by members of the SwedAE, under Nordenskjold, who named it for their ship, the Antarctic. Antarctic Continent: see Antarctica. ANTARCTIC CONVERGENCE: a line encircling Antarctica where the cold, northward-flowing Ant- arctic waters sink beneath the relatively warmer water of the sub-Antarctic. The line is actually a zone approximately 20 to 30 miles wide, varying somewhat in latitude in different longitudes, ex- tending across the Atlantic, Pacific and Indian Oceans between the 48th and 61st parallels of south latitude. The precise location at any given place and time is made evident by the sudden change in surface temperature which averages five to ten de- grees Fahrenheit. Although this zone is a mobile one, it usually does not stray more than half a degree of latitude from its mean position. This line, like the tree line of the north, is a natural boundary rather than one derived from reasoning. It not only separates two hydrological regions, but also separates areas of distinctive marine life asso- ciations and of different climates. The South Shetland Is., South Orkney Is., South Sandwich Is., South Georgia, Bouvet I., Heard I. and Mc- Donald Is. all lie south of the Antarctic Conver- gence. The Kerguelen Is. lie approximately on the Convergence; the Falkland Is., Prince Edward Is., Crozet Is. and Macquarie I. lie north of the Con- vergence. ANTARCTIC POINT: point which marks the W. side of the entrance to Antarctic Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°58’W. Charted in the period 1926-30 by DI personnel, who named it after nearby Antarctic Bay. ANTARCTIC SOUND: body of water about 30 mi. long and from 6 to 12 mi. wide, separating the Joinville I. group from the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°20’S., 56°45’W. The sound was named by 45 the SwedAE under Nordenskjold for the exp. ship Antarctic which in 1902, under the command of Capt. C. A. Larsen, was the first vessel to navigate it. Antarctic Tetons: see Lyttelton Ridge. Antarktika: see Antarctica. Antarktiske Arkipel: see Palmer Archipelago. ANTHONY GLACIER: glacier which flows in an ESE. direction to the E. coast of Palmer Pen. where it terminates opposite the S. tip of Hearst I.; in 69°48’S., 62°39’W. The upper part of this glacier was seen by a sledge party of the BGLE under Rymill in 1936-37. The glacier was seen from the seaward side in 1940 by a sledging party from East Base of the USAS, and in 1947 was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for Alexander Anthony of the J. P. Stevens Co., New York, which contributed wind- proof clothing to the RARE. Antwerpen Insel: Antwerp Island: see Anvers Island. ANVERS ISLAND: largest island in the Palmer Arch., lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen., from which it is separated by De Gerlache Str.; in 64°30’S., 63°30’W. Named in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache after the province of Anvers, Belgium. Not adopted: Antwerpen Insel [Ger- man], Antwerp Island. ANVIL ROCK: rock which lies in the Argentine Is., between Grotto I. and the SE. end of the Horse- shoe Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 64°177W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. The name is descriptive. ANVIL STACKS: two conspicuous sea stacks which lie close S. of the entrance to Elephant Bay, off the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 37°45°W. The name “Ele- phant Bay Islands,” derived from the nearby Ele- phant Bay, has been used locally for this feature by some South Georgia sealers. The descriptive name Anvil Stacks, a less cumbersome name, was ap- plied by the SGS following their survey in 1951-52. Not adopted: Elephant Bay Islands. APFEL GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 20 mi. long, flowing NW. along the S. flank of Bunger Hills and terminating in Edisto Ice Tongue, near the junction of Queen Mary and Knox Coasts; in about 66°25’S., 101°00’E. Delin- eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Earl T. Apfel, prof. of geology at Syracuse Univ., who served as geologist with the USN Op. Wml. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA parties which established astronomical control sta- tions along Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts during the 1947-48 summer. ARCHER, CAPE: cape which marks the N. side of the entrance to Granite Hbr., on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°50’S., 163°00’E. Named in 1912 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott for W. W. Archer, chief steward of the expedition. ARCHER POINT: rocky point about 4 mi. W. of Williamson Head, on Oates Coast; in about 69°06’S., 158°00’E. Disc. on February 1911 by Lt. H. L. L. Pennell, of the BrAE under Scott, while exploring the coast W. of Cape North in the Terra Nova. Probably named for W. W. Archer, chief steward of the expedition. Archipel de Pointe Géologie: see Géologie Archi- pelago. ARCTOWSKI NUNATAK: nunatak which lies 1.5 mi. NNW. of Hertha Nunatak in the Seal Nuna- taks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°06’S., 60°02’W. Charted by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold during a sledge journey in 1902, and named by him from Henryk Arctowski, Polish geologist, oceanographer, and meteorologist of the BelgAE, 1897-99. Not adopted: Arctowski Nu- natak. ARCTOWSKI PEAK: a somewhat isolated ice- covered peak about 4,600 ft. in el., standing about 8 mi. WSW. of the head of Howkins Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°44’S., 61°28’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the peak was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Henryk Arctowski. ARCTOWSKI PENINSULA: peninsula, about 15 mi. long in a N.-S. direction, which lies between Andvord and Wilhelmina Bays and terminates in Cape Anna, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°45’S., 62°25’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache and named for Henryk Arc- towski. The name was suggested by the US-ACAN for this hitherto unnamed feature. ARGENTINE ISLANDS: group of islets about 5 mi. SW. of Petermann I. and 3 mil. WNW. of Cape Tuxen, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Char- cot, and named by him for the Argentine Republic in appreciation of that government’s generosity and kindness to his exp. The BGLE under Rymill was based in the Argentine Islands in 1935 and con- 46 ducted a thorough survey of them. Not adopted: Iles Argentines [French]. Argentines, Iles: see Argentine Islands. ARMADILLO HILL: ice-covered hill which rises to about 5,900 ft. in el. and projects 400 ft. above the surrounding ice sheet, situated on the Palmer Pen. plateau about 4 mi. ESE. of the head of North- east Gl. and 10 mi. NE. of the head of Neny Fjord; in 68°07’S., 66°22’W. It was first roughly surveyed by the BGLE, 1934-37, and resurveyed in 1940 by sledging parties of the USAS on whose field charts the hill is labeled “Sawtooth.” It was named Armadillo Hill by the FIDS following its 1946-47 survey, because when viewed from the NE. the tumbled ice blocks on the summit and general shape of the hill resemble the side view of an armadillo. Not adopted: Sawtooth. ARMITAGE, CAPE: southernmost point on Ross I., lying at the end of a long narrow peninsula pro- jecting SSE. about 10. mi. from Mt. Erebus; in 77°50’S., 166°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him for Lt. (later Capt.) Albert B. Armitage, navigator on the exp. ship Discovery, Armitage, Mount: see Armytage, Mount. Armitage Promontory, Cape: see Hut Point Pen- insula. Army Range: see Le May Range. ARMYTAGE, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain about 15 mi. W. of Mt. Smith, in the Prince Albert Mtns. of Victoria Land; in about 76°01’S., 160°50’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackle- ton, and named by him for Bertram Armytage, a member of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Armitage. ARTHUR DAVIS GLACIER: valley glacier about 30 mi. long and from 4 to 8 mi. wide, which flows W. from the Rockefeller Plateau to Sulzberger Bay, lying in the Edsel Ford Ranges between Swan- son Mtns. on the N. and Mounts Cooper and Rea on the S., in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°03’S., 145°25’W. Disc. by members of West Base of the USAS, in aerial flights and from the ground, dur- ing November—December 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for R. Adm. Arthur C. Davis, USN, a leader in aviation in the U.S. Navy. Not adopted: Warpasgiljo Glacier. Arthur Owen, Mount: see Owen, Mount. Arthur Sulzberger Bay: see Sulzberger Bay. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ARRIVAL HEIGHTS: cliff-like heights which extend in a NE.-SW. direction-along the SW. side of Hut Point Pen., on Ross I.; in 77°49’S., 166°38’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. The name suggests the expedition’s arrival at its winter headquarters. Not adopted: Har- bour Heights. ARRONAX, MOUNT: ice-covered, pointed peak about 5,200 ft. in el., standing 5.5 mi. WSW. of Nautilus Head and dominating the N. part of Pour- quoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°40’S., 67°22’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named after Prof. Pierre Arronax, cen- tral character in Jules Verne’s Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea. ASHLEY SNOW NUNATAKS: three isolated peaks rising through the icecap S. of Ronne En- trance and E. of Carroll Inlet, on Robert English Coast; in about 73°15’S., 76°00’W. Sighted from the land and from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS, and named by them for Ashley C. Snow, aviation pilot on the expedition. ASH POINT: point which marks the SE. side of the entrance to Discovery Bay, on Greenwich I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 59°38’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II in 1935. ASHTON GLACIER: glacier about 9 mi. long, which flows ESE. from Mt. Thompson to the NW. side of Lehrke Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°44’S., 61°57’W. The glacier was photo- graphed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS, and was probably seen by the USAS ground survey party which explored this coast. A joint party consisting of members of the RARE and the FIDS charted the glacier in 1947. Named by the FIDS for L. Ashton, carpenter with the FIDS at the Port Lockroy and Hope Bay bases in 1944-45 and 1945-46, respectively. ASMAN RIDGE: crescent-shaped, serrate ridge about 5 mi. long, rising to an elevation of 1,500 ft. or more on the S. side of the middle part of Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°10’S., 144°45’W. Disc. in 1934 on aerial flights of the ByrdAE. Named by the USAS, 1939-41, for Adam Asman, a member of the USAS West Base party. ASPASIA POINT: steep rocky point forming the W. extremity of Fanning Ridge, lying 10 mi. ESE. of Cape Nunez on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 37°07’W. The feature was named by the Br-APC following its mapping by the SGS in 1951-52. The name derives from association with 47 Fanning Ridge. The American armed corvette Aspasia under Capt. Edmund Fanning took 57,000 fur seals at South Georgia in 1800-1. ASPLAND ISLAND: small island about 5 mi. W. of Gibbs I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 61°30’S., 55°55’'W. The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Aspland’s Island. ASQUITH, MOUNT: low, dark mountain in the Queen Alexandra Range, rising directly S. of Cape Maude along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°18’S., 168°00’E. Disc. by the BrAB, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named by him for Lord Asquith, Chancellor of the Exchequer, 1905-8, and Prime Minister, 1908-16. ASSES EARS, THE: three islets about 3 mi. NNW. of the W. tip of Robert I. and 1.75 mi. NE. of Table I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°19’S., 59°48’W. These islets, presumably known to early sealers in the area, were charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. The shape of the northeastern of the three islets suggests the name. ASSISTANCE BAY: small bay forming the head of Possession Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°08’S.,37°10’W. The bay was named by DI personnel who charted the area during the period 1926-30. ASTOR, MOUNT: high granitic peak in the Will Hays Mtns., rising to about 8,000 ft. in el., and standing on the E. side of Amundsen Gl., close N. of the N. end of Faulkner Escarpment, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°57’S., 156°00’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929, and named by him for Vincent Astor, contributor to the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Vincent Astor. ASTROLABE GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi. wide and 15 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the conti- nental ice to Adélie Coast and terminating in a prominent tongue at the E. side of Géologie Arch.; in about 66°45’S., 139°55’E. Probably first sighted in 1840 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, although no glaciers were noted on D’Urville’s chart of this coast. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp. in January 1947. It was charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and named for D’Urville’s flagship, the Astrolabe. Not adopted: Glacier Terra Nova [French]. ASTROLABE GLACIER TONGUE: prominent glacier tongue about 3 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, extending NE. from Astrolabe Gl. and fringed by numerous islets and rocks at the E. end of Géologie GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Arch., along Adélie Coast; in 66°42’S., 140°05’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for the French corvette Astrolabe. ASTROLABE ISLAND: island, about 3 mi. long and 1,500 ft. in el., which lies in Bransfield Str. about 13 mi. WNW. of Cape Ducorps, Louis Phi- lippe Pen.; in 63°20’S., 58°40’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him after his chief exp. ship, the Astrolabe. Astrolabe Island: see Astrolabe Islet (64°38’S., 62°52’W.). ASTROLABE ISLET: islet which lies 0.2 mi. off the E. coast of Anvers I. and about 4 mi. SW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 62°52’W. Charted in 1927 by DI personnel on the Discovery, who probably gave the name. Not adopted: Astrolabe Island. ASTROLABE NEEDLE: conspicuous pointed monolith about 150 ft. in el., standing near Claude Pt., off the NW. side of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°07’S., 62°41’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. The Astrolabe was one of the ships of the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40. Not adopted: Aiguille de 1l’Astrolabe [French]. ASTRUP, CAPE: bold, dark-colored, bluff mark- ing the NE. end of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°43’S., 63°08’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 189799, under De Gerlache, and named by him for Eivind Astrup, Norwegian Arctic explorer and member of Robert E. Peary’s expeditions to Greenland in 1891-92 and 1893-95. Not adopted: Cap Edvind Astrup [French]. ATHELSTAN, MOUNT: prominent, partly ice- covered mountain, about 5,300 ft. in el., situated at the N. side of Trench Gl. on a spur which extends E. from the Douglas Range, on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 70°10’S., 69°16’W. The coast in this vicinity was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and this feature was mapped from the photographs by W.L. G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 and 1949 by the FIDS, and named by them after Athelstan, Saxon king of England, 924-937. ATHERTON ISLANDS: two conspicuous islets, about 140 ft. in el., lying about 8 mi. SW. of Stigant Pt., off the N. coast of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°03’S., 58°55’W. Charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Dis- covery II. 48 ATKINSON CLIFFS: steep cliffs, about 2,260 ft. in el., about 8 mi. NW. of Cape Barrow on the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°20’S., 168°50’E. Charted in 1911 by the BrAE under Scott, and named for Dr. Edward L. Atkinson, surgeon of the expedition. ATLAS COVE: cove on the N. coast of Heard I., entered between the base of Laurens Pen. and Rogers Head; in 53°01’S., 73°22’E. Named by American sealers after the schooner Atlas, a tender to the Corinthian in Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers’ sealing fleet which landed at Heard I.in 1855. The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. ATRICEPS ISLET: the southernmost and larg- est of the Robertson Is., lying 2 mi. S. of the SE. end of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 45°10’W. Named by the FIDS, following their survey of 1948-49, after the colony of blue-eyed shags (Phalacrocorax atriceps) nesting on the islet. ATTLEE GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. long, which flows SSE. from the plateau escarpment on the E. side of Palmer Pen. to the head of Cabinet Inlet between the mouths of the Bevin and Mor- rison Glaciers; in 66°13’S., 63°43’W. During De- cember 1947, the glacier was charted from the ground by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. Clement R. Attlee, M.P., British Sec. of State for Dominion Affairs, member of the War Cabinet, and later Prime Minister. ATWOOD, MOUNT: twin-peaked mountain, about 4,000 ft. in el., at the extreme W. edge of the Clark Mtns., rising above the icecap of the Rocke- feller Plateau in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°15’S., 142°09’W. Disc. by the USAS in 1940 in aerial flights from the West Base. Named by the USAS for Pres. Emeritus W. W. Atwood, Sr. of Clark Univ., noted geologist and geographer, and his son, W. W. Atwood, Jr., who has collaborated with his father in glaciological studies. AUDREY ISLAND: southernmost islet in the Debenham Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°07’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and named by him for a daughter of Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Advisory Committee. AUGUSTE ISLAND: flat-topped island about 1 mi. long, lying in De Gerlache Str. about 4 mi. ENE. of the NW. tip of Two Hummock,1., off the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°04’S., 61°32’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for his father. AUREOLE HILLS: two smooth, conical, ice- covered hills about 2,800 ft. in el., standing close W. of the N. end of Detroit Plateau and about 6 mi. S. of Bone Cove, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°46’S., 58°54’W. Named by the FIDS following their survey in 1948. The name is descriptive. AURORA PEAK: peak about 1,750 ft. in el., which lies about 4 mi. SSW. of Mt. Murchison on George V Coast; in about 67°23’S., 144°12’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for the exp. ship Aurora. AUSTIN, MOUNT: conspicuous rock mass about 3,100 ft. in el., projecting into the W. side of Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°53’S., 63°10’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and named by him for Stephen F. Austin, American colonizer in Texas and one of the founders of the Republic of Texas. Not adopted: Mount Stephen Austin. AUSTIN ROCKS: group of rocks which extend about 3 mi. in an ENE.-WSW. direction, lying in Bransfield Str. about 16 mi. NW. of the NW. end of Trinity I., in about 63°26’S., 61°05’W. Charted by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster, and named by him for Lt. H. F. Austin, an officer of the expedition. AUSTNES POINT: sharp, narrow projection of the coastline at the E. edge of Enderby Land, forming the N. side of the entrance to Edward VIII Bay; in about 66°45’S., 57°17’E. Disc. and mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo- graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937 and named Austnes by them because of its eastward projection. Not adopted: Austnes [Norwegian]. Austskotet: see East Stack. AUVERT BAY: embayment of undetermined length and a width of about 10 mi., lying between Cape Evensen and Cape Bellue along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 66°15’S., 65°50’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Not adopted: Auvert Fiord, Evensen Bay. Auvert Fiord: see Auvert Bay. AVALANCHE BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide at its entrance, which lies directly E. of Discovery Bluff in the S. part of Granite Hbr., along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 177°01’S., 162°44’E. 49 Charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. So named by members of the exp. because they heard several avalanches while sledging in this locality. AVALANCHE CORRIE: an ice-filled cirque, or corrie, close N. of Amphibolite Pt. on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°22’W. So named by the FIDS, following their survey of 1948-49, because of the continuous ava- lanches from the hanging glaciers above the corrie. AVALANCHE ROCKS: vertical rock outcrop, about 400 yards long and about 600 ft. in el., stand- ing midway between Delay Pt. and Jones Rocks on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°32’S., 97°56’E. Disc. in September 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and so named because of the occurrence of a tre- mendous avalanche while members of the exp. were encamped nearby. AVERS, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft. in el., which lies at the W. end of the main flat-topped massif of the Fosdick Mtns. of the Edsel Ford Ranges, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°28’S., 145°25’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE and named for Henry G. Avers, chief mathemati- cian of the Division of Geodesy, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, who was a member of the National Geographic Soc. Commission of Experts which determined that Cdr. (later R. Adm.) Richard E. Byrd reached the North Pole by air- plane, 1926, and the South Pole, 1929. AVERY PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau, about 17 mi. long and 8 mi. wide, which rises above 6,000 ft. in el. and stands midway between Loubet Coast and Foyn Coast on Palmer Pen.; in 67°00’S., 65°35’W. The first sighting of this plateau is not ascertained, but it was presumably seen in January and February of 1909 by members of the FrAE under Charcot from various positions in Matha Strait. It was surveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS, who named it for Mr. Avery, skipper of the cutter Lively, who, with Capt. John Biscoe in the brig Tula, approached this part of Palmer Pen. in February 1832. AVIAN ISLET: largest and easternmost of the Henkes Its., being 0.75 mi. long and 140 ft. in el., lying close off the S. coast of Adelaide I.; in 67°46’S., 68°54’W. Disc. and charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. First visited and sur- veyed in 1948 by the FIDS who so named it because of the large number and variety of birds found there. Avion, Islotes: see Sigma Islets. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA AXEL HEIBERG GLACIER: valley glacier about 6 mi. wide and 30 mi. long, which descends from the south polar plateau and flows NE. between Mounts Fridtjof Nansen and Don Pedro Chris- tophersen, in the Queen Maud Range, and merges with the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°25’S., 164°40’W. Disc. in 1911 by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Consul Axel Heiberg, Norwegian businessman and patron of science, who contributed to numerous Norweigan polar expeditions. AZIMUTH HILL: rocky outcrop, about 700 ft. in el., lying at the terminus of East Russell Gl., on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°45’S., 58°18’W. So named by the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1946 because a sun azimuth was obtained from a cairn built near the E. end of the hill. BABE ISLET: islet which lies in the entrance to Cobblers Cove, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°18’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in 1929. BACK BAY: bay about 0.5 mi. wide in the W. coast of Palmer Pen., entered between Boulder Pt., Stonington I, and Fitzroy It.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. The N. shore of the bay is formed by Northeast Gl. The bay was first surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41, and so named by them because of its location at the rear (northeast) side of Stonington Island. Not adopted: Back Bay Cove. BACKDOOR BAY: small bay lying at the E. side of Cape Royds, along the W. side of Ross I.; in 77°33’S., 166°09’E. The BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, unloaded supplies at Backdoor Bay for use at their winter headquarters on Cape Royds. So named by them because it lies at the back (east) side of Cape Royds, and opposite the small cove on the W. side of the cape known to the exp. as “Front Door” bay. BACKSTAIRS PASSAGE GLACIER: narrow, steep distributary of Larsen Gl. about 2 mi. long, flowing NE. between Mt. De Gerlache and Mt. Crummer to the confluent ice at the head of Terra Nova Bay, on the coast of Victoria Land; in ahout 75°03’S., 162°40’E. Disc. by a party of the BrABH, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and so named by them because of their circuitous climb up this glacier to get to Larsen Gl. on their way to the South Magnetic Pole. BAFFLE ROCK: small rock, just visible at the surface at high tide, lying in the center of the deep water channel approach to Stonington I., 0.6 mi. NW. of the W. tip of Neny I. and the same distance NE. of Runaway It. in Marguerite Bay, in 68°12’S., 50 67°05’W. The rock was surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so named by them because it is difficult to see and hinders approaching ships. BAGE, CAPE: cape separating Ainsworth and Murphy Bays on George V Coast; in about 67’43’S., 146°35’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Lt. R. Bage, astronomer, asst. magnetician and recorder of tides with the Main Base Party. BAGSHAWE, MOUNT: southernmost and high- est of the Batterbee Mtns., about 7,300 ft. in el., standing about 10 mi. inland from George VI Sound on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 171°27’S., 67°06’W. This mountain was first seen and photo- graphed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Sir Arthur W. G. Bagshawe, British authority on tropical medi- cine, who raised a special fund to defray the ex- penses of biological equipment for the BGLE, 1934-37. BAIE: for names beginning thus see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Baie de l’Amirauté see Amirauté, Baie del’. (Baie isa French word for “bay.’’) Baie E. Fournier: see Fournier Bay. BAILEY MOUNT: mountain about 4,700 ft. in el., which stands S. of Anthony Gl. and about 6 mi. WSW. of Lewis Pt., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°00’S., 63°13’W. Charted in 1936-37 by a BGLE sledge party under Rymill. It was recharted in 1947 by a joint sledge party consisting of mem- bers of the RARE, under Ronne, and the FIDS. Named by Ronne for Cdr. Clay W. Bailey, USN, member of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and the West Base party of the USAS, 1939-41, who assisted in out- lining the RARE radio requirements. Bailey Glacier: see Friederichsen Glacier. BAILEY ISLAND: rocky island about 1.8 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, lying between Clark and Mitchell Islands which, collectively, form the group of three principal islands at the NE. end of the Windmill Is. that lie close against Budd Coast; in 66°18’S., 110°28’E. Delineated from USN Op. Hip. aerial photographs taken in February 1947 which indicate that these three islands are connected by a steep snow ramp to the continental ice overlying Budd Coast. Prominent end moraine deposits overlie and parallel the upper margin of this snow ramp about 1 mi. from its outer edge of Clark, Bailey and Mitchell Islands. Named by the US-ACAN for Cdr. Claude E. Bailey, USN, captain of GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the U.S.S. Henderson, destroyer escort of the western task group of USN Op. Hjp. Task Force 68, 1946-47. BAILEY RIDGE: serrate ridge about 4 mi. long, on the N. side of the lower part of Boyd Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°12’S., 144°55’W. Disc. on aerial flights of the ByrdAE in 1934, and named by the USAS, 1939-41, for Clay W. Bailey, a member of both expeditions. BAILLIEU PEAK: peak about 5,200 ft. in el., which lies about 27 mi. S. of Cape Bruce on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°51’S., 60°50’E. Disc. and named by the BANZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 17, 1931. Bailys Island: see Ohlin Island. BAKER THREE GLACIER: major glacier, about 12 to 15 mi. wide and of undetermined length, which flows NNE. from the mountain area behind the E. end of Lars Christensen Coast to the vicinity of Gillock I., in about 70°45’S., 70°30’E.; from this position the glacier then flows NE. between the SE. side of Amery Ice Shelf and the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast and terminates at the head of Sandefjord Ice Bay; in about 69°40’S., 73°00’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947. The term “Baker Three” is the code designation of the Navy photographic aircraft which made three flights in this area, resulting in the discovery that Ingrid Christensen Coast extends some 50 mi. SW. from Sandefjord Ice Bay. BALAENA ISLETS: small group of rocky islets lying close off Budd Coast about 4 to 6 mi. NE. of Cape Folger; in about 66°00’S., 110°48’E. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in February 1947 and named by the US-ACAN for the Wh./F. Balaena, British factory ship from which sketches of the coastal ranges along Knox and Budd Coasts were obtained as the result of reconnaissance flights and shipboard ob- servations made in February—March 1947. BALCH, MOUNT: east-west trending mountain with numerous sharp peaks, the highest about 3,500 ft. in el., between Mt. Peary and Mt. Mill on the W. coast-of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°16’S., 63°58’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-18, under Charcot, and named by him for Edwin Swift Balch, American author and authority on Antarctic exploration. Not adopted: Mount Swift Balch. BALCHEN GLACIER: crevassed glacier flowing W. between the Fosdick and Phillips Mtns. to Paul Block Bay, in: Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°20’S., 145°15’W. Disc. on Dec. 5, 1929 by the ByrdAE, 51 and named by Byrd for Bernt Balchen, veteran Arctic pilot and chief pilot of the expedition. Not adopted: Bernt Balchen Glacier. BALDER POINT: point marking the eastern tip of a narrow, rocky “cockscomb” ridge, which ex- tends from Frigga Pk. about 6 mi. in an ESE. direc- tion to the W. side of Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°27’S., 63°45’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it after the Norse god Balder, the mythological son of Frigga and Odin. BALD HEAD: bare, ice-free headland, about 500 ft. in.el., about 8 mi. SW. of View Pt. on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°38’S., 57°36’W. Prob- ably first seen in 1902-3 by J. Gunnar Andersson’s party of the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld. The FIDS charted it and applied the descriptive name in 1945. BALDRED ROCK: a rock in Fitchie Bay, Laurie I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°26’W. It lies close off the S. side of Ferrier Pen., 0.75 mi. ESE. of Graptolite I. This rock was mapped by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and was later named Bass Rock owing to its likeness to the Bass Rock in Scotland. The name Bass Rock has appeared on charts as an alternative name for an’islet in the Firth of Tay in the Joinville Is. group. To avoid confusion of these names, in 1954 the Br-APC recommended an entirely new name for the rock at Fitchie Bay. Baldred Rock is named after Saint Baldred (died 606), the first hermit known to have lived on the Scottish Base Rock. Not adopted: Bass Rock. BALDWIN POINT: prominent ice-covered point forming the E. side of the entrance to Henry Bay, Sabrina Coast; in about 66°40’S., 121°05’E. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for A. S. Baldwin, acting master of the brig Porpoise, which assisted the USEE squadron under Wilkes in chart- ing a series of coastal landfalls in Wilkes Land during January-February 1840. BALDWIN ROCKS: group of rock outcrops lying about 6 mi. NW. of Watson Bluff on the N. side of David I., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°25’S., 98°38’E. Charted in November by the Western Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Joseph M. Baldwin, astronomer with the Melbourne Observatory. Baleiniers, Anse des: see Whalers Bay. BALFOUR, MOUNT: hastion-like rocky moun- tain, above 2,500 ft. in el., which lies at the S. side of the mouth of Fleming Gl., close to its junction with Wordie Ice Shelf, on the W. side of Palmer GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Pen.; in 69°19’S., 67°12’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948 and named for Henry Balfour, Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1936-38. BALIN POINT: point which marks the N. side of the entrance to Borge Bay on the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°36’W. The name appears on a 1933 chart of Borge Bay by DI personnel on the Discovery II, but may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. BALIN ROCKS: small group of rocks close S. of Balin Pt., off the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°36’W. Charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Probably named after nearby Balin Point. BALLENY ISLANDS: group of glaciated volcanic islands lying about 150 mi. N. of Oates Coast between 66°15’ and 67°40’S., and 162°15’ and 164°45’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a Br. exp. under John Balleny, and named in his honor by Captain Beaufort, Hydrographer to the Admiralty. Ballesteros, Isotes: see Psi Islets. BALSAM BEACH: narrow boulder beach with jagged islets close off shore, lying 0.75 mi. E. of Dartmouth Pt. in Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°26’W. The beach appears on earlier charts, but the name was given by FIDS in 1951 following a sketch survey. The name is one of a group in the vicinity of Dartmouth Pt., derived from the chemical stains used in the prepa- ration for histological examination of biological material collected there by FIDS. Banck Island: (in about 64°55’S., 62°59’W.) the decision of August 1949 has been VACATED. Recent surveys indicate this feature may be a part of Palmer Peninsula. BANDSTONE BLOCK: an almost rectangular block of sandstone, about 1,000 ft. in el., standing 2 mi. N. of Triton Pt. at the foot of Venus Gl., on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 71°40’S., 68°12’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. This rock was first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its conspicuous sedimentary bands. BANZARE BANK: submarine bank in the south- ern part of the Indian Ocean, forming a part of the Kerguelen-Gaussberg Ridge; in about 58°50’S., 77°44’E. Disc. by and named for the British- Australian-New Zealand Antarctic Research Expe- dition. Not adopted: Banzare Rise. 52 BANZARE COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica lying between Cape Southard, in about 122°05’E., and Cape Mose, in about 130°05’E. Seen from the air by the BANZARE under Mawson in 1931,andsonamed by him. Not adopted: Banzare Land. Banzare Land: see Banzare Coast. Banzare Rise: see Banzare Bank. BARBARA ISLAND: largest islet in the Deben- ham Is., lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°06’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and named by him for a daughter of Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Ad- visory Committee. BARCHANS, THE: group of snow-capped islets marking the W. end of the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 64°20’W. Charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and so named by him because the snow caps resemble barchans (also barkhans), migrating, crescent- shaped sand dunes found in several very dry regions of the world. BARCLAY BAY: bay between Cape Shirreff and Start Pt. on the N. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S.; 61°00’W. The name ap- pears on an 1825 chart of the Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Barclay’s Bay. BARE ROCK: rock which lies about 0.1 mi. NE. of Berntsen Pt. in the entrance to Borge Bay, off the E. side of Signy I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. Charted and named by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery in 1927. BARFF POINT: point which forms the E. side of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°24’W. Named for Lt. A. D. Barff, RN, of the Sappho, who, assisted by Capt. C. A. Larsen, made a sketch map of Cumber- land Bay in 1906. Barilar Bay: see Barilari Bay. BARILARI BAY: bay about 10 mi. long, in a NW.-SE. direction, and 6 mi. wide, entered im- mediately S. of Cape Garcia, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°55’S., 64°43’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for R. Adm. Atilio S. Barilari, Argentine Navy. The bay was charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not adopted: Barilar Bay. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BAR ISLET: long, low, rocky islet lying 0.25 mi. off the W. end of Red Rock Ridge, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°17’S.,67°12’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re- surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, who so named the islet because of its shape. BARKLEY MOUNTAINS: group of mountains rising to about 9,800 ft. in el. and projecting through the icecap immediately N. of the edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°45/S., 1°15’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named by them for Erich Barkley, biologist on the expedition. BARKOW, MOUNT: mountain about 4,600 ft. in el., which stands about 20 mi. W. of Court Nunatak and New Bedford Inlet and marks the E. end of the ridge separating Haines and Meinardus Glaciers, on the E. side of Palmer Pen.; in 73°22’S., 62°48’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. Photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Erich Barkow, German meteorologist and member of the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner. BARLAS, CAPE: cape which marks the N. end of Fredriksen I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°00’W. Fredriksen I. was charted by a Nor. exp., 1912-13, under Sgrlle. Cape Barlas appears to be first named on a chart based on a 1933 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Probably named for William Barlas, British representative at Deception I. and South Shetland Is., for the season 1914-15, and at South Georgia on various occasions, 1928-41. Not adopted: Cape Barles. BARLAS BANK: small submarine bank about 1.5 mi. E. of Cape Buller, at the W. side of the en- trance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 37°20’W. The name appears on a chart based on the DI survey at the Bay of Isles in 1929-30, and was probably given for William Barlas. BARLAS CHANNEL: channel, about 8 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, in the N. part of Laubeuf Fjord, extending SW. from The Gullet and separating Day I. from Adelaide I.; in 67°13’S., 67°45’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named it for William Barlas. Barles, Cape: see Barlas, Cape. BARLOW ISLET: islet lying about 1.5 mi. WNW. of Cape Smith, the N. tip of Smith I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°52’S., 62°23’W. ‘The name Cape Barlow, presumably after Peter Barlow, British 53 physicist and mathematician, was applied to a cape on the E. side of Smith I. by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31. In 1951-52, the FIDS determined that no significant cape exists on the E. side of the island, but for the sake of historical continuity applied the name Barlow to the islet described above. BARNARD, MOUNT: mountain about 5,900 ft. in el., which lies about 5 mi. ENE. of the head of False Bay, Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°39’S., 60°09’W. The name appears on an 1825 chart of the Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, and is probably named for Charles H. Barnard, cap- tain of the ship Charity of New York, who was seal- ing in the South Shetland Is. in 1820-21 when Weddell was also there. Weddell states in the narrative of his exp. that he later met Barnard in the Falkland Islands. Not adopted: Barnards Peak, Friesland Peak. BARNARD POINT: point which marks the SE. side of the entrance to False Bay on the S. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°45’S., 60°20’W. This point was known to sealers as early as 1822. The name was applied about a century later, probably after Mt. Barnard which surmounts it to the northeast. Not adopted: Pointe Bernard [French]. BARNE, CAPE: steep, rocky bluff about 300 ft. in el.; lies on the W. side of Ross I. between Cape Royds and Cape Evans; in about 77°35’S., 166°13’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him for Lt. Michael Barne, RN, a member of the expedition. BARNE GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide, which descends WSW. from the slopes of Mt. Erebus and terminates on the W. side of Ross I. between Cape Barne and Cape Evans, where it forms a steep ice cliff; in about 77°36’S., 166°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton after nearby Cape Barne. Not adopted: Cape Barne Glacier. BARNE INLET: a re-entrant about 12 mi. wide, between Cape Kerr and Cape Selborne on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°15’S., 160°15’E. It is occupied by a glacier descending from the bordering highlands to the ice shelf. Disc. in December 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and named by him for Lt. Michael Barne, RN, a member of the expedition. BARNES, MOUNT: peak about 3,900 ft. in el., surmounting the west-central side of New Harbor and marking the E. end of the Kukri Hills, in Victoria Land; in about 77°39’S., 163°33’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named on the exp. charts as New Harbour Heights. It was GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA renamed Mount Barnes on the charts of Scott’s second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13. Not adopted: New Harbour Heights. BARN ROCK: prominent rock, more than 300 ft. in el., near the N. end of the Terra Firma Is. in Marguerite Bay; in 68°41’S., 67°32’W. First visited and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named the rock because of its appearance when seen from the west. BARNUM PEAK: peak about 10,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. end of a prominent rock divide near the head of Liv Gl., where two tributary glaciers join to form the main glacier, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°30’S., 171°00’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929, and named by him for J. D. Barnum, publisher of the Syracuse Post- Standard and contributor to the expedition. BARRE, MOUNT: ice-covered, pyramidal peak, about 7,200 ft. in el., standing 2 mi. NW. of Mt. Gaudry in SE. Adelaide I.; in 67°30’S., 68°33’W. Disc. and surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named it for Michel Barré, leader of the French Antarctic Expedition to Adélie Coast, 1951-52. BARRE GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti- nental ice to its terminus on Adélie Coast close E. of Cape Pépin; in about 66°35’S., 138°40’E. Delin- eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Michel Barré, leader of the FrAE wintering party of 1951-52, whose party extended reconnaissance of the coastal features as far westward as this glacier. Lt. de Vaisseau (Lt. Cdr.) Barré previ- ously served as radio officer on the French polar ship Commandant Charcot. BAR ROCKS: group of low rocks which lie near the head of Husvik Hbr. in Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°42’W. Charted by DI personnel in 1928, and so named by them, pre- sumably because their presence obstructs or im- pedes vessels approaching the head of the harbor. BARROS ROCKS: chain of rocks forming a crescentric arc and extending S. and E. from a point 2 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen to the Berthelot Islets, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°18’S., 64°12’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. BARROW, CAPE: steep cliff forming the N. end of Hoseason I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 63°42’S., 61°45’W. The cape appears in rough outline on 54 an 1828 chart published by Laurie and was pre- sumably explored in 1824 by James Hoseason, mate of the Br. sealing exp. under Hughes. It was named by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31, prob- ably for Sir John Barrow, Sec. of the Admiralty, 1804-6 and 1807-45, and founder of the Royal Geographical Soc. The cape was more accurately charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. BARROW, CAPE: cape which forms the N. end of Flat I. and marks the W. side of the entrance to Robertson Bay, along the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°20’S., 169°10’E. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1841 by the Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Sir John Barrow. Barrows Isle: see Elephant Island. BARR SMITH, MOUNT: striking rock peak about 4,300 ft. in el., marking the northernmost peak of an intermittent line of peaks along the W. flank of Denman Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°10’S., 99°03’E. Disc. in December 1912 by members of the Western Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Robert Barr Smith of Adelaide, patron of the expedition. BARRY ISLAND: islet lying in the center of the Debenham Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°07’W. Charted by the BGLE under Rymill, who used this islet for a base in 1936 and 1937. Named by Rymill for the eldest son of Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Advisory Committee. Bart Bank: see Barth Bank. BARTH BANK: submarine bank lying SE. of the South Orkney Is. in the northernmost reaches of Weddell Sea; in about 62°58’S., 41°15’W. Named for Einar Barth, Norwegian whale gunner who disc. the bank in 1937. Not adopted: Bart Bank. BARTLETT, MOUNT: peak about 7,900 ft. in el., which lies close NW. of Mt. Buckley at the head of Beardmore Gl.; in about 84°58’S., 164°33’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for H. H. Bartlett of London, supporter of the expedition. BARTLETT GLACIER: tributary glacier, about 30 mi. long and about 5 mi. wide at its terminus, flowing NNE. from the Rawson Mtns. and joining Robert Scott Gl. close N. of Mt. Gardiner; in about 86°15’S., 152°00’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Capt. Robert A. Bartlett of Brigus, Newfoundland, noted Arctic navigator and explorer who recommended that the exp. acquire the Bear, an ice-ship which was purchased and GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA rechristened by Byrd as the Bear of Oakland. Not adopted: Bob Bartlett Glacier: Basil Halls Island: see Snow Island. Bass Rock: see Baldred Rock. BASTION PEAK: ice-capped peak, about 5,300 ft. in el., with rocky exposures on its S. and E. sides, which forms a buttress to the plateau escarpment W. of Morrison Gl., or the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°10’S., 63°35’W. Charted in 1947 and given this descriptive name by the FIDS. It was photo- graphed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. BATTERBEE, CAPE: ice-covered cape with prominent rock exposures protruding through the coastal ice cliffs, marking the most northerly pro- jection of Enderby Land, just E. of Proclamation I., in about 65°50’S., 53°47’E. Disc. on Jan. 13, 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named by him probably for Sir Harry Fagg Batterbee, then Asst. Sec. of the Dominions Office. BATTERBEE MOUNTAINS: group of prominent mountains rising to about 7,300 ft. in el., which form part of the dissected edge of Dyer Plateau overlooking George VI Sound, on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in about 71°23’S., 66°55’W. Disc. and photographed from the air by Lincoln Ells- worth on Nov. 23, 1935. Charted from the ground in October 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and named by him for Sir Harry Fagg Batterbee. BAUDIN PEAKS: group of four peaks, the high- est about 3,900 ft. in el., standing at the SE. corner of Mikkelsen Bay, immediately SW. of the mouth of Clarke Gl., and about 9 mi. ENE. of Cape Ber- teaux, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°49’S., 67°03’W. This general area was first sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under ‘Charcot, who gave the name “Cap Pierre Baudin” to a cape in this vicinity. The peaks previously described were roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, but no name was assigned to them. The peaks were resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, who subsequently identified them as the feature named “Cap Pierre Baudin” by Charcot. Named by Charcot for Pierre Baudin, then port engineer at Pernambuco (now Recife), where the Pourquoi-Pas? put in on her return from the Antarctic. Not adopted: Cap Pierre Baudin [French]. BAXTER, MOUNT: truncated cone about 8,600 ft. in el., between Mt. Levick and Mt. Mackintosh in Victoria Land; in about 74°20’S., 162°30’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. 59 BAY POINT: point which marks the E. side of the entrance to Borgen Bay on the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°46’S., 63°26’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 DI survey, but may reflect an earlier naming. BEACH POINT: the NE. tip of Thule I., conspic- uous by a bare rock ridge and a narrow beach of boulders and pebbles, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S., 27°16’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II who made a landing there. BEACON HILL: ice-covered, dome-shaped hill, about 5,900 ft. in el., which rises 400 ft. above the surrounding ice, standing 2.5 mi. NE. of the head of Northeast Gl. on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 68°04’S., 66°24’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed and named by the USAS, 1939-41. The hill may have been the site of a beacon at that time. BEAK ISLAND: arc-shaped island, about 4 mi. long and about 1,000 ft. in el., lying 0.25 mi. NE. of Eagle I. in the NE. part of Prince Gustav Chan.; in 63°37’S., 57°20’W. Probably first seen in 1902-3 by members of the SwedAE under Norden- skj6ld. The FIDS surveyed Beak Island in 1945 and so named it because of its shape and relative position to nearby Tail and Eagle Islands. BEALE, CAPE: cape which marks the E. extrem- ity of Borradaile I. in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°35’S., 162°50’E. Named for W. Beale, a sup- porter of the Br. exp. under Balleny which disc. these islands in 1839. BEALE PINNACLE: rock pinnacle about 200 ft. in el., lying close off Cape Beale, the E. extremity of Borradaile I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°35’S., 162°51’E. Named for W. Beale, a sup- porter of the Br. exp. under Balleny which disc. these islands in 1839. BEARDMORE GLACIER: one of the largest known valley glaciers, having an average width of 12 mi. and a length of 100 mi., descending from the polar plateau to the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°30’S., 173°00’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE under Shackleton, and named by him for Sir William Beardmore (later Lord Invernairn), a supporter of the expedition. BEAR ISLAND: glaciated island about 40 mi. long and 25 mi. wide, with several rocky summits rising to about 2,900 ft. in el., lying about 40 mi. E. of Martin Pen. at the head of Amundsen Sea; in about 74°20’S., 108°40’W. Delineated from GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in De- cember 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for the ice-ship U.S.S. Bear, flagship of the USAS, from which three reconnaissance flights were made in late February 1940, resulting in the discovery of the Walgreen Coast and Thurston Pen. areas. This ship, under the name Bear of Oakland, also served as flagship of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, which based at the Bay of Whales area of the Ross Ice Shelf. BEAR ISLET: rocky islet lying 1 mi. W. of Stonington I. in Marguerite Bay; in 68°11’S., 67°04’W. The islet was presumably known to the BGLE, 1934-37, and the USAS, 1939-41, both based in the Stonington I. area. It was surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for the U.S.S. Bear, flagship of the USAS which visited this area in 1940. BEASCOCHEA BAY: embayment about 4 mi. wide between Cape Trois Pérez and Nunez Pt., in- denting the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°30'S., 64°00’W. Disc. but incompletely defined by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Resighted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Commander Beascochea, Argentine Navy. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, accu- rately charted the bay. Beaufort, Mount; Beaufurt, Mount: see Foster, Mount. BEAUFORT ISLAND: island which lies in the Ross Sea about 10 mi. NNE. of Cape Bird, the N. tip of Ross I.; in about 76°55’S., 167°05’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Capt. Francis Beaufort, RN, Hydrographer to the Admiralty. BEAUFOY RIDGE: conspicuous black ridge, rising to about 2,100 ft. in el. at its NW. end, stand- ing at the W. side of Sunshine Gl., and close N. of Iceberg Bay on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°33’W. Named by the FIDS following their survey in 1948-49. On Dec. 12, 1821, the cutter Beaufoy under Michael McLeod sailed to a position at least 60 mi. W. of the South Orkney Is., where a chart annotation indicates that land was sighted, probably Coronation Island. BEAUMONT BAY: small re-entrant lying E. of Mt. Albert Markham, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°25’S., 160°30’E. Disc. in December 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and named by him for Adm. Sir Lewis Beaumont, RN, former Arctic explorer who took special interest in Scott’s expedition. 56 BEAUMONT GLACIER: broad glacier flowing in a NE. direction to the SW. part of Hilton Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 72°02’S., 62°00’W. The USAS disc. and photographed it from the air in 1940. It was resighted in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it for the city of Beaumont, Texas, in recognition of the public support given his exp. by this city and the Tejas Chapter of the Daughters of the Republic of Texas, at Beaumont. Not adopted: Tejas Glacier. BEAUMONT ISLET: low, rocky islet in Neny Bay, about 0.4 mi. from the mouth of Centurion Gl., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 66°57’W. The islet was presumably first sighted in 1936 by the BGLE, and was roughly charted by them and by the USAS, 1939-41. It was surveyed in 1946 by the FIDS, who named it for the Port of Beaumont, Texas, exp. ship of the RARE under Ronne, which wintered nearby in Back Bay during the 1947-48 season. Beckman Fjord: see Beckmann Fjord. BECKMANN FJORD: small inlet immediately E. of Bellingshausen Pt., in the E. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°12’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who named it for Captain Beckmann, master gunner of the whaler Don Ernesto, who lost his life in a whaling accident in December 1912. Not adopted: Beckman Fjord. BEEHIVE HILL: ice-covered hill which rises to about 7,000 ft. in el. and projects 2,000 ft. above the surrounding ice sheet, situated on the plateau of Palmer Pen. about 10 mi. E. off the head of Neny Fjord and 13 mi. SE. of the head of Northeast GL.; in 68°16’S., 66°10’W. First surveyed in 1940 by the USAS, on whose field charts the hill is labeled “Sphinx.” It was resurveyed in 1946 by the FIDS who gave the present name because of the hill’s resemblance to a wicker beehive. Not adopted: Sphinx. Beehive Nunatak: see Teall Nunatak. BEER ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, which lies about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head and 0.5 mi. S. of Jagged I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°45°W. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, charted and named the island. Not adopted: Mutton Cove Island. BELEMNITE POINT: the E. extremity of a mainly ice-free, hook-shaped ridge, about 2,000 ft. in el., standing midway between Lamina Peak and Ablation Pt., and 2 mi. inland from George VI Sound on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 70°40’S., 68°32°W. This point was first photo- graphed from the air on Noy. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photo- graphs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and re- surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because of belemnite fossils found there. Belgica Sea: see Bellingshausen Sea. BELINDA, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft. in el., which marks the summit of Montagu I. in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°25’S., 26°23’W. Mount Belinda was probably first sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775, and was accurately sketched in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II follow- ing their survey in 1930, for Belinda Kemp, daughter of Stanley W. Kemp, Dir. of Research of the Discovery Committee, 1924-36. BELL, MOUNT: mountain about 10,500 ft. in el., which lies about 4 mi. WSW. of Mt. Mackellar, at the W. side of Beardmore Gl. in the Queen Alex- andra Range; in about 84°06’S., 167°40’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named by him for William Bell, a supporter of the expedition. BELL GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti- nental ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to the head of Maury Bay, where it terminates in a prominent tongue between the tongues of Blair and Power Glaciers, Banzare Coast; in about 66°45’S., 124°50’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Thomas G. Bell, boatswain on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Bellinghausen Sea: see Bellingshausen Sea. BELLINGSHAUSEN, MOUNT: conspicuous cone about 3,200 ft. in el., lying on the S. side of Larsen Gl. on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°10’S., 162°18’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, under Scott, and named by him for Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen, leader of the Russian expedition of 1819-21. Not adopted: Mount Bellinghausen. BELLINGSHAUSEN ISLAND: easternmost is- land of Southern Thule, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°25’S., 27°03’W. Probably sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. The island was described by Bellingshausen, whose Russ. exp. visited the area in 1819-20. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, under Kemp, who named it for Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen. 424589 O -57-5 o7 BELLINGSHAUSEN POINT: point between Beckmann and Sea Leopard Fjords, at the E. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°14’°W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who named it for Adm. Thaddeus Bellings- hausen. BELLINGSHAUSEN SEA: marginal sea off the coast of Antarctica between Alexander I Island and Thurston Pen.; in about 71°S., 85°W. Named for Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen. Not adopted: Belgica Sea, Bellinghausen Sea. BELLUE, CAPE: cape which forms the N. side of the entrance to Marin Darbel Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°20’S., 65°59’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Admiral Bellue, Superintendent of the Dockyard at Cherbourg, France. BELSHAM, CAPE: prominent headland about 7 mi. WNW. of Cape Valentine, on the N. side of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°01’S., 55°01’W. The name dates back to about 1822 and is well established in international usage. Bennet, Cape: see Bennett, Cape. BENNETT, CAPE: bold promontory at the NE. end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 45°14’W. Disc. in December 1821 on the occasion of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell, a British sealer in the sloop Dove, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, an American sealer in the sloop James Monroe. Named for Powell’s employer. Not adopted: Cape Bennet. BENNETT ISLETS: chain of about four islets, lying at the SW. side of Liard I. in Hanusse Bay and extending in a SW. direction for about 6 mi., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°57’S., 67°35’W. These islets were sighted and sketched from the air in February 1937 by the BGLE under Rymi!l. They were named in 1954 by the Br-APC for Arthur G. Bennett, British representative on whaling in the South Shetland Is. and South Orkney Is. for many years between 1913 and 1927, and acting govern- ment naturalist in the Falkland Is., 1924-38. Beresino Island: see Greenwich Island. BERG BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which lies between Islands Pt. and the promontory ending in Birthday Pt. in the W. part of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°27’S., 169°23’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BERGERSEN, MOUNT: mountain mass in the E. part of the Sgr Rondane Mtns., lying S. of Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about 72°08’S., 24°35’E. Disc. and photographed from the air on Feb. 6, 1937 by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen. Named for Ambassador Birger Bergersen, chairman of the Norwegian Whaling Board. Bergnes: see Byrd Head. BERLIN, MOUNT: prominent ridge-shaped mountain, about 10,400 ft. in el., forming the W. end of Hal Flood Range in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°04’S., 135°50’W. Disc. by members of the ByrdAE on extended flights to the NE. and E. of Little America in November—December 1934. It was first named Mount Hal Flood, but this name has now been given to the entire range of moun- tains of which this one is a part. Named for Leonard M. Berlin, leader of the USAS party which sledged to this mountain in December 1940. Not adopted: Mount Hal Flood. BERNACCHI, CAPE: low rocky promontory lying between Bernacchi Bay and New Harbor on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°30’S., 163°45’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him for Louis C. Bernacchi, physicist with the expedition. See also Bernacchi Head on Franklin Island. BERNACCHI BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which lies between Marble Pt. and Cape Bernacchi along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°28’S., 163°47’E. The bay takes its name from Cape Bernacchi, S. entrance point to the bay, and was applied by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. BERNACCHI HEAD: precipitous, cliff forming the SE. end of Franklin I., in the Ross Sea; in about 76°09’S., 168°20’E. Named by the BrAE, 1898- 1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, for Louis C. Bernac- chi, a member of the expedition. The generic has been changed by the Committee to avoid duplica- tion with Cape Bernacchi on the coast of Victoria Land. See also Cape Bernacchi. Bernard, Pointe: see Barnard Point. Bernard Horne, Mount: see Horne, Mount. Bernt Balchen Glacier: see Balchen Glacier. BERNTSEN POINT: point which forms the S. side of the entrance to Borge Bay, on the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. Charted in 1927 by DI personnel on the Discovery. Probably named for Capt. Sgren Bernt- sen, master of the Orwell, who was of assistance in transporting DI personnel the following year. 58 BERRY HEAD: point which markes the E. side of the entrance to Stygian Cove, on the NE. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°36’W. Probably named by DI personnel on the Discovery II following their survey in 1933. BERTEAUX, CAPE: cape which lies at the N. side of Wordie Ice Shelf and projects into the SE. part of Marguerite Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°51’S., 67°28’W. The FrAE under Char- cot, 1908-10, originally applied the name Berteaux to an island in essentially this position. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, identified the feature sighted by Charcot as the cape described above. Named by Charcot for a Monsieur Berteaux who helped obtain funds for his expedition. Not adopted: Berteaux Island, Cape Pierre Baudin. Berteaux Island: see Berteaux, Cape. BERTHA ISLAND: island which lies at the E. side of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay and is separated from Mac-Robertson Coast by a narrow channel; in about 67°23’S., 59°40’E. Disc. and named in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby. Not adopted: Hamreneset [Norwegian]. BERTHELOT ISLETS: group of rocky islets, the largest about 1 mi. long, lying about 1.5 mi. W. of Point Délivrance, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°20’S., 64°09’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Mar- celin Berthelot, prominent French chemist. Not adopted: Berthelot Islands. BERTRAB GLACIER: small glacier at the head of Gold Hbr., at the E. end of South Georgia; in 54°37’S., 35°57’'W. Charted by the GerAH, 1911-12, under Filchner, and named by him for Dr. von Bertrab, General and Chief Quartermaster in the German General Staff and Chief of the Land Survey, who was chairman of the expedition. BERTRAB NUNATAK: bare rock about 1,000 ft. in el. at the S. side of the entrance to Duke Ernst Bay, on Luitpold Coast; in about 77°55’S., 34°30’W. Disc. in January-February 1912 by the GerAE under Filchner, and named by him for Dr. von Bertrab. Not adopted: Bertrab Nunataks. BERTRAM GLACIER: glacier, about 15 mi. long and 18 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing W. from the Dyer Plateau of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound between Wade Pt. and Gurney Pt.; in 70°48’S., 67°28’W. Disc. and first surveyed in 1936 by Stephenson, Fleming and Bertram of the BGLE under Rymill. It was later named for George C. L. Bertram, biologist of the BGLE, 1934-37, and mem- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ber of the discovery party, who in 1949 became Dir. of the Scott Polar Inst., Cambridge. BERTRAND ICE PIEDMONT: prominent ice piedmont which lies on the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Rymill Bay and Mikkelsen Bay. It is bounded on its SE. and E. sides by Pavie Ridge and on its NE. side by Martin Gl.; in 68°31’S., 67°05’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. Named by the British Antarctic Place-names Committee for Kenneth J. Bertrand, Associate Professor of Geography at the Catholic University of America, Washington, D. C., geomorphologist, Antarctic historian, and member of the U.S. ASONTSORY) Com- mittee on Antarctic Names. Bertrand Island: see Stanley Island. Berwick Glacier: see Swinford Glacier. BERWICK GLACIER: tributary glacier entering the W. side of Beardmore Gl. immediately S. of Marshall Mtns.; in about 84°45’S., 164°15’E. Origi- nally named Swinford Glacier in 1908 by the BrAE under Shackleton, a subsequent cartographic error exchanging the positions of Swinford and Berwick Glaciers on the charts of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, has caused the name Berwick to become established for this glacier. Named for the Ber- wick, a vessel on which Lt. Jameson B. Adams, Shackleton’s second-in-command, had _ served. Swinford Glacier lies about 10 mi. NE. of Berwick Glacier. Not adopted: Swinford Glacier (q.v.). BESNARD POINT: point which lies at the SE. side of Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., and marks the E. side of the entrance to Alice Creek, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAH, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for A. Besnard, seaman on the exp. ship Francais. BEST, CAPE: cape which marks the W. side of the entrance to Fortuna Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°05’S., 36°49’W. The name dates back to at least Tow and is now well established. Besvikelsens Kap: see Disappointment, Cape. BETA ISLAND: small islet which lies immedi- ately N. of Kappa I. and close SW. of Alpha I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W. The name Beta, derived from the second letter of the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Rodeada [Spanish]. 59 BETBEDER, CAPE: cape which marks the SW. end of Andersson I., lying in Antarctic Sound, off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°37’S., 56°39’W. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordensk- jold, and named by him for R. Adm. Onofre Betbeder, Argentine Minister of Marine, upon whose orders the Argentine Ship Uruguay was dis- patched to rescue Nordenskj6ld’s expedition. BETBEDER ISLETS: group of islets and rocks about 12 mi. NE. of the N. end of the Biscoe Is. and some 22 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°16’S., 65°02’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for R. Adm. Onofre Betbeder. BETTY, MOUNT: small ridge about 1,200 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi. NE. of Mt. Cohen at the N. end of the foothills between Axel Heiberg and Strom Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range over- looking the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°13’S., 164°45’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Betty Andersson, nurse and housekeeper in the Amundsen family for many years. BEVIN GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long, which flows E. from the plateau escarpment on the E. side of Palmer Pen. into the NW. end of Cabinet Inlet between the mouths of Attlee and Anderson Glaciers; in 66°17’S., 63°47’W. During December 1947, it was charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. Ernest Bevin, M.P., British Minister of Labor and National Service and member of the War Cabinet. BICKERTON, CAPE: ice-covered point lying about 5 mi. ENE. of Gravenoire Rock, which marks the northernmost extremity of the Adélie Coast area lying eastward of Victor Bay; in about 66°20’S., 136°56’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911- 14, and named by him for F. H. Bickerton, engineer of the exp. and leader of the Western Party which sighted the cape from its farthest west camp. BIENVENUE, CAPE: small rocky cape, which is partially ice covered, rising to about 140 ft. in el., marking the E. side of the entrance to Piner Bay, on Adélie Coast; in 66°43’S., 140°15’E. Photo- graphed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted and named by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, who established an astronomical control station on the cape. Bienvenue is a French word meaning welcome. BIG BEN: massive ice-covered mountain, about 9,000 ft. in el., which is the central and dominating feature on Heard I., and toward which the relief of the island rises from all sides; in 53°06’S., GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 73°31’E. The name was applied by American sealers at Heard I. following their initiation of seal- ing there in 1855. The name was found to be already in common use when the Br. exp. under Nares visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and made a survey of its salient features. The mountain was surveyed by the ANARE in 1948. Not adopted: Big Ben Peak, Emperor William Peak. BIGELOW ROCK: low, ice-covered rock about 150 ft. long, with numerous rock exposures close above sea level, lying immediately W. of Shackleton Ice Shelf about 23 mi. NE. of Junction Corner, Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°09’S., 95°26’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. An astronomical control sta- tion was established on the rock by USN Op. Wml., 1947-48. Named by the US-ACAN for Tech. Sgt. George H. Bigelow, USMC, tractor driver-mechanic with USN Op. Hjp. and USN Op. Wml. Not adopted: Burton Island Rock. BIGO, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300 ft. in el., which stands at the SW. side of Mt. Perchot at the head of Bigo Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°47’S., 64°17’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him, probably for Robert Bigo of Calais, France, a member of the Lique Maritime Francaise. BIGO BAY: bay about 5 mi. wide, which indents the W. coast of Palmer Pen. for 7 mi. between Cape Garcia and the peninsula surmounted by Magnier Peaks; in 65°43’S., 64°30’W. The FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, first sighted this bay but charted it as the southern part of Leroux Bay. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, determined that the peninsula surmounted by Magnier Peaks sepa- rates this bay from Leroux Bay. Named by Rymill after Mt. Bigo, a mountain at the head of the bay. BIGOURDAN FJORD: a sound about 14 mi. long, in an ENE.-WSW. direction, and averaging 2 mi. wide, lying between the N. side of Pourquoi Pas I. and the coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°33’S., 67°20’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Guillaume Bigourdan, noted French astronomer. It was roughly surveyed by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and resurveyed by the FIDS, 1948-50. BIG RAZORBACK ISLAND: southeasternmost of the Dellbridge Is., lying in Erebus Bay off the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°41’S., 166°29’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. The name is descriptive. Not adopted: Large Razorback Island. Bikjebugten: see Hound Bay. 60 BILLBOARD, THE: a massive granitic monolith, about 2,400 ft. in el., with vertical faces rising more than 1,000 ft. above the continental ice, standing just S. of Mt. Rea and forming a distinctive land- mark in this part of the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°03’S., 145°35’W. Disc. in November 1934 by the ByrdAE sledge party under Paul Siple, and so named because of its form and appearance. BILLIE PEAK: peak about 2,400 ft. in el., which rises about 1.5 mi. ENE. of Bay Pt. on the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°45’S., 63°23’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 DI survey, but may reflect on earlier naming. BILLIE ROCKS: group of rocks 0.1 mi. NE. of Drying Pt., lying in Borge Bay along the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. The name Billie Rock, for the eastern- most rock of the group, appeared on a chart based upon a 1927 sketch survey of Borge Bay by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery. The name has since been extended to include the entire group. Not adopted: Billie Rock. Billis Islet: see Bills Islet. BILL ROCK: rock which lies 0.3 mi. E. of the S. end of Grass I., in Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°40’W. Charted and named in 1928 by DI personnel. BILLS GULCH: the northern of two glaciers flowing E. from the plateau upland into the head of Trail Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°07’S., 65°44’W. This glacier was used by the sledge party under Paul H. Knowles which trav- ersed Palmer Pen. from the East Base of the USAS on its way to Hilton Inlet in 1940. Named by the USAS for a lead dog that died at this point. The name has been approved because of its wide use on maps and in reports. Not adopted: Bill’s Gulch. BILLS ISLET: islet which lies in the harbor of Port Lockroy, about 0.1 mi. NE. of Goudier It., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°31’W. Disc. and charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 DI sur- vey, but may reflect an earlier naming. Not adopted: Billis Islet. BILLS POINT: point marking the S. extremity of Delta I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°59’W. The name was probably given by DI personnel who roughly charted Delta I. in 1927. The feature was surveyed by Argentine ex- peditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BILLYCOCK HILL: rounded, ice-covered hill which rises to about 6,000 ft. in el. and projects 600 ft. above the surrounding ice sheet, situated 4 mi. S. of the head of Northeast Gl. and the same distance NE. of the head of Neny Fjord on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 66°32’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. The hill was re- surveyed in 1946 by the FIDS and named by them for its resemblance to a billycock hat. Bingham Col: see Safety Col. BINGHAM GLACIER: large glacier flowing eastward to the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°22’S., 63°02’W., with Cape Reichelderfer as its southern portal. Together with Fleming Gl., which flows W., it fills a major transverse depression across Palmer Pen. The point at which Bingham Glacier reaches the coast was photographed by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, and it was mapped by the BGLE under Rymill, who with E. W. Bingham sledged across the peninsula a short distance S. of the transverse depression in 1936. It was also mapped in 1940 by the USAS. Named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Cdr. E. W. Bing- ham, RN, of the BGLE. BINGLEY GLACIER: tributary glacier entering the W. side of Beardmore Gl. immediately NE. of Mt. Adams; in about 84°24’S., 167°30’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named by him after Bingley, England, location of the Shackleton family ancestral home. BIRCHALL PEAKS: cluster of peaks about 2,000 ft. in el., lying at the NW. side of Mt. Iphigene and S. of Paul Block Bay, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°27’S., 146°20’W. Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE. Named by Byrd for Frederick T. Birchall, member of the staff of the New York Times, which published the expedition’s press dispatches. BIRD, CAPE: cape which marks the N. tip of Ross I.; in 77°08’S., 165°35’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Lt. Edward J. Bird of the exp. ship Erebus. BIRD, MOUNT: mountain which stands about 7 mi. S. of Cape Bird, the N. tip of Ross I.; in 77°15’S., 166°45’E. It was charted by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and apparently named by them after nearby Cape Bird. BIRD ISLAND: island, about 4 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which is separated from the W. end of South Georgia by Bird Sound; in 54°00’S., 38°05’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who so named it because he saw numerous birds on the island. Not adopted: Vogel Insel [German]. 61 BIRD SOUND: navigable sound, about 2.5 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, separating Bird I. from the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°03’W. The names La Roche Strait and Bird Sound have both been used on charts for this feature for many years. The name Bird Sound is approved on the basis of local usage at South Georgia. The feature takes its name from nearby Bird Island. Not adopted: La Roche Strait. Birks, Mount: see Napier Birks, Mount. BIRLEY GLACIER: glacier, at least 6 mi. long, flowing W. into the NE. corner of Barilari Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°57’S., 64°30’W. This glacier was first seen and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was resur- veyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Kenneth P. Birley, who contrib- uted toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37. BIRTHDAY POINT: northernmost point of a bare, precipitous promontory forming the E. boundary of Pressure Bay, on the N. coast of Vic- toria Land; in about 71°26’S., 169°20’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Bisco Bay: see Biscoe Bay. BISCOE, MOUNT: distinctive sharp black peak rising to over 1,500 ft. in el., surmounting Cape Ann on the coast of Enderby Land; in about 63°13’S., 57°177E. Photographed from the air on Dec. 22, 1929 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen in a flight from the Norvegia, and on Jan. 14, 1930 photographed from the Discovery by the BANZARE under Mawson. The peak is thought to be the feature disc. on March 16, 1831 and named Cape Ann by a Br. exp. under Biscoe. The name Cape Ann has been retained from the adjoining cape; Mawson named the peak for its apparent discoverer, John Biscoe, Master, RN, Ret., noted British Antarctic explorer. BISCOE BAY: bay which indents the SW. coast of Anvers I. immediately E. of Roland Bonaparte Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°48’S., 63°48’W. First charted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for John Biscoe, who may have landed there in February 1832. Not adopted: Bisco Bay. Biscoe Bay: see Sulzberger Bay. BISCOE ISLANDS: chain of islands, of which the principal ones are Renaud, Rabot, Nansen, and Watkins, lying parallel to the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and extending in a NE.-SW. direction about 75 miles; centering in about 66°00’S., 66°30’W. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Named for John Biscoe, leader of a Br. exp. which explored the islands on Feb. 17 and 18, 1832. BISMARCK STRAIT: a strait which lies between the S. end of Anvers and Wiencke Islands and the Palmer Pen.; in about 64°55’S., 63°45’W. It was explored in 1874 by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, and was named by him for the German statesman, Prince Otto Bismarck. BJAALAND, MOUNT: one of a group of low- lying peaks barely protruding through the ice of the south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft. in el. between Mounts Hassel and Prestrud, which stand about 20 mi. SW. of Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°33’S., 162°35’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Olaf Bjaaland, a member of the South Pole Party. Not adopted: Mount Olaf Bjaaland. Bjarne Aagaard Islands: see Aagaard Islands. Bjerko Head; Bjerk6 Headland: see Darnley, Cape. BJERK@® PENINSULA: prominent peninsula on Mac-Robertson Coast, forming the NW. shore of MacKenzie Bay; in about 67°50’S., 69°30’E. Nor- wegian whalers explored this area in January and February 1931, naming the cape at the end of this peninsula for gunner Reidar Bjerk6 of the whale catcher Bouvet II, from whose deck the coast was sketched January 19. Since Sir Douglas Mawson probably saw this cape from a great distance as early as Dec. 26, 1929, the British name of Cape Darnley has been retained for the cape, while the Norwegian name has been applied to the peninsula. BLACK, MOUNT: mountain about 9,000 ft. in el., forming a distinctive landmark in its region, lying at the W. side of the upper reaches of Shackleton Gl. just S. of the high escarpment of the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°23’S., 179°45’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on flights to the Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and named by him for Van Lear Black, American financier and contrib- utor to the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Black, Mount: see Ruth Black, Mount. BLACKBURN, MOUNT: massive mountain standing E. of Robert Scott Gl., about 10 mi. S. of the W. end of Watson Escarpment, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°12’S., 146°W. Disc. by and named for Quin A. Blackburn, geologist, leader of the ByrdAE geological party which sledged the full length of Robert Scott Gl. in December 1934. Not adopted: Mount Jessie O’Keefe. 62 BLACK HEAD: dark, rugged promontory about 200 ft. in el., separating Cook and Possession Bays, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°07’W. Named by DI personnel who charted this area in 1929-30. BLACK HEAD: dark headland marking the S. side of the entrance to Holtedahl Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°06’S., 65°40’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Blackhead Rock: see Blackrock Head. BLACK ISLAND: islet about 0.25 mi. long, which lies in the Argentine Is., about 0.25 mi. SW. of Skua I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°16’S., 64°18’W. | Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. BLACK ISLAND: wedge-shaped island about 13 mi. long and wide; lies S. of Ross I. and projects through the ice shelf between Brown and White Islands to about 3,600 ft. in el.; in about 78°15’S., 166°30’E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and so named by him because of the black volcanic rocks on the island. Not adopted: Schwarze Insel [German], Svart Oya [Norwegian]. BLACK ISLAND CHANNEL: channel about 200 yards wide, which lies between Black I. and Suka I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. BLACK PEAK: sharp, dark, double-pointed peak about 800 ft. in el., near the NW. end of Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°02’W. This peak, presumably known to early sealers in the area, was charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935 and given this descriptive name. BLACK POINT: point on the W. side of Right. Whale Bay, about 2 mi. SSW. of Nameless Pt., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°42’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in 1930. BLACK POINT: point which lies 2.5 mi. SE. of Cape Shirreff on the N. coast of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 60°44’°W. The point was known to sealers as early as 1822. It was charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. BLACK REEF: reef which lies about 2 mi. W. of Betbeder Its. and some 24 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 65°08’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BLACK RIDGE: narrow dividing ridge with sharp peaks about 3,500 ft. in el., between Corner Gl. and Priestley Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 74°37’S., 163°28’E. First explored by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and so named because of its appearance. BLACK ROCK: isolated rock about 0.7 mi. E. of Candlemas I., in the*South Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°39’'W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. BLACK ROCK: low rock about 10 mi. SE. of Shag Rocks, and lying some 105 mi. WNW. of South Georgia; in about 53°39’S., 41°48’W. Black Rock may have been considered as part of the “Aurora Islands” reported in this vicinity by the ship Aurora in 1762. It was charted in 1927 by DI per- sonnel on the William Scoresby. BLACKROCK HEAD: conspicuous rock outcrop on the shoreline of Kemp Coast, reported to lie about 8 mi. NNW. of the W. side of the entrance to Stefanson Bay; in about 67°10’S., 58°56’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby and so named by them for its appearance. Not adopted: Blackhead Rock. BLACK ROCKS: small group of rocks about 0.5 mi. SE. of Framnaes Pt., in the N. part of Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 36°38’W. The mame Blenheim Rocks has appeared for these rocks, but since about 1930 the name Black Rocks has been used more consistently. Not adopted: Blen- heim Rocks. BLACK THUMB MOUNTAIN: mountain with notched and precipitous sides, about 3,900 ft. in el., lying about 5 mi. SE. of Red Rock Ridge on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°25’S., 66°53’W. Charted and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. BLACKWALL MOUNTAINS: group of moun- tains, the highest about 4,500 ft. in el., extending in a WNW.-ESE. direction for 5 mi. and lying close S. of Neny Fjord on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°22’S., 66°48’W. They are bounded to the E. by Remus Gl., to the S. by Romulus Gl., and are separated from Red Rock Ridge to the W. by Safety Col. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because the black cliffs of the mountains facing Rymill Bay remain snow free throughout the year. Not adopted: Climbing Range. ‘BLACK RIDGE: sharp rock ridge marked by three peaks, about 1,500 ft. in el., forming the NW. wall of Depot Gl. at the head of Hope Bay, on the 63 NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25/S.,57°05’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Named by the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1945. BLAIKLOCK ISLAND: high and rugged, irregu- lar-shaped island, about 9 mi. long, lying near the head of Bigourdan Fjord; in 67°33’S., 67°00’W. It is separated from Pourquoi Pas I., to the SW., by The Narrows and from the W. coast of Palmer Pen., to the N., by Jones Channel. The feature was partially surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry- mill, at which time it was charted as a promontory of Palmer Pen. It was resurveyed and determined to be an island in 1949 by Kenneth V. Blaiklock, FIDS surveyor for whom it is named. BLAIR GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the continental ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to the head of Maury Bay, where it terminates in a prominent tongue midway between Cape Lewis and Bell Gla- cier, Banzare Coast; in about 66°45’S., 124°40’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for James L. Blair, midshipman on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. BLAIR ISLETS: small group of islets lying about 4 mi. WNW. of Cape Gray, at the E. side of the en- trance to Commonwealth Bay, off George V Coast; in about 66°50’S., 143°12’ E. Disc. in 1912 by the Main Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for J. H. Blair, chief officer of the exp. ship Aurora. BLAKE, CAPE: rocky cape about 4 mi. WSW. of Cape Wild, on George V Coast; in about 68°22’S., 148°58’E. Disc. in 1912 by the Main Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for L. R. Blake, geologist and cartographer with the AAE party based on Macquarie Island during 1912-13. BLAKE ISLET: narrow islet lying in the ap- proach to Bone Cove and about 4 mi. SSW. of Cape Roquemaurel, off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°37’S., 58°58’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS and named by them for Pattrick J. Blake, midshipman on the brig Williams used in exploring the South Shetland Is. and Bransfield Str. in 1820. BLANCHARD RIDGE: rocky ridge about 1,100 ft. in el., which lies between Chaigneau Peak and Mt. Scott on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°12’S., 64°02’W. Charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for a Monsieur Blanchard, then French Consul at Punta Arenas. Not adopted: Blanchard Peak. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Blenheim Rocks: see Black Rocks. BLIND BAY: small bay forming the.NE. ex- tremity and head of Bourgeois Fjord and marking the junction of Falliéres Coast and Loubet Coast, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; IN Giimoless 66°32’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE un- der Rymill. So named by the FIDS, following a 1949 survey, because the bay proved a blind alley to sledging parties. Block Mount: see Paul Bloc, Mount; William Block, Mount. Block Bay: see Paul Block Bay. BLOCK MOUNTAIN: very prominent block- shaped mountain, about 4,800 ft. in el., which juts eastward from the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island immediately S. of Transition Gl.; in 70°28’S., 68°52’W. Its N., E., and S. sides, which are demarked by sharply defined corners, are nearly vertical, and from its NE. corner a low spur connects this mountain with Tilt Rock. Block Mountain was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and it was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. The descriptive name was given by FIDS. BLOW-ME-DOWN BLUFF: prominent rock bluff, about 6,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. flank of Northeast Gl. on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 68°03’S., 66°40’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE, and by the USAS in 1940. Resur- veyed in 1946 and 1948 by the FIDS who so named it because the bluff stands in the windiest part of Northeast Gl., and many members of FIDS sledge parties have fallen in this area in high winds. Bludau Mountains:. (in about 73°30’S., 4°10’E.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as it is not possible to correlate the feature with subse- quent survey work. BLUE GLACIER: glacier about 2 to 4 mi. wide and about 20 mi. long, which flows into Bowers Piedmont Gl. about 10 mi. S. of New Harbor, in Victoria Land; in about 77°52’S., 164°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who gave it this name because of its clear blue ice at the time of discovery. BLUE WHALE HARBOR: small, sheltered an- chorage, entered about 1 mi. SW. of Cape Con- stance, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°01’W. Charted in 1930 by DI per- sonnel. The blue whale is a commercially impor- 64 tant species which is widely distributed in polar and subpolar waters. BLUNT COVE: small bay at the head of Vin- cennes Bay, lying immediately W. of the steep ter- minus of Bond Glacier and indenting the E. end of Knox Coast; in about 67°00’S., 109°05’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Simon F. Blunt, passed midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. BLYTHE BAY: bay about 17 mi. wide, which in- dents for 5 mi. the N. side of Livingston I. between Cape Shirreff and Williams Pt., in the South Shet- land Is.; in 62°29’S., 60°30’W. The name appears on Powell’s chart of 1822 published by Laurie, as applying to a small bay on the SE. side of Desola- tion I. It has since been extended to the area de- scribed. Probably named after Blythe, England (now Blyth), home of William Smith who reported the discovery of the South Shetland Is. in 1819. Blythe Bay: see Desolation Harbor. Bob Bartlett Glacier: see Bartlett Glacier. BODMAN POINT: rocky point which is situated centrally on the NW. coast of Saymour I. in the James Ross I. group; in 64°14’S., 56°48’W. First surveyed by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, who named it Cape Bodman after Dr. Gosta Bodman, hydrographer and meteorologist with the expedition. It was resurveyed by the FIDS in 1952. Point is considered a more suitable descriptive term for this feature than cape. Not adopted: Cape Bodman. BODYS, MOUNT: easternmost mountain on Ade- laide I.; in 67°09’S., 67°48’W. It is more than 4,000 ft. in el. and is ice covered except for small rock exposures on the S. side. First roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for Set. William. S. Bodys, mechanic for the expedition’s Norseman airplane in 1950. BOECKELLA, LAKE: lake, about 400 yards long and 200 yards wide, which lies on the SE. shore of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 57°00’W. Disc. and named by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Boeckella is a species of crustaceans found in this area. BOGGS, CAPE: bold, ice-covered headland marking the E. end of Eielson Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°33’S., 61°23’W. Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS who charted this coast by land and from the airin 1940. Named GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA for S. W. Boggs, Geographer, Dept. of State, whose political and geographical studies of Antarctica were used by the USAS. Not adopted: Cape Hielson. Boggs Strait: see Stefansson Strait. BOHNECKE GLACIER: steep glacier about 3 mi. wide, which flows SSE. to the NW. side of Violante Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°25’S., 61°25’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the glacier was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, under Ronne, who in con- junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Gunther Bohnecke, Ger- man oceanographer and member of the Ger. exp. in the Meteor, 1925-27. BOLAND, MOUNT: mountain over 3,500 ft. in el., about 3 mi. S. of Mt. Peary and about 4 mi. E. of Lumiére Peak, on the E.—-W. trending ridge that borders the N. side of Trooz Gl., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°19’S., 63°52’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by .uim for Monsieur Boland, seaman, and later lieu- cenant on the Pourquoi-Pas?, Charcot’s exp. ship. B@LINGEN ISLANDS: group of small islands, islets and rocks, about 8 mi. across, bounded on the S. by Polararboken Glacier Tongue, lying about 5 mi. WSW. of Larsemann Hills, off Ingrid Christen- sen Coast; in about 69°31’S., 75°10’E. Disc. and roughly charted in February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen. Bglingen is a Norwegian word meaning the herd. More fully charted by Nor- wegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. Not adopted: Bolingen [Norwegian]. BOLLE, MONT: rather isolated peak rising through the icecap in New Schwabenland, about 19 mi. N. of the edge of the polar plateau and a like distance WNW. of Kubus Mtn.; in about 72°18’S., 6°15’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938— 39, and named for Herbert Bolle, aviation super- visor of the expedition. BONAPARTE, MOUNT: northernmost of three summits lying about 45 mi. inland from the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf, in the Queen Alexandra Range, and about 18 mi. SSE. of Mt. Markham; in about 83°14’S., 161°30’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named by him for Prince Roland Bonaparte, Pres. of the Geographical Soc. of Paris. Bonaparte Point: see Roland Bonaparte Point. 65 BOND GLACIER: steep glacier, about 10 mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW. from the continental ice at the junction of Knox and Budd Coasts and terminating abruptly at the head of Vincenes Bay between Hatch Its. and Blunt Cove; in about 67°05’S., 109°20’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—-ACAN for Capt. Charles A. Bond, USN, commander of the western task group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68, 1946-47. BON DOCTEUR NUNATAK: small coastal nuna- tak, about 85 ft. in el., standing at the W. side of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, about 0.5 mi. SSE. of Pétrel I. in the Géologie Arch., on Adélie Coast; in 65°40’S., 140°01’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, and named for Dr. Jean Cendron, medical officer and biologist with the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52. BONE COVE: semi-circular cove about 2 mi. wide, situated immediately S. of Young Pt. at the terminus of West Russell Gl., along the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°38’S., 58°53’W. The FIDS charted the cove in 1948 and named it for Thomas M. Bone, midshipman on the Brig. Wil- liams, which made explorations in the South Shet- land Is. and Bransfield Str. in 1820. BONGRAIN, CAPE: cape which forms the S. side of the entrance to Dalgliesh Bay on the SW. side of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°44’S., 67°47’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named the cape for Maurice Bon- grain, surveyor and First Officer of the Pouwrquoi- Pas?, ship of the FrAE, 1908-10, who was respon- sible for the first surveys of this area. BONGRAIN ICE PIEDMONT: large ice pied- mont, about 60 mi. long in a NESW. direction, and at least 17 mi. wide in its widest part, occupy- ing the NW. coastal area of Alexander I Island; centering near 69°10’S., 72°05’W. First seen from a distance and roughly surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. It was photographed from the air by the BGLE during a flight on Aug. 15, 1936, and roughly mapped from these photo- graphs. Named by the BR-APC in 1954 for Mau- rice Bongrain, surveyor of the FrAE, 1908-10, who was responsible for the first map of this coast. BOOMERANG GLACIER: tributary glacier which flows S. from the slopes of Mt. Dickason to join Campbell Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 74°41’S., 163°52’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, who so named it because of its shape. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BOOTHBY, CAPE: rounded cape on a large pro- jection of the coast at the E. edge of Enderby Land, just N. of Edward VIII Bay; in about 66°36’S., 57°15’E. Disc. by DI personnel on the William Scoresby on about Feb. 28, 1936, and named by them for the captain of the William Scoresby, Lt. Cdr. C. R. U. Boothby, RNR. BOOTH ISLAND: V-shaped island, about 5 mi. long and 3 mi wide at the N. end, rising to about 3,100 ft. in el., lying in the Dannebrog Is. about 7 mi. WSW. of Cape Renard, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 64°00’W. Disc. and named by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann, probably for Oskar Booth, or Stanley Booth, or both, members of the Hamburg Geographical Soc. at that time. The US-ACAN has rejected the name Wandel Island, applied by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, in favor of the original nam- ing. Not adopted: Wandel Island. BOOT ROCK: rock about 105 ft. in el., which lies 0.1 mi. off the SE. side of Candlemas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°03’S., 26°39’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Dis- covery II in 1930. BORCHGREVINK NUNATAK: nunatak about 2 mi. long and about 2,100 ft. in el., which stands at the S. side of the entrance to Richthofen Valley, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°03’S., 62°30’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for C. E. Borchgrevink, leader of the BrAE, 1898-1900. The nunatak was charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Not adopted: Borchgrewingk Nunatak, Borchgrewink Nunatak. Borchgrewingk Nunatak; Borchgrewink Nuna- tak: see Borchgrevink Nunatak. BOREAS NUNATAK: a nunatak on Princess Martha Coast, standing close W. of Passat Nunatak and fronting on the large ice shelf that here fringes the coast; in about 71°18’S., 4°00’W. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for one of the Dornier flying boats of the expedition. Bores Dal: see Bore Valley. BORE VALLEY: valley, almost 2 mi. long in a N.-S. direction, extending from Maiviken to Grytviken in Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°31’W. It was first surveyed and named “Bores Dal’ by the SwedAE under Nor- denskjold, 1901-4, but the form Bore Valley has since become well established for the feature. The discovery by J. Gunnar Andersson, of the SwedAE, of numerous traces of a former ice covering, prov- 66 ing that ice had once filled the entire valley, sug- gested the name. Bore is the Swedish word for Boreas, the god of the north wind. Not adopted: Bores Dal [Swedish], Mai Viken Glen. BORGE BAY: small bay between Balin and Berntsen Points, on the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. Charted in 1912 by a Nor. exp. under S¢grlle. Named for Capt. Hans Borge, master of the Polynesia, who undertook additional mapping of the bay during the following year. Not adopted: Borge Harbor, Queens Bay. Borge Harbor. see Borge Bay. Borge Havna: see Factory Cove. BORGEN BAY: circular bay about 3 mi. wide, indenting the SE. coast of Anvers I. close W. of Bay Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him, probably for Karl Borgen, Ger- man astronomer. Not adopted: Borgen Bay, Wil- liam Bay. BORLEY, CAPE: cape projecting slightly from the coast of Enderby Land; in about 65°57’S., 55°13’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on about Jan. 12, 1930. John Oliver Borley was a member of the Discovery Committee. BORLEY POINT: the NW. tip of Montagu L., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°23’S., 26°28’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for John Oliver Borley. Borodino Island: see Smith Island. BORRADAILE ISLAND: one of the Balleny Is., about 2 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, lying about 5 mi. S. of the SE. end of Young I.; in about 66°35’S., 162°50’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a Br. exp. - under Balleny, who named it for W. Borradaile, one of the merchants who united with Charles Enderby in sending out the expedition. Not adopted: Borradaille Island, Borradalie Oya [Nor- wegian]. Borradaille Island; Borradali Oya: see Borradaile Island. BOTANY BAY: small bight between Cape Geol- ogy and Discovery Bluff, on the S. side of Granite Hbr., along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°00’S., 162°37’E. Charted by the Western Ge- ological Party of the BrAE under Scott, who ex- plored the Granite Hbr. area in 1911-12. Named T. Griffith Taylor and Frank Debenham, Austral- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ian members of the party, after Botany Bay, Aus- tralia. BOTTRILL HEAD: rugged headland on the E. side of Bourgeois Fjord which forms the N. side of the entrance to Dogs Leg Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S., 66°57’W. First sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The headland was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who named it for Harold Bottrill, Chairman of the Board of Directors, later Gen. Mgr., of Maclean and Stapledon S.A., shipping agents at Montevideo, who gave great assistance to the BGLE, 1934-37, and to FIDS, 1943-48. BOULDER POINT: the S. extremity of Stoning- ton I., close off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed in 1940 by the USAS. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so named by them because of a prominent granite boulder on this point. BOULDER ROCK: rock lying along the W. coast of the Cape Adare peninsula just S. of Ridley Beach, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°19’S., 170°14’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Boulier, Islotes: see Rho Islets. Bouquet Bay: see Bouquet de la Grye Bay. BOUQUET DE LA GRYE BAY: bay, about 10 mi. long and wide, which indents the N. coast of Brabant I. immediately E. of Pasteur Pen., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°05’S., 62°10’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Jean Bouquet de la Grye, French hydrographic engineer and a member of the commission which published the scientific results of the expedition. Not adopted: Bouquet Bay. BOURGEOIS FJORD: inlet about 30 mi. long, in.a NE.-SW. direction, and 4 mi. wide, lying be- tween the E. sides of Pourquoi Pas and Blaiklock Islands and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°40’S., 67°05’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Col. Joseph E. Bourgeois, Dir. of the Geographic Service of the French Army. The outline of thjs inlet was more accurately delineated in 1936 by ;jthe BGLE under Rymill, and in 1948-50 by the FIDS. Bouvet Island: see Bouvetgya. BOUVET@YA [Norwegian]; BOUVET ISLAND or BOUVET [conventional]: island, about 5 mi. long in an E.—W. direction, and 4 mi. wide, which terminates in steep rock and ice cliffs on all sides 67 and is surmounted by an ice-covered dome about 3,100 ft. in el., in about 54°26’S., 3°24’E. Disc. on Jan. 1, 1739 by a Fr. exp. under J. B. C. Bouvet de Lozier. Heavy pack ice and fog prevented Bouvet from determining the nature of his discovery. Al- though evidence, recently uncovered, indicates that Bouvetgya was resighted in 1808 and identified as an island by the British ships Snow Swan and Otter, it was not until the German ship Valdivia visited the island in 1898 that the insular nature and accurate position of the feature were deter- mined and made known. BOUVIER, MOUNT: massive, mainly ice-covered mountain, about 6,800 ft. in el., standing imme- diately N. of the head of Stonehouse Bay in the E. part of Adelaide I.; in 67°14’S., 68°09’W. Disc. and roughly positioned by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Louis E. Bouvier, prominent French naturalist. The mountain was surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10, also under Charcot, and by the FIDS in 1948-50. BOWEN, MOUNT: mountain of stratified sand- stone capped by a sharp black peak about 4,100 ft. in el., lying on the N. side of Davis Gl. and SSW. of Mt. Howard, in Victoria Land; in about 75°46’S., 161°02’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4 under Scott, who named this feature for the Hon. C. C. Bowen, one of the men who gave the exp. much assistance in New Zealand. Bower Hill: see Bowers Hills. BOWERS HILLS: rugged, snow-covered hills of moderate height between Capes Cheetham and Williams, on Qates Coast; in about 170°10’S., 162°45’E. First sighted in February 1911 from the Terra Nova, under Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, of the BrAK. Lt. Henry R. Bowers perished with Capt. Robert F. Scott, leader of the BrAE, on the return from the South Pole in 1912. Not adopted: Bower Hill. BOWERS PIEDMONT GLACIER: piedmont gla- cier covering about 25 square mi., lying S. of New Harbor and merging with Blue Gl. to the south, along the W. shore of McMudro Sound, in about 77°45’S., 164°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. The BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, named this feature for Lt. Henry R. Bowers. Not adopted: Butter Point Piedmont, Butter Point Piedmont Glacier. BOWLES, CAPE: cliff forming the S. tip of Clar- ence I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°17’S., 54°03°W. Named in 1820 by a Br. exp. under Bransfield. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BOWLES, MOUNT: mountain about 3,000 ft. in el., which stands about 4 mi. NW. of Mt. Barnard on the divide between South Bay and Moon Bay, on Livingston I. in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°35’S., 60°15’W. The name appears on an 1829 chart based upon a Br. exp. under Foster. BOWLIN, MOUNT: mountain rising to about 7,000 ft. in el., which stands on the E. side of Robert Scott Gl., just W. of Mt. Noville, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°27’S., 146°45’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for William H. Bowlin, airplane pilot with the expe- dition. BOWMAN COAST: that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Northrop, in 67°24’S., 65°16’W., to Cape Agassiz, in 68°30’S., 62°58’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in an aerial flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Named by Wilkins for Isaiah Bowman, then Dir. of the American Geo- graphical Society. BOWMAN ISLAND: ice-covered island about 15 mi. long and from 2 to 6 mi. wide, with a coastal outline resembling the shape of the numeral 8, ly- ing about 21 mi. NE. of Cape Elliott off Knox Coast; in about 65°27’S., 103°18’E. Disc. by the BAN- ZARE under Mawson from the Discovery on Jan. 28, 1931 and named for Isaiah Bowman. Not adopted: Bowman Islands. Bowman Peak: see John Bowman Peak. BOWMAN PENINSULA: peninsula, about 25 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and 15 mi. wide in its N. and central portions, lying between Nantucket and Gardner Inlets on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°47’S., 62°22’W. The peninsula is ice covered and narrows toward the S., terminating in Cape Adams. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Isaiah Bowman. BOYD GLACIER: heavily-crevassed glacier, from 6 to 15 mi. wide, in the S. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land, rising in the vi- cinity of the Clark Mtns. and flowing WNW. about 60 mi. to Sulzberger Bay. It is fed by two short, broad tributaries, one from the N., another from the S., and the terminus of the glacier lies in about 77°10’S., 145°45’W. Disc. on aerial flights of the ByrdAE in 1934 and named for Vernon D. Boyd, machinist on the exp. and member of West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. Not adopted: Ames Glacier. BOYD STRAIT: lies between Snow I. and Smith I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°50’S., 62°00’W. Named in 1823 by a Br. exp. under Weddell for Capt. David Boyd, RN. 68 BRABANT ISLAND: second largest island of the Palmer Arch., lying between Anvers and Liége Islands; in 64°15’S., 62°20’W. It is about 33 mi. long in a N.-S. direction, 20 mi. wide, and rises to about 6,300 ft. in el. in Mt. Parry. Named by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, for the prov- ince of Brabant, Belgium, in recognition of the support given to the BelgAE by its citizens. BRADLEY, MOUNT: pyramidal peak about 2,800 ft. in el., which lies about 6 mi. WSW. of Pitt Pt. on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°53’S., 58°37’W. First charted in 1945 by the FIDS, who named it for K. G. Bradley, at that time Colonial Sec. in the Falkland Islands. BRAIN ISLAND: islet at the N. side of Husvik Hbr., in Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°42’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in 1928. Branco, Mount: see Rio Branco, Mount. Brand-Berg: see Brandt, Mount. BRANDT, MOUNT: mountain projecting through the icecap at the N. margin of the New Schwabenland piedmont; in about 172°25’S., 1°00’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Emil Brandt, a sailor on the expedition. Not adopted: Brand-Berg [Ger- man]. BRANSFIELD, MOUNT: prominent, conical- topped, ice-covered mountain, about 2,500 ft. in el., about 2 mi. SW. of Cape Dubouzet, the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°17’S., 57°06’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, who named it for Edward Bransfield, Master, RN, who circumnavi- gated and charted the South Shetland Is. in 1820. Not adopted: Mount Hope. Bransfield, Point: see Bransfield Island. BRANSFIELD ISLAND: circular island about 3.5 mi. in diameter, lying 2 mi. SW. of D’Urville I., the northernmost of the Joinville I. group, off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°12’S., 56°38’°W. The name Point Bransfield, after Edward Bransfield, Master, RN, was given in 1842 by a Br. exp. under Ross to the low western termination of what is now the Joinville I. group. A 1947 survey by the FIDS determined that this western termination is a separate island. Not adopted: Point Bransfield. BRANSFIELD ROCKS: group of rocks lying some 23 mi. ENE. of North Foreland, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°45’S., 56°51’W. These rocks were reported in 1926 to lie SW. of this position. Named for Edward Brans- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA field, Master, RN, who reported their presence in 1820. BRANSFIELD STRAIT: body of water about 60 mi. wide extending for 200 mi. in a general NE.-SW. direction between the South Shetland Is. and Palmer Pen.; centering in 63°S.,59°W. Named in about 1825 by James Weddell, Master, RN, for Edward Bransfield, Master, RN. BRANSTETTER ROCKS: small group of offshore rocks, lying about 1 mi. ENE. of Thil It. and about 0.2 mi. W. of a small rocky bluff, which may later prove to be an island, close off Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°08’S., 71°53’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for J. C. Branstetter, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. BRATEGG BANK: submarine bank lying W. of Palmer Pen., about 65 mi. NW. of the central part of the Biscoe Is.; in about 65°16’S., 68°35’W. The bank was charted by the Norwegian ship Brategg in 1948. Not adopted: Bratteggen [Norwegian]. Bratholm: see Steepholm. Bratteggen: see Brategg Bank. Braun Berg: see Brown Mountain. BREAKWATER ISLET: islet, marked by a string of rocks extending in a SW. arc, lying 0.5 mi. off the E. side of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°13’W. Disc. and named by the FIDS in 1944. BREAKWIND RIDGE: prominent rocky ridge, about 2 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and 2,000 ft. in el., standing close SW. of the head of Fortuna Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°50’W. The name Breakwind Range was prob- ably applied by DI personnel who mapped Fortuna Bay in 1929-30. Following a resurvey by the SGS, 1951-52, the descriptive term was altered to ridge, which is more suitable than range for this rela- tively small feature. gests a beneficial function of this ridge in protect- ing anchorages at Fortuna Bay from violent south- west and westerly winds. Not adopted: Breakwind Range. Breckenridge, Mount: see Breckinridge, Mount. BRECKINRIDGE, MOUNT: peak in the N. group of the Rockefeller Mtns., standing about 2.1 mi. SW. of Mt. Nilsen on Edward VII Pen.; in about The name Breakwind sug- . 69 78°03/S., 155°28’W. Disc. by the BydrAE in 1929 and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Col. and Mrs. Henry Breckinridge of New York. Not adopted: Mount Breckenridge. BREID BAY: bay about 20 mi. wide, which ir- regularly indents, for as much as 12 mi., the Prin- cess Ragnhild Coast; in about 70°20’S., 23°00’E. This bay was charted and named Breidvika by H. E. Hansen, as a result of aerial photographs made on Feb. 6, 1937 by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen. Not adopted: Breidvika [Nor- wegian], Broad Bay. Breidneset: see Breidnes Peninsula. BREIDNES PENINSULA: rocky peninsula, about 7 mi. long and from 2 to 5 mi. wide, extending W. from the main section of the Vestfold Hills, on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°35'S., 78°10’E. The name derives from Breidneset (the broad headland) as applied on the H. E. Hansen charts compiled from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. Not adopted: Breidneset [Norwe- gian]. Breidvika: see Breid Bay. BREITFUSS GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long, which flows S. from an el. of 5,000 ft. into Mill Inlet, close W. of Cape Chavanne, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°58’S., 64°52’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Leonid Breitfuss, German polar explorer, historian, and author of many polar bibliographies. Not adopted: Wilson Glacier. BREWSTER, MOUNT: mountain at the S. end of the Admiralty Range, about 4,000 ft. in el., standing on the SW. side of Tucker Inlet, near the N. end of Victoria Land; in about 72°50’S., 169°20’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Sir David Brewster, Scottish physicist. BREYER, MOUNT: sentinel-type mountain about 11,700 ft. in el., standing on the W. side of the upper reaches of Amundsen Gl. about 15 mi. ENE. of Mt. Helmer Hanssen, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°00’S., 160°30’W. This moun- tain was disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929. On a subsequent chart, however, the name Mount Breyer was applied to the mountain to the W. that has now been identified as the feature named Mount Helmer Hanssen by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen in November 1911. The US—ACAN ap- plied the name Mount Breyer to this hitherto un- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA named 11,700-foot mountain disc. by Byrd, and retained the name Mount Helmer Hanssen for the mountains so named by Amundsen. Mount Breyer is named for Robert S. Breyer, West Coast rep- resentative and patron of the ByrdAE, 1928-30. Not adopted: Mount Helmer Hanssen (q.v.). Breyer, Mount: see Helmer Hanssen, Mount. Brialmont Bay: see Brialmont Cove; Hughes Bay. BRIALMONT COVE: cove in Hughes Bay, lying between Cape Charles and Spring along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°14’S., 61°07’W. Charted in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who named it for Lieutenant-Général Brailmont, a member of the Belgica Commission. Not adopted: Brailmont Bay. BRIAN ISLAND: westernmost of the Debenham Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°07’'W. Charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, who named it for a son of Frank Deben- ham, member of the BGLE Advisory Committee. BRIDGEMAN ISLAND: circular-shaped, volcanic island marked by steep sides, about 2 mi. in extent and about 760 ft. in el., lying about 25 mi. E. of the SE. end of King George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 56°40’W. Bridgeman is an old established name dating back to about 1820. Not adopted: Bridgeman’s Island, Bridgman Island, Helena Island. Bridgman Island: see Bridgeman Island. BRIESEMEISTER PEAK: peak about 2,300 ft. in el., which stands about 7 mi. WNW. of Cape Rymill on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°28’S., 62°45’°W. This peak was photographed from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928, and by the USAS in 1940. It was named by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, for William A. Briesemeis- ter, chief cartographer with the American Geo- graphical Soc., who by recognizing this peak on two photographs taken by Wilkins established their continuity, an important clue to the identity and correct position of Stefansson Strait (Geo- graphical Review, July 1948, pp. 477, 484). Not adopted: Mount Briesemeister. BRIGGS POINT: point which forms the W. side of the entrance to Inverleigh Hbr., on the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°31’S., 63°00’W. Charted in 1927 by DI personnel on the Discovery, who named it for a member of the survey party. BRINDLE CLIFFS: precipitous mass of ice-free rock, about 2,000 ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. E. of Cape Jeremy on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; 70 in 69°23’S., 68°33’W. First seen from the air and photographed on Aug. 16, 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who so named the feature because of its color. BRISBANE PLATEAU: plateau, about 7 mi. long and more than 3,000 ft. in el., extending from Worswick Hill to Beaufoy Ridge in the central part of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 45°40’W. Named by the FIDS following their sur- vey of 1948-49. Matthew Brisbane, master of the cutter Beaufoy, accompanied James Weddell, master of the brig Jane, to the South Orkney Is. in January 1823, and roughly charted the S. coast of the group. BRISTOL ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long, which lies about midway between Montagu I..and Southern Thule, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°02’S., 26°31’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775, and named by him for the title name of the noble family of Hervey. BRITANNIA RANGE: range of mountains ly- ing between the Cape Murray depression and Barne Inlet, W. of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°S., 159°E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott. The name appears on the charts of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Broad Bay: see Breid Bay. BROAD VALLEY: glacier-filled valley which de- scends ESE. about 10 mi. from Misty Pass on NW. and Windy Gap on the extreme W. to the bay be- tween View Pt. and Bald Head, on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°32’S., 57°55’W. First charted and named by the FIDS in 1946. The name is descriptive. BROCKLEHURST, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain about 4,300 ft. in el., lying about 15 mi. WSW. of Mt. Smith in the Prince Albert Mtns. of Victoria Land; in about 76°08’S., 160°55’E. First charted by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for Sir Philip Lee Brocklehurst, asst. geologist with the expedition. BR@DE ISLAND: small, rounded, tussock-cov- ered island, about 1 mi. SW. of Green I., off the S. tip of South Georgia; in 54°54’S., 36°07’W. This island was first charted in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. It was roughly surveyed by a Ger. exp., 1928-29, under Kohl-Larsen, who appears to have used the name “Hauptinsel’” (head island) for this feature. Following their survey in 1951-52, the SGS reported that the name Brgde (Nor- wegian word meaning loaf) is firmly established among whalers and sealers for this island. This GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA name is approved on the basis of local usage. Not adopted: Hauptinsel [German]. BROGGER, MOUNT: mountain about 4,200 ft. in el., which forms part of the N. wall of Cleveland Gl. about 4 mi. NW. of the confluence of the Cleve- land and Mackay Glaciers, in Victoria Land; in about 76°52’S., 161°55’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1910-138, under Scott, and named for Prof. Walde- mar C. Brogger, Norwegian geologist and mineralo- gist. BROGGER GLACIER: glacier which flows in a W. direction to the E. side of Undine South Hbr., on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°32’S., 36°27’°W. The name appears on a chart by Prof. Olaf Holtedahl, Norwegian geologist who con- ducted investigations in South Georgia in 1928, and is probably for Prof. Waldemar Brogger. BROKA ISLAND: rocky island about 4 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, rising to an el. of about 460 ft., lying about 2 mi. off Kemp Coast and about 18 mi. NW. of the entrance to Stefansson Bay; in about 67°05’S., 58°40’E. This island may have been seen in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, but if so it was considered by them as part of the mainland. It was mapped as an island by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken on a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937, and prob- ably so named by them because of its nature or appearance. BROKEN ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, which lies 1 mi. N. of Centre I. in the N. part of Square Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°49’S., 66°57’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. BROMS, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side of the entrance to Réhss Bay on the SW. side of James Ross I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°20’S., 58°18’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, who named it for G. E. Broms, a patron of the expedition. BROOKLYN ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which lies about 1 mi. N. of Wyck I. in the E. part of Wilhelmina Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°35’S., 61°51’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named after the home of Dr. Frederick A. Cook, American member of the BelgAE who served as surgeon, anthropologist, and photographer. BROOKS, CAPE: cape marked by steep, con- spicuous walls which rise to about 1,500 ft. in el, forming the S. side of the entrance to New Bed- ford Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71 73°36’S., 60°46’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the cape was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Charles E. P. Brooks, English meteorologist on the staff of the Meteorological Office, 1907-49. Brothers, The: see Sorn and Bernt. Brothers Hill: see Three Brothers Hill. BROTHERS ROCKS: group of rocks surrounded by foul ground, about 1 mi. E. of the N. part of Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°46’S., 26°25’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not adopted: The Brothers Rocks. BROUARDEL POINT: point on the SW. side of the Mt. Lacroix peninsula, marking the E. side of the entrance to Port Charcot, Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°03’S., 64°00’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Named for Doctor Brouardel, identified by Charcot as a member of the Institut de France. Not adopted: Point Brouardel. Broune Insel: see Brown Island. BROWN, CAPE: prominent ice-covered cape about 5.5 mi. NNE. of the summit of Mt. Nicholas, marking the E. side of the entrance to Schokalsky Bay on the NE. coast of Alexander I Island; in 69°16’S., 69°45’W. First seen from a distance by the FrAE under Charcot in 1909, but charted as part of a small island. It was photographed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later roughly mapped from the photographs. Sur- veyed from the ground in 1948 by Colin C. Brown, FIDS surveyor at Stonington I., 1948-49, for whom the cape is named. BROWN, MOUNT: elongated rock peak protrud- ing slightly above the continental ice behind Wil- helm II Coast, rising to about 7,000 ft. in el., about 100 mi. SSW. of Cape Penck; in about 68°15’S., 86°30’E. This isolated nunatak lies at the E. side of a series of heavily crevassed domes on the ice surface, indicating an area of completely buried mountain peaks. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp, 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. (jg) Eduardo P. Brown, USN, photographic officer of the western task group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68. BROWN BLUFF: ice-capped, flat-topped moun- tain, about 2,400 ft. in el., with a prominent cliff of reddish-brown volcanic rock on the N. face, about GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 9 mi. S. of Hope Bay on the E. side of Tabarin Pen., at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°32’S., 56°55’W. First charted by the FIDS, who named it following their survey in 1946. BROWNING, MOUNT: mountain about 2,500 ft. in el., which stands at the N. end of the mountain mass dominated by Mt. Abbott, at the W. side of Terra Nova Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 74°45’S., 164°00’E. Probably first seen by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, for Petty Officer Frank V. Browning, RN, a member of the party which ex- plored this area. BROWN ISLAND: small, brown, almost snow- free island about 5.5 mi. SW. of Cape Errera, Wiencke I., at the SW. end of the Palmer Arch.; in 64°58’S., 63°47’W. Charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and so named because its brown color was distinguishable from adjacent snow- capped islands. BROWN ISLAND: an island-like promontory, about 10 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, protruding through the Ross Ice Shelf N. of Mt. Discovery, to which it is connected by a low isthmus; in about 78°10’S., 165°25’E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, who so named it because of its color. Not adopted: Broune Insel [German], Brun Oya [Norwegian]. BROWN MOUNTAIN: rounded hill, about 1,100 ft. in el., standing 1 mi. S. of the whaling station at Grytviken, near the W. shore of Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°31’W. The. feature was first surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. The _ descriptive name “Braun-Berg” or “Braun Berg” (meaning Brown Mountain) was given by A. Szielasko who mapped this area in 1906. The English form of the name was recommended by the Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Braun Berg [German], Braun-Berg [German]. BROWN PEAK: peak about 5,000 ft. in el., which rises in the N. part of Sturge I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 67°17’S., 164°10’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a Br. exp. under Balleny, who named it for W. Brown, one of the merchants who helped Charles Enderby in sending out the exp. The peak was resighted in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who applied the name Russell Peak. Not adopted: Rus- sell Peak. BROWNS BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide, which lies between Capes Mabel and Geddes along the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°36’W. The bay was probably seen in 1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell. It was 72 charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it for R. N. Rudmose Brown, naturalist of the expedition.. Not adopted: Brown’s Bay. BROWNS GLACIER: channel glacier, about 2 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing W. from the conti- nental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen Coast, and terminating in a small tongue about 3 mi. SE. of Ranvik I., at the head of Ranvik Bay; in about 68°57’'S., 77°55’E. Charted by Norwegian car- tographers from aerial photographs taken in Janu- ary 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. Named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, for Lt. (j.g.) Eduardo P. Brown, USN, photo- graphic officer with the western task group of USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. BROWNSON ISLANDS: small group of islands lying off the entrance to Pine Island Bay about 15 mi. SW. of the SW. end of Canisteo Pen., off the Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 73°59’S., 102°00’W. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Brownson, destroyer escort of the eastern task group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68, 1946-47. BROWNS POINT: point which forms the E. side of the entrance to Fournier Bay, on the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 63°02’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery in 1927. BRUCE CAPE: conspicuous bluff about 500 ft. in el., lying just W. of the mouth of Taylor Gl. and forming the E. side of the entrance of Oom Bay, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°25’S., 60°50’E. A landing was made here on Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who applied the name. Bruce Coast: VACATED. See Caird Coast and Princess Martha Coast. BRUCE, MOUNT: snow-covered peak, about 2,800 ft. in el., which forms the highest summit in the Bowers Hills, on Oates Coast; in about 70°08’S., 162°45’E. Disc. by members of the Terra Nova of the BrAE under Scott, who explored along Oates Coast under Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, in Febru- ary 1911. Named for Lt. Wilfred M. Bruce, RNR, officer in charge of zoological work aboard the Terra Nova. . Bruce Harkness, Mount: see Harkness, Mount. BRUCE ISLANDS: group of islands and rocks about 1.5 mi. NW. of Hillium I. and about 3 mi. NW. of Route Pt., the NW. tip of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°54’W. These is- lands were roughly charted in 1912-13 by a Nor. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA whaling exp. under Sgrlle. They were recharted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for Dr. William S. Bruce, leader of the ScotNAE, 1902-4. BRUCE NUNATAK: nunatak which lies 2 mi. W. of Donald Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 60°15’W. Bruce Nunatak was first charted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who named it for Dr. William S. Bruce, leader of the ScotNAE, 1902-4. BRUCE PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau, at least 40 mi. long and about 6,000 ft. in el., standing be- tween Graham Coast and Foyn Coast on Palmer Pen.; in about 66°15’S., 64°30’W. Its W. escarp- ment extends NE. from West Gould Gl. at least as far as 66°S., but its N. and E. limits are still un- known. The first sighting of this plateau is not ascertained, but it was presumably seen in January 1909 by members of the FrAE under Charcot from their position in Pendleton Strait. The S. and W. parts of this feature were roughly surveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS. It was named by them for William S. Bruce, Scottish polar explorer and leader of the ScotNAE, 1902-4. BRUGMANN MOUNTAINS: mountains, prob- ably about 2,000 ft. in el., which are steep and rugged on the E. slopes, but are icecapped and descend gently toward the W., extending in a NNE.-SSW. arc along the E. side of Liége I., in the Palmer Arch.; in about 64°03’S., 61°49’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him for Georges Brugmann, a patron of the expedition. BRUNDAGE, MOUNT: mountain on the Joerg Plateau, in about 75°40’S., 65°00’W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for Burr Brundage, U. S. Dept. of State, who assisted in making arrangements for the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Burr Brundage. BRUNONIA GLACIER: glacier which flows E. to the head of Sunset Fjord in the Bay of Isles, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°29’W. Brunonia Glacier was charted in 1912-13 by Rob- ert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who named it for his alma mater Brown University. Brun Oya: see Brown Island. BRUNS MOUNTAINS: group of mountains pro- jecting through the icecap at the N. margin of the New Schwabenland piedmont; in about 72°05’S., 0°40’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Herbert Bruns, electrical engineer on the expedition. 424589 O-57-6 73 BRUNVOLL GLACIER: broad glacier flowing N. to Mac-Robertson Coast, between Murray Mono- lith and Torlyn Mtn. on the E. and Scullin Mono- lith and Mikkelsen Peak on the W.; in about 67°48’S., 66°18’E. The name was suggested by Bjarne Aagaard for the brothers Arnold and Saebjgrn Brunvoll, Norwegian whaling captains who explored along this coast in the Seksern in January 1931. BRUTUS ISLAND: small island lying near the center of Prince Olav Hbr. on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. The descriptive name Saddle Island was probably given for this feature by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1921-22. This same name is used elsewhere in the Antarctic. To avoid confusion of these names, the Br—APC recommended that a new name be approved for this feature. The name Brutus Island, after the hulk Brutus, which was towed across with coal from South Africa by two small catchers, and has for many years been moored alongside the whaling station in Prince Olav Hbr., was proposed by Sir Harold Salvesen. Not adopted: Saddle Island. BRYANT, CAPE: high, snow-covered, dome- shaped cliff forming the N. side of the entrance to Palmer Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°12’S., 60°55’W. Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS in 1940. Named by the USAS for Herwil M. Bryant of the Smithsonian Inst., biolo- gist with the East Base. BRYDE ISLAND: island about 5 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which lies about 2 mi. S. of Lemaire I. and 4 mi. SW. of Cape Lacaze-Duthiers, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 64°52’S., 63°02’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Named for the representative of the BelgAE in Norway. BUCENTAUR ROCK: the outermost of three rocks lying close NE. of Busen Pt., at the SE. side of the entrance to Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°33’W. The name Low Rock was given for this feature, probably by DI personnel during their survey in 1927. This name is used elsewhere in the Antarctic. To avoid confusion of these names, the Br-APC has recommended that a new name, Bucentaur Rock, be approved for this feature. Bucentaur Rock is associated with the nearby Busen Pt., and is named after a floating factory which was anchored at Husvik in the early years of the whaling station after 1907, and from which the Husvik transport Busen and the catchers Busen I, -II, -III, etc., derive their names. Not adopted: Low Rock. Buchanan, Cape: see Valavielle, Cape. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BUCHANAN BAY: bay about 6 mi. wide, which lies between Mertz Glacier Tongue and Cape De la Motte along George V Coast; in about 67°05’S., 144°45’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Maw- son, who named it for J. Y. Buchanan, who was a patron of the AAE and who had also been a mem- ber of the Br. exp. in the Challenger, 1872-76. BUCHANAN POINT: point about 2.5 mi. NW. of Cape Dundas and 1 mi. SE. of Mackintosh Cove, on the NE. coast of Laurie I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°28’W. In 1903 the ScotNAE under Bruce applied the name ‘Cape Buchanan,” after J. Y. Buchanan, a member of the Challenger cruise of 1872-76, to the prominent cape 3 mi. northeast- ward, which had been named Cape Valavielle in 1838 by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville. At the same time, the French name (in English form but mis- spelled ‘Cape Vallavielle”) was transferred to the point now described. The name Cape Valavielle has been retained for the prominent cape, as ap- plied by D’Urville, on the basis of priority and wide usage. For the sake of historical continuity, the Br—APC in 1954 recommended that the name Bu- chanan Point be applied to the point now described. Not adopted: Cape Vallavielle. BUCHAN BAY: small bay between Cape Hartree and Cape Burn Murdoch, near the SW. end of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°43’/W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it for Alexander Buchan, noted Scottish meteorologist. Bucht der Inseln: see Isles, Bay of. BUCKLE ISLAND: one of the Balleny Is., about 13 mi. long and about 2.5 mi. wide, lying midway between Sturge and Young Islands; in about 66°48’S., 163°15’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a Br. exp. under Balleny, who named it for J. W. Buckle, one of the merchants who united with Charles Enderby in sending out the expedition. BUCKLEY, MOUNT: peak about 8,400 ft. in el., lying close NE. of Mt. Darwin at the head of Beard- more Gl.; in about 84°59’S., 164°35’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and named for George Buckley of New Zealand, a supporter of the expedition. BUCKLEY BAY: open bay lying between Organ Pipe Cliffs and Ninnis Glacier Tongue, along George V Coast; in about 68°15’S., 148°20’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for George Buckley of New Zealand, a patron of the expedition. Buddah Rock: see Buddha Rock. 74 BUDD COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant- arctica lying between the Hatch Its., in about 109°42’S., and Cape Waldron, in about 116°02’E. Disc. in February 1840 by the USEE under Wilkes, and named by him for Thomas A. Budd, acting master on the USEE brig Peacock, who assisted Wilkes with correction of the exp. survey data. Not adopted: Budd Land, Budd’s High Land, Budd’s Land. BUDDENBROCK RANGE: mountain range about 8,500 ft. in el., which extends about 15 mi. in a general E.-W. direction, situated at the NE. side of the Luz Range in the Muhlig-Hofmann Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in about 71°45’S., 5°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for the dir. of the Atlantic division of the former German Lufthansa Cor- poration. BUDDHA ROCK: rock about 120 ft. in el., which lies 0.3 mi. W. of Vindication I. in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°47’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not adopted: Buddah Rock. Budd Land; Budd’s High Land: see Budd Coast. BUFF ISLET: islet which lies about 5 mi. SW. of Joubin Its. and some 12 mi. SW. of Cape Albert de Monaco, Anvers I., at the SW. end of the Palmer Arch.; in 64°51’S., 64°34’W. The islet appears to be first shown and named on a 1936 chart by the BGLE under Rymill. Not adopted: Buff Island. BUGGE ISLAND: small group of ice-covered is- lands lying close off the front of Wordie Ice Shelf and between 4 and 11 mi. NW. of Mt. Guernsey, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°12’S., 68°25’W. First seen from the air and photographed by the BGLE in 1936, and later roughly mapped from the photographs. The islands were observed in 1947 from the Port of Beaumont, Texas by the RARE under Ronne, who named these islands for his niece, Ruth Bugge, who supplied woolen clothing from Norway for the RARE. Not adopted: Ruth Bugge Islands. BULCKE, MOUNT: bold summit about 3,300 ft. in el., at the end of an ice-covered spur which ex- tends S. from the Solvay Mtns., in the S. extremity of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°29’S., 62°38’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him for a supporter of the expedition. Bull, Mount: see Gustav Bull Mountains. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BULLER, CAPE: rugged cape forming the W. side of the entrance to the Bay of Isles, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°22’W. Disc. and named in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. Buller Bay: see Sitka Bay. BULL NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about 3 mi. W. of Bruce Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 60°26’W. Bull Nunatak was first charted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for H. J. Bull, leader with Capt. Leonard Kristensen of a Nor. exp. to the Antarctic, 1894-95. BULS BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which indents the E. side of Brabant I. just N. of Cape D’Ursel, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°08’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him for a supporter of the expedition. BUMSTEAD, MOUNT: mountain about 10,500 ft. in el., of the Grosvenor Range, standing SW. of the head of Shackleton Gl., at the edge of the south polar plateau in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°55’S., 177°10’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929 and named by him for Albert H. Bumstead, chief cartographer of the National Geographic Soc. at that time, and inventor of the sun compass, a de- vice utilizing shadows of the sun to determine di- rections in areas where magnetic compasses are unreliable. Bundemann-Kette: see Bundermann Range. BUNDERMANN RANGE: range of mountains projecting through the icecap on the New Schwabenland piedmont as a northward extension en echelon of the Mayr Range. From a maximum summit el. of about 7,500 ft. in about 72°00’S., 3°30’E., the range extends NNW. in a gentle arc for approximately 15 mi. to about 71°50’S., 3°10’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Max Bundermann, aerial photographer on the Passat, one of the flying boats used by the expedition. Not adopted: Bundemann-Kette [German]. BUNGER HILLS: group of moderately low, rounded hills, overlain by morginic drift and notably ice free in the summer months, which ex- tends W. from the W. end of Knox Coast; in about 66°18’S., 100°45’E. This group is marked by nu- merous meltwater ponds and is bisected by a nar- row, sinuous inlet which extends in an E.-W. di- rection between Edisto Chan. on the W., which in this latitude is filled by Edisto Ice Tongue, and the continental ice overlying Knox Coast on the E. 75 Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Lt. Cdr. David E. Bunger, USN, plane commander of one of the three USN Op. Hjp. aircraft which engaged in photographic missions along most of the coastal area between 14°E. and 164°E. Bunger and members of his crew landed their airplane on the unfrozen E.—W. inlet bisecting the area while on a photographic mission along Knox Coast in February 1947. Not adopted: Bunger Lakes, Bun- ger Oasis, Bunger’s Oasis. Bunger Lakes; Bunger Oasis: see Bunger Hills. BURD, CAPE: low rock cliff forming the SW. end of the Tabarin Pen., at the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°39’S., 57°09’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1946 and named for Oliver Burd, FIDS meteorolo- gist who lost his life when the base hut at Hope Bay burned in November 1948. BURDEN PASSAGE: passage which separates D’Urville I. from Bransfield I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°10’S., 56°32’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Eugene Bur- den, who, as master of the Trepassey, first navi- gated the passage. Burdick Channel: see Pendleton Strait. BURNET COVE: cove about 0.5 mi. SW. of Mai Pt., on the E. side of Maiviken in Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°30’W. Roughly surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nord- enskjold. It was resurveyed in 1929 by DI per- sonnel, and in 1951 by the FIDS. The name Bur- net, given by the Br-APC, is the English name of a plant (genus Acaena) which is common in this vicinity. BURNHAM, MOUNT: mountain of the Clark Mtns. in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°16’S., 141°57’w. Disc. on aerial flights from West Base of the USAS in 1940. Named by the USAS for Guy Burnham, Cartographer in the School of Geography of Clark University. BURN MURDOCH, CAPE: cape which forms the SE. tip of Mossman Pen. on the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 44°41’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it for W. G. Burn Murdoch, Scottish artist on the Balaena, one of the Dundee whaling ships in the Antarctic in 1892-93, and a supporter of Bruce’s expedition. Not adopted: Cape Burn Murdock. Burn Murdock, Cape: see Burn Murdoch, Cape. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BURN MURDOCH NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about 2.5 mi. NNE. of Donald Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°02’S., 60°05’°W. Burn Murdoch Nuna- tak was first charted by the FIDS in August 1947, and named by them for W. G. Burn Murdoch. BURSEY, MOUNT: linear mountain forming the E. end of Hal Flood Range in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°04’S., 132°30’W. Disc. by members of the USAS on aerial flights in 1940 and named for Jacob Bursey, member of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and dog driver of the USAS party which sledged to the W. end of Hal Flood Range in December 1940. BURTON ISLAND GLACIER: channel glacier about 9 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from the continental ice to Wilhelm II Coast, midway between Krause Pt. and Posadowsky Gl.; in about 66°50’S., 90°25’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Burton Island, one of the two icebreakers of USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, which assisted in establishing astronomical con- trol stations along Wilhelm II, Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts. Burton Island Rock: see Bigelow Rock. BURTON ROCKS: small group of three rocks ly- ing in Marguerite Bay, about 1 mi. S. of Neny I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°14’S., 67°02’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS and named by them for the U.S.S. Burton Island, ice- breaker with USN Op. Wml., which visited Mar- guerite Bay in 1948 and assisted in the relief of the RARE and FIDS parties on Stonington Island. Burr Brundage, Mount: see Brundage, Mount. Busen Fjord: see Husvik Harbor. BUSEN POINT: point which forms the SE. side of the entrance to Stromness Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°33’W. The point was known at a much earlier date, but the name may have been first published as an existing name on the charts based upon the 1927-29 survey by DI personnel. It is probably named for the Busen, a Norwegian whaling transport vessel which was often stationed at the head of Husvik Hbr. in Stromness Bay. Bush, Mount: see Wade, Mount. BUSH MOUNTAINS: group of rugged moun- tains which flank the W. side of Shackleton Gl., standing in the Queen Maud Range near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°45/S., 179°00’W. 76 Photographed at a distance by the ByrdAE on several flights to the Queen Maud Range in No- vember 1929, and believed to form a W. extension of the Prince Olay Mtns. These mountains were further defined from aerial photographs taken by the USAS, 1939-41, and USN-Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and found to lie separate from the Prince Olav Mtns. on the E. and the Commonwealth Range on the W. Named by the US-SCAN for James I. Bush, American financier and patron of the ByrdAH, 1928-30. Not adopted: Prince Olay Mountains (q.v.). BUTLER, MOUNT: the SW. peak of the Rocke- feller Mtns., lying about 1 mi. S. of Mt. Tennant on Edward VII Pen. and almost submerged in the icecap; in about 78°09’S., 155°44’W. Disc. on Jan. 27, 1929 by members of the ByrdAE on an explora- tory flight over this area. Named for Raymond Butler, member of the USAS party which occupied the Rockefeller Mtns. seismic station during No- vember and December 1940. Not adopted: Mount Navy. BUTLER ISLAND: circular, ice-covered island about 6 mi. wide and about 600 ft. in el., lying 12 mi. SE. of Cape Darlington, off the E. coast of Pal- mer Pen.; in 72°13’S., 60°08’W. Disc. and photo- graphed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for K. S. P. Butler, FIDS commander in 1947-48. BUTSON RIDGE: rocky ridge with a number of ice-covered summits, the highest about 4,300 ft. in el., forming the N. wall of Northeast Gl. on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°05’S., 66°53’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re- surveyed in 1946-1948 by the FIDS and named for Dr. Arthur R. C. Butson, FIDS medical officer at Stonington I., who in July 1947 rescued a member of the RARE from a crevasse in Northeast Glacier. BUTTER POINT: low point forming the S. side of the entrance to New Harbor, in Victoria Land; in about 77°40’S., 164°09’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. So named by the exp. be- cause the Ferrar Gl. party left a tin of butter here, in anticipation of obtaining fresh seal meat at this point on the return journey. Butter Point Piedmont: see Bowers Piedmont Glacier. BUTTONS, THE: two islets lying 0.25 mi. NW. of Galindez I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BUTTRESS HILL: flat-topped hill, about 2,300 ft. in el., with steep rock cliffs on the W. side, over- looking Duse Bay about 2 mi. E. of the most north- ern of the Seven Buttresses, in the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.; in 63°34’S., 57°03’W. Charted and given this descriptive name by the FIDS following their survey in 1946. BUTTRESS NUNATAKS: group of prominent rock exposures, the highest about 2,100 ft. in el., lying close inland from George VI Sound and about 13 mi. W. of the Seward Mtns., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°22’S., 66°47’W. First seen from a distance and roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Visited and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who gave this descriptive name. BYRD, CAPE: sharp ice-covered cape forming the NW. extremity of Charcot I.; in about 69°58’S., 75°55’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins, Dec. 29, 1929, in a flight from the William Scoresby. Named by Wilkins for R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.), Antarctic explorer. BYRD HEAD: rocky, conspicuous promontory on Mac-Robertson Coast, forming the W. side of the entrance of Howard Bay; in about 67°26’S., 61°04’E. Toward the head of Howard Bay, Byrd Head rises to an el. of about 1,100 ft. Disc. on Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who named it for R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.). Not adopted: Bergnes [Norwegian]. Byrd Mountains: see Harold Byrd Mountains. CABINET INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 36 mi. long in a NNW.-SSE. direction, and some 27 mi. wide at its entrance between Capes Alexander and Robinson, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°35’S., 63°10’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in De- cember 1947. Named by the FIDS for the British War Cabinet which authorized the FIDS in 1943. CACHALOT ROCK: isolated rock about 6 mi. SW. of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°49’S., 45°49°W. The name appears on a map based upon a 1933 survey of the South Orkney Is. by DI personnel on the Discovery II. The term cachalot, of French origin, is applied to the sperm whale. Not adopted: Cachelot Rock. Cachelot Rock: see Cachalot Rock. CADBURY, MOUNT: easternmost of the Batter- bee Mtns., about 5,900 ft. in el., standing ESE. of Mt. Ness and about 18 mi. inland from George VI Sound on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°21’S., 66°38’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen and photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 UU by Lincoln Ellsworth, but this mountain seems to have been obscured from Ellsworth’s line of sight by clouds or intervening summits. Mount Cad- bury was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Mrs. Henry Tyler Cadbury, who raised a special fund to defray the cost of refitting the Penola, the ship of the BGLE, at South Georgia in 1936. CADMAN GLACIER: glacier, about 1.5 mi. wide at its mouth and at least 7 mi. long, flowing W. and then NW. into the head of the southern arm of Beascoches Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°37’S., 63°49’W. This glacier was first sighted and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was surveyed in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for John Cadman, 1st Baron Cadman of Silverdale, who contributed toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37. CAIRD COAST: that portion of the coast of Coats Land between 20°W. and 29°W. Named in 1915 by a Br. exp. under Shackleton for Sir James Caird, patron of the expedition. Not adopted: Caird Land. Caird Land: see Caird Coast. CAIRN HILL: hill with two summits, about 1,500 ft. in el., about 2 mi. E. of the NE. shore of Duse Bay, at the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.; in 63°30’S., 57°04’W. First charted by the FIDS in 1946, who so named it because a cairn was erected on the eastern of the two summits. CALAIS, MOUNT: massive mountain, about 7,700 ft. in el., standing at the NW. side of Scho- kalsky Bay in the NE. part of Alexander I Island; in 69°11’S., 70°15’W. First roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Named by Char- cot, presumably for the French city Calais. The mountain was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. Not adopted: Massif Calais [French]. Calais, Massif: see Calais, Mount. CALF HEAD: rocky headland on the N. coast of South Georgia, about 3 mi. NW. of Cape Har- court, at the W. end of Sacramento Bight; in 54°28’S., 36°03’W. The name ‘“Kalber-Berg” (meaning Calf Mountain) was given by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, but was limited to the summit of the headland now described. The fea- ture was surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52, who re- ported that a name is more essential for its sea- ward extremity in order to distinguish it from Cape Harcourt, with which it is easily confused when viewed from N. and NW. The English form of the name, Calf Head, was recommended for GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA this headland by the Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Kalber-Berg [German]. CALF POINT: point which lies about 1 mi. W. of Penelope Pt. on the SW. shore of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 171°30’S., 169°45’'E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. CALF ROCK: rock mass on the E. coast of Al- exander I Island, about 1,500 ft. in el., rising above the coastal ice 2 mi. NE. of Lamina Peak and 2 mi. inland from George VI Sound; in 70°31’S., 68°38’W. This rock was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. Surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of its off-lying position; it is separated from the Lamina Peak ridge by faulting. CALMETTE, CAPE: cape marking the W. ex- tremity of a rocky peninsula, about 1,500 ft. in el., which projects from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. about 3 mi. to form the S. shore of Cal- mette Bay; in 68°04’S., 67°14’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who, from a dis- tance, mistook this cape for an island. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, determined the true na- ture of the feature. Named by Charcot for Gaston Calmette, editor of Le Figaro, who furnished the FrAE with copies of this newspaper for the two years preceding the expedition. Not adopted: Ile Calmette [French]. Calmette, Ile: see Calmette, Cape. CALMETTE BAY: small bay between Camp Pt. and Cape Calmette, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°03’S., 67°10’W. Charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who named the bay for its S. entrance point, Cape Calmette. CAMELS HUMP: dark bare knob about 7,600 ft. in el., standing at the head of Blue Gl. about 3 mi. S. of Cathedral Rocks, in the N. part of the Royal Society Range in Victoria Land; in about 77°59'S., 162°34’E. Disc. and given this descriptive name by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Not adopted: Camel’s Hump. CAMP BAY: small bay between Rosita Hbr. and Sunset Fjord, in the W. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°27’W. Charted in 1929 by DI personnel and so named because a temporary camp was set up on its S. shore. Campbell, Cape: see Tennyson, Cape. 78 CAMPBELL GLACIER: glacier about 2.5 mi. wide, which flows SW. from the W. slopes of Mt. Melbourne and merges with the confluent ice W. of Mt. Abbott, on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°47’S., 163°46’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Named by the BrAE, 1910-13, for Lt. Victor L. A. Campbell, RN, leader of the BrAE Northern Party. Not adopted: Melbourne Glacier. CAMPBELL HEAD: bold headland marking the W. side of the entrance to Oom Bay, on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°25’S., 60°42’E. Disc. on Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named by him for Lt. S. Campbell, pilot with the expedition. CAMP HILL: ice-free hill, about 400 ft. in el., which lies 1.5 mi. E. of Church Pt. on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°41’S., 57°52’W. Charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who so named it be- cause a geological camp was established at the foot of the hill. CAMP POINT: point which marks the W. ex- tremity of the pyramid-shaped promontory, about 2,900 ft. in el., between Square Bay and Calmette Bay on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°58’S., 67°19’W. First seen by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, but its relationship to adjacent features was unknown at that time. It was accurately charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who camped here during survey work in this area. CAM ROCK: rock lying 200 yards E. of Water- pipe Beach and the same distance NNW. of Billie Rocks in Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. The rock is low and ice worn and is not normally covered at high water. Roughly surveyed in 1927 by DI personnel, and so named by them presumably because of its shape. CANADA GLACIER: small glacier flowing in a SE. direction to the N. side of Taylor Glacier Dry Valley immediately W. of Mt. McLennan, in Vic- toria Land; in about 77°37’S., 162°50’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Charles S. Wright, Canadian physicist, was a mem- ber of the party that explored this area. Canal Principal: see Sound, The. Candlemis Island: see Candlemas Island. CANDLEMAS ISLAND: largest and easternmost of the Candlemas Is., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°03’S., 26°40’W. Charted in 1930 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it after the Candlemas Is. group. Not adopted: Candle- mis Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA CANDLEMAS ISLANDS: small group of islands and rocks about 23 mi. SE. of Visokoi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; centering in 57°03’S., 26°43’W. Disc. on Feb. 2, 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. So named by Cook to commemorate the day on which they were discovered. CANICULA, MOUNT: mountain surmounted by two peaks, the more easterly about 3,400 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi. E. of Sirius Knoll on the divide separating East Russell Gl. from West Russell Gl., in the central part of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°43’S., 58°30’W. Charted in 1946 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of its association with Sirius Knoll. Canicula is a synonym of Sirius, the dog star. CANISTEO PENINSULA: peninsula about 25 mi. long and 18 mi. wide, projecting W. from the N. end of the Hudson Mtns., along the Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 73°40’S., 101°00’W. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the: US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Canisteo, tanker of the eastern task group of the USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68, 1946-47. CANWE, CAPE: high bluff marking the W. end of Mt. Abbott and the S. side of the terminus of Campbell Gl., on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°50’S., 163°43’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Cape Mossyface. CAP: for names beginning thus see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Cap Decousovte see Decousovte, Cap. (Capisa French word for “cape.’’) CAPE-PIGEON ROCKS: twin rocky promon- tories about 3.5 mi. SSE. of Garnet Pt., on George V Coast; in about 66°59’S., 143°47’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and so named by him because a large Cape pigeon rookery is situated there. CARDINALL, MOUNT: conical mountain, about 2,200 ft. in el., lying close SW. of Mt. Taylor and overlooking the NE. head of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°10’W. Prob- ably first seen by a party under J. Gunnar An- dersson of the SwedAH, 1901-4. Charted in 1945 by the FIDS, who named it for Sir Allan Cardinall, then Gov. of the Falkland Islands. CARDOZO COVE: northern of two coves at the head of Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°08’S., 58°36’W. Probably named by the FrAE under 79 Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in Decem- ber 1909. CAREY POINT: rocky point marking the W. extremity of Saunders I., South Sandwich Is.; in 97°47’S., 26°32’W. It was named Rocky Point by DI personnel following their survey in 1930, but that name has been rejected because it has also been used for other features in the vicinity. The name Carey Point was recommended by the Br-— APC in 1953, and is named after Cdr. W. M. Carey, RN, captain of the Discovery II at the time of the survey in 1930. Not adopted: Rocky Point. CARL PASSAGE: narrow channel, about 0.3 mi. long, which joins Elephant Lagoon to Cook Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°08’W. The name appears on a chart based upon 1929-30 surveys by DI personnel, but may reflect an earlier naming. Carlson Bay: see Carlsson Bay. CARLSON ISLAND: rocky island about 0.75 mi. long and about 1,000 ft. in el., lying in Prince Gus- tav Chan. about 4 mi. SE. of Pitt Pt., off the E. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°53’S., 58°16’W. Disc. in 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjoéld, who named it for Wilhelm Carlson, one of the chief patrons of the expedition. Not adopted: Wilh. Carlson Island, Wilh. Carlsons O [Swedish]. CARLSSON BAY: square bay, 2.5 mi. in extent, entered about 3.5 mi. NW. of Cape Foster on the SW. coast of James Ross I.; in 64°24’S., 58°04’W. First seen and surveyed in 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for J. Carlsson of Sweden who contributed toward the cost of the expedition. The bay was surveyed by the FIDS in 1952-53. Not adopted: Carlson Bay, J. Carlson Bay, John Carlsson Bucht [German]. CAROLINE MIKKELSEN, MOUNT: peak about 800 ft. in el., standing at the head of Sandefjord Ice Bay between Polar Times and Hargreaves Glaciers, on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°44’S., 73°50’E. Disc. on Feb. 20, 1935 by a Nor. whaling exp. under Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen. Named by Mikkelsen for his wife who accompanied him on this voyage. CARR, CAPE: prominent, ice-covered cape mark- ing the seaward projection of the W. portion of Clarie Coast; in about 65°55’S., 130°55’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The USEE under Wilkes applied the name Cape Carr to an ice cape in about 65°05’S., 131°30’E., after Lt. Overton Carr on the USEE flagship Vincennes, who assisted Wilkes with correction of the exp. survey data. Identification GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA of Cape Carr is based on correlation of Wilkes’ chart of 1840 with the US-ACAN reconnaissance map of 1955, compiled from aerial photographs, taking into account the relative southwestward shift of Porpoise Bay from 1840 to the 1955 map positions. CARREL, MOUNT: horseshoe-shaped mountain, about 2,100 ft. in el., at the E. side of Depot Gl. about 1.5 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°03’W. Disc. in 1903 by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE. Named by the FIDS in 1945 for Tom Carrel, boatswain of the Eagle, a ship which par- ticipated in establishing the FIDS Hope Bay base in February 1945. Carrol Kettering, Mount: see Giles, Mount. CARROLL INLET: long narrow inlet lying SW. of Cape Smyley and extending SE. for a distance of 35 mi. into George Bryan Coast; in about 73°15’S., 79°00’W. The upper part of the inlet is said to be divided into two arms by a long ice tongue. Disc. from the air on Dec. 22, 1940 by members of the USAS, who named it for Arthur J. Carroll, chief photographer on the flights from East Base. CARSE POINT: the W. extremity of a rock massif with four peaks, the highest about 3,800 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of the mouth of Riley Gl., on Palmer Pen., and fronting on George VI Sound; in 70°13’S., 68°13’W. It lies separated from Mt. Dixey to the NE. by a low ice-filled col, and from Mt. Flower to the E. by asmall glacier. It appears that the massif, of which this is the W. extremity, was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. The point was first surveyed in-1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Verner D. Carse, member of the BGLE, 1934-37. CASABIANCA ISLET: low, rocky islet lying in Neumayer Chan. about 0.5 mi. NE. of Damoy Pt., Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°32’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, who named it for Monsieur Casabianca, then French Administrator of Naval Enlistment. Case, Point: see De la Motte, Cape. CASEY, CAPE: conspicuous cape, surmounted by a peak about 2,500 ft. in el, marking the E. end of the short peninsula projecting into Cabinet Inlet immediately S. of Bevin Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°22’S., 63°35’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. 80 Richard G. Casey, Minister of State and Australian member of the British War Cabinet. Casey Channel: see Casey Glacier. CASEY GLACIER: glacier about 6 mi. wide, which flows E. to the E. coast of Palmer Pen. be- tween Cape Walcott and Miller Pt.; in 69°00‘S., 63°35’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on an aerial flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Wilkins believed the feature to be a channel cutting completely across Palmer Pen., naming it Casey Channel after Rt. Hon. Richard G. Casey. Correlation of aerial photographs taken by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935 and preliminary reports of the BGLE, 1934—37, led W. L. G. Joerg to interpret this glacier to be what Wilkins named Casey Channel. This interpreta- tion is borne out by the results of subsequent exploration by members of the East Base of the USAS in 1940. Not adopted: Casey Channel. CASEY RANGE: line of ridges rising to 3,100 ft. in el., extending in a N.-S. direction and parallel- ing the Masson Range, which lies about 15 mi. to the E., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S., 62°12’E. Disc. by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, who named it for Rt. Hon. Richard G. Casey. CASTLE PEAK: prominent ice-coverea peak, about 8,300 ft. in el., standing close off the W. side of Avery Plateau on Palmer Pen.; in 67°00’S., 65°53’W. It is shaped like a truncated cone with a rounded summit and rises more than 2,000 ft. above the surrounding ice. First surveyed in 1946 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of its resemblance to a ruined medieval castle. Castle Rock: see Fort Rock. CASTLE ROCK: conspicuous rock about 600 ft. in el., lying about 1 mi. off the west-central side of Snow I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°47’S., 61°36’W. This descriptive name dates back to about 1822 and is now established in international usage. CASTLE ROCK: bold rock crag about 1,400 ft. in el., situated about 3 mi. NE. of Hut Pt. on the cen- tral ridge of Hut Point Peninsula, Ross I.; in about 77°48’S., 166°44’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who so named it because of its shape. CASTOR AND POLLUX: two large and several smaller rocks, about 0.2 mi. SE. of Vindication I. in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°05’S., 26°46’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named them for the two brightest stars in the constellation Gemini. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Castor Insel: see Castor Nunatak. CASTOR NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about 3 mi. SW. of Oceana Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S., 59°58’W. Disc. in December 1893 by a Nor. seal- ing exp. under C. A. Larsen, who named it after the Castor, a ship which combined sealing and exploring activities along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. under Capt. Morten Pedersen in 1893-94. The feature was determined to be a nunatak in 1902 by the SwedAK under Nordenskjéld. Not adopted: Castor Insel [German], Kastor Nunatak. CASY ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long, which lies about 2 mi. SE. of Lafarge Rocks and 5 mi. WSW. of Cape Siffrey, the N. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°15’S., 57°29’W. Disc. and named by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40. Not adopted: Casy Rock. Casy Rock: see Casy Islet. CATHEDRAL ROCKS: series of dark, abrupt cliffs interspersed by short glaciers and sur- mounted by sharp peaks about 6,700 ft. in el., forming the N. shoulder of the Royal Society Range, in Victoria Land; in about 177°51’S., 162°30’E. The cliffs form a right angle which extends W. and then S. for about 10 mi. along the S. side of Ferrar Gl. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Named for its suggestive appear- ance by Lt. Albert B. Armitage, RNR, leader of the BrNAE party that explored this area. Catherine, Mount: see Kathleen, Mount. Catherine Sweeney Mountains: see Sweeney Mountains. CAT ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long, which lies in Grandidier Chan. about 2.5 mi. N. of Larrouy I. and about 15 mi. WSW. of Cape Garcia, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°47’S., 65°15’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Not adopted: Cat Island. CAUTION POINT: point about 4 mi. NE. of Mt. Napier Birks, marking the E. end of a rocky range which forms the N. wall of Crane Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 62°01’W. Photo- graphed from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Named by the FIDS who charted it in 1947. Cavelier de Cuverville Island: see Cuverville Island. CAVE ROCK: rock marked by a large cavern in its S. side, lying at the E. end of the Meade Is. in the N. entrance to McFarlane Str., in the South 81 Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 60°06’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted the rock in 1935. CECIL CAVE: cave indenting the S. side of Cape Ingrid, on the W. side of Peter I Island; in about 68°49’S., 90°44’W. Disc. and named by a Nor. exp. under Tofte in January 1927. Members of the exp. rowed into the cave while attempting to land on Peter I Island. Not adopted: Cecil’s Cave. CECILY, MOUNT: peak about 10,000 ft. in el.; lies about 6 mi. SE. of Mt. Emily, in the Dominion Range; in about 85°52’S., 173°20’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for his daughter. Center Island: see Centre Island. CENTRE ISLAND: island about 4.5 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which lies about 1 mi. S. of Broken I. in the S. part of Square Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 66°58’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Not adopted: Center Island. CENTURION GLACIER: small steep glacier flowing NW. to Neny Bay between Mt. Nemesis and Roman Four Promontory, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 66°56’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re- surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by FIDS, derives from association with Roman Four Promontory. CESNEY, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the W. side of the entrance to Davis Bay, on Clarie Coast; in about 65°55’S., 133°55’E. Davis Bay was first sighted from a distance in January 1912 by AAE personnel on the Aurora, who roughly charted this coastal area. Cape Cesney was delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for A. M. Cesney, masters mate on the tender Flying Fish of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. CHABRIER ROCK: rock which lies in the E. side of the entrance to Admiralty Bay, about 0.2 mi. S. of Cape Vauréal, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°18’W. Charted and named in December 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Chaco, Islote: see Lavebrua Islet. CHAIGNEAU PEAK: sharp peak, about 2,400 ft. in el., lying immediately S. of Blanchard Ridge and about 3 mi. SE. of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°12’S., 64°02’W. Probably first sighted by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who named it for Senor Chaigneau, then Gov. of Pro- vincia de Magallanes, Chile. Challenger, Passe du: see Neptunes Bellows. CHALMERS, MOUNT: mountain about 7,860 ft. in el., which lies S. of Mt. Keltie and Mulock Inlet in the Conway Range, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°22’S., 159°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Robert Chalmers (later Baron of Northiam), Asst. Sec. of the Treasury, 1903-7. CHAMBERLIN GLACIER: glacier which flows NE. into Whirlwind Inlet about 4 mi. SE. of Matthes Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S., 65°31’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and in 1940 was photographed from the air by the USAS. Charted by the FIDS in 1947, who named it for American glaciologist and geomorphologist Thomas C. Chamberlin, educator and professor of geology at the Universities of Wis- consin and Chicago. CHANNEL GLACIER: a through glacier about 1.5 mi. long, which extends in an E.—W. direction across the N. end of Wiencke I. immediately N. of Wall Range, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°19’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. CHANNEL ROCK: larger of two rocks lying about 0.8 mi. S. of the Meade Is., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°08’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted this rock in 1935. CHANNEL ROCK: rock which lies in the NW. entrance to Meek Chan. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. First surveyed and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. CHAOS GLACIER: channel glacier, about 2 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing W. from the conti- nental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen Coast, and terminating in a small tongue about 3 mi. SE. of Browns Gl., at the head of Ranvik Bay; in about 69°01’S., 77°55’E. Charted by Norwegian cartog- raphers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. So named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, because of the jumbled appearance of the terminal glacial flowage. 82 CHAPEL HILL: hill, about 500 ft. in el., forming the summit of a headland about 2 mi. WSW. of Church Pt., on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°41’S., 57°58’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1946, who so named it because of its proximity to Church Point. CHAPMAN GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long and 10 mi. wide in its central part, narrowing to about 3 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing W. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. to George VI Sound im- mediately S. of Carse Pt.; in 70°17’S., 67°50’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Frederick S. Chapman, British mountaineer and Arctic explorer, who in 1934 brought 64 dogs from West Greenland to England for the use of the BGLE, 1934-37. CHARCOT, CAPE: rocky point at the NE. end of Melba Pen., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°28’S., 98°21’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named it for Dr. Jean B. Charcot, French Antarctic explorer. CHARCOT BAY: bay, about 7 mi. long and wide, which lies between Cape Kater and Cape Kjellman along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°48’S., 59°30’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskj6ld, who named it for Dr. Jean B. Char- cot, at that time a noted Arctic explorer preparing for his first Antarctic exp., on which he planned to look for Nordenskjold whose return was overdue. CHARCOT BAY: re-entrant about 1 mi. wide, lying on the N. side of Nordenskjold Ice Tongue, along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°07’S., 162°45’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Dr. Jean B. Charcot. CHARCOT ISLAND: island about 45 mi. long and wide, lying NW. of Alexander I Island from which it is separated by Wilkins Str.; in about 70°15’S., 74°45’W. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1910 by the FrAE under Charcot who, at the insistence of his crew and the recommendation of Edwin S. Balch and others, named it Charcot Land. He did so with the stated intention of honoring his father, a famous French physician. The insularity of Charcot Land was proved by Sir Hubert Wilkins who flew around it on Dec. 29, 1929. Not adopted: Charcot Land. Charcot Land: see Charcot Island. CHARCOT, PORT: bay, about 1.5 mi. wide, in- denting the N. shore of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°00’W. Charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, who named it for his father, Dr. Jean Martin Charcot, famous French neurologist. Charcot established the FrAE winter base at Port Charcot in 1904. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Charcot Strait: see Gullet, The. Charles, Cape: see Sterneck, Cape. CHARLES, CAPE: point forming the N. side of the entrance to Brialmont Cove, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S., 61°08’W. This name, appearing on early maps in this approximate loca- tion, has sometimes been confused with Cape Ster- neck (q.v.) at the N. side of the entrance to Hughes Bay. Not adopted: Cape von Sterneck. CHARLES GOULD PEAK: peak standing about 4.2 mi. WSW. of the S. peak of Mt. Helen Washing- ton, standing in the S. group of the Rockefeller Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°07’S., 155°36’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1929, and named by Byrd for Charles (“Chips’’) Gould, car- penter on the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Gould. Charles J. Adams, Cape: see Adams, Cape. CHARLES-ROUX ISLAND: circular island about 2 mi. in diameter, situated close offshore at the W. side of the entrance to Lallemand Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°54’S., 66°58’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who named it for Jules Charles-Roux, French oceanog- rapher. Not adopted: Charles Roux Island, Roux Island. CHARLOTTE, CAPE: cape which forms the SE. side of the entrance to Royal Bay, on the N. coast near the E. end of South Georgia; in 54°32’S., 35°53’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named it for Queen Charlotte, wife of King George III of Great Britain. CHARLOTTE BAY: bay indenting the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in a SE. direction for about 5 mi., between Capes Murray and Reclus; in 64°23’S., 61°42’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Named in honor of the fiancée of Georges Lecointe, executive officer, hydrographer, and second-in-command of the expedition. CHAVANNE, CAPE: prominent bluff, about 3,800 ft. in el., terminating to the S. in a rocky, T-shaped ridge, situated at the E. side of the mouth of Breit- fuss Gl. at the head of Mill Inlet, qn the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°59’S., 64°45’W., Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Josef Chavanne, Austrian polar bibliographer. Chaves, Ile: see Chavez Island. CHAVEZ ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi. long and about 1,800 ft. in el., which lies immediately W. of the narrow peninsula between Leroux and Bigo 83 Bays, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°38’S., 64°33’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Probably named for Commandant Alfonso Chaves of Ponta Delgada, Azores, but the spelling Chavez has become well established through long usage. Not adopted: Ile Chaves [French] CHEAL POINT: rocky point nearly 1 mi. ESE. of Return Pt., the SW. extremity of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 46°01’W. First sur- veyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Named by the Br-APC for Joseph J. Cheal of the FIDS, general assistant in 1950 and leader in 1951 at the Signy I. base. The point marks the W. limit of Cheal’s survey triangulation made in July-September 1950. CHEETHAM, CAPE: cape, marked by an isolated pinnacle, forming the E. side of the entrance to Rennick Bay, on Oates Coast; in about 70°08’S., 162°20’K. Disc. by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Alfred B. Cheetham, boatswain of the exp. ship Terra Nova. Cheetham Ice Barrier Tongue; Cheetham Glacier Tongue; Cheetham Tongue: see Cheetham Ice Tongue. CHEETHAM ICE TONGUE: glacier tongue about 2 mi. wide, forming the seaward extension of the Davis Gl. along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°46’S., 162°55’E. First charted by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, at which time it was about 3 mi. long. Named by Shackleton for Alfred B. Cheetham, third officer and boatswain on the exp. ship Nimrod. This feature had become well established by the name Cheetham Ice Tongue prior to initiation of systematic application of com- mon specific names to a glacier and its glacier tongue. Although this feature is a glacier tongue, the generic term ice tongue is retained in the name to reduce ambiguity. Not adopted: Cheetham Glacier Tongue, Cheetham Ice Barrier Tongue, Cheetham Tongue. Cherry Gerrard, Mount: see Cherry-Garrard, Mount. CHERRY-GARRARD, MOUNT: conical peak about 3,200 ft. in el., rising behind Cape Barrow in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°20’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in January 1841, but left unnamed, by a Br. exp. under Ross. Charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, who named it for Apsley Cherry-Garrard, asst. zoologist with the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Cherry Garrard, Mount Cherry Gerrard, Conical Hill. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA CHESTER MOUNTAINS: group of mountains of the Edsel Ford Ranges, lying in a distinctive arc about 10 mi. SSE. of Mt. Iphigene, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°37’S., 145°35’W. Charted by the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and named for Colby M. Chester, then pres. of General Foods Corporation, who gave generous support to the Byrd expeditions. CHETWYND, MOUNT: a massif capped by black rock, about 5,000 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi. SW. of Mt. Gauss on the S. side of Mawson Gl., in the Prince Albert Mtns., Victoria Land; in about 76°23’S., 162°13’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. CHEVREUX, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300 ft. in el., which lies about 4 mi. E. of Leroux Bay on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 64°00’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who named it for Edouard Chevreux, French zoologist. CHICK ISLET: isolated rocky islet about 4 mi. ENE. of Baldwin Pt., lying immediately off the E. end of Sabrina Coast; in about 66°35’S., 121°15’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Amos Chick, carpenter on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. CHILD, CAPE: northward projection of the front of Amery Ice Shelf, separating Evans Bay and Thorshavn Bay along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°40’S., 71°35’E. Disc. by the BANZARE, under Mawson, during a flight over MacKenzie Bay on Feb. 10, 1931. Probably named for J. B. Child, third officer on the Discovery. CHOCOLATE, CAPE: seaward end of the lateral moraine bordering the W. wall of the Koettlitz Gl., along the coast of southern Victoria Land; in about 77°58’S., 164°37’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who so named it because of the color of the morainic material. CHOLET ISLET: islet which lies about 50 yards N. of the small peninsula forming the SW. shore of Port Charcot and the NW. extremity of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°02’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Ernest Cholet, skipper of the exp. ship Francais, and later the Pourquoi-Pas?. Not adopted: Cholet Island, Cholet Isle. CHOYCE, CAPE: rocky bluff, about 3,000 ft. in el., at the N. side of the entrance to Seligman Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S., 65°25’W. Photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for M. A. Choyce, meteorologist at the FIDS Hope Bay base. 84 CHRISTCHURCH, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alexandria. Range, about 4,700 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Shackleton Inlet on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°34’S., 163°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for the city of Christchurch, New Zealand, which generously supported the ex- pedition. Christen Christensen, Mount; Christensen, Cape; Christensen, Mount: see Christensen Nunatak. CHRISTENSEN, MOUNT: prominent, ice-cov- ered dome about 4,000 ft. in el., about 45 mi. SW. of the head of Ice Bay, in Enderby Land; in about 68°05’S., 48°15’E. Disc. on Jan. 13, 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who named it for Con- sul Lars Christensen, Norwegian whaling magnate and promoter of several Norwegian expeditions. Christensen Coast: see Ingrid Christensen Coast; Lars Christensen Coast. CHRISTENSEN NUNATAK: nunatak about 900 ft. in el., standing 1 mi. N. of Robertson I., off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°06’S., 59°34’W. Disc. in 1893 by a Nor. exp. under C. A. Larsen, who named it for Christen Christensen of Sandefjord, Norway, pioneer of modern Antarctic whaling. It was surveyed in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nord- enskjold, and in 1947 and 1953 by the FIDS. Not adopted: Cape Christensen, Christensen Peak, Mount Christen Christensen, Mount Christensen (q.v.). Christensen Peak: see Christensen Nunatak; Lars Christensen Peak. CHRISTI, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,200 ft. in el., standing nearly 3 mi. NE. of Mt. Pisgah in the NE. part of Smith I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°54’S., 62°25’W. The name “Cape Christi” was given for the N. cape of Smith I. by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31, but that feature had already been named Cape Smith. Since the name Cape Smith is ap- proved for the cape referred to, the Br-APC recom- mended in 1953 that for the sake of historical con- tinuity the name Christi be approved for the moun- tain now described. CHRISTIANIA ISLANDS: small group of islands and rocks lying at the NE. end of the Palmer Arch., about 10 m. NW. of Cape Sterneck, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°55’S., 61°24’W. Charted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named the group for Christiania (now Oslo), Nor- way, where he obtained assistance and equipment for the expedition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA CHRISTIE, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side of the entrance to Moubray Bay, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 72°15’S., 170°40’E. Disc. on Jan. 15, 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Prof. Samuel Hunter Christie, of the Royal Military Acad., Woolwich. CHRISTMAS, CAPE: abrupt rock cape, about 1,000 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to Wust Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°20’S., 60°41’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. So named by the FIDS because the joint party in 1947 spent Christ- mas Day in this vicinity. CHRISTMAS, MOUNT: uniform, sharp cone, about 6,200 ft. in el. standing close W. of Cape William Henry May, somewhat isolated from the coastal range that overlooks the W. side of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°S., 161°E. Disc. in December 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, and so named be- cause it was the most salient feature in view when the polar party was abreast of it on Christmas Day. Not adopted: Christmas Mountain. CHRISTOFFERSEN ISLAND: small island im- mediately W. of the S. end of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°03’,W. The name ap- pears on a chart by a Nor. whaling exp., 1912-13, under S¢rlle, who made a running survey of these islands. Not adopted: Christophersen Island. Christophersen, Mount: see Wilhelm Christo- phersen, Mount. Christophersen Island: see Christoffersen Island. CHURCH, CAPE: rocky bluff at the W. side of Seligman Inlet, marking the N. side of Ahlmann Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°51’S., 65°35’W. Photographed from the air in 1940 by the USAS. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Prof. James E. Church of the Agri- cultural Experiment Station, Univ. of Nevada, who developed techniques of snow surveying and melt- water run-off forecasts now widely used. CHURCHILL PENINSULA: ice-covered pen- insula between Cabinet and Adie Inlets, extending some 30 mi. in a SE. direction from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°30’S., 62°45’W. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE and charted from the ground by the FIDS. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. (later Sir) Winston S. Churchill, M.P., British Prime Minister and leader of the War Cabinet which authorized the FIDS in 1943. Not adopted: Flint Peninsula. 85 CHURCH POINT: point surmounted by a dark, distinctive peak, about 1,100 ft. in el., lying about 2 mi. W. of Camp Hill on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°41’S., 57°55’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1945 and so named because of the resemblance of this peak to a low church steeple. CIRCONCISION, PORT: small inlet indenting the SE. side of Petermann I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 64°10’W. Disc. on Jan. 1, 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, who named it for the holy day on which it was first sighted. The inlet served as a base for the exp. ship Porquoi-Pas? during the 1909 winter season. Not adopted: Port Circumcision. Circumcision, Port: see Circoncision, Port. CLARENCE ISLAND: island about 17 mi. long and about 12 mi. wide; lies at the E. end of the South Shetland Is.; in 61°09’S., 54°06’;W. The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now estab- lished international usage. Not adopted: Clar- ences Isle, Shishkoff’s Island. Clarence Mackay, Mount: see Mackay Moun- tains. CLARIE COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica lying between Cape Mose, in about 130°05’E., and the ice-covered cape in 136°10’E. Named in January 1840 by Capt. Dumont d’Urville, who recognized the existence of land lying S. of the ice cliffs to which he applied the name “Coéte Clarie,” after Madam Jacquinot, wife of the cap- tain of his second ship, the Zélée. Not adopted: Clarie Land. Clarie Land: see Clarie Coast. CLARKE, MOUNT: peak about 9,500 ft. in el., standing E. of the mountain group containing Mt. Iveagh, at the head of Keltie Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 84°58’S., 174°10’W. Disc. and named in December 1908 by the Southern Journey Party of the BrAE under Shackleton. Clarke Barrier: see Clarke Glacier. CLARKE GLACIER: northern distributary of Davis Gl., about 1 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, which flows in a NNE. direction between Lamplugh I. and the mainland to Geikie Inlet, in Victoria Land; in about 75°35’S., 162°50’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. Not adopted: Clarke Barrier. CLARKE GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing NW. to Mikkelsen Bay along the N. side of Baudin Peaks, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°48’S., 66°56’W. First roughly GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The glacier was traversed near its head by a USAS sledge party in January 1941. Its lower reaches were surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and the glacier was named by them for Louis C. G. Clarke, Dir. of the Fitzwilliam Museum, Cambridge, 1937-46, who greatly assisted the BGLE, 1934-37. CLARK ISLAND: rocky island about 2 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, lying immediately N. of Bailey and Mitchell Islands which, collectively, form the group of three principal islands at the NE. end of the Windmill Is. that lie close against Budd Coast; in 66°16’S., 110°27’E. Delineated from aerial pho- tographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in February 1947 which indicate that these three islands are con- nected by a steep snow ramp to the continental ice overlying Budd Coast. Prominent and moraine deposits overlie and parallel the upper margin of this snow ramp about 1 mi. from its outer edge on Clark, Bailey and Mitchell Islands. Named by the US-ACAN for Capt. John E. Clark, USN, cap- tain of the U.S.S. Currituck, seaplane tender and flagship of the western task group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68, 1946-47. CLARK MOUNTAINS: group of low mountains rising from the Rockefeller Plateau in Marie Byrd Land, NE. of the head of Boyd G1.; in about 77°16., 141°55’W. Disc. and photographed on aerial flights in 1940 by the USAS, and named for Clark Uni- versity, Worcester, Mass. CLARK POINT: ice-covered point on the head- land at the E. side of the entrance to Paulding Bay, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°35’S., 123°55’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for George W. Clark, midshipman on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Clarkson Point: see Pylon Point. Claude, Cape: see Claude Point. CLAUDE POINT: point, distinguished by a re- markable vertical rock close S., forming the W. tip of the small peninsula at the S. side of Guyou Bay, northwestern Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°06’S., 62°41’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Monsieur Claude, an associate member of the Bureau des Longitudes. Not adopted: Cape Claude. Claude Swanson Mountains: see Swanson Moun- tains. CLAYTON HILL: hill about 420 ft. in el. in the north-central part of Petermann L., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S., 64°11’W. Charted and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. 86 CLEFT POINT: point on the E. side of Norway Bight, on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is. It is the W. extremity of an islet, separated from Coronation I. by a very narrow channel; in 60°38’S., 45°47’W. It was mapped by DI personnel in 1933 as a point on Coronation I. The name, which is descriptive, was given by the FIDS following their survey of 1950. Clements Markham Bay: see Markham Bay. CLEMENTS MARKHAM ISLAND: circular island about 2 mi. in diameter, lying about 2 mi. S. of the E. end of Rabot I. in Grandidier Chan., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°56’S., 66°05’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Sir Clements Markham, Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1893-1905. Charcot ap- plied this name to an incompletely-defined island NE. of Renaud I., in what is now the Pitt Islands. The recommended application of the name is based upon the map of the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, which charted the island. The fuil name Clements Markham Island is retained to distinguish this feature from Markham I. in Terra Nova Bay, Vic- toria Land. Not adopted: Markham Island (q.v.). CLERKE ROCKS: group of rocks extending about 5 mi. in an E—W. direction, lying some 40 mi. ESE. of South Georgia; in 55°01’S., 34°41’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named them for Charles Clerke, officer on Cook’s ship Resolution. Not adopted: Clerkes Rocks. CLERY PEAK: peak about 2,100 ft. in el. on the N. side of Mt. Lacroix, a conspicuous massif at the N. end of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 63°59’W. Charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named. it for his father-in- law, L. Cléry, an eminent French lawyer. CLEVELAND GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide, which descends from the highlands W. of Granite Hbr. in a SE. direction to Mackay Gl., close W. of - Mt. Marston, in Victoria Land; in about 76°56’S., 162°05’E. Disc. by the Western Geological Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, and named by Frank Deben- ham, a member of the party. Cleveland was his mother’s name. CLIFF ISLET: narrow cliffed islet at the E. side of Mutton Cove, lying immediately S. of Upper Islet about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W. Charted and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Not adopted: Cliff Island. . CLIFFORD GLACIER: broad glacier, about 40 mi. long, flowing in an ENE. direction to the gap between Mt. Tenniel and the Eland Mtns. and then E. to Smith Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in 70°22’S., 60°30’W. The upper part of this gla- cier was charted in 1936 by BGLE under Rymill; the seaward side by the USAS survey party which explored along this coast in 1940. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Sir G. Miles Clifford, Gov. of the Falkland Islands. CLIFFORD PEAK: peak about 3,800 ft. in el., which stands in the Osterreith Mtns. about 4 ini. WSW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°36’S., 62°57’W. Probably first seen by the BelgAK, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The peak was named by members of H.M.S. Snipe fol- lowing an Antarctic cruise in January 1948, for Sir G. Miles Clifford. Climbing Range: see Blackwall Mountains. CLOOS, CAPE: cape surmounted by a sharp cone, about 3,200 ft. in el., fronting on Lemaire Chan. and marking the N. side of the entrance to Girard Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 64°00’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Cloos, Massif: see Cloos, Mount. CLOOS, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain prob- ably over 3,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Girard Bay about 2 mi. E. of Cape Cloos on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 63°54’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, named this moun- tain after the cape lying directly to the west. Not adopted: Massif Cloos [French]. CLOSE, CAPE: cape about 35 mi. W. of the As- gaard Is., on the coast of Enderby Land; in about 65°55’S., 52°10’H. Disc. by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, who named it for Sir Charles Close, Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1927-30. CLOSE ISLETS: small group of islets, which are almost entirely ice capped, about 2 mi. ESE. of Cape De la Motte, off George V Coast; in about 67°01’S., 144°27’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE un- der Mawson, who named the group for John H. Close, member of the expedition. CLOTHIER HARBOR: small harbor in the N. side of Robert I., about 4 mi. ENE. of the NW. end of the island, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S., 59°40’W. Named by American sealers in about 1820 after the sealing vessel Clothier. The Cloth- ier, under Capt. Alexander Clark, was one of sev- eral American sealing vessels headquartered at this harbor during the 1820-21 season. The Cloth- 87 ier went aground here and sank on Dec. 9, 1820. Not adopted: Clothier’s Harbour. Clothier’s Harbour: see Clothier Harbor. CLOUDMAKER, THE: mountain about 10,000 ft. in el., lying E. of Mt. Kirkpatrick and forming the most conspicuous landmark along the W. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 84°20’S., 169°15’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9 under Shackleton, who so named the mountain because a cloud usually ap- peared near the summit, providing a useful land- mark during the journey up the Beardmore Gla- cier. CLOWES BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide, entered be- tween Confusion Pt. and the Oliphant Its., along the S. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°37’W. Charted in 1933 by DI person- nel on the Discovery II, who named it for Archibald J. Clowes, English oceanographer on the staff of the Discovery Committee, 1924-46. CLOWES GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide, which flows E. to enter Mason Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°56’S., 60°41’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunc- tion with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Archibald J. Clowes. Club, Mount: see Touring Club, Mount. COAL HARBOR: small bay about 0.6 mi. E. of Undine Hbr., along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°58’W. The name Coaling Harbor, given in about 1912, sug- gests a possible early use of the bay by sealers and whalers. The name was shortened to Coal Har- bor by DI personnel who charted the area during the period 1926-30. Not adopted: Coaling Harbor. Coaling Harbor: see Coal Harbor. COAL NUNATAK: flat-topped rock mass with steep cliffs facing S., standing 2 mi. SW. of Corner Cliffs on the SE. coast of Alexander I Island; in 72°07’S., 68°32’W. This nunatak was first photo- graphed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. Observing this feature from the NW. (the direction from which Ellsworth photographed this nunatak) only the summit protrudes above the coastal ice, and it was uncertain at that time whether this was a peak on Alexander I Island or an island in George VI Sound. Its true nature was determined by the FIDS who visited and surveyed this nunatak in 1949. So named by FIDS because GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA thin lenses of coal (about 6 feet by 1 inch in extent) occur there. COATES, MOUNT: mountain about 4,200 ft. in el., which stands in the N. part of the David Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°52’S., 62°33’E. Disc. and named by the BANZARE, under Mawson, on about Feb. 15, 1931. COATS LAND: that part of Antarctica which lies W. of Queen Maud Land and forms the E. shore of Weddell Sea, extending in a general NE.-SW. direction between 20°W. and 37°W. Named by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, for James Coats, Jr., and Maj. Andrew Coats, supporters of the ex- pedition. COBALESCOU ISLET: snow-free islet about 0.5 mi. long, with two rounded summits about 100 ft. in el., lying 1 mi. SE. of Two Hummock I. in the NE. part of De Gerlache Str., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°11’S., 61°36’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. COBBLERS COVE: small cove which provides an anchorage about 0.5 mi. W. of Godthul, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°18’W. This feature was charted and named Pleasant Cove by DI personnel in 1929, but that name is not known locally. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that this feature is known to whalers and sealers as “Skomaker Hullet” (meaning cobbler’s cove), be- cause it was first entered in thick fog by a Nor- wegian gunner who had once been a cobbler. An English form of this name has been approved. Not adopted: Pleasant Cove, Skomaker Hullet [Nor- wegian]. COCKBURN, CAPE: cape which marks the NE. extremity of Pasteur Pen. on Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°00’S., 62°22’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31, who perhaps gave the name for Adm. George Cockburn, British naval officer and Admiral of the Fleet in 1851. The cape was charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. COCKBURN ISLAND: circular island about 1 mi. in diameter, consisting of a high plateau with steep slopes surmounted on the NW. side by a pyramidal peak about 1,500 ft. in el., lying in the NE. entrance to Admiralty Sound, S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S., 56°50’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, who named it for Adm. George Cockburn, RN. COCKS, MOUNT: peak which lies WSW. of Mt. Morning and surmounts the E. side of the entrance to Skelton Inlet, along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°35’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the 88 BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for E. L. Somers Cocks, then Treasurer of the Royal Geo- graphical Society. COCKSCOMB BUTTRESS: prominent, isolated rock buttress, more than 1,000 ft. in el., standing 1 mi. NW. of Echo Mtn. and overlooking the E. side of Norway Bight on the S. coast of Corona- tion I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 45°44’W. The name, which is descriptive, was given by the FIDS following their survey of 1950. COCKSCOMB HILL: conspicuous hill shaped like a cockscomb, about 465 ft. in el., which rises through the glacier at the head of Mackellar Inlet in Admiralty Bay, King George I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°29’W. First surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Named by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, following his survey in 1951-52. CODRINGTON, MOUNT: prominent mountain about 4,900 ft. in el., lying about 23 mi. inland from the coast of Enderby Land; in about 66°18’S., 52°46’E. Charted in 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson as being the prominent peak sighted and so named by John Biscoe in March 1831. COFFER ISLET: small islet lying in the en- trance to the bay on the E. side of the peninsula which forms the SE. tip of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°09’W. The names ‘Koffer” and ‘Kotter’ are used for this feature on two manuscript charts based on surveys by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-15. The recom- mended spelling, the anglicized form of the first of the two terms, was used by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted these islands in 1933. Not adopted: Coffer Island. COFFIN ROCK: rock which lies 1 mi. ESE. of Finger Pt. and 0.25 mi. off the N. side of Visokoi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°41’S., 27°11’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. COFFIN TOP: rocky, flattened summit, about 3,000 ft. in el., standing about 3.5 mi. inland from the N. coast of South Georgia and an equal dis- tance WNW. of the head of Moltke Hbr.; in 54°30’S., 36°10’W. The name “Sarg-Berg” (meaning Coffin Mountain) was given by a Ger. exp. under Schra- ‘der, 1882-83. An English form of the name, Coffin Top, was recommended by the Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Sarg-Berg [German]. COHEN, MOUNT: peak in the foothills of the Queen Maud Range, which rises to about 2,500 ft. in el., standing just W. of the terminus of Axel Heiberg Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°16’S., 164°50’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on sev- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA eral ByrdAE flights to the Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and named by him for Emanuel Cohen of Paramount Pictures, who assisted in assembling the motion-picture records of the expe- dition. COLBECK, CAPE: prominent ice-covered cape which forms the NW. extremity of Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°05’S., 158°10’W. Disc. in Janu- ary 1908 by the BrNAE under Scott, and named by him for Lt. William Colbeck, RNR, who commanded Scott’s relief ship, the Morning. COLBECK ARCHIPELAGO: group of rocky islands lying N. of the W. portion of Mac-Robert- son Coast; in about 67°20’S., 61°02’E. Disc. in January 1930 and charted in February 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson. Named for W. R. Col- beck, second officer on the Discovery. Norwegian whalers, who explored this same area in January 1931, named the group Thorfin Islands. Not adopted: Thorfin Islands. COLBECK BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide, which lies in the S. part of Robertson Bay, between the S. end of Duke of York I. and the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°38’S., 170°07’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borch- grevink, who named it for Lt. William Colbeck, RNR, magnetic observer of the expedition. COLBERT RANGE: mountain range lying NW. of Le May Range in the central part of Alexander I Island; in about 71°10’S., 70°45’W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for R. Adm. Leo Otis Colbert, head of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, which furnished equipment for the expedition. Not adopted: Navy Range, U.S. Navy Range. COLDBLOW COL: snow-covered col, about 1,000 ft. in el., situated on the W. side and near the head of Laws Gl., between the S. side of Echo Mtn. and a 1,600 foot peak 1.5 mi. NNW. of Cape Vik, Coro- nation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°42’W. Surveyed in 1950 by the FIDS. The name derives from the fact that a FIDS party had their tent blown down in a gale when camped on this col in September 1948. COLEMAN, MOUNT: rounded mountain about 2,800 ft. in el., standing immediately E. of Common- wealth Gl. at the head of New Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°33’S., 163°22’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. COLE PENINSULA: peninsula about 12 mi. long, in an EW. direction, and 8 mi. wide, lying between Cabinet and Mill Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°50’S., 64°00’W. It is largely 424589 O -57-7 89 ice covered except for several rocky spurs which radiate from Mt. Hayes. First sighted and photo- graphed from the air in 1940 by members of East Base of the USAS. During 1947 it was charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for Rep. W. Sterling Cole of New York, member of the House Naval Affairs Committee, which assisted in obtain- ing Congressional support resulting in procure- ment of a ship for use by the Ronne expedition. COLLIER, CAPE: broad ice-covered cape on the E. coast of Palmer Pen., about midway between the S. end of Hearst I. and Cape Boggs; in 70°10’S., 61°55’W. Disc. in 1940 by members of the USAS who explored this coast by land and from the air from the East Base. Named for Zadick Collier, machinist at the East Base. COLLINS HARBOR: bay indenting the W. side of King George I., about 2.5 mi. NNW. of Marian Cove, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°50’W. The name appears on a chart by the Scottish geologist David Ferguson, who roughly charted the bay in 1913-14, but may reflect an earlier naming. COLLINS POINT: small but prominent point about 1 mi. W. of Neptunes Bellows, on the S. side of Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°35’W. Charted by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31. Named by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, following his survey of the island in 1948-49, for Capt. K. St. B. Collins, RN, Superintendent of Charts in the Hydrographic Dept., Admiralty. COLOMBO, MOUNT: mountainous projection on the NE. end of the main massif of the Fosdick Mtns. in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land, rising to an estimated 3,000 ft. in el.; in about 76°28’S., 144°44’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on the Eastern Flight of Dec. 5, 1929. Named for Louis P. Colombo, a member of the Edsel Ford Mountains Biological Party of the USAS which visited this area in December 1940. COLVOCORESSES BAY: open bay about 24 mi. wide and 10 mi. long, indenting the E. end of Budd Coast between Fox Gl. and Cape Hammersly; in about 65°55’S., 115°00’E. The bay is believed to be generally ice filled and is marked by prominent tongues extending seaward from Williamson and Whittle Glaciers. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for George W. Colvoco- resses, midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Colvocoresses, later promoted to Captain, USN, also published in GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1852-55 his own account of the voyage in Four Years in the Government Exploring Expedition Commanded by Captain Wilkes. COMAN, MOUNT: mountain about 12,000 ft. in el., which lies about 50 mi. W. of Mt. Tricorn, inland from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 74°02’S., 65°04’W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for Dr. F. Dana Coman, physician with the ByrdAE, 1928-30. Not adopted: Mount Dana Coman. COMB RIDGE: ridge about 400 ft. in el., which forms the E. and major part of the hill at the N. end of The Naze, a peninsula of northern James Ross I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°55’S., 57°28’W. Probably first sighted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold. It was charted and given this descriptive name by the FIDS in 1946. COMBS, MOUNT: mountain which lies W. of Carroll Inlet on George Bryan Coast; in about 73°03’S., 81°25’W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for Rep. J. M. Combs, of Beaumont, Texas, who did much to gain support for the expedition. COMMANDANT CHARCOT. GLACIER: promi- nent glacier about 3 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, flow- ing NNW. from the continental ice to its terminus at the head of Victor Bay, on Adélie Coast, in 66°25’S., 136°35’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The FrAE under Marret sledged W. along Adélie Coast to Victor Bay, close E. of this glacier, in December 1952. Named for the French polar ship Com- mandant Charcot which transported expeditions under Liotard in 1948-49 and 1949-51, and Barré in 1951-52. Not adopted: Commandant Drovcot Glacier. Commandant Drovcot Glacier: see Commandant Charcot Glacier. COMMITTEE BAY: small, bay-like body of water, near the center of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia, whose limits are formed by the semi- circular arrangement of Crescent It., Invisible It., Hogs Mouth Rocks and Albatross I.; in 54°01'S., 37°20’W. Its entrance, between Crescent It. and Albatross I., faces west. The arrangement of the islets was first mapped in 1912-13 by Robert Cush- man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. The bay was surveyed. by Discovery In- vestigations personnel in 1929-30, and presumably named by them for the Discovery Committee, spon- sors of Discovery Investigations. 90 Committee Range: see Executive Committee Range. COMMONWEALTH BAY: open bay about 30 mi. wide at its entrance between Point Alden and Cape Gray, and about 12 mi. long, indenting the W. end of George V Coast; in about 66°40’S., 142°40’E. Disc. in January 1912 by the AAE under Mawson who established the Main Base on Cape Denison at the head of the bay, and named for the Com- monwealth of Australia. COMMONWEALTH GLACIER: glacier which flows in a SE. direction and enters the N. side of Taylor Glacier Dry Valley immediately W. of Mt. Coleman, in Victoria Land; in about 77°35’S., 163°15’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Named for the Commonwealth of Australia, which made a financial grant to the exp. and contributed two members to the expedition’s Western Geological Party which explored this area. COMMONWEALTH RANGE: range of rugged mountains bordering the E. side of Beardmore Gl., near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°30’S., 173°00’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE under Shackleton and named for the Common- wealth of Australia, which so generously aided the expedition. COMPASS ISLET: small rocky islet, about 50 ft. in el., lying in Marguerite Bay about 7 mi. NW. of Terra Firma Is.; in 68°38’S., 67°48’W. First seen and photographed from the air on Feb. 1, 1937 by the BGLE. First visited by the FIDS in 1948, and surveyed by them in 1949. So named by FIDS because of difficulties experienced here with com- pass bearings, eventually proved to be due to sub- stitution of iron for copper wire in an anorak hood. COMRIE GLACIER: glacier, about 6 mi. long, flowing NW. into the SE. corner of Bigo Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°48’S., 64°20’W. | This glacier was first sighted and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was re- surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Leslie J. Comrie, Founder and first Dir. of the Scientific Computing Service Ltd., London. As Supt. of the Nautical Almanac Office in 1934, he greatly assisted the BGLE, 1934-37, by providing advance copies of the Nautical Almanac up to 1937. Concepcion, Pointe: see Conception Point. CONCEPTION POINT: northernmost point on Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in about 60°31’/S., 45°44’W. Disc., Dec. 8, 1821, in the course of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell, British sealer, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, American GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA sealer. Named by Powell. Concepcion [French]. Not adopted: Pointe CONE NUNATAK: nunatak, about 1,100 ft. in el., which appears conical on its N. side but has brown rock cliffs on its S. face, about 3 mi. SSE. of Buttress Hill and 4 mi. NE. of the SW. tip of Tabarin Pen., at the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.; _in 63°36’S., 57°01’W. This area was first explored by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Cone Nunatak was named by the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1946. CONE ROCK: small rock lying about midway between Pyramid I. and Meade Is., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°25’S., 60°09’W. The name ap- pears to have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the rock in 1935. Not adopted: Conical Rock. CONFUSION POINT: point which forms the S. tip of the islet at the W. side of the entrance to Clowes Bay, along the S. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°38’W. Charted and named in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. CONGER GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 7 mi. long flowing NNW. from the conti- nental ice to Knox Coast, about 5. mi. E. of Glenzer G1.; in about 66°05’S., 103°42’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946- 47, and named by the US-ACAN for Richard R. Conger, chief photographer’s mate with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in establishing astro- nomical control stations along the coast from Wil- helm II Coast to Budd Coast. Conical Hill: see Cherry-Garrard, Mount. Conical Rock: see Cone Rock. CONICAL ROCK: rock lying at the E. side of Hell Gates, about midway between Snow and Livingston Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°40’S., 61°10’W. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the area in 1930-31. Not adopted: Rocher Conique [French]. Conique, Rocher: see Conical Rock. CONRADI PEAK: isolated, almost snow-covered peak, about 3,300 ft. in el., lying dbout 28 mi. SSE. of Cape Batterbee, in Enderby Land; in about 66°14’S., 54°22’E. Disc. and named by the BAN- ZARE under Mawson, in January 1930. CONRAD MOUNTAINS: mountain range about 20 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 10,800 ft. in el., lying between Mt. Dallmann and the Kurze Mtns. in New Schwabenland; in about 91 72°00’S., 9°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for the dir. of meteorological division of the former Marine- leitung (German Admiralty). CONSORT ISLETS: group of two islets, the most northeasterly of the De Dion Its., lying about 6 mi. S. of Adelaide I. in Marguerite Bay; in 67°52’S., 68°42’W. First sighted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The name, given by FIDS, derives from association with Emperor Islet. Constance, Cape: see Jones, Cape. CONSTANCE, CAPE: cape which marks the N. tip of the peninsula between Antarctic and Pos- session Bays, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 36°59’W. Cape Constance is an estab- lished name dating back to about 1912. CONTACT PEAK: prominent rock peak, about 3,300 ft. in el., which is the southernmost peak on Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°47’S., 67°28’W. First sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE and in 1948 by the FIDS. So named by the FIDS because the peak marks the granite-volcanic contact in the cliffs which is visible at a considerable distance. CONTRAST ROCKS: small group of rocks about 0.5 mi. E. of Antarctic Pt. along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°57’W. Charted and named in the period 1926-30 by DI personnel. CONWAY, CAPE: cape which forms the S. tip of Snow I., in the South Shetlands Is.; in 62°49’S., 61°25’W. Named by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31, for the Conway, a vessel on which Foster had previously served. CONWAY RANGE: mountain range between Mu- lock Inlet and the Cape Murray depression on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°18’S., 159°20’E. This area was disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. The name was used in the report of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Cook Bay: see Joseph Cook Bay. COOK BAY: irregular bay, about 1.3 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape Crewe and Black Head, narrowing into two western arms, Lighthouse Bay and Prince Olav Hbr., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Charted by DI personnel during the period 1926-30, and named by them for Capt. James Cook, who explored South Georgia and landed in this general vicinity in 1775. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA COOK GLACIER: glacier which flows in a N. direction to Saint Andrews Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°12’W. Named by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, for Capt. James Cook. COOK ISLAND: central island of Southern Thule, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°09’W. Southern Thule was disc. by a Br. exp. under Capt. James Cook in 1775. The island was named for Cook by a Russ exp. under Bellings- hausen, which explored the South Sandwich Is. in 1819-20. Cook Peninsula: see Riiser-Larsen Peninsula. COOK ROCK: arched rock about 150 ft. in el., lying E. of Trousers Rock, and about 0.3 mi. NE. of Vindication I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°45’W. Charted in 1930 by DI person- nel on the Discovery II and named for Capt. James Cook. COOPER, MOUNT: large mountain mass, about 5 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, rising over 3,500 ft. in el., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land, on the N. side of Boyd Gl.; in about 77°07'S., 145°24’W. Disc. on aerial flights in 1934 by the ByrdAE and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Merian C. Cooper, motion picture producer of Hollywood. COOPER BAY: small bay about 2 mi. SW. of Cape Vahsel and 1 mi. NW. of Cooper I., at the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°47’S., 35°48’W. The bay derives its name from nearby Cooper Island. COOPER GLACIER: valley glacier about 3 to 8 mi. wide and about 20 mi. long, which descends from the south polar plateau and flows NE. between Mounts Ruth Gade and Don Pedro Christophersen, in the Queen Maud Range, and merges with the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°30’S., 163°50’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on several ByrdAE flights to the Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and named by him for Kent Cooper, an official of the Associated Press. COOPER ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long which lies at the N. side of the entrance to Grygalski Fjord, off the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°49’S., 35°46’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775, and named for Lt. Robert P. Cooper, an officer aboard the Resolution. COOPER SOUND: navigable channel, about 1.5 mi. wide, which separates Cooper I. from the SE. coast of South Georgia; in 54°48’S., 35°48’W. The existence of this channel was first noted in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. The name Cooper Sound, 92 derived from the nearby Cooper I., is well estab- lished in use among the sealers in South Georgia. COPPER GLACIER: glacier which flows in a SE. direction to the SE. coast of Anvers I. between Cop- per Peak and Green Spur, on the N., and Billie Peak, on the S., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 63°19’W. Probably first seen by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. COPPERMINE COVE: cove immediately SE. of Cape Morris, the NW. tip of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°22’S., 59°46’W. The name, de- rived from the reported existence of copper ore in the cove, was applied by sealers in about 1821 toa much larger bight farther SE. along the W. side of Robert I., but in recent years the name has be- come established for the cove described. Not adopted: Copper Mine Cove. COPPER PEAK: peak which is vivid green in color, about 3,700 ft. in el., about 2 mi. NNE. of Billie Peak and 2 mi. E. of the N. side of Borgen Bay, on Anvers I. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°43’S., 63°21’W. First seen by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Dis- covery, but may reflect an earlier naming. CORA COVE: small cove in the NW part of Deso- lation Hbr., along the SE. side of Desolation I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°22’W. A Br. sealing exp. under Powell visited this cove in 1821, reporting that the brig Cora, of Liverpool, was lost at this location during the preceding year. Not adopted: Cora’s Cove. CORDELIA BAY: bight along the E. side of Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°47’S., 26°24’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the — Discovery II. Named for Cordelia A. Carey, daugh- ter of Cdr. W. M. Carey, RN (Ret.), then captain of the Discovery II. CORDELL HULL BAY: ice-filled bay, about 18 mi. wide, and 15 mi. long, fed by Cordell Hull Gl., indenting Hobbs Coast; in about 75°10’S., 136°20’W. Disc. by the USAS, 1939-41. The bay takes its name from Cordell Hull Gl., which was named for Sec. of State Cordell Hull. CORDELL HULL GLACIER: about 20 mi. wide; flows to the head of Cordell Hull Bay, on Hobbs Coast; in about 75°20’S., 136°15’W. Disc. by the USAS, 1939-41, and named for Sec. of State Cordell Hull. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA COREY, MOUNT: mountain about 2,000 ft. in el., which lies about 8 mi. S. of Fosdick Mtns., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°38’S., 145°00’W. Disc. by the Marie Byrd Land Sledging Party of the ByrdAE in No- vember 1934, and named for Stevenson Corey, exp. supply officer and member of the sledge party. CORINTHIAN BAY: bay, which is about 3 mi. wide and recedes about 1.5 mi., entered between Rogers Head and Saddle Pt. on the N. coast of Heard I.; in 53°01’S., 73°27’E. It was probably named by Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers, American whaler and sealer, after his vessel Corinthian in which he made the first landing on Heard I. in March 1855. The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. CORNER CLIFFS: rocky mass surmounted by two flat-topped summits about 1.5 mi. apart, stand- ing immediately S. of Saturn Gl. on the SE. coast of Alexander I Island; in 72°04’S., 68°25’W. The rocks of these cliffs were apparently hidden from the line of sight by intervening ice slopes to the W., but the two rock ridges forming the NW. shoul- der of this feature were first seen and photographed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and were mapped from these photographs by W.L. G. Joerg. The cliffs were first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who gave this name to mark the point where the exposed rock of eastern Alexander I Island turns from a N.-S. direction toward the southwest. CORNER GLACIER: steep, broken glacier about 1 mi. wide, descending from the W. slopes of Mt. Dickason and merging with the confluent ice on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°36’S., 163°30’E. Charted by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and so named by them because of its location. CORNER ISLANDS: two islets forming a crude right angle, lying 0.1 mi. NE. of Galindez I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15/S., 64°15’°W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. CORNER PEAK: pyramidal peak, about 3,500 ft. in el., with considerable rock exposed on its N. face, lying 2.5 mi. SW. of the S. end of Marescot Ridge and some 8 mi. ESE. of Cape Roquemaurel, mark- ing the corner of a broad glacier valley which rises immediately to the SE. and fans out northwestward to form a piedmont ice sheet on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°35’S., 58°39’W. Named by the FIDS following a survey of the area in 1946. 93 CORNER ROCK: rock lying in the SE. entrance to Meek Chan. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°15’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. CORNICE CHANNEL: narrow channel separat- ing Galindez I. from the E. part of Skua I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15/S., 64°16’W. First surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill. Named in 1954 by the Br-APC. A prominent cornice overhangs the ice cliff on the Galindez I. side of the channel. CORNISH, CAPE: cape which forms the N. tip of Buckle I. in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°42’S., 163°09’E. Named by DI personnel on the Dis- covery II in 1938 for A. W. Cornish, meteorologist with the Australian Central Bureau who was an observer aboard the Discovery II during 1937-38. CORNWALL PEAKS: two conspicuous rock peaks, the highest about 3,400 ft. in el., standing at the W. side of Kénig Gl., about 3 mi. SW. of For- tuna Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°52’W. The name Cornwall Peak was probably given by DI personnel during their survey of Fortuna Bay in 1929. During the SGS, 1951-52, this peak could not be re-identified. -At the same time it was re- ported that the features now described, although lying farther south, together form a conspicuous landmark requiring a name. The name Cornwall Peaks was recommended for these peaks by the Br-APC in 1954; the name Cornwall Peak has been eliminated. Not adopted: Cornwall Peak. CORNWALLIS ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, which lies about midway between Elephant and Clarence Islands in the South Shet- land Is.; in 61°03’S., 54°31’W. The name dates back to about 1821 and is now established interna- tional usage. Not adopted: Cornwallis’s Island, Michailoff’s Island. CORNWALL POINT: conspicuous point about 1.5 mi. NE. of Cape Morris, on the N. side of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°21’S., 59°45’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II who charted the point in 1935. CORONATION ISLAND: largest of the South Orkney Is., about 30 mi. long and 3 to 8 mi. wide; in about 60°37’S., 45°30’W. Disc. in December 1821 in the course of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell, British sealer, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, American sealer. Named by Powell in honor of the coronation of George IV, who had become King of Great Britain in 1820. Not adopted: Coronation Isle, Mainland, Pomona Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA CORRAL POINT: rocky point forming the SW. extremity of Moe I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°43’W. Roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1933. Named by the FIDS following their survey of 1947. The Corral Whaling Co. of Bergen, a sub- sidiary of Messrs. Christensen and Co., Corral, Chile, operated the floating factory Tioga, with its steam whalers Corral and Fyr, in the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. CORRELL NUNATAK: nunatak on the W. mar- gin of Mertz Gl., standing about 20 mi. SSW. of the head of Buchanan Bay, on George V Coast; in about 67°34’S., 144°07’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the AAK under Mawson, who named it for Percy E. Correll, mechanic with the Main Base party. Corry, Cape: see Corry Island. CORRY ISLAND: circular island about 2 mi. in diameter and about 1,600 ft. in el., lying off the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen. between Vega and Eagle Islands; in 63°43’S.,57°32’W. Thisis believed to be the cape sighted hereabout by a Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, who named it for Thomas L. Corry, a Lord Commissioner of the Admiralty. In 1945, the FIDS charted an archipelago in this area. The present application of the name is in accord with the FIDS “that the name of Corry should be per- petuated on the most conspicuous of these islands as seen from eastward (the direction from which it was seen by Ross).” Not adopted: Cape Corry. COTTER, CAPE: bold headland about 10 mi. S. of Cape Hallett, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 72°40’S., 170°45’E. Named in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, for Pownall P. Cotter, Master of the Terror, one of the two exp. ships used by Ross. COTTON GLACIER: an ill-defined stream of glacial ice lying at the S. side of Mackay Gl. With Mackay Gl. it occupies the broad basin opening out upon Granite Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°06’S., 161°47’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. COULING ISLAND: island in the William Scoresby Arch., lying off Mac-Robertson Coast about 5 mi. NE. of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay; in about 67°20’S., 59°42’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in Febru- ary 1936. Not adopted: Couling Island, Froa [Norwegian]. COULMAN ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long and 9 mi. wide, which lies about 8 mi. SSE. of Cape Jones, off the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 73°25’S., 169°50’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for his father-in-law, Thomas Coulman. 94 COURTAULD, MOUNT: rounded, mainly ice- covered mountain, about 6,900 ft. in el., standing 9 mi. E. of the rocky ridge marking the N. side of the mouth of Naess Gl., on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 70°21’S., 67°28’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Augustine Courtauld, British Arctic explorer who was of assistance during the organization of the BGLE, 1934-37. COURTIER ISLETS: group of about 24 small islets and rocks, the highest about 90 ft. in el., lying close SW. of Emperor It. in the De Dion Its., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 68°44’W. First sighted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. The islets were visited and surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because of their close association with Emperor Islet. COURT NUNATAK: nunatak about 2,200 ft. in el., standing close E. of the mouth of Meinardus Gl. on the W. side of New Bedford Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°22’S., 61°36’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of East Base of the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Arnold Court, American meteorologist and member of the West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. COURT RIDGE: low, ice-drowned ridge, about 1,000 ft. in el., extending into Sulzberger Bay in a NNW. direction from the NW. extremity of the Haines Mtns. of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°20’S., 147°05’W. Disc. by members of the ByrdAE on the Northeastern Flight of December 15-16, 1934. Named for Arnold Court, meteorologist at the West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. COVE ROCK: rock about 2.5 mi. W. of North Foreland, the NE. tip of King George I., in the ~ South Shetland Is.; in 61°53’S., 57°46’W. Charted and named in 1937 by DI personnel on the Dis- covery IT. COVEY ROCKS: group of about six rocks lying midway between Pinero I. and Cape Saenz Pena in Laubeuf Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°33’S., 67°43’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who gave the name because of the re- semblance of these rocks to a covey of partridges sitting in a field. CRAGGY ISLET: narrow islet marked by crags, lying close off the E. side of Desolation I. and form- ing the NE. side of Desolation Hbr., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°20’W. It was charted GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who gave this descriptive name. CRAIGIE POINT: point at the SE. side of the entrance to Right Whale Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°38’W. Craigie Point is an established name dating back to about 1912. Not adopted: Graicie Point. Crane Channel; Crane Inlet: see Crane Glacier. CRANE GLACIER: narrow glacier which flows about 17 mi. in an ENE. direction through a deep trough into Exasperation Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°20’S., 62°20’W. Sir Hubert Wilkins photographed this feature from the air in 1928 and gave it the name Crane Channel, after C. K. Crane of Los Angeles, reporting that it ap- peared to be a channel cutting in an E.-W. direc- tion across the peninsula. The name was altered to Crane Inlet following explorations along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1936 by the BGLE, which proved that no through channel from the E. coast exists. Comparison of Wilkins’ photograph of this feature with those taken in 1947 by the FIDS show that Wilkins’ “Crane Channel” is this glacier, al- though it lies about 75 mi. NE. of the position origi- nally reported by Wilkins. Not adopted: Crane Channel, Crane Inlet. CRATER BAY: small bay at the NE. side of Leskov I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°40’S., 28°10’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, who so named it because of its apparent formation as a result of volcanic eruption. Not adopted: Kraterbucht [German]. CRATER HILL: hill, about 1,100 ft. in el., marked by a volcanic crater at its summit, about 1 mi. N. of Observation Hill in the S. part of Hut Point Peninsula on Ross I.; in about 77°50’S., 166°41’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. CREAK, MOUNT: sharp peak about 5,200 ft. in el., lying N. of Fry Gl. in the Prince Albert Mtns. of Victoria Land; in about 76°34’S., 162°05’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Capt. E. W. Creak, then Dir. of Compasses at the Admiralty. CREPIN, CAPE: cape which marks the W. side of the entrance to Mackellar Inlet in Admiralty Bay, on King George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°29’W. Cape Crépin appears to have been named by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909. CRESCENT BAY: small bay lying along the E. shore of Duke of York I. in the S. part of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°36’S., 170°05’E. First charted in 1899, and so named be- 95 cause of its shape, by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink. CRESCENT ISLET: small, roughly crescent- shaped islet, lying close S. of Mollyhawk It. in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°20’W. The islet was roughly charted in 1912-13, by Robert Cushman Murphy. It was surveyed in 1929-30 by DI personnel who named it Crescent Island. The name Crescent Islet is approved because of the small size of the feature. Not adopted: Crescent Island. CRESWICK PEAKS: an impressive mountain massif with several peaks, the highest about 4,800 ft. in el., standing at the NE. side of Moore Pt. be- tween Naess and Meiklejohn Glaciers, and about 3 mi. inland from George VI Sound on Palmer Pen.; in 70°28’S., 67°45’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Miss Frances E. Creswick (now Mrs. James I. Moore— see Moore Pt.), Asst. to the Dir. of the Scott Polar Research Inst., Cambridge, 1931-38, who helped to organize the BGLE, 1934-37. CREVASSE VALLEY GLACIER: broad glacier distinguished by many crevasses, about 40 mi. long and from 8 to 12 mi. wide, flowing W. from the Rockefeller Plateau of Marie Byrd Land, through the Edsel Ford Ranges, to Sulzberger Bay. Its terminus lies in about 76°44’S., 145°55’W. Disc. by the Marie Byrd Land Sledging Party of the ByrdAE, in November-December 1934, and so named because of its extensively crevassed surface. Not adopted: Crevassed Valley Glacier. CREWE, CAPE: cape which forms the N. side of the entrance to Cook Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Cape Crewe is an established name, dating back to about 1912. CREWE ROCK: rock about 10 ft. in el., which lies 0.1 mi. E. of Cape Crewe, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Named after nearby Cape Crewe. CROCKETT, MOUNT: high granitic peak of the Will Hays Mountains, rising to about 7,200 ft. in el., standing between Robert Scott and Amundsen Glaciers in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°02’S. 155°00’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Laurence Gould, and named by Byrd for Frederick E. Crockett, member of that party. CROFT BAY: bay which indents the north-cen- tral coast of James Ross I. and forms the S. part of Sidney Herbert Sound, S. of the NE. end of Palm- er Pen.; in 64°00’S., 57°45’W. Disc. in 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold. Charted in 1945 GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA by the FIDS, who named it for W. N. Croft, FIDS geologist at Hope Bay in 1946-47. Cross, Cape: see Hinks, Cape. CROSSCUT POINT: series of jagged rocks form- ing the N. end of Vindication I., in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°46’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and so named because numerous crosscutting dikes have with- stood weathering and produced this irregular for- mation. CROSS VALLEY: valley about 1.75 mi. long, in a NW.-SE. direction, cutting through the NE. part of Seymour I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Palm- er Pen.; in 64°16’S., 56°42’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, and so named by him because of the transverse alignment of the valley. Not adopted: Querthal [German]. CROWN PEAK: ice-covered peak, about 3,700 ft. in el., topped by a conspicuous crown-shaped ice formation. It forms the highest summit and the S. end of Marescot Ridge and lies some 10 mi. ESE. of Cape Roquemaurel, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°34’S., 58°33’W. Named by the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1946. Crown Prince Gustav Channel: see Prince Gus- tav Channel. Crown Prince Olaf .Land; Crown Prince Olav Coast; Crown Prince Olav Land: see Prince Olav Coast. Crown Prince Olaf Mountains; Crown Prince Olav Mountains: see Prince Olav Mountains. Crown Princess Martha Land: see Princess Mar- tha Coast. CROZIER, CAPE: cape which forms the E. tip of Ross I.; in about 77°29’S., 169°34’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named for Cdr. Francis R. M. Crozier of the Terror, one of the two ships of Ross’ expedition. Cruchleys Island: see Powell Island. CRUISER ROCKS: submerged rocks about 4 mi. SW. of Cape Lindsey, Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°12’S., 55°45’W. These rocks were known to sealers as early as 1822, and appeared on charts of that period by the name Cruisers. Not adopted: Cruisers, Cruizer Rocks, Cruizers Rocks. Cruisers; Cruizers Rocks: see Cruiser Rocks. Crulls Islands: see Cruls Islets. 96 CRULS ISLETS: group of islets about 10 mi. WNW. of the Argentine Is., lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°13’S., 54°35’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him for Luis Cruls, Belgian astronomer and later Dir. of the Observatory at Rio de Janeiro. Not adopted: Crulls Islands, Crulls Islets. CRUMMER, MOUNT: brownish granite moun- tain about 3,000 ft. in el., lying SE. of Mt. De Ger- lache on the NE. side of Larsen Gl., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°05’S., 162°40’E. First charted and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. CRUTCH, THE: saddle-shaped depression on the ridge about 1.5 mi. NW. of Larsen Pt., at the W. side of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°32’W. The name is de- scriptive. CRUTCH PEAK: dark, rocky peak about 900 ft. in el., which lies about 1.5 mi. E. of Black Peak and 2.5 mi. E. of the NW. tip of Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°26’S., 59°59’ W. Probably named by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the peak in 1935. CRUZEN ISLAND: rocky, snow-covered island about 75 mi. N. of the mouth of Emory Land Bay, Marie Byrd Land; in about 74°30’S., 141°30’W. Disc. in 1940 on flights from West Base of the USAS, and named for Cdr. Richard H. Cruzen, USN, commanding officer of the Bear and second-in- command of the expedition. CRYSTAL HILL: ice-free hill, about 500 ft. in el., forming the summit of a headland lying mid- way between Bald Head and Camp Hill, on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°39’S., 57°44’W. So named by the FIDS because crystals were col- lected at the foot of the hill in 1945 and 1946. Cube, The: see Kubus Mountain. CUFF CAPE: dark rock point which emerges from the ice at the S. side of the mouth of Mackay Gl., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°59’S., 162°24’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and so named because it resembled “a black hand stretched out from a snowy cuff.” Not adopted: Cape Cuff. CUMBERLAND BAY: bay, about 4 mi. wide at its entrance between Larsen and Barff Points, which separates into extensive arms that recede inland about 9 mi., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°28’W. Disc. and named in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA CUMBERLAND EAST BAY: bay forming the eastern arm of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°27’°W. It is entered between Sap- pho Pt. and Barff Pt., where it is nearly 3 mi. wide, and extends 8 mi. in a SE. direction. This feature was surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, who named it South Bay. It was remapped during 1926-29 by DI personnel and renamed East Cum- berland Bay, which is more descriptive of its geo- graphic position. The shortened form East Bay was simultaneously used. Following the SGS, 1951-52, the Br-APC proposed that the name be altered to Cumberland East Bay and that all other names be rejected. This change brings together information about the whole of Cumberland Bay in one place in indexes, and will avoid confusion with East Bay in Prince Olav Harbor, South Georgia. Not adopted: East Bay, East Cumber- land Bay, South Bay. CUMBERLAND WEST BAY: bay forming the western arm of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°13’S., 36°32’W. It is entered southward of Larsen Pt., where it is 2 mi. wide, and extends 7 mi. in a SW. direction. This feature was surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, who named it West Bay. It was remapped during 1926-29 by DI personnel and renamed West Cumberland Bay. The short- ened form West Bay was simultaneously used. Fol- lowing the SGS, 1951-52, the Br-APC proposed that the name be altered to Cumberland West Bay and that all other names be rejected. This change brings together information about the whole Cum- berland Bay in one place in indexes. Not adopted: West Bay, West Cumberland Bay. CUMMING, MOUNT: peak in the Executive Committee Range, lying between Mounts Hamp- ton and Hartigan, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°55’S., 127°15’W. Disc. by members of West Base of the USAS on a flight, Dec. 15, 1940, and named for Hugh S. Cumming, Jr., State Dept., member of the USAS Executive Committee. Not adopted: Mount Winifred Cumming. CUMMINGS COVE: cove entered between Jebsen Pt. and Porteous Pt. on the W. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°41’W. Roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1933, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC for E. T. Cummings of the FIDS, radio operator at Cape Geddes base in 1946 and at Deception I. in 1947. CURIE ISLET: small rocky islet near the E. end of Géologie Arch., lying midway between Derby It. and Lion It., close N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°39’S., 140°03’E. Photographed from the air by USN Operation High- jump, 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio- tard, 1949-51. Named by the FrAE under Barré, 97 1951-52, for the noted Curie family, French phys- icists. CURIE POINT: point which forms the NE. tip of Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°29’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for Pierre Curie, famous French chemist. Not adopted: Point Curie, Pointe P. Curie [French]. CURZON ISLETS: small group of rocky islets lying off the ice-covered cape which lies midway between Cape Mousse and the Sentinel Its., off Adélie Coast; in 66°46’S., 141°35’E. Disc. in Janu- ary 1912 by Capt. J. K. Davis, captain of the AAE exp. ship Aurora. Named by Mawson for Lord Curzon, Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1911-14. CUT, THE: shallow, rock-strewn channel, be- tween Babe Islet and the W. side of the entrance to Cobblers Cove, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°18’W. Charted and named in 1929 by DI personnel. Cuverville Island: see De Rongé Island. CUVERVILLE ISLAND: dark, rocky island lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen., about 1 mi. E. of the N. part of De Rongé I.; in about 64°43’S., 62°36’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, who named it for J. M. A. Cavelier de Cuverville, a vice admiral of the French Navy. Not adopted: Cavelier de Cuverville Island. Cuyou Bucht: see Guyou Bay. CYRIL, MOUNT: mountain about 6,100 ft. in el., which stands in the Commonwealth Range, about 10 mi. SSE. of Mt. Kyffin, on the E. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 83°57’S., 172°55’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. CZEGKA, MOUNT: mountain about 7,000 ft. in el., forming part of the E. wall of Robert Scott Gl., and standing SW. of Mt. Blackburn in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°21’S., 148°20’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Victor H. Czegka, USMC, who served as a member with the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and also as member and supply manager with the ByrdAE, 1933-35. DAGGER PEAK: rock peak rising steeply from sea level to about 300 ft. in el. at the W. end of Comb Ridge, lying at the N. extremity of The Naze, a peninsula of northern James Ross I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°55’S., 57°29’W. This area was first explored in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskj6ld. The peak was charted and given this descriptive name by the FIDS in 1945. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Dailey Archipelago: see Dailey Islands. DAILEY ISLANDS: group of volcanic islets lying in the N. part of the ice shelf of McMurdo Sound about 9 mi. NE. of Cape Chocolate, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°53’S., 165°15’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named this group for Fred E. Dailey, exp. carpen- ter. Not adopted: Dailey Archipelago. DAISY POINT: point extending seaward from the high rocky shore on the E. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia. It lies 0.5 mi. W. of Cape Wilson, near the entrance to Beckmann Fjord; in 54°03/S., 37°11’W. The name Low Point was given for this feature, probably by DI personnel who charted this area in 1929. Following its survey in 1951-52, the SGS reported that this part of the coast is high and rugged, and the point, though relatively low by comparison, does not merit the description “low.” The new name, recommended by the Br-APC in 1954, is after the sealing brig Daisy of New Bedford, Mass., which under Capt. Benjamin D. Cleveland visited the Bay of Isles in 1912-13. Not adopted: Low Point. DALES ISLAND: the outermost offshore island N. of the William Scoresby Arch., rising to about 160 ft. in el. and lying about 13 mi. N. of Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°11’S., 59°46’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936. DALGLIESH BAY: bay, about 1 mi. wide and indenting 3 mi., lying between Cape Lainez and Cape Bongrain on the SW. side of Pourquoi Pas L., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°43’S., 67°43’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named for David G. Dalgliesh, FIDS medical officer at Stonington I. in 1948-49, who accompanied the 1948 sledge survey party to this area. DALK GLACIER: channel glacier, about 2 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the conti- nental ice to the Ingrid Christensen Coast, close E. of Larsemann Hills; in about 69°25’S., 75°57’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. So named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study of USN Op. Hijp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, because of its close association with Dalk Islet lying close off its terminus. DALK ISLET: rocky islet about 0.7 mi. long, marked by a small rock close off its N. end, lying about 8 mi. E. of the E. end of Larsemann Hills, close off Dalk Gl. on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in 98 about 69°23’S., 76°00’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen- sen, who applied the name Dalk6y. The generic islet is approved because of the small size of this fea- ture. Not adopted: Dalkoy [Norwegian]. DALLMANN, MOUNT: peak about 9,000 ft. in el., lying about 8 mi. E. of the N. end of the Conrad Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in about 71°48’S., 10°10’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Eduard Dallmann. Dallman Bay: see Dallmann Bay. Dallmann Bay: see Flandres Bay. DALLMANN BAY: bay which lies between Bra- bant and Anvers Islands, and is connected to De Gerlache Str. by Schollaert Chan., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°55’W. Disc. and first roughly charted in 1874 by the German whaler Capt. Eduard Dallmann. It was named for Dallmann by the Society for Polar Navigation, Hamburg, which sponsored Dallmann’s Antarctic exploration. The bay was later charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Not adopted: Dallman Bay. Dallman Nunatak: See Dallmann Nunatak. DALLMANN NUNATAK: nunatak about 3 mi. NNW. of Bruce Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°01’S., 60°20’W. Dallmann Nunatak was first charted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for Capt. Eduard Dallmann. Not adopted: Dallman Nunatak. DALMENY, MOUNT: the northwesternmost peak of the Admiralty Range, standing above the S. shore of Smith Inlet, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°05’S., 167°07’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Rt. Hon. Lord Dalmeny, then a junior Lord of the Admiralty. DALY, CAPE: ice-covered promontory on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°31’S., 63°54’E. Disc. and named in February 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson. DAMOCLES POINT: point on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, lying 3 mi. ESE. of the south- ern summit of Mt. Tyrrell; in 69°39’S., 69°21’W. A small rock exposure near sea level is surmounted by an ice cliff 200 ft. high. First photographed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because the ice cliffs overhang- ing the spot where geological specimens were col- lected seemed like the sword of Damocles. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DAMOY POINT: point which lies 0.5 mi. WNW. of Flag Pt., the N. entrance point to the harbor of Port Lockroy, on the W. side of Wiencke I. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°32’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Dana Coman, Mount: see Coman, Mount. DANCO COAST: that portion of the NW. coast of Palmer Pen. between Cape Kater, in 63°45’S., 59°40’W., and Cape Renard, in 65°01’S., 63°43’W. This coast was explored in January and February of 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who named it for Lt. Emile Danco, who died on the expedition. Not adopted: Danco Land. Danco Land: see Danco Coast. Danebrog, Iles: see Dannebrog Islands. DANFORTH, MOUNT: Pyramid-shaped moun- tain rising to about 5,500 ft. in el., standing just W. of the W. end of Watson Escarpment, on the S. side of Albanus GI., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°58’S., 148°20’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for William H. Danforth of the Purina Mills, St. Louis, contributor to the expedition. DANGER, CAPE: cape which forms the NW. tip of Desolation I., in the South Shetland Is., in 62°26’S., 60°25’W. Charted in 1935 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II. So named because a group of sunken rocks extends about 0.4 mi. NW. from the cape. DANGER ISLETS: group of islets lying 13 mi. ESE. of Joinville I., in 63°25’S., 54°37’W. Disc. Dec. 28, 1842 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who so named them because, appearing amongst heavy fragments of ice, they were almost completely con- cealed until the ship was nearly upon them. DANIEL, MOUNT: peak in the Prince Olav Mtns., which rises to about 3,000 ft. in el., stand- ing W. of Liv Gl. and NE. of Mt. Wade, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 84°52’S., 171°10’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on ByrdAE flights to the Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and named by him for Robert W. Daniel of Lower Brandon, Va., contributor to the expedition. DANIELL, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side of the entrance to Tucker Inlet, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 72°50’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross who named it for Professor Daniell, chemist of King’s College, Cambridge Univ., and Foreign Sec. of the Royal Society. 99 Daniel Rex, Mount: see Rex, Mount. DANNEBROG ISLANDS: group of islands, the largest of which are Booth, Hovgaard and Peter- mann Islands, which lie separated from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. by Lemaire Chan.; in 65°06’S., 64°15’W. Disc. by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, who named them Kaiser Wilhelm Inseln. They were later charted by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, who named them Dannebrog Islands in appreciation of support he received from Denmark. Since the Dallmann names have been retained for some of the individual islands, the US-ACAN recommends the use of the name Danne- brog Islands for the group in keeping with the naming by De Gerlache and because of the greater acceptance and use of this name on maps and reports. Not adopted: Iles Danebrog [French], Kaiser Wilhelm Inseln [German], Kaiser Wilhelm II Islands. Darbel Bay: see Marin Darbel Bay. DARBOUX ISLAND: island, about 1 mi. in diameter and about 900 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi. W. of Cape Trois Pérez, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°25’S., 64°14’W. Disc. by the FrAB, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Jean Gaston Darboux, noted French mathematician. DARLING, MOUNT: highest peak of the Alle- gheny Mtns., which lie in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°14’S., 143°13’W. Disc. on aerial flights from the West Base of the USAS in 1940, and named for Chester A. Darling of Allegheny College, Meadville, Penn- sylvania. DARLINGTON, CAPE: ice-covered headland, about 1,000 ft. in el., forming the S. side of the entrance to Hilton Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°00’S., 60°43’W. Disc. in 1940 by the USAS, but at that time it was thought to be an island. Its true nature was determined in an aerial flight by the RARE, under Ronne, in Novem- ber 1947. Named by the USAS for Harry Darling- ton III, member of the East Base sledging party that explored this coast as far S. as Hilton Inlet. Not adopted: Darlington Island. Darlington Island: see Darlington, Cape. DARNLEY, CAPE: cape which lies 6 mi. SE. of Newark Bay, on the south-central coast of South Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°50’W. ‘The name dates back to about 1920 and was given for E. R. Darnley of the Colonial Office, Chairman of the Discovery Committee, 1924-33. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DARNLEY, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the W. side of the entrance to MacKenzie Bay, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°42’S., 69°30’E. On Dec. 26, 1929 Sir Douglas Mawson, from the masthead of the Discovery while in 66°57’S., 71°57’E., saw land miraged up on the SW. horizon. On Feb. 10, 1931 he returned in the Discovery and was able to approach close enough to see the head- land, naming it for E. R. Darnley, Chairman of the Discovery Committee of the British Colonial Office from 1923 to 1933. Not adopted: Bjerko Head, Bjerk6 Head, Bjerkg Head, Bjerko Headland. DARNLEY, MOUNT: mountain about 3,600 ft. in el. in the south-central portion of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is., in 59°03’S., 26°30’W. Mount Darnley was charted in 1930 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II who named it for E. R. Darnley. Dart, Cape: see Flying Fish, Cape. DART, CAPE: cape at the foot of Mt. Siple, forming a prominent angle in the coast line of Marie Byrd Land, at the E. side of the entrance to Wrigley Gulf; in about 73°10’S., 123°00’W. Disc. by the USAS, December 1940, in a flight from West Base. Named after Justin W. Dart who, as an ex- ecutive of the Walgreen Drug Co., of Chicago, sup- ported the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Flying Fish. DARTMOUTH POINT: point which marks the N. end of the rugged promontory separating Mo- raine Fjord and the E. head of Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°27’W. The point was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4. Named after H.M.S. Dartmouth, a vessel used in surveying Cumberland Bay in 1920. DARWIN, MOUNT: mountain lying at the head, and near the W. wall, of Beardmore Gl.; in about 85°00’S., 164°30’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE under Shackleton, who named it for Maj. Leonard Darwin, Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1908-11. DARWIN ISLET: largest of the Danger Islets, lying 12 mi. ESE. of the E. tip of Joinville I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 54°38’W. Disc. in 1842 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Charles Darwin, noted naturalist. Not adopted: Darwin Island. DARWIN MOUNTAINS: mountains about 6,200 ft. in el. in the Britannia Range rising NW. of Barne Inlet, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°50’S., 157°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named them for Maj. Leonard Darwin. 100 DASPIT GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide, which flows in an ENE. direction along the S. side of Mt. Shelby to the head of Trail Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 65°43’W. Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS, 1939-41. It was photographed from the air in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, and charted in 1948 by the FIDS. Named by Ronne for Capt. Lawrence R. Daspit, USN, who assisted in obtaining Navy sup- port for the Ronne expedition. David, Mount: see Kirkwood, Mount. DAVID GLACIER: glacier about 8 mi. in width and of undetermined length, flowing E. into the S. part of the Drygalski Ice Tongue, in Victoria Land; in about 75°20’S., 162°45’E. Disc. in No- vember 1908 by the Northern Party of the BrAE, under the leadership of Prof. Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, of Sydney Univ., for whom the feature was named. DAVID ISLAND: ice-covered island about 10 mi. long and 6 mi. wide, which is marked by prominent rock exposures along its N. and E. sides, lying off the mouth of Reid Gl. about 3 mi. N. of Queen Mary Coast and standing above the E. portion of Shackle- ton Ice Shelf; in about 66°27’S., 98°42’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the Western Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Prof. Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, member of the AAK Advisory Committee. DAVID RANGE: range about 6 mi. W. of Masson Range, which it parallels, in the Framnes Mtns. on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°52’S., 62°34’E. It extends about 10 mi. in a NNE.-SSW. direction, with peaks rising above 3,600 ft. in el. Disc. on Feb. 14, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who named it for Prof. Sir T. W. Edgeworth David. DAVIDSON, CAPE: cape which forms the S. tip of Mackenzie Pen. and the W. side of the entrance of Wilton Bay, on the W. side of Laurie I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°46’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for J. Davidson, first mate of the exp. ship. Scotia. DAVIDSON, MOUNT: highest summit, about 8,100 ft. in el., of the Prince Albert Mtns., lying NW. of Granite Hbr. in Victoria Land; in about 76°46’S., 162°08’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for a member of the ship’s company of the Morning, relief ship to the expedition. DAVIES BAY: bay about 5 mi. wide, between Cape Kinsey and Drake Head along Oates Coast; in about 69°15’S., 158°40’E. Disc. by members of the Terra Nova of the BrAE, 1910-13, who explored along Oates Coast under Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA RN, in February 1911. Named for Francis E. C. Davies, leading shipwright aboard the Terra Nova. Not adopted: Davis Bay. DAVIES GILBERT STRAIT: strait which lies between Tower I. on the N. and Trinity I. and Cape Kater on the S., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 63°37’S., 60°00’W. Named by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster, for Davies Gilbert, Pres. of the Royal Soc., 1827-30, and of the committee which formulated the objectives of the expedition. The strait was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. Not adopted: Davis Gilbert Strait. DAVIS, CAPE: rounded cape lying E. of Magnet Bay near the E. end of the coast of Enderby Land, just N. of Edward VIII Bay; in about 66°29'S., 56°51’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on about Jan. 12, 1930, and named for Capt. John King Davis, Dir. of Navigation under the Commonwealth Govt. and ship’s captain and second-in-command of the BANZARE. DAVIS, POINT: point about 1.2 mi. WNW. of Point Rae on the N. side of Scotia Bay, Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°39’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for W. G. Davis, Dir. of the Argentine Meteorological Service. Davis Bay: see Davies Bay. DAVIS BAY: bay about 10 mi. long and about 15 mi. wide at its entrance, lying between Cape Cesney and the ice-covered coast close NE. of Lewis It. and indenting the E. end of Clarie Coast; in about 65°55/S., 134°10’E. Disc. by the AAE under Maw- son from Aurora in January 1912, and named by him for Capt. John King Davis, master of the Aurora and second-in-command of the expedition. Davis Gilbert Strait: see Davies Gilbert Strait. Davis Glacier: see Arthur Davis Glacier. DAVIS GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier, about 6 mi. wide and of undetermined length, de- scending from the interior upland of Victoria Land in a NE. and E. direction to Ross Sea; in about 75°45’S., 162°45’E. First charted by the BrAH, 1907-9 under Shackleton, who named it for Capt. John King Davis, first officer and later captain of the exp. ship Nimrod. DAVIS ISLETS: small group of rocky islets and rocks, marked by a prominent islet near the sea- ward end of the group, which lies close inside the W. side of the entrance to Vincennes Bay, about 6 mi. ESE. of Cape Nutt, off Budd Coast; in about 101 66°45/S., 108°35’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Malcolm Davis, bird curator with the Washington (D.C.) Zoo of the Smithso- nian Institution, who served as biologist aboard the USAS ship North Star, 1940-41, and as ornitholo- gist with the USN Op. Wml. parties which visited the Highjump Arch. and Windmill Is. in January 1948. DAVIS PENINSULA: elongated ice-covered pen- insula, about 3 mi. wide, between Reid Gl. and Rob- inson Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°37’S., 98°48’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Capt. John King Davis. DAVIS SEA: an area of the sea between Shackle- ton Ice Shelf and the West Ice Shelf, off Queen Mary Coast and Wilhelm II Coast; in about 66°S., 92°E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Capt. John King Davis. Dausay Island; Daussy Island: see Hope Island. Dawson and Lambton, Mount: see Dawson- Lambton, Mount. DAWSON-LAMBTON, MOUNT: mountain about 8,700 ft. in el., which lies about 6 mi. S. of Mt. Speyer in the Worcester Range, NW. of Moore Em- bayment on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°52’S., 160°22’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4 under Scott, and named for the Misses Dawson- Lambton, contributors to the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Dawson Lambton, Mount Dawson and Lambton. DAWSON-LAMBTON GLACIER: heavily-broken glacier with a seaward face about 200 ft. in el. and 40 mi. wide, flowing NW. from the high interior ice- covered hills and reaching the sea on the Caird Coast; in about 76°15’S., 27°30’W. Disc. in Jan- uary 1915 by a Br. exp. under Shackleton. Named for Miss Elizabeth Dawson-Lambton, benefactress of the Shackleton expeditions. Not adopted: Daw- son Lambton Glacier. DAY, CAPE: cape forming the S. portal of Maw- son Gl. where it becomes the Nordenskjold Ice Tongue, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°16’S., 162°37’E. First charted by the BrAH, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named this cape for Bernard C. Day, electrician and motor expert with the expedition. DAY ISLAND: island, about 6.5 mi. long and 2.5 mi. wide, lying immediately S. of The Gullet and 2 mi. N. of Wyatt I. in the N. part of Laubeuf Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°195'S., 67°42’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA under Rymill, who used the provisional name Middle Island for this feature. The island was re- surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and renamed by them for V. Adm. Sir Archibald Day, Hydrographer to the Navy. Not adopted: Middle Island. DAYMAN, CAPE: cape which forms the E. side of the entrance to Yule Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 70°40’S., 166°45’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Joseph Dayman, mate on the Erebus. DAYNE PEAK: distinctive pyramidal peak about 2,400 ft. in el. rising immediately NE. of Cape Errera, the SW. tip of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°54’S., 63°35’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, for Pierre Dayné, mountain guide and member of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Dayné. DEACON, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the SE. tip of Kemp Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°17’S., 59°53’W. Probably first seen by members of the USAS who photographed a portion of Kemp Pen. while exploring this coast from the air in December 1940. During 1947 the cape was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for George E. R. Deacon, English oceanographer and member of the Discovery Investigations staff, 1927-39, and now Dir. of the National Inst. of Oceanography. DEACON HILL: conspicuous, ice-covered peak, rising abruptly above the icecap in NW. Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°34’S., 45°49’W. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II follow- ing their survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1933, for George E. R. Deacon. DEACON PEAK: peak about 600 ft. in el. mark- ing the summit of Penguin I., at the E. side of the entrance to King George Bay, in the South Shet- land Is., in 62°05’S., 57°56’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II for George E. R. Deacon. Dead Glacier: see Konig Glacier. DEAKIN, MOUNT: peak, about 9,100 ft. in el., in the Commonwealth Range, marking the N. side of Keltie Gl. at its confluence with Beardmore Gl.; in about 84°42’S., 171°15’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. DEAKIN BAY: wide-open bay lying W. of Cape Freshfield along George V Coast; in about 68°25’S., 150°30’E. The USEE, 1834-42, under Wilkes, ex- plored this area in December 1840. The Peacock, 102 under Capt. William L. Hudson, entered what the USEE thought was a bay, in 65°55’S., 151°18’E., and the bay thus explored was named for the ship Peacock. The mainland of George V Coast was first actually explored by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, when the Eastern Coastal party reached as far as 150°12’E. They named the bay for Sir Alfred Deakin, Australian Prime Minister in 1910. Not adopted: Peacock Bay, Peacocks Bay. De Alencar, Mount: see Alencar Peak. DEBARQUEMENT ROCK: ice-free rock marking the N. end of the Dumoulin Its. and the NE. end of Géologie Arch., lying close N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°36’S., 140°04’E. The Fr. exp. under D’Urville landed on a rocky islet in this vicinity in January 1840 and gave the name “Rocher du Débarquement.” Positive identifica- tion of this feature has not been made, but on the basis of aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and surveys and geological studies made by the FrAE during the 1950-52 period, the seaward position of Débarquement Rock is believed to cor- relate with the feature so named by D’Urville. DEBENHAM GLACIER: glacier which flows in an ENE. direction into the N. part of Wilson Pied- mont GIl., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°07’S., 163°00’E. This feature was indicated on charts of the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and the BrAE, under Shackleton, 1907-9. It was named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, for Frank Debenham, geologist with this exp. and Dir. of the Scott Polar Research Inst., 1925-48. DEBENHAM ISLANDS: group of islets and rocks lying between Millerand I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°07’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill; the exp. base was on Barry I., in the center of the group, during part of this time. Named for Frank Debenham, who served as member of the BGLE Advisory Committee. DeBusk, Mount: see DeBusk Scarp. DEBUSK SCARP: nearly vertical rock cliff, about 1,000 ft. in el., at the S. side of the mouth of Bing- ham Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°23’S., 62°57’W. This feature was photographed from the air in 1928 by Sir Hubert Wilkins, and again in 1940 by members of the USAS who also sledge sur- veyed along this coast. It was resighted by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Clarence DeBusk, executive secretary of the Cham- ber of Commerce, Beaumont, Texas, who was of as- sistance to the RARE in the preparation for the voyage south. Not adopted: Mount DeBusk. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DEBUTANTE ISLAND: rocky island, about 1 mi. long and 0.2 mi. wide, marking the largest and southernmost of the Sgstrene Is., lying about 5 mi. W. of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°36’S., 74°59’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers, from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, as a small rock outcrop protruding above what was thought to form part of an ice shelf. So named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 compilation from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, because of the recent appearance of this feature above the consolidated sea ice between Polar Record and Polararboken Glacier Tongues. Not adopted: Debutante. DECAZES, POINT: southernmost point on the island marking the SW. end of the Biscoe Is., at the N. side of Matha Str.; in about 66°30’S., 67°29’W. Charted and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Not adopted: Decazes Point. DECEPTION ISLAND: ring-shaped island about 8 or 9 mi. in diameter, with a narrow entrance into a central landlocked harbor (a drowned breached crater), lying about 6 mi. S. of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°57’S., 60°38’W. The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Teil Island. Decousovte, Cap; Découverte, Cap de la: see Dé- couverte, Cape. DECOUVERTE, CAPE: low rocky cape marking the NW. end of the large islet at the NW. end of the Curzon Its., close off Adélie Coast; in 66°46’S., 141°33’E. Disc. by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who landed on the islet on Jan. 21, 1840, and so named because it marked the first rock outcrop observed along this coast. The name was applied on D’Urville’s 1840 chart to the small cape on the ice- drowned coast immediately behind the Curzon Islets. Roughly charted by the AAE under Maw- son, 1911-14, who reassigned the name to the sea- ward end of the large islet upon which D’Urville’s group landed. This interpretation was confirmed by the FrAE under Barré, who surveyed this coastal area in 1951-52. Not adopted: Cap Decousovte, Cape Decouverte, Cap de la Découverte [French], Cape Discovery. DE DION ISLETS: group of islets surrounded by reefs, lying in the N. part of Marguerite Bay, about 8 mi. SW. of Cape Alexandra, Adelaide I.; in 67°52’S., 68°43’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for the Marquis de Dion, who donated three motor sledges and 103 whose De Dion-Bouton works produced equipment for the expedition. Not adopted: De Dion Islands, Dion Islets. DEE ISLAND: crescent-shaped island, with a conspicuous, sharp peak about 850 ft. in el. at its S. end, about 2.5 mi. WNW. of Fort William, close off the N. side of Greenwich I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in 62°25’S., 59°50’W. Charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. DEFANT GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide at its mouth, which flows ESE. to the W. side of Violante Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°32’S., 61°35’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 the glacier was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Prof. Albert Defant, German oceanog- rapher (Austrian born) who was Dir. of the Inst. fiir Meereskunde (German Hydrographic Office), 1927-46. DE GERLACHE, CAPE: cape which forms the NE. tip of Davis Pen., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°33’S., 98°55’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for Lt. Adrien de Gerlache, leader of the Belgium Antarctic Expedition 1897-99. Not adopted: Cape Gerlache. DE GERLACHE, MOUNT: huge tabular massif about 4,000 ft. in el. lying on the NE. side of Larsen Gl. about 8 mi. SSE. of Mt. Larsen, in Victoria Land; in about 74°58’S., 162°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Lt. Adrien de Gerlache. Not adopted: Mount Gerlache. De Gerlache, Pointe: see De Gerlache Point. DE GERLACHE POINT: point on the W. coast of Anvers I. about 7 mi. NNE. of Cape Albert de Monaco, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°35’S., 64°09’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Lt. Adrien de Gerlache. Not adopted: Gerlache Point, Pointe de Gerlache [French]. DE GERLACHE STRAIT: strait separating the Palmer Arch. from Palmer Pen.; in about 64°30’S., 62°20’W. The BelgAE, under Lt. Adrien de Ger- lache, explored the strait in January and Febru- ary 1898, naming it for the exp. ship Belgica. The name was later changed to honor the commander himself. Not adopted: Gerlache Strait. De Guebriant Islets: see Guébriant Islets. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DE HAVEN GLACIER: piedmont glacier about 15 mi. wide, formed by the confluence of small channel glaciers which flow from the continental ice on the E. flank of Norths Highland to the W. side of Porpoise Bay, about 15 mi. SE. of Holmes Gl., on Banzare Coast; in about 66°45’S., 127°45’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Edmund H. De Haven, acting master on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. DEIMOS RIDGE: prominent narrow rocky spur of sandstone and shales, standing close SW. of Phobos Ridge and Mars Glacier along the N. side of Saturn G1., on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 71°56’S., 68°40’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. This ridge was first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who gave it this name in association with Mars Glacier; Deimos being the outer of two satellites of Mars. DELAITE ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, which lies midway between Cape Anna and Cape Reclus in the north-central portion of Wilhelmina Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 64°31’S., 62°03’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for J. Delaite, a supporter of the expedition. DE LA MOTTE, CAPE: prominent cape lying W. of Mertz Glacier Tongue, on George V Coast; in about 67°00’S., 144°20’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911- 14, under Mawson, who named it for C. P. de la Motte, third officer on the Aurora, the exp. ship. The high land behind this cape is thought to be “Point Case,” which the USEE, 1838-42, under Wilkes, saw from what was called “Disappointment Bay” on Jan. 23, 1840. Not adopted: Cape de la Motte, Point Case. DELAY POINT: rocky point about 600 ft. in el., lying at the W. side of the N. end of Melba Pen., about 7 mi. W. of Cape Charcot, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°28’S., 98°07’E. Disc. by the AAK under Mawson, 1911-14, and so named by the East- ern Sledge Party of the Western Base because bad weather delayed the party near here for several days in November 1912. Delbert Little Glacier: see Kelsey Glacier. Delbridge Islands: see Dellbridge Islands. Deliverance, Cape: see Délivrance, Point. DELIVRANCE POINT: rocky point, about 1 mi. W. of Lumiére Peak, projecting from the SW. side of the rugged peninsula whose seaward end is Cape Tuxen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°19’S., 104 64°06’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char- cot. So named because Charcot and two compan- ions were rescued there, after being separated from the exp. ship Puurquoi-Pas? for several days, while on an exploration of this area in a small boat. Not adopted: Cape Deliverance. DELLBRIDGE ISLANDS: group of islets of vol- canic origin, lying in McMurdo Sound S. of Cape Evans, Ross I.; in about 77°40’S., 166°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named them for James H. Dellbridge, second engineer with the expedition. Not adopted: Delbridge Islands. DELONCLE BAY: bay, about 1.5 mi. long, indent- ing the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Loubat and Glandaz Points and opening on Lemaire Chan. op- posite Booth I.; in 65°06’S., 63°53’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The bay was charted by the FrAE 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Francois Deloncle, French diplomat. De Loubat, Cape: see Loubat Point. DELTA ISLAND: islet, nearly 0.5 mi. long, lying close SE. of Lambda I. and E. of Alpha I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°59’W. The name Delta, derived from the fourth letter of the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI per- sonnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Hermelo [Spanish]. Delta Island: see Acuna Islet. DELUSION POINT: point which marks the E. end of a rocky range which forms the S. wall of Crane Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°23’S., 62°00’W. The feature was photographed from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Named by the FIDS, who charted it in 1947. DEMARIA, MOUNT: mountain with precipitous sides, about 1,900 ft. in el., rising immediately SE. of Cape Tuxen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen., in 65°17’S., 64°05’W. Probably first sighted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named prob- ably for the Demaria brothers, French developers of an anastigmatic lens used by the expedition’s photographic section. Not adopted: Demaria Peak. : DEMAS ICE TONGUE: conspicuous ice tongue, extending W. from the ice shelf of Peacock Bay into Amundsen Sea for about 30 mi. at the E. end of Walgreen Coast; in about 72°10’S, 102°45’W. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Disc. by the USAS in flights from the Bear, Febru- ary 1940, and named after E. J. Demas, member of the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions, 1928-30, and 1933-35. Demas Mountains: see Walker Mountains. DEMAS ROCKS: group of rocks lying about 3 mi. off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen., about 2 mi. NE. of Cape Ducorps; in 63°21’S., 58°02” W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for Lt. Francois Barlatier Demas of the exp. ship Astrolabe. The rocks were charted by the FIDS in 1946. Not adopted: Demas Rock. DEMAY POINT: point which forms the W. side oi the entrance to Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°12’S., 58°25’W. This point was known to sealers as early as 1822. It was named almost 100 years later by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. DEMIDOV, CAPE: cape which forms the S. side of the entrance to Wilson Hbr., on the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 37°47’W. Disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellings- hausen in 1819, and named for Lt. Dimitri Demi- dov of the Vostok. Not adopted: Cape Demidow. Demidow, Cape: see Demidov, Cape. DEMOREST GLACIER: glacier which flows SE. into Whirlwind Inlet, between Flint and Matthes Glaciers, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°23’S., 65°32’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. Charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Max H. Demorest, American gla- ciologist. DENAIS COVE: cove at the N. side of the en- trance to Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°07’S., 58°31’W. Charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for a member of the expedition. DENIAU ISLET: islet which lies off the W. coast of Palmer Pen. midway between Darboux I. and Lippmann It., and about 5 mi. W. of the entrance to Beascochea Bay; in 65°27’S., 64°21’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Monsieur Deniau, a donor of numerous gifts to the’ expedition. Not adopted: Deniau Island. DENISON, CAPE: rocky cape in the center of the S. shore of Commonwealth Bay, on George V Coast; in about 67°00’S., 142°40’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson who named it for Sir 424589 O-57-8 - in 63°25/S., 105 Hugh Denison of Sydney, a patron of the expedi- tion. This cape was the site of the Main Base, from which the AAE mapped George V Coast. DENMAN GLACIER: glacier about 7 to 10 mi. wide, descending N. some 70 mi. from an el. of 4,500 ft. in a series of vast ice cascades and crevasses and debouching into Shackleton Ice Shelf E. of David I., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°50’S., 99°15’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the AAE un- der Mawson, who named. it for Lord Thomas Den- man, Governor-General of the Commonwealth of Australia in 1911 and a patron of the expedition. DENNISTOUN GLACIER: glacier descending from the ice-covered slopes of Mounts Troubridge and Parker to the coast of northern Victoria Land; in about 71°10’S., 168°25’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and named for James R. Dennistoun who was in charge of the mules aboard the exp. ship Terra Nova on the way to the Ant- arctic. DENUCE, MOUNT: rounded mountain, about 5,000 ft. in el., lying between Mounts Hulth and Haskell on the SW. side of Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°43/S., 64°12’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in December 1947. Named by the FIDS for Jean Denucé, Belgian polar bibliog- rapher. Depot Bay: see Farr Bay. DEPOT GLACIER: well-defined valley glacier, flanked by lateral moraines, which terminates in a high vertical ice cliff where it discharges into the head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; 597°03’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, and so named by him because, as seen from Antarctic Sound, it appeared to be a possible site for a depot. DEPOT ISLAND: small, glaciated, granite island about 2 mi. NW. of Cape Ross, off the coast of Vic- toria Land; in about 76°43’S., 163°00’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton and so named by the expedition’s Magnetic Pole Party because they depoted specimens of rocks on this island. DEPOT ISLET: small rocky islet, about 50 ft. in el. and less than 0.1 mi. long, lying about 0.6 mi. NW. of Pasteur It. near the center of the Du- moulin Its., in the Géologie Arch., off Adélie Coast; in 66°37’S., 140°05’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1950-51, and so named because per- sonnel on the exp. ship Commandant Charcot es- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA tablished a depot there to support the party which surveyed the Géologie Arch. area. DERBY ISLET: small rocky islet near the E. end of Géologie Arch., lying close N. of Astrolabe Gla- cier Tongue and about 0.5 mi. SE. of Pasteur It., in the Dumoulin Its., off Adélie Coast; in 66°38’S., 140°05’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio- tard, 1949-51, and so named because separate field parties competed against each other for the honor of being first to reach the islet. DE RONGE ISLAND: high, rugged island about 5 mi. long in a NESW. direction and about half as broad; largest island of the group which forms the W. side of Errera Chan.; off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°43’S., 62°41’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named it for Madame de Rongé, a contributor to the ex- pedition. Not adopted: Cuverville Island (q.v.), Rougé Island, Rouge Island. DESOLATION HARBOR: anchorage in the SE. side of Desolation I., lying N. of Livingston I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 60°22’W. Used as an anchorage by early sealers, this feature was charted as Blythe Bay by Capt. George Powell on a map published by Laurie in 1822. The anchor- age takes its name from Desolation I., and was charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. Not adopted: Blythe Bay (q.v.). DESOLATION ISLAND: V-shaped island lying in the entrance to Blythe Bay, about 5 mi. W. of Williams Pt., Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°23’W. Disc. in January 1820 by a Br.. exp. under Bransfield, and so named by him because of the desolate appearance. DESPAIR ROCKS: group of rocks about 3 mi. S. of Melsom Rocks and some 8 mi. WSW. of Penguin Pt., the NW. tip of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°33’S., 46°12’W. Disc. and named by Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, an American sealer, and Capt. George Powell, a British sealer, during their joint cruise in December 1821. Not adopted: Rocks of Despair. DETAILLE ISLET: islet which lies close off the NW. side of Andresen I. and about 4 mi. off the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in the N. part of Lallemand Fjord; in about 66°55’S., 66°37’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who named it for Monsieur Detaille of Punta Arenas, shareholder in the Magellan Whaling Co., who assisted Charcot in obtaining supplies at the company’s whaling base at Deception Island. 106 DETROIT: for names beginning thus see under the specific part of the word. For example, for Détroit de MacFerlane see MacFerlane, Détroit de. (Détroit is a French word for “strait.’’) DETROIT PLATEAU: a major interior plateau of Palmer Pen., averaging between 5,000 and 5,500 ft. in el., whose NW. limit is marked by the S. wall of Russel Gl., in 63°43’S., 58°40’W., and extends some 120 mi. in a general SW. direction to a S. limit not precisely defined, but believed to be in about 64°50’S., 62°30’W. The plateau was seen from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight over Palmer Pen., Dec. 20, 1928. Wilkins named it Detroit Aviation Society Plateau after the society which aided in the organizing of his exp., but the US-ACAN recommends that the shortened form of the original name be used. The N. and E. sides of the plateau were charted by the FIDS in 1946-47. Not adopted: Detroit Aviation Society Plateau. DEVIL ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, with a low summit on each end, lying in the center of a small bay about 1 mi. SE. of Cape Well-met, north- ern Vega Island, S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°48’S., 57°177W. Disc. and named by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Not adopted: Djafvulson [Swedish], Teufelsinsel [Ger- man]. Devils Ballroom: see Devils Glacier. DEVILS CORRIE: large and very spectacular cirque, or corrie, midway between Olivine Pt. and Amphibolite Pt. on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°25’W. Named by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49. DEVILS GLACIER: a heavily crevassed area in the S. end of the Mohn Basin, lying to the W. and SW. of the mountain group consisting of Mounts Wisting, Hassel, Bjaaland and Prestrud, in the south polar plateau; its northern and lower end lies in about 86°30’S., 167°20’W. Disc. in Novem- ber 1911 on the journey to the South Pole by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him to describe the extremely rough sledging in that area. Not adopted: Devils Ballroom. DEVILS PEAK: conspicuous rocky peak, about 2,400 ft. in el., between Sunshine Gl. and Devils Corrie on the S. side of Coronation I., South Ork- ney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°27’W. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its proximity to Devils Corrie. DEVILS PUNCHBOWL: bowl-shaped cove (an empty cirque, the floor of which is below sea level) in the SW. corner of Granite Hbr., between Devils Ridge and the S. side of The Flatiron, in Victoria GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Land; in about 77°01’S., 162°26’E. Charted and named by the BrAE 1910-13, under Scott. Not adopted: Devil’s Punch Bowl, Punch Bowl. DEVILS RIDGE: rocky, sickle-shaped ridge, about 800 ft. in el., extending from the S. end of The Flatiron and forming the N. wall of New Gl., situated close W. of Granite Hbr. in Victoria Land; in about 77°01’S., 162°25’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Not adopted: Devil’s Ridge. DEVILS THUMB: rocky knob, about 800 ft. in el., marking the central part of Devils Ridge, situ- ated on the N. side of New Gl. close W. of Granite Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°01’S., 162°25’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Not adopted: Devil’s Thumb. DEWDROP GLACIER: small hanging glacier, discharging into the head of Devils Punchbowl between The Flatiron and Devils Ridge, at the SW. side of Granite Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°01’S., 162°24’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. DIAZ COVE: cove about 11 mi. NW. of Cape Disappointment, near the E. end of the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°45’S., 36°19’W. This cove was known to early sealers as shown by the remains of a sealing vessel found there. It was rediscovered in 1929 by Captain Johannesen and named for his ship Diaz. Not adopted: Sealer Cove. DIBBLE GLACIER: prominent channel glacier about 7 mi. wide and 35 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the continental ice close W. of a broad up- land rise in 66°20’S., and terminating in a promi- nent tongue at the E. side of Davis Bay, on Clarie Coast; in about 66°00’S., 134°50’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Jonas Dibble, ships carpenter on the sloop of war Pea- cock, and for the unsung crew members of the USEE squadron under Wilkes, 1838-42. Dibble is credited with leaving his sick bed and working 24 hours without relief with the other carpenters to repair a broken rudder on the Peacock when the ship was partially crushed in an ice bay in 151°19’E. and forced to retire northward. DIBBLE GLACIER TONGUE: prominent glacier tongue about 4 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, extending NNW. from Dibble Gl., close E. of Davis Bay, along Clarie Goast; in about 65°50’S., 134°45’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Jonas Dibble and the unsung crew members of the USEE squadron under Wilkes, 1838-42. 107 Dibdins Island: see Powell Island. DICKASON, MOUNT: mountain about 7,000 ft. in el., lying WSW. of Mt. Melbourne at the head of Boomerang Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 74°28’S., 163°40’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and named for Seaman Harry Dickason, RN, who was with the expedition. Dion Islets: see De Dion Islets. DISAPPOINTMENT, CAPE: cape which forms the S. extremity of South Georgia; in 54°53’S., 36°07’'W. First charted and so named in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who upon reaching this position was greatly disappointed in realizing that South Georgia was an island rather than a conti- nent. DISAPPOINTMENT, CAPE: cape about midway along the W. side of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°05’W. The name was originally applied to the S. end of Powell I. by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in 1821, prob- ably reflecting their reluctance to terminate their eastward cruise, necessitated by exhausted provi- sions and unfavorable winds. In recent years- the name has been consistently used for the cape on the W. side of the island. DISAPPOINTMENT, CAPE: cape which marks the tip of an ice-covered peninsula which extends about 9 mi. from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°33’S., 61°45’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE, under Nordenskjold, and so named by him because he encountered many difficult crevasses in ap- proaching the cape. It was resighted and charted by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Besvikelsens Kap [Swedish]. Discovery, Cape: see Découverte, Cape. DISCOVERY, MOUNT: conspicuous, isolated voleanic cone about 9,100 ft. in el., lying at the head of McMurdo Sound and SE. of the Koettlitz Gl., overlooking the NW. portion of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°20’S., 165°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4 under Scott, and named for the exp. ship Discovery. DISCOVERY BAY: bay about 4 mi. long and wide, indenting the NW. coast of Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 59°43’W. This bay has been known to sealers in the area since about 1822. It was charted and named during 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. DISCOVERY BLUFF: conspicuous headland, about 1,600 ft. in el., forming the W. side of the entrance to Avalanche Bay in Granite Hbr., Vic- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA toria Land; in about 77°00’S., 162°41’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who referred to this feature as Rendezvoux Bluff. It was re- named for the ship Discovery by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Rendezvoux Bluff. DISCOVERY INLET: deep re-entrant extending ESE. into Ross Ice Shelf for about 20 mi.; in about 78°20’S., 171°00’W. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, January 26, 1902, while coasting along the front of Ross Ice Shelf in the Discovery. This feature was last confirmed by USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, though the configuration of such indenta- tions is continually changing. Discovery Island: see Guépratte Island. DISCOVERY POINT: a point formed of glacial moraine, marking the W. side of the entrance to Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°29’W. The point was first surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. It appears that it was named by Discovery Investigations personnel in the period following their surveys of 1926-31, presumably for their organization or their ships, the Discovery or Discovery II, which were utilized in the surveys of South Georgia. DISCOVERY SOUND: an E.-W. trending chan- nel, about 0.5 mi. wide, separating Guépratte I. from the NE. side of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 63°01’W. The channel was disc. by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, and in 1903-5 was charted by the FrAE under Charcot. During 1927 it was explored by DI personnel on the Dis- covery who applied the name. DISMAL ISLET: islet, about 1 mi. long and 200 ft. in el., which is mainly ice covered and is the largest of the Faure Is., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°06’S., 68°50’W. The Faure Is. were disc. and first charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. The group was visited and surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS who so named this islet for its appearance of extreme desolation and lifelessness. DITTE, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,600 ft. in el., surmounting Cape Alexandra in the SE. ex- tremity of Adelaide I.; in 67°43’S., 68°37’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Alfred Ditte, noted French chemist. Not adopted: Mount A. Ditte. DIVIDE, THE: narrow isthmus joining a small peninsula to the SE. extremity of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°10’W. Charted in 1912-13 by a Nor. whaling exp. under Sgrlle. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery IT during their survey in 1933. 108 DIVIDE RIDGE: series of ice-topped peaks, the highest about 2,100 ft. in el., extending in a NW. direction for about 3 mi. from The Divide in SE. Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°13’W. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of its proximity to The Divide. DIXEY, MOUNT: mountain, about 3,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Riley Gl. and about 3.5 mi. NE. of Carse Pt., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°10’S., 68°04’°W. This mountain was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was first sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named by the members of the expedition for Neville Dixey, Chairman of Lloyd’s in 1934, who raised a special fund at Lloyd’s as a contribution towards the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37. DIXSON ISLAND: ice-covered island about 10 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, rising to about 1,100 ft. in el. at the W. side of the mouth of Ninnis Gl., along George V Coast; in about 68°08’S., 146°45’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the AAE under Maw- son, who named it for Sir Hugh Dixson, a patron of the expedition. Djdafvulsén: see Devil Island. D. M. Little Glacier: see Kelsey Glacier. Doctor Rusch Glacier: see Reusch Glacier. DODMAN ISLAND: crescent-shaped island about 4 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying in Grandi- dier Chan. about 1.5 mi. W. of Jagged I. and 10 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°57’S., 65°50’W. Probably first seen by the FrAK, 1908-10, under Charcot. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Dodson Island: see Dodson Peninsula. DODSON PENINSULA: ice-covered peninsula at the W. end of Filchner Ice Shelf, lying in front of Orville Escarpment about 35 mi. S. of Gardner Inlet, at the E. side of the base of Palmer Pen.; in about 75°46’S., 62°50’W. Disc. from the air by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it Dod- son Island, in conformity with interpretation from the air. Re-examination of the RARE photo- graphs by Ronne revealed its peninsular nature. Named for Robert H. T. Dodson, asst. geologist and surveyor with the expedition. Not adopted: Dod- son Island, Harry Dodson Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DOGS LEG FJORD: inlet about 8 mi. long in an E.-W. direction and 2 mi. wide, lying directly E. of Ridge I. and opening on Bourgeois Fjord, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°43’S., 66°50’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and so named because of its shape. Not adopted: Dog’s Leg Fiord. DOLLEMAN ISLAND: rounded, ice-covered is- land, about 13 mi. in diameter lying about 8 mi. E. of Cape Boggs, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°37’S., 60°45’W. Disc. in 1940 by members of East Base of the USAS. Named for Heinrich Dolle- man, tractor driver for the East Base. Dome, The: see McLeod Hill. DOME NUNATAK: dome-shaped nunatak, about 2,800 ft. in el., protruding above Mackay Gl., about 4 mi. WNW. of Mt. Suess, in Victoria Land; in about 77°O1’S., 162°29’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, under Scott, 1910-13. DOMINION RANGE: row of rugged peaks, some over 10,000 ft. in el., flanking the S. side of Mill Gl. and forming the polar plateau escarpment; in about 85°40’S. ,172°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE, under Shackleton, in December 1908 and named for the Dominion of New Zealand, which generously aided the expedition. DONALD NUNATAK: nunatak about 1.5 mi. N. of Gray Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 60°08’W. Donald Nunatak was charted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for Dr. C. W. Donald, ship’s doctor and naturalist on the Active, one of the vessels of the Dundee whaling exp., 1892-93. Donald Woodward Mountains: see Woodward, Mount. Donati, Isla: see Kappa Island. DON PEDRO CHRISTOPHERSEN, MOUNT: smoothly-rounded, gabled peak, about 12,800 ft. in el., standing in the Queen Maud Range and flank- ing the S. side of Axel Heiberg Gl. at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°35’S., 165°00’W. Disc. in 1911 by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, who named it for one of the chief supporters of his expedition. DOOLETTE BAY: bay lying at the W. junction of Ninnis Glacier Tongue with the land, along George V. Coast; in about 67°55’S., 147°15’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for G. P. Doolette of Perth, a patron of the expe- dition. 109 DOORLY, MOUNT: mountain about 3,500 ft. in el., which stands at the N. side of the mouth of Wright Gl. about 11 mi. WSW. of Spike Cape, in Victoria Land; in about 77°22’S., 162°50’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named for Lt. Gerald S. Doorly, RN, of the Morning, relief ship to the expedition. DORIAN BAY: cove on the NW. side of Wiencke I., about 0.75 mi. ENE. of Damoy Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°31’W. Disc. by the FrAH, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Monsieur Dorian, a member of the French Cham- ber of Deputies. DORIS BAY: small bay which is next SE. of Saint Andrews Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°27’S., 36°09’.W. The name dates back to about 1929 and is now well established in in- ternational usage. Not adopted: Little Bucht [Germany]. DORSEY ISLAND: small, rocky island lying off the W. coast of Alexander I Island in Wilkins Str.; in about 69°56’S., 72°00’W. Disc. in flights over the area in 1940 by members of East Base of the USAS. Named for Herbert G. Dorsey, Jr., of the U.S. Weather Bureau, who served as meteorologist at East Base and who devised a method of predict- ing with exceptional accuracy the periods in which weather would be suitable for flying. DOT ISLET: tiny islet lying 0.5 mi. W. of Tern It. in the S. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°21’W. First charted by Robert Cushman Murphy in 1912-13. It was surveyed in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who probably named it Dot Island because of its size and minute appear- ance when represented on charts. The name Dot Islet is approved because of the small size of the feature. Not adopted: Dot Island. DOUBLEFINGER PEAK: peak, about 3,500 ft. in el., which appears to be joined to the NE. side of Mt. Marston, in Victoria Land; in about 76°54’S., 162°17’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. A snow-filled cleft along the SE. face of the peak separates two dark, rock exposures, suggesting the origin of the name. Not adopted: Double Finger Peak. DOUBLE ISLETS: two small rocky islets, lying close E. of the tip of Zélée Glacier Tongue, about 0.4 mi. NNW. of Triple Its., off Adélie Coast; in about 66°45’S., 141°11’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted and named by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DOUBTFUL BAY: small, but deeply indented bay, which lies 1.5 mi. ENE. of Smaaland Cove and immediately W. of Rumbolds Pt. on the SE. coast of South Georgia; in 54°52’S., 36°02’W. This bay was charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, who named it for Walter Slossarczyk, third officer of the exp. ship Deutschland. Later the names Doubtful Bay and Smaaland Bay (now Smaaland Cove, q.v.) were erroneously transposed on charts of this area. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the name Slossarczyk Bay is not known locally and that this feature is best known as Doubtful Bay. Despite the undoubted priority of Filchner’s naming, the name Doubtful Bay is approved in order to conform with local usage. Not adopted: Green Bay, Slo- sarczyk Bay, Slossarczyk Bay, Smaaland Bay, Smedland Bay. Doubtful Bay: see Smaaland Cove. DOUGLAS, CAPE: rocky headland between Barne Inlet and Beaumont Bay along the W. edge of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°00’S., 160°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott in December 1902, and named for Adm. Sir Archibald Douglas, Lord of the Admiralty, who led the Admiralty to assign naval seamen to the expedition. DOUGLAS BAY: an indentation in the front of Amery Ice Shelf westward of Cape Thomas, in the SW. part of MacKenzie Bay along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°45’S., 70°30’E. Sketched from the air, Feb. 10, 1931, by the BANZARE under Mawson. Probably named for Air Pilot E. Douglas, one of the aviators on the expedition. Douglas Inlet: see New Bedford Inlet. DOUGLAS ISLANDS: group of islands about 14 mi. NW. of Cape Daly, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°20’S., 63°32’E. Disc. by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson. Lt. E. Douglas was one of the air pilots who first sighted these islands, when he explored the coast from an airplane in December 1929. DOUGLAS PEAK: peak about 5,000 ft. in el., lying about 12 mi. SSW. of Mt. Codrington, in Enderby Land; in about 66°32’S., 52°20’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and probably named for Air Pilot E. Douglas. DOUGLAS RANGE: sharp-crested range form- ing the steep E. escarpment of Alexander I Island, overlooking George VI Sound from about 69°20’S., 69°50’W. to about 70°35’S. The narrow, linear divide of the range rises majestically to about 8,000 ft. in el., surmounted by peaks which rise to 9,800 ft. The S. end of this range was photo- graphed by Lincoln Ellsworth, Nov. 23, 1935, on his 110 trans-Antarctic flight, and its N. end was seen dimly by Charcot on the Pourquoi-Pas?, Jan. 21 to 23,1909. Positive discovery, however, was made in 1936 by members of the BGLE, under Rymill, who mapped the range as a result of aerial flights and of a sledge journey to beyond 72°S. in George VI Sound. Named for V. Adm. Sir Percy Douglas, chairman of the BGLE Advisory Committee, mem- ber of the Discovery Committee from 1928 until his death in 1939, formerly Hydrographer of the British Navy, and Vice Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc. As Hydrographer, Sir Percy produced the first issue of the Antarctic Pilot in 1930. DOUGLASS, MOUNT: ice-covered mountain with several peaks rising to an estimated 1,500 ft. in el., on the SW. side of the lower part of Boyd Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°19’S., 145°17’W. Disc. in 1934 on aerial flights of the ByrdAE. Named for Malcolm C. Douglass, dog driver at West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. DOUGLAS STRAIT: strait about 2 mi. wide be- tween Thule and Cook Islands, in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°14’W. The existence of this strait was first noted by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1820. It was charted by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II and named for V. Adm. Sir Percy Douglas. DOUMER ISLAND: island, about 4.5 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, surmounted by a snow-covered pyramidal peak about 1,700 ft. in el., lying between the S. portions of Anvers I. and Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°51’S., 63°35’W. First seen by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. It was resighted and charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Paul Doumer, Pres. of the Chamber of Deputies and later Pres. of France. DOVE CHANNEL: narrow channel bisecting the Oliphant Its., trending in an EW. direction be- tween two large islets, on the N., and the main group of smaller islets and rocks, on the S., lying about 0.4 mi. S. of Gourlay Pt., the SE. tip of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°36’W. The name Dove Strait dates back to about 1930, but the generic term channel is ap- proved because of the small size of this feature. Not adopted: Dove Strait. DOVERS, CAPE: prominent cape about 5 mi. SSW. of Henderson I., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°32’S.,97°01’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named for G. Dovers, cartog- rapher at the expedition’s Western Base. Dove Strait: see Dove Channel. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DOWNSHIRE, Cape: cape about 35 mi. SSE. of Cape Adare, in the NE. part of Victoria Land; in about 71°45’S., 171°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named at the request of Cdr. Francis R. M. Crozier, after the latter’s friend, the Marquis Downshire. DOYLE POINT: point lying on the coast of En- derby Land about midway between Cape Batter- bee and Cape Borley; in about 65°45’S., 54°35’E. Disc. and named in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson. Not adopted: Stuart Doyle Point. DRAKE HEAD: headland about 5 mi. W. of Cape Kinsey, forming the W. side of the entrance to Davies Bay, on Oates Coast; in about 69°12’S., 158°35’E. Disc. by members of the Terra Nova of the BrAE, who explored along Oates Coast un- der Lt. Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, in February 1911. Named for Francis R. H. Drake, meteorologist aboard the Terra Nova. DREIKANTER HEAD: dark, triangular head- land, about 1,700 ft. in el., situated on the W. side of Granite Hbr. and separated by a small glacier from the N. side of Kar Plateau, in Victoria Land; in about 76°54’S., 162°31’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. The trian- gular appearance of the feature when viewed from the SE. suggests the name; ‘dreikantig”’ is a Ger- man word meaning ‘‘three-edged.”” Not adopted: Dreikanter. DROMEDARY, MOUNT: hump-shaped moun- tain, about 9,600 ft. in el., with two slightly ele- vated summits, standing at the NW. side of Koet- tlitz Gl., about 4 mi. ENE. of Mt. Kempe, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°21’S., 163°06’E. Charted by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, but was named by Scott’s second expedi- tion to the area, the BrAE, 1910-13. So named be- cause the overall appearance of the mountain sug- gests the hump of a dromedary. Dronning Mary Land: see Queen Mary Coast. Dronning Maud Land: see Queen Maud Land. Dronning Mauds Fjell: see Queen Maud Range. Drygalski Barrier: see Drygalski Ice Tongue. Drygalski Bay: see Drygalski Glacier. DRYGALSKI FJORD: bay about 1 mi. wide which recedes NW. about 7 mi., entered immedi- ately N. of Nattriss Head along the SE coast of South Georgia; in 54°49’S., 36°00’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner, and named for Prof. Erich von Drygalski, leader of the Ger- man Antarctic Expedition, 1901-3. 111 DRYGALSKI GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. long and 8 mi. wide, which flows in an ESE. direc- tion through a rectangular re-entrant about 15 mi. N. of Cape Fairweather, on the E. coast of:Palmer Pen.; in 64°44’S., 61°00’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE, under Nordenskjéld, and named Drygalski Bay after Prof. Erich von Drygalski. The feature was determined to be a glacier by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Drygalski Bay. Drygalski Glacier Tongue; Drygalski Tongue. see Drygalski Ice Tongue. DRYGALSKI ICE TONGUE: an ice tongue which is fed by the David and Larsen Glaciers and is about 25 mi. wide at its base along the coast of Vic- toria Land, extending E. into Ross Sea for about 38 mi.; in about 75°30’S., 164°30’E. Disc. in Jan- uary 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, who named it for Prof. Erich von Drygalski. Not adopted: Drygalski Barrier, Drygalski Glacier Tongue, Dry- galski Tongue. DRYGALSKI ISLAND: ice-capped island, about 9 mi. in diameter, with a flattened dome about 1,200 ft. in el., lying about 45 mi. off Queen Mary Coast, NNE. of Cape Filchner; in about 65°43’S., 92°42’E. Viewed from the continental coast in November 1912, by members of the Western Base of the AAE, and observed more closely from the Auwrora, in January 1914, on the homeward journey of the exp. Thought to be “Drygalski’s High Land” charted by Prof. Erich von Drygalski of the GerAE in 1902, his name was given to the island. DRYGALSKI MOUNTAINS: group of mountains in New Schwabenland, projecting through the ice- cap immediately N. of the edge of the polar pla- teau in about 72°50’S., 8°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Prof. Erich von Drygalski. DRYING POINT: point on the SW. side of Borge Bay, about 0.2 mi. NW. of Mooring Pt., on the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey of Borge Bay by DI personnel on the Discovery. Dry Valley: see Taylor Glacier Dry Valley. DUBEAU GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 9 mi. long, flowing N. from the con- tinental ice to Knox Coast, about 6 mi. W. of Snede- ker Gl.; in about 66°25’S., 106°08’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Earl P. DuBeau, photo interpreter with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in establishing astronomical GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA control stations along Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts. DUBOUZET, CAPE: the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.; in 63°16’S., 57°02’W. Named in 1838 by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who first succeeded in outlining the N. coast of Louis Philippe Penin- sula. Named by D’Urville for Lieutenant Du Bouzet of the exp. ship Zélée. The approved spell- ing form has been established by usage. Duce Bay: see Duse Bay. Du Chaylard, Ile: see Duchaylard Island. DUCHAYLARD ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, which lies in Grandidier Chan. about 1.5 mi. SE. of Vieugué I. and 11 mi. WNW. of Cape Garcia, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°43’S., 65°08’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Mon- sieur du Chaylard, French Minister Plenipotentiary at Montevideo, Uruguay. The recommended spell- ing follows that of Bongrain’s report of 1914. Not adopted: Ile du Chaylard [French]. DUCLOZ HEAD: headland which forms the NW. side of the entrance to Undine South Hbr. on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°30’S., 36°39’W. The headland was first charted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen. Named by the Br—APC, following a survey by the SGS, 1951-52, after Le Sieur Ducloz Guyot, a passenger in the Spanish vessel Leon, which resighted South Georgia in 1756. DUCORPS, CAPE: prominent bulb-shaped head- land, about 3 mi. long, joined to the coast by a narrow isthmus, lying between Capes Roquemaurel and Legoupil on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°24’S., 58°08’W. Disc. by a Fr. ‘exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for Louis Ducorps, a member of the exp. The cape was re-identified and charted by the FIDS in 1946. DUDLEY, MOUNT: mountain, more than 5,500 ft. in el., standing at the head of Neny Fjord and bounded on the N. and E. side by Neny Trough, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°16’S., 66°30’W. The W. side of this mountain was first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry- mill. It was surveyed in entirety in 1940 by the USAS. The feature was photographed from the air and ground by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Harold M. Dudley, Exec. Sec. of the American Council of Commercial Labo- ratories, Inc., Washington, D. C., who procured various types of equipment and arranged finan- cial aid for RARE. Duemler, Cape: see Robinson, Cape. 112 DUEMLER, MOUNT: mountain, about 7,300 ft. in el., rising SW. of the head of Anthony Gl., and about 11 mi. W. of Mt. Bailey, inland from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°01’S., 63°45’W. This feature was first charted by the BGLE under Ry- mill in 1936-37. It was photographed from the air by the USAS, in 1940, and the RARE under Ronne, in 1947, and recharted in 1947 by a joint sledge party consisting of members of the RARE and FIDS. Named by Ronne for R. F. Duemler, vice-pres. of the Delaware, Lackawanna and West- ern Coal Co., New York, which contributed coal to the expedition. Dufaure de Lajarte Islands: see Lajarte Islands. DUFAYEL ISLAND: island lying near the center of Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, in the South Shet- land Is.; in 62°09’S., 58°34’W. Charted and named in December 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Duffs Straits: see McFarlane Strait. DU FIEF, SIERRA: mountain range with nu- merous sharp peaks, the highest about 4,600 ft. in el., extending in a NE.-SW. direction about 4 mi., in the SW. half of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°52’S., 63°28’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99; under De Gerlache, and named by him for J. Du Fief, at that time Gen. Sec. of the Belgian Royal Geographical Society. Not adopted: Sierra du Fief. DUGDALE GLACIER: glacier descending from the high plateau of northern Victoria Land into Robertson Bay where it merges with Murray Gl. NW. of Duke of York I.; in about 71°35’S., 169°56’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Frank Dugdale, Esq., of Snitterfield, Stratford-on-Avon. DUKE ERNST BAY: bay, about 7 m. wide at the entrance and about 10 mi. long, lying between the shore of Luitpold Coast and the Filchner Ice Shelf; in about 77°50’S., 35°00’W. Disc. in 1912 by the GerAE under Filchner. Upon discovery Filchner named the bay for Capt. Richard Vahsel of the exp. ship Deutschland. He renamed it Herzog Ernst Bay after large portions of the ice shelf broke away, forming a much larger bay. , Not adopted: Hertug Ernst Bay, Herzog Ernst Bay [German], Vahsel Bay. DUKE OF YORK ISLAND: mountainous island lying in the S. part of Robertson Bay, along the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°37’S., 170°03’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for the Duke of York. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA DUMBBELL ISLET: low rocky islet lying about 1 mi. W. of Alamode I. in the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°43’S., 67°35’W. The islet was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its shape. Dumoulin, Iles; Dumoulin Islet: see Dumoulin Rock. DUMOULIN ISLETS: small group of rocky islets at the NE. end of the Géologie Arch., lying about 2.5 mi. N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°37’S., 140°04’E. A Fr. exp. under D’Urville landed on one of these islets in 1840. The islets were roughly charted by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named them after C. A. Vin- cendon-Dumoulin of the Fr. exp., who conducted observations on terrestrial magnetism in that local- ity. The group was photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and recharted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1940-51. DUMOULIN ROCK: rock about 1.5 mi. N. of Cape Leguillou, the N. tip of Tower I., lying in Bransfield Str. about 22 mi. W. of Cape Roquemaurel, Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°30’S., 59°50’W. The Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, applied the name Iles Du- moulin to what he charted as a small group of islets in this area, but in recent years usage has restricted the name Dumoulin to the single feature described. The name Dumoulin Rock is recommended because of its small size and to avoid confusion with the Dumoulin Islets off Adélie Coast. Named for C. A. Vincendon-Dumoulin, hydrographer with D’Ur- ville’s expedition. Not adopted: Dumoulin Islet, Iles Dumoulin [French]. DUMOUTIER, CAPE: point which forms the S. tip of Tower I., lying in Bransfield Str. about 23 mi. WSW. of Cape Roquemaurel, Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°35’S., 59°50’W. Named by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, for Pierre Dumoutier, a member of the expedition. DUNCAN MOUNTAINS: group of ragged foot- hills rising to peaks about 4,800 ft. in el. and lying just E. of the mouth of Liv GL. fronting on Ross Ice Shelf for a distance of about 18 mi.; centering in about 85°S., 166°W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in No- vember 1929. Named by Byrd for James Duncan, Manager of Tapley, Ltd., shipping agents for the Byrd expedition at Dunedin, New Zealand. Not adopted: James Duncan Mountains. DUNDAS, CAPE: easternmost point of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°24’W. Sighted on Jan. 12, 1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, who named it in honor of the illustrious Dundas family. 113 DUNDEE ISLAND: ice-covered island lying E. of the NE. tip of Palmer Pen. and S. of Joinville 1.; in 63°30’S., 55°55’W. Disc. and named on Jan. 8, 1893, by Capt. Thomas Robertson of the Active for the home port, Dundee, Scotland, from whence the ship sailed in company with three other vessels in search of whales. DUNLOP, CAPE: rocky headland about 13 mi. SSE. of Cape Roberts, on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°12’S., 163°25’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named this feature Rocky Point. It has since taken its name from Dunlop Island, situated just off this point and named for H. J. L. Dunlop, chief engineer of the exp. ship Nimrod. Not adopted: Dunlop Point, Rocky Point. DUNLOP ISLAND: triangular-shaped island, about 1 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, which lies along the Wilson Piedmont Gl. of Victoria Land, close NE. of Cape Dunlop; in about 77°12’S., 163°27’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackle- ton, who named it for H. J. L. Dunlop, chief engi- neer of the exp. ship Nimrod. Not adopted: Ter- race Island. DURHAM, MOUNT: small mountain about 1,800 ft. in el., which forms a N. projection of the Tapley Mtns., in the Queen Maud Range, standing at the junction of Robert Scott and Leverett Glaciers with the head of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°32’S., 151°15’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Blackburn, and named for Durham, N.H., the seat of the University of New Hampshire and home of Stuart D. L. Paine, a mem- ber of that party. DURHAM POINT: the northernmost exposed rock outcrop of Mt. Durham, lying at about 1,100 ft. in el. at the NW. end of the Tapley Mtns., at the junction of Robert Scott and Leverett Glaciers with the head of the Ross Ice Shelf, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°31’S., 151°15’W. Disc. in De- cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and so named because of its close association with Mt. Durham. DURNFORD BLUFF: rounded bluff about 7,020 ft. in el., standing behind Cape Douglas on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°56’S., 159°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Adm. Sir John Durnford, a Junior Naval Lord, 1901-4. DUROCH ISLETS: group of islets and rocks which extend over an area of about 3 mi. centering about 1 mi. NW. of Cape Legoupil, off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°19’S., 57°53’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, who GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA named features within the group Duroch Rock and Coupvent Rock. The FIDS, who charted the islets in 1946, found that the group could not satisfac- torily be divided into two parts and that individual islet names were unnecessary. The present de- scription is in accord with the FIDS that the name Duroch include the entire group of islets. Named for Ensign Joseph Duroch of D’Urville’s ship, the Astrolabe. Not adopted: Duroch Rock, Durock Rock. Duroch Rock; Durock Rock: see Duroch Islets. D’URSEL, CAPE: cape which marks the S. side of the entrance to Buls Bay, which indents the center of the E. coast of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°21’S., 62°08’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for Count Hippolyte d’Ursel, a supporter of the expedition. Not adopted: Cape d’Ursel. D’URVILLE, MOUNT: mountain about 3,500 ft. in el., which lies about 7 mi. S. of Cape Ducorps and some 20 mi. ENE. of Cape Roquemaurel, on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°31’S., 58°11’W. Disc. by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, and named for the exp. leader, Capt. (later Adm.) Dumont D’Urville. Not adopted: Mount d’Urville. D’URVILLE ISLAND: northernmost island of the Joinville I. group, about 13 mi. long, lying immediately N. of Joinville I., from which it is separated by Larsen Chan.; in 63°05’S., 56°20’W. Charted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Norden- skjold, who named it after Capt. Dumont D’Urville, French explorer who disc. land in the Joinville I. group. D’URVILLE MONUMENT: conspicuous conical summit about 1,900 ft. in el., at the SW. end of Joinville I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25’S., 56°18’W. Disc. by a Br. exp., 1839-43, under Ross, and named by him for Capt. Dumont D’Urville. Not adopted: d’Urville Monument, D’Urville’s Monument. D’URVILLE WALL: great glacier-cut wall of granite several thousand feet high, which forms the N. wall of David G1., in Victoria Land; in about 75°18’/S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Capt. Dumont D’Urville. DUSE, MOUNT: conspicuous mountain, about 1,700 ft. in el., surmounting King Edward Pt. on the W. side of Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°29’W. Charted in 1902 by Lt. Samuel A. Duse, cartographer of the SwedAE, 1901-4, for whom it is named. 114 DUSE BAY: bay indenting the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen. between View Pt. and the SW. end of Tabarin Pen.; in 63°35’S., 57°15’W. Disc. by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson, of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Named by Nordenskjold, leader of the SwedAE, for Lt. Samuel A. Duse. Not adopted: Duce Bay, Duses Bukt [Swedish]. DUSEBERG, CAPE: cape surmounted by a con- spicuous rocky cone, about 1,500 ft. in el., lying at the SW. side of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°11’S., 64°08’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Ger- lache. Duses Bukt: see Duse Bay. DUSTIN ISLAND: the larger and more southern of the two Fletcher Is., lying near the W. end of Bellingshausen Sea, about 35 mi. ESE. of Cape Palmer, off Eights Coast; in about 172°05’S., 95°05’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Feb. 27, 1940. Named by R. Adm. Byrd for Frederick G. Dustin, member of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and mechanic with the USAS, 1939-41. DUTHOIT POINT: point which forms the SE. tip of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°18’S., 58°50’W. The name is used on a chart based upon a 1935 survey of these islands by DI personnel on the Discovery II. DYER PLATEAU: broad upland with elevations ranging between 6,500 and 9,000 ft., bounded on the W. by George VI Sound, on the E. by Mt. Wakefield, the Eternity Mtns. and Mt. Andrew Jackson, on the N. by Fleming Gl., and with a southern boundary not as yet determined; center- ing in about 70°45’S., 65°30’W. The plateau was explored on land and photographed, from the air by the USAS, 1939-41, and named for J. Glenn Dyer, surveyor with the then General Land Office, Dept. of Interior, and leader of the USAS party which sledged from the mouth of Fleming Gl. SW. across the plateau to the Eternity Mountains. DYNAMITE ISLET: small, low, rocky islet in Back Bay, lying 0.1 mi. E. of Stonington I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41, who referred to it as Petrel Island, a name not approved because it duplicates an existing name in the Antarctic. The name Dynamite Islet was proposed by Finn Ronne, leader of RARE, 1947-48. In 1947 it was necessary to dynamite a passage for the Port of Beaumont, Texas through the ice to the E. of this islet. Not adopted: Petrel Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA EADIE ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, which lies between Aspland and O’Brien Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in 61°31’S., 55°57’W. The island was charted in February 1821 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen. He left it unnamed but gave the name “Ostrova Tri Brata” (Three Brothers Islands) for the present Aspland, Eadie and O’Brien Islands. Eadie Island was named by Lt. L. C. Hill, RNR, captain of the Discovery II, which engaged in survey work in the area in 1936- 37, for the dockyard manager of the Melbourne Harbour Trust of Williamstown, Australia. EAGLE COVE: small cove immediately W. of Seal Pt. in the E. portion of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 57°00’W. Disc. by J. Gunnar Andersson’s party of the SwedAE, 1901-4, who wintered at Hope Bay in 1903. Named by the FIDS after the ship Eagle, which partici- pated in the establishment of the FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1945. EAGLE ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, with an el. of 1,800 ft. on the NE. side. It is the largest island in the archipelago which lies between Louis Philippe Pen. and Vega I., in 63°40’S., 57°29’W. Probably first seen by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Eagle Island was charted in 1945 by the FIDS and named after the ship Eagle. Easson, Cape: see Little, Cape. EAST BALCH GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi. long, lying SW. of East Gould Gl. on Palmer Pen. and flowing SE. into Mill Inlet; in 66°51’S., 64°45’W. This glacier together with West Balch Gl., to the W., fills a transverse depression across Palmer Pen. It was charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by FIDS, like its counterpart, for Edwin Swift Balch, American Antarctic historian. Not adopted: Martin Glacier. EAST BAY: bay, about 0.5 mi. wide and indent- ing 0.25 mi., lying east of South Bay in Prince Olav Hbr., South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. The name, which is descriptive of its position, was given -by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, which visited South Georgia in 1921-22. East Bay; East Cumberland Bay: see Cumber- land East Bay. EAST CAPE: cape about 1 mi. E. of Cape Ben- nett on the NE. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°13’W. First explored by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Pal- 115 mer in December 1821, and roughly charted during 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling cap- tain. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted the South Orkney Is. in 1933. It is the easternmost cape on the N. coast of Coronation Island. East Fork: see Ferrar Glacier. EAST GOULD GLACIER: glacier, about 13 mi. long, lying W. of Aagaard Gl. and flowing SE. into Mill Inlet on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°47’S., 64°38’W. This glacier together with West Gould Gl., to the W., fills a transverse depression across Palmer Pen. It was charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by FIDS, like its counterpart, for Lt. Cdr. Rupert T. Gould, British polar historian and cartographer. Not adopted: Shelby Glacier. EAST MELCHIOR ISLANDS: a group of small ice-covered islands and rocks which lie E. of The Sound in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°55’W. The islands W. of The Sound are called West Melchior Islands. The name was probably given by DI personnel who roughiy charted these islands in 1927. The islands were surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. EAST POINT: bluff forming the E. end of Deso- lation I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°21’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. EAST RUSSELL GLACIER: glacier, about 6 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, which lies at the N. end of Detroit Plateau and flows from Mt. Canicula east- ward into Prince Gustav Channel on the E. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 58°17’W. This glacier together with West Russell Glacier, which flows westward into Bone Cove on the W. side of Louis Philippe Pen., form a through glacier across the N. part of Palmer Pen. It was first surveyed in 1946 by the FIDS. Named by the Br-APC for V. I. Russell, surveyor and leader of the FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1946. EAST SKERRY: small group of islets and rocks, forming the E. part of Skrap Skerries, about 2.3 mi. NW. of Cape George, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°19’W. The name was applied in the period 1926-30, by DI personnel who charted these islets. Not’ adopted: East Skrap- skjar. East Skrapskjar: see East Skerry. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA EAST STACK: rock outcrop, about 300 ft. in el., on the E. side of an ice-covered promontory on Kemp Coast that lies about 25 mi. SE. of the entrance to Edward VIII Bay; in about 67°04’S., 58°15’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, February 1936. Not adopted: Austskotet [Norwegian]. Ebba Glacier: see Liotard Glacier. EBONY WALL: dark, nearly vertical rock wall, about 1,000 ft. in el., standing at the head of a large glacier which flows northward along the E. side of the Ivory Pinnacles. The wall is about 2 mi. long and forms a part of the W. escarpment of Detroit Plateau near the base of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°53’S., 59°04’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS who gave this descriptive name. ECHO MOUNTAIN: conspicuous mountain, about 2,600 ft. in el., standing on the W. side of Laws Gl., about 2.7 mi. NNW. of Cape Vik, Corona- tion I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 45°42’W. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the remarkable echoing noted in this part of Laws Glacier. ECHO PASS: pass, about 1,100 ft. in el., lying 1.5 mi. SW. of Grytviken, South Georgia, in the chain of mountains which extend SW. from Mt. Hodges; in 54°17’S., 36°33’W. The pass provides a ski route from the whaling station at Grytviken to the head of Cumberland West Bay. The name is used on the chart of a Ger. exp., 1928-29, under Kohl-Larsen, who states that the name was already in use by whalers. Not adopted: Echopass, Echo- Pass. EDDYSTONE ROCKS: chain of rocks extending in a NE.-SW. direction for about 3 mi., lying about 5 mi. W. of Start Pt., Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°33’S., 61°23’W. The name dates back to about 1822 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Eddystone. EDEN GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long, which flows in a southerly direction into the head of Cabinet Inlet, close NW. of Lyttelton Ridge, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°15’S., 63°14’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Rt. Hon. Robert Anthony Eden, M.P., then British Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs and member of the War Cabinet. EDGELL, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft. in el., surmounting Cape Jeremy, the E. side of the N. entrance to George VI Sound, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°26’S., 68°16’W. Disc. by 116 the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Seen from a great distance and thought to be an island, it was named Ile Gordon Bennett for James Gordon Ben- nett, 1841-1918, of the New York Herald, who gave financial aid to the expedition. The BGLE under Rymill, surveying this area in 1936-37 and finding no island, applied the name Mount Edgell to the feature now recognized as Charcot’s Ile Gordon Bennett. The name Mount Edgell, after Sir John Augustine Edgell, Hydrographer of the British Navy, 1932-45, has since become established through international usage. Not adopted: [le Gordon Bennett [French]. EDGELL BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. long and wide indenting the NE. side of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°15’S., 58°57’W. This bay ap- pears in rough outline on Powell’s chart of the South Shetland Is. published in 1822. It was charted during 1934-35 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for V. Adm. Sir John Augustine Edgell. EDISTO CHANNEL: channel, filled in January 1948 by Edisto Ice Tongue at its S. end, which ex- tends in a NE.-SW. direction between the Taylor Its. and the NW. islands of the Highjump Arch., on the W. and the Bunger Hills, Thomas I., and the remaining islands in the Highjump Arch. on the E., lying off the W. end of Knox Coast; in about 66°05’S., 100°48’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for the U.S.S. Edisto, one of the two icebreakers of USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, which assisted in establishing astronomical control sta- tions along Wilhelm II, Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts. EDISTO ICE TONGUE: an ice tongue about 5 mi. wide, forming an extension of Apfel Gl. and part of the main flow of Scott Gl., lying at the W. and NW. sides of the Bunger Hills and terminat- ing in Edisto Chan, against the W. side of Thomas I., off the W. end of Knox Coast; in about 66°10’S., 100°40’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN because of its close association with Edisto Channel. EDISTO ROCK: low rock 1.2 mi. SW. of the W. tip of Neny I., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°13’S., 67°08’W. Sur- veyed in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for the U.S.S. Edisto, icebreaker with USN Op. Wml., which visited Marguerite Bay in February 1948 and as- sisted in the relief of the RARE and FIDS parties on Stonington Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA EDITH RONNE LAND: that portion of Ant- arctica extending from the base of Palmer Pen. southeastward to Coats Land. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Cdr. Finn Ronne, USNR, in the flight to the base of Palmer Pen. and along Filchner Ice Shelf. Named for Edith Ronne, wife of Cdr. Ronne, who made important contributions to the planning, organization, and operation of the exp., who was the recorder of the exp., and who served as observer at the base while the exp. was in the field. EDRED, MOUNT: prominent ice-covered moun- tain, about 7,200 ft. in el., standing about 10 mi. inland from George VI Sound and marking the S. limit of the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island; in 70°35’S., 69°00’W. This mountain was first pho- tographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lin- coln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photo- graphs by W.L.G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and was resur- veyed in 1949 by the FIDS. Named by FIDS after Edred, Saxon king of England, 946-955. Edsel Ford Mountains: see Edsel Ford Ranges. EDSEL FORD RANGES: the mountain groups and ranges lying E. of Sulzberger Bay and Paul Block Bay in the NW. part of Marie Byrd Land; the known mountains in this group center in about 77°00’S., 145°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, Dec. 5, 1929, and named by Byrd for Edsel Ford of the Ford Motor Co., who helped finance the expedition. Not adopted: Edsel Ford Mountains, Edsel Ford Range, Ford Range. Edvind Astrup, Cap: see Astrup, Cape. EDWARD, MOUNT: highest summit in the Sweeney Mtns., lying in the center of the group which rises above the Joerg Plateau; in about 75°48’S., 67°40’'W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Cdr. Edward C. Sweeney, USNR, a contributor to the expedition. Edward Cove: see King Edward Cove. EDWARD VIII BAY: bay about 12 mi. wide at its entrance, lying between Kemp Coast and En- derby Land; in about 66°50’S., 57°20’E. Disc. in 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and named for Edward VIII, King of England. Not adopted: King Edward VIII Gulf. EDWARD VII PENINSULA: peninsula extending NW. from Marie Byrd Land into Ross Sea between Sulzberger Bay and the NE. corner of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 77°45’S., 156°W. Disc. on Jan 30, 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, who named it King Edward VII Land for the King of England. Its peninsular character was determined by ex- 117 ploration conducted by the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and the USAS, 1939-41. Not adopted: King Edward VII Land, King Edward VII Peninsula, Kong Ed- ward VII Land [Norwegian], Konig Edward VII Land [German]. Edwards Point: see King Edward Point. EDWARDS POINT: point which marks the S. end of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 59°30’W. Charted in 1935 by DI person- nel on the Discovery II, but the name appears to be first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon this survey. E. Fournier, Baie: see Fournier Bay. EGBERT, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered moun- tain, about 9,500 ft. in el., standing 8 mi. SSE. of Mt. Stephenson in the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island; in 69°57’S., 69°37’W. Possibly first seen in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, but not recog- nized as a part of Alexander IIsland. Surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named the mountain after Egbert, Saxon king of England, 802-839. EGEBERG GLACIER: glacier which lies between Dugdale and Scott Keltie Glaciers and descends steeply into the W. part of Robertson Bay; in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°33’S., 169°52’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Consul Westye Egeberg, of Christiania (now Oslo), Norway. Not adopted: Westye Egeberg Glacier. EGERTON, MOUNT: peak about 7,660 ft. in el., stands about 10 mi. S. of Mt. Hamilton and about 25 mi. WNW. of Cape Douglas, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°50’S., 158°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Adm. Sir George le Clerc Egerton, a member of the Arctic Expedition 1875-76, and one of Scott’s advisers for the BrNAE. EGG ISLAND: circular island about 1.5 mi. in diameter and about 1,500 ft. in el., lying 1 mi. W. of Tail I. in the NE. part of Prince Gustav Chan.; in 63°41’S., 57°42’W. Probably first seen by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. It was charted in 1945 by the FIDS, who named it because of its relative position to Tail, Eagle and Beak Islands. EFielson, Cape: see Boggs, Cape. EIELSON PENINSULA: rugged, mainly snow- covered peninsula, about 20 mi. long in an E.-W. direction and averaging about 10 mi. wide, lying between Smith Inlet and Lehrke Inlet on the E. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°35’S., 61°45’W. The rocky N. wall of this peninsula is probably the fea- ture which, on his flight on Dec. 20, 1928, Sir Hubert Wilkins sighted and named ‘“‘Cape Eielson” from a position above Stefansson Str. (Wilkins gave the name to the farthest S. rock outcrop seen from this position.) This rock wall is conspicuous in the aerial photographs of the peninsula taken by members of the USAS in 1940 from an aerial posi- tion at the N. side of Stefansson Strait. The pen- insula is named for Carl B. Hielson, pilot on Wil- kins’ flight of 1928. Eigg Rock: see Nigg Rock. EIGHTS COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica along the S. shore of Bellingshausen Sea, extending from about 88°00’W., to Cape Fly- ing Fish, in about 100°50’W. Named by the US-— SCAN for James Eights of Albany, N. Y., geologist on the Annawan in 1830, who carried on geologic investigations in the South Shetland Is., and who cruised westward on the Annawan, in company with the Penguin, to 103°W. Eights, the earliest American scientist in the Antarctic, discovered the first known fossils in the Antarctic region, a tree section, in the South Shetland Islands. As a re- sult of these investigations Eights, in 1833, pub- lished in the Transactions of the Albany Institute (Vol. 2), what have proved to be remarkably ac- curate observations and conclusions on the natural phenomena of the region. Not adopted: Robert English Coast (western part), Walgreen Coast (eastern part). Eights Peninsula: see Thurston Peninsula. EILLIUM ISLAND: small island about 1.2 mi. NW. of Route Pt., off the NW. tip of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°51’W. Prob- ably first seen by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in 1821. It was charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Dr. William S. Bruce, who named it for his son Eillium. Not adopted: Eillum Island. Eillum Island: see Eillium Island. Einstodingane: see Stanton Group. EKBLAW, MOUNT: easternmost mountain of the Clark Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°18’S., 141°40’W. Disc. on aerial flights from the West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for Prof. W. E. Ekblaw, Prof. of Geography at Clark Univ. and a member of the Crocker Land Expedition in the Arctic, 1913-17. 118 EKELOF POINT: high rocky point which lies 5 mi. SW. of Cape Gage and marks the N. side of the entrance to Markham Bay on the E. coast of James Ross I.; in 64°14’S.,57°12’W. First seen and surveyed by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, who named it Cape Ekelof after Dr. Eric Ekelof, medical officer of the expedition. It was surveyed by the FIDS in 1953. Point is considered a more suitable descriptive term for this feature than cape. Not adopted: Cape Ekelof, Cape Ekel6f. EKLUND ISLANDS: group of islands which rise through the ice near the SW. end of George VI Sound; in 73°16’S., 71°45’W. The largest island, about 5 mi. in extent and 1,300 ft. in el., was disc. in December 1940 by Finn Ronne and Carl R. Eklund of the USAS during their 1,097-mile sledge journey S. from Stonington I. to the SW. part of George VI Sound and return. At that time this large island, named by Ronne for Eklund, ornithol- ogist and assistant biologist of the exp., was the only land protruding above an area of hummocky ice. V. E. Fuchs and R. J. Adie of the FIDS sledged to the SW. part of George VI Sound in 1949, at which time, because of a recession of the ice in the sound, they were able to determine that the island disc. by Ronne and Eklund is the largest of a group of mainly ice-covered islands. On the basis of original discovery, the US-ACAN recom- mends that the name Eklund be applied to the island group rather than the single island disc. by Ronne and Eklund. ELAND MOUNTAINS: range of mountains which rise to above 8,000 ft. in el. and extend about 20 mi. in a NE._SW. direction along the S. side of Clifford Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°35’S., 63°10’W. These mountains were disc. in 1936 by the BGLE, and they appear in aerial photographs taken by the USAS in September 1940. During 1947 the range was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. The name Eland, Lady Clifford’s maiden name, was given by Sir Miles Clifford, Gov. of the Falkland Islands, at the request of members of the FIDS staff. Elefanten-Bucht: see Elephant Bay. Elefant Oya: see Elephant Island. ELEPHANT BAY: small circular bay lying mid- way between Cape Demidov and.Klutschak Pt. along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 37°44’W. The name, which was probably applied by early sealers at South Georgia, was recorded on the chart of the Ger. exp. under Kohl-Larsen, 1928-29, and the chart by DI GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA personnel who mapped South Georgia in this pe- riod. Not adopted: Elefanten-Bucht [German]. Elephant Bay Islands: see Anvil Stacks. ELEPHANT FLATS: a tidal inlet in the inner, southwestern corner of Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. It is enclosed by an old moraine whith dries at low water, leaving a lagoon with gently sloping mud banks. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. So named by the Br-APC be- cause elephant seals frequent the mud flats. ELEPHANT ISLAND: island about 28 mi. long and about 15 mi. wide, lying in the E. part of the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°10’S., 55°14’W. The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Barrows Isle, Elefant Oya [Norwegian], Mordrins Island. ELEPHANT LAGOON: lagoon, about 0.3 mi. long, situated close S. of Cook Bay to which it is connected by Carl Passage, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°08’W. Probably named by DI personnel who charted the area during the pe- riod 1926-30. ELEPHANT POINT: point which marks the S. end of the peninsula separating False and South Bays, on the S. coast of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°43’S., 60°27’W. The name dates back to at least 1930 and is now established in in- ternational usage. Elisabeth, Mount: see Elizabeth, Mount. ELIZABETH, MOUNT: mountain about 10,760 ft. in el. in the Queen Alexandra Range, rising SW. of Mt. Anne and Socks Gl. and W. of Beardmore Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°58’S., 168°10’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. Not adopted: Mount Elisabeth. ELIZA CONE: a pierced rock about 220 ft. in el., lying about 1 mi. W. of Cape McNab, the S. tip of Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°49’S., 163°10’E. Located adjacent to Scott Cone, the two features appear to have been named after John Balleny’s schooner, the Eliza Scott, in which he disc. the Balleny Is. in February 1839. ELLEFSEN HARBOR: harbor lying at the S. end of Powell I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°03’W. Disc. in the course of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. The name first appears on Powell’s chart published in 1822. Not adopted: Ellessen Harbour. Ellessen Harbour: see Ellefsen Harbor. 119 ELLIOT, MOUNT: prominent peak lying NW. of the Admiralty Range and S. of Yule Bay, in north- ern Victoria Land; in about 70°50’S., 166°35’E. Disc. in February 1841 by a Br. exp. under, Ross, who named it for R. Adm. the Hon. George Elliot, commander-in-chief at the Cape of Good Hope station. Not adopted: Mount Elliott. ELLIOTT, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the seaward extremity of Knox Coast, lying about 5 mi. E. of the E. flank of Tracy Gl.; in about 65°57’S., 102°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for J. L. Elliott, chaplain on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Elliott, Mount: see Elliot, Mount. ELLIOTT, MOUNT: conspicuous mountain, about 4,200 ft. in el., with a few small rock expo- sures and ice-free cliffs on the SE. side, about 16 mi. NW. of Cape Sobral, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°25’S., 60°06’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS and named for F. K. Elliott, leader of the FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1947-48. ELLIOTT GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the conti- nental ice to Budd Coast, midway between Cape Hammersly and Cape Waldron; in about 66°05’S., 115°50’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Samuel Elliott, midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. ELLIS FJORD: narrow inlet about 18 mi. long, indenting the highest portion of the Vestfold Hills, between Breidnes Pen. and a small peninsula to the S., along Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°38’S., 78°05’E. Charted as an elongated rem- nant lake called ‘“Langevatnet” by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen- sen. This feature was determined to open onto Prydz Bay by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, and renamed Ellis Fjord, for Edwin E. Ellis, who served as aerial photographer on USN Op. Hjp. flights in this area and other areas visited by the western task group. Not adopted: Langevatnet [Norwegian]. ELLSWORTH, CAPE: rocky bluff, about 950 ft. in el., forming the N. end of Young I., in the Bal- leny Is.; in about 66°14’S., 162°15’E. The Dis- covery II, in 1936, after rescuing Lincoln Ellsworth, made a running survey around the N. end of the Balleny Is. on the way back to Australia. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ELLSWORTH, MOUNT: culminating summit of an elongated massif between Isaiah Bowman Gl. and Amundsen GIl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°45’S., 160°15’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on the South Polar Flight of November 1929. Named by Byrd for Lincoln Ellsworth, American Antarctic explorer. Not adopted: Mount Lincoln Ellsworth. ELLSWORTH HIGHLAND: that part of Ant- arctica comprising a belt of high land extending SSW. from the base of Palmer Pen. to the Rocke- feller Plateau. Traversed by Lincoln Ellsworth on an airplane flight during November—December 1935, and named by him at that time for his father, James W. Ellsworth. Pending more definitive mapping which may make it possible to draw boundaries along lines of natural demarcation, the E. boundary is arbitrarily placed at the base of Palmer Pen. where the configuration of the coast hints that such a physical boundary might ulti- mately be found to lie. Not adopted: James W. Ellsworth Land. Elsa Bay; Else Cove; Else’s Hole; Elsie Harbour: see Elsehul. ELSEHUL: bay about 0.5 mi. wide, entered W. of Cape Pride, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°59’W. The name dates back to the period 1905-12, and was probably applied by Nor- wegian sealers and whalers working in the area. Not adopted: Elsa Bay, Else Cove, Else’s Hole, Elsie Harbour. EMBASSY ROCK: small prominent rock, the southwesternmost of the De Dion Its., situated about 1 mi. SW. of Courtier Its. in Marguerite Bay, off the coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°54’S., 68°45’W. The De Dion Its. were first sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Em- bassy Rock was surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its detached position in asso- ciation with Emperor Islet. EMILY, MOUNT: peak, about 10,000 ft. in el., lying about 20 mi. SE of Mt. Ward, in the Dominion Range; in about 85°48’S., 172°30’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for his wife, Lady Emily Dorman Shackleton. Em Island: see Grassholm. EMM ROCK: conspicuous rock about 130 ft. in el., marking the E. side of the approach to Collins Hbr., King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°15’S., 58°41’W. This rock, presumably known to early sealers in the area, was sketched by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and charted by DI 120 personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. The name derives from the shape of the rock, which resembles the letter M. EMMA ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long with bare jagged peaks projecting through an icecap, lying midway between Cape Anna and Delaite I. in the SW. half of the entrance to Wilhelmina Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 64°32’S., 62°16’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named it for his mother. Emmons, Point: see Wild, Cape. EMORY LAND BAY: ice-filled bay, about 15 mi. wide and 15 mi. long, fed by Emory Land Gl. which descends into it on both sides of Mt. McCoy, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°30’S., 141°00’W. Disc. by the USAS, 1939-41. The bay takes its name from Emory Land Glacier. EMORY LAND GLACIER: heavily-crevassed gla- cier descending into Emory Land Bay on both sides of Mt. McCoy, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°35’S., 141°00’W. Named in honor of R. Adm. Emory S. Land, Chairman of the United States Maritime Commission. EMPEREUR ISLET: low rocky islet about 1 mi. N. of Cape Margerie, lying immediately N. of Manchot It. in the entrance to Port Martin, off Adélie Coast; in 66°48’S., 141°24’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because the first emperor penguin captured by the exp. was taken on this islet. EMPEROR ISLET: islet close NE. of the Courtier Its. in the De Dion Its. group, lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 68°43’W. It is largest of the De Dion Its., rising to 150 ft. in el., and has a N.-S. trending, narrow, sloping cleft which almost divides the islet in two. The islets in this group were disc. and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. This islet was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so named by them because a low rock and shingle isthmus at the SE. end of the islet is the winter breeding site of emperor penguins. Emperor William Peak: see Big Ben. ENDERBY LAND: projecting land mass of Antarctica, extending from 45°00’E. to Edward VIII Bay, the mouth of which lies in about 66°50’S., 57°20’K. Disc. in 1831 by a Br. exp. under Biscoe, who was sent out by the firm of Enderby Brothers of London, organizers of early Antarctic explora- tion. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ENDRESEN ISLANDS: two small offshore islands, the highest about 200 ft. in el., lying just N. of the Kringholm Is., off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°16’S., 60°05’E. Dis. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936. ENGEL PEAKS: a series of aligned peaks, the highest about 4,800 ft. in el., extending in a NNW.— SSE. direction for about 4 mi., standing about 15 mi. W. of Cape Rymill on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°31’S., 63°08’W. This feature was pho- tographed from the air in 1928 by Sir Hubert Wilkins, and again in 1940 by members of the USAS who also sledge surveyed along this coast. It was resighted by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for Bud Engel, pres. of the Albert Richard Division of the Oster- man Co., Milwaukee, who contributed garments suitable for winter use to the expedition. ENGELSTAD, MOUNT: rounded summit about 11,000 ft. in el., rising from the edge of the polar plateau at the head of Axel Heiberg Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°35’S., 167°20’W. Disc. in November 1911 by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Capt. Ole Engel- stad of the Norwegian Navy who was to be second- in-command of the exp. ship Fram, but who was killed prior to departure of the expedition. Ap- parently an error in the position of Mount Engel- stad and Mount Wilhelm Christophersen on the map in Amundsen’s book, Sydpolen, gave rise to transposition in subsequent cartographic applica- tion of these names. The US-ACAN application of these names is based on an analysis of Amundsen’s narrative. Not adopted: Mount Ole Engelstad, Mount Englestat, Mount Wilhelm Christophersen (q.v.), Mount W. Christopherson. ENGLAND, MOUNT: conical-topped mountain, about 4,700 ft. in el., situated immediately S. of New Gl. in the NE. part of Gonville and Caius Range, in Victoria Land; in about 177°12’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Lt. Rupert England, RN, of the Morning, relief ship to the expedition. Englestat, Mount: see Engelstad, Mount; Wil- helm Christophersen, Mount. English, Mount: see Mooney, Mount. ENGLISH STRAIT: strait lying between Green- wich and Robert Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 59°40’W. The name dates back to at least 1822 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Détroit Anglais [French], Spencers Straits. 424589 O -57 -9 121 ENTEN BAY: small bay lying SW. of Jason Hbr. in the W. side of Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°13’S., 36°37’W. The name “Enten- bucht” (Duck Bay) seems to have been first used on a 1907 chart of Cumberland Bay by Dr. A. Szielasko, physician and ornithologist on the Nor- wegian whaler Fridtjof Nansen, who published an account of his natural history observations made at Cumberland Bay during the previous year. ENTRANCE POINT: point marking the S. side of Neptunes Bellows, the entrance to Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°33’W. Deception I. was known to sealers in the area as early as 1821. The point was named by the Hydrographic Dept. of the British Admiralty fol- lowing a survey by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, in 1948-49. EOSIN HILL: hill, about 300 ft. in el., rising 0.5 mi. SE. of Dartmouth Pt. in Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°26’W. Roughly surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden- skjold. Named by the FIDS following their sketch survey in 1951. The name is one of a group in the vicinity of Dartmouth Pt., derived from the chemi- cal stains used in the preparation for histological examination of biological material collected there by FIDS. EPHRAIM, MOUNT: high bluff at the S. end of Greenwich I., overlooking the S. entrance to McFarlane Str., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°34°S., 59°42’W. The name has been in use since at least 1930 and is now established in inter- national usage. Epsilon, Isla: see Epsilon Island. EPSILON ISLAND: small islet lying between Alpha I and the S. extremity of Lambda I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W. The islet was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1927. The name, derived from the fifth letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following sur- veys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Isla Epsilon [Spanish]. EREBUS, MOUNT: an active volcano about 13,200 ft. in el., which forms the summit of Ross I. at the SW. corner of Ross Sea; in about 77°35’S., 167°10’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for his ship, the Erebus. EREBUS AND TERROR GULF: gulf on the SE. side of the NE. tip of Palmer Pen., bordered on the NE. by the Joinville I. group and on the SW. by the James Ross I. group; in about 63°50’S., 56°40’W. Named by a Br. exp. under Ross for the exp. ships GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Erebus and Terror, used in exploring these waters in 1842-43. EREBUS BAY: bay about 12 mi. wide; lies between Cape Evans and Hut Point Pen., Ross I.; in about 77°44’S., 166°35’E. First explored by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. The name was ap- plied by Scott’s second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13, which built its headquarters on Cape Evans. The bay was probably so named because it is dominated by Mt. Erebus. Erebus Bay: see South Bay. Ernest Gruening, Mount: see Andrew Jackson, Mount. Ernst Bay: see Duke Ernst Bay. E. Rouz, Cap: see Roux, Cape. ERRERA, CAPE: cape which forms the SW. end of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°55’S., 63°36’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for Léo Errera, Paul Errera, and Madame M. Errera, contributors to the expedition. ERRERA CHANNEL: channel between the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and De Rongé I.; in about 64°43’S., 62°36’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named this feature for Léo Errera, prof. at the Univ. of Brussels and a member of the Belgica Commission. ESBENSEN BAY: small bay lying 2 mi. WSW. of Nattriss Head, along the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°52’S., 36°00’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner, and named for Capt. V. Esbensen, manager of the Cia. Argentina de Pesca whaling station at Grytviken. Not adopted: Espensen Bucht [German]. Eskers: see Strand Moraines, The. Espensen Bucht: see Esbensen Bay. ETA ISLAND: island, about 2 mi. long, which lies immediately N. of Omega I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°55’W. This island, the largest feature in the NE. part of the Melchior Is., is part of what was called “Ile Melchior” by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, but the name Melchior now applies for the whole island group. Eta Island was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1927. The name Eta, derived from the seventh letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Isla Piedrabuena [Spanish]. 122 ETERNITY MOUNTAINS: massif surmounted by three prominent peaks, the highest about 12,000 ft. in el., extending about 18 mi. in a general N.-S. direction and standing S. of Elant Mtns. on Palmer Pen.; in about 70°57’S., 63°35’W. These mountains were probably seen from the air by Ellsworth in 1935 and their N. extremities were sketched in 1936 by a BGLE sledge party under Rymill. In 1940 they were photographed from the air and charted from the ground by the USAS, and in the exp. re- ports and charts were assumed to be Ellsworth’s “Hternity Range.” The US-ACAN is of the opinion that Ellsworth’s “Eternity Range,” so named be- cause of its impressive relief, is synonymous with the prominent peaks of the Mt. Wakefield group to the NNW., for which names have already been established. In order to perpetuate recognition of Ellsworth’s discovery the US-ACAN therefore ac- cepts the USAS application of the name Eternity for the massif S. of Eland Mtns. and merely sub- stitutes the more appropriate term mountains. ETHELRED, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered moun- tain, about 8,100 ft. in el., standing 3 mi. SE. of Mt. Ethelwulf and 8 mi. inland from George VI Sound, in the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island; in 70°04’S., 69°29’W. Its E. face was roughly sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named after Ethelred I, Saxon king of England, 865-871. ETHELWULF, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered mountain, over 8,500 ft. in el., standing between Mounts Egbert and Ethelred at the head of Tumble Gl., in the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island; in 70°02’S., 69°34’W. Its E. face was roughly sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named after Ethelwulf, Saxon king of England, 839-858. ETNA ISLAND: islet with a high summit, lying about 5 mi. N. of the eastern end of Joinville I., off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°05’S., 55°10’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, who so named it because of its resemblance to volcanic Mount Etna. Not adopted: Aetna Insel [German]. EUREKA GLACIER: broad, gently sloping glacier, about 18 mi. long and 17 mi. wide at its mouth, which flows westward from the W. side of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound; in 69°44’S., 68°15’W. It is bounded on its N. side by the nuna- taks S. of Mt. Edgell, on its S. side by the Traverse Mtns. and Terminus Nunatak, and at its head Pros- pect Pass provides a route to Wordie Ice Shelf. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The name expresses triumph of discovery, and arose because GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the BGLE sledge party found their way to George VI Sound via this glacier in 1936. EVA, CAPE: cape which forms the NW. end of Peter I Island; in about 68°42’S.,90°39’W. Charted and named in 1927 by a Nor. exp. in the Odd I under Tofte. Not adopted: Evas Cape. EVANS, CAPE: cape on the W. side of Ross I., forming the N. side of the entrance to Erebus Bay; in about 77°38’S., 166°24’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it the Skuary. Scott’s second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13, built its headquarters here, re-naming the cape for Lt. Edward R. G. R. Evans, RN, who was second-in- command of the expedition. Not adopted: Skuary. EVANS, MOUNT: mountain with twin summits, about 3,900 and 3,700 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Debenham Gl. about 6 mi. WSW. of Lizards Foot, in Victoria Land; in about 77°14’S., 162°38’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Lt. Edward R. G. R. Evans, RN, of the Morning, relief ship to the expedition. EVANS BAY: bay about 15 mi. wide in the SE. part of MacKenzie Bay, formed by an indentation in the Amery Ice Shelf immediately E. of Cape Child, along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°40’S., 71°45’E. Originally charted by the BANZARE, under Mawson, from an air survey of the boundaries of McKenzie Bay made on Feb. 10, 1931. Probably named for Sir Edward R. G. R. Evans, then R. Adm. commanding the Royal Aus- tralian Navy. EVANS COVE: cove about 2.5 mi. wide, lying between Inexpressible I. and Northern Foothills along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°59’S., 163°47’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and presumably named by him for Capt. F. P. Evans, master of the Koonya, which towed the exp. ship Nimrod S. in 1907, and later of the Nimrod during the last year of the expedition. EVANS INLET: circular embayment, about 9 mi. in diameter, lying between Shiver Pt. and White- side Pt., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 61°36’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in an aerial flight, Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him for E. S. Evans of Detroit. It was resighted and charted by the FIDS in 1947. Evas Cape: see Eva, Cape. EVENSEN, CAPE: bold promontory lying W. of Waldeck-Rousseau Peak, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°10’S., 65°49’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-05, under Charcot, and named by him for 123 Capt. C. J. Evensen of the Hertha, who explored along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1893. Not adopted: Cape Evenson, Cape Waldeck Rousseau. Evensen Bay: see Auvert Bay. EVENSEN NUNATAK: nunatak about 1.5 mi. NW. of Dallmann Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°59’S., 60°25’W. Evensen Nunatak was first charted by the FIDS in August 1947, and nemed by them for Capt. C. J. Evensen. Evenson, Cape: see Evensen, Cape. EWING ISLAND: ice-covered, Gome-shaped is- land, about 8 mi. in diameter, lying about 15 mi. NE. of Cape Collier, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen. of in 69°54’S., 61°13’W. Disc. from the air on Nov. 7, 1947 by RARE, under Ronne, who named it for Maurice Ewing of Columbia Univ., who assisted in planning the RARE seismological program. EXASPERATION INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 18 mi. long in an E.-W. direction and some 16 mi. wide at its entrance between Foyn Pt. and Cape Disappointment, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°20’S., 62°00’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS who so named it because the disturbed nature of the ice in the vicinity caused considerable diffi- culty to sledging parties. EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE RANGE: range of mountain peaks extending in a NE.-SW. direction from about 76°30’S., 127°W. to 77°30’S., 130°00’W.; in Marie Byrd Land. Disc. by the USAS on a flight, Dec. 15, 1940, and named for the Antarctic Service Executive Committee. Several peaks were named in honor of members of the committee, except Mt. Sidley, the most imposing mountain in the range, which was disc. by the ByrdAE on a flight in 1934. EXPEDITION ROCK: submerged rock lying in the entrance to Jessie Bay, about 2 mi. ENE. of Route Pt., off the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°46’W. The rock appears to have been first chartered and named on a map based upon a survey of these islands in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. EXPRESS COVE: small cove on the N. side of Foca Pt. on the W. coast of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°39’W. It has a very indented shoreline with numerous offshore islets and rocks. It was roughly charted in 1933 by DI personnel, and surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br-APC after the American schooner Express, Thomas B. Lynch commanding, which visited the South Orkney Is. in 1880. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA EXTENSION REEF: reef lying in Grandidier Chan., about 10 mi. SW. of Clements Markham I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°01’S., 66°14’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. EZCURRA INLET: inlet forming the W. arm of Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in 62°09’S., 58°31’W. Ezcurra Inlet was probably named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char- cot, who charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909. FACTORY COVE: small cove entered between Knife Pt. and Berntsen Pt. in the S. part of Borge Bay at Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. The cove was roughly surveyed by the Norwegian whaling captain Hans Borge in 1913-14, and was named “Borge Havna” on a map of the period by Petter Sgrlle. The name of Borge was later transferred, and Borge Bay is now the name of the bay of which this cove forms a small part. The cove was resurveyed by DI personnel in 1927 and renamed Factory Cove, because the ruins of the whaling factory built in 1920-21 by the Tgns- berg Hvalfangeri stand on its SE. shore. Not adopted: Borge Havna [Norwegian]. Factory Point: see Restitution Point. FACTORY POINT: small point on the W. side and close to the head of Leith Hbr., in Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 36°41’W. The name was probably given by whalers because of its nearness to Messrs. Salvesen and Company’s whal- ing station rear the head of Leith Harbor. FAIRWAY ROCK: submerged rock in the cen- tral part of Larsen Hbr., at the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°50’S., 35°59’W. Charted in 1927 by DI personnel, and so named by them because it lies in the navigable portion of the harbor. FAIRWEATHER, CAPE: promontory about 2,200 ft. in el., which is ice covered except for rocky ex- posures along its SE. and E. sides, lying midway between Drygalski Gl. and Evans Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°00’S., 61°05’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Alexander Fairweather, captain of the Dundee whaler Balaena which operated along the NE. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1892-93. FALKLAND HARBOR: shallow harbor along the SW. side of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°03’W. Charted by a Nor. whaling exp. under Sgrlle in 1912-13. Named after the floating whale factory Falkland which was badly damaged while entering the harbor in the 1912-13 season. 124 FALLA BLUFF: prominent rocky bluff, about 950 ft. in el., lying at the head of Utstikkar Bay on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°33’S., 61°29’E. Disc. on about Feb. 17, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named by him for R. A. Falla, a member of the expedition. Not adopted: Svart- hovden [Norwegian]. FALLIERES COAST: that portion of the W. coast of Palmer Pen. lying between the head of Bourgeois Fjord in 67°31’S., 66°32’W. and Cape Jeremy in 69°24’S., 68°51’W. This coast was first explored in January 1909 by the FrAE under Char- cot, who named it for Clement Armand Falliéres, then Pres. of France. Not adopted: Fallieres Coast, Falliéres Coast, Falliéres Land. FALSE BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which lies between Barnard Pt. and Elephant Pt. on the S. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°42’S., 60°22’W. The name False Bay has appeared on charts since about 1822 and is well established in international usage. Not adopted: Palmer Bay, Palmers Bay. FALSE BAY: small bight about 2 mi. NW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., the E. tip of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°33’S., 62°51’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery in 1927. The name is probably suggestive of the limited indentation of this feature in the coast. FALSE ISLAND POINT: headland about 1 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, which is connected by a low, narrow, almost invisible isthmus to the S. side of Vega I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°55’S., 57°20’W. First sighted in February 1902 and charted as an island by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold. It was determined to be a part of Vega I. in 1945 by the FIDS, who applied this descriptive name. FALSE ISLET: largest of several islets lying at the E. side of Hackapike Bay, off the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°31’S., 62°52’W. Two islets were charted in this approxi- mate position by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. False Islet was named by DI personnel on the Discovery in 1927. Not adopted: False Island. FALSE ROUND POINT: point about 7 mi. W. of North Foreland and 1.5 mi. S. of Ridley I., on the N. coast of King George I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in about 61°52’S., 57°58’W. This point has appeared on charts since about 1822. It was probably named after Round Pt., which lies about 10 mi. WSW. by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted along the N. coast of this in 1937. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA FANNING, CAPE: cape which forms the N. side of the entrance to Violante Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; 72°24’S., 60°39’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940. Named by the Committee for Edmund Fanning, of Stonington, Conn., and New York City, who in addition to actual Antarctic exploration in con- nection with his sealing and whaling business also vigorously promoted such exploration by others under both private and public auspices. His book, Voyages Round the World, published in 1833, has long been the most authoritative work on early American Antarctic exploration. FANNING RIDGE: prominent rock ridge, about 5 mi. long, paralleling the S. coast of South Georgia between Aspasia Pt. and the W. side of the entrance to Newark Bay; in 54°20’S., 37°02’W. The ridge was named by the Br-APC, following its mapping by the SGS in 1951-52, for Capt. Edmund Fanning (1770-1841) of Stonington, Conn., who with the Aspasia took 57,000 fur seal skins at South Georgia in 1800-1, and published the earliest account of sealing there. Fannings Harbor: see Yankee Harbor. FARADAY, CAPE: cape which forms the N. tip of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°04’W. Disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer on. the occasion of their joint cruise in December 1821. The name first appears on Powell’s chart published in 1822. FAREWELL POINT: point which forms the NE. end of Bird I., off the W. end of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 38°02’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel who charted South Georgia in the period 1926-30. FAREWELL ROCK: islet about 1.5 mi. long, lying about 1 mi. W. of the SW. end of Trinity L., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°48’S., 60°58’W. Although the origin of the name is un- known, it has appeared on maps for over one hun- dred years and its usage has become established internationally. FARLEY, MOUNT: the largest of a group of peaks, about 7,000 ft. in el., standing between the heads of Robert Scott and Bartlett Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°36’S., 151°45’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named at that time by R. Adm. Byrd for the Hon. James M. Far- ley, then Postmaster General of the United States. FARR BAY: ice-filled bay about 6 mi. wide, lying E. of Helen Gl. along Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°32’S., 94°35’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the 125 Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson. In some early reports the feature was referred to as Depot Bay. It was later named for Dr. C. C. Farr of New Zealand, a member of the Expedition Advisory Committee. Not adopted: Depot Bay. FARRINGTON ISLAND: islet lying about 5 mi. NNE. of Couling I., the northernmost island in the William Scoresby Arch., and about 2 mi. W. of Klak- kane Is., off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°15’S., 59°44’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936. FAULKNER ESCARPMENT: an escarpment with a crest line lying about 10,000 ft. in el., forming the E. edge of the Thorvald Nilsen Mountains massif, and trending in a general N.-S. direction, in the Queen Maud Range; extending from about 86°00S., 155°30’E. to about 86°30’S., 157°15’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Charles J. Faulkner, Jr., chief counsel of Armour and Company of Chicago, contributors to the ex- pedition. FAURE ISLANDS: group of rocky islands and reefs, about 3 mi. in extent, lying about 21 mi. SW. of Cape Alexandra, the SE. end of Adelaide I., in 68°06’S., 68°52’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who named them for Maurice Faure, French scholar and statesman. Not adopted: Faure Islets, Maurice Faure Islands. FELICIE POINT: point which forms the S. end of Lion I., lying immediately E. of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°40’S., 63°09’W. Charted and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Not adopted: Cape Félicie. FERGUSLIE PENINSULA: peninsula, about 1.5 mi. long, lying between Browns Bay and Macdougal Bay on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Ork- ney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°34’W. Probably first seen in 1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for the residence of James Coats, chief patron of the expedition. FERGUSON BAY: small bay which forms an excellent anchorage, lying between Hewison and Herd Points at the SE. end of Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S., 27°16’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for Messrs. Ferguson Brothers of Port Glasgow, Scotland, builders of the Discovery II. Ferin, Ile; Férin Island: see Ferin Head. FERIN HEAD: headland forming the N. side of the entrance to Holtedahl Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°59’S., 65°24’W. Disc. by GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who from a distant position in Pendleton Str. charted this feature as an island. Charcot named it for A. Ferin, French Vice-consul at Ponta Delgada, Azores. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, charted this coast and correlated their work with that by Char- cot. Ferin Head, as here applied, is in accord with the BGLE interpretation. Not adopted: Férin Island, Ile Ferin [French]. FERRANTO, MOUNT: mountain which forms the extreme SW. projection of the main massif of the Fosdick Mtns. in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land, rising to about 3,000 ft. in el., in about 76°31’S., 145°25’W. Disc. by the Marie Byrd Land Sledging Party of the ByrdAE in No- vember-December 1934. Named for Felix Ferranto, radio and tractor operator of the USAS, 1939-41. FERRAR GLACIER: glacier at least 35 mi. long and varying from 38 to 6 mi. wide, flowing from the plateau of Victoria Land west of the Royal Society Range to New Hbr. in McMurdo Sound; in about 77°41’S., 163°38’E. This glacier flows NE. to a point opposite the E. side of Knobhead, where it is apposed, i.e., joined in Siamese-twin fashion, to Taylor Glacier. From this point, Fer- rar Glacier turns right and flows ENE. between the Kukri Hills and the N. end of the Royal So- ciety Range to New Hbr. Disc. by the BrNABE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Hartley T. Ferrar, geologist of the exp. The name Ferrar Glacier was originally applied both to the part of this glacier below its right turn and to the Taylor Glacier as now defined (q.v.), while the upper part of Ferrar Glacier above Knobhead was called South Arm. Griffith Taylor, geologist of the BrAE, 1910-138, under Scott, found evidence that these are not two parts of a single glacier but are two glaciers apposed. With this discovery Scott gave the names Ferrar Glacier and Taylor Glacier essentially as now applied. Later, on the map of the Ferrar-Koettlitz District included in the sci- entific reports of the exp., the names Lower Fer- rar Glacier and Upper Ferrar Glacier were applied to these two ice streams, but this naming does not seem consistent with the evidence as the position of the medcal moraines on this map shows that Taylor Glacier does not flow into Ferrar Glacier. Since it is apparent from the fairly detailed maps that the main flow of the Ferrar Glacier heads in the plateau somewhere to the SW. of Knobhead, the US-ACAN has applied the name Ferrar above as well as below the turn at Knobhead. Not adopted: East Fork, Lower Ferrar Glacier, New Harbor Glacier, South Arm (in part). FERRIER PENINSULA: narrow peninsula, about 1.5 mi. long, forming the E. end of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°26’W. The peninsula was roughly charted in 1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell. It was accurately delineated by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for his secretary J. G. Ferrier, also manager in Scotland of the expedition. FIELD, MOUNT: mountain about 9,390 ft. in el., which stands about 25 mi. W. of Cape Douglas, between Mt. Egerton and Mt. Wharton, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°58’S., 158°00’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Field’s Strait: see Fildes Strait. FILCHNER, CAPE: ice-covered cape, fronting on Davis Sea about 14 mi. WNW. of Adams It., which separates Wilhelm II Coast from Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°28’S., 92°18’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for Wilhelm Filchner, leader of the German Ant- arctic Expedition of 1911-12. Filchner Group: see Filchner Mountains. FILCHNER ICE SHELF: an extensive ice shelf which borders Edith Ronne Land at the head of Weddell Sea and extends from Bowman Pen. east- ward to Luitpold Coast; centering in about 78°S., 50°W. The E. extremity of this feature was disc. in January—February 1912 by the GerAE under Wilhelm Filchner. Filchner named the feature for Kaiser Wilhelm, but the Emperor requested it be named for its discoverer. The vast central and W. areas of this ice shelf were first seen and photo- graphed by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, in two aerial flights undertaken in November and December 1947. Not adopted: Filchner Shelf Ice, James Lassiter Barrier, James Lassiter Ice Bar- rier, Lassiter Ice Barrier, Lassiter Shelf Ice, Wed- dell Shelf Ice, Wilhelm Barrier, Wilhelm Shelf Ice. FILCHNER MOUNTAINS: small group of moun- tains lying at the SW. side of the Drygalski Mtns. at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°10’S., 7°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Wilhelm Filchner. Not adopted: Filchner Group. FILCHNER ROCKS: group of rocks, some of which are submerged, about 4 mi. NE. of Cape Vahsel, off the E. end of South Georgia; in 54°42’S., 35°42’W. The existence of these rocks was re- ported in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. They GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA were charted by the GerAE, 1911-12, and named for Dr. Wilhelm Filchner, leader of the expedi- tion. Filchner Shelf Ice: see Filchner Ice Shelf. FILDES POINT: point which forms the N. side of Neptunes Bellows, the entrance to Port Foster, Deception I., in the’South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°34’W. Deception I. was known to sealers in the area as early as 1821; the point was later named for Robert Fildes, a British sealer in these waters at that early time. FILDES STRAIT: strait which extends in a general WNW.-ESE. direction between King George I. and Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°14’S., 58°59’W. This strait has been known to sealers in the area since about 1822, but at that early time it appeared on the charts as Field’s Strait. Probably named for Robert Fildes, a British sealer of that period. Not adopted: Field’s Strait. FILLA ISLAND: small, rocky island, about 2 mi. long, which rises to about 300 ft. in el., marking the largest of the Rauer Is. and lying in the east- central portion of the group, off Ingrid Christen- sen Coast; in about 68°50’S.,.77°43’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo- graphs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Filla, a Nor- wegian word meaning “the tatters.” The name Filla Island was proposed by John H. Roscoe, fol- lowing his 1952 compilation from USN Op. Hip. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, because the original Filla feature has been determined to comprise a group of small islands, islets and rocks. Not adopted: Filla [Norwegian]. FINGER POINT: point marking the N. tip of Visokoi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°41’S., 27°13’W. Charted in 1930 and given this de- scriptive name by DI personnel on the Discovery II, FINGER POINT: point which forms the SW. end of Skua I., in the Argentine Is.; off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15/S., 64°17’W. Finger Point was charted and named by the BGLE, 1934— 37, under Rymill. FINLEY, MOUNT: prominent peak on the W. side of the lower reaches of Shackleton Gl., stand- ing at the E. end of the Bush Mtns., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 84°53’S., 176°15’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on ByrdAE flights to the Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and named by him for John H. Finley, Pres. of the American Geographical Soc. at that time. 127 Finley Islands; Finley Peninsula: see Finley Ridge. FINLEY RIDGE: mountainous ridge terminat- ing in Cape Hicks and lying between the mouths of Bingham and Lurabee Glaciers, on the EH. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°14’S., 63°20’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in an aerial flight on Dec. 20, 1928. He considered the ridge to be islands lying in a ereat transverse channel across Palmer Pen. and named them Finley Islands for John H. Finley of the New York Times, then pres. of the American Geographical Soc. Correlation of aerial photo- eraphs taken by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935 and preliminary reports of the findings of the BGLE, 1934-37, led W. L. G. Joerg to interpret this to be a peninsula. In published reports, members of the BGLE have concurred in this interpreta- tion which is also borne out by the results of sub- sequent flights and a sledge trip from East Base, in 1940, by members of the USAS. Not adopted: Finley Islands, Finley Peninsula. FINSTERWALDER GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide and 11 mi. long, flowing SW. from the central plateau of Palmer Pen. toward the head of Lallemand Fjord. The exact position of its mouth is not determined but lies between the mouths of Haefeli and Klebelsberg Glaciers; in about 67°19’S., 66°20’W. First surveyed from the plateau in 1946-47 by the FIDS, and named by them for Sebastian Finsterwalder and his son, Richard Finsterwalder, German glaciologists. Fiord Martel: see Martel Inlet. FIRST MILESTONE: rock marked by breakers about 1.75 mi. WNW. of Cape Saunders, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°40’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Dis- covery during the period 1926-30. FIRST POINT: the W. tip of Annenkov I., off the south-central coast of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 37°08’W. Charted and named by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery during the period 1926-30. FIRST ROCK: rock which lies 0.5 mi. S. of Br¢de I., and 2 mi. S. of Cape Disappointment, the S. extremity of South Georgia; in 54°55’S., 36°07’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. The rock was so named because of its position by DI per- sonnel who charted South Georgia in the period 1926-30. FISH ISLANDS: group of small islands lying in the NE. half of the entrance to Holtedahl Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°02’S., 65°27’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not adopted: Fish Islets. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Fisher, Mount: see Fisher Mountains. FISHER BAY: bay lying NE. of Cape Hurley between Penguin Pt. and Mertz Glacier Tongue, along George V Coast; in about 67°30’S., 145°40’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Andrew Fisher, Prime Minister of Australia in 1911. FISHER MOUNTAINS: mountains of the Queen Maud Range, lying S. of the E. end of the Prince Olav Mtns. and forming the W. flank of the Liv Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°20’S., 172°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in November 1929, and named for the Fisher brothers, Detroit indus- trialists. Not adopted: Fisher Mountain, Mount Fisher. FISHTRAP COVE: small cove 250 yards NW. of Boulder Pt. on the SW. side of Stonington I., close off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. Resurveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS, who so named it because FIDS parties used this cove for setting fish traps. FISKE, CAPE: cape which forms the E. tip of Smith Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°21’S., 60°27’W. This cape was photographed from the air by members of the USAS in December 1940, and in 1947 by members of the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for C. O. Fiske, climatologist with the Ronne expedition. FIST, THE: peak about 1,000 ft. in el., sur- mounting Cape Crépin at the W. side of the en- trance to Mackellar Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°05’S., 58°31’W. This descriptive name was given by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909. Not adopted: Le Poing [French]. FITCHIE BAY: bay lying W. of Cape Dundas on the S. side of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°29’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for John Fitchie, second mate of the exp. ship Scotia. FITZROY ISLET: islet 0.5 mi. E. of the S. tip of Stonington I., lying in Neny Bay at the foot of Northeast Gl., by which it is partially covered, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°1.1’S., 66°58’W. The islet was presumably first sighted in 1936 by the BGLE, and was roughly charted by them and by the USAS, 1939-41. It was surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS who named it for the R.M.S. Fitzroy, FIDS ship which visited this area in 1947. FITZSIMMONS, MOUNT: highest peak of the Rockefeller Mtns., standing between Mounts Shideler and Jackling in the N. part of the group, and rising to about 3,500 ft. in el., on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°54’S., 155°20’W. Disc. on Jan. 27, 1929 by members of the ByrdAE on an explora- tory flight to this area. Named for Roy G. Fitz- simmons, physicist, in charge of the Rockefeller Mountains seismic station for the USAS during November—December 1940. Not adopted: Mount Margaret Wade. FLAG POINT: point which lies 0.5 mi. ESE. of Damoy Pt. and forms the N. side of the entrance to Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°32’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Named by the FIDS in 1944. When the FIDS base at Port Lockroy was estab- lished in 1944, a metal Union Jack was erected on this point. FLAGON POINT: point, surmounted by two peaks about 1,000 and 1,300 ft. in el., marking the S. side of the entrance to Schott Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°14’S., 60°41’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. It was charted in 1947 by a joint party consisting of members of the RARE and FIDS. So named by the FIDS because the two peaks are suggestive of a flagon tilted on its side when viewed from north or south. FLAGPOLE POINT: point, about 0.2 mi. NW. of Fishtrap Cove, which forms the S. part of the W. extremity of Stonington I., close off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°01’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41, whose East Base was located on this island. Resurveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the flag pole which was erected by the USAS on a rocky knoll close NE. of this point. FLAGSTAFF POINT: point which forms the S. end of the Cape Royds headland and the NW. side of the entrance to Backdoor Bay, on the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°33’S., 166°08’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, which established its winter headquarters and erected a flag near the point. FLANDRES BAY: large bay lying between Capes Renard and Willems, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°02’S., 63°20’W. Explored in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who named it, probably after the historical area of that name, now constituting part of France, Belgium, and the Netherlands. Not adopted: Dallmann Bay, Flanders Bay. 128 GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Flanders Bay: see Flandres Bay. FLANNERY, CAPE: cape which forms the W. end of Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°21’W. Charted in 1930 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it for Sir Fortescue Flannery, a member of the Discovery Committee. FLAT ISLAND: small island lying at the W. side of the entrance to Robertson Bay and at the N. side of Pressure Bay, off the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°20’S., 169°10’E. First charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Flat Isle: see WatchKeeper, The. FLATIRON, THE: rocky, triangular-shaped headland about 1,100 ft. in el., which overlooks the SW. part of Granite Hbr. about 1.5 mi. S. of the mouth of Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°00’S., 162°26’E. Charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, who so named it because of its dis- tinctive shape. FLATNES ICE TONGUE: small ice tongue, about 2 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, projecting NW. from the continental ice overlying Ingrid Christen- sen Coast, about 3 mi. SW. of Hovde Ice Tongue; in about 69°16’S., 76°25’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen- sen, and named Flatnes, a Norwegian word mean- ing flat headland. The generic ice tongue is approved as a more appropriate term on the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947. Not adopted: Flatness [Norwegian]. FLEMING GLACIER: glacier on the W. coast of Palmer Pen., terminating in Wordie Ice Shelf; in 69°12’S., 67°10’W. Together with Bingham Gl. it fills a major depression across Palmer Pen. Disc. and charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Photographed from the air by the USAS on Sept. 29, 1940. This hitherto unnamed feature was named by the US-ACAN in 1947 for Rev. W. L. S. Fleming, Dean of Trinity Hall, Cambridge Univ.; also chaplain, chief scientist, and geologist of the BGLE. Flenserne: see Flensing Islets. FLENSING ISLETS: group of islets lying about 0.5 mi. N. of Jebsen Rocks and about 1 mi. off the W. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°41’W. These islets appear to be first charted and named by a Nor. whaling exp. under Sgrlle, 1912-13. It is possible that in former years these islets were used for flensing, the proc- 129 ess of stripping the skin and blubber from whales. Not adopted: Flenserne [Norwegian]. FLETCHER, CAPE: minor projection of the coastline related to a slight eminence which breaks the relief of an otherwise low coast, about 26 mi. W. of Scullin Monclith, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°42’S.,65°38’E. Disc. by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, and named by him for H. O. Fletcher, asst. biologist with the BANZARE. FLETCHER ISLANDS: two prominent islands, McNamara I. and Dustin I., lying near the W. end of Bellingshausen Sea, about 40 mi. E. of Cape Palmer, off Eights Coast; in about 171°505’S., 94°55’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Feb. 27, 1940, and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Fred C. Fletcher of Boston, Mass., a contributor to the expedition. FLETCHER ISLET: the largest and southern- most of the Fletcher Islets, lying immediately N. of the small coastal nunatak which lies about 1 mi. NE. of Whetter Nunatak, in the E. portion of Com- monwealth Bay off George V Coast; in about 66°55’S., 143°00’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Frank D. Fletcher, first officer on the exp. ship Aurora. FLETCHER ISLETS: small group of iselts in the E. part of Commonwealth Bay, lying close seaward of a small coastal nunatak which stands about 1 mi. NE. of Whetter Nunatak, off George V Coast; in about 66°54’S., 143°00’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who applied the name Fletcher to the large islet at the S. end of this group. The name Fletcher is also adopted for this islet group in Keeping with the interpretation shown on the US-ACAN reconnaissance map of 1955 compiled from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47. FLINT GLACIER: glacier which flows S. into Whirlwind Inlet between Demorest Gl. and Cape Northrop, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°20’S., 65°25’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. Charted by the FIDS in 1947, who named it for Richard F. Flint, glaciologist and prof. of geology at Yale University. Flint Peninsula: see Churchill Peninsula. FLORA, MOUNT: mountain, about 1,700 ft. in el., containing a well-defined cirque which faces NE. lying about 0.5 mi. ESE. of the head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25’S., 57°01’ W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, and named by J. Gunnar Andersson, second-in- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA command of the exp., who disc. flora fossils of the Jurassic period in certain strata of this mountain. Not adopted: Florasberg [Swedish]. Florasberg: see Flora, Mount. FLORENCE ROCK: rock about 0.1 mi. long with a smaller rock off its NE. end, lying about 0.8 mi. SE. of Point Rae, off the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°36’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce. Named in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. FLOWER, MOUNT: mountain with two summits, the highest about 4,800 ft. in el., standing 6.5 mi. inland from Carse Pt. and George VI Sound on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 70°12’S., 67°53’W. This mountain lies partially within the margin of area first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and its N. extremity was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Geoffrey C. Flower, instructor in survey at the Royal Geographical Soc., 1933-40, who helped with the organization and working out of the surveys made by the BGLE, 1934-37. F. L. SMITH, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alexandra Range, about 8,300 ft. in el., standing N. of Mt. Fox and about 15 mi. SW. of Mt. Hope on the W. side of Beardmore GIl.; in about 83°40’S., 169°40’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Not adopted: Mount P. L. Smith. FLYING FISH, CAPE: cape which forms the NW. extremity of Thurston Pen. and marks the physical division between Walgreen Coast and Eights Coast; in about 71°50’S., 100°50’W. Disc. by the USAS on a flight from the Bear in February 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for the USEE ship Flying Fish, commanded by Lt. William M. Walker, USN, which reached a point within 110 mi. of this cape; the ship’s position on the morning of March 23, 1839 was reported to lie in 70°00’S., 100°16’W. Not adopted: Cape Dart (q.v.). Flying Fish, Cape: see Dart, Cape; Palmer, Cape. FLYSPOT ROCKS: group of rocks, about 100 ft. in el., lying about 14 mi. NW. of Terra Firma Is. in Marguerite Bay; in 68°35’S., 68°06’W. The rocks are ice covered on the S. sides but mainly ice free on their N. sides. Probably first sighted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot who, from a position slightly northwestward, charted a “doubt- ful” islet in essentially this position. The group was roughly sketched from the air by the BGLE on a flight, Feb. 1, 1987. They were visited and surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. The name arose at an earlier date because of their indistinct ap- pearance as represented on the BGLE map. Foca, Pointe: see Penguin Point. FOCA POINT: rocky point forming the S. side of the entrance to Express Cove on the W. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°40’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br-APC after the whale catcher Foca, belonging to the Compania Argentina de Pesca, which visited the South Orkney Is. in December 1926. FOLD ISLAND: large island lying NW. of the en- trance to William Scoresby Bay, off Kemp Coast; in about 67°18’S., 59°25’E. This feature was seen by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in Feb- ruary 1936, who believed it to be part of the main- land. It was determined to be an island and named Foldoya by Norwegian cartographers who charted this area from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937. Not adopted: Folda Island. Folda Island: see Fold Island. FOLGER, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the E. side of the entrance to Vincennes Bay, on Budd Coast; in about 66°05’S., 110°40’E. The position of Cape Folger correlates closely with the W. end of Wilkes’ “Budd’s High Land,” as charted as a coastal landfall by the USEE in 1840. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Car. Edward C. Folger, Jr., USN, commander of the ice- breaker Edisto which assisted USN Op. Wm. parties in establishing astronomical control sta- tions in the Windmill Is., close SW. in Vincennes Bay. FORBES GLACIER: glacier which flows SW. and then W. into the NE. corner of Square Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°48’S., 66°44’W. It is about 15 mi. long and 5 mi. wide in its central part, but narrows to 2 mi. atits mouth. The lower reaches of the glacier were first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The survey was com- pleted in 1946-48 by the FIDS who named the glacier for James D. Forbes (1809-1868), Scottish physcist who was noted for his pioneer works on glaciology. Ford Range: see Edsel Ford Ranges. FORDE, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain about 3,500 ft. in el., situated at the E. side of Cleveland Gl. about 1.5 mi. NW. of Mt. Marston, in Victoria Land; in about 76°53’S., 162°11’E. Charted by the 130 GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Petty Officer Robert Forde, RN, member of the expedi- tion’s western geological party. FOREL GLACIER: glacier about 2 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing SW. into Blind Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°29’S., 66°30’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Its lower reaches were surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and the glacier named by them for Francois A. Forel, noted Swiss glacier physicist and author, and first Pres. of the International Com- mission of Glaciers in 1894. FORELAND ISLET: islet which lies about 3 mi. SSE. of North Foreland, and NE. cape of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 61°55’S., 57°36’W. This islet was known to sealers as early as 1821. It takes its name from nearby North Foreland. Not adopted: Foreland Island. FORSTERS PASSAGE: body of water lying between Bristol I. and Southern Thule, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°14’S., 26°48’W. In 1775, a Br. exp. under Cook applied the name Forster, after John R. Forster, naturalist with the exp., to what appeared to be a bay in essentially this position. The bay was determined to be a strait by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1820. Not adopted: Forster’s Passage. FORT ROCK: rock, about 285 ft. in el., lying close off the SE. end of Greenwhich I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°34’S., 59°34’W. The feature was named Castle Rock, probably by DI personnel following their survey in 1935. The name Fort Rock, which is equally descriptive of the feature, has been ap- proved to avoid confusion with Castle Rock lying close westward of Snow I., only 60 mi. away. Not adopted: Castle Rock. FORT WILLIAM: cape forming the NW. side of the entrance to Discovery Bay, on Greenwhich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 59°45’W. The name has been in use since at least 1930 and is now established in international usage. FORTRESS HILL: hill about 400 ft. in el., which stands about 2 mi. N. of Terrapin Hill on The Naze, a peninsula of northern James Ross I., which lies S. of the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°56’S., 57°31’W. Charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who gave this descriptive name. FORTUNA BAY: bay about 3 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, which lies about midway between Stromness and Antarctic Bays along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°48’W. Named after the Fortuna, one of the vessels of the Nor.-Arg. whaling 131 exp. under C, A. Larsen which participated in estab- lishing the first permanent whaling base at Gryt- viken, South Georgia in 1904-5. FORTUNA GLACIER: glacier flowing in a NE. direction to its terminus about 1 mi. W. of Cape Best, with an eastern distributary almost reaching the W. side of Fortuna Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°05’S., 36°51’W. Named in about 1912, presumably for the vessel Fortuna. FORTUNA ROCKS: small group of rocks extend- ing across the E. side of the entrance to Fortuna Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 36°47’W. These rocks were indicated on a chart by the GerAE under Filchner, who examined Fortuna Bay in 1911-12. The name Fortuna Rocks was in use prior to 1920 and derives from nearby Fortuna Bay. FOSDICK MOUNTAINS: an E-W. trending range of mountains with marked serrated outlines, lying between Balchen Gl. on the N. and Crevasse Valley Gl. on the S., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°30’S., between 144°00’W. and 145°25’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1929, and named by Byrd for Raymond B. Fos- dick, Pres. of the Rockefeller Foundation. Not adopted: Raymond Fosdick Mountains, Raymond Fosdick Range. FOSSIL BLUFF: prominent rock bluff on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, marking the N. side of the mouth of Uranus GI. where it enters George VI Sound; in 71°20’S., 68°17’W. This feature was probably first sighted by Lincoln Ellsworth, who photographéd segments of the coast in this vicin- ity on Nov. 23, 1935. The bluff was first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and so named by them because fossils were found in the rock strata there. It was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. FOSTER, CAPE: cape lying about 3 mi. SE. of Carlsson Bay on the S. side of James Ross I., lying S. of the NE.. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 64°27’S., 57°59’W. Disc. by a Br. exp., 1839-43, under Ross, who named it for Capt. Henry Foster, RN, leader of a Br. exp. in the Chanticleer, 1828-31. The cape was charted by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4. FOSTER, MOUNT: peak, about 6,900 ft. in el., standing 4 mi. SW. of Mt. Pisgah in the central part of Smith I., South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 62°34’°W. Capt. Henry Foster, RN, who visited the island in the Chanticleer in 1829, named this fea- ture Mount Beaufort, but this name has gradually GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA been superseded by the present name, which honors Captain Foster. Not adopted: Mount Beaufort, Mount Beaufurt, Mount Pisgah (q.v.). Foster, Mount: see Pisgah, Mount. FOSTER, PORT: basin about 5 mi. long and 3.5 mi. wide, landlocked within Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°58’S., 60°39’W. This harbor was known to sealers as early as 1820, and the name Port Foster has been well established in international usage for over 100 years. Named for Capt. Henry Foster, RN, who made pendulum and magnetic observations in this harbor in 1829. Not adopted: Port Williams, Yankee Harbor. FOUL POINT: the N. point of the islet, with off-lying rocks, which forms the E. side of the entrance to Ommanney Bay,-on the N. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°33’S., 45°31’W. Disc. in December 1821 in the course of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer. The name first appears on Powell’s chart, published in 1822. FOUR LADIES BANK: submarine bank lying off Prydz Bay, centering in about 67°30’S., 77°30’E. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Christensen, 1936-37, and named after the four ladies of the exp. party. FOURNIER BAY: bay about 5 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, indenting the NE. coast of Anvers I. about 7 mi. NW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in about 64°31’S., 63°06’W. Probably first seen by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann. Charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for V. Adm. Ernest Fournier, French Navy. Not adopted: Baie E. Fournier [French]. FOX GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing NE. from the conti- nental ice to Budd Coast, where it terminates in a small tongue at the W. side of the entrance to Colvocoresses Bay; in about 65°50’S., 114°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Dr. J. L. Fox, asst. surgeon on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. FOX MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alexandra Range, about 8,800 ft. in el., rising directly S. of Mt. F. L. Smith and about 17 mi. SW. of Mt. Hope, on the W. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 83°40’S., 169°35’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. Foyn, Cape: see Alexander, Cape. FOYN COAST: that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen. lying between Cape Alexander, in 66°44’S., 62°37’W. and Cape Northrop, in 67°24’S., 132 65°16’W. Disc. in 1893 by a Nor. exp. under C. A. Larsen, who named it for Svend Foyn, Norwegian whaler of Tgnsberg whose invention of the grenade harpoon has greatly facilitated modern whaling. Not adopted: Foyn Land, Foynland, Svend Foyn Coast. Foyn Island: see Foyn Point. FOYN POINT: point, surmounted by a peak about 1,600 ft. in el. marking the N. side of the entrance to Exasperation Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 61°39’W. Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928 photographed an island off the E. coast of Palmer Pen., later charting it in 66°30’S., 62°30’W. Subsequent com- parison of Wilkins’ photographs of this feature with those taken by the FIDS, who charted the coast in 1947, indicate that this point, although con- siderably N. of the position reported by Wilkins and possibly on an island, is the feature named by him Foyn Island. The name Foyn Point is given to the SE. extremity of this feature. Named for Svend Foyn. Not adopted: Foyn Island. Foyniand: see Foyn Coast. FRAM BANK: submarine bank lying off Mac- Kenzie Bay, between about 67°00’S., and 67°30’S., and extending from about 68°30’E. to 71°30’E. Disc. on Feb. 4, 1931 by Christensen, who named it after Fridtjof Nansen’s famous ship, the Fram, which was also used by Roald Amundsen in his exp. to the South Pole. FRAM ISLETS: small group of rocky islets and rocks lying in the W. portion of Géologie Arch., about 2 mi. NNW. of Cape Géodésie, off Adélie Coast; in 66°38’S., 1389°50’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and named for the Norwegian polar ship Fram, used by Fridtjof Nan- sen in the Arctic and Roald Amundsen in the Antarctic. Framnaes, Cape; Framnas: see Framnes, Cape. FRAMNAES POINT: point about 1.2 mi. SW. of Cape Saunders, on the N. side of Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 36°39’W. The name was given prior to 1920, probably by Norwegian whalers operating in the area. Not adopted: Framnaes. Framnaesodden: see Framnes Head. FRAMNES, CAPE: cape which forms the NE. end of Jason I., in the NW. part of Weddell Sea; in 65°57’'S., 60°33’W. Disc. and named in 1893 by a Nor. exp. under C. A. Larsen. At that time Larsen GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA thought the cape to be a part of the mainland. Named for Framnesodden, a cape in the Langefjord Fjord in Norway. The cape was surveyed by the FIDS in 1953. Not adopted: Cape Framnaes, Framnas [German]. FRAMNES HEAD: small, rocky point lying close N. of Tofte Gl. at the SE. side of Sandefjord Bay, on the W. side of Peter I Island; in about 68°51’S., 90°44’°W. Charted and named by a Nor. exp. under Nils Larsen, who made the first landing on Peter I Island at this point in February 1929. Not adopted: Framnaesodden [Norwegian]. FRAMNES MOUNTAINS: group of mountains on Mac-Robertson Coast, between 67°41’S. and 68°10’S. and between 62°12’E. and 63°07’E., con- sisting of Casey Range, Masson Range, David Range, and adjacent peaks and mountains. The three major ranges and other lesser features were sighted and named in February 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson. This coast was also sighted by Norwegian whalers in the same season. The whole area was mapped in detail by the Nor- wegians as a result of aerial photography taken under the direction of Lars Christensen in January 1937. This overall name for the several ranges was given by Christensen after Framnesfjellet, a hill near Sandefjord, Norway. Fran Inlet: see Nantucket Inlet. FRANCAIS, MOUNT: snow-covered mountain about 9,100 ft. in el., standing SE. of the center of Anvers I. about 5 mi. NNE. of Borgen Bay, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 63°27’W. The Oster- rieth Mtns., of which this mountain is the domi- nant feature, have been known at least since the BelgAE, under De Gerlache, explored the SE. coast of Anvers I. in 1898. This mountain was later sighted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted: Mount Francais. Frangais Bight: see Francais Cove. FRANCAIS COVE: small cove at the SW. side of Port Charcot, which indents the N. end of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°03’S., 64°01’W. Disc. and charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Named by Charcot after the exp. ship Francais, which was moored there during the expedition’s winter operations at Port Charcot in 1904. Not adopted: Francais Bight. FRANCAIS GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi. wide and 14 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the continental ice to Adélie Coast, about 8 mi. W. of Barré GI.; in about 66°33’S., 138°15’E. Though no glaciers 133 were noted on D’Urville’s chart of this coast, the close correlation of his “Baie des Ravins” feature and narrative description with the indentation of the coast near the foot of this glacier suggests first sighting of this feature by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40. During December 1912 F. H. Bickerton and other members of the Main Base Party of the AAK under Mawson camped on the upland slopes close E. of the glacier, but no refer- ence was made to the glacier in the AAE narratives and scientific reports, though a clear view and unpublished sketch were obtained of the distant coast to the NW. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, sledged W. on the sea ice off Adélie Coast to the ice cliffs close E. of the glacier. Named for the Francais, exp. ship of the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. FRANCES, CAPE: cape on the E. side of Sturge I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 67°30’S., 164°30’E. In 1841, Capt. James Clark Ross, viewing Sturge I. from a considerable distance, thought it a group of three islands and named the center island, Frances. This error was disc. in 1904 by Capt. Robert F. Scott, who applied the name to this cape. FRANCIS ISLAND: island which is irregular in shape, about 7 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, lying about 12 mi. ENE. of Cape Choyce, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°37’S., 64°45’W. Disc. and photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for S. J. Francis, FIDS surveyor. Not adopted: Robinson Island. Frank Houlder, Mount: see Houlder, Mount. FRANK NEWNES GLACIER: glacier descending steeply from the high plateau of northern Victoria Land into the S. part of Pressure Bay; in about 71°27'S., 169°17’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named this feature for Frank Newnes, the only son of the exp. sponsor, Sir George Newnes. FRANKLIN, MOUNT: peak standing about 2.5 mi. NNW. of Mt. Helen Washington, near the S. end of the N. group of the Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°03’S., 155°21’W. Disc. and named by the ByrdAH, Jan. 27, 1929. Franklin D. Roosevelt Sea: see Amundsen Sea. FRANKLIN ISLAND: island about 12 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and about 6 mi. wide, which lies in the Ross Sea about 80 mi. E. of Victoria Land and about 60 mi. N. of Cape Bird, Ross I.; in about 76°07’S., 168°20’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA under Ross, who named it for Sir John Franklin, English Arctic explorer. FRASER POINT: the N. tip of the peninsula between Marr Bay and Mackintosh Cove, on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°31/W. Charted in 1933 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it for F. C. Fraser, member of the zoological staff of the Dis- covery Committee. Not adopted: Frazier Point. FRAZIER, MOUNT: northernmost peak of the Rockefeller Mtns., standing about 2.5 mi. N. of Mt. Jackling of Edward VII Pen. and almost sub- merged in the icecap; in about 77°51’S., 155°23’W. Disc. on Jan. 27, 1929 by members of the ByrdAE on an exploratory flight to this area. Named for Russell G. Frazier, medical officer at West Base of the USAS, 1939-41, and observer of the Rockefeller Mountains Geological Party, which visited this area in December 1940. Not adopted: Mount Irene Frazier. Frazier Point: see Fraser Point. Frederick H. Rawson Mountains: see Rawson Mountains. FREDRIKSEN ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide which lies 0.5 mi. SE. of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°00’W. First charted in detail in 1912-13 by a Nor. whaling exp. under Sgrlle. Not adopted: Fredriksen’s Island, Fredriksens Island. FREEMAN, CAPE: cape marking the E. end of the peninsula separating Seligman and Trail In- lets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°59’S., 65°20’W. The cape was photographed from the air in 1940 by the USAS. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for R. L. Freeman, FIDS sur- veyor at the Stonington I. base. FREEMAN, CAPE: cape forming the N. end of Sturge I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 67°12’S., 164°10’E. Named for H. Freeman, commander of the cutter Sabrina, which sailed with the schooner Eliza Scott, in 1938, on the voyage resulting in the discovery of the Balleny Is. in 1839. FREEMAN GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti- nental ice to the W. side of Perry Bay, immediately EK. of Freeman Pt., on Clarie Coast; in about 66°00’S. 132°35’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for J. D. Freeman, sail- maker on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. 134 FREEMAN POINT: small ice-covered point, lying immediately W. of Freeman Gl. and marking the W. side of the entrance to Perry Bay, on Clarie Coast; in about 65°55’S., 132°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for J. D. Freeman of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. FREEZELAND ROCK: rock, about 900 ft. in el., lying about 2.6 mi. W. of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°03’S., 26°41’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775, and named Freezeland Peak after the crew member who first sighted it. When the feature was charted as an insular rock in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, the name was altered accordingly. Not adopted: Freezeland Peak. FRENCH PASSAGE: passage extending in a NW.-SE. direction between the Dannebrog Is., to the NE., and the Roca Islets and Argentine Is., to the SW., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S., 64°20’W. Named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. The Pourquoi-Pas?, exp. ship of the FrAE under Charcot, navigated this passage in January 1909. FRESHFIELD, CAPE: long, snow-domed point of land on George V Coast; in about 68°20'S., 151°10’E. This is probably the cape viewed from a great distance, as a result of “looming” or a superior mirage, by Lt. Charles Wilkes of the USEE, from the Vincennes on Jan. 19, 1840, and named by him for Lt. William Hudson of the Pea- cock, second officer of the USEE, who also saw land in the same direction on that day. The loca- tion of the cape was determined in 1912 by the Far Eastern Party of the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Douglas Freshfield, one time Pres. of the Royal Geographical Society. Not adopted: Cape Hudson. FRICKER GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long, which lies close N. of Monnier Pt. and flows in a NE. direction into the W. side of Mill Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°02’S., 64°56’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Karl Fricker, German Antarctic historian. FRIDA HOLE: small bay lying 0.5 mi. SE. of Coal Hbr., along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°57’W. Prob- ably named by early whalers or sealers who used the bay as an anchorage. FRIDTJOF NANSEN, MOUNT: massive moun- tain, about 13,100 ft. in el., forming the E. flank of Liv Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°28’S., 167°00’W. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Amundsen in 1911, and named for Dr. Fridtjof Nansen, polar explorer, who helped support Amundsen’s expedition. Not adopted: Mount Nansen. Fridjof-Nansen Bank: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks, Fridjof Sound: see Fridtjof Sound. FRIDTJOF NANSEN BANKS: submerged, rocky ridge, about 3.5 mi. long. and about 0.5 mi. wide, with a depth of about 18 ft. over its E. end, situ- ated about 3.5 mi. ENE. of Cape George, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in about 54°16’S., 36°09’W. Named after the S.S. Fridtjof Nansen which was wrecked on this ridge in 1907. Not adopted: Fridjof-Nansen Bank, Fridjof-Nansen Banks, Fridtjof-Nansen Banks, Fritjof Nansen Bank, Nansen Bank, Nansen Rocks. Fridtjof Nansen Hafen: see Stromness Harbor. FRIDTJOF SOUND: sound about 6 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and 2 mi. wide, which sep- arates Andersson and Jonassen Islands from Tabarin Pen., at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°35’S., 56°43’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, and named after the Fridtjof, a vessel dispatched from Sweden to search for the SwedAE when it was feared lest in 1903. Not adopted: Détroit du Frithjof [French], Fridjof Sound, Frithjof Sound, Frithiofs Sund [Swedish]. FRIEDERICHSEN GLACIER: glacier about 7 mi. long, which flows in an easterly direction into Cabinet Inlet, close N. to Mt. Hulth, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°38’S., 64°09’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Ludwig Friederichsen, German cartographer who in 1895 published a chart based upon all existing explorations of northern Palmer Peninsula and the South Shetland Islands. Not adopted: Bailey Glacier. Friesland Island: see Livingston Island. Friesland Peak: see Barnard, Mount. Friesland Point: see Pin Point. FRIGGA PEAK: peak about 5,100 ft. in el., which stands at the S. side of Anderson Gl. on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°25’S., 64°00’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. The FIDS named it after the mythological Norse goddess Frigga, the “cloud spinner,” because cloud was observed to form on the summit of this peak earlier than on any other feature in this vicinity. 135 Frithiof Sound; Frithiofs Sund: see Fridtjof Sound. Frithjof, Détroit du: see Fridtjof Sound. Fritjof Nansen Bank: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks. Froa: see Couling Island. FROST GLACIER: channel glacier about 8 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti- nental ice to the head of Porpoise Bay, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°55’S., 128°50’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for John Frost, boaswain on the brig Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. FRY GLACIER: long, deep outlet glacier, about 2 mi. wide, with vertical, smooth rock walls, which merges with Albrecht Penck Gl., about 25 mi. S. of Nordenskj6ld Ice Tongue, on the coast of Vic- toria Land; in about 76°38’S., 162°32’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for A. M. Fry, of Bristol, England, a contributor to the expedition. Fry Strait; Fyr Strait: see Fyr Channel. FRYER POINT: northern point of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°59’S., 26°30’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for Lt. Cdr. D. H. Fryer, RN, captain of H. M. Surveying Ship Fitzroy. FUCHS ICE PIEDMONT: large ice piedmont, about 6 to 10 mi. wide and about 80 mi. long, ex- tending in a NE.-SW. direction along the entire W. coast of Adelaide I.; centering in 67°10'S., 68°55’W. First roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was named by the FIDS for Vivian E. Fuchs, FIDS base leader and geolo- gist at Stonington I. in 1948-48. FULMAR BAY: semi-circular bay, about 1 mi. wide at the entrance, lying between Moreton Pt. and Return Pt. at the W. end of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 46°02’W. First sighted and roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer on their joint cruise in December 1821. It was surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. So named in 1954 by the Br-APC because large numbers of Antarctic fulmars (Ful- marus glacialoides) nest in this area. FURNESS GLACIER: small glacier flowing northward to the coast between Cape Belsham and Mt. Houlder, on the N. coast of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°02’S., 55°00’W. Charted and named by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA FYR CHANNEL: channel about 0.2 mi. wide between the SW. end of Signy I. and Moe I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°41’W. The name Fyr Strait appears on a manuscript chart drawn by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912, and corrected by Hans Borge in 1913, but the generic term channel is approved because of the small size of this feature. Not adopted: Fry Strait, Fyr Strait. GABLENZ RANGE: prominent N.-S. trending range, about 25 mi. long and about 8,800 ft. in el., in the Miihlig-Hofmann Mtns. projecting from the intermediate icecap level about 15 mi. N. of the edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°00’S., 4°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938- 39, under Ritscher, and named for the dir. of the German Lufthansa Corporation. GADARENE LAKE: a meltwater lake, about 1 mi. long, in the ice shelf of George VI Sound, lying below Swine Hill with its E. shore bounding the exposed rocks of the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°24’S., 67°35’W. In summer a considerable volume of water enters the lake from the ravine immediately N. of Swine Hill. First seen and sur- veyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The name arose at that time and results from the mad rush by the FIDS sledge dogs which attempted to throw them- selves and their sledge down the steep ice slopes into the water, like the Gadarene swine. GAGE, CAPE: rocky promontory forming the E. end of James Ross I. and the N. side of the E. entrance to Admiralty Sound, S. of the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 64°10’S., 57°04’W. Disc. by a Br. exp., 1839-43, under Ross, who named it for V. Adm. William Hall Gage, a Lord Commissioner of the Admiralty. GALINDEZ ISLAND: islet immediately E. of Winter I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°15’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Cdr. Ismael F. Galindez, Argentine Navy, who was dispatched in the Uruguay to search for Charcot, when the exp. was feared lost early in 1905. The islet was accurately charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. GALLOWS POINT: the northernmost of two low, parallel points which mark the NE. extremity of Gamma I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°59’W. The name was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the point in 1927. The point was resurveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. GAMMA ISLAND: island, about 1 mi. long, which marks the SW. extremity of the Melchior Is. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 63°00’W. This island 136 was first roughly charted and named “Ile Gouts” by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, but that name has not survived in usage. The name Gamma, derived from the third letter of the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the island in 1927. The island was sur- veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Ile Gouts [French], Isla Ob- servatorio [Spanish]. GAND ISLAND: flat, ice-covered island, about 3 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying at the N. end of Schollaert Chan. between Anvers and Brabant Islands, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°24’S., 62°51’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him after Gand, the French form of Ghent, a city in Belgium where subscription drives were held to help finance the expedition. GAP, THE: a col between Crater and Observation Hills, at the S. end of Hut Point Pen., on Ross I.; in about 77°51’S., 166°40’E. Charted and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. BrNAE sledge parties traversed the S. end of the peninsula via this low level passage. GARAN, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft. in el., marked by a cluster of small peaks protruding’ above the continental ice, standing about 10 mi. SSW. of Mt. Strathcona and forming part of the W. side of the upper reaches of Scott Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°32’S., 98°42’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for E. M. Garan, aerial photographer on USN Op. Hjp. flights which obtained photographic coverage in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. Garcia, Cap: see Loqui Point. GARCIA, CAPE: cape with vertical cliffs forming the N. side of the entrance of Barilari Bay and the S. side of the entrance to Bigo Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°45’S., 64°40’W. This cape was first seen, roughly surveyed, and named “Cap Loqui” by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. At the same time Charcot gave the name ‘“‘Cap Garcia” to the S. point of Barilari Bay after Rear Admiral Garcia, Argentine Navy. The maps of the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot showed “Cap Garcia” as the N. cape of Barilari Bay and the name Cape Garcia has since become established for this fea- ture. Charcot did not use the name “Cap Loqui” on the maps of his second expedition but, for the sake of historical continuity, the name Loqui Point (q.v.) has been accepted for the point at the S. side of Barilari Bay. Not adopted: Cap Loqui [French]. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA GARDINER, MOUNT: ridge-like, granitic moun- tain, about 8 mi. long and about 8,000 ft. in el., standing just S. of the junction of Bartlett and Robert Scott Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range; its northern extremity lies in about 86°13’S., 151°15’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for T. Joseph Gardiner of Wellington, New Zealand, agent for Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Gardner Bay: see Gardner Inlet. Gardner Glacier: see Ketchum Glacier. GARDNER INLET: large, ice-filled inlet lying at the SW. side of Bowman Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°58’S., 62°52’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Irvine C. Gardner, physicist at the National Bureau of Standards, and member of the American Antarc- tic Assn., Inc., the organization set up to make plans and preparations for the expedition. His work in the field of optics as applied to aerial photography has been an important contribution to this technique in polar exploration. Not adopted: American Geographical Society Bay, Gardner Bay. Garland Hersey Ridge; Garland Hershey Ridge: see Hershey Ridge. Garnet, Cape: see Garnet Point. GARNET HILL: rocky hill, about 750 ft. in el., standing on the E. side of McLeod Gl. in the S. part of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°38’W. It forms the S. end of a line of rock and ice cliffs which separate McLeod Gl. from Orwell Gl. So named by the FIDS, following their survey of 1947, because of the abundance of garnets found there. GARNET POINT: rocky point, consisting of coarse garnet gneiss, connected by a steep ice slope to the continental ice, about 11 mi. SE. of Cape Gray, on George V Coast; in about 66°56’S., 143°46’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Maw- son, and named by the geological party under Frank L. Stillwell. Not accepted: Cape Garnet. GARNET ROCKS: group of three rocks lying 2 mi. W. of the Refuge Its. in the N. part of Rymill Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°21’S., 67°04’W. First surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and so named by them because of the occurrence of garnet in the rocks. GASTON ISLET: islet about 1 mi. N. of Cape Reclus, lying in De Gerlache Str., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°23’S., 61°48’W. Disc. by the 424589 O--57 -10 137 BelgAE, 1897-99, under Lt. Adrien de Gerlache, and named by him for his brother. Not accepted: Gas- ton Island. GAUDRY, MOUNT: mountain about 7,600 ft. in el., which stands about 8 mi. SSW. of Mt. Mangin in the S. part of Adelaide Is., in 67°32’S., 68°37’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Albert Gaudry, prominent French paleontologist. Not adopted: Mount Goudry, Sommet A. Gaudry [French]. Gauss, Mount: see Gaussherg. GAUSS, MOUNT: a massif with a cap of black rock, lying about 3 mi. NE. of Mt. Chetwynd on the S. side of Mawson Gl., in the Prince Albert Mtns. of Victoria Land; in about 76°19’S., 162°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-04, under Scott, who named it for Prof. Karl Friedrich Gauss, German mathe- matician and astronomer. GAUSSBERG: extinct volcanic cone about 1,150 ft. in el., fronting on Davis Sea immediately W. of Posadowsky Gl., and dominating a major portion of Wilhelm II Coast; in 66°48’S., 89°19’E. Disc. in February 1902 by the GerAE under Drygalski, who named it for the exp. ship Gauss which was frozen in the pack ice about 50 mi. N. until Febu- ary 1903. Not adopted: Mount Gauss (q.v.), Mount Gaussberg. GAUTHIER POINT: point which forms the NW. extremity of Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°36’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Monsieur Gauthier, builder of the exp. ships Frangais and Pourquoi- Pas?. GBUREK PEAKS: an E.-W. series of peaks in New Schwabenland, extending about 60 mi., in about 72°15’S. on the Greenwich Meridian. They project through the icecap about 30 mi. N. of the edge of the polar plateau. Disc. by the GerAEK under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Leo Gbu- rek, geophysicist on the expedition. GEDDES, CAPE: cape which forms the N. end of Ferguslie Pen. on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°35’W. First charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for Prof. P. (later Sir Patrick) Geddes, noted Scottish biologist and sociologist. GEDGES REEF: reef about 3.5 mi. NNW. of Grim Rock and some 12 mi. WSW. of Cape Tuxen, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°21’S., 64°33’W. Disc. by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and named after The Gedges, a dangerous reef off the mouth of the Helford River in Cornwall, England. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA GEIKIE GLACIER: glacier which flows in a NE. direction to Mercer Bay, at the SW. end of Cum- berland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°41’W. First charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, who named it for Sir Archi- bald Geikie, noted Scottish geologist and Director- General of the Geological Survey of the United Kingdom. GEIKIE INLET: inlet about 7 mi. wide at its entrance, lying between the cliffs of the Drygal- ski Ice Tongue on the N. and Clarke Gl. and Lamp- lugh I. on the §S., in Victoria Land; in about 75°33’S., 163°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir Archibald Geikie. Geikie Land; Geikie Point: see Geikie Ridge. GEIKIE RIDGE: massive ridge terminating as a divide between Murray and Dugdale Glaciers, in the Robertson Bay area of northern Victoria Land; in about 71°36’S., 169°58’E. The landward extent of the feature remains to be determined. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named the highland between these glaciers Geikie Land, after Sir Archibald Geikie. The generic “land” has been changed to “ridge,” since it was not appropriate for so small a feature, but Borchgrevink’s intent in naming the whole mass has been respected. Not adopted: Geikie Land, Geikie Point. GEMINI NUNATAK: nunatak consisting of two almost ice-free peaks, about 1.25 mi. apart and about 1,600 ft. in el., which are connected by a narrow, rock ridge extending in a NNW.-SSE. di- rection. The nunatak protrudes through the ice along the E. coast of Palmer Pen. about 5 mi. S. of Borchgrevink Nunatak; in 66°08’S., 62°30’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS after the constellation Gemini, which contains the twin stars Castor and Pollux. GEODESIE, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape, marked by prominent rock outcrops at its NE. end, lying about 3 mi. NW. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, on Adélie Coast; in 66°40’S., 139°51’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, and so named because of the extensive geodetic program under- taken in this region, particularly in the Géologie Arch. close off shore. GEOLOGIE, POINT: (in about 66°37’S., 140°12’E.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since it is not now possible to identify the feature. See descriptions for Débarquement Rock, Géologie Archipelago and Pétrel Island. 138 GEOLOGIE ARCHIPELAGO: small archipelago of rocky islets and rocks, lying close N. of Cape Géodésie and Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, and ex- tending from Héléne It. on the W. to the Dumou- lin Its. on the E., off Adélie Coast; centering in 66°39’S., 139°55’E. The Fr. exp. under D’Urville landed on Débarquement Rock in the Dumoulin Its. in January 1840, and applied the name ‘Pointe Géologie” to a coastal feature charted as lying close behind Débarquement Rock. The archipelago was delineated. in part, from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Following surveys and geological studies by FrAE parties during the 1950- 52 period, the French antarctic sub-committee re- assigned the name ‘Pointe Géologie”’ to the entire archipelago, as D’Urville’s coastal feature is be- lieved to correlate with portions of the cluster of islets lying close N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue. Not adopted: Archipel de Pointe Géologie [French], Geology Archipelago. Géologie, Archipel de Pointe: Geology Archipel- ago: see Géologie Archipelago. GEOLOGY, CAPE: low, gravel-covered cape marking the W. end of Botany Bay, on the S. side of Granite Hbr. in Victoria Land; in about 77°00’S., 162°35’E. Charted and named by the western geo- logical party of the BrAE 1910-13, who established their base on this cape. GEORGE, CAPE: cape about 6 mi. ESE. of Barff Pt., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°16’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named it for George III, King of Great Britain. George Bay: see Hound Bay. GEORGE BRYAN COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica along the S. shore of Bellings- hausen Sea, extending from the cape at the W. side of the entrance to Carroll Inlet, in about 79°W.., to the westernmost point visible on the USAS flight of Dec. 22, 1940, in about 85°W. Named by the US-SCAN for R. Adm. George S. Bryan, Hydrog- rapher of the U. S. Navy, 1938-46, under whose direction noteworthy contributions to polar geog- raphy were made. George Getz Shelf Ice: see Getz Ice Shelf. George Harbour, Cape: see Godthul. GEORGE V COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica lying between Point Alden, in 142°02’E., and 153°00’E. Explored in 1912-13 by members of the Main Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named for King George V of England. The area immediately eastward of this coast has not been explored by land or ship parties, but has GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA been photographed from the air, in part, by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Not adopted: King George V Coast, King George V Land, Kong George V-Land [Norwegian], Konig George V-Land [German]. George IV Sea: see Weddell Sea. GEORGE MURRAY, MOUNT: flat-topped moun- tain about 3,600 ft. in el., lying on the S. side of Davis Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 75°52’S., 161°55’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott who named it for George R. M. Murray of the Brit- ish Museum staff, dir. of the scientific staff for Scott’s expedition. GEORGE VI SOUND: major fault depression, about 300 mi. long in the shape of the letter J, which skirts the E. and S. shores of Alexander I Island, separating it from Palmer Pen. and Robert English Coast; centering in about 71°S., 68°W. The sound is ice covered and varies from about 15 mi. to more than 40 mi. wide. Disc. by Lincoln Ellsworth who flew over it in 1935. It was ex- plored by the BGLE, in 1936-37, and by the USAS in 1940. Named by Rymill, leader of the BGLE, for George VI, King of England. Not adopted: King George VI Sound. GEORGES, CAPE: the N. tip of De Rongé I., lying about 8 mi. SW. of Cape Anna, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°41’S., 62°41’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Georges Bay: see King George Bay. Georgia, Isle of; Georgia Del Sur, Isla: see South Georgia. GERD ISLET: islet about 2.5 mi. W. of Cape Vik, lying at the E. side of the entrance to Nor- way Bight, off the S. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°46’W. Charted and probably named by a Nor. whaling exp. under Sgrlle, who made a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted: Gerd Island. ; Gerlache, Cape: see De Gerlache, Cape. Gerldche Point: see De Gerlache Point. Gerlache Strait: see De Gerlache Strait. GESSNER PEAK: peak about 10,800 ft. in el., which stands immediately N. of Mt. Habermehl in the Muhlig-Hofmann Mtns. of New Schwabenland; in about 71°47’S., 6°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under ‘Ritscher, and named for the man- ager of the German Hansa-Luftbild Corporation. 139 Gestlingen: see Goslings Islets. Getz Shelf Ice: see Getz Ice Shelf. GETZ ICE SHELF: ice shelf in Wrigley Gulf, along the shore of northeastern Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°S., 129°W. The topographical and locational definition of this feature must remain indefinite until clarified by further exploration. Disc. in December 1940 by the USAS and named for George F. Getz, of Chicago, Ill., who helped furnish the seaplane for the expedition. Not adopted: George Getz Shelf Ice, Getz Shelf Ice. Gibb Island: see Gibbs Island. GIBBON BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. long and wide, which lies between Rayner Pt. and The Turret along the E. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°12’W. Probably first sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Na- thaniel Palmer, in the course of their joint cruise in December 1821. Charted in 1933 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for the ship’s surgeon, Dr. G. M. Gibbon. GIBBS ISLAND: island which lies about 18 mi. SSW. of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°30’S., 55°36’W. James Weddell, Master, RN, whose chart of the islands appeared in 1825, seems first to have used the present name which is now established international usage. Not adopted: Gibb Island, Gibbs Islands, Narrow Isle, Rainoff’s Island. Gilbert Grosvenor Range: see Grosvenor Range. GILCHRIST GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing NE. from the continental ice to Budd Coast, about 10 mi. NW. of Fox GI1.; in about 65°45’S., 114°15’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Dr. Ed- ward Gilchrist, acting surgeon on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. GILES, MOUNT: highest of a group of glaciated mountains, snow-free only on the heights, marking the W. side of the entrance to Cordell Hull Bay, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°10’S., 137°00’W. Disc. on aerial flights made from West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for T. Sgt. Walter R. Giles, USMC, co-pilot and radio operator on sev- eral of these flights. Not adopted: Mount Carrol Kettering. GILLIES ISLETS: three small, rocky islets pro- truding above Shackleton Ice Shelf, about 6 mi. N. of Cape Moyes, off Queen Mary Coast; in 66°32’S. 96°24’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA of the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named the group for F. J. Gillies, chief engineer of the exp. ship Aurora. Astronomical control was estab- lished on the central islet by USN Op. Wml. per- sonnel in January 1948. Not adopted: Gillies Is- lands, Gillies Nunatak, Gillies Nunataks. Gillies Nunataks: see Gillies Islets. GILLOCK ISLAND: ice-covered island about 17 mi. long and 2 to 3 mi. wide, with numerous out- crops exposed along its flanks, aligned in a NNW.— SSE. direction across the main flow of Baker Three Gl. and lying about 14 mi. W. of Jennings Promon- tory, the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°12’S., 71°00’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for Lt. Robert A. Gillock, USN, navigator on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. GILMOUR, MOUNT: mountain, above 2,000 ft. in el., on the central part of the irregular ridge separating Crevasse Valley Gl. and Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°55’S., 144°38’W. Disc. in 1940 by mem- bers of West Base of the USAS. Named for Harold P. Gilmore, recorder, and subsequently historian and administrative asst. to the exp. commander. GIRARD BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. long and wide, indenting the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Cape Cloos and Mt. Scott; in 65°09’S., 64°00’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Named by the FrAE 1903-5, under Charcot, for Jules Girard of the Paris Société de Géographie. GIRDLER ISLET: narrow islet at the S. side of Mutton Cove, lying about 0.2 mi. SW. of Cliff It. and some 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. GIST, MOUNT: mountain about 4,000 ft. in el., marked by a cluster of small peaks protruding above the continental ice, standing about 6 mi. WNW. of Mt. Strathcona on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°19’S., 98°42’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Francis J. Gist, USN, co-pilot and navigator on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. GJERTSEN, MOUNT: mountain about 3 mi. E. of Mt. Grier, which together form the NW. end of the La Gorce Mtns. standing at the E. side and near the head of Robert Scott Gl. in the Queen 140 Maud Range; in about 86°40’S., 147°50’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and so named in an attempt to reconcile Byrd’s discoveries with the names applied in 1911-12 by the Nor. exp. under Roald Amundsen. Amundsen had named a peak in this vicinity for Lt. Hg. F. Gjertsen of the Norwegian Navy, second mate of the Fram, Amundsen’s exp. ship, and later ice pilot for the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Not adopted: Mount F. Gjertsen. Gjeslingene: see Goslings Islets. GLACIER BAY: small bay formed by the grounded, concave seaward front of McDonald Gl. along Caird Coast; in about 75°20’S., 26°15’W. Disc. and named in January 1915 by a Br. exp. under Shackleton. GLACIER BLUFF: abrupt glacier face marking the E. end of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°01’S., 26°26’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. GLACIER BLUFF: ice cliff about 170 ft. in el. forming the inner N. side of the entrance to Yankee Hbr., Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S., 59°48’W. Charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Glacier Dome: see McLeod Hill. Glacier Terra Nova: see Astrolabe Glacier. Glacier Tongue: see Helen Glacier Tongue. Glandaz, Cape: see Glandaz Point. GLANDAZ POINT: point forming the S. side of the entrance to Deloncle Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°06’S., 63°55’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for A. Glandaz. Not adopted: Cape Glandaz. GLENZER GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the continental ice to Knox Coast, about 5 mi. W. of Conger Gl.; in about 66°05’S., 103°28’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. (j.g.) Hubert Glenzer, Jr., USN, pilot with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in operations re- sulting in the establishment of astronomical con- trol stations along the coast from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. Gletcher-Joch: see Ross Pass. GNEISS HILLS: two prominent hills, about 900 ft. in el., lying on the W. side of McLeod Gl. in the SW. part of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 45°39’W. So named by the FIDS, following their survey of 1947, because a band of pink gneiss out- crops near the summits. GNEISS POINT: point about 6 mi. N. of Cape Bernacchi, in front of the Wilson Piedmont Gl. along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°24’S., 163°40’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and so named because of the gneissic granite found there. GNOME ISLET: rocky islet lying between the W. side of Blaiklock I. and Thomson Head near the head of Bourgeois Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°33’S., 66°50’W. First surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the resemblance of the islet to a small gnomelike creature rising from the sea. GNOMON ISLET: rocky islet about 280 ft. in el., lying close N. of Point Wild, off the N. side of Ele- phant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°01’S., 54°59’W. Charted and named by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16. So named be- cause when viewed from Point Wild the shape of the islet is suggestive of the elevated arm of a sundial. Goat Hull Harbour; Godthul. Godthull Harbour: see GOCKEL CREST: mountain crest of New Schwabenland, in about 72°42’S., 0°10’W., lying immediately N. of the nameless plateau projection with which it forms the upper portion of the E. wall of Penck Trough. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938- 39, under Ritscher, and named for Wilhelm Gockel, meteorological assistant on the expedition. GODTHUL: bay about 1 mi. wide between Cape George and Long Pt., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°18’W. The name Godthul (Good Hollow) dates back to the period 1905-12, and was probably applied by Norwegian sealers and whalers working in the area. Not adopted: Cape George Harbour, Goat Hull Harbour, Godthul Bay, Godthull Harbour, Goothul. GOLD HARBOR: small bay about 5 mi. SSW. of Cape Charlotte, with Bertrab Gl. at its head, along the E. end of South Georgia; in 54°37’S., 35°56’W. The name appears to have taken root through com- mon usage by sealers and whalers and is now well established. GOLDIE, CAPE: snow-covered cape about 13 mi. SE. of Cape Lyttelton, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°46’S., 165°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for 141 Sir George Goldie, a member of the committee which made the final draft of the instructions for the expedition. GONDOLA RIDGE: rocky ridge about 1,800 ft. in el., extending NNE. from Mt. Suess for about 2 mi., in Victoria Land; in about 77°01’S., 161°48’H. Charted by the western geological party of the BrAE, 1910-13, who so named it because Mt. Suess, to which the ridge is joined, resembles a gondola in shape. Not adopted: Gondola Nunakol. Gondola Nunakol: see Gondola Ridge. GONVILLE AND CAIUS RANGE: series of snow- covered peaks, about 3,000 to 4,000 ft. in el., form- ing the S. wall of the Mackay Gl. basin for a dis- tance of about 10 mi., in Victoria Land; in about 77°05/S., 162°10’E. First charted by the BrAE un- der Scott, 1910-13. Named for Gonville and Caius. College of Cambridge Univ., the alma mater of several members of the expedition. GOODALE, MOUNT: high granitic peak of the Will Hays Mountains, rising to about 7,000 ft. in el., standing between Amundsen and Robert Scott Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°58’S., 155°25’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Laurence Gould, and named by Byrd for Edward E. Goodale, a mem- ber of that party. GOODENOUGH, CAPE: ice-covered cape, with a small glacier tongue along its E. side, marking the W. side of the entrance to Porpoise Bay and forming the northernmost projection of Norths Highland, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°10’S., 126°20’E. Disc. by BANZARE under Mawson on a distant aerial flight in January 1931, and named by him for Adm. Sir William Goodenough, Pres. of the Council, Royal Geographical Soc., 1930-33. GOODENOUGH GLACIER: broad sweeping glacier flowing from the W. shore of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound; in 72°00’S., 66°40’W. Disc. in 1936 by Stephenson, Fleming, and Bertram of the BGLE, under Rymill, while exploring George VI Sound. Named by Rymill for Margaret Good- enough, wife of Adm. Sir William Goodenough, who was one of the principal supporters in raising funds for the expedition. Not accepted: Margaret Good- enough Glacier. GOORKHA CRATERS: group of mountains and hills about 4,000 ft. in el., lying in the Britannia Range about 12 mi. SE. of Mt. Reeves, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°50’S., 159°10’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Goothul; see Godthul. GORDON, CAPE: jagged headland about 1,100 ft. in el., forming the E. end of Vega I., lying S. of the NE, tip of Palmer Pen.; in 68°51’S., 57°03’W. Disc. by a Br, exp., 1839-48, under Ross and named by him for Capt. William Gordon, RN, a Lord Com- missioner of the Admiralty. Gordon Bennet, Ile: see Edgell, Mount. GOSLINGS ISLETS: scattered group of numer- ous islets and rocks lying close S. and W. of Cape Meier, off the S. coast of Coronation I., South Ork- ney Is.; in 60°39'S., 45°55’W. First charted and named “Gestlingen” by Petter Sorlle in 1912-18. This was corrected to “Gjeslingene” (The Goslings) on a later chart by Sorlle. An English form of the name was recommended by the Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Gestlingen [Norwegian], Gjeslingene [Norwegian]. GOSSLER ISLETS: string of N.-S. trending islets about 1.5 mi. W. of Cape Albert de Monaco, Anvers I, and extending about 5 mi. southward in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 64°17°W. Disc. and named by a Ger, exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. Not adopted: Gossler Islands. GOUDIER ISLET: islet composed of bare polished rock, lying about 100 yards N. of Jougla Pt. in the harbor of Port Lockroy, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50'S., 68°31’W. Disc. by the FraAk, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for E. Goudier, chief engineer of the exp. ship Francais. Goudry, Mount: see Gaudry, Mount. Gould, Mount; Gould Peak: see Charles Gould Peak. GOULD, MOUNT: a massif rising in the south- central portion of the Tapley Mtns. and forming part of the N. wall of Albanus Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°45’S., 149°00’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Laurence Gould. Named by Byrd for Pres. Laurence M, Gould of Carleton College, polar ex- plorer, who served as geologist and second-in-com- mand with this expedition. GOULD BAY: bay which indents the Filchner Ice Shelf in the S, part of Weddell Sea; in about 78°25'S., 44°00°W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, and named by him for Laurence M. Gould. Not adopted: Larry Gould Bay. GOULDEN COVE: southern of two coves at the head of Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 142 58°385’W. Probably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who surveyed Admiralty Bay in December 1909. GOULD NUNATAK: peak rising above the icecap of Enderby Land about 10 mi. SE. of Mt. Hurley; in about 66°30’S., 51°20’E. Disc. and named in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson. Goupil, Cape: see Legoupil, Cape. GOURDIN ISLET: largest islet in a group of islets and rocks about 1 mi. N. of Cape Siffrey, the N. tip of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°12’S., 57°18’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for Ens. Jean Gourdin of the exp. ship Astrolabe. The islet was re-identified and charted by the FIDS in 1945-47. Not adopted: Gourdin Rock. Gourdin Rock: see Gourdin Islet. GOURDON, MOUNT: the summit of a NS. trending mountain about 3,100 ft. in el., centrally located in the S. half of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°05’S., 64°00’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Ernest Gourdon, geologist of the expe- dition. GOURDON GLACIER: glacier, about 4 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying 4 mi. SW. of Ekel6f Pt., and flowing in a SE. direction into the central part of Markham Bay on the E. coast of James Ross I.; in 64°15’S., 57°22°W. It has a conspicuous rock wall at its head. First seen and surveyed by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, who named it for Ernest Gourdon, geologist and glaciologist of the French Antarctic Expedition, 1903-5. GOURLAY PENINSULA: ice-free peninsula, which is 200 yards wide at its base and widens to 800 yards, forming the SW. extremity of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44'S., 45°36°W. The E. end of the peninsula divides into three arms, Panto- mime, Pageant and Gourlay Points. Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, applied by the Br—APC, de- rives from the nearby Gourlay Point. GOURLAY POINT: southernmost of three fin- ger-like points which form the SE. end of Signy I, in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°35°W. Charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for R. Gourlay, a third engineer of the ship. Gouts, Ile: see Gamma Island. GOUVERNBEUR ISLET: low rocky islet about 1.4 mi. WSW. of Pétrel I., lying close N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue at the S. end of Géologie Arch., off GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Adélie Coast; in about 66°40’S., 139°57’E. Photo- graphed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted and named by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51. Liotard was the first man to encamp on the islet, and, as leader of the FrAE, also held the honorary post of governor. GOVERNOR ISLANDS: group of islands and rocks extending for about 1.25 mi. from Penguin Pt., Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°31’S., 45°57’W. Disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in December 1821. The name appears on a chart based upon a running survey of the South Orkney Is., in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain. Not adopted: Guverngrens Islands. GRACE, CAPE: ice-covered cape, marked by prominent rock outcrops at its NW. end and scat- tered moraine deposits on its W. side, lying at the S. side of Edisto Ice Tongue and forming the E. portal of the valley occupied by Scott Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°26’S., 100°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Philip J. Gist, USN, pilot with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in operations which resulted in the establishment of astronomical control stations from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. GRACE GLACIER: glacier which flows N. into Ample Bay, at the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°04’/S., 37°24’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who named it for his wife, Mrs. Grace Barstow Murphy. GRACE McKINLEY, MOUNT: peak, about 2,500 ft. in el., standing near the head of Sulzberger Bay and marking the S. end of the Edsel Ford Ranges, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°54’S., 148°15’W. Disc. on the ByrdAE flight of Dec. 5, 1929, and named by R. Adm. Byrd for the wife of Capt Ashley C. McKinley, aerial photographer and third-in- command of the expedition. Graf Lerchenfeld Gletscher: see Lerchenfeld Glacier. GRAHAM COAST: that portion of the W. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Renard at the SW. side of the entrance to Flandres Bay, in 65°01/S., 63°43’W., to Cape Bellue, the N. side of the entrance to Marin Darbel Bay, in 66°20’S., 65°59’W. Named for Sir James R. G. Graham, First Lord of the Admiralty at the time John Biscoe explored along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1831. Not adopted: Graham Land. 143 Graham Land: see Graham Coast; Palmer Pen- insula. Graicie Point: see Craigie Point. GRAN, MOUNT: flat-topped mountain about 6,300 ft. in el., overlooking the upper portion of Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 76°59’S., 160°58’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and named for Tryggve Gran, ski expert with the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Tryggve Gran. GRANDIDIER CHANNEL: the body of water lying between the northern Biscoe Is. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; centering in about 65°45’S., 65°00’W. Charted and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Alfred Grandidier was Pres. of the Paris Geographical Soc. at about that time. GRANITE HARBOR: embayment about 11 mi. wide and of similar length, marking the seaward end of a deep valley between Cape Archer and Cape Roberts, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°57’S., 162°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott in January 1902, while searching for safe winter quarters for the exp. ship Discovery, and so named because of the great granite boul- ders found on its shores. GRAPTOLITE ISLAND: islet about 0.5 mi. long, which lies in Fitchie Bay about 1.2 mi. W. of Cape Dundas, the E. end of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44/S., 44°28’W. Disc. by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who so named it because graptolitic fossils were found on the island. GRASSHOLM: islet about 1 mi. S. of Frida Hole, along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°58’W. The name Em Island was given for this feature, probably by DI personnel who surveyed this coast in 1926. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that this feature is known locally as ‘“Grassholmen,” and that Em Island is unknown locally. The indefinite form of the name, Grassholm, has been approved. Not adopted: Em Island, Grassholmen [Norwegian]. Grassholmen: see Grassholm. GRASS ISLAND: conspicuous island lying across the entrance to Stromness Hbr., in Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°40’W. This island was known as Mutton Island as early as 1912, but since 1920 the name Grass Island has been con- sistently used. Not adopted: Mutton Island. GRAVENOIRE ROCK: small rock outcrop about 1 mi. SE. of Rock X, protruding above the conti- nental ice at the E. side of Victor Bay, on Adélie GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Coast; in 66°21’S., 136°43’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, and so named be- cause of its resemblance to Gravenoire, the name of a puy or dome-shaped hill overlooking the city of Clermont-Ferrand, which lies in the chain of extinct voleanoes forming the Monts D’Auvergne of central France. Gravier, Massif; Gravier, Mount; Gravier, Som- met: see Gravier Peaks. GRAVIER PEAKS: series of three prominent, ice-covered peaks, the central and highest being 7,600 ft. in el., situated about 9 mi. ESE. of The Gullet and extending for 8 mi. in a WSW.-ENE. direction between the head of Laubeuf Fjord and Lallemand Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°12’S., 67°15’W. First sighted and roughly positioned in 1903 by the FrAE under Charcot, who named the feature for Charles Gravier, French zoologist. Surveyed in 1909 by. the FrAE under Charcot, at which time the individual peaks mak- ing up this group were first identified. The data for the present description is largely based upon a resurvey of the peaks in 1948 by the FIDS. Not adopted: Massif Gravier [French], Mount Gravier, Sommet Gravier, Sommets Gravier [French]. GRAY, CAPE: cape, marking the E. side of the entrance to Commonwealth Bay, which lies at the N. end of a small rocky island joined by an ice ramp to the continental ice overlying George V Coast; in about 66°51’S., 143°22’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for Percy Gray, second officer on the exp. ship Awrora. GRAY, MOUNT: rounded, ice-worn mountain several thousand ft. in el., surmounting the E. side of the entrance to Cordell Hull Bay, on Hobbs Coast; in about 75°05’S., 135°30’W. Disc. on aerial flights in 1940 by the USAS, and named for Orville Gray, aviation machinist’s mate, plane captain on these flights. Not adopted: Mount Jane Wade. GRAY NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about 1.5 mi. W. of Arctowski Nunatak in the Seal Nuna- taks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°07’S., 60°08’W. First charted by the SwedAE under Nordenskjoéld during a sledge journey in 1902, and named by him, probably for Capt. David Gray, whaling skipper of Peterhead, Scotland. Gray had planned an exp. to the Weddell Sea in 1891 but the plan was abandoned due to a lack of funds. 144 Great Hadnakken: see Stor Hanakken Mountain. Great Mackellar Islet: see Greater Mackellar Islet. GREATER MACKELLAR ISLET: largest of the Mackellar Islets, lying about 1.5 mi. NNW. of Cape Denison in the center of Commonwealth Bay, along George V Coast; in about 66°58’S., 142°39’E. Disc. and named by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14. Not adopted: Great Mackellar Islet. Great Piedmont Glacier: see Wilson Piedmont Glacier. GREEN, CAPE: low ice cliff forming the S. extremity of the SE. lobe of Tabarin Pen.; on the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°38’S., 56°54’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1946 and named for Michael C. Green, FIDS geologist who lost his life when the base hut at Hope Bay burned in Novem- ber 1948. Green Bay: see Doubtful Bay. GREEN ICE RISES: two swellings of the ice where the Shackleton Ice Shelf overrides an under- lying island or islands, about 5 mi. NE. of the E. end of Henderson I., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°22’S., 97°25’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for Duane L. Green, radio operator and recorder with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established astronomical control stations Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts during January-February 1948. GREEN ISLAND: small, rounded tussock-cov- ered island which lies close off the S. tip of South Georgia, about 1 mi. SE. of Cape Disappointment; in 54°53’S., 36°06’W. The name “Green Islands,” derived from their covering of tussock grass, was given in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook to a group of three islands lying close off Cape Disappoint- ment. The name ‘“Griine Insel” or ‘“Grin-Insel,” meaning Green Island, was used for this island by Kohl-Larsen in 1930, presumably because of local usage. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that whalers and sealers, in practice, use three separate names for the individual islands, and that the name Green Island has been limited to this northern- most island. Brgde Island is the central island and First Rock is southernmost of the three. The name “Green Islands” given by Cook for the three islands is apparently not needed and had dropped from use. Not adopted: Griine Insel [German], Grtin-Insel [German]. Greenland, Cape: see Gronland, Cape. GREEN PEAK: conspicuous peak about 2 mi. W. of Van Ryswyck Pt., the E. tip of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°35’S., 62°53’W. Disc. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. GREEN POINT: rocky point which forms the SE. end of Fold I., lying about 3 mi. N. of the W. side of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about 67°22’S., 59°38’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on William Scoresby in February 1936. Not adopted: Rundneset [Nor- wegian]. GREEN REEF: group of low rocks lying in Neumayer Chan. about 0.25 mi. off the E. side of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°44’S., 63°17’'W. Charted by members of H.M.S. Snipe in January 1948 and so named because of its proximity to Green Spur, about 1 mi. northwestward. GREEN SPUR: green colored peak, probably above 3,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of the mouth of Copper Gl. about 1 mi. E. of Copper Peak, on the SE. side of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°43’S., 63°18’W. Probably first seen by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a map based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. GREENWICH ISLAND: island about 16 mi. long and from 0.5 to 7 mi. wide, which lies between Robert and Livingston Islands, in the South Shet- land Is.; in 62°30’S., 59°47’W. The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now established inter- national usage. Not adopted: Beresino Island, Greenwich Islands, Sartorius Island. GREGORY, CAPE: cape which lies on the W. side of Smith I. about 3 mi. SW. of the NW. ex- tremity of the island, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°55’/S., 62°34’W. The name appears on a chart based on work by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31, and is now established international usage. GREGORY ISLAND: islet lying about 2 mi. NW. of Cape Archer off Victoria Land; in about 76°50’S., 162°58’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. At that time it was thought to be a cape and was named Point Gregory for Prof. John Walter Greg- ory, Dir. of the Civilian Scientific Staff for the BrNAE in 1901. The feature was determined to be an island by the BrAE, under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Gregory Point. Gregory Point: see Gregory Island. GREMLIN ISLET: small rocky islet which lies close off the NW. tip of Red Rock Ridge, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°16’S., 67°12’W. First 145 surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The islet was used as a site for a depot by FIDS in 1948-49, and was so named by them because of the mysterious disappearance of a ration box left there by a FIDS sledging party. GREY ISLET: islet about 0.6 mi. S. of Michelsen I. and about 1 mi. W. of the S. part of Fredriksen I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 45°02’W. This islet appears to be first charted and named Holmen Graa on a map by the Norwegian whaler Capt. Petter Sgrlle, who made a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Grey Islet is the English translation of the Norwegian name. Not adopted: Holmen Graa [Norwegian]. GRIBB BANK: submarine bank lying N. of Wil- helm II Coast; extending from 61°S. to 63°S., and from 87° E. to 89°E. Disc. by gunner Krog Ander- sen of a Nor. exp. under Christensen, 1936-37, and named for his whale catcher, the Gribb. GRIER, MOUNT: a gable-shaped mountain about 10,000 ft. in el., standing at the E. side of the head of Robert Scott Gl., and forming the most northwesterly extension of the La Gorce Mtns., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°14’S., 148°20’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Dr. G. Layton Grier, head of the L. D. Caulk Co. of Milford, Del., who contributed dental supplies to the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928— 30 and 1933-35. GRIFFITH, MOUNT: peak about 5,500 ft. in el., lying close N. of the Will Hays Mtns., between Amundsen and Robert Scott Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°50’S., 155°30’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party and named by Byrd for Raymond Griffith, of Twen- tieth Century-Fox Pictures, who assisted in assem- bling motion-picture records of the expedition. GRIFFITH NUNATAKS: group of rock expo- sures rising above the ice on the S. side of the upper rim of Balchen Gl., in the N. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land in about 76°27’S., 143°37’W. Disc. by the USAS in aerial flights over this area in 1940, and named for Clyde W. Griffith, machinist and tractor operator of this expedition. GRIMMINGER, MOUNT: cone-shaped, mostly ice-covered mountain about 5,500 ft. in el., standing on the N. side of Meinardus Gl., close E. of its juncture with Haines Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°18’S., 62°18’W. Disc. and _ photo- graphed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for George Grimminger, American meteorologist and joint author of the meteorologi- cal reports of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and the Byrd- AE, 1933-35, and a member of the latter expedition. GRIM ROCK: rock about 3.5 mi. SSE. of Gedges Reef and some 11 mi. WNW. of Cape Trois Pérez, lying in Grandidier Chan. off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°24’S., 64°32’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. The name is not a personal name. GRINDLE ROCK: rock about 700 ft. in el., lying about 0.7 mi. W. of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°03’S., 26°37’W. Charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named by them for Sir Gilbert E. A. Grindle, Permanent Under-Secretary of State for the British Colonies. GRONLAND, CAPE: cape which forms the west- ernmost of the northern extremities of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 63°32’W. Disc. by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann, who named it for his exp. ship, the Gronland. It was later charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Not adopted: Cape Greenland. Grosse Eisebene: see Ross Shelf Ice. GROSVENOR RANGE: a group of ridges rising to about 10,500 ft. in el., which stand close NW. of the northwest-facing escarpment of the Queen Maud Range that also marks the head of Shackle- ton Gl. some 20 mi. to the NE., bordering the south polar plateau and pierced by several glaciers; ex- tending from about 85°40’S., 175°00’E. to about 86°25’/S., 179°E. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929, and named by him for Gilbert Grosvenor, then Pres. of the National Geographic Soc., which helped finance the expedition. Not adopted: Gilbert Grosvenor Range. GROTTO GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, which flows E. to George VI Sound between Belemnite Pt. and Ablation Pt.; in 70°45’S., 68°40’W. It is about 3 mi. wide where it emerges from the coastal mountains, and then widens to about 7 mi. at its mouth. It is about 15 mi.long. This glacier was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because a sledge dog was rescued from a crystal-lined crevasse in this glacier. 146 GROTTO ISLAND: narrow islet with a serrated coastline, lying about 0.2 mi. NNW. of Galindez I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°15°W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. GROWLER ROCK: rock about 0.75 mi. NNW. of Cape Lions Rump, the W. side of the entrance to King George Bay, King George I., in 62°07'S., 58°07’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. The term growler generally is used to denote small pieces of ice barely showing above water. GRUBER MOUNTAINS: small mountain group about 8,500 ft. in el., lying in the Muhlig-Hofmann Mtns. between the Mayr and Bundermann Ranges on the W. and the Loesener Platform on the E., in New Schwabenland; in about 71°45’S., 3°45’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Erich Gruber, radio operator on the Boreas, one of the flying boats used by the expedi- tion. Gruening, Mount: see Andrew Jackson, Mount. GRUENING GLACIER: broad glacier descending SE. between steep rock walls to the NW. part of Hilton Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°52’S., 61°55’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight down this glacier from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940. Named for Ernest H. Gruening, Dir. of the Div. of Territories and Island Possessions, U. S. Dept. of the Interior, during the inception of the USAS and member of the Executive Committee by which the USAS was directed. GRUNDEN ROCK: rock about 40 ft. in el., sur- rounded by a group of smaller rocks, lying close E. of Hut Cove along the SE. side of the entrance to Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 56°58’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4. The FIDS, 1945, named the entire group of rocks for Toralf Grunden, member of the SwedAE who wintered at Hope Bay in 1903, but in 1952 the name Grunden was restricted to the largest rock in this group for easier reference to the light beacon established by the Argentine Govt. on the main rock during the previous season. Not adopted: Grunden Rocks. Griine Insel; Griin-Insel: see Green Island. GRYTVIKEN: settlement and port of entry for shipping, lying at the head of King Edward Cove on the W. side of Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°31’W. The area adjacent to this cove was visited by J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4. Anders- son named the place Grytviken, meaning Pot Cove, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA because he found numerous boiling pots left there by early sealers. Guardian Islands: see ®ygarden Islands. GUARDIAN ROCK: low ice-free rock lying near the head of Bigourdan Fjord, 1 mi. N. of Parvenu Pt., Pourquoi Pas I., close off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°33’S., 67°15’W. First surveyed in 1948— 49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the position of this rock which guards the NW. en- trance to The Narrows. GUEBRIANT ISLETS: two islets lying 4 mi. S. of Jenny I. and 5 mi. SE. of Cape Alexandra, Ade- laide I., in the N. part of Marguerite Bay; in 67°48’S., 68°24’W. Disc. and first charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Father Guébriant, French missionary to China. The islets were surveyed by the FIDS in 1948. Not adopted: De Guebriant Islets. GUEGUEN, MOUNT: sharp rocky peak, about 1,200 ft. in el., standing about 0.25 mi. NW. of Mt. Louise in the N. part of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°00’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for F. Guéguen, stoker of the exp. ship Francais, and later on the Pourquoi Pas?. Not adopted: Guéguen Peak, Sommet F. Guéguen [French]. GUEPRATTE ISLAND: ice-covered island about 1.5 mi. long, lying between Anvers and Brabant Islands at the E. side of the entrance to Fournier Bay, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 63°00’W. This island was first shown on the Friederichsen map of 1895, embodying the 1873-74 explorations of a Ger. exp. under Dallmann. It was later charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Captain Guépratte, French Navy. In 1927 DI personnel on the Discovery, unaware of the original naming, applied the name Discovery Island. Not adopted: Discovery Island. GUERNSEY, MOUNT: isolated, mainly ice-cov- ered mountain, about 4,100 ft. in el., lying 6 mi. N. of the summit of Mt. Edgell, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°20’S., 68°14’"W. The name “Ile Guernesey” was given in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, after the island of Guernsey off the coast of France. The position of “Ile Guernesey” on the FrAE maps does not agree with that of the mountain described above, but from the FrAE narrative and sketches by Bongrain, FrAE sur- veyor, it has been determined that this mountain was the feature seen in 1909 by Charcot from a position near the center of the entrance to Mar- guerite Bay. .The mountain was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE, but no name was assigned. It was 147 further surveyed by FIDS in 1948. Not adopted: Ile Guernesey [French], White Cross Mountain. Guernesey, Ile: see Guernsey, Mount. GUEST ISLAND: snow-covered island, about 40 mi. long in a NE.-SW. direction, lying W. of Balchen Gl. along the coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°25’S., 148°00’W. Mitchell Peak, located on this island, was sighted by the ByrdAE in 1929. The insularity of Guest Island was determined by the USAS in 1940. Named for Mrs. Amv Guest, con- tributor to the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Not adopted: Amy Guest Island. GUIDES, THE: group of islets and rocks lying off the KE. side of the entrance to Antarctic Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S. 36°52’W. Charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12. The name appears on a chart based upon surveys of South Georgia by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. GULL CHANNEL: channel, about 0.1 mi. wide, between Dynamite It. and Stonington I. along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41, and so named by them because numerous sea gulls frequented the channel area. GULLET, THE: narrow channel between the E. extremity of Adelaide I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen., separating Hansen I. and Day I. and con- necting the heads of Hanusse Bay and Laubeuf Fjord; in 67°10’S., 67°38’W. This area was first explored in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot who, though uncertain of the existence of the channel, sketched its probable position on the charts of the expedition. The channel was first visited and roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was resurveyed and given this descrip- tive name in 1948 by members of the FIDS. Not adopted: Charcot Strait, Loubet Strait. GULLIVER NUNATAK: nunatak with a flat, ice- free summit, about 1,900 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Adie Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°12’S., 62°40’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for the fictional character in Jonathan Swift’s Gulliver’s Travels, because when viewed from the SE. its appearance is suggestive of a man lying on his back with his head toward the south. GULL LAKE: lake, about 300 yards in diameter, lying close to the SW. shore of King Edward Cove, about 0.5 mi. S. of the whaling station at Grytviken, South Georgia; in 64°17’S., 36°31’W. The feature was first roughly surveyed and named ‘“‘Méwensee’”’ GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA or “Moven See” (meaning Gull Lake) by A. Szie- lasko, who visited South Georgia in 1906. The English form Gull Lake was used by Robert Cush- man Murphy in 1947, in describing his visit to the lake in November 1912. This latter form, recom- mended by the Br-APC in 1954, is approved. Gunnar, Cape: see Kater, Cape. GUNNEL CHANNEL: channel, about 0.5 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, situated in the S. part of Hanusse Bay and separating Hansen I. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°07’S., 67°33’W. First ob- served from the air and roughly charted in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS who gave this descrip- tive name. The channel gives a false impression of such narrowness that a boat could not navigate it without scraping her gunnels (gunwales) on either side. GUNNERUS BANK: submarine bank of consider- able extent, with a minimum depth of 230 fathoms, extending about 50 mi. N. from Riiser-Larsen Pen. at the E. end of Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about 68°00’S., 33°00’E. Disc. on Feb. 1, 1930 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen, and named by him for Rev. Johan Ernst Gunnerus, 1718-73, Bishop of Trondhjem, pioneer naturalist and founder of the Norwegian Academy of Science. GURNEY POINT: small rocky mass, about 2,000 ft. in el., marking the W. extremity of the rock ridge separating Bertram and Ryder Glaciers on Palmer Pen., overlooking George VI Sound; in 71°00’S., 67°28’W. This point was first seen and photo- graphed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Norman A. Gurney, a member of the BGLE, 1934-37. Gustav Bull, Mount: see Gustav Bull Mountains. GUSTAV BULL MOUNTAINS: group of bare, rugged mountain peaks about 1,800 to 2,200 ft. in el., lying SW. of Scullin Monolith and inland from Mac-Robertson Coast; centering in about 67°50’S., 66°13’E. In January and February 1931 personnel on several Norwegian whale catchers made sketches along this coast, and named these mountains for Capt. Gustav B. Bull, at that time whaling manager of the Thorshammer. The BANZARE under Maw- son explored this area from the air in January 1930 and February 1931, and applied names to the in- dividual mountains of this group. Not adopted: Mount Gustav Bull. GUTENKO MOUNTAINS: group of mountains lying WSW. of Hilton Inlet and inland from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 72°15’S., 64°15’W. 148 Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and named by him for Sigmund Gutenko, USN, chief commissary steward with the expedition. Not adopted: Vincent Gutenko Mountains. GUTENKO NUNATAKS: several small elongated nunataks at the head of a small tributary descend- ing SW. into the head of Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°52’S., 143°36’W. Disc. on aerial flights made from the West Base of the USAS in 1940, and named for Sigmund Gutenko, cook and steward at the West Base. Guverngrens Islands: see Governor Islands. GUYOU BAY: bay about 4 mi. long, which in- dents the W. coast of Brabant I. between Claude Pt. and Pasteur Pen., in the Palmer Arch.; in about 64°05’S., 62°38’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Capt. Emile Guyou, French Navy, distinguished in the field of naval sciences and member of the commission which published the scientific results of the expedi- tion. Not adopted: Cuyou Bucht [German]. HAAG, MOUNT: mountain estimated to be over 10,000 ft. in el., lying about 85 mi. E. of Mt. Ulmer in Ellsworth Highland, and about 70 mi. WSW. of Mt. Hassage; in about 77°40’S., 79°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Joseph Haag, head of the Todd Shipyards, New York, which worked on the Ronne exp. ship. Not adopted: Mount Joseph Haag. Haasen, Cape: see Hansen, Cape. HABERMEHL PEAK: about 10,800 ft. in el.; stands immediately S. of Gessner Pk. in the Miuhlig-Hofman Mtns. in New Schwabenland; in about 71°55’S., 6°35’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938— 39, under Ritscher, and named for the then dir. of the German Weather Service. HACKAPIKE BAY: anchorage about 4 mi. NW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., entered W. of False Islet along the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°32’S., 62°53’W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. HADDINGTON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300 ft. in el., surmounting the central part of James Ross I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°14’S., 57°38’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, Dec. 31, 1842, and named by him for the Ear! of Haddington, then First Lord of the Admiralty. Not adopted: Mount Haddington, Mount Ross. HADERICH, MOUNT: mountain about 10,000 ft. in el., lying about 10 mi. S. of Luz Range at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in about 72°18’S., 5°05’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for the proc- urator of the German Lufthansa Corporation. Not adopted: Haderich Mountains, Hadrich Berg [German]. Haderich Mountains: see Haderich, Mount. Hadington, Mount: see Haddington, Mount. Hadrich Berg: see Haderich, Mount. HAEFELI GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, situated at the W. side of Finster- walder Gl. and flowing SSW. toward the head of Lallemand Fjord on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in about 67°17’S., 66°22’W. First surveyed in 1946- 47 by the FIDS, and named by them for Robert Haefeli, Swiss glaciologist. HAFFNER GLACIER: steep valley glacier flow- ing into Berg Bay, in the Robertson Bay area of northern Victoria Land; in about 171°28’S., 169°21’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Colonel Haffner, Dir. of the Govt. Survey of Norway. Haggitts Pillar: see Haggits Pillar. HAGGITS PILLAR: column of rock about 200 ft. in el., lying about 0.1 mi. W. of Scott I., some 315 mi. NNE. of Cape Adare, the NE. extremity of Victoria Land; in about 67°24’S., 179°55’W. Disc. in December 1902 by Capt. William R. Colbeck, RNR, Commander of the Morning, relief ship to the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Not adopted: Haggit’s Pillar, Haggitt’s Pillar, Haggitts Pillar. HAINES GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi. wide, flowing in an ESE. direction and joining Meinardus Gl. immediately E. of Mt. Barkow, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°21’S., 62°33’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 the glacier was photo- graphed from the air by the RARE, who in con- junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for William C. Haines, Ameri- can meteorologist and member of the Byrd Antarc- tic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35, and joint author of the meteorological reports of these two expeditions. HAINES MOUNTAINS: extensive range of bro- ken, ice-capped peaks about 2,500 ft. in el., forming the SW. wall of Hammond Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°30'S., 146°45’°W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934 and named for William C. Haines. 149 Hal Flood, Mount: see Berlin, Mount. Hal Flood Bay: see Okuma Bay. Hal Flood Range, Mount: see Hal Flood Range. HAL FLOOD RANGE: snow-covered peaks about 7,000 ft. in el., with an abrupt, partly buried, north- facing escarpment, lying along the 76th parallel for a considerable distance, in about 134°W. in Marie Byrd Land. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934 from a great distance. Reconnaissance flights of the USAS, 1939-41, explored the range. The name has subsequently been transferred from the princi- pal peak disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934 to the entire range. Not adopted: Mount Hal Flood Range. HALF MOON ISLAND: crescent-shaped island about 1.25 mi. long, lying in the entrance to Moon Bay on the E. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°36’S., 59°57’W. This island was known to sealers in the area as early as 1822. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1935 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not adopted: Johnsons Island. Hallet, Cape: see Hallett, Cape. HALLETT, CAPE: rugged headland about 10 mi. S. of Cape Christie, midway between Cape Adare and Coulman I., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 72°25’S., 170°55’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Thomas R. Hallett, purser on one of the exp. ships, the Erebus. Not adopted: Cape Hallet. Hamarggalten: see Sheehan Islands. Hamberg Fluss: see Penguin River. HAMBERG GLACIER: glacier which flows in an ENE. direction from the NE. side of Mt. Sugartop to the W. side of the head of Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°21’S., 36°31’W. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, who named it for Axel Hamberg, Swedish geographer, miner- alogist and Arctic explorer. HAMBERG LAKE: lake, about 0.5 mi. in diame- ter, lying near the northern outlet of Hamberg Glacier, about 1 mi. W. of Moraine Fjord, Cumber- land East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°32’W. First surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The name derives from the nearby Hamberg Glacier, and was given by A. Szielasko who explored this vicinity in 1906. Hambourg Bay: see Hamburg Bay. HAMBURG BAY: bay indenting the NW. coast of Anvers I. about 5 mi. SW. of Perrier Bay and 12 mi. NE. of Cape Albert de Monaco, in the Palmer GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Arch.; in 64°32’S., 63°55’W. Disc. but incom- pletely defined by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, who named it for Hamburg, Germany, home port of the expedition. The bay was more accurately charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Not adopted: Hambourg Bay. HAMILTON, MOUNT: twin-peak mountain about 7,400 ft. in el., standing on the S. side of Barne Inlet, about 40 mi. SW. of Cape Selborne, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°40’S., 158°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Adm. Sir Richard Vesey Hamilton, who served on Arctic voyages during 1850-54, and who was a member of the BrNAE Ship Committee. HAMILTON, MOUNT: mountain rising to about 5,000 ft. in el., which marks the W. end of the Tapley Mtns., standing at the E. side of the lower reaches of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°39’S., 151°48’W. Disc. in De- cember 1934 by the ByrdAE Geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for G. C. Hamilton, general manager of the McClatchy Newspapers, of Sacramento, California, who was a contributor to the expedition. HAMILTON POINT: flat-topped point marking the S. side of the entrance to Markham Bay on the SE. side of James Ross I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°22’S., 57°18’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, who named it Cape Hamilton after Capt. W. A. B. Hamilton, RN, at that time private secretary to the Earl of Hadding- ton, and later Second Secretary to the Admiralty. The feature was first surveyed by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, and resurveyed by the FIDS in 1953. Point is considered a more suitable descriptive term for the feature than cape. Not adopted: Cape Hamilton. HAMMERSLY, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the E. side of the entrance to Colvocoresses Bay, on Budd Coast; in about 66°00’S., 115°35’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for George W. Hammersly, midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HAMMOND GLACIER: valley glacier about 11 mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing from the Rockefeller Plateau in a NW. direction between the Haines Mtns. and Mt. Woodward to Sulzberger Bay, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°20’S., 146°45’W. Disc. in 1934 by the ByrdAE, and named by Byrd for John Hays Hammond, American mining engineer and philanthropist. Not adopted: Hammond Inlet, John Hayes Ham- mond Inlet, John Hays Hammond Glacier. 150 Hammond Inlet: see Hammond Glacier. HAMPTON, MOUNT: the northernmost peak of the Executive Committee Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°30’S., 127°00’W. Disc. by the USAS on a flight on Dec. 15, 1940, and named for Mrs. Ruth Hampton, Dept. of the Interior member of the USAS Executive Committee. HAMPTON GLACIER: glacier in the NE. part of Alexander I Island, about 25 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, which flows in a NNE. direction along the W. wall of the Douglas Range and enters Schokalsky Bay; in 69°20’S., 70°05’W. First seen from the air and photographed during a flight up this glacier in 1937 by the BGLE. The mouth of the glacier was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. Named for Wilfred E. Hampton of the BGLE, 1934-37, who piloted the airplane that made the above men- tioned flight in 1937. Hamrehovden: see Trethewry Point. Hamreneset: see Bertha Island. HANNAM ISLETS: small group of rocky islets lying about 1 mi. N. of Whetter Nunatak in the E. portion of Commonwealth Bay, off George V Coast; in about 66°56’S., 143°56’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Walter N. Hannam, wireless telegrapher with the AAK Main Base Party. HANSEN, CAPE: cape which separates Marshall and Iceberg Bays on the S. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°36’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a running survey in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain. Not adopted: Cape Haasen. HANSEN ISLAND: island, about 4 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying immediately N. of The Gullet at the head of Hanusse Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°07’S., 67°36’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, who used the provi- sional name North Island for this feature. The island was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and renamed for Leganger H. Hansen, Mgr. at Messrs. Chr. Salvesen’s whaling station at Leith Hbr., South Georgia, 1916-37, who gave great assistance to the BGLE, 1934-37. Not adopted: North Island. HANSEN MOUNTAINS: large group of nunataks which rise to an estimated 7,000 ft. in el., and protrude about 1,000 ft. above the ice level, lying about 55 mi. S. of Stefansson Bay and extending 25 mi. in a NW.-SW. direction, inland from the E. end of Kemp Coast; in about 68°16’S., 58°47’E. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January— February 1937 and mapped from aerial photo- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA graphs taken at that time. Named for H. E. Hansen, Norwegian cartographer who has com- piled maps for this and other Norwegian Antarctic expeditions. HANSEN NUNATAK: beehive-shaped nunatak about 2,600 ft. in el., lying near the middle of Reeves GI., a short distance above its terminus, in Victoria Land; in about 74°46’S., 162°18’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Named by BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. HANUSSE BAY: V-shaped bay, about 20 mi. long in a general N.-S. direction and some 15 mi. wide at its broad N. end, lying between Cape Mascart, Adelaide I., and Cape Shmidt, Palmer Pen.; in about 66°57’S., 67°30’W. Disc. and first charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for the Dir. of the Hydrographic Service of the French Navy. Not adopted: Hanusse Fiord. Hanusse Fiord: see Hanusse Bay. HARBORD GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide descending between Mt. George Murray and Mt. Smith to the coast of Victoria Land, where it forms the Harbord Glacier Tongue; in about 75°58’S., 162°30’E. The glacier takes its name from the Harbord Glacier Tongue, which was named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. HARBORD GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue about 1 mi. wide, forming the seaward extension of Harbord Gl. along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°57’S., 163°00’E. First charted by the BrAE under Shackleton, at which time it extended about 5 mi. into Ross Sea. Named by Shackleton for A. E. Harbord, second officer of the exp. ship Nimrod during the last year of the expedition. Not adopted: Harbord Ice Tongue, Harbord Ice Barrier Tongue. Harbord Ice Barrier Tongue; Harbord Ice Tongue: see Harbord Glacier Tongue. HARBOUR GLACIER: a through glacier about 3 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying on the NW. side of Wiencke I. and extending in a NE.-SW. di- rection between the cove about 1 mi. E. of Noble Peak and Peltier Chan., close S. of Port Lockroy, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°26’W. Prob- ably first seen by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Charted in 1944 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its nearness to the harbor of Port Lockroy. Harbour Heights: see Arrival Heights. HARBOUR POINT: point separating Leith and Stromness Harbors in Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°41’W. This descriptive 151 name was in use as early as 1920 and was prob- ably applied by whalers operating from Stromness Bay. HARCOURT, CAPE: cape which forms the N. side of the entrance to Royal Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 35°58’W. The name dates back to at least 1920 and is now well estab- lished in international usage. Not adopted: Cape Royal. HARCOURT, MOUNT: mountain in the Com- monwealth Range, overlooking the E. side of Beardmore GI. at its junction with Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°46’S., 173°00’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. HARDY POINT: western point of Bellingshausen I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°25’S., 27°04’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for Alister C. Hardy, member of the zoological staff of the Discovery Committee, 1924-28, and prof. of zoology at University College of Hull. HARGREAVES GLACIER: distributary glacier above 2 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the lower reaches of Polar Times Gl., and terminating at the S. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay about 2 mi. W. of Mt. Caroline Mikkelsen, on In- erid Christensen Coast; in about 69°42’S., 73°46’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, and named by him for R. B. Hargreaves, aerial photographer on USN Op. Hijp. flights which ob- tained photographic coverage in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. Not adopted: Margreaves Glacier. Hariholm: see Marinholm. HARKER, MOUNT: mountain of the Gonville and Caius Range, about 3,000 ft. in el., forming the N. wall of Debenham Gl. near its head, in Victoria Land; in about 177°16’S., 161°53’E. Charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Dr. Alfred Harker, noted British petrologist. HARKER GLACIER: glacier which flows in a NE. direction to the SW. end of Moraine Fjord, in Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°31’W. This glacier appears to be first indicated on a 1912 geological map of South Georgia by David Ferguson. Probably named for Alfred Harker. HARKER POINT: point which forms the S. end of Bristol I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°04’S., 26°31’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the Discovery II who named it for A. Harker, naval architect on the staff of the Discovery Committee. HARKNESS, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft. in el., standing close S. of Mt. Zanuck and forming part of the E. wall of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°03’S., 150°30’W. Disc. in December 1934 by ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named at that time by R. Adm. Byrd for Bruce Harkness, friend of Richard S. Russell, Jr., a member of that party. Not adopted: Mount Bruce Harkness. HARMER, MOUNT: peak about 3,700 ft. in el., standing in the north-central portion of Cook I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S., 27°09’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for Sir Sidney F. Harmer, Vice-Chairman of the Discovery Committee. HARMONY COVE: cove entered between Har- mony Pt. and The Toe on the W. side of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°19’S., 59°12’W. Named by American sealers in about 1820 after the sealing vessel Harmony. The Harmony, under Capt. Thomas Ray, was one of several American sealing vessels headquartered at Harmony Cove during the 1820-21 season. HARMONY POINT: point which forms the N. side of the entrance to Harmony Cove, on the W. side of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°19’S., 59°14’W. Charted in 1935 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II. Named after Harmony Cove. Harmony Strait: see Nelson Strait. HARMSWORTH, MOUNT: peak about 9,600 ft. in el., standing at N. end of the Worcester Range NW. of Moore Embayment, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°37’S., 160°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir Alfred Harmsworth, later Viscount Northcliffe, a generous contributor to the expedition. HAROLD BYRD MOUNTAINS: a group of ex- posed rocky peaks and nunataks reaching altitudes of 1,500 to 1,800 ft., extending in a NE.-SW. arc along the N. side of the terminus of Leverett Gl., which separates the group from the Queen Maud Range, and fronting on the Ross Ice Shelf; center- ing in about 85°26’S., 146°30’W. Disc. in Decem- ber 1929 by members of the ByrdAE geological party under Laurence Gould, who climbed Sup- porting Party Mtn. near the W. end of this group and took panoramic photographs from that point. Named for D. Harold Byrd, a cousin of R. Adm. Byrd and a contributor (helped to buy furs) to the expedition. 152 HAROLD JUNE, MOUNT: mountain in the Phil- lips Mtns., about 3,700 ft. in el., standing on the N. side of Balchen Gl. in the Edsel Ford Ranges, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°10’S., 145°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in December 1929, and named for Harold I. June, airplane pilot of the expedition. HARPER POINT: low glaciated point forming the N. end of Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°45’S., 26°29’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for F. H. Harper, Sec. to the Discovery Committee. HARP ISLET: islet at the N. side of Mutton Cove, about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°43’W. Charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and so named because of its distinctive shape. Not adopted: Harp Island. HARPUN ROCKS: submerged rocks lying about 0.1 mi. SE. of Bills Pt., Delta I., in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°59’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel, but may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. Harpun is a Norwegian word mean- ing harpoon. Not adopted: Harpun Rock. Harrison, Cape: see Harrisson, Cape. HARRISON GLACIER; channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the con- tinental ice to the Clarie Coast, about 13 mi. SE. of Cape Carr; in about 66°00’S., 131°25’E. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for George W. Harrison, passed midshipman on. the tender Flying Fish of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HARRISON POINT: point marked by a string of off-lying rocks, lying 1.8 mi. W. of Busen Pt. on the S. side of Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°36’W. The point was charted in 1927 by DI personnel and named Matthews Point for L. Harrison Matthews, British zoologist, member of the staff of the Discovery Investigations, 1924-35, who worked at South Georgia in 1924-27. In 1954, the Br-APC recommended this name be altered to Harrison Point to avoid duplication with Matthews Point (also named for L. Harrison Matthews), a better known feature in Undine Harbor, South Georgia. This change allows Harrison Matthews’ name to be retained for this feature, while the con- fusing duplication of names is avoided. Not adopted: Matthews Point (q.v.). HARRISSON, CAPE: ice-covered cape at the junction of the channel of Denman Gl. and Robin- son Bay, on the Queen Mary Coast; in about GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 66°44’S., 99°00’E. Disc. in December 1912 by the Eastern Party, led by Frank Wild, operating from the Western Base of the AAE under Mawson. Named for Charles T. Harrisson, biologist and artist at the Western Base and a member of the Eastern Party. Not adopted: Cape Harrison. HARRISSON ICE RISES: three swellings of the ice where the Shackleton Ice Shelf overrides an underlying rocky ridge, about 9 mi. NNE. of Cape Moyes, along Queen Mary Coast, in about 66°27’S., 96°28’E. Disc. by the Eastern Sledge Party of the AAK, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for Charles T. Harrisson. Harry Dodson Island: see Dodson Peninsula. HARRY ISLET: ice-capped islet dominated by a truncated pyramidal peak, lying at the S. side of the SE. entrance to the channel between Brabant I. and Liége I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°08‘S., 61°56’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named for a supporter of the expedi- tion. Not adopted: Harry Island. HARTIGAN, MOUNT: prominent massif lying immediately N. of Mt. Sidley in the Executive Com- mittee Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°15’S., 128°00’W. Disc. by the USAS on a flight on Dec. 15, 1940, and named for R. Adm. Charles C. Hartigan, USN, Navy Dept. member of the USAS Executive Committee. HART ROCK: rock about 30 ft. in el., lying about 2 mi. NW. of Herdman Rocks and 3 mi. N. of Cape Dundas, Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°22’W. First charted by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville in 1838. Named in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, for T. John Hart, member of the zoological staff of the Discovery Committee. Harvey Johnston, Mount; Harvey Johnston Peak: see Johnston Peak. HASH ISLET: islet lying in the entrance to Larsen Hbr., on the SE. coast of South Georgia; in 54°49’S., 35°59’W. Roughly surveyed by the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner. It was named Hash Island, probably by DI personnel who resur- veyed the feature in 1927. The name Hash Islet is approved because of the small size of the feature. Not adopted: Hash Island. HASKELL, MOUNT: buttress-type mountain about 4,900 ft. in el., standing at the SW. side of Cabinet Islet between Mounts Denucé and Holmes, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°45’S., 64°16’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Daniel C. Haskell, American bibliographer of the New York Public Library and author of the bibliog- 424589 O -57-11 153 raphy, The United States Exploring Expedition, 1838-42, and its Publications, 1844-1874. HASSAGE, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft. in el., lying near the SW. end of Orville Escarpment, in the NW. portion of Edith Ronne Land; in about 77°28'S., 71°30’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this mountain for Charles Hassage, ship’s engineer on the expedition. HASSEL, MOUNT: one of a group of low-lying peaks barely protruding through the ice of the south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft. in el. at the NE. end of the group containing Mounts Bjaaland and Prestrud, which stand about 20 mi. SW. of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°30’S., 162°15’°W. Disc. by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen in November 1911 on the journey to the South Pole, and named by him for Sverre Hassel, a member of the South Pole Party. Not adopted: Mount S. Hassel, Mount Sverre Hassel. HASWELL ISLET: diamond-shaped islet about 0.8 mi. long and about 300 ft. in el., marking the largest and seaward of the Haswell Its., lying at the E. side of McDonald Bay about 2 mi. N. of Mabus Pt., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°29’S., 93°16’E. Disc. and charted by the Western Base Party of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named by him for Prof. William A. Haswell, zo- ologist at Sydney Univ. and member of the AAE Advisory Committee. Not adopted: Haswell Island. A HASWELL ISLETS: group of rocky islets and rocks lying off Mabus Pt. and extending about 2 mi. seaward, at the E. side of McDonald Bay, off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°30’S., 93°15’E. Charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who applied the name Rookery Islands because of a large em- peror penguin rookery on Haswell It., the largest and seaward islet in the group. The Australian Committee on Antarctic Names proposed in 1955 that the name Haswell be extended to the entire group of islets because of the greater recognition gained by the Haswell Islet name. Not adopted: Rookery Islands. HATCH ISLETS: small group of rocky islets, which marks the physical division between Knox and Budd Coasts, lying at the E. side of the head of Vincennes Bay between the massive tongues of John Quincy Adams and Bond Glaciers; in about 67°00’S., 109°42’E. Delineated from aerial photo- eraphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Ernest B. Hatch, tractor driver with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in trans- porting shore parties which established astronomi- cal control stations from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HATREE, CAPE: cape which forms the SW. tip of Mossman Pen., on the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 44°44’°W. Disc. on the joint cruise in December 1821 by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer. The name appears on Powell’s map published in 1822. Not adopted: Cape McVitie. HAUBERG MOUNTAINS: mountains about 6,000 ft. in el. on Joerg Plateau, lying immediately back of Orville Escarpment; in about 76°48’S., 68°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and named by him for John Hauberg, of Rock Island, Tll., a contributor to the expedition. HAUGE REEF: chain of islets and rocks extend- ing in an ENE. direction from the E. extremity of Annenkov I. to a point about 3 mi. WSW. of Cape Darnley, South Georgia; in 54°28’S., 37°59’W. First charted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellings- hausen. Surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52, and named for Capt. Ole Hauge, of the sealer Albatros, whose knowledge of the coasts of South Georgia was of great assistance to the SGS, 1951-52. HAULAWAY POINT: small rocky point midway along the NE. side of Stonington I., close off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. Resurveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS, who so named the point because it is one of the best places for hauling stores ashore. HAUPT NUNATAK: small nunatak projecting above the continental ice at the N. side of the lower reaches of Vanderford Gl., which is believed to mark the approximate coastline in this portion of Budd Coast where the continental ice extends for some 5 to 10 mi. into the SE. part of Vincennes Bay; in about 66°32’S., 110°48’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Ens. Richard W. Haupt, USN, assistant hydrographic officer with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted the shore parties which established astronomical control stations from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. Hauptinsel: see Brgéde Island. Havre Petter: see Potter Cove. HAVSBOTN: the narrow innermost portion of Liitzow-Holm Bay, at its SE. head, between Prince Olav and Prince Harald Coasts; in about 69°45’S., 38°45’E. Disc. by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen during aerial mapping flights in this area in January and February, 1937. Literally this name means “ocean gulf,” and was applied by 154 the old Norse to the polar sea north of Norway. This feature was first shown and first named on H. E. Hansen’s Atlas of Parts of the Antarctic Coastal Lands, 1946. HAVSTEIN ISLAND: rocky island about 3 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, rising to about 410 ft. in el., lying about 14 mi. NW. of the entrance to Stef- ansson Bay about 2 mi. off Kemp Coast; in about 67°06’S., 58°51’E. Possibly first seen by DI per- sonnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936, but, if so, it was considered by them as part of the mainland. Mapped as an island by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken on a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—February 1937, and probably so named by them because of its rocky nature and its seaward position. HAWKINS GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti- nental ice to the Knox Coast, about 10 mi. WNW. of Underwood Gl.; in about 66°35’S., 107°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Samuel N. Hawkins, sailmaker on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HAWTHORNE, MOUNT: mountain about 3,400 ft. in el. in the Walker Mtns. on Thurston Pen.; in about 72°25’S., 97°00’W. Disc. on Feb. 27, 1940, by the USAS in a flight from the Bear, and named for Roger Hawthorne, USAS field representative. Not adopted: Mount Mark. HAYES, MOUNT: plateau-type mountain about 3,700 ft. in el., situated at the base of Cole Pen. on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°50’S., 64°10’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Rev. James Gordon Hayes, Antarctic historian and author of Antarctica: A Treatise on the Southern Continent and The Conquest of the South Pole. HAYES PEAK: peak about 800 ft. in el., lying about 2 mi. S. of Cape Bruce on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°27’S., 60°50’E. Disc. on Feb. 18, 1931 by BANZARE under Mawson, and proba- bly named by him for Rev. James Gordon Hayes. Not adopted: Veslekulten [Norwegian]. HAYRICK ISLET: small prominent rock mass, more than 500 ft. in el., between Lodge Rock and Twig Rock in the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°42’S., 67°32’W. The Terra Firma Is. were first visited and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This islet was sur- veyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so named by them because, when seen from the E., its high mass has an appearance suggesting a hayrick. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Hays Mountains: see Will Hays Mountains. Haystack, The: see Haystack Mountain. HAYSTACK MOUNTAIN: mountain about 3,300 ft. in el., with a rounded summit which is sug- gestive of mound or a haystack, standing about 1.5 mi. E. of Mt. England in the NE. part of the Gon- ville and Caius Range, in Victoria Land; in about 77°03’S., 162°37’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: The Haystack. HAZARD ROCK: small isolated rock, 3 ft. high, which lies in Bismarck Strait, 2.5 mi. NE. of Cape Renard, Palmer Pen.; in 64°59’S., 63°44’W. Named by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, following his survey in 1952. This feature is a hazard to navigation in the low visibility which is frequent in this vi- cinity. Healey, Cape: see Healy, Cape. HEALY, CAPE: prominent, square-shaped rock cape forming the N. side of the entrance to Lam- plugh Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°22’S., 60°57’°W. Disc. by members of the USAS who explored this coast by land and from the air in 1940. Named for Joseph D. Healy, member of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and dog driver at the USAS East Base, 1939-41. Not adopted: Cape Healey. HEANEY GLACIER: glacier, about 4 mi. long, which lies close NW. of Cook Gl. and flows NE. and then E. toward Saint Andrews Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°25’S., 36°12’W. Sur- veyed by the SGS, 1951-52. Named by the Br-APC for John B. Heaney, surveyor with the SGS, 1951-52. HEARD ISLAND: island about 23 mi. long, in a NW.-SE. direction, and about 10 mi. wide, sur- mounted by an ice-covered volcanic peak, about 9,000 ft. in el., situated SE. of the Kerguelen Is- lands; in about 53°06’S., 73°30’E. Disc. on Nov. 25, 1853 by Capt. John J. Heard, of the merchant ship Oriental of New London, Conn. Named for Captain Heard by American sealers who began sealing operations at the island soon after word of its discovery. Hearst, Cape: see Wilkins, Cape. HEARST ISLAND: ice-covered, dome-shaped is- land lying about 4 mi. E. of Cape Rymill, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°26’S., 62°10’W. The island is about’36 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 10 mi. wide, and rises to about 1,200 ft. 155 in elevation. First sighted on a flight on Dec. 20, 1928 by Sir Hubert Wilkins. Thinking it was part of the mainland of Antarctica, he named it Hearst Land for William Randolph Hearst, who helped finance the expedition. It was resighted and its insularity ascertained in 1940 by members of the USAS who explored this coast by land and from the air. They named it Wilkins Island. Examina- tion of aerial photographs have shown, however, that this large island is what Wilkins considered Hearst Land. Not adopted: Hearst Land, Wilkins Island. Hearst Land: see Hearst Island. HEDDEN, MOUNT: mountain projecting through the icecap near the N. margin of the New Schwabenland piedmont; in about 72°09’S., 1°10’K. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, and named for Karl Hedden, one of the sailors on the expedition. Heil Peak: see Neill Peak. HEIM GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide and at least 5 mi. long, which flows S. to merge with the ice in Jones Channel, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°28’S., 66°55’W. It probably forms the S. part of a transverse depression extending to the SW. corner of Lallemand Fjord. First sighted from the air in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Its lower reaches were surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and the glacier named by them for Albert Heim, Swiss glaciologist and author in 1885 of Handbuch der Gletscherkunde. Heksegryta: see Kleinschmidt Peak. Helena Island: see Bridgeman Island. Helene Gletscher: see Helen Glacier. HELENE ISLET: small rocky islet marking the W. end of Géologie Arch., lying about 0.2 mi. NW. of Ifo It. close off Adélie Coast, midway between Liotard Gl. and Cape Géodésie; in 66°37’S., 139°44’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and named for the French polar ship Héléne. Not adopted: Iles Helene [French]. HELEN GLACIER: glacier marked by a series of heavy, broken, and crevassed icefalls, lying W. of Farr Bay on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°40’S., 94°10’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson. Named for Lady Helen, the wife of a patron of the expedi- tion, Sir Lucas Tooth of Sydney, Australia. Not adopted: Helene Gletscher [German]. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HELEN GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue, which in February 1947 extended about 7 mi. sea- ward from Helen Gl., along Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°33’S., 93°14’E. Disc. in November 1912 by members of the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson. The glacier tongue takes its name from Helen Glacier. HELEN WASHINGTON, MOUNT: high, ridge- like mountain surmounted by three prominent peaks, standing about 5 mi. SSW. of Mt. Paterson near the S. end of the N. group of Rockefeller Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°05’S., 155°15’W. Disc. on the ByrdAE flight of Feb. 18, 1929, and named by Byrd for Miss Helen A. Washington, niece of R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, leader of the expe- dition. Helen Washington Bay: see Kainan Bay. HELLAND-HANSEN SHOULDER: a portion of the steep slopes of the snow-covered western bound- ary of the Mohn Basin, resembling snow-covered ridges, when viewed from the E., which extend for an indefinite extent in a N.-S. direction, on the south polar plateau; centering in about 86°12’S., 168°20’W. Disc. in December 1911 on the journey to the South Pole by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Prof. B. Helland-Hansen, of the University of Oslo. Hell Gates: see Morton Strait. HELL GATES: chain of islets and rocks extend- ing from Livingston I. to Snow I. across the E. portal of Morton Str., in the South Shetland Islands; in 62°41’S., 61°10’W. Named by early sealers in the area because many lives and ships were lost in navigating the strait. Not adopted: Morton Strait. HELLS GATE: a small area on the confluent ice of the Nansen Sheet, marked by glacial moraines, lying between Inexpressible I. and the Northern Foothills and discharging into Evans Cove, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°57’S., 163°48’E. Disc. and explored by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, who gave the feature its expressive name. Helmer Hanssen, Mount: see Breyer, Mount. HELMER HANSSEN, MOUNT: ice-covered moun- tain, distinguished by a sharp peak at its S. end, rising from a high land mass W. of Amundsen Gl. in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°05’S., 163°50’W. Disc. in November 1911 by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen on the journey to the South Pole, and named by him for Helmer Hanssen, ice pilot of the exp. and deputy leader of the South Pole 156 Party. It was resighted by the ByrdAE on the South Polar Flight of November 1929. On subse- quent charts, however, it was shown as Mount Breyer, and the name Mount Helmer Hanssen mis- applied to an unnamed mountain to the E. disc. by Byrd. The US-ACAN accordingly retains the name Mount Helmer Hanssen for the mountain so named by Amundsen, and applies the name Mount Breyer to the unnamed mountain disc. by Byrd. Not adopted: Mount Breyer (q.v.). HENDERSON, MOUNT: massive mountain about 3,400 ft. in el., rising through the icecap near the continental margin about 8 mi. NE. of the N. end of the Masson Range, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°42’S., 63°05’E. Disc. in February 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson. Probably named for Prof. G. C. Henderson of Adelaide, a member of the advisory committee for this exp. and for the AAE, 1911-14. HENDERSON, MOUNT: mountain in the S. part of the Britannia Range, about 8,100 ft. in el., lying at the N. side of Barne Inlet, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°21’S., 156°15’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. HENDERSON ISLAND: ice-covered island about 8 mi. long and about 600 ft. in el., lying SE. of Masson I., within the Shackleton Ice Shelf, and about 5 mi. N. of Cape Dovers on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°23’S., 97°07’E. Disc. in August 1912 by the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson, and named for Prof. G. C. Henderson of Adelaide. HENGIST NUNATAK: isolated flat-topped nuna- tak, more than 2,000 ft. in el., which rises above the Roberts Ice Piedmont, about 10 mi. N. of Mount Calais, in the NE. part of Alexander I Is- land; in 69°00’S., 70°14’W. First seen and pho- tographed from the air in 1936 and 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS. The names for this feature and for the group of nunataks to the north are after the brother chieftains, Hengist and Horsa, who led the first Saxon bands which settled Eng- land in the fifth century. HENKES ISLETS: group of snow-covered islets surrounded by reefs, which fringe the SW. coast of Adelaide I. and extend from Cape Adriasola 15 mi. southeastward to their terminus in Avian Islet; centering in 67°44’S., 69°10’W. Disc. and first charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for one of the Norwegian directors of the Magellan Whaling Co. at Punta Arenas. Not adopted: Henkes Islands. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HENNEQUIN, POINT: point which forms the E. side of the entrance to Martel and Mackellar Inlets, on the E. side of Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°07’S., 58°24’W. Probably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who surveyed Admiralty Bay in 1909. HENRY BAY: small bay about 4 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, lying between Baldwin Pt. on the E. and Henry Its. and the small tongue of Howison Gl. on the W., and indenting the E. end of Sabrina Coast; in about 66°40’S., 121°00’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Wilkes Henry, midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HENRY ISLETS: group of about four small islets, lying at the W. side of the entrance to Henry Bay and about 2 mi. E. of Howison Gl., off Sabrina Coast; in about 66°40’S., 120°55’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Wilkes Henry, midshipman with the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HENRY LUCY, MOUNT: peak, probably about 11,000 ft. in el., standing about 5 mi. SSW. of Mt. White, between the Keltie and Mill Glaciers on the E. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 85°15’S., 171°40’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Sir Henry Lucy, M.P. who publicized the exp. and assisted in ob- taining a financial grant from Parliament. Henry May, Cape: see William Henry May, Cape. Herbert Sound: see Sidney Herbert Sound. HERCULES BAY: bay about 0.5 mi. wide, which lies about 1 mi. W. of Cape Saunders along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°40’W. Named by Norwegian whalers after the Hercules (or Herkules), a whale catcher which had visited the bay. Not adopted: Herkules Bucht [German]. HERCULES POINT: point, marked by a small off-lying islet, forming the W. side of the entrance to Hercules Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°40’W. The feature was probably first surveyed by DI personnel in 1927. The name, which derives from the nearby Hercules Bay, was used by a Ger. exp. under Kohl-Larsen, 1928-29, but is known to have been used earlier by whalers. Not adopted: Herkules-Odden [Norwegian]. HERDMAN, CAPE: broad, low, ice-covered cape, situated about 12 mi. ENE. of Mt. Reynolds and forming the S. side of the entrance to Violante 157 Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°39’S., 60°37’W. First seen and photographed from the air in 1940 by USAS, but in subsequent reports the feature now named Mt. Reynolds was described as the S. entrance point to Violante Inlet. During 1947 the cape was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Henry F. P. Herdman, English oceanog- rapher and member of the Discovery Investigations hydrological staff since 1924. HERDMAN ROCKS: two rocks about 50 ft. in el., lying about 2 mi. SE. of Hard Rock and 3 mi. NE. of Cape Dundas, Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is. in 60°42’S., 44°20’W. First charted by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville in 1838. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the South Orkney Is. in 1933, for H. F. P. Herdman. HERD POINT: point which forms the W. side of Ferguson Bay at the SE. end of Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S.,27°17’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for R. D. Hard of Messrs. Ferguson Brothers, Port Glasgow, Scotland, builders of the Discovery II. Herkules Bucht: see Hercules Bay. Herkules-Odden: see Hercules Point. HERLACHER, CAPE: bold, ice-covered headland forming the N. end of Martin Pen. and the W. side of the ice-filled inlet at the head of the peninsula, on the Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 73°40’S., 112°00’W. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for Carl J. Her- lacher, principal Antarctic cartographer with the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office since 1937. Hermelo, Island: see Delta Island. HERRMANN MOUNTAINS: group of mountains in New Schwabenland, projecting through the ice- cap and extending about 25 mi. in a NE.—SW. di- rection; in about 72°25’S., 0°30’E. It lies between Gockel Crest and Barkley Mtns. with which it forms a rectilinear group constituting the northwest- facing foot of the polar plateau. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Ernst Herrmann, geographer of the expedition. HERSCHEL, MOUNT: conspicuous peak of the Admiralty Range, standing above Cape Roget in Victoria Land; in about 72°10’S., 169°25’E. Disc. in 1840 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Sir John F. W. Herschel, noted English astronomer. Not adopted: Mount Herschell. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Herschell, Mount: see Herschel, Mount. HERSHEY RIDGE: mountain ridge lying be- tween Mt. Grace McKinley and the Haines Mtns., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°35’S., 147°15’W. Charted in 1934 by the ByrdAE, and named for Garland Hershey, Asst. State Geologist of the Iowa Geological Survey, since 1939. Not adopted: Garland Hersey Ridge, Garland Hershey Ridge. Hertha Insel: see Hertha Nunatak. HERTHA NUNATAK: nunatak which lies about 1.75 mi. NW. of Castor Nunatak in the Seal Nuna- taks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S., 60°02°W. Disc. in December 1893 by Capt. C. A. Larsen, who named it after the Hertha, a ship which combined sealing and exploring ac- tivities along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. under Capt. C. J. Evensen in 1893-94. It was determined to be a nunatak by the SwedAE under Nord- enskjold during a sledge journey in 1902. Not adopted: Hertha Insel [German]. Hertug Ernst Bay; Herzog Ernst Bay: see Duke Ernst Bay. HERVE COVE: small cove about 2 mi. SW. of Point Thomas, along the S. side of Ezcurra Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°32’W. Charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for a member of the expedition. Not adopted: Herve Cove. HERVEOU POINT: point which forms the W. tip of the rocky peninsula between Port Charcot and Salpétriére Bay, on the W. side of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°03’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for F. Hervéou, a sea- man on the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted: Point Hervéou. HESS GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. long, flow- ing in an ENE. direction between steep rock walls to its mouth about 10 mi. SW. of Monnier Pt., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°13’S., 65°01’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Hans Hess, German glaciologist. Hestes Hode: see Horse Head. HEWISON POINT: point which forms the E. side of Ferguson Bay and the SE. end of Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S., 27°15’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for Lt. Col. Hewison of Messrs. Ferguson Brothers, Port Glasgow, Scotland, builders of the Discovery II. 158 HEYWOOD ISLANDS: group of small islands about 2.5 mi. off the N. side of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°18’S., 59°36’W. The name appears on Powell’s map of 1822 and com- memorates Capt. Peter Heywood, RN, in command of H.M.S. Nereus stationed off the E. coast of South America in that period. Not adopted: Heywood’s Isles. Heywood’s Isles: see Heywood Islands. HIDDEN LAKE: lake about 1.5 mi. long on the W. side of James Ross I., which drains by a small stream into the deep bay 4 mi. S. of Lagrelius Pt., lying midway between Lagrelius Pt. and Cape Obelisk; in 64°02’S., 58°18’W. Disc. in 1945 by the FIDS, who so named it because it is obscured by surrounding highlands. HIGHJUMP ARCHIPELAGO: a group of rocky islands, rocks and ice rises about 50 mi. long and from 5 to 15 mi. wide, lying generally N. of the Bunger Hills and extending from the Taylor Its., close NW. of Cape Hordern, to a prominent group of ice rises which terminate close W. of Cape Elliott, off the W. end of Knox Coast; centering in about 66°05’S., 101°10’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and so named by the US-ACAN. The codeword ‘“High- jump” was used for identifying the U.S. Navy Task Force 68, 1946-47. This task force was divided into three groups which completed photographic flights covering approximately 70 per cent of the coastal areas of Antarctica, excluding Palmer Peninsula, as well as significant portions of the interior. HIGH PEAK: peak with red colored cliffs, prob- ably over 3,000 ft. in el., about 4 mi. NE. of Copper Peak and 2.5 mi. W. of the S. end of Lion I., on the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch., in 64°40’S., 63°14’W. Probably first seen by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. HIGH POINT: conspicuous point, about 400 ft. in el., forming the N. side of the entrance to Moon Bay, eastern Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°33’S., 60°03’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who probably gave this descriptive name. HIGH ROCK: rock about 40 ft. in el., situated at the N. end of the Welcome Its., about 4 mi. WNW. of Cape Buller, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°58’S., 37°29’W. Named by DI per- sonnel who made surveys at South Georgia during 1926-30. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HIGH STILE: pass at the head of Sunshine Gl., about 1,200 ft. in el., situated at the junction of the SW. ridge of Mt. Nivea and the E. end of Brisbane Plateau in the central part of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 45°32’W. The name arises from the general appearance and situation of the feature and was applied by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49. Hill, Cape: see Hill, Mount. HILL, MOUNT: mountain about 3,100 ft. in el., standing about 8 mi. SW. of Cape Sharbonneau at the E. side of the head of Lehrke Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°56’S., 61°42’W. Disc. by members of the East Base of the USAS who ex- plored this coast by land and from the air in 1940. They named it Cape Hill for Archie C. Hill, cook at East Base. In 1947 it was determined to be a mountain distinct from Cape Sharbonneau to the NE. by a joint sledge party consisting of members of the RARE and the FIDS. Not adopted: Cape Hill. Hill Island: see Snow Hill Island. Hilton Bay: see Hilton Inlet. HILTON INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 12 mi. wide, which recedes about 20 mi. W. from its en- trance between Capes Darlington and Knowles, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°57’S., 61°20’W. Disc. by the USAS in 1940, and named for Donald C. Hilton, member of the East Base sledge party that charted this coast as far S. as this inlet. Not adopted: Hilton Bay. HINKS, CAPE: bold headland surmounted by an ice-covered dome about 1,600 ft. in el., forming the NE. extremity of Finley Ridge, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°10’S., 63°10’W. Disc. and photographed by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Later photographed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, and by the USAS in 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Arthur R. Hinks, Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1915-45, who undertook in his published studies to reconcile the explorations of Wilkins, Ellsworth, Rymill and the USAS in this general area. Not adopted: Cape Cross. HINKS, MOUNT: peak about 2,100 ft. in ei., lying about 2 mi. S. of Mt. Marsden in the Gustav Bull Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°53’S., 66°04’E. The BANZARE under Mawson sighted land and made an aerial observation flight in this area in early January 1930. The exp. landed on nearby Scullin Monolith on Feb. 13, 1931, and named this peak for Arthur R. Hinks. 159 HINKS CHANNEL: irregular-shaped channel in the N. part of Laubeuf Fjord, about 2 mi. wide and 11 mi. long, which extends from The Gullet and separates Day I. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and from Wyatt I.; in 67°16’S., 67°37’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry- mill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who named it for Arthur R. Hinks. HIPPO ISLET: steep, rocky islet, about 0.5 mi. long and 22 yards wide, which rises about 400 ft. above the Shackleton Ice Shelf, about 1.5 mi. N. of Delay Pt., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°26’S., 98°06’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who so named it be- cause of its shape. Not adopted: Hippo Island, Hippo Nunatak, Hippo Nunataks. HIPPOLYTE POINT: point which marks the N. end of Lion I., which lies immediately E. of Anvers IT. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°39’S., 63°07’W. Charted and named by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Not adopted: Cape Hippolyte. Hippo Nunatak: see Hippo Islet. HITCHCOCK, MOUNT: a mostly ice-covered mountain, about 5,200 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Mobiloil Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 68°53’S., 64°51’W. Disc. and photo- graphed by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and rephotographed by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935. Named by the US-ACAN in 1952 for Charles B. Hitchcock of the American Geograph- ical Soc., who by utilizing these photographs as- sisted in constructing the first reconnaissance map of this area. HJALMAR JOHANSEN, MOUNT: mountain which stands at the S. side of Mt. Gjertsen in the N. part of the La Gorce Mtns., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°43’S., 147°30’W. Disc. on the Polar Flight by the ByrdAE on Nov. 28-29, 1929. Charted by the Southern Sledge Party of the ByrdAE in 1934. So named in an attempt to rec- oncile the 1934 discoveries with the names applied by Roald Amundsen, who named a peak in this vi- cinity for Hjalmar Johansen, member of the East- ern Sledge Party of a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, 1910-12. Not adopted: Mount Thurston. HJORTH HILL: rounded mountain about 2,900 ft. in el., standing on the N. side of New Hbr. about 7m. SW. of Cape Bernacchi, in Victoria Land; in about 77°32’S., 163°33’E. Charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for the maker of the primus lamps used by the exp. This name is spelled Hjort’s Hill in the popular narrative of Scott’s exp., but the spelling Hjorth’s Hill is used on the map accompanying the narrative. The GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA recommended spelling is based upon the form con- sistently used on the maps accompanying the BrAE scientific reports. Not adopted: Hjorth’s Hill, Hjort’s Hill. Hjort’s Hill: see Hjorth Hill. H. J. Sjégren Fiord: see Sjogren Glacier. Hoadky, Cape: see Hoadley, Cape. HOADLEY, CAPE: prominent rock outcrop forming the W. portal of the valley occupied by Scott Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°33’S., 100°04’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson in November 1912, and named for C. A. Hoadley, geologist with the Western Base Party. Not adopted: Cape Hoadky. HOBART ROCK: low rock lying in the S. side of the entrance to King Edward Cove, Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a survey of King Edward Cove by personnel on H.MS. Sappho in 1906. HOBBS COAST: that portion of the coast of Marie Byrd Land extending from Emory Land Bay, in about 75°45’S., 140°30’W., northeastward to the W. edge of Getz Ice Shelf. Named by the USAS in 1940 for Prof. William H. Hobbs of the Univ. of Michigan, glaciologist specializing in polar geog- raphy and history. HOBBS GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. long and 1:5 mi. wide, which flows into McMurdo Sound about 7 mi. S. of Blue Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°57’S., 164°37’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Members of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, explored the area more thoroughly and named this glacier for Prof. William H. Hobbs. HODGEMAN ISLETS: small group of ice-covered islets, situated about 7 mi. WSW. of Cape De la Motte, off George V Coast, in about 67°01’S., 144°15’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE, under Maw- son, and named for Alfred J. Hodgeman, cartog- rapher and asst. meteorologist with the Main Base party. HODGES, MOUNT: mountain, about 2,000 ft. in el., standing 1 mi. W. of Mt. Duse, close NW. of the head of King Edward Cove, Cumberland West Bay, in South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°32’W. The peak was first roughly surveyed by the SwedAH, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. The name ‘Moldaenke Berg” was used for this peak on a 1907 map by A. Szie- lasko, but the name has not survived on later general charts of this area. The name Mount Hodges appears to have been applied some years 160 later and is now well established in use for this peak. The name may be for Capt. M. H. Hodges, RN, of the Sappho, who visited and mapped por- tions of Cumberland Bay in 1906. Not adopted: Moldaenke Berg [German]. HODSON, MOUNT: volcanic peak about 3,000 ft. in el., marking the summit of Visokoi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°13’W. Disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, 1819-21. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discov- ery II, who named it for Arnold Hodson, then Gov. of the Falkland Islands. Hogback, The: see Hogback Hill. HOGBACK HILL: rounded mountain about 2,300 ft. in el., situated immediately N. of Hjorth Hill and about 3 mi. W. of Cape Bernacchi, in Victoria Land; in about 177°30’S., 163°34’E. Charted and given this descriptive name by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: The Hogback. HOGS MOUTH ROCKS: chain of about three rocks which extend from Invisible It. to Albatross I. and form the E. limit of Committee Bay in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°19’W. First roughly charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cush- man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. Probably named by DI personnel who sur- veyed the Bay of Isles in 1929-30. Not adopted: The Hogs Mouth Rocks. Holder, Mount: see Houlder, Mount. HOLE ROCK: southernmost of three aligned rocks lying close NW. of North Foreland, the NE. cape of King George I., in the south Shetland Is.; in 61°52’S., 57°41’W. Charted in 1937 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, who so named it be- cause a conspicuous hole extends through it. HOLLICK-KENYON PENINSULA: narrow, ice- covered spur from the main mountain mass of Palmer Pen., which projects about 30 mi. in a NE. arc from its base at the E. side of Mobiloil Inlet; centering in 68°30’S., 63°30’W. Disc. and par- tially photographed from the air by Lincoln Ells- worth on his trans-Antarctic flight in November-— December 1935 from Dundee I. to the Ross Sea. Photographed from the air and charted from the ground in 1940 by the USAS. Named for Herbert Hollick-Kenyon, pilot on Ellsworth’s flight in 1935, whose demonstration of the practicability of land- ing and taking off an airplane in isolated areas constitutes a distinct contribution to the technique of Antarctic exploration. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HOLLICK-KENYON PLATEAU: plateau area of Ellsworth Highland, over 6,000 ft. in el., centering in about 79°S., 108°W. Disc. by Lincoln Ellsworth on his trans-Antarctic flight of 1935, and named by Ellsworth for his pilot, Herbert Hollick-Kenyon. Not adopted: Hollick Kenyon Plateau. HOLL ISLAND: rocky, triangular-shaped island, about 1.7 mi. long and rising to about 310 ft. in el., marking the SW. end of the Windmill Is., off Budd Coast; in 66°25’S., 110°27’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and USN Op. Wml., 1947-48. Named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Richard C. Holl, USNR, photogrammetrist with the Navy Hydrographic Office, who served as surveyor with the USN Op. Wmil. parties which established astronomical con- trol stations on Holl I. and along Queen Mary and Knox Coasts. HOLMAN DOME: dome-shaped nunatak about 2 mi. SW. of Watson Bluff, on the E. side of David I., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°28’S., 98°48’E. Charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named it for the Hon. William Arthur Holman, Premier of New South Wales in 1911, and later member of the Commonwealth House of Repre- sentatives. HOLME BAY: bay about 20 mi. wide, contain- ing many islands and islets, lying just N. of the Framnes Mtns. along Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°35’S., 62°42’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January—Febru- ary 1937, and so named because of its island- studded character. Holmen Graa: see Grey Islet. HOLMES, MOUNT: buttress-type mountain about 4,800 ft. in el., lying about 4 mi. NW. of Mt. Hayes on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°47’S., 64°16’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, and photo- graphed from the air by the RARE under Ronne. Named by the FIDS for Maurice Holmes, author of An Introduction to the Bibliography of Captain James Cook, R.N. (London, 1936). HOLMES GLACIER: piedmont glacier about 10 mi. wide, formed by the confluence of small chan- nel glaciers which flow from the continental ice on the NE. flank of Norths Highland to the W. side of Porpoise Bay, about 10 mi. SSE. of Cape Spieden, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°30’S., 127°15’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by 161 the US-ACAN for Dr. Silas Holmes, assistant sur- geon on the brig Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HOLTEDAHL BAY: bay, about 7 mi. long in a NW.-SE. direction and averaging about 6 mi. wide, lying between Ferin Head and Black Head, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°05’S., 65°25’W. Disc. by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Named by Rymill for Prof. Olaf Holtedahl, Norwegian geologist who conducted geologic research during 1927-28, in the South Shetland Is. and the Palmer Arch., to which he was transported by various whaling vessels. HOMBRON ROCKS: two rocks about 1.5 mi. apart, lying about 8 mi. NE. of Cape Roquemaurel and 4 mi. off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°28’S., 58°42’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for Jacques Hombron, a member of the expedition. The rocks were charted by the FIDS in 1946. Not adopted: Honabron Rock. Homresund: see Macfie Sound. Honabron Rock: see Hombron Rocks. HOOD GLACIER: tributary glacier entering the E. side of Beardmore Gl. immediately N. of Mt. Cyril, at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°50’S., 172°30’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton in December 1908. HOOKER, CAPE: cape which forms the NE. end of Low I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°16S., 62°00’W. Though the origin of the name Cape Hooker is unknown, it has appeared on charts for over a hundred years and its usage has been estab- lished internationally. The name may be asso- ciated with the voyage of a Br. exp. under Foster in the Chanticleer, 1828-31. HOOKER, CAPE: cape which forms the W. side of the entrance to Yule Bay, on the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 70°35’S., 166°25’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Joseph Dalton Hooker (later Sir Joseph), naturalist and asst. surgeon on the exp. ship Erebus who became internationally famous as a botanist. HOOKER, MOUNT: rounded summit about 12,400 ft. in el., standing in the Royal Society Range, SW. of McMurdo Sound, on the W. side of Ross Sea; in about 78°07’S., 162°50’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HOPE, MOUNT: mountain about 2,700 ft. in el., marked by a well-defined terrace strewn with erratics, projecting through Ross Ice Shelf at the W. side of the mouth of Beardmore Gl.; in about 83°35’/S., 171°30’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE under Shackleton, and so named because the Polar Party, after ascending it in the hope of finding a route to the Pole, saw the great Beard- more Gl. stretching to the SW. as far as they could see. Hope, Mount: see Bransfield, Mount. HOPE BAY: bay about 3 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, indenting the tip of Palmer Pen. and open- ing on Antarctic Sound; in 63°24’S., 57°00’W. Disc. on Jan. 15, 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it in commemoration of the winter spent there by J. Gunnar Andersson, Samuel A. Duse, and Toralf Grunden of his expe- dition. HOPE ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long with an islet off its S. end, lying about 7 mi. WNW. of D’Urville I., off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°02’S., 56°52’W. The name appears on Powell’s map published by Laurie in 1822. A Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, charted an island in essentially the same position which he named Daussy Island. Not adopted: Dausay Island, Daussy Island. HOPE POINT: rocky bluff about 70 ft. in el., forming the N. side of the entrance to King EKd- ward Cove, on the W. side of Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°29’W. Charted and photographed by the SwedAE under Norden- skjold, 1901-4. The point is named for H. W. W. Hope, who directed a 1920 survey of King Edward Cove by personnel on H.M.S. Dartmouth. It is the site of a monument in commemoration of Sir Ernest Shackleton. HOPE POINT: bluff forming the W. end of Bertha I. and the E. side of the entrance to Wil- liam Scoresby Bay, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°23’S., 59°38’E. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel on the William Scoresby who landed on Bertha I. in February 1936. HOP ISLAND: small, rocky islet, about 1.7 mi. long, which rises to about 170 ft. in el., marking the third largest of the Rauer Is. and lying about 3 mi. WSW. of Filla I. in the west-central por- tion of the group, off Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°51’S., 77°35’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen- sen, and named Hopoy, a Norwegian word mean- ing “cove island,” as this feature was believed to 162 form part of a horseshoe-shaped island which en- closed a prominent cove. The name Hop Island was proposed by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 compilation from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, as he determined that the original Hopoy feature now comprises a chain of small islands, islets and rocks. Not adopted: Hopoy [Norwegian]. Hopoy: see Hop Island. HORDERN, CAPE: ice-free cape, overlain by morainic drift, separating Queen Mary and Knox Coasts, and marking the NW. end of the small peninsula identified as the Bunger Hills; in about 66°16’S., 100°27’E. The cape lies at the S. side of the entrance to a narrow, sinuous inlet, which roughly bisects the Bunger Hills in an E.—W. direc- tion, and is enclosed on the W. by the Edisto Ice Tongue. Probably sighted from Watson Bluff, in 98°52’E., by A. L. Kennedy and other members of the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who charted the W. wall of what ap- peared to be two small islands lying N. of Cape Hoadley in about 100°35’E. Named by Mawson for Sir Samuel Hordern of Sydney, Australia, a patron of the AAEK. Renamed Cape Hordern by the US-ACAN following correlation of Kennedy’s map with the US-ACAN map of 1955 compiled from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946- 47. Not adopted: Hordern Island, Hordern Islands, Mount Hordern. Hordern, Mount; Hordern Islands: see Hordern, Cape. HORDERN, MOUNT: peak about 4,900 ft. in el., rising through the icecap about 5 mi. S. of Mt. Coates, in the David Range on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°56’S., 62°32’E. Disc. in Febru- ary 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and probably named for Sir Samuel Hordern, a patron of this exp. and the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14. HORLICK MOUNTAINS: mountain range lying SE. of the head of Ross Ice Shelf, tentatively inter- preted as a continuation of the Watson Escarp- ment. Tentatively located in about 86°00’S., 115°00’W. on the basis of two observations, one by Kennett L. Rawson from a position in about 83°00’S., 105°19’W., at the end of his SE. flight of Nov. 22, 1934, and another by Quin A. Blackburn in December 1934, from position looking up two eastern tributaries of Robert Scott Gl. on either side of a point in about 85°40’S., 152°00’W. Disc. in 1934 by the ByrdAEK and named for William Horlick, of Horlick’s Milk Corp., who helped sup- port the expedition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HORN, THE: peak about 800 ft. in el. with a sheer cliff of reddish rock on its W. side, sur- mounting the NW. cape of Eagle I., which lies in Prince Gustav Chan. between Louis Philippe Pen. and Vega I., in 63°39’S., 57°34’W. Disc. and named by the FIDS in 1945. The name is descrip- tive of the shape of the peak. HORN BLUFF: rocky promontory about 1,100 ft. in el., marked by a prominent columnar struc- ture in its upper rock strata, projecting through the continental ice as a coastal cliff at the W. side of the entrance to Deakin Bay, on George V Coast; in about 68°24’S., 149°48’E. Disc. in December 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for W. A. Horn of Adelaide, patron of the expedition. HORNE, MOUNT: mountain which lies W. of the Hauberg Mtns. and back of Orville Escarpment, on Joerg Plateau; in about 76°47’S., 70°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Bernard Horne, manager of the Horne Department Store, Pittsburgh, Pa., who furnished windproofs and other clothing for the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Bernard Horne. Hornet: see Horn Peak. HORN PEAK: an outstanding rocky peak about 1,100 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi. W. of the head of William Scoresby Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about 67°26’S., 59°25’E. Charted by Norwegian cartog- raphers from photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937 and probably so named by them because of its promi- nence. Not adopted: Hornet [Norwegian]. HORSA NUNATAKS: isolated group of about five partly snow-covered nunataks, more than 2,000 ft. in el., which rise above the Roberts Ice Pied- mont, about 14 mi. N. of Mt. Calais, in the NE. part of Alexander I Island; in 68°56’S., 70°18’W. First seen and photographed from the air in 1936 and 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS. The names for these nunataks and for the isolated nunatak to the south are after the brother chieftains, Hengist and Horsa, who led the first Saxon bands which settled England in the fifth century. HORSBURG POINT: point about 3.4 mi. NW. of Scarlett Pt., on the SW. side of Montagu I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°26’S., 26°26’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for H. Horsburgh, technical officer on the DI staff. HORSE HEAD: jagged, rocky point with con- spicuous cliffs about 40 ft. in el., situated 600 yards N. of the mouth of Penguin River, in Cumberland 163 East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W. The profile of the cliff is said to resemble a horse’s head. First surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The name Horse Head, recommended by the Br-APC in 1954, is an English form of “Hestes Hode,” applied by sealers and whalers. Not adopted: Hestes Hode [Norwegian]. Horseshoe Bay; Horseshoe Island Cove: Lystad Bay. see HORSESHOE BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide at the S. side of Cape George, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°16’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1929 sketch survey by DI personnel. HORSESHOE BAY: cover situated at the N. of the Cape Royds headland, along the W. of Ross I.; in about 77°32’S., 166°09’E. Disc. named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. name is suggestive of the shape of the cove. side side and The HORSESHOE ISLAND: island about 7 mi. long and 3 mi. wide occupying most of the entrance to Square Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°51’/S., 67°12’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill who mapped this area by land and from the air in 1936-37. Its name is indic- ative of the crescentic alignment of the 2,000 to 3,000 foot mountains on the island. HORSESHOE ISLANDS: group of islets whose arrangement is suggestive of a horseshoe, about 0.5 mi. WNW. of Grotto I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 64°18’W. Charted and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. HORSESHOE MOUNTAIN: _horseshoe-shaped mountain about 8,200 ft. in el., lying near the edge of the plateau and N. of the head of the Taylor Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°35’S., 160°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who so named this feature because of its shape. Hoseason Harbor: see Mikkelsen Harbor. HOSEASON ISLAND: island about 7 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, which rises to about 1,900 ft. in el., lying about 20 mi. W. of Trinity I. at the NE. end of the Palmer Arch.; in 63°45’S., 61°45’W. This name has appeared on charts for over 100 years, and commemorates James Hoseason, first mate on the Sprightly, an Enderby Brothers seal- ing ship which operated in these waters in 1824-25. HOSKINS, MOUNT: mountain about 25 mi. W. of Cape William Henry May and about 8 mi. SSE. of Mt. Lindley, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in about 81°52’S., 159°28’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir Anthony Hoskins, former Lord of the Admiralty and a member of the BrNAE Ship Committee. Hospital Cove: see Yankee Harbor. HOULDER, MOUNT: dark, precipitous peak, about 1,100 ft. in el., bordering the E. side of Furness Gl. on the N. side of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°02’S., 55°00’W. Charted by a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16, and named for Frank Houlder of the Houlder steamship line, who was of assistance to the expe- dition. Not adopted: Mount Frank MHoulder, Mount Holder. HOULE ISLET: low rocky islet, lying about 0.9 mi. W. of Ressac It. and about 3.5 mi. NNE. of Zélée Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in about 66°42’S., 141°12’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because the surf breaks over this low-lying islet. Houle is the French word for surge or swell. HOUND BAY: bay, which is 2.5 mi. wide at its mouth and recedes 3 mi., entered between Tijuca Pt. and Cape Vakop along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°13’W. The names George Bay and Hundebugten have appeared on charts for this feature. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that this bay is better known to whalers and sealers as “Bikjebugten” (the word Bikje implying any low type canine). The name Hound Bay, proposed by the Br-APC, is an English form of this name. Not adopted: Bikjebugten [Norwegian], George Bay, Hundebugten [Norwegian], St. Georges Bay. Houzeau de Lehaie, Cap; Houzeau de Lehaye, Cape: see Lehaie, Cape. HOVDE ICE TONGUE: small ice tongue, about 2 mi. wide and 2 mi. long, projecting NW. from the continental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen Coast, about 3 mi. NE. of Flatnes Ice Tongue; in about 69°14’S., 76°35’E. Charted by Norwegian cartog- raphers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. So named by John H. Roscoe, following his 1952 study of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, because of its close association with Hovde Islet. HOVDE ISLET: round, rocky islet, about 0.6 mi. across, which rises to about 250 ft. in el., lying near the NW. end of Hovde Ice Tongue, close off Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°14’S., 76°33’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial 164 photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Hovde, a Nor- wegian word meaning rounded hill. The generic islet is approved as a more appropriate term be- cause of the offshore nature of this feature. Not adopted: Hovden [Norwegian]. Hovden: see Hovde Islet. HOVGAARD ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long, lying about 0.5 mi. SW. of Booth L., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 64°08’W. Disc. and named Krogmann Island by a Ger. exp. under Dall- mann, 1873-74, but the name Hovgaard Island, applied by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, has overtaken the original name in usage. Not adopted: Ile Howgaard [French], Krogmann Is- land. HOWARD, CAPE: high, flat-topped, snow-cov- ered promontory separating Lamplugh and Odom Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°25’S., 61°08’W. Disc. by the USAS who explored along this coast by land and from the air in 1940. Named by the US-ACAN for August Howard, founder of the American Polar Soc. and editor of the Polar Times. Not adopted: Cape Rusty. HOWARD, MOUNT: dark-appearing, rounded mountain lying NNE. of Mt. Bowen on the N. side of Davis Gl., in Victoria Land; .in about 75°40’S., 161°10’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. HOWARD BAY: bay about 4 mi. wide, lying be- tween Cape Simpson and Byrd Head along Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°27’S., 61°06’E. Disc. on about Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named by him for A. Howard, a mem- ber of the expedition. Not adopted: Ufsdyvagen [Norwegian ]. Howard Island: (in about 72°40’S., 59°00’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since subsequent survey has shown that no island exists in the position indicated. Instead, the name How- ard has been applied to a cape in 71°25’S., 61°10’W. HOWE, MOUNT: a group of low connecting ridges and gable-shaped nunataks standing about 15 mi. SE. of Mt. Weaver and S. of the head of Robert Scott Gl., rising above the ice of the south polar plateau to about 10,000 ft. in el., at the S. fringe of the Queen Maud Range; in about 87°10’S., 149°20’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Louis McHenry Howe, secretary to the President of the United States at that time. Not adopted: Mount Louis McHenry Howe. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Howgaard, Ile: see Hovgaard Island. HOWISON GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 9 mi. long, flowing N. from the low, ice-covered ridge at the N. side of Reynolds Trough, and terminating in a small tongue close W. of Henry Bay, on Sabrina Coast; in about 66°40’S., 120°45’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for James R. Howison, captains clerk on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HOWKINS INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes SW. about 6 mi. between Cape Brooks and Lamb Pt., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°40’S., 60°54’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for G. Howkins, meteorologist with the FIDS base at Deception I. in 1944-45. HUB NUNATAK: beehive-shaped nunatak rising above the main flow of Lammers Gl. and protrud- ing near the center of The Traffic Circle, an ice- filled upland depression on Palmer Pen. which is marked by a series of prominent glaciers flowing in a radial pattern; in about 68°37’S., 66°25’W. Disc. in 1940 by members of the USAS, and so named because of its unique location near the center of The Traffic Circle. Not adopted: The Hub. HUCKLE, MOUNT: mainly ice-covered moun- tain, about 8,200 ft. in el., standing near the N. end of the Douglas Range in eastern Alexander I Island. It rises 7 mi. SSE. of Mt. Spivey on the W. side of Toynbee Gl. and is 9 mi. inland from George VI Sound; in 69°38’S., 69°48’W. Possibly first seen in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, but not recognized as part of Alexander I Island. It was photographed from the air in 1936-37 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by FIDS, and named for Sydney R. Huckle, general assistant at Stonington I., who aided in the FIDS survey of the W. side of George VI Sound in 1949. Hudson, Cape: see Freshfield, Cape. HUDSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing N. from the continental ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to the E. side of Maury Bay, midway between Power Gl. and Stuart Pt., on Banzare Coast; in about 66°35’S., 125°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for William H. Hudson, midshipman on 165 the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. HUDSON MOUNTAINS: group of low moun- tains, rising over 2,000 ft. in el., bordering the S. margin of Peacock Bay, at the E. end of Wal- green Coast; in about 74°00’S., 99°00’W. Disc. in flights from the Bear by the USAS in February 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Capt. William L. Hudson, commander of the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. The Peacock, accompanied by the Flying Fish under Lt. Walker, cruised along the edge of the pack N. of this coast for several days during the latter part of March 1839. Not adopted: Noville Mountains. HUGGINS, MOUNT: peak about 12,800 ft. in el., rising SSW. of Mt. Rucker in the Royal So- ciety Range, on the W. side of the Ross Sea; in about 78°18’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAH, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir William Huggins, Pres. of the Royal Soc., 1900-5. HUGHES, MOUNT: mountain about 7,700 ft. in el., lying S. of Mt. Longhurst in the Britannia Range, along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°26’S., 157°12’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for J. F. Hughes, Honorary Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc., who helped in the preparation for the expedition. HUGHES BAY: bay lying between Capes Sterneck and Murray, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°13’S., 61°20’W. This name has ap- peared on maps for over 100 years, and com- memorates Edward Hughes, master of the Sprightly, an Enderby Brothers sealing vessel which explored in this area in 1824-25. Not adopted: Brialmont Bay, Hughes Gulf. Hughes Gulf: see Hughes Bay. Hugh Mitchell Peak: see Mitchell Peak. Huidobro, Isla: see Alpha Island. Huisvik Hafen: see Husvik Harbor. Hull Bay: see Cordell Hull Bay. Hull Glacier: see Cordell Hull Glacier. HULTH, MOUNT: peak about 4,800 ft. in el., with precipitous black cliffs on its SE. side, lying at the W. side of Cabinet Inlet, S. of the mouth of Friederichsen Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°41’S., 64°11’W. During 1947 it was charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne. Named by the FIDS for J. M. Hulth, Swedish polar bibliographer. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA HUMBOLDT GRABEN: a fault depression in the Wohlthat Mtns., separating Petermann Range from the Alexander Humboldt Mtns., in New Schwabenland; centering in about 71°40’S., 12°00’E. The trough, about 30 mi. long and averaging about 4 mi. wide, descends northward from a maximum elevation of 6,800 ft. at the edge of the polar platform to 4,900 ft. in about 71°25’S. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named after the nearby Alexander Humboldt Mountains. Humboldt Mountains: see Alexander Humboldt Mountains. HUM ISLET: islet lying NE. of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay, between the W. extremities of Bertha I. and Islay, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°22’S., 59°41’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936. Not adopted: Sundholmen [Norwegian]. HUMMOCK ISLAND: rocky crescent-shaped is- land about 1 mi. long, lying about 2.5 mi. NNE. of the W. tip of Robert I. and 3 mi. ENE. of Table I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°19’S., 59°45’W. Charted and given this descriptive name by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II in 1935. HUMMOCK ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in diameter, lying about 4 mi. W. of Larrouy I. and 6 mi. NNW. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°53’S., 65°31’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. Hummocks, Ile des deux: see Two Hummock Island. HUMP, THE: conspicuous dome-shaped summit on the N. shore of Lapeyrére Bay, northern Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 63°16’W. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. HUMPBACK ROCKS: group of about three rocks lying 0.25 mi. N. of Cape Saunders, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°38’W. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the descriptive name “Knglrokset” (meaning Humpback Whale Rocks) has been used for this feature by the whalers and sealers at South Georgia. The English form of the name, Humpback Rocks, was recommended by the Br—APC in 1954. Not adopted: Knglrokset [Nor- wegian]. HUMPHREY LLOYD, MOUNT: conspicuous peak lying between Mt. Vernon Harcourt and Mt. Pea- cock in the Admiralty Range, in the NE. part of 166 Victoria Land; in about 72°18’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Dr. Humphrey Lloyd of Trinity Col- lege, Dublin, an active member of the British Assn. which promoted interest in magnetic and meteor- ological research in the Antarctic. HUMPS ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long with two summits near the W. end, situated 4.5 mi. SSE. of the tip of The Naze, a peninsula of northern James Ross I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Pal- mer Pen:; in’ 63°59/S:, 57°25°W. Discly byaathe SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4. This de- scriptive name was recommended by the Br—APC in 1948 following a survey of the area by the FIDS in 1945. Hundebugten: see Hound Bay. HUNT, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain about 1,700 ft. in el., surmounting the promontory which terminates in Cape De la Motte, on George V Coast; in about 67°07’S., 144°19’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for H. A. Hunt, Dir. of the Commonwealth Meteorological Bureau. HUNTER, CAPE: rocky promontory about 6 mi. W. of Cape Denison in Commonwealth Bay, on George V Coast; in about 67°00’S., 142°23’E. Disc. in 1912 and explored the following year by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Dr. John G. Hun- ter of Sydney Univ., chief biologist at the AAE Main Base. HUNT GLACIER: small glacier descending E. from the highlands W. of Granite Hbr., and enter- ing the harbor immediately N. of Dreikanter Head, in Victoria Land; in about 76°53’S., 162°33’E. Charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Prob- ably named for H. A. Hunt, Australian meteorolo- gist who assisted in writing the scientific reports of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. HUNT POINT: point, surmounted by a rocky peak about 2,000 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to Stonehouse Bay on the E. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°18’S., 68°00’W. Disc. and first roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char- cot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named the point for Sgt. Kenneth D. Hunt, mechanic for the expedition’s Norseman airplane in 1950. HUON BAY: shallow bay, about 8 mi. wide be- tween Cape Ducorps and Cape Legoupil, along the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°23’S., 58°00’'W. A Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, originally gave the name Huon to a cape in this area after Félix Huon de Kermadec, a member of the expedition. Following a survey by the FIDS GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in 1946, it was found that no cape exists. The name Huon, however, is retained for the shallow bay which lies in the same area. HURLEY, CAPE: cape marking the E. side of the mouth of the depression occupied by Mertz Gl., on George V Coast; in about 67°37’S., 145°20’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for James Francis Hurley, official photographer at the AAE Main Base. HURLEY, MOUNT: snow-covered massif with steep bare slopes on the W. side, lying SW. of Cape Ann immediately behind the coast, in Enderby Land; in about 66°18’S., 51°10’E. Disc. in Janu- ary 1930 by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, who probably named it for Capt. Frank (James Francis) Hurley, photographer with the exp. Hur- ley also served with the AAE under Mawson, 1911-— 14, and a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-17. HUSVIK: whaling station at the head of Husvik Hbr., which is entered on the S. side of Stromness Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°43’W. Named in about 1912, probably by mem- bers of the Tgénsberg Hvalfangeri, a Norwegian whaling company based there. HUSVIK HARBOR: southernmost of three har- bors at the head of Stromness Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°40’W. The name dates back to about 1912, and was probably given by Norwegian whalers who frequented the harbor and established a whaling station at its head. Not adopted: Busen Fjord, Huisvik Hafen [German]. HUT COVE: small cove in the E. side of Hope Bay, entered from the N. between Seal Pt. and Grunden Rocks, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 56°59’W. Disc. by a party under Dr. J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4, who wintered at Hope Bay in 1903. So named in 1945 by the FIDS, because they, like the SwedAH, established a base hut on the S. shore of this cove. HUT POINT: small point lying about 1.2 mi. NW. of Cape Armitage, at the S. end of Hut Point Pen., Ross I.; in about 77°51’S., 166°37’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, which established headquarters on this point. HUT POINT PENINSULA: long narrow penin- sula from 2 to 3 mi. wide and about 12 mi. long, projecting SSW. from the slopes of Mt. Erebus on Ross I., and forming the SE. shore of Erebus Bay, in about 77°47’S., 166°48’E. The BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, built its hut on Hut Pt. at the S. 167 end of the peninsula. Members of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, wintering on Cape Evans and often using the hut during their journeys, came to refer to this feature as Hut Point Peninsula. Not adopted: Cape Armitage Promontory, Winter Quarters Peninsula. Hvalbugten: see Whale Bay. Hval Bukta: see Whales, Bay of. Hvalskjaer; Hvalskjaerene: see Whale Skerries. Hvit Oen: see White Island. HYPERION NUNATAKS: group of about eight nunataks lying S. of Saturn Glacier and about 9 mi. W. of Corner Cliffs, in the SE. part of Alexander I Island; in 72°04’S., 68°54’W. These nunataks were first seen and photographed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and were mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. They were surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of their association with Saturn Glacier; Hyperion being one of the satel- lites of Saturn. ICE BAY: long embayment about 30 mi. wide in the coast of Enderby Land; in about 67°45’S., 50°00’E. Disc. and named by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen, on Jan. 15, 1930. Not adopted: Amundsen Bay, Isfjorden [Norwegian]. Ice Bay: see Ice Fjord. ICEBERG BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which indents the S. coast of Coronation I. between Cape Hansen and Olivine Pt., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40°S., 45°33’W. Named by Matthew Bris- bane, who roughly charted the S. coast of Coro- nation I. under the direction of James Weddell in 1823. ICEBERG POINT: prominent cliff about 8 mi. WSW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., on the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 63°04’W. This portion of Anvers I. was first explored by the BelgAE 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. ICE FJORD: inlet about 1 mi. wide which recedes NE. about 2.5 mi., lying 2 mi. N. of Wilson Hbr., along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°46’W. The name dates back to at least 1920 and is now well estab- lished in international usage. Not adopted: Ice Bay. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA IDA, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alexandra Range, about 5,300 ft. in el. standing ENE. of Mt. Fox and about 13 mi. SW. of Mt. Hope, on the W. side of Beardmore GIl.; in about 83°39’S., 169°40’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. IFO ISLET: low rocky islet lying about 0.2 mi. SE. of Héléne It., at the W. end of Géologie Arch., close off Adélie Coast; in about 66°38’S., 139°44’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946— 47. Charted and named by the FrAE under Lio- tard, 1949-51. Ifo is the phonetic spelling of “il faut,” a much-used expression by the FrAE mean- ing “one (you) must.” ILE (plural, ILES): for names beginning with Tle or Iles see under the specific part of the name. For example for Ile Argentines see Argentines, Ile. (Ile is a French word for “Island.”’) IL POLO GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi. wide and over 8 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the continental ice and terminating at the SE. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay, midway between Polar Times and Polarforschung Glaciers on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°50’S., 74°15’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947. Named by Roscoe after II Polo, a polar journal published since 1946, by the Instituto Geografico at Forli, Italy. INACCESSIBLE ISLAND: island about 0.75 mi. long, which is the northernmost of the Dellbridge Is.; lying 1.5 mi. SSW. of Cape Evans, Ross I.; in about 77°40’S., 166°22’E. Disc. and named by the BrNABE, 1901-4, under Scott. INACCESSIBLE ISLANDS: group of small islands ranging from 400 to 700 ft. in el., the westernmost of the South Orkney Is., lying about 23 mi. W. of Coronation I.; in 60°34’S., 46°44’W. Disc. in December 1821 by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, though it is possible they are the Seal Islands seen by Palmer a year earlier. So named by Powell because of their inaccessibility. INDICATOR ISLAND: islet about 200 yards long, lying about 250 yards W. of NW. end of Galindez I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Indicator Island was charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. A wind sock was erected on this island by the BGLE to indicate wind direction for the expedition’s airplane. 168 Inexpressible Island: see Oscar Island. INEXPRESSIBLE ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, forming the W. shore of Evans Cove and lying in the outer edge of the Nansen Sheet along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°59’S., 163°42’E. First explored by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Originally called Southern Foothills, in contra- distinction to the Northern Foothills to the NE., the name “Inexpressible’ was applied by the Northern Party after spending a very unpleasant winter on half rations on the island. Not adopted: Oscar Island (q.v.), Southern Foothills. INGRAM BAY: shallow indentation in the north- ernmost portion of the Amery Ice Shelf where it separates MacKenzie Bay from Prydz Bay, along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°30’S., 72°45’E. The BANZARE under Mawson made an air sur- vey on Feb. 10, 1931, sketching the boundaries of MacKenzie Bay. Probably named for Dr. W. W. Ingram, medical officer and biologist on the expe- dition. INGRID, CAPE: conspicuous, dark, rocky prom- ontory separating Sandefjord and Norvegia Bays on the W. coast of Peter I Island; in about 68°49’S., 90°44’°W. Disc. and named in 1927 by a Nor. exp. under Tofte in the Odd I, a vessel of Lars Christen- sen’s whaling fleet. Named for the wife of Lars Christensen, Mrs. Ingrid Christensen. INGRID CHRISTENSEN COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica extending from Jennings Promontory in about 70°12’S., 71°46’E., to about 81°00’E. Disc. by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, who landed in the Vestvold Hills sector of this coast in February 1935. Named for Ingrid Christensen, wife of Lars Christensen, who sailed in Antarctic waters with her husband. A south- west extension of this coast, between Sandefjord Ice Bay and Jennings Promontory, was disc. and photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947. Not adopted: Ingrid Christensen Land. Ingrid Christensen Land: see Ingrid Christensen Coast. INNER HARBOR: small harbor in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch., formed by the semi-circular arrangement of Lambda, Epsilon, Alpha and Delta Islands; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W. The descriptive name was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the harbor in 1927. It was sur- veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Puerto Interior [Spanish]. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA INNER LEE ISLET: islet about 0.8 mi. NNE. of Luck Pt., lying in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 94°02’S., 37°16’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Rob- ert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who included it as one of two islets which he called the Lee Islands. These islets were recharted in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who renamed the southwestern of these two islets Inner Lee Islet. The northeastern islet is now known as Outer Lee Islet. Not adopted: Inner Lee Island, Lee Islands. INNES-TAYLOR, MOUNT: tabular mountain, about 8,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Poulter Gl., where it joins the W. side of Robert Scott Gl., near the S. edge of the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°51’S., 153°35’W. Disc. in De- cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Capt. Alan Innes-Taylor, who served with the exp. as chief of trail operations. Innes-Taylor Inlet: see Nantucket Inlet. Innfjorden: see William Scoresby Bay. Inseln, Bucht der: see Isles, Bay of. INTERCURRENCE ISLAND: island about 4.5 mi. long, being the largest of the Christiania Is., lying about 9 mi. ENE. of Liége I. at the NE. end of the Palmer Arch.; in 63°55’S., 61°24’W. Though the origin of this name is unknown, it has appeared on maps for over a hundred years and its usage has been established internationally. Interior, Puerto: see Inner Harbor. INVERLEITH HARBOR: small bay between An- drews Pt. and Briggs Pt. along the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°32’S., 63°00’W. Presumably disc. by whalers working in this area and named Inverleith or Leith Harbor. The name Inverleith Harbor, “inver” meaning the place of meeting of rivers or where a river falls into the sea or lake, is recommended because the name Leith Harbor is used elsewhere in the Antarctic. Leith, Scotland is the home of Salvesen and Co., a whaling firm which has operated extensively in Antarctic waters. Not adopted: Leith Harbor (q.v.). INVISIBLE ISLET: small, tussock grass covered islet, lying close SE. of Crescent It. and Mollyhawk It. in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°19°W. Charted in 1912-13, by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. Named Invisible Island, probably by DI personnel who surveyed the Bay of Isles in 1929-30. The name Invisible Islet is approved because of the 424589 O -57 -12 169 small size of the feature. Island. Not adopted: Invisible Iota, Isla: see Peace Islet. IPHIGENE, MOUNT: mountain lying W. of Ochs Gl. between Mt. Marujupu and the Birchall Peaks, at the S. side of Paul Block Bay, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°28’S., 145°51’W. Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE and named by him for Mrs. Iphigene Ochs Sulzberger, daughter of Adolph Ochs and wife of Arthur Sulz- berger, patrons of the expedition. Irene Frazier, Mount: see Frazier, Mount. IRIS BAY: small bay along the E. side of South Georgia, lying 6 mi. NW. of Cape Vahsel, along the embayment between Cape Vahsel and Cape Charlotte; in 54°42’S., 35°56’W. The name Sand- wich Bay, after John Montagu, 4th Earl of Sand- wich, was given to the whole embayment between Cape Vahsel and Cape Charlotte in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. The name was later restricted on maps to the small bay described, since a name for the large embayment was not considered use- ful. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the name Iris Bay for the same feature is well established in use among the whalers and sealers in South Georgia, and that the name Sandwich Bay is un- known locally. The name Iris Bay is approved in order to conform with local usage. Not adopted: Sandwich Bay. IRIZAR, CAPE: bold rocky headland forming the N. end of Lamplugh I., along the coast of Vic- toria Land; in about 75°36’S., 163°02’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Capt. Julian Irizar, of the Argentine naval vessel Uruguay, who rescued the shipwrecked SwedAE, 1901-3, under Nordenskjéld. Irizar Island: see Jonassen Island. IRIZAR ISLAND: islet about 0.5 mi. long, lying 0.5 mi. NE. of Uruguay I. at the NE. end of the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°13’S., 64°13’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Capt. Julian Irizar, Argentine Navy. The islet was roughly charted in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. Irvine Gardner Glacier: see Ketchum Glacier. IRVINE GLACIER: large glacier flowing in a southerly direction to a point just N. of Gardner Inlet, where it skirts a low ridge along the NE. side of Wetmore Glacier. From this point Irvine Glacier flows in a parallel but slightly lower course to Wetmore Glacier, the two merging at the head GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA of Gardner Inlet N. of Mt. Austin, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 74°42’S., 63°15’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for George J. Irvine, of the Engineer Depot at Fort Belvoir, Va., who outlined the RARE photo- graphic program. IRVING POINT: easternmost point of Visoloi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°43’S., 27°07’W. Disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1819. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for Lt. Cdr. J. C. C. Irving, RN (Ret.), who made sketches of the South Sandwich Is. from the ship. Not adopted: Penguin Point. ISAACSON POINT: the SE. point of Bellings- hausen I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26S., 27°03’W. Charted by DI personnel on the Dis- covery II in 1930 and named for Miss S. M. Isaac- son, an assistant to the staff of the Discovery Com- mittee. ISAIAH BOWMAN GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide and 40 mi. long, which lies SE. of Mt. Ruth Gade, in the Queen Maud Range, and flows NE. to the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°30’S., 160°00’W. Disc. by the Geological Party of the ByrdAE in 1929, and named for Isaiah Bowman, eminent geographer and Pres. of The Johns Hop- kins Univ. who was dir. of the American Geo- graphical Soc., 1915-35. ISELIN BANK: submarine bank lying N. of Pennell Bank and Ross Sea; centering in about 71°45/S., 177°30’W. Disc. by personnel on the Bear of Oakland during her cruises for the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and named for C. O’D. Iselin, II, of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. Isfjorden: see Ice Bay. ISLA (plural, ISLAS) : for names beginning with Isla or Islas see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Isla Alfa see Alfa, Isla. (Isla is a Spanish word for “‘island.”’) ISLANDS POINT: point separating Berg Bay and Relay Bay, lying along the W. shore of Robert- son Bay in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°28’S., 169°27’E. Charted in 1911 by the North- ern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Probably so named because several small islands lie off the coast in front of this feature. ISLAY: island in the William Scoresby Arch. off Mac-Robertson Coast, lying about 4 mi. ENE. of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay and forming the NW. shore of Macfie Sound; in about 67°22’S., 170 59°45’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, who probably named it for an island of that name in the Hebrides. ISLES, BAY OF: bay, about 9 mi. wide and receding about 3 mi., lying between Capes Buller and Wilson along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°20’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775, and so named by him because several islands lie in the bay. Not adopted: Bucht der Inseln [German]. ISLOTE (plural, ISLOTES): for names begin- ning with Islote or Islotes see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Islotes Avion see Avion, Islotes. (Islote is a Spanish word for “Tslet.’’) IVEAGH, MOUNT: mountain about 11,000 ft. in el., which stands between Keltie and Mill Glaciers on the E. side of Beardmore Gl. in about 85°10’S., 171°20’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. IVORY PINNACLES: two ice-covered peaks, about 3,400 ft. in el., projecting from the S. part of a spur which extends N. from the W. side of Detroit Plateau in the direction of Poynter Hill, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°50’S., 59°06’W. Charted in 1948 by members of the FIDS who applied this descriptive name. JABET PEAK: peak about 1,800 ft. in el., which marks the SW. end of a serrated ridge about 1 mi. NE. of Port Lockroy, on the NW. side of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°28’W. Prob- ably first sighted in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache. The peak was first charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Jacques Jabet, boatswain of the exp. ship Frangais. JACKLING, MOUNT: peak standing about 0.7 . mi. W. of Mt. Fitzsimmons, in the N. group of the Rockefeller Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°54’S., 155°24’W. Disc. on Jan. 27, 1929 by mem- bers of the ByrdAE on an exploratory flight over this area. Jackson, Mount: see Andrew Jackson, Mount. Jacob Ruppert Coast: see Ruppert Coast. JACQUINOT, MOUNT: pyramidal peak about 1,600 ft. in el. with exposed rock on its N. side, lying 2 mi. S. of Cape Legoupil and 0.5 mi. E. of Huon Bay, on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°21’S., 57°53’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, who named it for Charles Jac- quinot, captain of the exp. ship Zélée. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA JACQUINOT ROCKS: group of rocks about mid- way between Hombron Rocks and Cape Ducorps, lying about 3 mi. off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°25’S., 58°24’W. Charted in 1946 by the FIDS who named the rocks for Honoré Jacquinot, surgeon with the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, which explored this coast in 1838. JAGGED ISLAND: rocky island less than 1 mi. long, about 2.5 mi. NNE. of Round Pt., King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°53’S., 58°14’W. This island, presumably known to early sealers in the area, was charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935 and given this descrip- tive name. JAGGED ISLAND: island in Grandidier Chan., about 2 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, lying about 1.5 mi. E. of Dodman I. and 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°58’S., 65°44’W. Probably first sighted in January 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. JAGGED ROCKS: group of jagged rocks lying near the center of Hut Cove in the E. part of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 56°59’W. First charted in 1903 by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE. Named by the FIDS in 1945. Jallour Islands; Jalour Islets: see Yalour Islets. JAMES, CAPE: cape which forms the S. tip of Smith I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 63°06’S., 62°44’°W. The name appears on a chart based upon a Br. exp. 1828-31, under Foster, and is now well established in international usage. James Island: see Smith Island. James Lassiter Barrier; James Lassiter Ice Bar- rier: see Filchner Ice Shelf. JAMES NUNATAK: conical nunatak about 1,400 ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. S. of Lewis Pt. on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°59’S., 62°26’W. This feature was photographed from the air by members of the USAS in September 1940 and was probably seen by the USAS groung party that ex- plored this coast. During 1947 it was charted by a joint party consisting of memVers of the RARE and FIDS. Named by the FIDS for David P. James, FIDS surveyor at the Hope Bay base in 1945-46. Jameson Island; Jamesons Island: see Low Is- land. James Robertson, Mount: see Robertson, Mount. 171 JAMES ROSS ISLAND: large island on the SE. side and near the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen., from which it is separated by Prince Gustav Chan.; in 64°10’S., 57°40’W. It is irregularly shaped and extends about 40 mi. in a N.-S. direction. Charted in October 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who named it for Sir James Clark Ross, leader of a Br. exp. to this area in 1842. Not adopted: Ross Island (q.v.). James W. Ellsworth Land: see Ellsworth High- land. JANE PEAK: conspicuous nunatak, about 700 ft. in el., standing 0.5 mi. W. of the N. part of Borge Bay on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°38’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI person- nel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named in 1954 by the Br-APC after the brig Jane, James Weddell commanding, which visited the South Orkney Is. in 1822-23. JANET ROCK: small rock about 7.5 mi. WNW. of Marret Gl., lying immediately seaward of the ice cliffs overlying Adélie Coast; in about 66°33’S., 139°10’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, and named for Paul Janet, French spir- itualist-philosopher of the 19th century. Jane Wade, Mount: see Gray, Mount. Jane Wyatt, Mount: see Wyatt, Mount. JANSSEN PEAK: conspicuous peak about 3,600 ft. in el., forming the SW. end of Sierra Du Fief in the SW. part of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°53’S., 63°31’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. It was charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Jules Janssen, noted French astronomer. Jason, Mount; Jason Land: see Jason Island. JASON HARBOR: bay about 1 mi. wide, lying W. of Allen Bay in the N. side of Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°35’W. Charted and named by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. The bay was previously visited by the Jason, Capt. C. A. Larsen, in 1894. JASON ISLAND: irregular-shaped, mountainous island, about 40 mi. long in an E.-W. direction and varying from 2 to 10 mi. wide, lying off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°10’S., 61°20’W. The island rises steeply above the Larsen Ice Shelf to about 1,500 ft. in el. and is deeply indented by conspicuous bays, and on the W. side is separated from Philippi Rise on Palmer Pen. by an ice-filled strait only 2 mi. wide. Disc. on Dec. 1, 1893 by a Nor. exp. under GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA C. A. Larsen, who named it Mount Jason after his ship. Larsen was too far away to determine the true nature of his newly discovered “mountain” which Dr. Otto Nordenskjéld, when viewing it in 1902, considered to be a nunatak in the ice shelf. The island was surveyed by the FIDS in 1947 and 1953. The southernmost promontory on this is- land is probably what Larsen considered to be a separate island and which he named Veier Island. Not adopted: Jason Land, Mount Jason. JASON ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. N. of Larsen Pt., at the W. side of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°30’W. Named after the Jason, the vessel used by Capt. C. A. Larsen in 1893-94 in exploring Cum- berland Bay and the E. coast of Palmer Peninsula. J. Carlson Bay: see Carlsson Bay. JEANNE, MOUNT: snowy peak, about 600 ft. in el., standing 0.25 mi. NW. of Mt. Guéguen and over- looking Port Charcot on Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°01’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, and named by him for his sister. Not adopted: Jeanne Hill. Jeanne Hill: see Jeanne, Mount. JEBSEN, PORT: small harbor immediately N. of Jebsen Point, along the W. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°40’W. Port Jeb- sen was roughly charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, a Norwegian whaling captain. The harbor is named after nearby Jebsen Point. JEBSEN POINT: point at the S. side of Port Jeb- sen, along the W. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°40’W. Jebsen Point was charted and named on a map based upon a running survey of these islands by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. Not adopted: Point Jebsen. JEBSEN ROCKS: chain of rocks extending in an E.-W. direction about 0.5 mi. N. of Jebsen Point, off the W. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°41’W. These rocks were first charted by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, a Norwegian whaler who made a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. They are named after nearby Jeb- sen Point. JEFFRIES POINT: point along the south-central side of Cook I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S., 27°09’W. Charted in 1930 by DI person- nel on the Discovery II and named for Miss M. E. Jeffries, an assistant to the staff of the Discovery Committee. 172 JENNINGS LAKE: narrow meltwater lake about 10 mi. long, lying on the E. flank of Baker Three Gl. at the foot of Jennings Promontory, and retained by moraine deposits which have formed along the S. and W. sides of Thil It., off the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°12’S., 71°45’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op Hjp. in March 1947, and so named because of its close association with Jennings Promontory. JENNINGS PROMONTORY: prominent rock promontory, which marks the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast, standing at the N. side of the confluence of Kreitzer and Baker Three Glaciers, at the head of Amery Ice Shelf; in about 70°12’S., 71°46’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp. in March 1947, and named by him for Lt. James C. Jennings, USN, co-pilot and navigator on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights made in January-March 1947 in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. JENNY ISLAND: rocky island about 2 mi. in diameter and about 1,600 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi. ENE. of Cape Alexandra, the SE. extremity of Adelaide I., in northern Marguerite Bay; in 67°44’S., 68°25’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for the wife of Sub-Lieutenant Maurice Bongrain, French Navy, second officer of the expedition. JEREMY, CAPE: cape at the W. side of Mt. Edgell, forming the E. side of the N. entrance to George VI Sound, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°24’S., 68°51’W. Disc. by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, who named it for Jeremy Scott, son of J. M. Scott, who served as home agent for the expedition. JESSIE BAY: bay about 4 mi. wide, lying between Mackenzie and Pirie Peninsulas along the N. side of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°43’/W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Dr. William S. Bruce, who named this bay for his wife, Mrs. Jessie Mackenzie Bruce. Jessie O’Keefe, Mount: see Blackburn, Mount. JESTER ROCK: isolated rock midway between Emperor It. and Noble Rocks in the De Dion Its., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 68°42’W. The De Dion Its. were first sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Char- cot. Jester Rock was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its association with Emperor Islet. Not adopted: Page Rock. Joerg, Cape: see Agassiz, Cape. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA JOERG PENINSULA: rugged, mountainous pen- insula, about 20 mi. long in an E.—W. direction and averaging about 8 mi. wide, lying between Trail and Solberg Inlets on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 65°12’W. The peninsula lies in the area explored from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, but was first charted by members of the USAS in 1940. It was named in 1952 by the British Antarctic Place-names Committee, following a 1947 survey of this coast by the FIDS, for W. L. G. Joerg, who, until his death on Jan. 7, 1952, was a member of the Advisory Committee on Antarctic Names of the United States Board on Geographic Names, and over a long period made notable contributions to the solution of problems of Antarctic cartography, nomenclature and history. JOERG PLATEAU: an upland area which is mainly ice covered, but through which protrude the tops of numerous peaks and mountains, sit- uated to the SW. of Gardner Inlet and W. of Orville Escarpment at the base of Palmer Pen.; centering in about 76°00’S., 67°30’W. Disc. and photo- graphed from the air by the RARE 1946-48, under Ronne, who named the plateau for W. L. G. Joerg. JOHANNESEN POINT: the SW. point of Main I. in the Willis Is., off the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 38°17’W. This feature was named All Johannesens Point, presumably by DI personnel who charted South Georgia in the period 1926-30. Following a survey of the island in 1951-52, the SGS reported that this cumbersome name is seldom used locally. On this basis, the Br-APC recom- mended the present shortened form of the name. Not adopted: All Johannesens Point. JOHANNES MULLER CRESTS: group of peaks about 9,800 ft. in el., lying immediately S. of the Filchner Mtns. at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°40’S., 8°10’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher and named for Johannes Miller, navigation officer of the Deutschland, exp. ship of the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner. Not adopted: Johann Miller Crest. JOHANNSEN LOCH: cove about 0.5 mi. long, lying 1 mi. N. of Ocean Hbr. along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°15°W. The name appears on a chart based upon surveys by DI per- sonnel during the period 1926-30, but may reflect an earlier naming. Johann Miiller Crest: see Johannes Miiller Crests. JOHANSEN ISLANDS: group of small, low, partly snow-free islands lying off the NW. coast of Alexander I Island; in about 69°05’S., 72°07’W. 173 Disc. from the U.S.S. Bear, on its initial approach to establish the East Base of the USAS in 1940. Named for Bendik Johansen, ice pilot for the USAS, who served in a similar capacity on the Byrd Ant- arctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. JOHN BOWMAN PEAK: peak about 1,900 ft. in el., lying approximately in the center of the Alex- andra Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°30’S., 153°28’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1929, and named for John McEntee Bowman, then Pres. of the Bowman Biltmore Hotels Corporation, who donated headquarters for the preparation of the expedition. Not adopted: John Bowman Moun- tain. John Carlsson Bucht: see Carlsson Bay. John Hayes Hammond Inlet; John Hays Ham- mond Glacier: see Hammond Glacier. John Murray Gletscher: see Purvis Glacier. John Oliver LaGorce Mountains: see La Gorce Mountains. JOHN PEAKS: prominent snow-covered peaks, about 1,400 ft. in el., at the S. end of Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°03’W. Prob- ably first sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, who disc. these islands in De- cember 1821. The peaks were charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II who named them for D. D. John, member of the zoological staff of the Discovery Committee. JOHN QUINCY ADAMS GLACIER: channel gla- cier about 9 mi. wide and over 20 mi. long, flowing WNW. from the continental ice overlying Budd Coast to the E. side of the head of Vincennes Bay; in about 66°50’S., 109°50’E. This area was en- shrouded by heavy clouds in the USN Op. Hip. aerial photographs of February 1947, but it is be- lieved that this glacier extends for a considerable distance to the SE. and that it lies close N. of a prominent, ice-covered E-W. mountain range which overlooks the head of Vincennes Bay. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—-ACAN for John Quincy Adams, the sixth president of the United States, who initiated interest in a govern- mental scientific exp. and the establishment of a national observatory. Adams was later instru- mental, while serving as Representative from Mas- sachusetts, in gaining congressional authorization of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838—42, and perpetuat- ing the compilation and publication of the large number of scientific reports based on the work of the expedition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA John Shepard Island: see Shepard Island. JOHNSON, CAPE: cape along the E. coast of Victoria Land forming the N. side of the entrance to Wood Bay; in about 74°15’S., 166°00’E. Disc. in 1941 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Capt. Edward John Johnson, RN. Not adopted: Cape Sibbald (q.v.). JOHNSONS DOCK: anchorage at the NE. side of South Bay, along the S. coast of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°37’S., 60°26’W. The name dates back to about 1822 and was applied by sealers who frequented the anchorage. Not adopted: Johnson’s Dock. Johnsons Island: see Half Moon Island. JOHNSTON GLACIER: glacier flowing in a SSE. direction along the N. side of Mt. Owen to the head of Nantucket Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°28’S., 62°13’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Freeborn Johnston, of the Dept. of Terrestrial Magnetism at Carnegie Inst., Washington, D.C. in recognition of his con- tributions to the planning of the geophysical pro- gram and the working up of the results for the expedition. JOHNSTON PEAK: sharp dark peak about 3,500 ft. in el., about 12 mi. SW. of Simmers Peaks, in Enderby Land; in about 66°11’S., 52°28’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who named it for Prof. T. Harvey Johnston, chief biologist to the expedition. Not adopted: Harvey Johnston Peak, Mount Harvey Johnston. John Wheeler, Cape: see Wheeler, Cape. JOINVILLE ISLAND: largest island of the Join- ville Island group, about 40 mi. long in an E.-W. di- rection and 12 mi. wide, lying off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen., from which it is separated by Ant- arctic Sound; in 63°15’S., 55°45’W. Disc. in 1838 by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who named it for Prince de Joinville. JOMFRUENE ISLAND: island with several small but well-defined peaks, lying 1 mi. NW. of Cape Paryadin, off the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 38°04’W. The name Three Point Island has appeared on maps for this island for many years. Following a survey of the island in 1951-52, the SGS reported that this island is known to whalers and sealers as Jomfruene, and that the name Three Point Island is unknown locally. The name Jomfruene Island is approved in order to conform with local usage. This name should not be confused with a probably corruption of the ap- proved spelling, Jungfrauen (The Maidens), which 174 has erroneously appeared on some maps for three low rocks lying close off the NE. tip of Jomfruene Island. Not adopted: Three Point Island. JONASSEN ISLAND: island about 2.5 mi. long, lying 1 mi. N. of Andersson I. in the S. entrance to Antarctic Sound, off the NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°33’S., 56°40’W. This island was named Irizar Island by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, for Capt. Julian Irizar of the Argentine ship Uruguay, who rescued the shipwrecked SwedAE in 1903. In 1904 Dr. Jean B. Charcot, apparently un- aware of the Swedish naming, gave the name Irizar to an island off the W. coast of Palmer Peninsula. Since it is confusing to have two islands in close proximity identically named, and because Charcot’s Irizar Island has appeared more widely on maps and in reports, the US-ACAN accepts the decision of the Br-APC that the name given this island by Nordenskjéld be altered. The new name commem- orates Ole Jonassen, who accompanied Norden- skjold on his two principal sledge journeys in 1902-3. Not adopted: Irizar Island. Jones, Cape: see Jones Ridge. JONES, CAPE: bluff on the E. coast of Victoria Land, lying NNW. of Coulman I.; in about 73°08’S., 169°40’K. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Capt. William Jones, RN. Not adopted: Cape Constance. JONES, MOUNT: northernmost mountain of the Clark Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°14’S., 142°06’W. Disc. on aerial flights from West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for Clarence F. Jones, then Prof. of Geography at Clark University. JONES CHANNEL: narrow ice-filled channel, about 10 mi. long and from 1 to 3 mi. wide, which separates Blaiklock I. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and joins Bourgeois Fjord with the head of Bigourdan Fjord; in 67°30’S., 66°57’W. Named for Harold D. Jones, FIDS airplane mechanic at Stonington I., 1947-49, who was a member of the FIDS party which disc., surveyed, and sledged through this channel in 1949. JONES GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti- nental ice to Wilhelm II Coast, close E. of Krause Pt.; in about 66°35’S., 91°30’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946- 47, and named by the US—ACAN for Ens. Teddy E. Jones, USNR, photo interpreter with the Naval Photographic Interpretation Center, who served as recorder and assistant with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established astronomical control stations along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA JONES RIDGE: small rock ridge, marked by a sharp peak at its seaward end, protruding above the lower reaches of Denman Gl. near the point where the glacier enters Robinson Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°42’S., 99°19’E. Disc. by the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who applied the name Cape Jones, be- lieving the feature marked the W. end of the promi- nent rock cliffs at the E. side of Denman Gl. Dr. S. E. Jones served as medical officer at the Western Base and as leader of the party which extended exploration W. to Gaussberg. The name Jones Ridge was reassigned on the US-ACAN map of 1955, compiled from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in February 1947, because a substan- tial portion of the Denman Gl. flowage separates this feature from the rock cliffs to the east. Not adopted: Cape Jones. JONES ROCKS: group of rock outcrops protrud- ing above the ice-covered cape at the E. side of the entrance to the Bay of Winds, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°34’S., 97°45’E. Charted by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named by him for Dr. S. Evan Jones, medical officer with the Western Base party. Jon Islet: see Lavebrua Islet. Joseph Ames Range: see Ames Range. JOSEPH COOK BAY: bay lying SE. of Cape Freshfield along George V Coast; in about 68°30’S., 151°45’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Maw- son, who named it for Joseph Cook, Prime Minister of the Commonwealth of Australia in 1914. Not adopted: Cook Bay. Joseph Haag, Mount: see Haag, Mount. JOSEPHINE, MOUNT: low-lying peak, about 1,600 ft. in el., marked by prominent rock out- crops, standing about 6 mi. ESE. of John Bowman Peak in the Alexandra Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°32’S., 153°12’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE Eastern Flight of Dec. 5, 1929, and named by him during the ByrdAE operations of 1933-35 for Miss Josephine Clay Ford, daughter of Edsel Ford, contributor to both expeditions. Josephine Petras, Mount: see Petras, Mount. JOUBIN ISLETS: group of N.-S. trending islets lying about 5 mi. SW. of Cape Albert de Monaco, Anvers I., and 3 mi. W. of Gossler Islets, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°46’S., 64°25’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Louis Joubin, French naturalist. 175 JOUGLA POINT: point forming the W. side of the entrance to Alice Creek in Port Lockroy, lying on the W. side of Wiencke I. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°31’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who considered it to be a peninsula. Because of its small size the term point is considered more appropriate. Not adopted: Presqu’ile Jougla [French]. JOYCE, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain lying NW. of Mounts Howard and Bowen on the divide between David Gl. and Davis Gl. in Victoria Land; in about 75°36’S., 160°38’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Ernest Joyce, in charge of general stores, dogs, sledges, and zoological collections with this exp. and a member with Shackleton of the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. JULES, CAPE: rocky cape with a small cove along its N. end, lying about 9 mi. ESE. of Cape Bienvenue on Adélie Coast; in 66°44’S., 140°55’E. Disc. in 1840 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, who applied his own given name to this feature. The area was charted by the AAE in 1912-13, and again by the BANZARE in 1931, both under Mawson. The FrAE under Barré obtained astronomical con- trol at this locality in 1951. JUMBO COVE: cove about 0.75 mi. SSE. of Busen Pt., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°33’W. Charted and named by DI per- sonnel during the period 1926-30. JUNCTION CORNER: the junction point of the mainland with the W. side of Shackleton Ice Shelf on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°29’S., 94°50’E. Disc. and named by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson. June, Mount: see Harold June, Mount. JUNE ISLAND: islet in the Debenham Is. lying SW. of Audrey I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°08’S., 67°07’W. Disc. and charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, who named it for a daughter of Frank Debenham, member of the BGLE Advisory Committee. JUPITER GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 10 mi. long and 5 mi. wide at its mouth, which flows SE. into George VI Sound to the south of Ablation Valley; in 70°57’S., 68°30’W. This glacier was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W.L.G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The name, after the planet Jupiter, was given by FIDS following their surveys in 1948 and 1949. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA KADE POINT: point which forms the N. side of the entrance to Wilson Hbr., on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 37°47’W. Kade Point . is an old established name dating back to about 1912. Not adopted: Rade Point. KAINAN BAY: bay about 1 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, indenting the Ross Ice Shelf about 30 mi. NE. of the Bay of Whales; in about 78°14’S., 161°55’W. Disc. in January 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, but it was not named until the Japanese exp. under Shirase, in the exp. ship Kainan Maru, landed there in January 1912. Little America V, the main base of USN Operation Deepfreeze, 1955-56, was established at this site in late December 1955. Not adopted: Helen Washington Bay. KAISER, CAPE: northern extremity of a group of small islands lying close off the E. side of Bra- bant I., about 6 mi. WSW. of the S. end of Two Hummock I., in Palmer Arch.; in 64°12’S., 61°52’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for a supporter of the expe- dition. Kaiser Wilhelm II Coast; Kaiser Wilhelm II Land: see Wilhelm II Coast. Kaiser Wilhelm II Islands; Kaiser Wilhelm Inseln: see Dannebrog Islands. Kalber-Berg: see Calf Head. KANIN POINT: rocky point, lying 2 mi. WSW. of Kelp Pt. on the S. side of Husvik Hbr., in Strom- ness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°42’W. The descriptive name Rocky Point was given for this feature, probably by DI personnel who surveyed Husvik Hbr. in 1928. This name is used elsewhere in the Antarctic. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that this feature is known at the Husvik whaling station as Kanin Point (the word Kanin meaning rabbit). This name presumably arose from one of several attempts made since 1872 to introduce rabbits into the island. The name Kanin Point is approved on the basis of local usage. Not adopted: Rocky Point. KAPPA ISLAND: islet, nearly 0.5 mi. long, lying immediately S. of Beta I. and close E. of Theta Its. in ‘the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W. The name Kappa, derived from the tenth letter of the Greek alphabet, probably was given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Donati [Spanish]. 176 Kap Parjadine: see Paryadin, Cape. KARLSEN ROCK: submerged rock about 10.5 mi. NNW. of Penguin Pt., the NW. point of Coro- nation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°21’S., 46°00’W. The rock appears charted and named on a map by Petter Sgrile, a Norwegian whaler who made a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted: Karlsens Rocks, Kar- sten Rock. Karlsens Rocks; Karsten Rock: see Karlsen Rock. KARPF POINT: turret-shaped headland sur- mounting the plateau escarpment along the E. coast of Palmer Pen., standing at the head of Mill Inlet; in 66°54’S., 64°30’W. Charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Alois Karpf, librar- ian of the Kaiserliche and Ko6nigliche Geo- graphische Gesellschaft in Vienna and joint author of a polar bibliography. KAR PLATEAU: small plateau which is snow covered except for an almost vertical rock scarp marking its S. side. The plateau rises gently toward the NW. to the heights of Mt. Marston, sit- uated at the W. side of Granite Hbr. in Victoria Land; in about 76°56’S., 162°25’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. ‘“Kar” is a Turkish word meaning snow. Kasco Glacier: see Waverly Glacier. Kastor Nunatak: see Castor Nunatak. KATER, CAPE: cape fringed by rocks, marking the W. side of the entrance to Charcot Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°45’S., 59°40’W. This coast was sketched by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster, who named a cape in this region after Capt. Henry Kater, a member of the com- mittee which planned the exp. This region was more fully mapped by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, who gave the name Cape Gunnar to this cape. The name Kater perpetuates the earlier naming. Not adopted: Cape Gunnar. Katherine Paine, Mount: see Paine, Mount. KATHLEEN, MOUNT: mountain in the Com- monwealth Range, standing NE. of Mt. Robert Scott and overlooking the E. side of Beardmore Gl. at its junction with Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°40’S., 174°40’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who probably named it for his sister. Not adopted: Mount Catherine. Kats Pillar: see Petes Pillar. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA KAYE CREST: mountain crest about 10,000 ft. in el., lying between Mt. Preuschoff and Mt. Hade- rich at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland, in about 72°18’S., 4°40’E. Disc. and named by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39. KAY ISLETS: group of islets in Ross Sea, lying off Victoria Land, about 19 mi. E. of Cape Sibbald, in about 74°00’S., 167°45’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named for Lt. Joseph W. Kay, Dir. of the Rossbank Observatory. KAY NUNATAK: dark rocky nunatak about 2,000 ft. in el., situated at the S. side of Mobiloil Inlet and forming the northernmost outlier of the ice-covered mountain mass surmounted by Mt. Hitchcock, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 68°43’S., 64°40’W. The nunatak was photo- graphed from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928, and by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935. Named in 1952 by the US-ACAN for John D. Kay of the American Geographical Soc., who by utiliz- ing these photographs assisted in constructing the first reconnaissance map of this area. KEELER, CAPE: ice-covered cape which rises gently northwestward to about 1,700 ft. in el., forming the S. side of the entrance to Revelle Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°51’S., 63°13’W. Disc. on Dec. 20, 1928 by Sir Hubert Wilkins, who named it for Fred E. Keeler of the Lockheed Co. An advance base and meteorologi- cal station was established at Cape Keeler by the RARE under Ronne in 1947-48. KEEP ROCK: small rock lying close W. of Castle Rock, off the W. extremity of Snow I., South Shet- land Is.; in 62°47’S., 61°37’W. The name, which derives from association with Castle Rock, was given by the Br—APC following survey by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, in 1951-52. Kegel-Berg: see Skittle, Mount. KELLER INLET: ice-filled inlet about 10 mi. long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 6 mi. wide, be- tween Cape Little and Cape Light, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°15’S., 61°05’W. This inlet was photographed from the air by members of the USAS in December 1940, and in 1947 by members of the RARE under Ronne, who in con- junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Louis Keller of Beaumont, Texas, who contributed supplies to Ronne’s expe- dition. KELLER RANGE: mountain mass about 1,900 ft. in el., forming the promontory between Mac- kellar and Martel Inlets in Admiralty Bay, on King 177 George I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°26’W. Probably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in Decem- ber 1909. KELP BAY: small open bay, close ESE. of Doris Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; 54°27’S., 36°07’W. It is filled with kelp and there is no anchorage. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the name is well established in use among the South Georgia sealers. KELP POINT: point fringed by kelp, marking the SE. side of the entrance to Husvik Hbr., the southern arm of Stromness Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°38’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. KELSEY GLACIER: glacier flowing E. along the S. side of Mt. Owen to the head of Nantucket Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°27’S., 62°25’/W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Lawrence D. Kelsey, radio operator with the expedition. Not adopted: Delbert Little Glacier, D. M. Little Glacier, Little Glacier. KELTIE, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the N. point of land on Clarie Coast, lying about 9 mi. WNW. of Cape Cesney; in about 65°55’S., 133°30’E. Disc. in January 1912 from the Aurora by AAE per- sonnel under Mawson, and roughly charted at a distance of about 10 mi. as lying in 66°05’S., 133°00’E. Named by Mawson for Sir John Scott Keltie, Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1892- 1915. Identification of Cape Keltie is based upon the correlation of the northernmost coastal ex- tremity on the AAE map with the US-ACAN reconnaissance map of 1955 compiled from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. As no landings or coastal surveys have been made along this coast, the 1955 interpretation of Cape Keltie is adopted because of photographic conti- nuity with established features at the W. end of Adélie Coast. KELTIE, MOUNT: mountain in the Conway Range, about 8,900 ft. in el., lying SW of Mulock Inlet, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°16’S., 159°20’K. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir John Scott Keltie. Keltie Glacier: see Scott Keltie Glacier. KELTIE GLACIER: tributary glacier entering the E. side of Beardmore Gl. about 10 mi. N. of Mill Gl.; in about 84°50’S., 171°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Sir John Scott Keltie. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA KEMP, CAPE: cape forming the SW. tip of Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°52’S., 63°39’W. Disc. and first charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Various islands of the Palmer Arch. were charted in 1927 by DI personnel on the Discovery, and this cape was subsequently named for Stanley W. Kemp, British marine biol- ogist and oceanographer, and scientific leader on the Discovery. Kemp, Mount: see Kempe, Mount. KEMP COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant- arctica that lies between the head of Edward VIII Bay, location not precisely determined but in about 67°10’S., 56°00’E., and William Scoresby Bay, in about 67°25’S., 59°40’E. Named for a British seal- ing captain, Peter Kemp, who disc. land in this vicinity in 1833. Not adopted: Kemp Land. KEMPE, MOUNT: peak about 9,800 ft. in el., lying SE. of Mt. Huggins, in the Royal Society Range, on the W. side of the Ross Sea; in about 78°21’S., 162°47’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir Alfred Bray Kempe, at that time Treasurer of the Royal Society. Not adopted: Mount Kemp. Kemp Land: see Kemp Coast. Kemp Peak: see Stanley Kemp Peak. KEMP PENINSULA: irregular ice-covered pen- insula about 25 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and 12 mi. wide. The peninsula rises gently to about 1,000 ft. in el. and projects E. between the heads of Mason and Mossman Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°08’S., 60°15’W. First seen from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS, who at that time photographed all but its N. extremity. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Stanley W. Kemp, British marine biologist and oceanographer, first Dir. of Research of the Discovery Investigations, 1924-36, and Dir. of the Plymouth Marine Laboratory, 1936-45. KENDALL ROCKS: group of pillar-shaped rocks about 3 mi. NNE. of Tower I., lying in Bransfield Str.; in 63°28’S., 59°49°W. The name Kendall Group appears NW. of this position on a chart based upon work by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster, but it was later found that no islets exist there. The name Kendall Rocks has subsequently been applied to these pillar-shaped rocks disc. in 1838 by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, Named for Lt. E. N. Kendall of Foster’s exp. ship, the Chanticleer. 178 KENNEDY, CAPE: point forming the E. extrem- ity of Melba Pen.; on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°32’S., 98°25’E. Disc. by the Eastern Party, under Frank Wild, operating from the Western Base of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson. Named for A. L. Kennedy, magnetician at the Western Base and cartographer for the Eastern Party. Kennedy, Mount: see Kennedy Peak. KENNEDY, MOUNT: small bare peak about 1,800 ft. in el, standing about 2 mi. S. of Mt. Rivett in the Gustav Bull Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°51’S., 66°13’E. The BANZARE, under Mawson, sighted land in this area in early January 1930 and an airplane flight was made from the ship for observation. The exp. returned to the area on Feb. 13, 1931, making a landing at Scullin Monolith. They named this peak pre- sumably for A. L. Kennedy who did special physi- cal research with the exp. during 1930-31. KENNEDY PEAK: small peak protruding above the continental ice about 3 mi. SSW. of Mt. Barr Smith, standing at the W. side of Scott Gl. on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°14’S., 99°00’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for A. L. Kennedy, cartographer with the AAEK Western Base party, in recognition of the close correlation of his 1912-13 running survey of the E. half of the Queen Mary Coast with the US-ACAN map of 1955 compiled from aerial photographs. Not adopted: Mount Kennedy (q.v.). KENNETT RAWSON, MOUNT: prominent pro- jecting corner point on the massif surmounted by Mt. Alice Gade, standing between Isaiah Bowman Gl. and Moffett Gl. in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°55’S., 162°10’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1928-30, on the South Polar Flight of November 1929. contributor to this exp. and a member of the ByrdAE, 1933-35. KERR, CAPE: snow-covered bluff with steep sides, marking the N. side of the entrance to Barne Inlet, along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°10’S., 160°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Admiral of the Fleet Lord Walter Kerr was one of the Sea Lords who lent his assist- ance to the expedition. Ketchum, Cape: see Light, Cape. KETCHUM GLACIER: large glacier descending in a NE. direction from the Joerg Plateau and entering the SW. side of Gardner Inlet southward of Mt. Austin, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 75°00’S., 63°45’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947— Named by Byrd for Kennett L. Rawson, | —_— GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 48, under Ronne, who named it for Cdr. Gerald Ketchum, USN, commander of the icebreaker Bur- ton Island which broke the ice to free the RARE from Marguerite Bay for the return home. Not adopted: Gardner Glacier, Irvine Gardner Glacier. KEYHOLE ISLET: small rocky islet lying 5 mi. SE. of the Terra Firma Is. and 0.75 mi. N. of the ice cliffs of Cape Berteaux, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°47’S., 67°20’W. First surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who applied this name because of the presence of an ice arch formed by the ice cap on this islet. KEYSTONE CLIFFS: cliffs, about 2,000 ft. in el., marking the E. face of the sedimentary ridge be- tween Mercury and Venus Glaciers, on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 71°35’S., 68°13’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ells- worth on Nov. 23, 1935. The cliffs were roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because the geologic structures revealed in these cliffs provided the Key to the general tectonic structure of the area. KIDSON, CAPE: abrupt rock scarp about 1,000 ft. in el., forming the N. side of the entrance to New Bedford Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°24’S., 60°45’W. First sighted and photo- graphed from the air by members of the USAS in 1940. During 1947 the cape was photographed from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Edward Kidson, New Zealand meteorologist and author of the meteorological reports of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14. KIDSON ISLAND: island about 300 ft. in el., lying NNE. of the Colbeck Arch., off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°10’S., 61°09’E. Disc. in Febru- ary 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named by him for Edward Kidson. Not adopted: Kidston Island. Kidston Island: see Kidson Island. Kiffin, Mount: see Kyffin, Mount. KILLER RIDGE: dark ridge about 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Miller Gl. in the W. part of the Gonville and Caius Range, in Victoria Land; in about 77°08’S., 161°57’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and named after the killer whale whose outline the ridge is said to resemble. Kilpatrick; Mount: see Kirkpatrick, Mount. 179 KING, MOUNT: flat-topped, mainly ice-covered mountain, about 6,200 ft. in el., standing between Sedgwick and Tumble Glaciers and connected by an ice-covered spur to the Douglas Range to the W., on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 69°53’/S., 69°26’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for William B. R. King, prof. of geology at Cambridge Uni- versity. KING EDWARD COVE: sheltered cove imme- diately S. of Mt. Duse, in the W. side of Cumber- land East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W. This cove, frequented by early sealers at South Georgia, was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. It was named in about 1906 for King Edward VII of England. Not adopted: King Edward’s Cove. KING EDWARD POINT: low point projecting from the N. side of King Edward Cove toward the central part of the cove, on the W. side of Cumber- land Kast Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden- skjdld. It was named in about 1906 for King Ed- ward VII of England. Not adopted: Edwards Point, King Edwards Point, King Edward’s Point. King Edward VIII Gulf: see Edward VIII Bay. King Edward VII Land; King Edward VII Pen- insula: see Edward VII Peninsula. KING GEORGE BAY: bay indenting the S. coast of King George I. for about 4 mi., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°05’S., 58°05’W. Named on Jan. 24, 1820 for the then reigning sovereign of England by a Br. exp. under Brans- field. Not adopted: Baie St. Georges [French], Georges Bay, St. George’s Bay. KING GEORGE ISLAND: island about 43 mi. long and about 16 mi. wide at its broadest part, lying in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°00’S., 98°15’°W. Named about 1820 for the then reigning sovereign of England. Not adopted: Ile du Roi Georges [French], King George’s Island, Konig Georg Insel [German], Waterloo Island. King George V Coast: see George V Coast. King George V Land: see George V Coast. King George’s Strait: see Nelson Strait. King George VI Sound: see George VI Sound. KING HAAKON BAY: bay, about 3 mi. wide and receding NE. about 5 mi., lying 1 mi. N. of Queen Maud Bay, along the S. coast of South GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Georgia; in 54°11’S., 37°18’W. Named in about 1912 by Norwegian whalers for King Haakon VII of Norway. Not adopted: King Haakons Bay, King Haakons Harbor. King Haakons Harbor: see King Haakon Bay. King Leopold and Queen Astrid Coast; King Leopold and Queen Astrid Land: see Leopold and Astrid Coast. King Oscar II Coast; King Oscar II Land: see Oscar II Coast. KINNEAR MOUNTAINS: group of mountains, more than 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the S. margin of Wordie Ice Shelf about 11 mi. E. of Mt. Edgell, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°29’S., 67°42°W. Disc. and roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The name was proposed by members of BGLE for Sir Norman B. Kinnear, British ornithologist who, as member of the staff of the British Museum (Natural History), was of great assistance to BGLE. KINNES, CAPE: cape which forms the W. ex- tremity of Joinville I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°21’S., 56°33’W. It was sighted, prob- ably for the first time, by members of the Dundee whaling exp., 1892-93, and named by them for R. Kinnes, sponsor of the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Kinness. Kinness, Cape: see Kinnes, Cape. KINSEY, CAPE: prominent cape at the E. side of the entrance to Davies Bay, on Oates Coast, in about 69°12’S., 158°50’E. Disc. in February 1911 by personnel on the Terra Nova of the BrAE under Scott. J. J. Kinsey was official representative of the BrAE at Christchurch, New Zealand. KINSEY, MOUNT: peak about 11,000 ft. in el., lying between Keltie Gl. and Mill Gl. near their confiuence with Beardmore Gl.; in about 85°00’S., 170°45’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named for J. J. Kinsey of Christ- church, who conducted the affairs of the exp. in New Zealand. KIRKPATRICK, MOUNT: loftiest peak of the Queen Alexandra Range, about 14,600 ft. in el., lying midway on the W. flank of Beardmore Gl., near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°20’S., 167°00’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton in December 1908. Not adopted: Mount Kilpatrick. 180 KIRKWOOD, MOUNT: mountain about 1,500 ft. in el., about 3 mi. W. of Entrance Pt. in the S. part of Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°39’W. First charted by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster. Named in 1950 by the Br-APC for Cdr. H. R. Kirkwood, RN, master of the John Biscoe in Antarctic waters, 1948-50. Not adopted: Mount David. KIRKWOOD ISLETS: scattered group of reefs and rocks, with one larger islet, lying in the central part of Marguerite Bay, about 23 mi. NE. of Fly- spot Rocks and 16 mi. SSW. of the Faure Is.; in 68°22’S., 69°00’W. ‘The islets were sighted in 1949 from the FIDS vessel John Biscoe, and a running survey of the islets was made from the ship in 1950. Named for Cdr. Henry Kirkwood, RN, in command of the John Biscoe at that time. KIRWAN INLET: inlet in the SE. corner of Alex- ander I Island, about 12 mi. wide at its mouth and indenting 7 mi., opening on George VI Sound; in 72°21’S., 68°50’W. The inlet is filled with ice shelf which merges almost imperceptibly with the rising ice slopes of Alexander I Island to the west. First surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and named by them for Laurence P. Kirwan, Dir. and Sec. of the Royal Geographical Society. KJELLMAN, CAPE: cape marking the E. side of the entrance to Charcot Bay, on the W. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 59°21’W. First charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden- skj6ld, and named by him probably for Prof. Frans Reinhold Kjellman, Swedish botanist. KJERKA, MOUNT: peak about 3,300 ft. in el., in the S. part of the Gustav Bull Mtns. about 10 mi. S. of Mt. Hinks, inland from Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 68°03’S., 66°08’E. Charted and named Kjerka, meaning ‘the church,” by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen on Jan. 28, 1937. Not adopted: Kjerka [Norwegian]. Kjuringen: see Rayner Peak. KLAKKANE ISLANDS: group of small islands lying about 2 mi. E. of Farrington I. and about 5 mi. N. of the William Scoresby Arch., off Mac-Robert- son Coast; in about 67°15’S., 59°47’E. They were mapped and named by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under the direction of Christensen in January 1937. Not adopted: Klakkan [Norwegian]. Klarius Mikkelsen, Mount: see Mikkelsen Peak; Scullin Monolith. Klarius Mikkelsen Fjell: see Mikkelsen Peak. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA KLEBELSBERG GLACIER: glacier, about 3 mi. wide and 10 mi. long, situated at the S. side of Finsterwalder Gl. and flowing NW. from the central plateau of Palmer Pen. towards Lallemand Fjord; in about 67°23’S., 66°19’W. First surveyed from the plateau in 1946-47 by the FIDS, and named by them for Raimund von Klebelsberg, Austrian glaciologist. Kleine Pic: see Nachtigal Peak. KLEINSCHMIDT PEAK: peak about 10,500 ft. in el., on the SW. flank of Penck Trough, imme- diately N. of the edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in about 73°55’S., 3°45’W. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Dr. Ernst Kleinschmidt, dir. of the division of meteorology of the Deutsche Seewarte (German Hydrographic Office) in Hamburg. Not adopted: Heksegryta [Norwegian]. KLOVSTAD, CAPE: bold cape lying between the Murray and Newnes Glaciers at the S. extremity of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°39’S., 170°08’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Dr. Herlof Klovstad, medical officer on the exp. staff. KLUTSCHAK POINT: rocky headland about 3 mi. SE. of Cape Demidov on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 37°43’W. The coast in this vicinity was roughly charted in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, and in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen. The point itself appears on charts dating back to about 1900. The point was named by the Br—APC, following a survey by the SGS, 1951-52, for Heinrich W. Klutschak, Austrian artist who accompanied the American sealing schooner Flying Fish to South Georgia in 1877-78 and published a narrative of his activities with a sketch map in 1881. KNIFE POINT: point on the S. side of Borge Bay, about 0.1 mi. SE. of Mooring Pt., on the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. ‘The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey of Borge Bay by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. KNIGHT ROCKS: two small rocks, about 1 mi. apart, which lie nearly 3 mi. off the SW. coast of Snow I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°49’S., 61°35’W. So named by the Br—APC, following survey by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, in 1951-52, because of their proximity to nearby Castle Rock. KNOB, THE: conspicuous dome-shaped rock about 130 ft. in el., at the W. side of Elsehul, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°59’W. 181 The feature was charted and given this descriptive name by DI personnel in 1930. KNOBHEAD: mountain about 8,300 ft. in el., lying S. of the W. end of Kukri Hills and overlook- ing Ferrar Gl. and Taylor Gl. at their point of apposition, in Victoria Land; in about 77°55‘S., 161°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who so named it because of its appearance. Not adopted: Knob Head Mountain, Knobhead Moun- tain. Knobhead Mountain: see Knobhead. KNOB POINT: the SW. tip of Vindication I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°47’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and probably so named because a conspicuous height of land overlooks the point. KNOLL, THE: snow-free knoll about 1,200 ft. in el., surmounting Cape Crozier at the E. extremity of Ross I.; in about 77°29’S., 169°33’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Knglrokset: see Humpback Rocks. KNOWLES, CAPE: cape about 1,000 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to Hilton Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°47’S., 60°50’W. Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS in 1940. Named for Paul H. Knowles, geologist and leader of the East Base sledging party that surveyed this coast as far S. as Hilton Inlet. KNOX COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant- arctica lying between Cape Hordern, in about 100°26’E., and the Hatch Islets, in about 109°42’E. Disc. in February 1840 by the USEE under Wilkes, and named by him for Lt. Samuel R. Knox, USN, captain of the USEE tender Flying Fish. KOETTLITZ GLACIER: glacier about 12 mi. wide at its mouth, lying N. of Mounts Discovery and Morning and flowing between Brown I. and the mainland to the Ross Ice Shelf at the head of McMurdo Sound; in about 78°20’S., 164°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Dr. Reginald Koettlitz, physician and botanist of the expedition. KOHLER RANGE: extensive mountain range rising to about 15,000 ft. in el., standing S. of the base of Martin Pen. and estimated as extending for some 80 mi. in E.-W. direction on Walgreen Coast; in about 75°45’S., 111°30’E. Disc. from a distance on Feb. 24, 1940 by R. Adm. Byrd and other mem- bers of the USAS in a flight from the Bear. Named by Byrd for Walter J. Kohler, manufacturer and former governor of Wisconsin, who was one of the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA supporters of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and who helped furnish the seaplane from which the discovery was made. Not adopted: Mount X-ray, Walter Kohler Range, X-ray Range. KOHL-LARSEN PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau, over 2,500 ft. in el., lying W. of the head of Neu- mayer Gl. and N. of the W. end of Allardyce Range, in the central part of South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°59’W. The plateau was disc. and first roughly indicated on a map by Ludwig Kohl-Larsen during his 1929-30 expedition. It was surveyed and named for its discoverer by the SGS, 1951-52. Kong Edward VII Land; Konig Edward VII Land: see Edward VII Peninsula. Kong George V—Land: see George V. Coast. Kong Leopold og Dronning Astrid Land: see Leo- pold and Astrid Coast. Kong Oskar II Ktiste: see Oscar II Coast. Konig George V-Land: see George V Coast. Konig Georg Insel: see King George Island. KONIG GLACIER: glacier, about 5 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, flowing in a northerly direction from the N. side of Neumayer Gl. to the head of Fortuna Bay, South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°48’W. First surveyed in 1928-29 by a Ger. exp. under Kohl- Larsen, who named it for Felix Konig, Austrian mountaineer with the German Antarctic Expedi- tion, 1911-12, under Filchner. Not adopted: Dead Glacier. Konigin Alexandra Gebirge: see Queen Alexan- dra Range. Konigin Maud Bucht: see Queen Maud Bay. Konigin Maud Gebirge: see Queen Maud Range. Konigin Mary Land: see Queen Mary Coast. Konig Oskar II Land: see Oscar II Coast. KOPPEN POINT: point marking the NE. side of the entrance to Moltke Hbr. in Royal Bay, South Georgia; in 54°30’S., 36°02’W. The name “K6p- penberg” was originally given by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, to a small hill lying close inland from the point now described, and about 0.5 mi. E. of the German base. It was named for Prof. W. Koppen (1846-1940), noted meteorologist and cli- matologist, who had recommended the establish- ment of a high level observatory near the base. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the hill is too small and unimportant to require a name, but that 182 one is needed for the nearby point. For the sake of historical continuity, the name of K6ppen is transferred to this previously unnamed point; the name “K6ppenberg” is rejected. Koppenberg: see Koppen Point. Koppervick: see Koppervik. KOPPERVIK: bay about 0.8 mi. wide, lying 1 mi. SW. of Cape Buller, in the NW. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 37°25’W. The name was applied prior to 1930, probably by Norwegian whalers operating at South Georgia. Not adopted: Koppervick. KOTTAS MOUNTAINS: mountains about 11,000 ft. in el., rising through the icecap at the N. edge of the polar plateau and about at the head of Penck Trough, in the W. part of New Schwaben- land; in about 174°05’S., 8°30’W. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Alfred Kottas, captain of the exp. vessel Schwaben- land. K. Prestrud, Mount: see Prestrud, Mount. Kraterbucht: see Crater Bay. KRAUL MOUNTAINS: major mountain range, about 8,000 ft. in el., projecting northward from the polar plateau some 60 mi. toward Cape Nor- vegia, in the W. part of New Schwabenland; center- ing in about 73°00’S., 13°00’W. It bounds on the W. a large broad depression in the icecap that ex- tends E. to the range forming the W. wall of Penck Trough. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Otto Kraul, ice pilot of the expedition. sl KRAUSE POINT: low, ice-covered point fronting on Davis Sea close W. of Jones Gl., lying about 26 mi. W. of Cape Filchner, on Wilhelm II Coast; in about 66°32’S., 91°15’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Glenn R. Krause, pho- togrammetrist with the Navy Hydrographic Office, who served as surveyor with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established astronomical control sta- tions along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts. Kreitzer Bay: see Vincennes Bay. KREITZER GLACIER: channel glacier about 7 mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW. from the continental ice and entering the E. side of Baker Three Gl. between Jennings Promontory and Reinbolt Hills, near the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°17’S., 72°45’E. De- lineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for Lt. William R. Kreitzer, USN, plane commander of one of the three USN Op. Hjp. aerial crews which obtained photographic coverage of this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. Kringholmane: see Kringholm Islands. KRINGHOLM ISLANDS: a roughly circular group of islands about 5 mi. in diameter, lying off Mac-Robertson Coast about 15 mi. NE. of Wil- liam Scoresby Bay; in about 67°19’S., 60°03’E. Disc. and mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937. They named them Kringholmane, presumably for their ring-like distribution. Not adopted: Kringholm- ane [Norwegian]. Krogmann Island: see Hovgaard Island. Krokfjorden: see Krok Inlet. KROK INLET: narrow inlet about 12 mi. long, lying between Sgrsdal Glacier Tongue and the small peninsula at the S. end of the Vestfold Hills, with a small arm about 2 mi. long which swings N. and nearly bisects the peninsula, along Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°41’S., 77°55’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Krok- fjorden because of the hook (krok) formed by this small N. arm. The generic inlet is approved aS a more appropriate term on the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947 which shows this feature as extending about 7 mi. E. of the original Krokfjorden interpretation. Not adopted: Krokfjorden [Norwegian]. KROKISIUS, MOUNT: conspicuous rocky moun- tain, about 2,400 ft. in el., standing 1.5 mi. NW. of the head of Moltke Hbr., Royal Bay, South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 36°06’W. Named by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, for Corvette Captain Krokisius, commander of the Marie, one of the two ships of the expedition. KRONER LAKE: circular lake about 0.2 mi. in diameter lying immediately W. of Whalers Bay, on Deception I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°35’°W. The name Tokroningen, meaning the two kroner piece, was given this lake by whalers during the period 1905-31. The original name was altered to Kroner Lake in 1950 by the Br—APC fol- lowing a survey of Deception I. by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, in 1948-49. Not adopted: Lake Pen- nilea, Tokroningen [Norwegian]. 183 Kronprins Gustav Channel; Kronprinz Gustaf Kanal: see Prince Gustav Channel. Kronprins Olav Land: see Prince Olav Coast. Kronprinsesse Martha Land: see Princess Martha Coast. Kronprinz Olaf Berge: see Prince Olav Moun- tains. KRUGER, MOUNT: summit peak projecting through the icecap at the edge of the polar pla- teau in New Schwabenland; in about 172°40’S., 0°15’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for Walter Kruger, meteoro- logical assistant on the expedition. KUBUS MOUNTAIN: distinctive and somewhat isolated mountain, lying just W. of the Filchner Mtns. at the N. edge of the polar plateau, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°25’S., 6°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and given the descriptive name Kubus (the cube). Not adopted: Kubus [German], The Cube. Kurki Hills: see Kukri Hills. KUKRI HILLS: range surmounted by peaks about 3,000 to 6,000 ft. in el., extending about 26 mi. in a WSW.-ENE. direction and forming the divide between Ferrar Gl. on the S. and Taylor Gl. and Taylor Glacier Dry Valley on the N., in Vic- toria Land; centered in about 77°44’S., 162°50’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and prob- ably so named because its shape resembles that of a kukri, a Gurikha sword. Not adopted: Kurki Hills. KURZE MOUNTAINS: mountain range about 20 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 9,000 ft. in el., lying immediately W. of the Conrad Mtns., which it parallels, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°05’S., 8°50’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher, and named for the director of the naval division of the former Marineleitung (Ger- man Admiralty). KVARSNES FORELAND: prominent, rocky fore- land on the S. shore of Edward VIII Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about 67°02’S., 57°00’E.. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in Janu- ary—February 1937, who named it Kvarsnes. Not adopted: Kvarsnes [Norwegian]. KYFFIN, MOUNT: mountain about 5,800 ft. in el. in the Commonwealth Range, projecting into the E. side of Beardmore Gl. and rising precipi- tously above it, about 22 mi. up the glacier from GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Mt. Kathleen; in about 83°47’S., 172°10’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. Not adopted: Mount Kiffin, Mount Kyftin. Kyftin, Mount: see Kyffin, Mount. Laavebrua: see Ramp Rock. LACAZE-DUTHIERS, CAPE: cape lying between Andvord Bay and Paradise Hbr., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°48’S., 62°49’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named it for Félix Henri de Lacaze-Duthiers, French naturalist and authority on the anatomy of mol- lusks. LACHMAN, CAPE: cape marking the N. tip of James Ross I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Palm- er Pen.; in 63°47’S., 57°47’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskj6old, who named it for J. Lachman, a patron of the expedition. Not adopted: Kap Lachmann [German]. LACHMAN CRAGS: escarpment which extends in a N.S. direction for about 5 mi. at about 1,000 ft. in el., standing 3 mi. SSW. of Cape Lachman on James Ross I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°51’S., 57°50’W. First charted by the FIDS in 1945, who named it after nearby Cape Lachman. Lacroix, Mount: see Lacroix Nunatak. LACROIX, MOUNT: prominent mountain with red vertical cliffs and a rounded summit, about 2,100 ft. in el., surmounting the NE. end of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 63°59’'W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Alfred Lacroix, prominent French mineralogist and geol- ogist. Not adopted: Mount Lecroix. LACROIX NUNATAK: ridge of terminal mo- raine, about 1.5 mi. long and 270 ft. in el., stand- ing immediately behind a small zone of low rocky ridges which protrude above the ice covered point situated about 2 mi. SW. of Cape Margerie, on Adélie Coast; in 66°51’S., 141°18’E. Disc. in 1931 by BANZARE personnel on the Discovery, who sighted this feature from a distance, believing it to be a 1,000-ft. rock peak. Named by Mawson for Prof. Alfred Lacroix, prominent French mineralo- gist with the Museum National D’Histoire Natu- relle, Paris. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, who established an astronomical station near its center. Not adopted: Mount Lacroix (q.v.). Lady Newnes Bay; Lady Newnes Shelf Ice: see Lady Newnes Ice Shelf. 184 LADY NEWNES ICE SHELF: an extensive ice shelf about 50 mi. long and 45 mi. wide, lying to the W. of Coulman I. in the western Ross Sea, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 73°30’S., 168°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, and named by him for Lady Newnes, whose husband, Sir George Newnes, financed the expedition. Not adopted: Lady Newnes Bay, Lady Newnes Shelf Ice. LAFARGE ROCKS: two rocks which are 0.5 mi. apart, lying about 2 mi. NW. of Casy Islet and about 6 mi. W. of Cape Siffrey, the N. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°13’S., 57°32’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for Ens. Antoine Pavin de la Farge of the exp. ship Zélée. They were charted by the FIDS in 1946. Not adopted: Lafarge Rock. LAGOON ISLET: islet about 2 mi. E. of Léonie Islet in the Léonie Islands, lying off the SE. coast of Adelaide I.; in 67°36’S., 68°16’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Named by the BGLE under Rymill during its visit to the Léonie Islands in February 1936. LA GORCE MOUNTAINS: a group of mountains standing at the E. side of the upper reaches of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°45’S., 146°00’W. This group extends about 20 mi. in a general E.—W. direction and includes, from E. to W., such features as Mounts Paine, Hjalmar Johansen, Gjertsen and Grier. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for John Oliver La Gorce, V. Pres. of the National Geographic Society. Not adopted: John Oliver LaGorce Mountains, LaGorce Mountains. LA GORCE PEAK: beehive-shaped summit about 2,700 ft. in el., standing at the S. end and marking the highest peak in the Alexandra Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°37’S., 153°35’W. Disc. in February 1929 by the ByrdAE, and named by Byrd for John Oliver La Gorce. Not adopted: LaGorce Mountain, LaGorce Peak, Mount LaGorce. LAGOTELLERIE ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, lying at the entrance to Bourgeois Fjord midway between Pourquoi Pas I. and Camp Pt., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°53’S., 67°24’"W. Disc. and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. LAGRANGE CAPE: flat-topped rocky headland extending E. from the Solvay Mtns., about 6 mi. SSW. of Buls Bay, on the SE. coast of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°25’S., 62°15’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA named it for Charles and Eugéne Lagrange, staunch supporters of the expedition. LAGRELIUS POINT: low, ice-free point on the NW. coast of James Ross I., 2 mi. S. of Carlson I.; in 63°55’S., 58°17’W. Disc. and first surveyed in 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who named it Cape Lagrelius after Axel Lagrelius of Stockholm, who contributed toward the cost of the expedition. It was resurveyed by the FIDS in 1952. Point is considered a more suitable de- scriptive term for this feature than cape. Not adopted: Cape Lagrelius. Lahille, Pointe: see Lahille Island. LAHILLE ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, lying about 2 mi. W. of Nunez Pt., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°33’S., 64°23’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and charted as a point on the coast in honor of Fer- nando Lahille, noted Argentine naturalist. The FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, determined the feature’s insularity. Not adopted: Pointe Lahille [French]. LAINEZ, CAPE: steep, rocky promontory about 3,000 ft. in el., forming the W. end of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S., 67°48’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named for Manuel Lainez, Senator of the Argentine Republic and founder of the newspaper, El Diario. LAJARTE ISLANDS: group of islands fringing the N. coast of Anvers I., close E. of Cape Gr6on- land, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°16’S., 63°24’W. Disc. by a German exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. Charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Capt. Dufaure de Lajarte, French Navy. Not adopted: Dufaure de Lajarte Islands, Lajarte Islets. LALLEMAND FJORD: bay about 30 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 12 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape Rey and Charles-Roux I., lying close SW. of Marin Darbel Bay along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°05’S., 66°45’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who named it for Charles Lallemand, French scientist and member of the Bureau des Longitudes. Not adopted: Lallemand Bay, Lattemand Bay. LAMB, CAPE: cape forming the SW. end of Vega I., lying S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°54’S., 57°37’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjdld. Recharted in 1945 by the FIDS, who named it for I. M. Lamb, botanist on the FIDS staff at Hope Bay in 1945. 424589 O -57 -13 185 LAMBDA ISLAND: island, about 1 mi. long, which lies immediately NW. of Delta I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 63°00’W. This island, the largest feature in the NW. part of the island group, was first roughly charted and named “Tle Sourrieu” by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, but that name has not survived in usage. The name Lambda, derived from the 11th letter of the Greek alphabet, was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the island in 1927. The island was surveyed by Argentine ex- peditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Ile Sourrieu [French], Isla Primero de Mayo [Spanish]. LAMB POINT: low, ice-covered point forming the S. side of the entrance to Howkins Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°41’S., 60°48’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in Decem- ber 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was pho- tographed from the air by the RARE Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for H. H. Lamb, meteorologist on the British whale factory ship Balaena in Antarctic waters in 1946-47, who pre- pared daily forecasts for the whaling fleet on the basis of FIDS and other meteorological reports. LAMINA PEAK: prominent pyramid-shaped peak, about 4,200 ft. in el., surmounting a strati- fied ridge which curves down from Mt. Edred north- eastward toward George VI Sound. The peak stands 4.5 mi. inland from the E. coast of Alex- ander I Island at the S. limit of the Douglas Range; in 70°32’S., 68°45’W. This peak was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because of the marked horizontal stratifica- tion of the rocks of this peak. LAMMERS GLACIER: large glacier flowing in an E. direction and merging with several other large glaciers close W. of Mobiloil Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 68°38’S., 66°25’W. This glacier appears indistinctly in an aerial pho- tograph taken by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928, but shows more clearly in aerial photo- graphs taken by a U.S. exp. under Ellsworth in 1935 and the USAS in 1940. It was resighted in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it for Lester Lammers, contributor of nine grown husky dogs and four puppies to the expedition. Lamplugh Bay: see Lamplugh Inlet. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA LAMPLUGH INLET: inlet about 7 mi. long, lying between Capes Healy and Howard, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°23’S., 61°10’W. Disc. by members of the USAS who explored this coast from East Base by land and from the air in 1940. Named for Elmer L. Lamplugh, chief radio opera- tor at East Base. Not adopted: Lamplugh Bay. LAMPLUGH ISLAND: ice-capped island about 10 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, separated from the mainland by Davis and Clarke Glaciers, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°39’S., 162°52’E. This feature was first sighted by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, but it was first charted as an island by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. Named by Shackleton for G. W. Lamplugh, who gave assistance to the expedition. LANCASTER, CAPE: cape forming the S. tip of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°51’S., 63°44°'W. Disc. by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. Later sighted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named it for Albert Lan- caster, Scientific Dir. of the Meteorological Serv- ice of the Royal Observatory of Belgium and a supporter of the expedition. Not adopted: Cap Albert Lancaster [French]. Land Bay: see Emory Land Bay. LANDEN RIDGE: narrow rocky ridge 4 mi. E. of Mt. Hayes, standing at the E. end of Cole Pen. on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°51’S., 63°51’W. During December 1947 it was charted by FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for David Landen of the Trimetrogon Section, U.S. Geological Survey, who assisted in planning the RARE photographic pro- gram and correlating photographs after the exp. returned. Not adopted: Mount Landen. Land Glacier: see Emory Land Glacier. LANGE PLATFORM: flat-topped upland about 30 mi. long and about 8,500 ft. in el., lying N. of the edge of the polar plateau in New Schwaben- land; in about 72°00’S., 1°00’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Heinz Lange, second meteorologist on the expedi- tion. Langevatnet: see Ellis Fjord. Langnes Channel: see Langnes Inlet. Langnes Fjord: see Langnes Inlet. LANGNES INLET: narrow, sinuous inlet about 14 mi. long, indenting the Vestfold Hills area be- tween Langnes Pen. and Breidnes Pen., and marked 186 by a group of elongated islands and rocks lying inside its wide entrance, along Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°31’S., 78°08’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Langnes Fjord because of close association with Langnes Pen. The generic inlet is approved as a more appropriate term on the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947 which shows this feature as extend- ing some 2 mi. further E. to include the isolated lake previously named “Breidvatnet” and then swinging SSW. for nearly 5 miles. Not adopted: Langnes Channel, Langnes Fjord [Norwegian]. LANGNES PENINSULA: narrow, sinuous, rocky peninsula about 10 mi. long, marking the north- ern of three small peninsulas comprising the Vest- fold Hills, and projecting W. from Ingrid Christen- sen Coast; in about 68°29’S., 78°19’E. The Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen landed in February 1935 in about 68°29’S., 78°11’E.; this reported position © appears to correlate with the N. tip of Langnes Pen., close W. of Tryne I. The name derives from Langneset (the long headland) as applied on the H. E. Hansen charts compiled from aerial pho- tographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. Not adopted: Langneset [Norwegian]. Langneset: see Langnes Peninsula. Langnestrynet: see Tryne Island. LANG SOUND: sound about 1.5 mi. wide at its narrowest point and about 10 mi. long, in an E.-W. direction, lying between the group of islands that include Broka and Havstein Islands and the main- land of Kemp Coast; in about 67°08’S., 58°40’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen- sen in January-February 1937 and named “Lang- sundet” [Norwegian], Long Sound. Not adopted: Langsundet [Norwegian], Long Sound. Ldngstans Udde: see Longing, Cape. Langsundet: see Lang Sound. LANKESTER, CAPE: low, snow-covered head- land at the S. side of the entrance to Mulock Inlet, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°15’S., 160°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who probably named it for Sir Edwin Ray Lankester, Dir. of the Natural History Depart- ments of the British Museum, 1898-1907, and founder of the Marine Biological Assn. in 1884. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA LAPEYRERE BAY: bay about 4 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, indenting the NE. coast of Anvers I. westward of the Melchior Is., in the Palmer Arch.; 64°22’S., 63°13’W. The bay was probably first sighted by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, as an incompletely-defined bay is shown on the chart resulting from the expedition. It was recharted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for R. Adm. Boue de Lapeyrére, French Navy. Not adopted: Baie de Lepeyrére [French]. LA PLAZA POINT: point which forms the S. tip of the rocky peninsula which separates Mackellar and Martel Inlets in the N. part of Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°25’W. Charted and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Large Razorback Island: see Big Razorback Island. La Roche Strait: see Bird Sound. LARROUY ISLAND: island about 5 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, which rises to about 2,500 ft. in el. and lies about 5 mi. NNE. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°52’S., 65°17’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for Monsieur Larrouy, at that time a French Minister Plenipotentiary. Larry Gould Bay: see Gould Bay. LARS ANDERSEN ISLAND: islet lying about 7 mi. NW. of Cape Daly, in the central part of the Thorgaut Is., off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°26’S., 63°42’E. Charted in January—February 1931 from the Thorgaut, Norwegian whale catcher sent out by Lars Christensen. Presumably named for Lars Andersen, manager-harpooner of the whale catchers Falk and Ole Wegger which operated further to the N. during this season. Not adopted: Lars Andersen Islands, Lars Anderson Islands. Lars Anderson Islands: see Lars Andersen Island. LARS CHRISTENSEN COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica extending from Cape Darn- ley on Bjerkg Pen. in about 67°42’S., 69°30’E., to Jennings Promontory in about 70°12’S., 71°46’E. Disc. in January 1931 by Norwegian whalers em- ployed by Lars Christensen of Sandefjord, Norway, for whom it isnamed. Mr. Christensen personally participated in some of the exploration conducted in Antarctica by his firm, 1926-37. Not adopted: Lars Christensen Land. Lars Christensen Land: see Lars Christensen Coast. 187 LARS CHRISTENSEN PEAK: lofty, rounded dome of an extinct crater about 3,900 ft. in el., sur- mounting Peter I Island, which lies NE. of Thurston Pen.; in about 68°49’S., 90°31’W. Peter I Island was disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in January 1821 and viewed from a distance of 15 miles. The island was circumnavigated in January 1927 by a Nor. exp. under Tofte in the Odd I, who named the peak for Lars Christensen, Norwegian whaling magnate who financed the expedi:ion. Larsemann Fijellene: see Larsemann Hills. LARSEMANN HILLS: barren, rounded hills, from 250 to 600 ft. in el., which mark the coast line for a distance of about 9 mi., along Ingrid Christen- sen Coast; in about 69°25’S., 75°40’E. Disc. in February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, and reportedly named “Larsen Mountains” at that time. The first map name appears to have taken the form Larsemann Fjellene. The generic hills was adopted as a more appropriate term following examination of the Norwegian compila- tion based on the aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen- sen. Not adopted: Larsemann Fjellene [Nor- wegian], Larsen Mountains. LARSEN, MOUNT: mountain about 2,200 ft. in el., situated in the east-central portion of Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°18’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for Capt. C. A. Larsen. LARSEN, MOUNT: mountain about 5,000 ft. in el., presenting sheer granite cliffs on the N. side, standing at the S. side of the mouth of Reeves Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 74°50’S., 162°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Capt. C. A. Larsen, noted Norwegian Antarctic explorer whose explorations along the E. coast of Palmer Pen. in the Jason, 1892-93, marked the beginning of commercial whaling op- erations in the Antarctic. Larsen led numerous whaling expeditions until his death in December 1925 while directing operations in the Ross Sea. Larsen Barrier: see Larsen Ice Shelf. LARSEN CHANNEL: strait about 3 mi. wide separating D’Urville and Joinville Islands, which lie NE. of the tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°10’S., 56°12’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nor- denskjold, and named for Capt. C. A. Larsen of the exp. ship Antarctic. Larsen Glacier: see Nils Larsen Glacier. LARSEN GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide and about 25 mi. long, flowing in a SE. direction along the S. slopes of Mounts Larsen, De Gerlache, and GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Crummer, to the Nansen Sheet on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°10’S., 162°35’E. Disc. by the South Magnetic Polar Party of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. They named it Larsen Glacier because it flowed SE. from Mt. Larsen, which was constantly in view as they ascended the glacier. LARSEN HARBOR: narrow inlet in the S. side of Drygalski Fjord, about 3 mi. W. of Nattriss Head, at the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°50’S., 36°01’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner, who named it for Capt. C. A. Larsen, who was at that time in charge of the Grytviken whaling station. Larsen Ice Barrier: see Larsen Ice Shelf. LARSEN ICE SHELF: an extensive ice shelf in the NW. part of Weddell Sea, extending along the E. coast of Palmer Pen. from about 64°30’S. to at least 69°30’S. Named for Capt. C. A. Larsen, who sailed along the ice front in the Jason as far as 68°10’S. during December 1893. Not adopted: Larsen Barrier, Larsen Ice Barrier, Larsen Shelf ees LARSEN INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 14 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and about 8 mi. wide, lying between Capes Longing and Sobral, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°30’S., 59°30’W. C. A. Larsen, Norwegian whaling captain, reported a large bay in this area in 1893. Larsen’s name was suggested for the feature by Edwin Swift Balch in 1902. The inlet was re-identified and charted by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Larsen Bay. Larsen Island: see Monroe Island. LARSEN ISLANDS: group of islands lying about 2 mi. NW. of Return Pt., off the W. end of Corona- tion I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 46°05’W. Disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. They were named on Capt. Petter Sgrlle’s chart, based upon his survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13, in honor of Capt. C. A. Larsen. Larsen Mountains: see Larsemann Hills. LARSEN NUNATAK: nunatak about 2 mi. N. of Burn Murdoch Nunatak in the Seal Nunataks group, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°58’S., 60°06’W. The Seal Nunataks were disc. by a Nor. whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen in December 1893. Commemoration of Larsen was proposed by Ludwig Friederichsen in 1895. The application of this name is based upon a 1947 survey by the FIDS. 188 LARSEN POINT: point which forms the W. side of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°12’S., 36°30’W. Named for Capt. C. A. Larsen, who examined Cumberland Bay in the Jason in 1893-94. Larsen Shelf Ice: see Larsen Ice Shelf. LASERON ISLETS: small group of rocky islets lying about 2.5 mi. ENE. of Cape Denison in the SE. side of Commonwealth Bay, off George V Coast; in about 66°59’S., 142°46’E. Disc. in January 1912 by the AAE Main Base party under Mawson, and named by him for Charles F. Laseron, taxidermist with the expedition. Lashley Mountains: see Lashly Mountains. LASHLY MOUNTAINS: mountains about 8,600 ft. in el., standing near the edge of the plateau and S. of the head of Taylor Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°53’S., 160°10’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named these mountains for William Lashly, a member of the party which explored this area. Not adopted: Lashley Moun- tains. LASSITER COAST: that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Mackintosh, in 72°53’S., 60°03’W., to Cape Adams, in 75°04’S., 62°20’W. The N. portion of this coast was disc. and photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. During 1947 the entire extent of the coast was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. The name Lassiter Shelf Ice was applied by Ronne to the ice shelf in the western part of the head of Weddell Sea, which has now been shown to be a feature continuous with what was previously named Filchner Ice Shelf. The name Lassiter has therefore been applied by the US-ACAN to this coast, after Capt. James W. Lassiter of the then USAAF, who as chief pilot . was instrumental in the overall success of the RARE aerial exploratory program. Lassiter was pilot on the flight SW. from Cape Adams on which geographic discovery was extended to 177°30’S., 71°30’W., including exploration of the Joerg Plateau and Orville Escarpment, and the flight SE. to about 79°00’S., 43°45’W. on which the western and central parts of the Filchner Ice Shelf fringing Edith Ronne Land were sighted and photographed for the first time. Lassiter Ice Barrier; Lassiter Shelf Ice: see Filchner Ice Shelf. LAST HILL: small hill, about 1,100 ft. in el., with a rock ridge at its crest and a cliff at its N. side, lying about 4 mi. SSW. of Hope Bay and 2 mi. E.of GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the NE. shore of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°28’S., 57°05’W. Probably seen by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. First charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who so named it because it marks the last climb on the sledge route between Hope Bay and Duse Bay. LATADY MOUNTAINS: mountains lying SW. of Gardner Inlet and NE. of Sweeney Mtns., rising above Joerg Plateau; in about 75°30’S., 65°50’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named them for William Latady, aerial photog- rapher with the expedition. LATHAM PEAK: peak projecting through the icecap about 20 mi. ENE. of Mt. Biscoe, in Enderby Land; in about 66°13’S., 52°12’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and probably named for Rt. Hon. Sir John Creig Latham, who became Chief Justice of Australia in 1935. La Tour: see Tower, The. LAUBEUF FJORD: a sound about 25 mi. long, in a general N.-S. direction, and averaging 10 mi. wide, lying between the east-central portion of Adelaide I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 67°20’S., 67°50’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908— 10, under Charcot, and named by him for Maxime Laubeuf, French marine engineer who supervised building the engine of the exp. ship Powrquoi-Pas?. LAURENS, CAPE: cape which marks the NW. extremity of Laurens Pen. and Heard I.; in 52°59’S., 73°15’E. The name was probably applied by Capt. Franklin F. Smith of the American bark Laurens who visited Heard I. in 1855-56 and, who with Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers, initiated sealing opera- tions and long-time American sealer occupation of Heard Island. The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. LAURENS PENINSULA: rugged peninsula sur- mounted by several ice-covered peaks which forms the NW. part of Heard I. The peninsula is about 5 mi. long and, at its SE. extremity, is joined to the central mass of Heard I. by the low and narrow isthmus between Atlas Cove and West Bay; in 53°00’S., 73°18’E. The name was applied by the ANARE following their survey in 1948. It derives from the existing name Cape Laurens, applied for the NW. extremity of this peninsula after the American bark Laurens which, under Capt. Frank- lin F. Smith, visited Heard I. in 1855-56 and assisted in initiating sealing operations there. 189 LAURIE ISLAND: an irregularly-shaped island, about 12.5 mi. long in an E.—W. direction, forming the easternmost of the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°35’W. Disc. in December 1821 during the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer. R. H. Laurie, Chartseller to the Admiralty, published a chart of the South Shetland Is., South Orkney Is., and the NE. end of Palmer Pen. on Nov. 1, 1822, based on the ex- plorations of Powell, Palmer, and other sealers then in this area. The island was surveyed by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce. Not adopted: Laurie’s Island, Melville’s Island. LAVEBRUA ISLET: flat-topped islet about 300 ft. in el., lying close off South Pt., Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°02’S., 60°35’W. Charted by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31. The name was given by Norwegian whalers operating from Deception I., and has been in use since 1927. The name is descriptive, meaning literally “threshing floor bridge” or “barn bridge’. Not adopted: Islote Chaco [Spanish], Jon Islet. LAWS GLACIER: a confluent glacier system which flows into Marshall Bay on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°39’W. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. named by the Br—APC for Richard M. Laws of the FIDS, leader and biologist at Signy I. base in 1948 and 1949, and at South Georgia in 1951. LAY-BROTHER ROCK: rock about 1.5 mi. SW. of Despair Rocks and some 7 mi. NW. of Return Pt., off the W. end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is., in 60°34’S., 46°14’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1933. LEALAND BLUFF: high rounded headland at the SW. corner of William Scoresby Bay, on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°27’S., 59°35’E. Named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby who charted this area in February 1936. Le Bland, Cape: see Leblond, Cape. LEBLOND, CAPE: cape forming the N. end of Nansen I., in the Biscoe Is.; in about 66°03’S., 66°40’W. Charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named by him for the Pres. of the Norman Geographical Soc. at Rouen. Not adopted: Cape Le Bland, Cape Le Blond. LECOINTE, MOUNT: central of three mountains lying about 27 mi. SSE. of Mt. Markham, in the Queen Alexandra Range, and about 45 mi. inland from the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°20’S., 161°45’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named by him for Lt. Georges GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Lecointe, who was second-in-command of the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Lecroiz, Mount: see Lacroix, Mount. LECUYER POINT: point which forms the S. side of the entrance to the harbor of Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°31’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Not adopted: Lecuyer Point. LEE, MOUNT: mountain situated at the NW. end of the W. extremity of Alexander I Island; in about 71°15’S., 75°40’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for R. Adm. Paul F. Lee, USN, Chief of the Office of Naval Research, who, appreciating the significance of the scientific program, authorized Naval support for the expedition. Lee Islands: see Inner Lee Islet; Outer Lee Islet. LEFEVRE-UTILE POINT: point about 1 mi. W. of Curie Pt., on the N. side of Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°32’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. LEGOUPIL, CAPE: cape at the NE. side of the entrance to Huon Bay, on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°20’S., 57°53’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40. D’Urville named it for Ernest Goupil, a member of the exp., but the incorrect form Legoupil has been used so exten- Sively that in this special case it is accepted. Not adopted: Cape Goupil. LEGRU, CAPE: point about 1 mi. E. of Cape Syrezol, the E. side of the entrance to Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°16’W. Probably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909. LEGUILLOU, CAPE: point which forms the N. tip of Tower I., lying in Bransfield Str.; in 63°31’S., 59°50’W. Charted by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, and named by him for Elie Le Guillou, a surgeon on the exp. ship Zélée. The name form approved is in agreement with the charts of the D’Urville exp. and has been consistently used since that time. LEHAIE, CAPE: cape forming the SW. extremity of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 62°47’W. Disc. by the BelgAK, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named it for Monsieur Houzeau de Lehaie, a supporter of the expedition. The FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, charted the cape, substan- tially modifying its earlier cartographic represen- 190 tation. Not adopted: Cap Houzeau de Lehaie [French], Cape Houzeau de Lehaye. Lehrke Bay: see Lehrke Inlet. LEHRKE INLET: ice-filled inlet about 10 mi. wide which recedes SW. 20 mi. between Cape Boggs and Cape Sharbonneau, along the E. coast of Pal- mer Pen.; in 70°45’S., 61°45’W. Disc. by members of the USAS who explored this coast on land and from the air in 1940. Named for Lester Lehrke, boatswain’s mate of the Bear, one of the exp. ships, and sailmaker of the East Base, Not adopted: Lehrke Bay. LEININGER PEAK: peak about 3,700 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of the base of Hielson Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°34’S., 62°15/W. This peak was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, and charted in 1947 by a joint sledge party consisting of members of the RARE and the FIDS. Named by Ronne for Cdr. Joseph A. Leininger, USNR, who devised the plans for the loading of cargo and the alterations on the exp. ship. Leipzig Island: see Nelson Island. Leith Harbor: see Inverleith Harbor. LEITH HARBOR: northern of three harbors in the W. side of Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°08’S., 36°41’W. Named in about 1912 by Sal- vesen and Co., whalers of Leith, Scotland, opera- tors of the whaling station at the head of the harbor. LEITH HARBOR: small bay in the NE. part of Paradise Hbr., along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°52’S., 62°50’W. Probably named by whalers operating in this vicinity. Leith, Scotland, is the home of Salvesen and Co., whalers. LEMAIRE CHANNEL: channel about 8 mi. long and averaging about 1 mi. wide, extending in a NE.-SW. direction from the N. end of Booth I. to Cape Duseberg, and separating the Dannebrog Is. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 64°00’W. Disc. by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. Traversed in December 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, and named by him for C. Lemaire, Belgian explorer of the Congo. Not adopted: Lemaire Strait. LEMAIRE ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, lying about 1 mi. W. of Cape Lacaze- Duthiers, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°49’S., 62°57’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named it for C. Lemaire. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Lemaire Strait: see Lemaire Channel. LE MAY RANGE: mountain range in the SE. part of Alexander I Island; in about 71°50’S., 70°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and named by him for Gen. Curtis Le May, head of the Office of Research and Develop- ment of the then USAAF ,-which furnished equip- ment for the expedition. Not adopted: Army Range, U.S. Army Range. LENTON POINT: the SW. extremity of a small, rocky peninsula in Clowes Bay on the S. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°37’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named in 1954 by the Br—APC for Ralph A. Lenton of the FIDS, radio operator at Signy I. base in 1948, who helped with the survey and biological work; subsequently at Admiralty Bay in 1949, and then leader at Deception I. in 1951, at Port Lockroy in 1952 and at the Argentine Is. in 1954. LEON HEAD: prominent rocky headland, about 2,900 ft. in el., forming the S. side of the mouth of Brogger Gl. and the SE. side of the entrance to Undine South Hbr., on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°33’S., 36°28’W. The headland was roughly charted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen. Named by the Br—APC, following a survey by the SGS, 1951-52, after the Spanish vessel Leon, which resighted South Georgia in 1756. LEONIE ISLANDS: group of small islands about 6 mi. N. of Jenny I., lying in the entrance to Ryder Bay along the SE. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°36’S., 68°17W. The FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, disc. these islands and gave the name Léonie to the largest island in the group. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, extended the coverage of the name to the entire group. Not adopted: Leonie Islands, Léonie Islets. LEONIE ISLET: largest and westernmost of the Léonie Islands, about 1 mi. in diameter and about 1,500 ft. in el., lying in the entrance to Ryder Bay off the SE. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°36’S., 68°22’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. LEOPARD ISLAND: islet about 0.25 mi. W. of the SW. end of Skua I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°18’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. LEOPOLD AND ASTRID COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica lying between about 81°00’E. and Cape Penck, in about 87°35’E. Disc. 191 in January 1934 by a Nor. Exp. under Christensen, and named for King Leopold and Queen Astrid of Belgium. Not adopted: King Leopold and Queen Astrid Coast, King Leopold and Queen Astrid Land, Kong Leopold og Dronning Astrid Land [Nor- wegian]. Leopold Coast: see Luitpold Coast. Le Poing: see Fist, The. LERCHENFELD GLACIER: the southerly of two glaciers descending W. from the interior heights of Luitpold Coast to Duke Ernst Bay; in about 77°50’S., 34°50’W. Disc. in January-February 1912 by the GerAE under Filchner, who named it for Count Hugo von und zu Lerchenfeld-K6fering, sup- porter of the expedition. Not adopted: Graf Lerch- enfeld Gletscher [German]. LEROUX BAY: boot-shaped bay, about 7 mi. long in a NW.-SE. direction, and averaging about 5 mi. wide, between Nunez Pt. and the narrow pen- insula surmounted by Magnier Peaks, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°36’S., 64°21’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for Commander Leroux, Argentine Navy. This bay was more accurately delineated by the BGLE under Rymill in 1935. LESKOV ISLAND: island less than 1 mi. in ex- tent, lying about 30 mi. W. of Visokoi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°40’S., 28°10’W. Disc. in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who named it for the third lieutenant on the exp. ship Vostok. LESSER MACKELLAR ISLET: islet immediately NE. of Greater Mackellar Islet in the Mackellar Islets group, lying in the center of Commonwealth Bay, along George V Coast; in about 66°58’S., 142°39’E. Disc. and named by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14. The name is indicative of the size of the feature in relation to Greater Mackellar Islet. LEVERETT GLACIER: slow-moving glacier about 10 mi. wide and over 20 mi. long, flowing in a WNW. direction between the Harold Byrd and Tapley Mountains and terminating at the head of Ross Ice Shelf close E. of Robert Scott Gl.; in about 85°30’S., 150°00’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Laur- ence Gould, and named by him for Frank Leverett, eminent geologist at the Univ. of Michigan and authority on glacial geology of the central United States. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA LEVER GLACIER: glacier, about 2 mi. wide at its mouth and at least 5 mi. long, flowing SW. into the head of the northern arm of Beascochea Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°31’S., 63°33’W. This glacier was first sighted and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char- cot. It was resurveyed in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for William H. Lever, 2d Viscount Leverhulme of the Western Isles, who contributed toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37. LEVICK, MOUNT: peak about 9,100 ft. in el., standing W. of Mt. Melbourne and E. of Mt. Baxter, in Victoria Land; in about 74°16’S., 163°33’E. First charted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for G. Murray Levick, surgeon with the expedition. LEWIS, CAPE: ice-covered cape at the W. side of Maury Bay, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°30’S., 124°25’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Thomas Lewis, gunner on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. LEWIS GLACIER: the northerly of two glaciers flowing E. into Seligman Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°45’S., 65°38’W. The glacier was photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. It was charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for William Vaughan Lewis, British glaciologist and lecturer at the Dept. of Geography, Cambridge University. Lewis Island: see Tonkin Island. LEWIS ISLET: small rocky islet, lying close in- side the E. side of the entrance to Davis Bay, and marking one of the few rock outcrops along Clarie Coast; in about 66°00’S., 134°30’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Thomas Lewis, gunner on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. LEWIS PEAKS: two prominent peaks, about 3,500 ft. in el., standing on the W. coast of Palmer Pen. close E. of Day I.; in 67°15/S., 67°30’W. First roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char- cot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who named it for Flight Lt. John Lewis, pilot of the Auster airplane which was used from the John Biscoe for reconnaissance of ice conditions in Marguerite Bay in February 1950. LEWIS POINT: point marked by rocky exposures on its N. side and surmounted by an ice-covered dome about 1,700 ft. in el., at the S. side of the mouth of Anthony Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer 192 Pen., in 69°54’S., 62°25°W. Photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Col. Richard L. Lewis of the Army Quartermaster Corps, which furnished field equipment and clothing to the exp. for testing purposes. ; LEWTHWAITE STRAIT: strait about 2.5 mi. wide, lying between Coronation I. and Powell I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°08’W. Disc. in December 1821 during the joint cruise of Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer. Mr. Lewthwaite was a teacher of navigation in Prince’s Street, Rotherhithe (London). Powell left the chart and journal of his Antarctic exploration with Lewthwaite before sailing on his last exp., on which he met his death. Not adopted: Lewth- waite’s Strait, Spencers Straits. LIARD ISLAND: triangular island about 6 mi. long, rising to about 2,000 ft. in el., situated in the north-central portion of Hanusse Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°51’S., 67°25’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. LIBOIS BAY: small bay on the W. side of Cholet Islet which is entered between Rozo Pt., the NW. end of Cholet Islet, and Paumelle Pt., the NW. end of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°02’;W. First charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for F. Libois, second mechanic and carpenter of the exp. ship Francais. Lichen Island: see Vegetation Island. LICHEN PEAK: peak, about 1,000 ft. in el., standing about 20 mi. E. of Mt. Saunders, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°53’S., 145°12’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE sledge party under Paul Siple, and so named because of the lichens and other botani- cal specimens obtained there. LIEGE ISLAND: roughly triangular-shaped island, about 8 mi. long in a NE.-SW. direction and about 6 mi. wide, lying immediately NE. of Bra- bant I. in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°03’S., 61°53’W. Charted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Ger- lache, who named it for the province of Liége, Belgium. Not adopted: Liege Island, Liége Island, Luttich Island. LIGHT, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the entrance to Keller Inlet and the N. end of Smith Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°15’S., 60°48’W. Disc. and photographed from the air GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA by the USAS in 1940. During 1947 it was photo- graphed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Richard Upjohn Light, Pres. of the American Geographical Society. Not adopted: Cape Ketchum. LIGHTHOUSE BAY: small bay between Cape Crewe and Point Abrahamsen, forming the N. arm of Cook Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°08’W. Charted by DI personnel in 1929. Probably so named at that time because a lighthouse (now disused) was located on nearby Sheep Point. Lille Jason: see Little Jason Lagoon. LILLIE GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue, about 125 ft. in el., extending N. from Oates Coast for about 20 mi. between Cape Cheetham and Cape Williams; in about 69°50’S., 163°00’E. Disc. in February 1911 by the BrAE under Scott, when the Terra Nova explored W. of Cape North. Dennis G. Lillie was biologist on the Terra Nova. Not adopted: Lillie Ice Tongue. Lillie Ice Tongue: see Lillie Glacier Tongue. LIMIT ROCK: rock about 2 mi. E. of North Foreland, the NE. cape of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 61°53’S., 57°36’W. Charted in 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and probably so named because it marks the E. limit of foul ground surrounding North Foreland. LIMPET ISLET: southernmost islet of the Léonie Is., which lie in the entrance to Ryder Bay, close off the SE. coast of Adelaide I.; in 67°38’S., 68°19’'W. The Léonie Is. were disc. and first roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char- cot. Limpet Islet was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so named by them because of the large num- ber of limpet shells found there. Lincoln Ellsworth, Mount: see Ellsworth, Mount. LINDBERGH INLET: small inlet about 3 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, which marks a more-or-less permanent indentation in the front, the N. sea- ward edge, of the Ross Ice Shelf, lying approxi- mately midway between Discovery Inlet and the Bay of Whales; in about 78°25’S., 167°00’W. Disc. in January 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, but it was not named at that time. Recharted and photographed from the air in 1929 by the ByrdAE, and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Col. Charles A. Lindbergh, renowned aviator. This feature was last confirmed by USN Op. Hjp. in January 1947, though the configuration of such indentations is continually changing. 193 LINDENBERG ISLAND: circular island about 0.75 mi. in diameter, about 11 mi. N. of Robertson I. and some 35 mi. ENE. of Cape Fairweather, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°55/S., 59°42’w. Disc. by a Nor. whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen in December 1893. Named by Larsen for a mem- ber of the firm of Woltereck and Robertson of Hamburg which sent him to the Antarctic. LINDLEY, MOUNT: mountain about 7,300 ft. in el., standing about 22 mi. SSW. of Beaumont Bay and about 25 mi. SE. of Mt. Albert Markham, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°45’S., 159°15’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Lord Nathaniel Lindley, a member of the committee which made the final draft of the instructions for the expedition. Lindsay, Cape: see Lindsey, Cape. LINDSEY, CAPE: cape which forms the W. end of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°08’S., 55°42’W. The name appears on Powell’s map published by Laurie in 1882. Not adopted: Cape Lindsay. LION GLACIER: glacier descending in a SE. di- rection to Lion Sound, about 11 mi. SW. of Van Ryswyck Pt., on the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 63°11’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a map based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery. Named after nearby Lion Island and Lion Sound. LION ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, lying off the E. side of Anvers I. and about 2 mi. N. of Cape Astrup, Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°40’S., 63°08’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a map based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery. The profile of the island sug- gests a reclining lion when viewed from the south- west. LION ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about 0.2 mi. NNE. of Pétrel I., in the main cluster of islets near the SE. end of Géologie Arch., close N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°39’S., 140°01’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, who established an astro- nomical control station on the islet, and so named because the rocky summit at the SE. end resembles a lion’s head. LION SOUND: small passage on the W. side of Lion Island, in the shape of an embayment in the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°39’S., 63°09’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA under De Gerlache. The name appears on a map based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery. Named after adjacent Lion Island. LIONS RUMP, CAPE: conspicuous headland forming the W. side of the entrance to King George Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°08’S., 58°06’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Not adopted: Cape Lion’s Rump. LIOTARD, MOUNT: conspicuous ice-covered peak, about 7,300 ft. in el., standing 5 mi. SSE. of Mt. Gaudry and 6 mi. NNE. of Mt. Ditte in the SE. part of Adelaide I.; in 67°37’S., 68°34’W. Disc. and first surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named by them for André F. Liotard, French observer with FIDS in 1947-48 and leader of the French Antarctic Expedition to Adélie Coast, 1949-51. LIOTARD GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the con- tinental ice and terminating in a small tongue about 4 mi. W. of Héléne It., the W. extremity of Géologie Arch., on Adélie Coast; in about 66°37’S., 139°32’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for André-Frank Liotard, leader of the FrAE, 1949-51, whose group completed the initial survey of the coastal features as far westward as this glacier. Liotard previously served as observer on the John Biscoe during the 1947-48 relief and establishment of FIDS meteorological bases, and as leader of the FrAE, 1948-49, which was unable to penetrate the pack ice off Adélie Coast. Not adopted: Ebba Glacier. LIPPMANN ISLET: conical snow-capped islet, about 2 mi. N. of the W. end of Lahille I. and 5 mi. NW. of Nunez Pt., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°30’S., 64°26’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, who named it for Gabriel Lipp- mann, French physicist and Nobel Prize winner in 1908. LISTER, MOUNT: massive mountain terminat- ing in a sharp peak about 13,350 ft. in el., in the Royal Society Range, W. of McMurdo Sound, along the W. shore of Ross Sea; in about 78°05’S., 163°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott in January 1902, and named for Lord Joseph Lister, Pres. of the Royal Soc., 1895-1900. LITTLE, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the entrance to Wright Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°05’S., 61°03’W. Probably seen from the air by members of the USAS who photographed Wright Inlet in December 1940. Photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, 194 who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Delbert M. Little, Asst. Chief for Operations, U. S. Weather Bureau, who arranged the program for sending weather re- ports from the RARE. Not adopted: Cape Kasson. LITTLE AMERICA: the base used by the five U. S. expeditions led by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN (Ret.). Little America I. the base used by the ByrdAE, 1929-30, and Little America II, the new base built by the Byrd AE, 1933-35, were established about 1 mi. inside Ver-sur-Mer Inlet, Bay of Whales, about 80 ft. above sea level on the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°40’S., 164°03’W. Little America III, also known as West Base of the USAS, 1939-41, was established about 5 mi. NE. on the E. side of the Bay of Whales; in about 78°35’S., 163°52’W. Little America IV, the base used by the central task force of USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, was estab- lished about 2 mi. NNW. of the USAS base; in about 78°33’S., 163°56’W. The latter base was destroyed by calving of the front of Ross Ice Shelf during the 1948-55 period and was reported non-existent in January 1955. Little America V, the main base of USN Operation Deepfreeze, 1955-56, was estab- lished about 30 mi. NE. at Kainan Bay; in about 78°14’S., 161°50’W. Little Bucht: see Doris Bay; Saint Andrews Bay. Little Glacier: see Kelsey Glacier. LITTLE JASON LAGOON: an almost circular lagoon, about 0.4 mi. in diameter, lying at the head of Jason Hbr. to which it is connected by a narrow cut, in Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°11’S., 36°36’W. The name Little Jason was in use at South Georgia prior to 1920. The feature was surveyed in 1929 by DI personnel, who named it Nogood Lagoon because a motor boat could not get through the entrance. The SGS, 1951-52, re- ported that the feature is still known locally as Little Jason or (in Norwegian) “Lille Jason.” In order to indicate the nature of the feature, and at the same time to conform with local usage, the name Little Jason Lagoon is approved. Not adopted: Lille Jason [Norwegian)], Little Jason, Nogood Lagoon. LITTLE MOLTKE HARBOR: small bay, entered between Pirner Pt. and the ice cliffs of Ross GL., lying 1 mi. S. of Moltke Harbor in the W. side of Royal Bay, South Georgia; in 54°32’S., 36°05’W. First surveyed by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schra- der. The name Little Moltke, derived from the nearby Moltke Harbor, is used for this feature by the sealers in South Georgia. The full name, Little Moltke Harbor, is approved in order to indi- cate the nature of the feature. Not adopted: Little Moltke. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA LITTLE RAZORBACK ISLAND: smallest and easternmost of the Dellbridge Is., lying in Erebus Bay off the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°40’S., 166°31’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and so named because of its size and similarity to Big Razorback I., which lies about 0.5 mi. south- southwest. Not adopted: Small Razorback Island. LITTLE THUMB: small isolated rock tower, about 2,700 ft. in el., standing close S. of The Spire at the NW. end of the Blackwall Mtns., on the S. side of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°19’S., 66°53’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was climbed on Jan. 22, 1948 by members of RARE and FIDS, who used variations of this name in referring to the feature. It was resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. Not adopted: Neny Fjord Thumb, The Thumb, Thumb. LIVELY, CAPE: cape forming the SW. extremity of Renaud I. in the Biscoe Is.; in 65°49’S., 66°11’W. The Biscoe Is. were disc. in February 1832 by a Br. exp. under John Biscoe, and were first roughly sur- veyed by the FrAE, 1903-5, and FrAE, 1908-10, both under Charcot. Renaud I. was again roughly surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill. The cape was named in 1954 by the Br—APC after the cutter Lively, one of the two vessels of Biscoe’s 1830-32 expedition. LIV GLACIER: steep glacier about 45 mi. long, flowing N. from the polar plateau along the W. side of the Duncan Mtns. to the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°55’S., 167°30’W. Disc. in November 1911 by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, who named it for the daughter of Dr. Fridtjof Nansen. Not adopted: Liv’s Glacier. LIVINGSTON ISLAND: island about 37 mi. long and from 5 to 19 mi. wide, lying between Green- wich and Snow Islands in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°35’S., 60°30’W. This island was known to sealers as early as 1820, and the name Livingston has been well established in international usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Friesland Island, Livingston’s Island, Smiths Island, Smolensk Island. LIZARD HILL: narrow, curving rock ridge, about 1,300 ft. in el. about 6 mi. SSE. of the head of Hope Bay and 1 mi. E. of Ridge Peak, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°31’S., 57°01’W. * Probably first seen by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. First charted in 1946 by the FIDS, who applied the name. LIZARD ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long, in a NW.-SE. direction, and 0.5 mi. wide, paralleling the NE. shore of Bigo Bay, from which it is sepa- rated by a channel about 0.5 mi. wide, along the 195 W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°41’S., 64°26’W. Disc. by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who so named it because of its shape. LIZARDS FOOT: rocky spur about 2,400 ft. in el., forming the E. end of the snow-covered ridge de- scending from Mt. Evans along the S. side of Deben- ham Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 177°11’S., 163°00’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Lizard’s Foot. LLOYD, CAPE: cape which forms the N. tip of Clarence I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 60°59’S., 54°01’W. The name Lloyd’s Promontory appears on early charts of the 1821-25 period, but in more recent years the feature has become inter- nationally known as Cape Lloyd. Not adopted: Cape Lloyds, Lloyd’s Land, Lloyds Promontory, Lloyd’s Promontory. LLOYD, MOUNT: mountain about 9,900 ft. in el., in the Queen Alexandra Range, rising about 12 mi. W. of Mt. Tripp approximately midway between Shackleton Inlet and Beardmore Gl., on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°09’S., 165°12’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Lloyds Island: see Rugged Island. Lloyd’s Land; Lloyds Promontory: see Lloyd, Cape. F LOCKHART, MOUNT: prominent northerly pro- jection from the main massif of the Fosdick Mtns., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°28’S., 145°06’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on a flight on Dec. 5, 1929. Named for Ernest E. Lockhart, physiologist at the West Base of the USAS and member of the, Edsel Ford Mountains Biological Party which visited this area in 1940. LOCKLEY POINT: low, ice-covered point on the NW. side of Wiencke I., about 1 mi. NE. of Noble Peak, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°23’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache in 1898. It was resighted and charted by the FIDS in 1944, and named for Lt. J. G. Lockley, RNVR, base leader, biologist, and meteorologist at Port Lock- roy in 1945. LOCKROY, PORT: harbor about 0.5 mi. long and wide, entered between Flag Pt. and Lécuyer Pt. on the W. side of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for Edouard Lockroy, French politician and V. Pres. of the Chamber of Deputies, who assisted Charcot in obtaining government support for the expe- dition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA LOCKYER ISLAND: island about 5 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, lying off the S. shore of James Ross I. in the SW. entrance to Admiralty Sound; in 64°27’'S., 57°36’W. It was named Cape Lockyer by Capt. James Clark Ross on Jan. 7, 1843 at the request of Capt. Francis R. M. Crozier, in honor of the latter’s friend Capt. Nicholas Lockyer, RN. The cape was proven to be an: island by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld in 1902. LODGE ROCK: low, snow-capped rock, less than 100 ft. in el., between Barn Rock and Hayrick It. in the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Penn.; in 68°42’S., 67°32’W. The Terra Firma Is. were first visited and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This rock was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because a low ledge onto which sledges could be driven provided lodgment clear of the sea ice pressure area. LOESENER PLATFORM: fiat-topped mountain platform lying N. of the Preuschoff Range and W. of the Gablenz Range, in New Schwabenland; in about 71°50’S., 4°00’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Filchner, 1938-39, and named for Kurt Loesener, airplane mechanic on the Boreas, one of the flying boats used by the expedition. LOLA, MOUNT: peak about 560 ft. in el., which surmounts Point Lola at the E. side of the entrance to Uruguay Cove, on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°43’W. The name appears on an Argentine Govt. chart of 1930, based upon surveys by two Argentine naval officers, I. Espindola in the Uruguay in 1915 and A. Rod- riguez in the Primero de Mayo in 1930. LOLA, POINT: point forming the E. side of the entrance to Uruguay Cove, on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°43’W. The name appears on an Argentine Govt. chart of 1930, based upon surveys by two Argentine naval officers, I. Espindola in the Uru- guay in 1915 and A. Rodriguez in the Primero de Mayo in 1930. LONELY ISLAND: islet lying 1 mi. ENE. of Cape Paryadin, along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 38°01’W. Charted and named by DI personnel during sur- veys of South Georgia in 1926-30. LONE ROCK: isolated rock about 1.25 mi. S. of the E. end of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S., 58°51’W. Charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935, and given this descrip- tive name. 196 LONE ROCK: low, isolated rock about 50 yards long, lying about 4 mi. N. of Cape Gage, James Ross I., on the W. margin of Erebus and Terror Gulf; in 64°06’S., 57°03’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1945, and so named by the Br—APC because of its small size and complete isolation. LONG, MOUNT: rocky peak protruding above what appears to be an ice-covered mountain sys- tem extending in an E.—W. direction close SE. of the head of Vincennes Bay, on Budd Coast; in about 67°12’S., 110°30’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. This peak is estimated to rise to about 6,500 ft. in el., though compilation of this immediate area was greatly handicapped by dense cloud conditions dur- ing the February 1947 flights in this area. Named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Richard J. Long, USN, pilot with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in operations resulting in the establishment of astronomical control stations along the coast from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. LONGHURST, MOUNT: mountain about 7,700 ft. in el. in the Britannia Range, highest summit of a long ridge of mountains on the SW. side of the Cape Murray depression, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf, in about 79°20’S., 157°15’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Cyril Longhurst, secretary of the expedition. LONGING, CAPE: rocky cape forming the S. end of a large ice-covered promontory which marks the W. side of the S. entrance to Prince Gustav Chan., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°33’S., 58°50’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Norden- skjold in 1902, and so named by him because from the position of his winter hut on Snow Hill I. the cape lay in the direction of his “land of longing” which he was anxious to explore. Not adopted: Langstans Udde [Swedish]. LONG ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 0.5 mi. wide, lying in Prince Gustav Chan. about 2 mi. off the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen. and opposite the mouth of East Russell Gl.; in 63°46’S., 58°12’W. Disc. and named by the FIDS in 1945. The name is descrip- tive. LONGLOW ROCK: rock about 1.5 mi. SSW. of Borley Pt., about 0.5 mi. off the W. shore of Mon- tagu I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°24’S., 26°29’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery ITI. LONG POINT: point forming the W. side of the entrance to Godthul, a bay along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°18’W. Charted in 1928 by a Nor. exp. under Horntvedt. The name GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA appears to have been applied by DI personnel who recharted this area in 1929. LONGRIDGE HEAD: headland, about 1,500 ft. in el., marking the S. end of a small coastal ridge which extends 3 mi. northward, standing 5 mi. N. of Cape Saens Pena on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°28’S., 67°38’W. First sighted by mem- bers of the FrAE under Charcot who roughly charted this area in 1909. The name is descrip- tive and was applied by the FIDS who surveyed the headland in 1948. LONG ROCK: rock lying in Morton Str., about 3 mi. N. of the E. end of Snow I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°39’S., 61°15°W. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the intricate passage between Snow and Livingston Islands in 1930-31. Long Sound: see Lang Sound. LONGSTAFF, MOUNT: mountain with twin peaks, about 10,300 ft. in el., in the Queen Alex- andra Range, standing about 30 mi. SSE. of the mouth of Shackleton Inlet, and about 12 mi. N. of Mt. Lloyd, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°58’S., 165°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Llewellyn Wood Longstafi, principal contributor to the exp. This was the most southerly high peak seen by Scott on his trip toward the South Pole and for this reason was chosen to commemorate the man whose generous donations made the exp. possible. LOOKOUT, CAPE: steep bluff about 800 ft. in el., marking the SE. extremity of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°18’S., 55°16’W. The name appears on a map of 1822 by Capt. George Powell, a British sealer, and is now estab- lished international usage. Loqui, Cap: see Garcia, Cape. LOQUI POINT: point which marks the S. side of the entrance to Barilari Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°55’S., 64°55’W. This fea- ture was first seen, roughly surveyed and named “Cap Garcia” by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. At the same time Charcot gave the name “Cap Loqui” to the N. cape of Barilari Bay, after Cap- tain Loqui of the Argentine Navy. The maps of Charcot’s second expedition to this area, the FrAE of 1908-10, showed “Cap Garcia” as the N. cape of Barilari Bay, and the name Cape Garcia (q.v.) has since become established in that position and accepted by the US-ACAN. Charcot did not use the name “Cap Loqui” on the maps of the FrAE, 1908-10, and with his shifting of the name Cape Garcia, this south entrance point to Barilari Bay 197 has remained unnamed. For the sake of historical continuity, Charcot’s “Cap Loqui” has been altered and accepted for this feature. Not adopted: Cap Garcia [French]. LOUBAT POINT: point forming the N. side of the entrance to Deloncle Bay, fronting on Lemaire Chan. opposite Booth I., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°06’S., 63°53’W. Probably first seen by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. It was resighted and charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for a Monsieur De Loubat. Not adopted: Cape De Loubat, Cape Loubat. LOUBET COAST: that portion of the W. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Bellue, in 66°20’S., 65°59’W., to the head of Bourgeois Fjord, in 67°31’S., 66°32’W. This coast was explored, in January 1905 by the FrAE under Charcot, who named it for Emile Loubet, then Pres. of France. Not adopted: Loubet Land. Loubet Land: see Loubet Coast. Loubet Strait: see Gullet, The. LOUISE, MOUNT: peak about 2,100 ft. in el., standing about 1 mi. N. of Mt. Gourdon on Booth L., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°00’W. First charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for the sister of Ernest Gourdon, geologist of the expedition. Not adopted: Louise Peak. LOUISE ISLET: ice-capped islet about 0.25 mi. in diameter, lying about 1 mi. E. of Cape Anna in the SW. side of the entrance to Wilhelmina Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°36’S., 62°23’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under Lt. Adrien de Gerlache, and named by him for his sister. Not adopted: Louise Island. Louis McHenry Howe, Mount: see Howe, Mount. Louis Philippe Coast; Louis Philippe Land: see Louis Philippe Peninsula. LOUIS PHILIPPE PENINSULA: the extreme NE. portion of Palmer Pen., extending NE. for about 80 mi. from a line connecting Cape Kater and Cape Longing; centering in about 63°40’S., 58°30’W. The name Louis Philippe was given by Capt. Dumont D’Urville in 1838 for King Louis Philippe of France. Not adopted: Louis Philippe Coast, Louis Philippe Land, Trinity Peninsula. LOWELL THOMAS MOUNTAINS: mountains estimated to be about 9,500 ft. in el., standing SW. of Sweeney Mtns. and rising above Joerg Plateau, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in about 76°30’S., 70°45’W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named these moun- tains for Lowell Thomas, a supporter of the ex- pedition. Lower Ferrar Glacier: see Ferrar Glacier. LOW HEAD, CAPE: cape about 1.75 mi. SSW. of Cape Lions Rump, the W. side of the entrance to King George Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°08’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. LOW ISLAND: low island about 9 mi. long and about 5 mi. wide, lying about 17 mi. SSE. of Smith I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°17’S., 62°09’W. So named because of its low elevation. This island was known to sealers as early as 1820, and the name Low has been well established in interna- tional usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Jameson Island, Jamesons Island. LOW POINT: low point marking the NW. ex- tremity of Vindication I., South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04/S., 26°45’°W. The point was named by DI personnel following their survey in 1930. Low Point: see Daisy Point; Kikhaylov Point; Pacific Point. LOW ROCK: low rock surrounded by foul ground, lying at the E. side of the S. entrance to Fildes Str., about 1 mi. off the S. end of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°16’S., 58°377W. An unnamed rock in essentially this position appears on a chart by David Ferguson, Scottish geologist aboard the whaler Hanka in these waters in 1913-14. Low Rock was accurately charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935 and 1937. Low Rock: see Bucentaur Rock. LOW ROCK POINT: point about 4 mi. SW. of Cape North, near the W. end of the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°50’W. Charted by DI personnel in 1926-30, and so named because a low rock lies off the point. LUBBOCK, MOUNT: high peak standing E. of Mt. Phillips in northern Victoria Land; in about 73°08’S., 167°30’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Sir John Lubbock, treasurer of the Royal Society. LUCAS GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N. direc- tion to the S. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia, close W. of Luck Pt.; in 54°04’S., 37°19’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, Amer- 198 ican naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who named it for Frederic A. Lucas, Dir. of the American Museum of Natural History at that time. LUCK POINT: point at the W. side of the en- trance to Sea Leopard Fjord, in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°17’W. The name appears to have been first used by DI personnel who charted this point during 1929-30. Lucy, Mount: see Henry Lucy, Mount. Luigi de Savoie, Pic: see Luigi di Savoia Peak. LUIGI DI SAVOIA PEAK: peak about 4,600 ft. in el., at the NE. end of Sierra Du Fief, a mountain range in the SW. part of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°51’S., 63°26’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache in 1898, and scaled by mem- bers of the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Named by Charcot for Luigi di Savoia, Duke of the Abruzzi. Not adopted: Pic Luigi de Savoie [French]. LUISA BAY: small bay lying between Cape Vakop and Mt. Skittle on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°23’S., 36°11’W. Surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52, and named by the Br—APC after the Luisa, one of the vessels of the Compania Ar- gentina de Pesca which participated in establish- ing the first permanent whaling station at Grytviken, South Georgia, in 1904; now a hulk in King Edward Cove. LUITPOLD COAST: that portion of the coast of Coats Land extending from about 29°W. to 37°W., marked by an unbroken ice cliff from 30 to 100 ft. in el. Disc. by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, and named for Prince Regent Luitpold of Bavaria. Not adopted: Leopold Coast, Luitpold Land, Prince-Regent Luitpold Land, Prinzregent Luitpold Land [German]. Luitpold Land: see Luitpold Coast. LUKE GLACIER: glacier, more than 7 mi. long, flowing NW. into the SE. corner of Leroux Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°41’S., 64°08’W. ‘This glacier was first sighted and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Char- cot. It was resurveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for George Lawson Johnston, 1st Baron Luke of Pavenham, Chairman of Messrs. Bovril Ltd., who contributed toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37. LUMIERE PEAK: peak about 3,400 ft. in el., at the SE. end of the peninsula terminating in Cape Tuxen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°19’S., 64°02’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA and named by him, probably for Louis Lumiere, leader in photographic research and development in France at that time. Not adopted: Lumiere Peak. LUMUS REEF: reef about 7 mi. WNW. of Betbeder Islets and some 29 mi. W. of Cape Tuxen, lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 65°18’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. LUPA, MOUNT: flat-topped, ice-covered moun- tain, more than 5,500 ft. in el., standing between Romulus Gl. and Martin Gl. close ESE. of Black Thumb Mtn. and 5 mi. E. of the Head of Rymill Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°27’S., 66°43’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS who applied the name. This mountain lies near the heads of Romulus and Remus Gla- ciers, and the name derives from the mythological story of the she-wolf which fed these twins after they had been thrown into the Tiber. Lurabee Channel: see Lurabee Glacier. LURABEE GLACIER: glacier flowing NE. be- tween Scripps Ridge and Finley Ridge with Cape Walcott at its N. portal, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°12’S., 63°35’W. This glacier, which is a distributary of Bingham Gl., was disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928 on his pioneer Antarctic flight. He named it Lurabee Channel for Lurabee Shreck of San Francisco, in recog- nition of her aid in procuring equipment for this and his earlier Arctic flight, and for her editorial assistance on his book Flying the Arctic. Not adopted: Lurabee Channel. LUSSICH COVE: cove at the SE. side of Martel Inlet, in Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°05’S., 58°21’W. Charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named by him for Antonio Lussich of Montevideo, who was of assistance to the expedition. Liittich Island: see Liége Island. LUTZOW-HOLM BAY: large bay, about 130 mi. wide, lying between Riiser-Larsen Pen. and the W. end of Prince Olav Coast; centering near 68°50’S., 37°30’E. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Isachsen and Riiser-Larsen, 1930-31, in two aerial flights on Feb. 21 and 23, 1931. Named by Bjarne Aagaard in 1934 for Cdr. Finn Lutzow-Holm, pilot with the Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen in 1929-30. LUZ RANGE: prominent N.-S. trending range about 25 mi. long and 9,200 ft. in el., in the Muhlig- Hofmann Mtns., projecting from the intermediate 199 icecap level about 15 mi. N. of the edge of the polar plateau in New Schwabenland; in about 72°00’S., 5°50’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Filchner, 1938-39, and named for the commercial director of the German Lufthansa Corporation. LYALL ISLANDS: group of small islands lying NW. of Cape Moore, off the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 70°45’S., 167°20’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named for David Lyall, asst. surgeon on the exp. ship Terror. LYELL GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N. di- rection to a small bay close E. of Mercer Bay, at the SW. end of Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°38’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, who named it for Sir Charles Lyell (1797-1875), eminent British geologist. LYNCH ISLET: islet lying 1.5 mi. E. of Cape Vik in the E. part of Marshall Bay, off the S. coast of Coronation I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°38’W. It was roughly charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, a Norwegian whaling captain, and was surveyed in 1933 by DI per- sonnel. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and named by them for Thomas B. Lynch, an American sealer who visited the South Orkney Is. in the schooner Express in 1880. LYSTAD BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide which in- dents the W. side of Horseshoe I., in the NE. part of Marguerite Bay; in 67°51’S., 67°17W. First surveyed in 1936-37 by the BGLE under Rymill. The bay was visited by the U.S.M.S. North Star and U.S.S. Bear of the USAS in 1940. The name was proposed by the US-ACAN for Capt. Isak Lystad of the North Star. Not adopted: Horseshoe Bay, Horseshoe Island Cove. LYTTELTON, CAPE: bold cape which forms the S. side of the entrance to Shackleton Inlet, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°35’S., 164°30’E. Disc. in December 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott. The exp. ship Discovery started on the last lap of its journey S. from Lyttelton, New Zealand, where very generous assistance was given the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Lyttleton. LYTTELTON RIDGE: dark, jagged ridge about 1,400 ft. in el., extending for about 5 mi. in a SSE. direction along the W. side of Churchill Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°22’S., 63°08’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Rt. Hon. Oliver Lyttelton, M. P., British Minister of Production and member of the War Cabinet. Photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Not adopted: Antarctic Tetons. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Lyttleton, Cape: see Lyttelton, Cape. MABEL, CAPE: cape forming the N. tip of Pirie Pen. on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°40’W. Probably first sighted by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, who examined the N. coast of Laurie I. in 1823. It was charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for Mrs. J. H. Harvey Pirie, wife of the surgeon-geologist to the expedition. MABEL ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. NW. of Cape Mabel, off the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 44°42’W. Charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it after nearby Cape Mabel. Mabelle Sidley, Mount: see Sidley, Mount. MABUS POINT: ice-covered point marked by four prominent rock outcrops along its W. side, forming the E. side of the entrance to McDonald Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°29’S., 93°18’E. Charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14. Named by the US—-ACAN for Lt. Cdr. Howard W. Mabus, USN, executive officer of the icebreaker U.S.S. Edisto, who was instrumental in the close support, in view of heavy pack ice condi- tions, that the Edisto was able to render the USN Op. Wml. parties in establishing astronomical con- trol stations along Queen Mary Coast during the 1947-48 summer season. MacDONALD, CAPE: headland about 1,400 ft. in el., forming the S. side of the entrance to Odom Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°32’S., 61°11’W. Disc. by members of the USAS who ex- plored this area by land and from the air in 1940. Named for J. E. MacDonald, field representative and secretary of the USAS. MACDOUGAL BAY: small bay lying between Capes Geddes and Valavielle along the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is., in 60°42’S., 44°33’W. Probably first sighted by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, who explored the N. coast of Laurie I. in 1823. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for J. Mac- dougal, third mate of the exp. ship Scotia. MacFerlane, Détroit de: see McFarlane Strait. MACFIE SOUND: passage about 1 mi. wide at its narrowest point, extending in a NW.-SE. direc- tion between Islay and the Sheehan Is. on the N. and Bertha I. on the S., off Mac-Robertson Coast just E. of William Scoresby Bay; in about 67°22’S., 59°47’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and named by them for Lt. A. F. Macfie, RNR, who prepared the maps of 200 the expedition. wegian]. Not adopted: Homresund [Nor- MACKAY, CAPE: cape forming the SE. tip of Ross I.; in about 77°43’S., 168°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Capt. Harry MacKay, commander of the Terra Nova, one of the relief ships for the expedition. Not adopted: Cape Mackay. MACKAY GLACIER: large glacier along the E. coast of Victoria Land, descending from the inland plateau to Granite Hbr.; in about 76°57’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Dr. Alistair Forbes Mackay, a member of the party. MACKAY GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue about 6 mi. long and 2 mi. wide extending into Granite Hbr. from the Mackay Glacier, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°58’S., 162°33’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. The feature takes its name from Mackay Glacier which was named by BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackle- ton. Not adopted: Mackay Tongue. MACKAY MOUNTAINS: prominent group of peaks lying SE. of Boyd Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°30’S., 143°05’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934, and named for Clarence Mackay of the Postal Telegraph and Mackay Radio Companies, who was a benefactor of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Clarence Mackay, Mount Clarence MacKay. Mackay Tongue: see Mackay Glacier Tongue. Mac Kellar, Fiord: see Mackellar Inlet. MACKELLAR, MOUNT: peak about 9,900 ft. in el., standing about 18 mi. N. of The Cloudmaker at the W. side of Beardmore Gl., in the Queen Alex- andra Range; in about 84°06’S., 168°15’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Campbell Mackellar of London, a supporter of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Mac- kethar. MACKELLAR INLET: inlet forming the NW. head of Admiralty Bay, at King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°28’W. Prob- ably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909. Not adopted: Fiord-Mac Kellar [French]. MACKELLAR ISLETS: group of about 30 rocks and islets about 2 mi. in extent, lying N. and NW. of Cape Denison in the center of Commonwealth Bay, along George V Coast; in about 66°58’S., 142°39’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Maw- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA son, who named the islets for C. D. Mackellar of London, a patron of the expedition. MACKENZIE BAY: large embayment between Cape Darnley and the W. side of Amery Ice Shelf, along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°35’S., 71°15’E. On Dec. 26, 1929 the BANZARE, under Mawson, reached 66°57’S., 71°51’E. and saw land ice miraged on the SW. horizon. In this same area on Feb. 10, 1931, the BANZARE disc. a large ice- free bay and made an airplane flight to sketch it. They named it for K. N. MacKenzie, captain of the exp. ship Discovery. On Feb. 5, 1931 the Norwegian whaling ships Thorshavn and Thorshammer, un- der Lars Christensen, were on the outskirts of this area. The whale catcher Seksern reached this area on Jan. 13, 1931 und on Feb. 13, 1931 the Torlyn entered Thorshavn Bay in the S. part of MacKenzie Bay. Not adopted: Mackenzie Bay, Mackenzie Sea, Olav Prydz Bukt [Norwegian]. MACKENZIE PENINSULA: rocky peninsula forming the W. end of Laurie I., in the South Ork- ney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°48’W. First sighted and roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in 1821. It was accurately charted by the ScotNAE under Dr. William S. Bruce, 1902-4, who gave this peninsula the maiden name of his wife. Mackenzie Sea: see MacKenzie Bay; Prydz Bay. Mackethar, Mount: see Mackellar, Mount. MACKINTOSH, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape forming the N. tip of Kemp Pen. and the E. side of the entrance to Mason Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°53’S., 60°03’W. Probably first seen by members of the USAS who photographed a portion of Kemp Pen. while exploring this coast from the air in December 1940. During 1947 the cape was photographed by the RARE, who in con- junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Neil A. Mackintosh, British marine biologist and oceanographer, who since 1924 has been a member of the staff, and since 1936 Dir. of Research of the Discovery Investiga- tions (now part of the National Inst. of Oceanog- raphy). MACKINTOSH, MOUNT: dark-appearing moun- tain peak lying W. of Mt. Baxter and on the E. side of Reeves Gl., in Victoria Land;.in about 74°20’S., 162°15’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for a A. L. A. Mackin- tosh, Second Officer on the exp. ship Nimrod. MACKINTOSH COVE: small cove immediately E. of Fraser Pt., along the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°30’W. 424589 O -57 -14 201 Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce. Named for Neil A. Mackintosh, then a member of the Discovery Committee zoological staff, by DI personnel on the Discovery II following their sur- vey of the South Orkney Is. in 1933. Not adopted: McIntosh Cove. Macnab, Cape: see McNab, Cape. MAC-ROBERTSON COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica extending from William Scores- by Bay, in about 59°35’S., to Cape Darnley on Bjerkg Pen., in about 69°30’E. Named by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, for MacPher- son Robertson of Melbourne, patron of the expedi- tion. Not adopted: MacRobertson Land, Mac- Robertson Land. MacRobertson Land: see Mac-Robertson Coast. MADIGAN, NUNATAK: nunatak about 2,400 ft. in el., about 10 mi. WSW. of the head of Watt Bay, on George V Coast; in about 67°08’S., 143°22’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for Cecil T. Madigan, meteorologist with the AAE Main Base. MAGNET BAY: bay about 8 mi. wide which in- dents the coast for about 3 mi., situated about 9 mi. WNW. of Cape Davis, along the coast of Enderby Land; in about 66°25’S., 56°20’E. The BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, originally gave the name Magnet Bay to what appeared to be a larger bay extending from Cape Davis to Cape Borley, after the vessel Magnet, in which Peter Kemp first sighted land in this vicinity in 1833. The recom- mended application of this name is based on subsequent exploration of this area by a Nor. exp., 1936-37, under Christensen. MAGNIER PEAKS: peaks about 3,600 ft. in el. surmounting the narrow peninsula between Leroux Bay and Bigo Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen., in 65°40’S., 64°18’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE, 1909-10, under Charcot. Not adopted: Magnier Peak. MAHONY, MOUNT: massive mountain, about 5,300 ft. in el., forming a buttress between the Cot- ton and Miller Glaciers, in Victoria Land; in about 77°1V/S., 161°43’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. MAIGNAN POINT: point marking the NE. end of Cholet Islet and the W. side of the entrance to Port Charcot, lying immediately N. of the NW. part of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°03’S., 64°02’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Named by Charcot for F. Maignan, a seaman of the exp. ship Francais GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA who lost his life in a ship accident shortly after the expedition’s departure from Le Havre. Not adopted: Cape Maignan. MAIN ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and 1.5 mi. wide, which is the largest of the Willis Is., off the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°16’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. It was charted by DI personnel in the period 1926-30, and so named because it is the principal island in the group. Mainland: see Coronation Island. MAINSAIL ROCK: rock lying about 0.6 mi. SW. of Spine It. in Sandefjord Bay, South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°03’W. It is easternmost of a chain of three rocks trending in a NW.-SE. direction off the SE. side of Monroe I. The rock was named by DI personnel following their survey in 1933. MAI POINT: point marking the E. side of the entrance to Maiviken, a small bay in Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°30’W. The point was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, un- der Nordenskjéld. The name derives from associ- ation with Maiviken, named by the SwedAE for May Day, May 1, 1902, the day they entered the bay. MAITLAND GLACIER: glacier flowing along the NW. flank of Mt. Hitchcock into the S. side of Mobiloil Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 68°48’S., 65°15’W. This glacier may appear indistinctly in an aerial photograph taken by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, but it was more clearly shown in aerial photographs taken by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935 and the USAS in 1940. Named by the Committee in 1952 for O. Maitland Miller of the American Geographical Soc., who by utilizing Wilkins’ and Ellsworth’s photo- graphs assisted in constructing the first recon- naissance map of this area. MAIVIKEN: cove indenting the N. end of the promontory separating the E. and W. arms of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°30’W. Charted by the SwedAH, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, and named after May Day, May 1, 1902, the day on which they entered the cove. Not adopted: May Cove. Mai Viken Glen: see Bore Valley. MALING PEAK: peak, about 1,400 ft. in el., which is southernmost of two conspicuous peaks situated about 0.5 mi. NW. of Cape Vik on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S.,.45°42’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. 202 Named by the Br—APC for Derek H. Maling, FIDS meteorologist at Signy I. in 1948 and 1949, who made a survey triangulation of Signy I. and the S. coast of Coronation Island. MALLORY POINT: steep rocky point projecting seaward from the coastal ice cliffs, midway along the W. side of Vincennes Bay, on Knox Coast; in about 66°55’S., 108°48’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Ens. Charles W. Mal- lory, USN, construction officer with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who gave close support to the shore parties which established astronomical control from Wil- helm II Coast to Budd Coast. MAMELON ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. long, ly- ing about 11 mi. ENE. of Cape Northrop, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°19’S., 64°49’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS and so named be- cause of its resemblance to a small, rounded hill or fort. MANCHOT ISLET: low rocky islet lying in the entrance to Port Martin, about 0.3 mi. N. of Cape Margerie, off Adélie Coast; in 66°49’S., 141°24’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op: Hip., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because a large Adélie pen- guin rookery was located on the islet. Manchot is the French word for penguin. Not adopted: Ile des Manchots [French]. Manchots, Ile des: see Manchot Islet. MANGIN, MOUNT: mountain about 6,700 ft. in el., standing about 14 mi. SSW. of Mt. Bouvier, on the E. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°25’S., 68°29’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Louis A. Mangin, noted French botanist. MANOURY ISLET: islet lying about 1.5 mi. S. of Gand I. at the N. end of Schollaert Chan., in the © Palmer Arch., in 64°26’S., 62°50’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named for G. Manoury, secretary of the expedition. MANSFIELD POINT: point marking the E. side of the entrance to Norway Bight, on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 45°46’W. First surveyed by DI personnel in 1933. Resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49. Named by the Br—APC for Arthur W. Mansfield of the FIDS, meteorologist at Grytviken, South Georgia, in 1951; leader, meteorologist and biologist at Signy I. in 1952. MARBLE POINT: rocky promontory of marble lying about 4 mi. N. of Cape Bernacchi, in front of the S. end of Wilson Piedmont Gl., in Victoria Land; GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in about 77°26’S., 163°48’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and so named be- cause of the marble found there. Not adopted: Marble Cape. Marescot, Cape: see Marescot Ridge. MARESCOT RIDGE: ridge comprised of numer- ous ice-covered hills, the highest about 3,700 ft. in el., extending in a NNE.-SSW. direction for about 4.5 mi., standing 11 mi. E. of Cape Roquemarel, on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°32’S., 58°32’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville. D’Urville charted this feature as a cape, which he named for Jacques Marescot Duthilleul, an ensign on the exp. ship Astrolabe. The ridge was charted by the FIDS in 1946. Not adopted: Cape Marescot. Margaret Bay: see Marguerite Bay. Margaret Goodenough Glacier: see Goodenough Glacier. Margaret Wade, Mount: see Fitzsimmons, Mount. MARGERIE, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape, marked by prominent rock outcrops at its NW. ands NE. ends, lying midway between Cape Mousse and Lacroix Nunatak and bounded on the N. by nu- merous rocky islets, on Adélie Coast; in 66°49’S., 141°24’E. Charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named this feature for Emanuel de Margerie, French geographer and geologist. Cape Margerie served as the main base site for FrAE parties under Liotard, in 1950-51, and Barré, in 1951-52, until fire destroyed the main buildings of their base, known as Port Martin, in January 1952. Not adopted: Cape de Margerie. Margreaves Glacier: see Hargreaves Glacier. MARGUERITE BAY: an extensive bay on the W. side of Palmer Pen., which is bounded on the N. by Adelaide I., and on the S. by Wordie Ice Shelf, George VI Sound, and Alexander I Island; centered in about 68°30’S., 68°30’W. Disc. in 1909 by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, who named the bay for his wife. Not adopted: Margaret Bay. MARIAN COVE: cove indenting the W. side of King George I. about midway between Collins Hbr. and Potter Cove, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°12’S., 58°46’W. The name seems to have been first used by the Scottish geologist David Ferguson in a 1921 report based upon his investigations of King George I. in 1913-14,.but may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. Not adopted: Marion Cove. 203 Marie, Pointe: see Marie Island. MARIE BYRD LAND: that portion of Antarctica lying E. of Ross Ice Shelf and Ross Sea and S. of the Pacific Ocean, extending eastward approxi- mately to a line between the head of Ross Ice Shelf and Eights Coast. The inclusion of the area hbe- tween the Rockefeller Plateau and Hights Coast is based upon the leading role of R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, USN, in all explorations of this area. Pend- ing more definite mapping which may tmake it pos- sible to draw boundaries along lines of natural de- marcation, the E. limit of this land has been arbi- trarily adopted. The name was originally applied by Byrd in 1929, in honor of his wife, to the NW. part of the area, the part that was explored in that year. MARIE ISLAND: irregular-shaped island, about 2 mi. long, lying immediately N. of Cape Evensen, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°07’S., 65°46’°W. The name “Pointe Marie,” after the elder sister of Dr. Jean B. Charcot, was given by Charcot’s FrAE, 1903-5. It was used for a point on the coast close N. of Cape Evensen, in about 66°07’S. After the FrAE, 1908-10, Charcot applied the name “Pointe Marie” for the most southerly tip of an island, ‘Ile Waldeck-Rousseou,” lying off the coast in approximately the same latitude. In correlating their surveys with those of Charcot, the BGLE, 1934-37, identified ‘Ile Waldeck- Rousseau” as Waldeck-Rousseau Peak on the main- land of Palmer Pen. The most prominent feature near this peak requiring a name is the island now described. The name Marie Island for this feature preserves Charcot’s naming in this locality. Not adopted: Pointe Marie [French]. MARIHOLM: the highest and easternmost islet in a small group which lies about 0.3 mi. S. of Moe I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°42’W. The islet was named on a chart based upon a running survey of the South Orkney Is. by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. Not adopted: Hariholm [Norwegian]. MARINA POINT: low rocky promontory which forms the extreme NW. point of Galindez I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. First surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill. Named by members of the BGLE for Princess Marina, now Duchess of Kent, who was married in November 1934, while the expedition ship Penofa was enroute to the Argentine Is. The name did not appear on pub- lished BGLE maps but since has become estab- lished in usage. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA MARIN DARBEL BAY: large bay indenting the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Capes Bellue and Rey; in 66°35’S., 65°55’W. It was disc. and roughly charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who gave it this name. The bay was further charted in 1931 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not adopted: Darbel Bay, Marin-Darbel Fiord. Marin-Darbel Fiord: see Marin Darbel Bay. MARION, MOUNT: mountain probably over 1,500 ft. in el., standing about 15 mi. WNW. of Mt. Martine, on the N. coast of Charcot I., in about 69°49’S., 74°37’°W. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1910 by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, and named by him for his daughter, Marion. Not adopted: Marion Mountain, Marion Peak. Marion Cove: see Marian Cove. MARIS NUNATAK: small coastal nunatak pro- truding above the terminus of Rogers Gl., about 2.5 mi. ENE. of Whisnant Nunatak on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°58’S., 72°33’E. De- lineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for R. L. Maris, air crew- man on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. Mark, Mount: see Hawthorne, Mount. MARKHAM, MOUNT: triple-peaked massif about 15,100 ft. in el., standing prominently above the surrounding lesser peaks and lying S. of Shackleton Inlet, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°59’S., 160°30’E. Disc. in De- cember 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott. Named for Sir Clements Markham who, as Pres. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1893-1905, planned the exp. and chose Scott as its leader. Not adopted: Markham Mountains. MARKHAM BAY: bay about 16 mi. wide and indenting 5 mi., lying between Ekelof Pt. and Hamilton Pt. on the E. side of James Ross I.; in 64°17’S., 57°18’W. Possibly first seen by a Br. exp. under Ross, who explored this area in 1842-43. First charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, who named it for Sir Clements Markham. Not adopted: Clements Markham Bay. Markham Island: see Clements Markham Island. MARKHAM ISLAND: high island with vertical sides, about 1 mi. in diameter, lying S. of Oscar I. and about 20 mi. W. of Cape Washington, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 174°46’S., 204 164°21’E. Disc. in February 1900 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Sir Clements Markham. MARR, MOUNT: sharp dark peak about 5 mi. SW. of Johnston Pk. in Enderby Land; in about 66°15’S., 52°21’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named for James W.S. Marr, zoologist to the exp. who had also been a member of a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1921-22. MARR BAY: bay lying between Cape Valavielle and Fraser Pt. along the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is., in 60°42’S., 44°31’W. First charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce. Named for James W. S. Marr, member of the Dis- covery Committee zoological staff, by personnel on the Discovery II following their survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1933. MARR BLUFF: rock bluff, about 3,500 ft. in el., standing immediately N. of Wager GI. on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 69°47’S., 69°20’W. Surveyed by the FIDS in 1948 and named by them for John E. Marr, English geologist and prof. of geology at Cambridge Univ., 1917-30. MARRET GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing NE. from the con- tinental ice to Adélie Coast, close E. of Cape Robert; in about 66°26’S., 137°44’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Mario Marret, leader of the FrAE, 1952-53, whose party extended reconnaissance of the coastal features to the W. side of Victor Bay. Marret previously served with the 1948 French exp. to Greenland, the unsuccessful FrAE venture to Antarctica in 1948-49, and as radio-operator and cine-photog- rapher with the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51. MARR ICE PIEDMONT: large ice piedmont which covers western half of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°33’S., 63°40’W. This feature was presumably first seen by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, and was first roughly sur- veyed by the FrAE, 1903-5, and FrAE 1908-10, both under Charcot. It was named by the Br—APC for James W. S. Marr, British marine biologist, who was first commander of the FIDS, 1943-45, and leader of the base at nearby Port Lockroy. Marr was also a member of the BANZARE under Mawson, 1929-31, and Shackleton’s expedition of 1921-22. MARSDEN, MOUNT: peak about 2,100 ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. SSW. of Mt. Rivett, in the Gustav Bull Mtns. on the Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°52’S., 66°06’E. Early in January 1930, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the BANZARE under Mawson sighted land in this area and made an aerial observation fight. The exp. landed on nearby Scullin Monolith on Feb. 13, 1931 and named this peak, probably for Ernest Marsden, Sec. of the Dept. of Scientific and Indus- trial Research of New Zealand. MARS GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 4 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, flowing S. into the ice shelf of George VI Sound between Two-Step Cliffs and Phobos Ridge; in 71°53’8., 68°24’°W. The coast in this vicinity was first explored from the air and partially pho- tographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and was roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This glacier was first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and was named by them after the planet Mars. MARSHALL BAY: semi-circular bay about 2 mi. wide, lying between Capes Vik and Hansen along the S. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Ts.; in 60°39’S., 45°39’W. The bay was roughly charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain. Recharted in 1933 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for Dr. E. H. Marshall, surgeon and member of the Marine Executive Staff of the Discovery Committee. MARSHALL MOUNTAINS: group of mountains about 10,000 ft. in el., standing on the W. side of Beardmore Gl. between Berwick and Swinford Glaciers, in the Queen Alexandra Range; in about 84°40’S., 165°20’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named for Dr. Eric Mar- shall, surgeon and cartographer to the expedition. MARSHALL PEAK: peak about 4,000 ft. in el. which is ice covered except for its rocky NE. side, standing about 6 mi. NW. of the head of Palmer Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°09’S., 61°32’W. This coast was first explored in 1940 - by members of the USAS but the peak was first charted by a joint party consisting of members of the RARE and FIDS in 1947. Named by the FIDS for Norman B. Marshall, zoologist at the FIDS Hope Bay base in 1945-46. MARSTON, MOUNT: whaleback-shaped moun- tain about 3,900 ft. in el., standing along the N. side of Mackay Gl. and overlooking Granite Hbr. on the E., and Cleveland GI. on the W., in Victoria Land; in about 76°55’/S., 162°16’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for George E. Marston, artist with the expedition. Not adopted: Whaleback. Martel, Fiord: see Martel Inlet. 205 MARTEL INLET: inlet forming the NE. head of Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 58°22’W. Probably named by the FrAE under Charcot, who charted Admiralty Bay in December 1909. Not adopted: Fiord Martel [French]. Martello Rock: see Martello Tower. MARTELLO TOWER: rock about 30 ft. in el. lying in King George Bay about 2 mi. NNW. of Cape Lions Rump, in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°05’S., 58°08’W. Charted during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it after the fortified towers by that name. Not adopted: Martello Rock. MARTIN, MOUNT: mountain about 4,500 ft. in el. with conspicuous rock exposures on its SE. side, standing immediately N. of the head of Anthony Gl. on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°40’S., 62°59’W. The mountain lies on the fringe of the area explored by the BGLE in 1936, and was photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. During 1947 the mountain was photo- graphed from the air by members of the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Orville Martin, electronics engineer who was of assistance in planning and obtaining radio equip- ment necessary for Ronne’s expedition. MARTIN, POINT: point about 0.8 mi. NNW. of Cape Burn Murdoch, on the SW. side of Scotia Bay, southern Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°41’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named for J. Martin, able-bodied seaman on the exp. ship Scotia. MARTIN, PORT: anchorage lying immediately off Cape Margerie, at the end of Adélie Coast; in 66°49’S., 141°24’E. Disc. in 1950 by the FrAK under Liotard, and named in conjuction with the exp. base established on Cape Margerie. Named for André-Paul (J. A.) Martin, second-in-command of the exp., who died enroute to the Antarctic. MARTINE, MOUNT: rugged massif with black jagged peaks and steep slopes, about 2,000 ft. in el., standing at the NE. corner of Charcot I.; in about 69°55’S., 73°57’W. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1910 by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Carcot, and named by him for his daughter, Martine. Not adopted: Martin Mountain, Martine Mountain. Martin Glacier: see East Balch Glacier. MARTIN GLACIER: glacier, about 3 mi. wide and 9 mi. long, which flows W. and then NW. from the S. side of Mt. Lupa to the SE. corner of Ry- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA mill Bay where it joins the Bertrand Ice Piedmont, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°28’S. 66°55’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and named for James H. Martin, member of the BANZARE under Mawson, 1929-31, and first mate of the Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37. MARTIN ISLANDS: group of small islands lying close NE. of the Pitt Is., marking the NE. extrem- ity of the Biscoe Is.; in 65°28’S., 65°18’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Captain Martin, Argentine Navy. Martin Mountain: see Martine, Mount. MARTIN PENINSULA: ice-covered peninsula about 20 mi. wide, projecting about 70 mi. N. into Amundsen Sea from its mountainous base on the Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 74°20’S., 112°00’W. Photographed from the air in February 1940 by the USAS, and later deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for Col. Lawrence Martin, USA (Ret.) American geographer and authority on the history of Ant- arctic exploration. MARTIN REEF: isolated rock, lying awash, about 9 mi. N. and slightly to the W. of Cape Fletcher, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°34’S., 65°33’E. This reef was apparently en- countered by Capt. Carl Sj6vold in the Norwegian whale catcher Bouvet III in January 1931, and by the BANZARE under Mawson in February 1931. MARTINS HEAD: prominent headland about 900 ft. in el. between King George Bay and Ad- miralty Bay, on the S. coast of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 52°13’W. The name dates back to at least 1820, when it was de- scribed by Edward Bransfield, Master, RN, dur- ing his exploration of these islands. Not adopted: Martin’s Head. MARUJUPU PEAK: conspicuous nunatak stand- ing above the main flow of Ochs Gl., about 2 mi. W. of Mt. Ferranto which marks the SW. end of the Fosdick Mtns., in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°29/S., 145°35’W. Disc. and so named by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight of Dec. 5, 1929. Marujupu combines the letters from the names of three daughters and a son of Mr. and Mrs. Arthur Sulzberger. The daughters are Marian, Ruth, and Judy; Punch is the nickname of son Arthur. The Sulzbergers were patrons of the ex- pedition. Mary Louise Ulmer, Mount; Mary Ulmer, Mount: see Ulmer, Mount. 206 MASCART, CAPE: cape forming the NE. tip of Adelaide I., in 66°43’S., 67°42’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Eleuthére Mascart, French physicist and Dir. of the Bureau Central Météorologique. MASON INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes about 15 mi. SW. between Cape Mackintosh and the coastline south of Cape Herdman, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°57’S., 60°25’W. First seen and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the inlet was photographed from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for D. P. Mason, their surveyor on the joint British-American seldge journey during the charting of this coast in 1947. Massif: for names beginning thus see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Massif Calais see Calais, Massif. (Massif is a French word for ‘‘“mountain mass.”’) MASSON ISLAND: ice-covered island about 15 mi. long and about 1,500 ft. in el., lying NW. of Henderson I. within the area covered by Shackle- ton Ice Shelf, off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°11’S., 96°21’E. Disc. in February 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Prof. Sir David Orme Masson of Melbourne, Australia, a member of the AAE Advisory Committee. Not adopted: Mission Island. MASSON RANGE: high broken chain of moun- tains, consisting of Nordkammen Crest, Mekam- men Crest, and S¢rkammen Crest, forming a part of the Framnes Mtns. on Mac-Robertson Coast. Having several peaks over 3,000 ft. in el., the range extends in a N.-S. direction about 12 mi.; centering in about 67°50’S., 62°52’E. Disc. and charted by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, and named for Prof. Sir David Orme Masson, a member of the advisory committee for this exp. as well as the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson. Matha Bay: see Matha Strait. MATHA STRAIT: strait lying between Adelaide I. and the S. end of the Biscoe Is.; in 66°34’S., 67°35’W. The strait takes its name from Matha Bay, the name originally applied by Charcot, leader of the FrAE, 1908-10, to the water feature as he conceived it. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, recognizing that it is really a strait rather than a bay, changed the name to Matha Strait. Named for Lt. A. Matha, second-in-command of the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. Not adopted: Matha Bay. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA MATHESON GLACIER: glacier about 11 mi. long, situated about 3 mi. S. of Ashton Gl. and flowing in an E. direction to the W. side of Lehrke Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°47’S., 62°00’W. First sighted by members of the USAS who explored this coast by land and from the air in December 1940. First charted by a joint party consisting of members of the RARE and FIDS in 1947. Named by the FIDS for J. Matheson, a mem- ber of the FIDS at the Port Lockroy and Hope Bay bases, 1944-46. MATHIEU ROCK: ice-free rock, lying midway between Cape Bickerton and Rock X, at the E. side of the entrance to Victor Bay, close off Adélie Coast; in 66°20’S., 136°49’E. Photographed from the air by USN Operation Highjump, 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, and named for Claude Mathieu, French astronomer of the 19th century. Matin, Mount: see Peary, Mount. MATTHES GLACIER: glacier about 9 mi. long, flowing E. into Whirlwind Inlet between Demorest and Chamberlin Glaciers, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°30’S., 65°38’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and photo- graphed from the air by the USAS in 1940. Charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Francois E. Matthes, glaciologist and then chief geologist with the U. S. Geological Survey. Matthews Point: see Harrison Point. MATTHEWS POINT: point forming the W. side of the entrance to Undine Harbor, along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°59’W. This point was charted in the period 1926-30 by DI personnel and named for L. Harrison Matthews, British zoologist, member of the staff of the Discovery Investigations, 1924-35, who worked at South Georgia in 1924-27. MAUD BANK: submarine bank, 650 fathoms be- low the surface, in the Atlantic Ocean about 300 mi. N. of Princess Martha Coast; in about 65°00’S., 2°35’E. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Isachsen in the Norvegia, Jan. 20, 1931, and named by him for Roald Amundsen’s ship, the Maud. MAUDE, CAPE: conspicuous dark bluff stand- ing NW. of the mouth of Beardmore Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°18’S., 168°15’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton in December 1908. MAURICE CHANNEL: strait about 1.5 mi. wide between Bellingshausen and Cook Islands, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S., 27°05’W. The 207 existence of this strait was first noted by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1820. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for H. G. Maurice, a member of the Dis- covery Committee. Maurice Faure Islands: see Faure Islands. MAURY BAY: open bay, about 25 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, indenting Banzare Coast between Cape Lewis and Stuart Pt.; in about 66°30’S., 125°00’E. The bay is believed to be generally ice filled and is marked by prominent tongues extending seaward from Blair, Bell and Power Glaciers. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for William L. Maury, lieutenant on the brig Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. MAURY GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide, flowing in an ENE. direction to the SW. corner of Violante Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°40’S., 61°32’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the glacier was photographed from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS after Matthew F. Maury, 1806-73, American naval officer and hydrographer, and distinguished promoter of maritime research and Antarctic ex- ploration. MAWSON, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape forming the E. extremity of Charcot I.; in about 70°03’S., 73°30’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins, Dec. 29, 1929, in a flight made around the island from the William Scoresby, and named by him for Sir Doug- las Mawson, Australian Antarctic explorer and leader of the AAE, 1911-14, and the BANZARE, 1929-31. MAWSON GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide, descending to the Ross Sea, in about 76°12’S., 162°30’E., where it forms the Nordenskjold Ice Tongue. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for Douglas Mawson, physicist with the exp., who was later to become the leader of two other Antarctic expeditions, 1911- 14 and 1929-31. May, Cape: see William Henry May, Cape. Maybelle Horlick Sibley, Mount; Maybelle Hor- lick Sidley, Mount; Maybelle Sidley, Mount: see Sidley, Mount. May Cove: see Maiviken. MAY GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the conti- nental ice, and terminating in a prominent tongue GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA about 7 mi. WSW. of Cape Carr, on Clarie Coast; in about 66°00’S., 130°40’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for William May, passed midshipman on the tender Flying Fish of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. MAY GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue about 5 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, extending NW. from May Gl., near the W. end of Clarie Coast; in about 65°55’S., 130°40’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for William May of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. MAYO, CAPE: bare rock cliff forming the E. end of a flat, ice-covered platform about 1,400 ft. in el., situated about 3 mi. N. of Miller Pt. on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°53’S., 63°25’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight, Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him for William B. Mayo of the Ford Motor Co. It has been more fully defined on the basis of information resulting from flights by Lin- coln Ellsworth in 1935, and from flights and sledge journey along this coast by members of the East Base of the USAS in 1940. MAYR RANGE: range of mountains projecting through the icecap immediately N. of the Sauter Range on the piedmont of New Schwabenland. From a maximum summit level of about 9,800 ft. in about 72°10’S., 3°30’E., one limb of the range projects roughly W. for about 12 mi. while a sec- ond extends roughly N. for about 25 mi. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Rudolf Mayr, pilot of the Passat, one of the flying boats used by the expedition. McCARROLL, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the entrance to Richthofen Valley, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 62°33’W. This feature was probably first seen by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. It was sighted by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him for H. G. McCarroll of Detroit, Michigan. McCLARY RIDGE: small, crescent-shaped ridge, standing about 5 mi. SSE. of Mt. Hayes at the S. side of Cole Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°55’S., 64°03’W. In December 1947 it was charted by FIDS and was photographed from the air by RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for George B. McClary of Winnetka, Ill., contributor to the expedition. McCLINTOCK, MOUNT: mountain in the Bri- tannia Range, about 10,500 ft. in el., forming part of the N. wall of Barne Inlet, along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°12’S., 157°35’E. Disc. by 208 the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him for Adm. Sir Leopold McClintock, RN, a member of the Ship Committee for the expedition. McCORMICK, CAPE: conspicuous cliff near the NE. extremity of Victoria Land, overlooking Ross Sea about 12 mi. S. of Cape Downshire; in about 71°55’S., 171°05’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Robert McCormick, the surgeon on one of the exp. ships, the Erebus. McCOY, MOUNT: high table-topped massif with dark, snow-free, vertical walls, at the head of Emory Land Gl., on Ruppert Coast; in about 75°50’S., 140°45’W. Disc. by members of West Base of the USAS, 1939-40, and named for James C. McCoy, chief pilot at the West Base. Not adopted: Mount Alma McCoy. McDONALD BAY: open bay about 7 mi. wide at its entrance between Adams It. and the Haswell Its., lying immediately W. of Mabus Pt., along Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°35’S., 93°05’E. Charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14. Named by the US-ACAN for Cdr. Edwin A. Mc- Donald, USN, commander of the U.S.S. Burton Island, flagship of the two icebreakers which sup- ported the USN Op. Wm. parties which established astronomical stations along Wilhelm II, Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts during the 1947-48 summer season. McDONALD GLACIER: glacier about 17 mi. wide, descending from ice-covered hills 1,000 to 2,000 ft. in el. and terminating at the sea in per- pendicular ice walls, 100 to 150 ft. in el., on Caird Coast; in about 75°20’S., 26°00’W. Disc. by a Br. exp., 1914-16, under Shackleton, and named by him for Allan McDonald, who was instrumental in raising a fund and chartering the schooner Emma in an attempted rescue of the party marooned on Elephant I. by the loss of Shackleton’s ship, the Endurance. Not adopted: Allan McDonald Glacier. McDONALD ISLANDS: small island group con- sisting of an island and several islets and rocks, situated about 23 mi. W. of Heard I.; in about 53°02’S., 72°36’E. Named for Captain McDonald of the British ship Samarang who disc. the islands in January 1854. McDONALD POINT: point marking the W. end of Islay, an island in the William Scoresby Arch. off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°22’S., 59°43’E. The name appears to have been applied: by mem- bers of the William Scoresby who charted this area in February 1936. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA McELROY, MOUNT: mountain about 6,000 ft. in el. standing NW. of Nantucket Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen., in about 74°12’S., 63°04’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne who named it for T. P. McElroy, of Boston, who con- tributed the radio and communication instruments for the expedition. McFARLANE STRAIT: strait lying between Greenwich and Livingston Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S., 59°58’W. The name ap- pears on an 1822 chart by Capt. George Powell, a British sealer, and is now well established in inter- national usage. Not adopted: Détroit de Mac- Ferlane [French], Duffs Straits, McFarlane’s Strait, Yankee Sound. McIntosh Cove: see Mackintosh Cove. McINTYRE, MOUNT: a group of low connecting ridges extending in an E.-W. direction, with rock walls facing generally N., protruding above the ice of the south polar plateau to about 9,700 ft. in el., standing about 9 mi. S. of Mt. Weaver and S. of the head of Robert Scott Gl.; in about 87°08’S., 152°05’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Marvin H. McIntyre, secretary to the President of the United States at that time. McKASKLE HILLS: group of moderately low, rocky hills, about 1.5 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, standing between Mistichelli Hills and Rogers Gl. on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°01’S., 72°15’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in March 1947, and named by him for H. A. McKaskle, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. McKERCHER, MOUNT: mountain rising to about 7,000 ft. in el., which is marked by promi- nent outliers on its NW. and NE. sides, standing at the E. side of Robert Scott Gl. opposite the junction of Bartlett Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°07’S., 149°45’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named for Miss Hazel McKercher, secretary to R. Adm. Byrd during the period of this expedition. McKinley, Mount: see Grace McKinley, Mount. McLEAN NUNATAKS: group of three nunataks at the W. side of the head of Mertz GI., on the George V Coast; in about 67°49’S., 143°56’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and named for Archie L. McLean, medical officer and bacteriologist with the expedition. 209 McLENNAN MOUNT: mountain about 5,800 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Taylor Glacier Dry Valley and forming the NE. wall of Canada Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°35’/S., 162°49’R. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. McLEOD GLACIER: glacier, about 1 mi. long, flowing in a SSE. direction into Clowes Bay on the S. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°38’W. Named by the Br-APC in 1954 for Mi- chael McLeod, following a survey by the FIDS in 1947. On Dec. 12, 1821, the cutter Beaufoy under Michael McLeod sailed to a position at least 60 mi. W. of the South Orkney Is., where a chart annota- tion indicates that land was sighted, probably Coronation Island. McLEOD HILL: rounded, ice-covered hill, about 5,900 ft. in el., which forms a prominent landmark 1 mi. E. of the head of Northeast Gl., on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 68°05’S., 66°30’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE, and re- surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. It was resurveyed in 1946 by the FIDS and named for Kenneth A. McLeod, FIDS meteorological observer who, during July-December 1947, occupied with a member of the RARE the plateau meteorological station 1 mi. E. of this hill. Not adopted: Glacier Dome, The Dome. McMURDO SOUND: a sound at the junction of the Ross Sea and Ross Ice Shelf, lying between Ross I. and Victoria Land; in about 177°30’S., 165°00’E. Disc. in February 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Lt. Archibald Mc- Murdo of the Terror, one of the exp. ships. Not adopted: McMurdo Strait. McMurdo Strait: see McMurdo Sound. McNAB, CAPE: cape, about 1,160 ft. in el., form- ing the S. end of Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°49’S., 163°10’E. Named for John McNab, 2d mate of the schooner Eliza Scott, who made a sketch of the Balleny Is. when they were disc., in 1839. Not adopted: Cape Macnab. McNAMARA ISLAND: the more northern of the two Fletcher Is., lying near the W. end of Bellings- hausen Sea, about 40 mi. E. of Cape Palmer, off Eights Coast; in about 71°45’S., 94°45’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Feb. 27, 1940. Named by R. Adm. Byrd for John McNa- mara, boatswain on the Jacob Ruppert of the ByrdAE, 1933-35. McNEILE GLACIER: narrow glacier flowing northward to the SE. side of Almond Pt. where it enters Charcot Bay, on the NW. coast of Palmer GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Pen.; in 63°52’S., 59°22’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS and named for S. St. C. McNeile, surveyor at the FIDS Hope Bay base in 1948-49. M’Cormik, Cape: see McCormick, Cape. McVitie, Cape: see Hatree, Cape. MEADE ISLANDS: small group of islets lying in the N. entrance to McFarlane Str., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 60°07’W. Charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. MEARES CLIFF: steep cliff, about 880 ft. in el., lying about 2 mi. E. of Ponting Cliff, on the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°13’S., 168°33’E. First charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Cecil H. Meares who had charge of the dogs on this ex- pedition. MECHANICS BAY: bay, which is about 1 mi. wide and recedes 0.5 mi., lying immediately E. of Saddle Pt. on the N. coast of Heard I.; in 53°01’S., 73°31’E. Named by American sealers after the schooner Mechanic, a tender to the Corinthian in Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers’ sealing fleet which landed at Heard I. in 1855. The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. MEEK CHANNEL: channel about 0.75 mi. long and 0.1 mi. wide, separating Galindez I. from Grotto I. and the Corner Is., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°15’W. Charted in 1935 by the BGLE under Ry- mill, and named for William McC. Meek, marine architect and surveyor, who was of assistance in preparing the exp. ship Penola for the voyage. MEFJELL MOUNTAIN: mountain standing be- tween Mt. Walnum and Mt. Bergersen in the cen- tral part of the Sér Rondane Mtns., inland from Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about 172°10’S., 24°00’E. Disc. and photographed from the air by a Nor. exp. under Christensen on February 6, 1937 and named Mefjell (middle mountain) because of its central location in the mountain group. Not adopted: Mefjell [Norwegian], Middle Mountain. MEGALESTRIS HILL: rock hill, about 110 ft. in el., in the S. part of Petermann I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 64°11’W. Charted and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Megalestris is an obsolete name for the South Polar skua. 210 MEIER, CAPE: cape forming the W. side of the entrance to Norway Bight, on the S. side of Coro- nation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 45°54’W. The cape appears named on a chart by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a running survey of the South Orkney Islands in 1912-13. MEIKLEJOHN GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, flowing SW. from the Dyer Plateau of Palmer Pen. to George VI Sound, imme- diately S. of Moore Pt.; in 70°32’S., 67°44’W. In its lower reaches the S. side of this glacier merges with Millett Gl. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Ian F. Meiklejohn, radio operator of the BGLE, 1934-37. MEINARDUS GLACIER: extensive glacier flow- ing in an ENE. direction to a point immediately E. of Mt. Barkow where it is joined from the NW. by Haines GI., and then E. to enter New Bedford Inlet close W. of Court Nunatak, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°22’S., 61°52’W. Disc. and pho- tographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Wilhelm Meinardus, German meteorologist and climatologist and author of many publications including the meteorological results of the GerAE under Grygalski, 1901-3. MEKAMMEN CREST: mountain about 3,900 ft. in el., lying close SE. of Nordkammen Crest and ex- tending 5 mi. in a N.-S. direction, in the Masson Range of the Framnes Mtns. on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°50’S., 62°55’E. It was mapped and named by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen- sen in January 1937. The name is descriptive, meaning ‘‘middle comb.” Not adopted: Mekam- men [Norwegian], Middle Crest. MELBA PENINSULA: ice-covered peninsula be- tween Reid Gl. and the Bay of Winds, fronting on Shackleton Ice Shelf, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°35’S., 98°10’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named it for Dame Nellie Melba, of Melbourne, a patron of the expedition. MELBOURNE, MOUNT: conspicuous volcanic cone, about 8,500 ft. in el., back of Cape Washing- ton, and between Terra Nova Bay and Wood Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 74°25/S., 164°50’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Lord Viscount Melbourne, British Prime Minister when the exp. was being planned. Melbourne Glacier: see Campbell Glacier. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Melchior, Ile: see Melchior Islands. Melchior, Puerto: see Melchior Harbor. Melchior Archipelago; Melchoir Archipelago: see Melchior Islands. MELCHIOR HARBOR: small harbor in the Mel- chior Is., Palmer Arch., formed by the semi-circular arrangement of Delta, Alpha, Beta, Kappa and Gamma Islands; in 64°19’S., 62°59’W. The name, derived from the name of the island group, was probably given by DI personnel who roughly sur- veyed the harbor in 1927. The harbor was sur- veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Puerto Melchior [Spanish]. MELCHIOR ISLANDS: group of many low, ice- covered islands lying near the center of Dallmann Bay in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°57’W. First seen but left unnamed by a Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. They were resighted and roughly charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Charcot named what he believed to be the large easternmost island in the group “Ile Melchior” after Vice Admiral Melchior of the French Navy, but later surveys proved Charcot’s “Tle Melchior” to be two islands, now called Eta Island and Omega Island. The name Melchior Is- lands has since become established for the whole island group now described, and of which Eta Island and Omega Island form the eastern part. The island group was roughly surveyed in 1927 by DI personnel in the Discovery, and was resur- veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942 and 1943, and again in 1948. Not adopted: Ile Melchior [French], Melchior Archipelago, Melchoir Archi- pelago. MELSOM ROCKS: group of isolated rocks about 3 mi N. of Despair Rocks, and some 8 mi. W. of Penguin Pt., the NW. end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°31’S., 46°11’W. Prob- ably sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in De- cember 1821. Named for Capt. H. G. Melsom, manager of the Thule Whaling Co., by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, who conducted a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. MELVILLE, CAPE: cape forming the SE. end of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°01’S., 57°33’W. This name was applied to the NE. cape of King George I. on some early charts, but in recent years has consistently been used for the SE. cape. The name dates back to at least 1820 when it was described by Edward Bransfield, Master, RN, during his explorations of South Shet- land Islands. Not adopted: South Foreland. 211 Melville’s Island: see Laurie Island. MELVILLE PEAK: prominent peak surmounting Cape Melville, the SE. end of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°00’S., 57°39’W. This peak, which was probably known to early sealers in the area, was charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. It probably takes its name from nearby Cape Melville. MENIER ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long and wide, which is largest in a small island group lying near the mouth of Flandres Bay and about 4 mi. NE. of Cape Renard, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°59’S., 63°37’W. The island group was disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, who gave them the name “Iles Ménier.” The name Ménier is here applied to the largest of these islands. Not adopted: Guyou Island. MENTZEL, MOUNT: mountain about 8,700 ft. in el., situated about 7 mi. ENE. of Ritscher Peak in the NE. portion of the Wohlthat Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in about 72°19’S., 13°45’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, who named it for the pres. of the Deutschen Forschungsge- meinschaft (German Research Society). MERCER BAY: small bay marked by Geikie Gl. at its head, at the SW. end of Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°40’W. The bay appears on a sketch map of Cumberland Bay by Lt. Samuel A. Duse of the SwedAE, 1901-4. The name is first used on a chart based upon survey work by DI personnel in 1926-30. Probably named for Lt. Cdr. G. M. Mercer, RNR, captain of the DI research ship William Scoresby, which engaged in whale marking and oceanographic work off South Georgia in 1926-27. MERCURY GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 6 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, flowing W. into George VI Sound between Waitabit Cliffs and Keystone Cliffs; in 71°34’S., 68°14’°W. The coast in this vicinity was first ex- plored from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and was roughly charted from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This glacier was first sur- veyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and was named by them after the planet Mercury. MERRITT ISLET: rocky islet about 0.7 mi. long and about 120 ft. in el., lying close off Knox Coast about 4 mi. NW. of Robinson Gl.; in 66°28’S., 107°11’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for Everett L. Merritt, photogrammetrist with the Navy Hydrographic Office, who served as surveyor GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established astronomical control along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts during January-February 1948. MERSEY SPIT: a spit on the S. coast of King George I., about 0.5 mi. N. of Penguin I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 57°55’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. MERTON PASSAGE: narrow passage between Right Whale Rocks and a small rock about 0.1 mi. N. of Bariff Pt., at the E. side of the entrance to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°24’W. The name Merton, the former name for Right Whale Rocks, was applied to this passage by D™ personnel as a result of surveys during the period 1926-30. Merton Rocks: see Right Whale Rocks. MERTZ GLACIER: valley glacier averaging over 20 mi. in width and flowing about 40 mi. from the inland plateau to the sea, lying W. of Ninnis Gl. on George V Coast; in about 67°30’S., 144°45’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named it for Xavier Mertz, who perished on Jan. 7, 1913, while on a sledging journey about 100 mi. SE. of Main Base. MERTZ GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue about 45 mi. long and 20 mi. wide, forming the seaward extension of Mertz Glacier along George V Coast; in about 67°10’S., 145°30’E. Disc. and named by the AAEH, 1911-14, under Mawson. Named after Mertz Glacier. Not adopted: Mertz Glacier Ice Tongue. MERZ PENINSULA: irregular, ice-covered pen- insula, about 15 mi. long in an E.—W. direction and averaging 25 mi. wide, projecting from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°15’S., 61°05’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Alfred Merz, 1880-1925, noted German oceanographer and orig- inal leader of the Ger. exp. in the Meteor, 1925-26. METHUEN COVE: cove between Cape Anderson and Cape Whitson, along the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°33’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it for H. Methuen, accountant of the expedition. MICA ISLETS: group of about four mainly ice- covered islets lying 7 mi. W. of Mt. Guernsey and 6 mi. NE. of Cape Jeremy, off the W. coast of Palmer 212 Pen.; in 69°20’S., 68°36’W. First seen from the air and photographed by the BGLE in 1936, and later roughly mapped from the photographs. The islets were visited and surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because there is mica in the schists which form them. MICHAEL, MOUNT: active volcanic mountain about 2,600 ft. in el., surmounting Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°48’S., 26°28’W. The island was disc. by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775, but the mountain was presumably first charted in 1820 by a Russ. exp. under Bellings- hausen. Recharted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for Michael J. de C. Carey, son of Cdr. W. M. Carey, RN (Ret.), cap- tain of the Discovery II at the time of the survey. Michailoff’s Istand: see Cornwallis Island. MICHELSEN ISLAND: small island in the South Orkney Is., joined to the S. end of Powell I. by a narrow isthmus of occasionally submerged boulders; in 60°45’S., 45°02’W. The island appears to be first charted and named on a map by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a run- ning survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted: Michelsens Island. MICKLE ISLET: islet about 1 mi. SE. of Flag- staff Pt., close off the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°34’S., 166°11’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Not adopted: Mickle Island. Middle Crest: see Mekammen Crest. Middle Island: see Day Island. MIDDLE ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. S. of Fore- land Islet and about midway along the E. coast of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 61°57’S., 57°36’W. Charted in 1937 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, and so named because of its position. Middle Mountain: see Mefjell Mountain. MIKHAYLOV POINT: small promontory mark- ing the S. extremity of Visokoi I., South Sand- wich Is.; in 54°44’S., 27°12’W. The descriptive name Low Point was given for this feature by DI personnel following their survey of 1930, but this name has been rejected because there is a Low Point at nearby Vindication Island. The name Mikhaylov Point was recommended by the Br-APC in 1953 and is for Pavel N. Mikhaylov, artist aboard the Vostok during the Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, 1819-21. Milhaylov made an ex- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA cellent series of sketches of the South Sandwich Islands. Not adopted: Low Point. Mikkelsen, Mount: see Caroline Mikkelsen, Mount. MIKKELSEN BAY: bay, about 15 mi. wide at its mouth and indenting 9 mi., entered between the Bertrand Ice Piedmont and Cape Berteaux along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°42’S., 67°10’W. First seen from a distance in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, but not recognized as a large bay. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49. The name was proposed by members of BGLE for Ejnar Mikkelsen, Danish Arctic explorer and Inspector for East Greenland, 1934-50. MIKKELSEN HARBOR: small bay lying imme- diately E. of Cape Skottsberg, along the S. side of Trinity I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°52’S., 60°44’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4. It was not named at the time but probably some 15 years later, perhaps after Klarius Mikkelsen, Norwegian whaling cap- tain. Not adopted: Hoseason Harbor, Mikkelson Harbor. Mikkelsen Island: see Watkins Island. MIKKELSEN ISLETS: small group of islets lying off the SE. coast of Adelaide I., about 2 mi. SE. of the Léonie Is.; in 67°38’S., 68°11’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named by him for Otto Mikkelsen, Norwegian diver who inspected the damaged hull of the exp. ship Pourquoi Pas? at Deception Island. MIKKELSEN PEAK: the highest peak, about 1,550 ft. in el., of the Scullin Monolith, on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S., 66°37’E. In January and February 1931 several Norwegian whale catchers, exploring along this coast, made sketches of the shore from their vessels and named this mountain for Capt. Klarius Mikkelsen, master of the Torlyn. Not adopted: Klarius Mikkelsen Fjell [Norwegian], Mount. Klarius Mikkelsen, Scullin Monolith. Mikkelson Harbor: see Mikkelsen Harbor. MILL, MOUNT: mountain about 2,000 ft. in el., standing about 2 mi. W. of Mt. Balch on the NE. shore of Waddington Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15/S., 64°04’W. First charted by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, for Hugh Robert Mill, British geographer, Antarctic historian, and author in 1905 of The Seige of the South Pole. Not adopted: Mill Peak. 213 MILL COVE: cove entered between Cape Ander- son and Valette I., along the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°35’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it for Hugh Robert Mill. MILLER, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Alex- andra Range about 11,600 ft. in el., standing about 11 mi. SW. of Mt. Tripp, which lies midway be- tween Shackleton Inlet and Beardmore Gl., on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°15’S., 165°40’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. MILLERAND ISLAND: island about 3 mi. in diameter, lying about 4 mi. S. of Cape Calmette, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 67°13’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, who probably named it for Alexandre Millerand, French statesman. MILLER GLACIER: glacier about 1 mi. wide, described by Griffith Taylor as a transection glacier, lying in a transverse trough and connect- ing Cotton Gl. and Debenham Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°08’S., 161°53’E. Disc. in January 1912 by the BrAE Western Geological Party under Griffith Taylor, and named by him, probably for M. J. Miller, Mayor of Lyttleton, shipwright who repaired the exp. ship Terra Nova prior to its voy- age S. from New Zealand. MILLER POINT: black rock cape about 670 ft. in el., overlooking the N. side of the terminus of Casey Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°56’S., 63°23’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in a flight on Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him for George E. Miller, of Detroit, Michigan. It has been more fully defined as a result of flights by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, and by the flights and sledge journey along this coast from East Base by members of the USAS in 1940. MILLETT GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier, about 13 mi. long and 7 mi. wide, flowing W. from the Dyer Plateau of Palmer Pen. to George VI Sound, immediately N. of Wade Pt.; in 70°37’S., 67°40’W. In its lower reaches the N. side of this glacier merges with Meiklejohn Gl. It was first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Hugh M. Millett, chief engineer of the Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37. MILL GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. wide, flow- ing in a NW. direction along the N. side of the Do- minion Range and entering the E. side of Beard- more Gl.; 85°10’S., 168°00’E. Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE under Shackleton, who named it for Hugh Robert Mill. ; GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA MILL INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes about 8 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction, and is some 20 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape Robinson and Monnier Pt., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°56’S., 64°20’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Hugh Robert Mill. Photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Not adopted: Sullivan Inlet. MILL ISLAND: ice-domed island about 1 mi. long and 15 mi. wide, lying about 22 mi. N. of Thomas I., off the W. end of Knox Coast; in about 65°37'S., 100°48’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and named for Hugh Robert Mill. MILL PEAK: prominent, detached peak about 5,750 ft. in el., lying about 32 mi. S. of Cape Simp- son and about 11 mi. S. of Pearce Peak, inland from Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°59’S., 61°12’E. Disc. in Feb. 17, 1931 by the BANZARE under Maw- son, who named it for Hugh Robert Mill. MILLS, MOUNT: peak about 7,400 ft. in el., at the N. end of the Dominion Range; in about 85°13’S., 166°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and named for Sir James Mills, chairman of the Union Steamship Co., who jointly with the Govt. of New Zealand paid the cost of towing the exp. ship Nimrod to the Antarctic in 1908. MILWARD PATCH: large patch of kelp about 2 mi. N. of the E. part of Bird I., off the W. tip of South Georgia; in about 53°58’S., 38°03’W. Mil- ward Patch was charted in 1930, along with other nearby navigational hazards, by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and named for C. A. Mil- ward, Chief Officer of the William Scoresby at the time of the survey. MIMAS PEAK: sharp conspicuous peak which appears from George VI Sound to be the most dis- tant nunatak at the head of Saturn Glacier, situ- ated about 12 mi. W. of Deimos Ridge in the SE. part of Alexander I Island; in about 71°56’S., 69°23’W. This peak was first seen and photo- graphed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and was mapped from these photographs by W.L. G. Joerg. It is probably the highest peak in the range discovered there by Ellsworth. The peak was seen from a distance in 1949 by the FIDS and roughly positioned. Named by FIDS for its association with Saturn Glacier; Mimas being one of the satellites of Saturn. MINERAL HILL: round-topped hill, about 1,400 ft. in el., with ice-free, talus-covered slopes, stand- ing about 4 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay and 3 mi. E. of the NE. end of Duse Bay, at the NE. end 214 of Palmer Pen.; in 63°29’S., 57°03’W. Probably first seen by the SwedAE under Nordenskjédld, 1901-4. First charted by the FIDS in 1946, who so named it because small quantities of reddish mineral in the rock gave the surfaces a conspicu- ous color. MINNA BLUFF: long, narrow, bold peninsula, about 25 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, projecting SE. from Mt. Discovery into the NW. portion of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°40’S., 167°05’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott in September 1902. MINNEHAHA ICEFALLS: small, heavily cre- vassed ice fall descending the steep W. slopes of Mt. England, and forming a S. tributary to New Gl. close W. of its terminus at Granite Hbr., in Vic- toria Land; in about 77°02’S., 162°26’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. MINTO, MOUNT: peak about 10,000 ft. in el., standing at the SW. side of Robertson Bay in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°35’S., 169°20’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Rt. Hon. Ear] Minto, then First Lord of the Admiralty. MIROUNGA FLATS: small, partially enclosed tidal area in the inner, northwestern corner of Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. Its E. limit is formed by the Thule Its.; its N. and W. limits by Signy I. The tidal area dries at low water. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so named by them because elephant seals (Mirounga leonina) are found there in large num- bers during the moulting period. Mission Island: see Masson Island. MISTICHELLI HILLS: group of moderately low, rocky hills, about 2 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, which . lie midway between McKaskle Hills and Peterson Ice Falls and front on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°02’S., 72°07’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for G. Mistichelli, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photo- graphic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. MISTY PASS: pass about 2,300 ft. in el., lying between the head of Broad Valley and a valley descending N. to Bransfield Str., situated about 7 mi. SE. of Cape Ducorps on Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°29’S., 57°59’W. Disc. by the FIDS in 1946, and so named because clouds pouring E. through the pass had been noted by the survey party to herald bad weather. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA MITCHELL ISLAND: rocky island about 2.5 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, lying immediately S. of Bailey and Clark Islands which, collectively, form the group of three principal islands at the NE. end of the Windmill Is. that lie close against Budd Coast; in 66°20’S., 110°30’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in February 1947 which indicate that these three islands are connected by a steep snow ramp to the continental ice overlying Budd Coast. Prominent and moraine deposits overlie and parallel the upper margin of this snow ramp about 1 mi. from its outer edge on Clark, Bailey and Mitchell Islands. Named by the US-ACAN for Capt. Ray A. Mitchell, USN, captain of the U.S.S. Cacapon, tanker of the western task group of USN Op. Hjp., Task Force 68, 1946-47. MITCHELL PEAK: solitary pyramidal peak, about 1,200 ft. in el., standing at the E. end of Guest I., which lies W. of Paul Block Bay along the coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°25’S., 147°25’W. Sighted by the ByrdAE during a flight on Dec. 5, 1929 over the NW. coast of Marie Byrd Land. Named by Byrd for Hugh C. Mitchell, mathematician of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, and member of the National Geographic Soc. committee of experts which determined that Byrd reached both the North and South Poles by airplane in 1926 and 1929, respectively. Not adopted: Hugh Mitchell Peak. Mitchells Island: see Robert Island. Mobiloil Bay: see Mobiloil Inlet. MOBILOIL INLET: ice-filled inlet, nurtured by several NE. and E. flowing glaciers, lying between Rock Pile Peaks on the W. and Hollick-Kenyon Pen. on the E., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°35’S., 64°30’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in a flight on Dec. 20, 1928, and named by him after a product of the Vacuum Oil Co. of Australia. Not adopted: Mobiloil Bay. MOE ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, sepa- rated from the SW. end of Signy I. by Fyr Chan., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°41’W. The name appears on a chart by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. Probably named for Thoralf Moe of Sandefjord, Norway, a whaling captain working in Antarctic waters in that period. MOFFETT GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide and 20 mi. long, flowing in a NE. direction into Amundsen Gl. between Mt. Ellsworth and Mt. Breyer, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°54’S., 160°30’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on the South Polar Flight in November 1929. Named by Byrd for R. Adm. William A. Moffett, USN, first 215 Chief of the Bureau of Aeronautics of the Navy Department. MOHN BASIN: a major depression in the surface of the south polar plateau, extending from the N. slopes of Mounts Fridtjof Nansen and Don Pedro Christophersen for about 120 mi. to the S., and in- cluding the region of Devils Gl., with a width of about 20 mi.; its deepest portion lies in about 86°30’S., 167°00’W. Disc. in December 1911 on the journey to the South Pole by the Nor. exp. un- der Amundsen. Named by the US-ACAN for Prof. Henrik Mohn, Norwegian meteorologist and author of the meteorological report of the Nor. exp. under Amundsen. MOHN PEAKS: two ice-covered peaks, the north- ern and southern about 4,200 and 4,000 ft. in el., respectively, standing about 9 mi. WSW. of the head of Mason Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°07’S., 61°16’W. First seen and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. Dur- ing 1947 the peaks were photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted them from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Henrik Mohn. Moldaenke Berg: see Hodges, Mount. MOLLYHAWK ISLET: small, tussock grass covered islet, lying between Seaward Rock and Crescent It., about 2 mi. SE. of Cape Buller, in the N. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°19’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. It was surveyed in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who named it Mollyhawk Island in as- sociation with Albatross I., Prion I. and other nat- ural history names in the Bay of Isles given by Murphy in 1912-13. The name Mollyhawk Islet is approved because of the small size of the feature. Not adopted: Mollyhawk Island. MOLTKE HARBOR: bay about 1 mi. wide in the NW. side of Royal Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°04’W. Charted by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, based at Royal Bay in 1882-83, and named after the exp. ship Moltke. MOLTKE NUNATAK: nunatak standing at the S. side of Wiedenmann GIl., about 25 mi. S. of Duke Ernst Bay, on Luitpold Coast; in about 78°20’S., 35°00’W. Disc. in January—February 1912 by the GerAE under Filchner, and named for Gen. Hel- muth von Moltke, Chief of the German General Staff and Sec. of State for Home Affairs. Not adopted: Moltke Nunataks. Monaco, Cape: see Albert de Monaco, Cape. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA MONFLIER, CAPE: cape at the N. side of the en- trance to Pendleton Str., forming the SW. end of Rabot I., in the Biscoe Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°55’S., 66°22’W. Charted and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Not adopted: Cape Montflier. MONIQUE, MOUNT: mountain with a ridge-like summit, about 2,000 ft. in el., standing about 14 mi. W. of Mt. Marion on the NW. coast of Charcot I.; in about 69°55’S., 75°15’W. Disc. on Jan. 11, 1910 by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Charcot, and named by him for his daughter Monique. Not adopted: Monigue Mountain, Monique Mountain, Monique Peak. Monigue Mountain: see Monique, Mount. MONK ISLETS: group of islets and rocks ex- tending in a N.-S. chain for about 0.5 mi., lying about 3 mi. S. of Cape Meier off the S. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°54’W. First charted and named on a map by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted: Munken [Norwegian]. MONNIER POINT: low, mainly ice-covered point forming the SW. side of the entrance to Mill Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°06’S., 64°45’W. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, and charted from the ground by the FIDS. Named by the FIDS for Franz R. v. Le Monnier, Austrian polar bibliog- rapher. MONOLITH, THE: pinnacle rock, broad at the base and tapering to a point, about 255 ft. in el., lying about 1.5 mi. SE. of Cape McNab, Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°50’S., 163°11’E. So named because of its shape. Monroe Island: see Snow Island. MONROE ISLAND: largest of the Larsen Islands, lying off the W. end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 46°03’W. The Larsen Is- lands were disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821, and appar- ently first named on a chart by the Norwegian whaler Capt. Petter Sgrile in 1912-13. The Larsen Islands were recharted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named the largest island in the group Larsen Island. Because of confusion of these names, the island was renamed by the Br- APC for the sloop James Monroe, which was com- manded by Captain Palmer at the time of its dis- covery and anchored in this vicinity in December 1821. Not adopted: Larsen Island. 216 MONSIMET COVE: cove about 0.5 mi. W. of Hervé Cove, lying along the S. side of Ezcurra Inlet, in Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°34’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for a member of the expedition. Montague Island: see Montagu Island. MONTAGU ISLAND: island about 9 mi. long and averaging 5 mi. wide, lying midway between Saunders and Bristol Islands, in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 58°25’S., 26°20’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named it for John Mon- tagu, the fourth Earl of Sandwich and First Lord of the Admiralty. Not adopted: Montague Island. MONTEAGLE, MOUNT: high, sharp peak stand- ing NW. of Cape Sibbald and W. of Lady Newnes Ice Shelf, in Victoria Land; in 73°50’S., 166°00’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Baron Monteagle, Chancellor of the Exchequer, 1835-39. Montflier, Cape: see Monflier, Cape. MONTRAVEL ROCK: rock about 8 mi. NE. of Cape Legoupil and about 5 mi. off the NW. coast: of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°13’S., 57°42’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, and named by him for Ens. Louis Tardy de Montravel of the exp. ship Zélée. Monts Solway: see Solvay Mountains. Montura, Ile: see Saddle Island. MONUMENT, THE: isolated rock pillar on the NW. side of Red I., about 1,600 ft. in el., which is level with the main summit of the island and has the appearance of a monument. It lies in Prince Gustav Chan. about 3 mi. off the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 57°53’W. The island was disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4. The Monument was charted and named by the FIDS in 1945. MOODY POINT: point which forms the E. end of Joinville I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°18’S., 54°59’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, and named by him for Lieutenant Gover- nor Moody of the Falkland Islands. Not adopted: Cape Moody, Point Moody. MOON BAY: bay about 8 mi. wide which recedes 4 mi. between High Pt. and Pin Pt., on the E. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°35’S., 60°00’W. This bay was known to sealers in the area as early as 1822. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and prob- ably named by them for nearby Half Moon Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA MOONEY, MOUNT: ridge-shaped mountain on the E. side of Robert Scott Gl., about 4 mi. S. of Mt. Bowlin, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°31/S., 146°55’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for James E. Mooney, who as- sisted this and other Byrd expeditions. Not adopted: Mount English. MOORE, CAPE: dark headland forming the W. side of the entrance to Smith Inlet, on the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 70°50’S., 167°15’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Thomas E. L. Moore, mate on the exp. ship Terror. Moore Bay: see Moore Embayment. MOORE EMBAYMENT: an embayment in the coast S. of Minna Bluff, along the NW. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°S., 163°E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. Adm. Sir Arthur Moore, Naval Commander-in-Chief at Cape Town, placed the resources of the naval dockyard at Cape Town at the disposal of the Discovery for much- needed repairs before the ship proceeded to New Zealand. Not adopted: Moore Bay. MOORE POINT: rocky point surmounted by a small peak, marking the N. side of the mouth of Meiklejohn Gl. on Palmer Pen. and fronting on George VI Sound; in 70°30’S., 67°53’W. First sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for James I. Moore, second engineer of the Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37. MOORING POINT: point on the S. side of Borge Bay, about 0.3 mi. W. of Berntsen Pt., on Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey of Borge Bay by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. Moraenefjord; Mordnen Fjord: see Moraine Fjord. MORAINE COVE: small cove at the N. end of Mikkelsen Bay along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°35’S., 67°07’W. A moraine descends to the cove from the SW. end of Pavie Ridge. The name derives from the provisional name ‘“‘Moraine Point,” used by Prof. Robert L. Nichols of the RARE, who examined the geology of this area in 1947. The name Moraine Cove retains the spirit of the naming by Nichols, and is considered more essential for reference purposes than a name for the moraine itself. MORAINE FJORD: inlet about 3 mi. long with a reef (a terminal moraine) extending across its entrance, forming the W. head of Cumberland East 424589 O-57-15 217 Bay, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°29’W. Charted by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, who so named it because of the large glacial moraine at its entrance. Not adopted: Moreenefjord [Nor- wegian], Moranen Fjord [German], Moranen Fjord. MORAINE VALLEY: a north-south trending valley filled with morainic debris, about 0.75 mi. long, which drains into Elephant Flats on the E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’°W. Insummer a stream, fed by the ice slopes at its S. end, runs in this valley. Named by the FIDS following their survey of 1947. Mordrins Island: see Elephant Island. MORENCY ISLET: islet about 1 mi. in diameter, lying close W. of Steele I. and about 12 mi. SSE. of Cape Sharbonneau, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°02’S., 61°10’W. Disc. by members of the East Base of the USAS who explored this coast by land and from the air in 1940. Named for Anthony J. L. Morency, tractor driver for the East Base. Not adopted: Morency Island. MORENO, POINT: point at the E. side of the en- trance to the small cove at the head of Scotia Bay, on the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°42’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and named for Francisco P. Moreno, noted Argentine scientist and director of the Museo de la Plata. MORENO ISLAND: narrow island about 1 mi. long, lying about 1.5 mi. NW. of Cape Sterneck, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°03’S., 61°15’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him for Francisco P. Moreno. MORETON POINT: point about 1 mi. N. of Re- turn Pt., at the W. end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°02’W. The point was roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer in 1821. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the is- lands in 1933. MORNING, MOUNT: dome-shaped mountain, about 5,800 ft. in el., with three slightly elevated sharp peaks, lying on the E. side of Koettlitz GL., along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°30’S., 163°35’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for the Morning, relief ship to the expedition. Morrel Island; Morrell Island: see Thule Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Morrell Coast: (in about 69°20’S., 62°00’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED. The ap- plication of coast names to parts of islands is now considered inappropriate. MORRIS, CAPE: flat-topped promontory about 330 ft. in el., forming the NW. end of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°22’S., 59°47°W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the cape in 1935. MORRIS GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N. di- rection to the head of Sea Leopard Fjord, in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°05’S., 37°16’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who named it for Edward Lyman Morris, a botanist who was then head of the Dept. of Natural Science at the Brooklyn Museum. MORRISON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,900 ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. N. of Mackay Gl. on the W. side of Cleveland Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 76°54’S., 161°38’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for J. D. Morrison of the Morning, relief ship to the expedition. MORRISON GLACIER: glacier about 7 mi. long, flowing in a S. direction along the E. side of Bastion Peak to the head of Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°10’S., 63°32’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it for Rt. Hon. Her- bert Morrison, M.P., British Sec. of State for Home Affairs and Home Security and member of the War Cabinet. Photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. MORSE POINT: point marking the E. side of the entrance to Antarctic Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°05’S., 36°54’W. The point appears roughly charted on maps dating back to about 1900. It was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in the period 1925-31, and resurveyed by the SGS, 1951-52. Named by the Br—APC after the British sealing vessel Morse, which was working in South Georgia in 1799-1800, probably the first British sealer to do so. She was based at Antarctic Bay when encountered by Edmund Fanning, who pub- lished an account of the meeting. Morton Strait: see Hell Gates. MORTON STRAIT: strait between Snow I. on the SW., and Rugged and Livingston Islands on the NE., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°39’S., 61°20’W. The strait was named on a chart by James Weddell, published in 1825, and is now established interna- tional usage. Not adopted: Hell Gates, Mortons Strait. 218 MOSBY GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing in a SE. direction to the NW. corner of New Bedford Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°09’S., 61°36’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in con- junction with the FIDS approximately charted its terminus from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Hakon Mosby, Norwegian meteorologist and oceanographer. ; MOSE, CAPE: low, ice-covered cape which marks the E. side of the entrance to Porpoise Bay and forms the division between Banzare and Claire Coasts, Wilkes Land; in about 66°00’S., 130°05’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for William H. Mose, pursers steward on the brig Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. MOSE GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi. wide and 5 mi. long, flowing NW. from the conti- nental ice to the E. side of the entrance to Porpoise Bay, about 3 mi. SSW. of Cape Mose, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°05’S., 130°05’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for William H. Mose of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. MOSSMAN INLET: narrow ice-filled inlet which recedes about 10 mi. between Cape Kidson and the SW. end of Kemp Pen., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°17’S., 60°32’W. This inlet was first seen and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Robert C. Moss- man, 1870-1940, British meteorologist and clima- tologist and member of the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4. MOSSMAN PENINSULA: narrow peninsula about 3 mi. long, extending S. from the W. part of Laurie I. and separating Scotia and Wilton Bays, in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°43’W. The peninsula was disc. in 1821 by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, and roughly charted on Powell’s map of 1822. Recharted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and named by him for Robert C. Mossman. Mossyface, Cape: see Canwe, Cape. Motesudden: see Well-met, Cape. MOUBRAY BAY: bay lying between Cape Roget on the N. and Cape Christie on the S., along the N. part of E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 72°11’S., GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 170°30’H. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for George H. Moubray, the clerk-in-charge of the exp. ship Terror. MOULTON, MOUNT: linear mountain in the cen- tral portion of the Hal Flood Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in aout 76°04’S., 134°30’W. Disc. by the USAS on aerial flights in 1940 and named for Richard S. Moulton, chief dog driver of the USAS West Base, and member of the Pacific Coast Survey Party which sledged to the W. end of the Hal Flood Range in December 1940. Mount Pisgah Island: see Smith Island. MOUREAUX POINT: point which forms the N. tip of the small peninsula marking the N. extremity of Liége I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 63°58’S., 61°46’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, who named it for T. Moureaux, director of the Parc Saint-Maur Observatory, near Paris. MOUSSE, CAPE: small rocky cape, fringed by many small islets and rocks, and backed by moraine close to the S., protruding through the icecap about 2.2 mi. NE. of Cape Margerie, on Adélie Coast; in 66°48’S., 141°28’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because several patches of lichens were found on the ex- posed rocky surfaces. Not adopted: Cap des Mousses [French]. Mousses, Cap des: see Mousse, Cape. MOYES, CAPE: ice-covered point with prominent rock exposures on its seaward flank, lying midway between Cape Dovers and Roscoe Gl. on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°39’S., 96°24’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, and named by him for Morton H. Moyes, meteorologist with the AAE Western Base party. MOYES ISLETS: small group of islets about 2.5 mi. SE. of Cape-Pigeon Rocks, in the W. part of Watt Bay, off George V Coast; in about 67°02’S., 143°51’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Morton H. Moyes. MOYES PEAK: small rock peak about 2,700 ft. in el., projecting slightly above the icecap close N. of Pearce Peak, some 18 mi. S’ of Cape Simpson, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°45’S., 61°14’E. Disc. in February 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, and named by him for Cdr. Morton H. Moyes, RAN, in charge of echo sounding and car- tographer of the exp. The approximate position of this peak was verified in aerial photographs taken by the USN Op. Hjp. on Feb. 26, 1947. 219 Muhlig-Hofman Mountains: mann Mountains. see Muhlig-Hof- MUHLIG-HOFMANN MOUNTAINS: major group of associated mountain features lying in the central part of the New Schwabenland piedmont in front of the edge of the polar plateau; centering in about 72°00’S., 5°00’E. The group has a longitudinal ex- tent of approximately 50 to 90 mi. and includes such major features as the Luz, Gablenz, Mayr, and Bundermann Ranges. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for the di- vision director of the German Air Ministry. Not adopted: Muhlig-Hofman Mountains, Muhlig-Hof- mann Mountains. MULOCK INLET: re-entrant about 10 mi. wide, in the W. part of Moore Embayment between Cape Teall and Cape Lankester, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°08’S., 160°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Lt. George F. A. Mulock, RN, surveyor with the ex- pedition. Munken: see Monk Islets. MURCHISON, MOUNT: mountain about 1,860 ft. in el., lying on the W. side of Mertz Gl. about 8 mi. SW. of Buchanan Bay, on George V Coast; in about 67°18’S., 144°15’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Roderick Mur- chison of Melbourne, a patron of the expedition. MURCHISON, MOUNT: high peak lying W. of the N. end of Lady Newnes Ice Shelf, in Victoria Land; in about 73°28’S., 166°20’E. Disc. in Janu- ary 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Sir Roderick Impey Murchison, then general secretary of the British Association. Murdoch Nunatak: see Burn Murdoch Nunatak. MURPHY, MOUNT: massive, snow-covered mountain with steep, rocky slopes, rising to about 7,300 ft. in el. at the head of Amundsen Sea, on the Walgreen Coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 75°00’S., 108°15’W. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for Robert Cushman Murphy of the American Museum of Natural His- tory, noted authority on Antarctic and Sub-Antarc- tic bird life. While serving on the whaler Daisy during the 1912-13 summer, he investigated wild life and charted the Bay of Isles region of South Georgia. MURPHY BAY: bay aboyt 7 mi. wide lying im- mediately NW. of Cape Bage, along George V Coast; in about 67°42’S., 146°20’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Herbert D Murphy, a member of the expedition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA MURRAY, CAPE: the W. extremity of a group of islands which lie about 0.5 mi. W. of the penin- sula separating Hughes Bay and Charlotte Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°18’S., 61°41’W. First charted by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, who thought it to be part of Palmer Pen. Named by De Gerlache for Sir John Murray, Brit- ish marine zoologist and oceanographer, and an ardent advocate of Antarctic research. MURRAY, CAPE: low bluff lying approximately midway between Barne and Mulock Inlets, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°35’S., 159°55’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. George R. M. Murray was temporary director of the scientific staff and accompanied the exp. ship Dis- covery as far as Cape Town. MURRAY, MOUNT: sharp granite peak showing evidence of glaciation, standing about 5 mi. SE. of Mt. Smith on the N. side of Mawson Gl., in the Prince Albert Mtns. in Victoria Land; in about 76°08’S., 162°00’E. First charted by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for James Murray, biologist with the expedition. MURRAY GLACIER: glacier about 2.5 mi. wide, with a face on Colbeck Bay but flowing mainly W. of Duke of York I. to merge with Dugdale Gl. at the S. end of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°36’S., 170°00’E. First charted by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, 1898-1900, who named it for Sir John Murray. Not adopted: Sir John Murray Glacier. Murray Gletscher: see Purvis Glacier. MURRAY ISLETS: group of islets about 1.2 mi. SSE. of Cape Whitson, off the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 44°31’W. Disc. in 1823 by Matthew Brisbane, who explored the S. coast of Laurie I. under the direction of James Weddell. Probably named for James Murray of London, maker of the chronometer used on Wed- dell’s voyage. Not adopted: Murrys Isles. Murray Monolith: see Torlyn Mountain. MURRAY MONOLITH: the detached front, about 1,250 ft. in el., of Torlyn Mtn., lying about 2.5 mi. E. of Scullin Monolith on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S., 66°55’E. Early in January 1930 the BANZARE under Mawson sighted land in this area, and an airplane flight was made from the exp. ship Discovery for observation. On Feb. 13, 1931 Mawson landed on nearby Scullin Monolith. Named for Sir Hubert Murray, Pres. of the Aus- tralian and New Zealand Assn. for the Advance- ment of Science, 1930-32. Not adopted: Mount Torlyn. 220 Murry Peak: see Nemesis, Mount. Murrys Isles: see Murray Islets. MUSHROOM ISLAND: ice-covered islet lying about 10 mi. WSW. of Cape Berteaux, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°53’S., 67°53’W. First charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and so named because of its resemblance to a mushroom cap. MUSSELMAN, CAPE: black rock promontory forming the S. side of the entrance to Palmer Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°17’S., 61°00’ W. Disc. by the USAS who explored this coast by land and from the air from East Base in 1940. Named for Lytton C. Musselman, member of the East Base party which sledged across Dyer Plateau to the Eternity Mountains. MUTTON COVE: anchorage about 0.5 mi. E. of Beer I., situated near the center of a small group of islets about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°43’W. Charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and at the suggestion of Lt. R. E. D. Ryder, RN, captain of the exp. ship Penola, named Mutton Cove, a name which recalled his early days in a training ship at Devonport. Mutton Cove Island: see Beer Island. Mutton Island: see Grass Island. Nabbodden: see Tilley Nunatak. NACHTIGAL PEAK: rocky peak on a spur pro- jecting northwards from the SE. extremity of the Allardyce Range, South Georgia. It rises to 3,800 ft. in el. and stands at the W. side of the head of Cook Gl., about 4.5 mi. E. of Nordenskjéld Peak; in’ 54°29/S., 36°14°W. The) name “Kleineric” (meaning Little Peak) was given to this feature by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader. At the same time the name “Dr. Nachtigal Gletscher” or “Nachtigal-Gletscher” was given to the southern arm of Cook Gl., for Dr. Gustav Nachtigal (1834— 85), German physician and explorer of Africa. The SGS, 1951-52, identified both of these features, but reported that a separate name is not needed for the southern arm of Cook Gl. Since the name “Kleine Pic” (Little Peak) is not particularly descriptive or distinctive for the peak now described, the name has been rejected by the Br—APC. The Br—APC recommended in 1954 that, for the sake of historical continuity, the name Nachtigal Peak be applied to this feature. Not adopted: Kleine Pic. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA NAESS GLACIER: small glacier, which is separated from Chapman Gl. to the N. by a rocky ridge, flowing from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound; in 70°22’S., 67°55’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Erling D. Naess, Mgr. of the Vest- fold Whaling Co., who was of great assistance to the BGLE, 1934-37. NAMELESS GLACIER: glacier immediately N. of Newnes Gl., descending steeply from the Cape Adare peninsula into the E. part of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°36’S., 170°17’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. This was the only one of the Robertson Bay glaciers left unnamed by C. E. Borchgrevink, who headed the BrAE, 1898-1900. NAMELESS POINT: point at the NW. side of the entrance to Right Whale Bay, near the W. end of the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 37°41’W. The point was charted and probably named by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. Nan Anderson, Cape: see Anderson, Cape. NANSEN, MOUNT: tabular mountain, about 7,800 ft. in el., with precipitous walls, lying N. of Reeves Gl. in Victoria Land; in about 74°35’S., 162°45’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Named for Dr. Fridtjof Nansen, noted Norwegian Arctic explorer, from whom Scott obtained much practical information for his expe- dition. Nansen Bank: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks. Nansen Harbour: see Stromness Harbor. NANSEN ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 5 mi. wide, lying about 12 mi. SW. of Rabot I. in the Biscoe Is.; in about 66°09’S., 66°54’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Fridtjof Nansen. Nansen Rocks: see Fridtjof Nansen Banks. NANSEN SHEET: extensive sheet of ice about 30 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and 10 mi. wide, fed by the Larsen, Reeves, Priestley, and Campbell Glaciers and abutting against the N. side of Dry- galski Ice Tongue along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°30’S., 163°10’E. This feature was explored in December 1908 by the South Magnetic Polar Party of the BrAE under Shackleton, and further explored in January and February 1912 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Frank Debenham, geologist with Scott’s exp., 221 applied the name Nansen Sheet to this feature in the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Soc., Vol. 75, April 1920. NANTUCKET INLET: inlet about 6 mi. wide which recedes about 13 mi. in a NW. direction between the Smith and Bowman Peninsulas, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen., in 74°35’S., 61°45’W. Disc. by members of the USAS in a flight from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940, and named for Nan- tucket Island, Mass., home of early New England whalers of the first half of the 19th century. Not adopted: Fran Inlet, Inner-Taylor Inlet. NAPIER BIRKS, MOUNT: conspicuous, pyra- mid-shaped mountain about 3,800 ft. in el., at the N. side of the mouth of Crane Glacier, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°18’S., 62°11’W. In 1928 Sir Hubert Wilkins gave the name Mount Napier Birks, after Napier Birks of Adelaide, Australia, to two conspicuous, black peaks which he observed and photographed from the air as lying close N. of his Crane Channel. This coast was charted by the FIDS in 1947, but it has not been possible to identify Wilkins’ Mount Napier Birks. Since Crane Channel has now been defi- nitely identified as Crane Glacier, it is recom- mended that the name Mount Napier Birks be given to this conspicuous mountain lying close N. of the mouth of the glacier. NAPIER MOUNTAINS: group of more-or-less separated peaks, the highest about 6,000 ft. in el., extending about 40 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction and centering about 45 mi. S. of Cape Batterbee, in Enderby Land; in about 66°35’S., 53°30’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson. The Hon. John Mellis Napier was a judge of the Supreme Court of South Australia, 1924-42. Not adopted: Napier Range. Napier Range: see Napier Mountains. NARES, MOUNT: rounded mountain about 7 mi. SW. of Mt. Albert Markham, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°32’S., 157°25’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Sir George S. Nares, captain of the Challenger, 1872-74, during part of its cruise, leader of the Arctic exp., 1875-76, and member of the Ship Committee for Scott’s expedition. Narrow Isle: see Gibbs Island. NARROWS, THE: narrow channel between Pourquoi Pas I. and Blaiklock I., connecting Bigourdan and Bourgeois Fjords, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 67°12’W. Disc. and given this descriptive name by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA NASH, MOUNT: mountain about 4,200 ft. in el., standing about 13 mi. WNW. of the head of Keller Inlet and 12 mi. NNE. of Mt. Owen, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°14’S., 62°20’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for H. H. Nash, of Pittsburgh, Pa., a contributor to the expedition. Ndsudden: see Naze, The. NATTRISS HEAD: small but prominent rock headland marking the S. side of the entrance to Drygalski Fjord on the SE. coast of South Georgia; in 54°50’S., 35°55’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911- 12, under Filchner. It was named Nattriss Point after E. A. Nattriss, of the Crown Agents for the Colonies, following survey by DI personnel in 1927. The name Nattriss Head is approved for this fea- ture because the term head is a more suitable descriptive term than point, and because accept- ance of this form will avoid confusion with Nattriss Point (also named for E. A. Nattriss) on Saunders I. in the South Sandwich Islands. Not adopted: Nattriss Point (q.v.). NATTRISS POINT: point which marks the E. tip of Saunders I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°48’S., 26°22’W. Charted in 1930 by DI person- nel and named by them for E. A. Nattriss. Nattriss Point: see Nattriss Head. NAUTILUS HEAD: prominent headland, about 3,200 ft. in el., near the NE. extremity of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°39’S., 67°07’ W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who named it after the submarine Nautilus in Jules Verne’s Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea. Other features on Pourquoi Pas I. are named for characters in this book. Navy, Mount: see Butler, Mount. Navy Range: see Colbert Range. NAZE, THE: peninsula on the N. coast of James Ross I. which marks the S. side of the E. entrance to Sidney Herbert Sound and extends about 5 mi. NE. toward the south-central shore of Vega I., situated S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°57’S., 57°32’W. Disc. and named ‘“Nasudden” by the SwedAE ,1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The recommended form is the English version used by Nordenskjold. Not adopted: Nasudden [Swedish]. NECK OR NOTHING PASSAGE: narrow pas- sage leading from Desolation Hbr. between the S. end of Desolation I. and a small group of islets about 0.2 mi. southward, in the South Shetland 222 Is.; in 62°28’S., 60°23’W. The name was applied prior to 1930, probably by whalers who frequented Desolation Hbr. and who at times ran their vessels to sea via this passage to escape severe easterly gales. Not adopted: Neck-or-Nothing Passage. Needle, The: see Spire, The. NEEDLE PEAK: sharply pointed black peak about 1,200 ft. in el., standing about 5 mi. ENE. of Barnard Pt. on the S. coast of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°43’S., 60°12’W. The peak was named on a chart based upon a survey of DI personnel in 1935. Neil Peak: see Neill Peak. NEILL PEAK: mountain about 1,575 ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. SW. of Scullin Monolith, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°50’S., 66°36’E. Disc. on Feb. 13, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who presumably applied the name. Not adopted: Heil Peak, Neil Peak. Neilsen Glacier: see Nielsen Glacier. NEKO HARBOR: small bay in the inner NE. corner of Andvord Bay, along the W. coast of Pal- mer Pen.; in about 64°49’S., 62°37’W. First seen and roughly charted by the BelgAE under De Ger- lache, 1897-99. Named after Messrs. Chr. Salve- sen’s floating factory Neko, which operated in the South Shetland Is. and Palmer Pen. area for many seasons between 1911-12 and 1923-24, and often used this bay. The name was published by the Scottish geologist David Ferguson in 1921, follow- ing his visit to this area in 1913. NELSON CHANNEL: channel between Candle- mas and Vindication Islands, in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 57°03’S., 26°43’W. Probably first sighted by Capt. James Cook, discoverer of these islands in 1775. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for Lt. A. L. Nelson, RNR, who was chief officer and navigator of the ship. Not adopted: Nelson Strait. NELSON CLIFFS: cliffs about 1,770 ft. in el., standing on the N. shore of Victoria Land, about 7.5 mi. NW. of Atkinson Cliffs; in about 71°14’S., 168°45’E. First charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, and named for Edward W. Nelson, biologist of the expedition. Not adopted: Nelson Cliff. NELSON ISLAND: island about 10 mi. long and about 7 mi. wide, lying W. of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°17’S., 59°02’W. The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Leipzig Island, Nelson’s Island, Nelson’s Isles, O’Cain Island, Strachans Island. Nelson Strait: see Nelson Channel. NELSON STRAIT: strait lying between Nelson and Robert Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°22’S., 59°15’W. Probably first charted in 1821 by Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, American sealer, who named it Harmony Strait. Capt. George Powell named it King George’s Strait in 1822, while James Weddell, Master, RN, named it Parrys Straits on his chart of 1825. It has since become known as Nelson Strait, probably taking its name from Nelson Island, which it adjoins on the east. Not adopted: Harmony Strait, King George’s Strait, Parrys Straits. NEMESIS, MOUNT: mountain, about 2,600 ft. in el., which lies 2 mi. NE. of the seaward extrem- ity of Roman Four Promontory and close N. of Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 66°54’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The name Mount Nemesis is believed to have been first given by members of the USAS, 1939-41. Not adopted: Murry Peak, Nemesis Peak, Nemisis Mountain. Nemisis Mountain: see Nemesis, Mount. NEMO COVE: small cove 6 mi. SW. of Nautilus Head on the SE. side of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°43’S., 67°17’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named after Captain Nemo, designer and captain of the Nauti- lus in Jules Verne’s Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea. NEMO PEAK: conspicuous peak about 2,800 ft. in el., standing about 1 mi. NE. of Nipple Peak in the N. part of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch., in 64°46’S., 63°16’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897- 99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel in the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. NENY BAY: small indentation in the W. coast of Palmer Pen. which is bounded on the W. by Neny Island, and on the NW. and SE. respectively by Stonington I. and Roman Four Promontory; in 68°12’S., 66°58’W. The bay was first charted by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-47. The name, derived from Neny Island, was suggested by mem- bers of East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, who referred to it as Neny Island Bay. Not adopted: Neny Island Bay. Neny Fjord: see Little Thumb. 223 NENY FJORD: bay about 10 mi. long in an E.-W. direction and 5 mi. wide, between Red Rock Ridge and Roman Four Promontory along the W. coast of Palmer Pen., in 68°16/S., 66°50’W. This coast was first explored in 1909 by Dr. Jean B. Charcot who, it appears, gave this name to the channel between Horseshoe I. and Camp Pt., in 67°55’S., 67°15’'W. The BGLE made a detailed survey of this area in 1936-37, and in correlating their work with that of Charcot applied the name Neny Fjord to the bay between Red Rock Ridge and Roman Four Promontory, which is probably about 20 mi. S. of the position originally implied by Charcot. The name has become established in this latter position through international accept- ance and use. Neny Glacier: see Neny Trough. Neny Glacier Island: see Pyrox Islet. NENY ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long and about 2,200 ft. in el., lying about 1 mi. WNW. of Roman Four Promontory and directly N. of the mouth of Neny Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°03’W. Disc. by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, and named after nearby Neny Fjord. Not adopted: Neny Islands. Neny Island Bay: see Neny Bay. NENY MATTERHORN: sharp, pyramid-shaped peak, more than 4,000 ft. in el., standing near the NW. end of the Blackwall Mtns. on the S. side of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°20’S., 66°51’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936-37 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. The name was apparently first used by members of the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, and the FIDS, and derives from its location near Neny Fjord, and its resemblance to the Swiss Matter- horn. NENY TROUGH: glacier-filled valley which extends from the head of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen., eastward for about 4 mi., and then SE. for at least 25 mi.; centering near 68°22’S., 66°15’W. It is probably more than 3,000 ft. in el. at its highest point about 9 mi. S. of Beehive Hill, from which divide one glacier flows NW. to Neny Fjord; the other flows SE. for an undetermined distance. The NW. mouth of the feature was first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, but its great extent was not then known. The trough itself was first seen from the air in May 1940, and was sledged through in January 1941 by members of the USAS. The trough was named by USAS for its association with Neny Fjord, its NW. terminus. Not adopted: Neny Glacier, Neny Valley. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Neny Valley: see Neny Trough. NEPTUNE GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 11 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, flowing E. into George VI Sound to the S. of Triton Pt.; in 71°44’S., 68°177W. The coast in this vicinity was first explored from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Noy. 23, 1935. The glacier was roughly sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The name, after the planet Neptune, was given by FIDS following their survey in 1949. NEPTUNES BELLOWS: channel on the SE. side of Deception I. forming the entrance to Port Foster, in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°34’W. The name was appended by early American sealers because of the strong gusts experienced in this narrow channel. Not adopted: Passe du Chal- lenger [French]. NEPTUNES WINDOW: narrow gap between two rock pillars, situated close E. of Whalers Bay on the SE. side of Deception I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°33’W. So named by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, following his survey of Deception I., in 1948-49, because weather and ice conditions in the approach to Neptunes Bellows could conveniently be observed from this gap. NESS, MOUNT: northernmost of the Batterbee Mtns., about 6,200 ft. in el., standing about 9 mi. NNE. of the summit of Mt. Bagshawe and 14 mi. inland from George VI Sound on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°20’S., 66°52’W. This moun- tain was first seen and photographed from the air on Noy. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Mrs. Patrick Ness, who con- tributed towards the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37. Neufortuna Bay: see Ocean Harbor. NEUMAYER, MOUNT: most southern of the peaks lying between David and Larsen Glaciers, in Victoria Land; in about 75°16’S., 162°13’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for Dr. Georg von Neumayer, German geophysicist, who was active in organizing South Polar exploration. NEUMAYER CHANNEL: channel about 16 mi. long, in a NESW. direction, and about 1.5 mi. wide, separating Anvers I. from Wiencke I. and Doumer I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°30’W. The SW. entrance to this channel was seen by Dallmann, leader of the Ger. exp., 1873-74, who named it Roosen Channel. The BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, sailed through the 224 channel and named it for George von Neumayer. The second name has been accepted by the US-ACAN because of more general usage. Not adopted: Roosen Channel. NEUMAYER ESCARPMENT: northeast-facing escarpment, rising to about 11,800 ft. in el., on the E. side of a projection of the polar plateau in New Schwabenland. The N. side of this projection overlooks Penck Trough. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Georg von Neumayer. NEUMAYER GLACIER: large glacier flowing to the W. side of Cumberland West Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°41’W. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden- skjold, and named for Georg von Neumayer. Neu-Schwabenland: see New Schwabenland. NEWALL, MOUNT: peak over 6,000 ft. in el., rising about 10 mi. NNW. of Taylor Glacier Dry Valley, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°32’S., 162°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for one of the men who helped raise funds to send a relief ship for the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Newell. NEWARK BAY: bay about 2 mi. long, entered at the SE. end of Fanning Ridge, along the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°21’S., 36°56’W. The presence of this bay seems to have been first noted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who roughly charted a small inlet in this approximate position. The name appears to have been given in about 1927, and is now well established in international usage. NEW BEDFORD INLET: ice-filled inlet about 20 mi. long, in an E.-W. direction, and averaging 15 mi. wide, lying between Cape Kidson and Cape Brooks along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in . 73°22’S., 61°15’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS, and named after New Bedford, Mass., the center of the New England whaling industry in the mid- dle of the 19th century. Not adopted: Douglas Inlet. Newell, Mount: see Newall, Mount. NEWELL POINT: point marking the easternmost of the N. extremities of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S., 59°34’°W. The point was charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. New Fortuna Bay; New Fortune Bay: see Ocean Harbor. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA NEW GLACIER: small glacier flowing ENE. from the ice-covered plateau at the S. side of Mackay Gl., terminating at the SW side of Granite Hbr. immediately N. of Mt. England, in Victoria Land; in about 77°01’S., 162°28’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. NEW HARBOR: bay about 10 mi. wide and indenting the coast for a distance of about 8 mi., lying between Cape Bernacchi and Butter Pt. along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°35’S., 164°50’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and so named because this new harbor was found while the Discovery was seeking the farthest possible southern anchorage along the coast of Victoria Land. New Harbor Glacier: see Ferrar Glacier. New Harbour Dry Valley: see Taylor Glacier Dry Valley. New Harbour Heights: see Barnes, Mount. Newnes, Cape: see Nunez, Cape. Newnes Glacier: see Frank Newnes Glacier. NEWNES GLACIER: valley glacier flowing into the S. part of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°39’S., 170°16’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Sir George Newnes, sponsor of the expedition. Not adopted: Sir George Newnes Gla- cier. NEW PLYMOUTH: small embayment bordered with an extensive line of beaches, lying S. of Start Pt. at the W. end of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°35’S., 61°08’W. The name dates back to at least 1822 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: President’s Harbor, Rugged Harbor. NEW ROCK: rock about 300 ft. in el. lying about 0.75 mi. off the SW. coast of Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°01’S., 60°44’W. The name of the rock derives from its relatively recent charting in about 1929. Not adopted: Roca Nueva [Spanish], Rocher Nouveau [French]. NEW SCHWABENLAND: that portion of Queen Maud Land that lies between 12°00’W. and 16°00’E., and consists of the upland area marking the edge of the continental plateau back of Prin- cess Astrid Coast and Princess Martha Coast. This area was surveyed from the air and mapped photo- grammetricaily by the GerAE, 1938-39, under Ritscher. The name has a dual significance honoring both the exp. ship, the Schwabenland, 225 and the province of that name in Germany. Not adopted: Neu-Schwabenland [German]. New South Shetland: see South Shetland Islands. NEW ZEALAND, MOUNT: prominent peak about 30 mi. WNW. of Mt. Melbourne, standing to the W. of Mt. Queensland, in Victoria Land; in about 74°05’S., 163°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named this peak because of the generous assistance given the exp. by both govt. and people of New Zealand. NEYT, CAPE: promontory on the NE. shore of Liége I., about 2 mi. S. of Moureaux Pt., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°00’S., 61°45’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for General Neyt, a supporter of the expe- dition. NIBLETS, THE: group of rocks between Harp Islet and Beer I., lying about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°44’W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934— 37, under Rymill. Nicholas, Cape: see Nicholas, Mount. Nicholas, Cape; Nicolas, Cape: see Nicolas Rocks. NICHOLAS, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,800 ft. in el., standing about 5.5 mi. SSW. of Cape Brown and forming the N. limit of the Douglas Range on the E. side of Alexander I Island; in 69°22’S., 69°50’W. This feature was first seen and roughly charted from a distance in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, who named it “Ile Nicolas II’ after Nicholas II, then reigning tsar of Russia. The FrAE maps showed it as an island, or possible headland, separated by a channel from Alexander I Island. The coast in this vicinity was photo- graphed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE, but Charcot’s name, which was altered to “Cape Nicholas,’ was applied in error to the seaward bulge of Mt. Calais about 13 mi. to the NNW. Further surveys in 1948 by the FIDS have defi- nitely identified the feature originally named “Ile Nicolas II” by Charcot as the mountain described. Not adopted: Cape Nicholas, Ile Nicolas II [French]. NICHOLL HEAD: bold W. extremity of the ridge, about 3,000 ft. in el., separating Dogs Leg Fjord and Square Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°47’S., 67°06’°W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named for Timothy M. Nicholl, FIDS base leader at the Argentine Is. in 1948 and 1949. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Nicolas II, Ile: see Nicholas, Mount. NICOLAS ROCKS: group of rocks marking the NW. extremity of the Larsen Is., about 4 mi. NW. © of Return Pt., Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°35’S., 46°06’W. Disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. Named Cape Nicolas by Powell after the feast day of Saint Nicholas, December 6, the ap- proximate day of discovery. Powell’s spelling “Nicolas” has been retained because of long usage, but the term rocks is considered more descriptive of the feature. Not adopted: Cape Nicholas, Cape Nicolas. NIELSEN BAY: a recession about 5 mi. wide in the coast line of Mac-Robertson Coast, lying be- tween Cape Daly and Strahan Gl.; in about 67°33’/S., 64°19’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson in February 1931. Not adopted: Nielson Bay. NIELSON GLACIER: glacier flowing into the SE. part of Relay Bay, in the Robertson Bay area of northern Victoria Land; in about 71°31’S., 169°40’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Prof. Yngvar Nielsen, of Christiania University. Not adopted: Neilsen Glacier, Ungvar Neilsen Glacier, Ynegvar Nielsen Glacier, Yugvar Nielson Glacier. Nielson Bay: see Nielsen Bay. NIGG ROCK: rock about 500 ft. in el., lying 0.5 mi. NW. of Route Pt., off the NW. tip of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is., in 60°43’S., 44°51’W. The rock was probably first sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in 1821. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Dr. William S. Bruce, who named it after the birthplace of his wife in Scotland. Not adopted: Eigg Rock. NILSEN, MOUNT: peak standing NW. of Mt. Helen Washington in the Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°03’S., 155°25’W. Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE, and named by Byrd for Captain Nilsen, of the Norwegian whaler, C. A. Larsen, which towed the City of New York through the pack ice. Nilsen Mountains: see Thorvald Nilsen Moun- tains. NILS LARSEN GLACIER: glacier descending in a westerly direction to the N. side of Norvegia Bay where it forms a short glacier tongue project- ing into the sea, on the W. coast of Peter I Island; in about: 68°47’S., 90°42’W. In February 1929 a Nor. exp. under Nils Larsen carried out a series of 226 investigations of this island. Named for Nils Larsen. NIMROD, MOUNT: peak about 10,500 ft. in el., standing about 8 mi. SE. of Mt. Saunders, in the N. part of the Dominion Range; in about 85°24’S., 168°40’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named after the exp. ship Nimrod. NIMROD GLACIER: major glacier, about 10 mi. wide in its lower reaches and of undetermined length, which descends from the interior high- lands to the head of Shackleton Inlet, at the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°25’S., 161°00’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946- 47. The name Nimrod Glacier, given by the US-ACAN, is in association with Shackleton Inlet and is for the Nimrod, exp. ship of the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. NINNIS GLACIER: heavily hummocked and crevassed glacier descending steeply from the high interior to the sea in a broad valley, on George V Coast; in about 68°25’S., 147°05’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson. Named for Lt. B. E. S. Ninnis, who lost his life on the far east sledge journey of the exp. on Dec. 14, 1912. Ninnis Glacier Ice Tongue: see Ninnis Glacier Tongue. NINNIS GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue which is the seaward extension of Ninnis Glacier, averaging about 20 mi. wide and projecting sea- ward at least 75 mi. in December 1912 at the time of discovery, off George V Coast; in about 67°40’S., 148°00’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Maw- son, and named after Ninnis Glacier. Not adopted: Ninnis Glacier Ice Tongue. NIPPLE PEAK: peak about 2,200 ft. in el., stand- ing about 1 mi. NE. of Channel Gl., in the N. part of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°17’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Charted and named in 1944 by the FIDS. NIVEA, MOUNT: conspicuous, snow-topped mountain, about 4,200 ft. in el., standing at the head of Sunshine Gl., Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°35’S., 45°20’W. A number of rock towers lie on the NW. side. First surveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49, and named by them after the snow petrel (Pagodroma nivea) which breeds in this area. NIZNIK ISLET: islet in the N. part of George VI Sound, lying near the coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°47’S., 68°30’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for the Theodore T. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Niznik family of Baltimore, Md., contributors to the expedition. Not adopted: Niznik Island. NOBBY: rock at the SE. end of the Clerke Rocks, lying some 45 mi. ESE. of the SE. end of South Georgia; in 55°02’S., 34°38’W. The Clerke Rocks were disc. by Capt. James Cook in 1775. Nobby was probably given this descriptive name by DI personnel, who made surveys of the South Georgia area in the period 1926-30. NOBBY NUNATAK: nunatak about 1,000 ft. in el. on the SE. shore of Hope Bay, standing 1 mi. S. of Lake Boeckella and 1 mi. E. of Mt. Flora, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25’S., 56°59’W. This area was first explored by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Nobby Nunatak was first charted and named by the FIDS in 1945. The name is descriptive. NOBLE, MOUNT: peak about 4,000 ft. in el., standing about 2 mi. W. of Gibbon Bay in the E. portion of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in about 60°40’S., 45°18’W. Although presumably first sighted by Capt. Nathaniel Palmer and Capt. George Powell in 1821, the peak was named by James Weddell in 1823 for his friend James Noble of Edinburgh, orientalist. NOBLE PEAK: peak about 1,800 ft. in el., stand- ing 1 mi. SW. of Lockley Pt. and marking the NE. end of a prominent ridge on the NW. side of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°48’S., 63°25’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based on a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. NOBLE ROCKS: group of about 19 rocks that form the easternmost group in the De Dion Its., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°52’S., 68°41’W. The De Dion Its. were first sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Noble Rocks were sur- veyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who so named them because of their association with Emperor Islet. NOEL HILL: conspicuous slate knob at the S. side of. Marian Cove, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°13’S., 58°44’W. The name is used by the Scettish geologist David Fergu- son in a 1921 report based upon his investigations of King George I. in 1913-14, but may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. Nogood Lagoon: see Little Jason Lagoon. Nordenskiéld Barrier: Tongue. see Nordenskjold Ice 227 Nordenskiold Glacier: see Nordenskjéld Glacier. Nordenskidld Glacier Tongue; Nordenskidld Ice Barrier; Nordenskidld Ice Tongue; Nordenskiold Tongue: see Nordenskjold Ice Tongue. NORDENSKJOLD COAST: that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Long- ing, in 64°33’S., 58°50’W., to Cape Fairweather, in 65°00’S., 61°05’°W. The name was proposed in 1909 by Edwin Swift Balch, for Dr. Otto Norden- skjold, Swedish geographer and leader of the SwedAE, 1901-4, along this coast in 1902. Not adopted: Terre Otto Nordenskjold [French]. NORDENSKJOLD GLACIER: large glacier flow- ing northward to the head of Cumberland East Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°23’W. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, and named for Dr. Otto Nordenskjéld, leader of the expedition. Not adopted: Nordenskiold Glacier, Nordenskjold Glacier. NORDENSKJOLD ICE TONGUE: glacier tongue about 5 mi. wide, forming an extension of Mawson Gl. along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°12’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, at which time it extended about 20 mi. into Ross Sea. Scott named it for Dr. Otto Nordenskjold. This feature had become well estab- lished by the name Nordenskjéld Ice Tongue prior to initiation of systematic application of common specific names to a glacier and its glacier tongue. Although this feature is a glacier tongue, the generic term ice tongue is retained in the name to reduce ambiguity. Not adopted: Nordenskidld Barrier, Nordenskidld Glacier Tongue, Norden- skidld Ice Barrier, Nordenskidld Ice Tongue, Nor- denskidld Tongue. NORDENSKJOLD PEAK: conspicuous, partly snow-covered mountain, about 7,100 ft. in el., standing near the head of Nordenskj6éld Glacier, in the Allardyce Range of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 36°22’W. The name derives from nearby Nordenskjold Glacier, and was given by David Ferguson, Scottish geologist who visited South Georgia in 1911-12. NORDKAMMEN CREST: massive mountain about 3,400 ft. in el., which extends 4 mi. in a N.-S. direction and forms the N. portion of the Masson Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S., 62°52’E. It was mapped and named by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken on a Nor. exp. under Christen- sen in January 1937. The name is descriptive, meaning “north comb.” Not adopted: Nordkam- men [Norwegian], North Crest. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA NORMANNA REEF: reef lying near the center of the S. entrance to The Sound in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°21’S., 62°59’W. The name ap- pears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel, but this may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. The name presumably derives from the Normanna Whaling Co. of Sandefjord, Norway, or one of its ships. NORMANNA STRAIT: strait about 1 mi. wide betwen Signy I. and Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°38’W. Disc. by Matthew Brisbane, who roughly charted the S. coast of Coronation I. under the direction of James Weddell in 1823. The name appears on a chart of these islands by Capt. Peter Sgrile in 1912-13, and is prob- ably named after the Normanna Whaling Co. of Sandefjord, Norway, operators of the floating fac- tory ship Normanna. NORSEMAN POINT: easternmost point of Neny I., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°00’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Named by the FIDS after the Norseman airplane which landed near the point to relieve the FIDS party on Stoning- ton I. in February 1950. North, Cape: see Alexandra, Cape. NORTH, CAPE: cape marking the northernmost point of South Georgia, near the W. end of the is- land; in 53°58’S., 37°44’W. This name was first applied to the NW. tip of South Georgia on a map by Capt. James Cook in 1775. Since 1912 the name has become well established for the northernmost point of the island, which is in keeping with the geographical position inferred by the name. Not adopted: North Cape. NORTH, CAPE: vertical, snow-covered cliff over 200 ft. in el., about 19 mi. WNW. of Yule Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 70°35’S., 165°30’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and so named be- cause this was the northernmost land which his exp. saw along this coast. NORTHAMPTON, MOUNT: high peak standing between Mt. Vernon Harcourt and Mt. Brewster, in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 72°38’S., 169°15’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for the Marquis of Northampton, then pres. of the Royal Society. North Anchorage: see Visca Anchorage. 228 NORTH BAY: cove forming the N. head of Prince Olav Hbr., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. Probably named by DI person- nel who charted Prince Olav Hbr. in 1929. NORTHCLIFFE GLACIER: glacier descending into Robinson Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°45’S., 98°48’E. Disc. by the AAH, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named for Lord Northcliffe, of Lon- don, a patron of the expedition. North Crest: see Nordkammen Crest. NORTHEAST GLACIER: steep, heavily-crevassed glacier, about 13 mi. long and 5 mi. wide at its mouth, which flows from McLeod Hill westward and then SW. into Marguerite Bay between the Debenham Is. and Roman Four Promontory; in 68°09’S., 66°58’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1940 by mem- bers of the USAS, who first used this glacier as a sledging route, and so named by them because it lies at the NE. side of their base at Stonington Island. Not adopted: North East Glacier. NORTHERN FOOTHILLS: low hills at the S. end of the peninsula surmounted by Mt. Abbott, in Victoria Land; in about 74°57’S., 163°55’E. So named by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, because during field operations In- expressible Island, on the opposite side of Evans Cove, was originally referred to as the Southern Foothills. NORTH FORELAND: cape forming the NE. ex- tremity of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°53’S., 57°40’W. Named on Oct. 16, 1819 by Capt. William Smith in the brig Williams. Since this was the easternmost point which he saw on this trip, he named it after the headland in England which forms its most easterly land. Not adopted: Cape North Foreland. North Foreland, Cape: see North Foreland. North Fork: see Taylor Glacier. North Island: see Hansen Island. NORTH POINT: the N. tip of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is., in 60°41’S., 45°38’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a survey of the South Orkney Is. by DI personnel on the Discovery IT in 1933. NORTHROP, CAPE: conspicuous, rocky bluff about 3,800 ft. in el., forming the N. side of the en- trance to Whirlwind Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°24’S., 65°16’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on a flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and named for GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Jack Northrop, designer of the Lockheed airplane used on the expedition. The cape was photo- graphed by the USAS in 1940 and charted by the FIDS in 1947. Norths Coast: (in vicinity of 127°45’E.) the de- cision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since the configuration of the coast does not permit delimita- tion of a segment of adequate length, and: the name Norths Highland has been reapplied to the highland terminating in Cape Goodenough, in approximately the position given by Wilkes. See: Norths High- land. NORTHS HIGHLAND: ice-covered upland, ris- ing to several thousand ft. in el., close S. of Cape Goodenough, surmounting the central portion of Banzare Coast between Maury and Porpoise Bays; centering in about 66°45’S., 126°15’E. The name North’s High Land, after James H. North, acting master on the brig Porpoise, was applied to an ele- vated coastal area by the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Subsequently, because of inadequate data regarding the nature of this feature, the name Norths Coast was applied to a restricted coastal area in the vicinity of 127°45’E. Identification of Norths Highland is based upon correlation of Wilkes’ chart with the US-ACAN reconnaissance map of 1955 compiled from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The name Norths Highland is adopted for this recently verified up- land region in 126°15’E. in keeping with Wilkes’ original naming. Not adopted: North’s High Land, North’s Land. North’s Land: see Norths Highland. NORTHSTAR ISLET: low rocky islet 1 mi. NW. of the W. tip of Neny I., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°07’ W. First roughly charted in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed by the FIDS in 1947, and named by them for the U.S.M.S. North Star, one of the ships of the USAS, 1939-41, which visited Marguerite Bay in 1940. North Undine Harbour: see Undine Harbor. NORVEGIA, CAPE: prominent cape at the NE. side of the entrance to Seal Bay, on Princess Martha Coast; in about 71°20’S., 12°20’W. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen in February 1930 while on an airplane flight from the Norvegia, the ship in which the exp. was made. The cape was named by Riiser-Larsen for the ship. NORVEGIA BAY: small bay between Cape Ingrid and the projecting glacier tongue of Nils Larsen Gl., along the W. coast of Peter I Island; in about 68°48’S., 90°44’W. Named after the Norvegia, the 229 Norwegian research vessel which visited Peter I Island in February 1929. NORWAY BIGHT: bay about 4 mi. wide, indent- ing the S. coast of Coronation I. between Cape Meier and Mansfield Pt., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°37'S., 45°49’W. The name appears on a chart by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain who made a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted: Norway Fjord. Norway Fjord: see Norway Bight. NORWAY ROCKS: reef of rocks about 4 mi. S. of Bernacchi Head, the SE. extremity of Franklin I., in Ross Sea; in about 76°17’S., 168°22’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross. Named by C. E. Borchgrevink, native of Norway, leader of the BrAE, 1898-1900. NOVILLE, MOUNT: mountain standing about 8 mi. S. of Mt. Blackburn on the E. side of Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°26’S., 145°30’W. Disc. by the Geological Party of the ByrdAE in 1934, and named for George O. Noville, executive officer of the expedition. Noville Mountains: see Hudson Mountains. NOVILLE PENINSULA: peninsula projecting N. from Thurston Pen. and terminating in Cape Palmer; in about 71°45’S., 96°50’W. This penin- sula was delineated from aerial photographs made by the USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named for George O. Noville. Novoliskigletscher: see Novosilski Glacier. NOVOSILSKI BAY: bay, about 1 mi. wide, lying 8 mi. SE. of Leon Head, along the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°39’S., 36°19’W. Disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1819 and named for Lt. Paul Novosilski of the Mirnyy, which accom- panied Bellingshausen’s flagship the Vostok. Not adopted: Nowoselskji Bai [German]. NOVOSILSKI GLACIER: glacier, about 6.5 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, flowing in a westerly direction from the SW. slopes of the Salvesen Range to No- vosilski Bay on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°40’S., 36°18’W. First surveyed and named by a Ger. exp., 1928-29, under Kohl-Larsen. The name derives from the nearby Novosilski Bay. Not adopted: Novoliskigletscher [German]. Nowoselskji Bai: see Novosilski Bay. NOZAL PEAK: ice-covered peak probably over 2,000 ft. in el., standing 1 mi. N. of Shackleton Peak and about midway between Regnard Peaks and the SE. flank of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of Palmer GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Pen.; in 65°11’S., 63°56’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, who named it for Monsieur Nozal, seaman, later lieutenant on the exp. ship Pourquoi Pas?. N. Persson Island: see Persson Island. N. Perssons O: see Persson Island. Nunés, Cape: see Nunez, Cape. NUNEZ, CAPE: cape about 2 mi. S. of Queen Maud Bay, on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 37°24’W. The name dates back to at least 1912, and was probably given by whalers who frequented this coast. Not adopted: Cape Newnes, Cape Nunés, Cape Nunez. NUNEZ POINT: the W. tip of the peninsula lying between Beascochea Bay and Leroux Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°33’S., 64°15’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Captain Nunez, Argentine Navy. Not adopted: Nunez Point, Ninez Point. NUTT, CAPE: ice-covered cape, marked by sev- eral rocky ridges at its NE. end and by a small group of rocky islets close off its NW. end, which forms the W. side of the entrance to Vincennes Bay, on Knox Coast; in about 66°42’S., 108°20’E. The position of Cape Nutt correlates closely with the eastern end of Wilkes’ ““Knox’s High Land,” as charted as a coastal landfall by the USEE in 1840. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Cdr. David C. Nutt, USNR, research assistant in geography at Dartmouth College, who served as marine biologist with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48. Nutt has recently served as leader of oceanographic expeditions to Labrador in 1949 and summers fol- lowing. NYGREN POINT: rocky point, about 4 mi. SE. of Cape Broms, on the SW. coast of James Ross I., in 64°23’S., 58°13’W. First seen and surveyed in 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who named it Cape Nygren after G. Nygren, Swedish chemist who contributed toward the cost of the expedition. It was resurveyed by the FIDS in 1952. Point is considered a more suitable descrip- tive term for this feature than cape. Not adopted: Cape Nygren. OAKELEY, CAPE: dark bold headland forming the E. side of the entrance to Smith Inlet, in north- ern Victoria Land; in about 71°00’S., 167°40’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Henry Oakeley, mate on the exp. ship Erebus. Not adopted: Cape Oakley. 230 Oakley, Cape: see Oakeley, Cape. OATES COAST: that portion of the coast of Ant- arctica lying W. of Victoria Land, approximately between 157°E. and 164°E. Disc. in February 1911 by Lt. Harry Pennell, RN, captain of the BrAE exp. ship Terra Nova, and named by him for Capt. Lawrence E. G. Oates who, with Capt. Robert F. Scott and three BrAE companions, perished on the return from the South Pole in 1912. The area im- mediately westward of this coast and major por- tions of Oates Coast have not been explored by land or sea parties, but have been photographed from the air, in part, by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Not adopted: Oates Land. Oates Land: see Oates Coast. OBELISK, CAPE: cape marking the N. side of the entrance to Rohss Bay, on the W. side of James Ross I., situated S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°08’S., 58°27’W. Disc. and named by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The name is descriptive of a conspicuous rock pinnacle about 2 mi. within the headland, which is visible from northwestward and southward. Not adopted: Obelisk Point, Pointe Obélisque [French]. Obélisque, Pointe: see Obelisk, Cape. O’BRIEN ISLAND: small rocky island about 1,700 ft. in el., lying about 2 mi. SW. of Aspland I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°33’S., 55°59’W. The name dates back to at least 1822 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: O’Brien’s Island. O’BRIEN PEAK: peak about 2,800 ft. in el., marking the N. end of the ridge at the E. side of the terminus of Amundsen Gl., at the head of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°27’S., 157°05’W. Disc. by the Geological Sledging Party of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and named for John S. O’Brien, surveyor with the geological party. OBSERVATION BLUFF: the eastern summit, about 360 ft. in el., of the ice-free ridge which forms the N. side of Paal Hbr. in Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. The area was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1933. The bluff was surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so named by them because it marks the position from which daily sea ice observations were made. OBSERVATION HILL: conical hill about 750 ft. in el., surmounting Cape Armitage at the S. end of Hut Point Pen., on Ross I.; in about 77°51’S., 166°40’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and so named because it forms an excellent lookout station. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Observatorio, Isla: see Gamma Island. O’Cain Island: see Nelson Island. Oceana Insel: see Oceana Nunatak. OCEANA NUNATAK: one of the Seal Nunataks, lying at the NW. corner of Robertson I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 59°50’W. Disc. by a Nor. whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen in December 1893, and named after the Oceana Co. of Hamburg, a sponsor of the expedition. Not adopted: Oceana Insel [German]. OCEAN HARBOR: deeply indented bay on the N. coast of South Georgia which is entered 1.5 mi. W. of Tijuca Pt.; in 54°20’W., 36°16’W. The names New Fortune Bay and Neufortuna Bay, probably for the Fortuna, Norwegian-Argentine whaling vessel which participated in establishing the first permanent whaling station at Grytviken, South Georgia in 1904-5, were used for this feature in 1922 by Filchner, following the GerAE, 1911-12. Following a survey of the island in 1951-52, the SGS reported that the feature is known to whalers and sealers as Ocean Harbor, a name derived from the Ocean Whaling Co. which at one time had a station there. The name Ocean Harbor is ap- proved for this feature on the basis of local usage, and also to avoid confusion of the name New Fortuna Bay with Fortuna Bay, only 26 mi. to the northwest. Not adopted: Neufortuna Bay, New Fortuna Bay, New Fortune Bay. OCHS GLACIER: glacier flowing to Paul Block Bay between Mt. Iphigene and Mt. Avers, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°30’S., 145°35°W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1929, and named for Adolph S. Ochs, publisher of the New York Times, patron of the Expedition. Not adopted: Adolph Ochs Glacier. O’CONNOR NUNATAKS: group of rock expo- sures rising above the ice at the upper rim of Balchen Gl., in the N. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°24’S., 143°21’W. Disc. by members of the USAS in aerial flights over this area in 1940 and named for Ray- mond O’Connor, a member of the West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. O’CONNORS ROCK: rock about 0.1 mi. SW. of Stenhouse Bluff, King George I., lying in Visca An- chorage in the N. part of Admiralty Bay, in the South Shetland Is.; 62°02’S., 58°22’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Named for Midshipman W. P. O’Connor, RNR, who assisted in a sketch survey of Visca Anchorage in the Discovery in 1927. 231 ODIN, MOUNT: saddle-top mountain, consisting of two ice-covered peaks about 4,800 ft. in el., situ- ated close SW. of Frigga Peak on the divide be- tween Anderson and Sleipnir Glaciers, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°26’S., 64°03’W. Dur- ing 1947 the peak was photographed from the air by the RARE and charted from the ground by the FIDS. Named by the FIDS after the Norse god Odin, the mythological husband of Frigga. Odom Bay: see Odom Inlet. ODOM INLET: inlet about 9 mi. long, between Cape Howard and Cape MacDonald along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°30’S., 61°20’W. Disc. by members of the USAS who explored this coast from East Base both by land and from the air in 1940. Named for Howard Odom, radio operator at the East Base. Not adopted: Odom Bay. OFFICE BOYS, THE: group of rocks at the NE. end of the Clerke Rocks, lying some 45 mi. ESE. of the SE. end of South Georgia; in 55°01’S., 34°39’W. Clerke Rocks were disc. by Capt. James Cook in 1775. The Office Boys were charted and probably named by DI personnel who made surveys in the South Georgia area in the period 1926-30. OHLIN ISLAND: small island, about 500 ft. in el., lying 6 mi. WNW. of Tower I., off the NW. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°31’S., 60°06’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, and named by him for Axel Ohlin, zoologist with the expedi- tion. Not adopted: Bailys Island. OKUMA BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, which in- dents Ross Ice Shelf for about 4 mi., lying about 80 mi. NE. of the Bay of Whales; in about 77°52’S., 158°40’W. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott in 1902. Named by the Japanese exp. under Shirase, 1911-12, for Count Okuma, Premier of Japan. Not adopted: Hal Flood Bay. Olaf Bjaaland, Mount: see Bjaaland, Mount. Olav Prydz Bukt: see MacKenzie Bay; Prydz Bay. OLAV ROCKS: small group of rocks, lying about 0.6 mi. ESE. of Cape Crewe, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°07’W. Charted by DI personnel during the period 1927-30, and so named because the rocks serve as a guide to vessels entering Prince Olav Harbor. The incorrect spell- ing, ‘Prince Olaf Rocks,” appearing on the charts by DI personnel has been corrected. A shortened form of the original name is approved. Not adopted: Prince Olaf Rock, Prince Olaf Rocks, Prince Olav Rocks. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA OLD MANS HEAD: dark headland marking the S. side of the entrance to Wust Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°22’S., 60°45’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the head- land was photographed from the air by the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. This descriptive name was given by the FIDS. Ole Engelstad, Mount: see Engelstad, Mount; Wilhelm Christophersen, Mount. OLIPHANT ISLETS: group of small ice-free islets and rocks lying S. of Gourlay Pen., the SE. extremity of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°36’W. Dove Channel extends through this group in a general EW. direction. The group was roughly charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain, and again in 1933 by DI personnel. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS and named by them for Prof. Marcus L. E. Oliphant, then prof. of physics, Birmingham Univ.; later Dir. of the Research School of Physical Sciences, Australian National Univ., who gave assistance to the FIDS in obtaining equipment. OLIVINE POINT: the southern end of the low- lying peninsula which forms the E. limit of Iceberg Bay on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°29’W. Surveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49, and so named by them because the mineral olivine occurs in the igneous dikes inter- secting the peninsula just N. of the point. OLSTAD GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier decending to the W. side of Peter I Island, about 2.5 mi. S. of Tofte Gl.; in about 68°53’S., 90°43’W. Peter I Island was circumnavigated by the Norwe- gian whale catcher Odd I in January 1927, and charted by the Norvegia in February 1929. They named the glacier for Ola Olstad, Norwegian biolo- gist who, transported by various whaling ships, conducted research in South Georgia, South Shet- land Is., and the Palmer Archipelago. Not adopted: Olstads Glacier. OMEGA ISLAND: island, about 2 mi. long, which lies immediately S. of Eta I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°56’W. This island, the largest feature in the SE. part of the Melchior Is., is part of what was called “Ile Melchior” by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, but the name Mel- chior now applies for the whole island group. Omega Island was roughly surveyed by DI person- nel in 1927. The name Omega, derived from the last letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart fol- lowing surveys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expedi- 232 tions in 1942 and 1943. [Spanish]. Not adopted: Isla Sobral Omicron, Islas: see Omicron Islets. OMICRON ISLETS: group of small islets and rocks which lie close SE. of the SE. extremity of Omega I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°21’S., 62°55’W. The name, derived from the 15th letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of these islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islas Omicron [Spanish], Islas Silveyra [Spanish]. OMMANNEY BAY: semi-circular bay about 2.5 mi. wide, lying immediately W. of Foul Pt. along the N. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°33’S., 45°34’W. Probably first sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in 1821. The bay was charted in 1933 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for Francis Downes Ommanney, zoologist on the staff of the Discovery Committee. OMMANNEY GLACIER: glacier descending to Relay Bay, in the Robertson Bay area of northern Victoria Land; in about 71°32’S., 169°29’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borch- grevink, who named it for Adm. Sir Erasmus Om- manney, who had served in the Arctic Expedition of 1850. Not adopted: Ommaney Glacier. ONGLEY ISLAND: small island lying about 3 mi. W. of Dee I., close off the N. side of Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°25’S., 59°55’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, but the name appears to have been first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon this survey. OOM BAY: small bay about 2 mi. wide, lying between Cape Bruce and Campbell Head along Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°26’S., 60°47’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on Feb. 18, 1931, and named by him for Lt. K. Oom, one of the airplane pilots of the expedition. Not adopted: Uksvika [Norwegian]. ORGAN PIPE CLIFFS: high palisades of colum- nar rock overlooking Buckley Bay for a distance of 10 mi. southwestward of Cape Blake, on George V Coast; in about 68°25’S., 148°45’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson and so named be- cause of their appearance. ORLEANS CHANNEL: channel about 4 mi. wide extending in a NE—SW. direction between Trinity I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°53’S., 60°35°W. This channel was possibly first seen by GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Nathaniel B. Palmer, Captain of the Hero, during his explorations of the NW. portion of the coast of the Palmer Pen. on Nov. 18, 1820. It was named and outlined in part by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville. Charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Not adopted: Orleans Channel, Orleans Inlet. Orleans Inlet: see Orléans Channel. ORNEN ROCKS: group of rocks, some of which are above water, about 1 mi. NNE. of Cape Melville, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°00’S., 57°32’W. Named after the Norwegian whaler Ornen which went aground there about 1908 or 1909. Not adopted: Rochers de l’Orn [French]. ORVILLE ESCARPMENT: a southeast-facing es- carpment along the NW. edge of Edith Ronne Land, extending from the junction of Filchner Ice Shelf and Palmer Pen.; in about 75°10’S., 63°00’W., south- westward for about 200 mi. to about 177°30’S., 71°30’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for Capt. Howard T. Orville, USN, Head of the Naval Aerological Serv- ice, who was largely responsible for the formulation of the meteorological program of the expedition. ORWELL BIGHT: body of water lying S. of the eastern half of Coronation I., bounded on the west by Signy I. and on the east by the Robertson Is., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°23’W. The general nature of this bight was first delineated by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain who mapped this area in 1912-13. It was surveyed by DI personnel in 1933 and by the FIDS in 1948-49. Named by the Br—APC after the Norwegian trans- port Orwell, the second ship of that name belong- ing to the Tgénsberg Hvalfangeri, which anchored in Borge Bay, Signy I., on the W. side of this bight in the seasons 1925-26 to 1929-30. ORWELL GLACIER: small glacier, less than 0.5 mi. long, which descends steeply from the S. slopes of Snow Hill and terminates in 60 foot ice cliffs along the S. margin of Elephant Flats in the E. part of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°38’W. Surveyed by DI personnel in 1927, and named by them after the Norwegian transport Orwell, which anchored in Borge Bay, Signy I., throughout the seasons 1925-26 to 1929-30. The glacier was resurveyed by the FIDS in 1947. OSCAR II COAST: that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen., extending from Cape Fairweather, in 65°00’S., 61°05’W., to Cape Alexander, in 66°44’S., 62°37’W. Named in 1893 by Capt. C. A. Larsen for King Oscar II of Sweden. Not adopted: 424589 O -57-16 233 King Oscar II Coast, King Oscar II Land, Konig Oskar II Land [German], Kong Oscar II Kiiste, Terre du Roi Oscar [French]. Oscar Island: see Inexpressible Island. OSCAR ISLAND: the more northerly of two small islands lying close to the ice cliffs about 20 mi. W. of Cape Washington, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°43’S., 164°20’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for King Oscar of Norway and Swe- den. Not adopted: Inexpressible Island (q.v.). Oscar Wisting, Mount: see Wisting, Mount. OSMIC HILL: conspicuous rounded hill which rises abruptly from the surrounding plain to about 1,000 ft. in el., marking the N. limit of an undulat- ing ridge of hills on the W. side of Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°30’W. Roughly surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Norden- skjold. Named by the FIDS following their sketch survey in 1951. The name is one in a group in the vicinity of Discovery Pt., derived from the chemical fixatives used there in biological work by the FIDS. OSTERRIETH MOUNTAINS: mountain range culminating in Mt. Francais, about 9,100 ft. in el., and extending in a NE.-SW. direction along the SE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; center- ing in about 64°37’S., 63°25’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for Mme. Ernest Osterrieth, a patron of the expedition. Not adopted: Osterrleth Moun- tains. Osterrleth Mountains: see Osterrieth Mountains. O’SULLIVAN PEAK: ice-covered peak about 5,800 ft. in el. which forms the highest point and is near the S. end of a N.-S. trending ice-covered ridge, standing about 11 mi. W. of the head of the N. arm of Odom Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°26’S., 62°06’W. This peak was photo- graphed from the air by USAS in December 1940, and was probably seen by the expedition’s ground party that explored this coast. First charted by a joint party consisting of members of the RARE and the FIDS in 1947. Named by the FIDS for T. P. O'Sullivan, a member of the FIDS at the Hope Bay base in 1946-47. OUTER ISLET: islet fringed by submerged rocks, about 0.3 mi. E. of Berntsen Pt., the S. en- trance point to Borge Bay, off the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°35’W. Charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and so named because of its position close out- side the entrance to Borge Bay. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA OUTER LEE ISLET: islet about 1.5 mi. NNW. of Bellingshausen Pt., lying in the outer part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°15’W. This islet was charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cush- man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who included it as one of two islets which he called the Lee Islands. The islets were recharted in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who renamed the northeastern of these two islets Outer Lee Islet. The southwestern islet is now known as Inner Lee Islet. Not adopted: Lee Islands, Outer Lee, Outer Lee Island. Outpost, The: see Vorposten Peak. Owen, Mount: see Russell Owen, Mount. OWEN, MOUNT: mountain about 3,800 ft. in el., standing between Johnston and Kelsey Glaciers at the head of Nantucket Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°25’S., 62°30’W. This mountain was photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS, and in 1947 by the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Arthur Owen, trail man with the RARE. Not adopted: Mount Arthur Owen. OWEN ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, lying about 5 mi. WNW. of Round Pt., close off the N. coast of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°55’/S., 58°21’W. Charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. O. Wisting, Mount: see Wisting, Mount. @YDEHOLMEN, MOUNT: snow-covered moun- tain near the junction of Enderby Land and Kemp Coast, with two summits about 6,500 ft. in el., standing about 8 mi. WSW. of Rayner Peak; in about 67°32’S., 55°33’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo- graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937. The Norwegian “@yde- holmen” means literally “desolate islet.’ Not adopted: Gydeholmen. @YGARDEN ISLANDS: group of rocky, irregu- lar islands which extend about 17 mi. in an E.—-W. direction, lying in the S. part of the entrance to Edward VIII Bay at the extreme W. end of Kemp Coast; in about 66°57’S., 57°30’E. First sighted in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and considered by them to be part of the mainland. They were charted as islands by Nor- wegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January— February 1937, and named ®ygarden, a descriptive term for a chain of islands lying along and off the 234 coast. Not adopted: Guardian Islands, Oygarden [Norwegian]. PAAL HARBOR: small harbor about 0.5 mi. S. of Borge Bay, along the E. side of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°35’W. The name appears on a map based upon a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13 by the Norwegian whaling captain Petter Sgrlle. PABELLON ISLET: the southernmost of two islets which lie close off the N. tip of Omega I. and mark the S. side of the western entrance to Ander- sen Harbor in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°57’W. The islet was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1927. The name Pabellén ap- pears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Pabellon Islet. PACIFIC POINT: small rounded point on the NW. coast of Zavodovski I., South Sandwich Is.; in 56°19’S., 27°36’W. It was named Low Point by DI personnel following their survey in 1930, but that name has been rejected because it has also been used for several other features in the vicinity. The name Pacific Point was recommended in 1953 by the Br-APC, and is after the American schooner Pacific which, under Capt. James Brown, visited Zavodovski I. in 1830, making a landing there. Not adopted: Low Point. PAGEANT POINT: the middle and highest of three ice-free points at the E. end of Gourlay Pen. on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°36’W. Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by the FIDS, derives from the penguin rookery there, with its associated pageantry. Page Rock: see Jester Rock. PAGET, MOUNT: saddle-shaped mountain peak about 9,200 ft. in el., marking the summit of the Allardyce Range, in the central part of South Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°33’W. Mount Paget was known to early sealers and whalers at South Georgia. The name has long been established through general usage. PAGET GLACIER: glacier in South Georgia, about 5 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, which flows NE. from the N. slopes of Mt. Paget into the W. side of Nordenskjéld Gl.; in 54°24’S., 36°28’W. The gla- cier was roughly surveyed in 1928-29 by a Ger. exp. under Kohl-Larsen, and resurveyed in 1951-52 by the SGS. The name, which is derived from nearby Mt. Paget, was given by the SGS, 1951-52. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA PAINE, MOUNT: flat-topped mountain forming part of the La Gorce Mtns., at the brink of the polar icecap in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°45’S., 146°00’W. Disc. by members of the Southern Sledge Party of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and named for Stuart D. L. Paine, navigator and radio operator of that party. Not adopted: Mount Katharine Paine. PALMER, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the N. end of Noville Pen. and the E. side of the en- trance to Peale Inlet, at the NE. side of Thurston Pen.; in about 71°48’S., 96°50’W. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in De- cember 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for James Troxall Palmer, acting surgeon on the ship Relief and later on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42, and later Surgeon-General of the Navy. Not adopted: Cape Flying Fish (q.v.). PALMER ARCHIPELAGO: group of islands, of which the principal ones are Hoseason, Liége, Brabant, Anvers, and Wiencke, lying NW. of Palmer Pen.; in 64°15’S., 62°50’W. ‘They are sepa- rated from the mainland by De Gerlache Strait and Bismarck Strait. Named by De Gerlache, leader of the BelgAE, 1897-99, for Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, first man to navigate in these waters. Not adopted: Antarctic Archipelago, Antarktiske Arki- pel [Norwegian], Palmer Inseln [German]. Palmer Bay: see False Bay. PALMER BAY: open bay about 2 mi. wide, lying 3.5 mi. W. of Cape Bennett, on the N. coast of Coro- nation I., in thé South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 45°21’W. Disc. in December 1821 on a joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Na- thaniel Palmer. Named for Captain Palmer. Not adopted: Palmer’s Bay. PALMER INLET: ice-filled inlet about 8 mi. long, lying between Cape Bryant and Cape Mussel- man, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 71°15’S., 61°10’W. Essentially rectangular in shape, it is bordered by almost vertical cliffs. Disc. by mem- bers of East Base of the USAS who explored this coast by land and from the air in 1940. Named for Robert -Palmer, assistant .to -the meteorologist at the East Base. Not adopted:sRobert Palmer Bay. Palmer Inseln: see Palmer Archipelago. Palmer Land: see Palmer Peninsula. PALMER PENINSULA: the iargest peninsula in Antarctica, lying S. of Cape Horn and extending in a N. and NE. direction from its broad base, in about 75°00’S:, 65°00’W., to its narrow extremity, in 235 about 63°15’S., 57°00’W. Named for Capt. Na- thaniel B. Palmer, American sealer who explored the Antarctic mainland S. of Deception I. in the Hero in 1820. Not adopted: Graham Land, Palmer Land, Trinity Peninsula. PANDEMONIUM POINT: point marking the S. end of a sharp ice-free ridge which forms the S. extremity of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°40’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the ceaseless noise from the penguin rookeries on the W. side of the ridge close N. of the point. PANTOMIME POINT: the northernmost of three ice-free points at the E. end of Gourlay Pen. on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°36’W. Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by the FIDS, arose from the behavior observed in the penguin rookeries on Gourlay Peninsula. PAPUA BEACH: beach, about 1.5 mi. long, on the SE. shore of Cumberland West Bay, South Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°34’W. The name derives from “Papua Cove,” now an obsolete name, applied for a minor recession of the shore of this beach by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, because a colony of gentoo penguins (Pygoscelis papua) was found there. The cove was called “Pinguin- bucht” on a 1907 chart by A. Szielasko, and the form Penguin Bay appears on some later charts. Following its survey in 1951-52, the SGS reported that the beach now described, rather than the cove or bay, is the significant feature for which a name is required. The Br-APC recommended in 1954 that the name Papua be approved for the beach. The various names applied for the cove or bay are unnecessary and are rejected. Papua Cove: see Papua Beach. Paradise Bay: see Paradise Harbor. PARADISE HARBOR: wide embayment behind Lemaire and Bryde Islands, indenting the W. coast of Palmer Pen. from Cape Lacaze-Duthiers on the NE. to an unnamed cape about 9 mi. to the SW.; in 64°52’S., 62°54°W. The name was applied by whalers operating in this vicinity. Not adopted: Paradise Bay. Parjadine, Kap; Pariadin, Cape: see Paryadin, Cape. PARKER, MOUNT: prominent mountain peak lying between Mt. Adam and Mt. Troubridge in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°18’S., 168°10’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA V. Adm. Sir William Parker, a Senior Naval Lord of the Admiralty. PARPEN CRAGS: precipitous, isolated rock face, near the head of Norway Bight on the S. side of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°35/S., 45°50’W. Surveyed and named by the FIDS fol- lowing their survey of 1948-50. Parpen is a term used in masonry to denote a stone extending through the thickness of a wall. PARR, CAPE: low, rocky peninsula lying S. of Cape Douglas about midway between Barne and Shackleton Inlets, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°17’S., 160°35’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named it for Adm. Alfred Arthur Chase Parr, one of Scott’s ad- visers who had served in Arctic exploration. PARRY, MOUNT: mountain about 6,300 ft. in el., dominating the W. coast of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in about 64°17’S., 62°32’W. The name appears on a chart of the Br. exp. under Foster, 1829-31, and has since gained interna- tional usage. Parrys Straits: see Nelson Strait. PARVENU POINT: low but prominent point forming the N. extremity of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S., 67°16’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The point was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and found to be more conspicuous from the W. than had previously been supposed, its new stature thus suggesting the name. PARYADIN, CAPE: cape which forms the south- ernmost point of the W. tip of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 38°02’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. un- der Cook. Resighted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, and named for Jacob Paryadin, navigating officer of the exp. ship Vestok. Not adopted: Cape Pariadin, Kap Parjadine [German]. PASSAGE ROCK: rock in the N. entrance to English Str., about 1 mi. W. of Cape Morris, Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°22’S., 59°48’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and so named because it serves as a guide to vessels passing through the entrance. PASSAT NUNATAK: a nunatak on Princess Martha Coast, standing close E. of Boreas Nunatak and fronting on the large ice shelf that here fringes the coast; in about 71°18’S., 3°58’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for one of the Dornier flying boats of the expedi- tion. 236 Passe du Challenger: see Neptunes Bellows. PASSEL, MOUNT: a serrated ridge about 4 mi. long, rising to an estimated 2,500 ft. in el.; standing on the S. side of Crevasse Valley Glacier in the central part of the Edsel Ford Ranges, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°52’S., 144°52’W. Disc. in December 1940 by members of the Edsel Ford Mountains Geological Survey Party of the USAS, and named for Charles F. Passel, geologist and radio operator of that party. PASSES PEAK: pyramidal peak about 1,500 ft. in el., standing about 2 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay and 3.5 mi. NE. of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°03’W. First charted in 1945 by the FIDS and so named because it lies between two passes used by Hope Bay sledging parties in traveling to Duse Bay and to the head of Depot Glacier. PASTEUR ISLET: small rocky islet at the SE. end of the Dumoulin Its., which lie at the NE. end of Géologie Arch., close N. of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°37’S., 140°06’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946— 47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51. Named by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, for Louis Pasteur, famous French chemist who made notable contributions to medical science. PASTEUR PENINSULA: peninsula about 7 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and ranging from 5 to 8 mi. wide, lying between Guyou Bay and Bouquet de la Grye Bay and forming the N. end of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°04’S., 62°27’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him in honor of Louis Pasteur, famous French chemist. Not adopted: Pasteur Peninsular. PATERSON, MOUNT: pyramidal-shaped moun- tain about 3.5 mi. E. of Mt. Nilsen, standing at the . NE. end of the S. group of the Rockefeller Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°01’S., 155°04’W. Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE, and later named by Byrd for Seward M. Paterson, manufacturer who furnished shoes and ski boots for the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Not adopted: Mount Patterson. PATRICIA ISLANDS: two small islands about 15 mi. back of the entrance to Edward VIII Bay, off Enderby Land; in about 66°55’S., 56°47’E. Disc. and named in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby. Not adopted: Patricia Island. PATRICK, MOUNT: mountain about 7,600 ft. in el., standing about 12 mi. S. of Mt. Cyril in the Commonwealth Range, on the E. side of Beardmore GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Gl.; in about 84°09’S., 172°45’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Patterson, Mount: see Paterson, Mount. PAUL BLOCK, MOUNT: peak rising to about 10,000 ft. in el., standing about 25 mi. SSE. of Mt. Pratt in the southernmost ridge of the Grosvenor Range; in about 86°16’S., 179°15’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flights to the South Pole in November 1929, and named by him at that time for Paul Block, Jr., son of Paul Block, patron of the expedition. PAUL BLOCK BAY: embayment about 15 mi. wide, bounded on the E. by Balchen and Ochs Gla- ciers, and lying between the W. end of the Phillips Mtns. and the W. end of Fosdick Mtns., along the W. coast of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°15’S., 146°30’W. Disc. in 1929 by the ByrdAE and named by Byrd for Paul Block, newspaper pub- lisher and patron of the expedition. Not adopted: Block Bay. PAULDING BAY: ice-filled embayment, about 40 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, indenting the W. end of Banzare Coast between Cape Southard and Clark Pt.; in about 66°40’S., 123°00’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for James K. Paulding, Sec. of the Navy under Pres. Van Buren. Paulding had previously served as U.S. Navy agent for New York and was instrumental in the outfitting of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. PAULET ISLAND: circular island about 1 mi. in diameter, lying about 1 mi. off the SE. side of Dundee I., off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°35’S., 55°47’W. + Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, 1839-43, and named by him for Capt. Lord George Paulet, RN. PAUL ISLETS: group of islets about 3 mi. W. of Cape Gronland, Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 63°40’W. Disc. and named by the Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. Not adopted: Paul Islands. PAULSEN MOUNTAINS: a closely-spaced group of mountain peaks, about 9,200 ft. in el., in the W. part of the Muhlig-Hofmann Mtns., standing in front of the polar piateau in New Schwabenland; in about 72°10’E., 2°00’E. Disc. by the GerAE un- der Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Karl-Heinz Paulsen, oceanographer on the expedition. PAULSEN PEAK: rock peak, about 6,300 ft. in el., standing near the head of Lyell Gl., 2 mi. NW. of Mount Sugartop, in the Allardyce Range of South Georgia; in 54°20’S., 36°40’W. Named by 237 the Br—APC, following mapping by the SGS, 1951- 52, for Harold B. Paulsen (1898-1951), a leading figure in the Norwegian whaling industry. PAUMELLE POINT: point which forms the S. side of the entrance to Libois Bay and the NW. end of the peninsula which separates Port Charcot from Saltpétriére Bay, on the W. side of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°03’W. First charted by the FrAE under Char- cot, 1903-5, and named by him for R. Paumelle, steward of the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted: Point Paumelle. Pavie, Cap; Pavie, Ile: see Pavie Ridge. PAVIE RIDGE: isolated rocky ridge, about 2,500 ft. in el., which extends S. and W. from Martin Gl. to Moraine Cove, and forms the SE. limit of Bert- rand Ice Piedmont, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.;: in 68°34’S., 66°59’W. The name “Ile Pavie” was given in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot to an island, or possible cape, shown on the FrAE maps in 68°27’S., 66°40’W. From a position 15 mi. SE. of Jenny Island, Maurice Bongrain, FrAE surveyor, made sketches of this feature which were labeled “Tle Pavie” and “Cap Pavie.” This general area was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, but the feature named by Charcot was not identi- fied. Following further surveys by the FIDS in 1948, Charcot’s “Ile Pavie’ was identified from Bongrain’s sketches as the feature now named Red Rock Ridge. The name Red Rock Ridge is now too firmly established to alter. The name Pavie Ridge has therefore been approved for the isolated rocky ridge described above as forming the S. limit of Bertrand Ice Piedmont, and whose position in 68°34’S., 66°59’W. is not far removed from the original position indicated by Charcot. Named by Charcot, presumably for Auguste J. M. Pavie (1847-1925), French diplomat and explorer. Not adopted: Cap Pavie, Ile Pavie [French]. Payer Group: see Payer Mountains. PAYER MOUNTAINS: small mountain group about 9,300 ft. in el., rising immediately E. of the Weyprecht Mtns. at the N. edge of the polar pla- teau, in New Schwabenland; in about 71°50’S., 14°45’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Julius Payer, Austrian ex- plorer, who in company with Karl Weyprecht dis- covered Franz Josef Land in 1873. Not adopted: Payer Group. P. Curie, Pointe: see Curie Point. PEACE ISLET: small islet, which is northern- most of several islets which extend northward about 0.5 mi. from the W. extremity of Eta I., in the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 62°57’W. The name was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Isla Iota [Spanish]. PEACOCK, MOUNT: high peak lying between Mt. Humphrey Lloyd and Mt. Herschel in the Ad- miralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 72°14’S., 169°15’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for the Very Reverend Dr. George Peacock, Dean of Ely. Peacock Bay: see Deakin Bay. PEACOCK BAY: ice-filled bay, deeply indenting the E. end of Walgreen Coast, immediately W. of Thurston Pen. and N. of the Hudson Mtns.; in about 72°30’S., 100°30’W. Disc. on Feb. 25, 1940 by the USAS in a flight from the Bear, and further delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named after the USEE sloop of war Peacock which sailed, in com- pany with the tender Flying Fish, along the edge of the pack ice NE. of this bay for several days in March 1839. PEALE INLET: ice-filled inlet about 25 mi. long, lying immediately W. of Noville Pen. and indenting the NE. side of Thurston Pen.; in about 71°55’S., 97°40’W. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the US-ACAN for Titian Ramsay Peale, noted artist, naturalist who served on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. The Peacock, accompanied by the Flying Fish, reached a point within 100 mi. of Thurston Pen. during March 1839. PEARCE PEAK: peak about 4,000 ft. in el., standing close S. of Moyes Peak about 21 mi. S. of Cape Simpson, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°48’S., 61°14’E. Disc. and named by the BANZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 17, 1931. PEARSON POINT: forms the SW. point of Bird I., off the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°08’W. The name appears on a chart by DI per- sonnel who charted South Georgia during the period 1926-30. Peary, Massif: see Peary, Mount. PEARY, MOUNT: conspicuous massif about 6,200 ft. in el., with a flat, snow-covered summit several miles in extent, surmounted by a marginal peak on the W., standing about 7 mi. ENE. of Cape Tuxen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 63°52’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908- 10, and named by him for R. Adm. Robert E. Peary, 238 USN, famous American Arctic explorer and dis- coverer of the North Pole in 1909. Not adopted: Massif Peary [French], Mount Matin. PECHELL, MOUNT: prominent peak lying between Mt. Troubridge and Mt. Dalmeny in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°05’S., 167°27’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Capt. Sir Samuel J. Brooke Pechell, a Junior Naval Lord of the Admiralty at that time. PEDERSEN NUNATAK: the westernmost of the Seal Nunataks, lying about 8 mi. NE. of Cape Fair- weather, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°56’S., 60°46’W. Pedersen Nunatak was first charted in 1947 by the FIDS, and named for Capt. Morten Pedersen of the Norwegian sealer Castor, which operated in Antarctic waters during the 1893-94 season. PEGTOP MOUNTAIN: mountain about 4,000 ft. in el., marked by several conspicuous Knobs, the highest and westernmost knob protruding about 1,800 ft. above Mackay Gl. about 5 mi. W. of Mt. Suess, in Victoria Land; in about 77°03’S., 161°20’E. Charted and given this descriptive name by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Pegtop Nunatak. Pegtop Nunatak: see Pegtop Mountain. PELSENEER ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, with three prominent rocky peaks projecting through its icecap, lying about 3 mi. S. of Delaite I. in the south-central portion of Wil- helmina Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°37’S., 62°03’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and named by him for P. Pelseneer, member of the Belgica Commission and the Royal Academy of Belgium. PELTIER CHANNEL: channel about 6 mi. long and 1 mi. wide, in the shape of the numeral 7, with its main stem oriented in a N.-S. direction, separating Doumer and Wiencke Islands S. of Port Lockroy, in the Palmer Arch., in 64°52’S., 63°33’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Jean Peltier, noted French physicist. PENCK, CAPE: ice-covered cape, fronting on West Ice Shelf about 45 mi. WNW. of Gaussberg, which separates Leopold and Astrid Coast from Wilhelm II Coast; in about 66°40’S., 87°35’E. Roughly charted in December 1912 by the Western Base party of the AAE under Mawson, and named by him for Albrecht Penck, internationally known German geographer. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Penck Glacier: see Albrecht Penck Glacier. PENCK GLACIER: glacier which flows in a NW. direction to the S. side of Duke Ernst Bay, W. of Bertrab Nunatak, on Luitpold Coast; in about 717°59/S., 34°55’W. Disc. in January—February 1912 by the GerAE under Filchner, and named by him for Albrecht Penck. Not adopted: Perick Glacier. PENCK TROUGH: a broad SW.-NE. depression in the Ritscher Upland, centering in about 72°30’S., 2°00’W., and extending from the edge of the polar plateau in New Schwabenland to the ice shelf in about 0°30’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Albrecht Penck. The name Penck Mulde was applied on the maps of that exp. to a broad depression between Neumayer Escarpment and Kleinschmidt Peak, represented with the axis nearly N.S. The NBSAE under Giaever, 1949-52, corrected the orientation, placing both Neumayer Escarpment and Kleinschmidt Peak on its SE. flank, and established its extension to the coast. Pendleton Baie: see Pendleton Strait. Pendleton Island: see Tower Island. PENDLETON STRAIT: strait lying between Rabot and Nansen Islands, in the Biscoe Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen., in 66°00’S., 66°30’W. The FrAE under Charcot, in accordance with Char- cot’s conception of this water feature, applied the name Pendleton Bay in January 1909. The BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, recognizing that it is really a strait, renamed it Pendleton Strait. Named by Charcot for Capt. Benjamin Pendleton, commodore of the Stonington, Conn. sealing fleet which in- cluded the sloop Hero under Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer who, at Pendleton’s direction, explored this area in January 1821. Not adopted: Burdick Channel, Pendleton Baie [French]. PENDULUM COVE: cove at the NE. side of Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°65/S., 60°36’W. The name of the cove derives from the pendulum and magnetic observations made there by the Br. exp. under Foster in 1829. PENELOP POINT: bold headland lying between Nielsen Gl. and Scott Keltie Gl. on the S. shore of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°31’S., 169°47’E. Charted in 1911 by the North- ern Party of the BrAE under Scott. PENFOLD POINT: point which forms the NW. side of the entrance to Whalers Bay, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°35’W. 239 Named for Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, who con- ducted a survey of the island during 1948-49. Penguin Bay: see Papua Beach. PENGUIN ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in diam- eter, which lies about 1 mi. off the S. side of King George I. and marks the E. side of the entrance to King George Bay, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°05’S., 57°55’W. Sighted in January 1820 by a Br. exp. under Bransfield, and so named by him because penguins occupied the shores of the island. Not adopted: Penguin Isle. Penguin Point: see Irving Point; Tijuca Point. PENGUIN POINT: point which forms the NW. end of Coronation I.; in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°32’S., 45°56’W. Disc. on Dec. 7, 1821 on the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer. Named by Powell because of the number of penguins which were on this point. Not adopted: Pointe Foca [French]. PENGUIN POINT: point located centrally along the S. shore of Seymour I., lying SE. of James Ross I. at the S. margin of Erebus and Terror Gulf; in 64°19’S., 56°43’W. The point was possibly seen in 1843 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and was roughly charted by Capt. C. A. Larsen who landed on the island in 1892 and 1893. Recharted by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4, who named it because a large penguin colony was found there. Not adopted: Penguinenkap [German]. PENGUIN POINT: point about 320 ft. in el., marking the termination of a granite wall about 5 mi. long at the E. side of the entrance to Fisher Bay, on George V Coast; in about 67°36’S., 146°02’E. Disc. and named in 1912 by the Eastern Coastal Party led by Cecil T. Madigan of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson. PENGUIN RIVER: small meandering stream, which flows in a general NE. direction from Ham- berg Lake to the coast close S. of Horse Head, in Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°30’W. First roughly surveyed by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, 1901-4, and named by Carl Skottsberg, botanist with the expedition. Not adopted: Hamberg Fluss [German]. PENNELL BANK: large submarine bank, about 500 mi. long and 140 mi. wide, extending across Ross Sea from Cape Adare to Edward VII Pen.; centering near 74°S., 175°W. Named by Griffith Taylor for Harry L. L. Pennell, RN, commander of the exp. ship Terra Nova of the BrAE, 1910-13, which engaged in extensive oceanographic work in the Ross Sea area during this period. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Pennilea, Lake: see Kroner Lake. PENOLA ISLET: islet lying close off the S. coast of King George I. about 2 mi. NE. of Three Sisters Point, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 57°52’W. Charted in 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for the Penola, the BGLE ship which assisted the Discovery II in the search for a survey party stranded on King George I. in January 1937. PENOLA STRAIT: strait about 7 mi. long and averaging 2 mi. wide, separating the Argentine Is. from the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°14’W. This strait was traversed by the BelgAE under De Gerlache on Feb. 12, 1898. Named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, after the exp. ship Penola. PEPIN CAPE: ice-covered cape at the W. side of the Barré Gl. on Adélie Coast; in about 66°32’S., 138°34’E. Disc. and named by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville in 1840. The area was charted by the AAE in 1912-13, and again by the BANZARE in 1931, both under Mawson. The cape was more recently delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. PERCE, CAPE: cape at the S. side of the W. end of Alexander I Island, which marks the NE. side of the entrance to Ronne Entrance; in about 71°39’S., 76°00’W. Disc. by Snow, Perce and Car- roll of the USAS in a flight from East Base on Dec. 22, 1940, and named for Earl B. Perce, co-pilot and radio operator of the expedition. PERCHOT, MOUNT: mountain about 6,700 ft. in el.; surmounted by a prominent ridge trending in a general N.-S. direction, standing about 5 mi. SE. of Magnier Peaks between Mt. Chevreux and Mt. Bigo, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°44’S., 64°12’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Char- cot, 1908-10 and named by him for Monsieur Perchot, an acquaintance who donated seventy pairs of boots to the expedition. Pérez, Cape: see Trois Pérez, Cape. Perick Glacier: see Penck Glacier. PERKINS, MOUNT: mountain about 2,500 ft. in el., standing at the E. end of the Fosdick Mtns. in the Edsel Ford Ranges, Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°30’S., 144°05’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on the Northeastern Flight on Dec. 15-16, 1934. Named for Jack E. Perkins, biologist at the USAS West Base, 1939-41, and leader of the Edsel Ford Mountains Biological Party which visited this area in December 1940. 240 PERPLEX RIDGE: ridge, more than 3,000 ft. in el., composed of four rocky masses separated by small glaciers, extending 6 mi. northeastwards from Cape Lainez along the NW. side of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°40’S., 67°43’W. First sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE and in 1948 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because of confusion in attempting to identify this ridge from earlier maps. PERRIER BAY: bay about 3 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, indenting the NW. coast of Anvers I. about 8 mi. SW of Cape Gronland, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°27’S., 63°41’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for Edmond Perrier, French naturalist. PERRY BAY: open, ice-filled bay about 13 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, indenting Clarie Coast be- tween Freeman Pt. and Freeman Gl. on the W. and the stubby peninsula terminating in Cape Keltie on the E.; in about 65°55’S., 132°55’E. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. O. H. Perry on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. PERSSON ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, lying in the entrance to Réhss Bay along the SW. side of James Ross I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S., 58°24’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Norden- skjold, 1901-4, and named by him for Nils Persson, patron of the expedition. Not adopted: N. Persson Island, N. Personns O [Swedish]. PERUTZ GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which flows WNW. into Bourgeois Fjord, close E. of Thomson Head, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 66°33’W. The mouth of the glacier was first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The entire glacier was sur- veyed in 1946-47 and 1948-49 by the FIDS, and named by them for Max F. Perutz of the Caven- dish Laboratory, Cambridge, who has made im- portant studies on the mechanism of glacier flow. PETER I ISLAND: ice-covered island about 14 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 5 mi. wide, lying NE. of Thurston Pen.; in about 68°50’S., 90°35’W. Disc. in January 1821 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who named it for Peter the Great of Russia. PETERMANN ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, lying in the Dannebrog Is. about 1 mi. W. of Cape Duseberg, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 64°11’W. Disc. by the Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, and named GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA by him for August Petermann, noted German geographer and founder of Petermanns Mitteilun- gen. The US-ACAN has rejected the name Lund Island, applied by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, in favor of the original naming. PETERMANN RANGE: a major range in the Wohlthat Mtns., in New Schwabenland, which extends about 50 mi. in a N.-S. direction, and rises to about 8,300 ft. in elevation. The range is separated from the Alexander Humboldt Mtns. to the W. by Humboldt Graben, and centers in about 71°20’S., 12°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for August Peter- mann. PETERSON, MOUNT: mountain about 9,000 ft. in el., standing W. of Mt. Rex in the Ellsworth Highland; in about 74°57’S., 81°20’W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for Harries-Clichy Peterson, physicist with the expedition. PETERSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 1 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, flowing from the conti- nental ice overlying Budd Coast to the E. side of Vincennes Bay, about 5 mi. SE. of Mitchell I. in the Windmill Is.; in 66°22’S., 110°47’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named for Louie N. Peterson, radio operator and recorder with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established astronomical control sta- tions along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts during January-February 1948. PETERSON ICE FALLS: group of ice falls about 1 mi. wide, lying between Stevenson Gl. and Mis- tichelli Hills on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°07’S., 72°01’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for J. C. Peterson, Jr., air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photo- graphic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. PETES PILLAR: pillar rock or stack lying im- mediately E. of Fildes Pt. at the N. side of the entrance to Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°33’W. The pillar was presumably a well-known landmark to early seal- ers at Deception I. and appears on the chart drawn by Lt. E. N. Kendall of the Chanticleer in 1829. Named in 1951 by the Br—-APC for Pilot Officer Pete St. Louis, RCAF, pilot with the FIDS in 1949-50. Not adopted: Kats Pillar. PETRAS, MOUNT: high, prominent, ridge- shaped mountain rising to about 12,000 ft. in el., lying on the axis of the Hal Flood Range, but separated from it to the eastward, in the N. part 241 of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°10’S., 129°30’W. Disc. by the USAS on a flight from West Base on Dec. 14-15, 1940, and named for Theodore A. Petras, master technical sergeant, USMC, pilot on this flight. Not adopted: Mount Josephine Petras. Petrel Island: see Dynamite Islet. PETREL ISLAND: rocky islet about 0.7 mi. long and about 50 ft. in el., lying near the center and marking the largest islet in the cluster of islets at the SE. end of Géologie Arch., close N. of Astro- labe Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in 66°40’S., 140°01’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio- tard, 1949-51, and named by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, because numerous snow petrel nests were found there. The generic term island is retained to avoid duplication with the existing Petrel Islet name in South Georgia. In January 1952, following destruction of the Port Martin base by fire, the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, enlarged the hut on Pétrel Island to serve as the new base site. Not adopted: Ile des Pétrels [French]. PETREL ISLET: islet about 1 mi. SW. of Prion I., lying in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°17'W. First charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cush- man Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. Recharted in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who So named it because of its association with Prion I. Petrels of the genus Prion were observed in these islets. Pétrels, Ile des: see Pétrel Island. PETTER BAY: bight about 0.5 mi. S. of Spence Hbr. along the E. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°11’W. This coast was roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. The name Petters Bay appears on a chart drawn by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912, and corrected by Hans Borge in 1913. It seems likely that this name was first used by Borge and commemorates Capt. Sgrlle. Not adopted: Petters Bay. PETTY ROCK: small rock lying 3 mi. SE. of Cape Saenz Pefia in the center of the W. part of Bigourdan Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°395’S., 67°28’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its small size. PHILIPPI, CAPE: cape marked by a dark cliff with vertical sides at the E. end of D’Urville Wall, which forms the N. wall of David GI., in Victoria GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Land; in about 75°19’S., 162°43’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for Dr. Philippi, distinguished geologist, who was a member of the GerAE under Drygalski, 1901-3. Philippieis; Philippigletscher; Philippi Ice Pla- teau: see Philippi Rise. PHILIPPI GLACIER: glacier which flows in an E. direction to the SW. side of Drygalski Fjord, at the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°49’S., 36°03’W. Charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, who named it for Emil Philippi, glaciologist with the GerAE under Drygalski, 1901-3, and professor of geology at the Univ. of Jena. PHILIPPI GLACIER: channel glacier about 6 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing N. from the con- tinental ice overlying Wilhelm II Coast to the E. end of the West Ice Shelf, about 25 mi. W. of Gauss- berg; in about 66°45’S., 88°20’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by the Australian Committee on Antarctic Names for Emil Philippi, geologist with the GerAE under Drygalski, 1901-3, who made scientific ob- servations in the immediate vicinity of Gaussberg. PHILIPPI RISE: low, snow-covered promontory, about 7 mi. wide and extending some 10 mi. E. from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°05’S., 62°20’W. The ice surface is highest in the W., where it rises to about 1,300 ft. in el., and is broken by Borch- grevink and Gemini Nunataks. The SwedAE un- der Nordenskjold, 1901-4, reported an ice wall or glacial terrace in the vicinity of Borchgrevink Nunatak. Although unable to determine its na- ture, Nordenskj6ld named the feature Philippi- gletscher, after Emil Philippi. It was determined to be a snow-covered promontory by the FIDS during their 1947 survey of this coast. Not adopted: Philippigletscher [German], Philippieis [German], Philippi Ice Plateau. Philip Wrigley Gulf: see Wrigley Gulf. PHILLIPS, CAPE: cape about 7 mi. SW. of Cape Daniell, lying at the foot of Mt. Brewster at the N. end of the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 72°58’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Lt. Charles G. Phillips of the exp. ship Terror. PHILLIPS, MOUNT: high mountain standing W. of Mt. Lubbock, in northern Victoria Land; in about 73°10’S., 167°05’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Prof. John Phillips, Asst. Sec. of the British Association. Phillips Glacier: see Albanus Glacier. 242 PHILLIPS MOUNTAINS: a range of isolated peaks about 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Balchen Gl. at the S. end of Ruppert Coast; in about 76°10’S., 145°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and named by Byrd for Albanus Phillips, Sr., a manufacturer of Cambridge, Md., and patron of the Byrd expeditions. PHILS ISLET: islet lying immediately S. of Guépratte I. in Discovery Sound, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 63°00’W. Charted and named in 1927 by DI personnel on the Discovery. PHOBOS RIDGE: rocky ridge of sandstones and shales forming the W. side of Mars Glacier, on the E. side of Alexander I Island; in 71°54’S., 68°30’W. The coast in this vicinity was first seen from the air and partially photographed by Lin- coln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. This ridge was first surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. Named by the FIDS for its association with Mars Glacier; Phobos being the inner of the two satellites of Mars. Phoques, Iles des: see Seal Islands. PHYLLIS BAY: small bight between Allen and Scarlett Points at the S. end of Montagu I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58°28’S., 26°18’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for Phyllis V. Horton, daughter of Lt. Cdr. W. A. Horton, RN (Ret.), chief engineer of. the Discovery II at the time of the survey. PICKERSGILL ISLANDS: group of islands about 15 mi. SE. of Annenkov I. and 8 mi. SW. of Ducloz Head, South Georgia; in 54°37’S., 36°45’°W. These islands were disc. in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who charted the largest of the group as Pickersgill Island, erroneously thinking it to be the island named in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook for Lt. Richard Pickersgill of the exp. ship Resolution. The name Pickersgill Islands has been established by usage for the group of islands disc. by Bellingshausen. The island origi- nally named by Cook has been known as Annenkov Island since 1819. Not adopted: Pickersgill Island. Pickersgills Island: see Annenkov Island. Pic Luigi de Savoie: see Luigi di Savoia Peak. Piedrabuena, Isla: see Eta Island. PIERRE, MOUNT: sharp conical peak, probably 1,500 ft. in el., standing immediately S. of Moureaux Pt., the N. tip of the snow-covered peninsula form- ing the N. end of Liége I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 63°59’S., 61°46’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Pierre Baudin, Cape: see Berteaux, Cape. Pierre Willems, Cape: see Willems, Cape. PIGMY ROCK: rock lying close off the SW. side of Alamode I. at the S. extremity of the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°43’S., 67°33’W. The Terra Firma Is. were first visited and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This rock was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its size. PIG POINT: point which forms the S. side of the entrance to North Bay, Prince Olav Hbr., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. Probably named by DI personnel who charted Prince Olav Hbr. during the period 1927-30. PIG ROCK: rock about 215 ft. in el., lying in the S. entrance to Fildes Str. about 1.25 mi. E. of Duthoint Pt., Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°18’S., 58°48’W. This rock, known to sealers in the area as early as 1821, was charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. PI ISLETS: two islets and several rocks which lie 1 mi. E. of the NE. end of Omega I. in the Mel- chior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°53’W. The name Pi, derived from the 16th letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of these islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islotes Sidders [Spanish]. Pile Peaks: see Rock Pile Peaks. Pillar Peak: see Waldeck-Rousseau Peak. PIMPLE, THE: cone-shaped peak about 10,300 ft. in el., standing approximately midway between Mt. Lister and Camels Hump in the Royal Society Range, in Victoria Land; in about 77°58’S., 162’43’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. PINE ISLAND BAY: ice-filled bay about 40 mi. long and 20 mi. wide, indenting the Walgreen Coast close SW. of the Hudson Mtns.; in about 74°30’S., 101°30’W. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the. US-ACAN for the U.§:S. Pine Island, sea- plane tender and flagship of the eastern task group of the USN Op. Hjp:, Task Ferce 68, 1946-47. PINER BAY: open bay about 8 mi. wide and 2 mi. long, lying between Bienvenue and the E. side of Astrolabe Glacier Tongue, along Adélie Coast; in about 66°43’S., 140°17’E. Disc. on Jan. 30, 1840 by the USEE under. Wilkes, who ‘named it for Thomas Piner, signal quartermaster on the USEE flagship Vincennes. This feature correlates closely with 243 portions of the sketch of “‘Piners Bay” as shown on Wilkes’ chart of 1840. PINERO ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, lying about 5 mi. NW. of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S., 67°49’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908- 10, and named by him for Antonio F. Pifero, mem- ber of the Chamber of Deputies of the Argentine Republic, on whose motion the Govt. voted un- limited credit to meet the needs of the expedition. Not adopted: Ile Piniero [French]. Pinguin-Bay: see Sacramento Bight. Pinguinbucht: see Papua Beach. Pinguinenkap: see Penguin Point. Piniero, Ile: see Pinero Island. Pinnacle: see Spire, The. Pinnacle Island: see Pinnacle Rock. PINNACLE ROCK: rock about 400 ft. in el., lying midway between Capes Belsham and Valentine and about 1.5 mi. off the N. coast of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°02’S., 54°53’W. The name was probably suggested by members of the Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16, who sighted and described this feature as a pillar of rock during their refuge at Elephant I. following the loss of the exp. ship Endurance. Not adopted: Pinnacle Island. PIN POINT: narrow point forming the E. end of Livingston I. and the W. side of the S. entrance to McFarlane Str., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°37’S., 59°49’W. This feature was known to early sealers as Point Renier, but in recent years the name Pin Point has overtaken the early name in usage. Not adopted: Cap Renier [French], Friesland Point, Point Renier. PIN ROCK: small rock lying at the S. side of Pin Pt., the E. tip of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°38’S., 59°49’W. The present application of the name is based upon a 1935 sur- vey by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Prior to this survey the name Pin Rocks had been used for a group of rocks erroneously charted in essen- tially this position. Not adopted: Pin Rocks. PIPKIN ROCK: ice-free islet, about 260 yards long, lying close NE. of the N. end of Dismal It. in the Faure Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°05’S., 68°50’W. The Faure Is. were disc. and first charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. The group was surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS who GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA named this islet. The name, which suggests the insignificant nature of the feature, is required for reference to a FIDS geodetic control point estab- lished there. PIRIE PENINSULA: narrow peninsula extending about 3 mi. N. from the center of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 44°39’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it for Dr. J. H. Pirie, surgeon an geologist of the expedition. PIRNER, MOUNT: rocky mountain, over 2,000 ft. in el., standing 2 mi. W. of Moltke Hbr., Royal Bay, South Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°07’W. First sur- veyed by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader, and named by them for Captain Pirner, commander of the expedition ship Moltke. PIRNER POINT: point marking the N. side of the entrance to Little Moltke Hbr., in Royal Bay, South Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°04’W. First sur- veyed by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader, and named by them for Captain Pirner, commander of the expedition ship Moltke. Pisco, Mount: see Pisgah, Mount. Pisgah, Mount: see Foster, Mount. PISGAH, MOUNT: peak about 6,100 ft. in el., standing nearly 3 mi. SW. of Mt. Christi and 4 mi. NE. of Mt. Foster in the north-central part of Smith I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°56’S., 62°29’W. Be- cause the peaks of Smith I. gave it a forked appear- ance when seen from a distance, American sealers in the 1820’s called it Mount Pisgah Island after the double-topped Mount Pisgah in the town of Durham, Conn. The name has since been re- stricted to the peak described. Not adopted: Mount Foster (q.v.), Mount Pisco, Mount Piso. Piso, Mount: see Pisgah, Mount. PITMAN, MOUNT: mountain with two mainly ice-covered, dome-shaped summits, the highest and northern being 6,000 ft. in el., standing about 14 mi. dnland from George VI Sound, between Riley and Chapman Glaciers on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°09’S., 67°42’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for E. L. Pitman, an airplane carpenter of Byfleet, Surrey, who made the sledges used by the BGLE, 1934-37, introducing important new elements into the design of the Nansen-type sledge. PITT ISLANDS: group of small islands lying about 3 mi. N. of Renaud I., in the northern Biscoe Is.; in 65°29’S., 65°35’W. The name Pitt, after William Pitt, British statesman, was applied by the 244 Br. ex. under Biscoe in 1832 to an island which Biscoe erroneously charted as lying about 25 mi. WNW. of these islands. The present application of Pitt Islands is based on the interpretation of the BGLE under Rymill who charted this island group in 1935-36. Not adopted: Pitt Island. j PITT POINT: promontory about 300 ft. in el., with rock exposure at its E. end, lying at the S. side of the mouth of Victory Gl. on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°51’S., 58°22’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1945, and named for K. A. J. Pitt, master of the Fitzroy, who assisted in establishing FIDS bases in 1944-45. Pleasant Cove: see Cobblers Cove. P.L. Smith, Mount: see F. L. Smith, Mount. PLUNKET POINT: long, narrow, rock ridge at the N. end of the Dominion Range, at the conflu- ence of Mill and Beardmore Glaciers; in about 85°05’S., 167°30’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. PLUTO GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 8 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, which flows eastward into George VI Sound to the north of Succession Cliffs; in 71°07’S., 68°20’W. This glacier was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The name, after the planet Pluto, was given by FIDS after their surveys in 1948 and 1949. PLYMOUTH, MOUNT: mountain about 2,100 ft. in el., standing about 3.5 mi. SW. of Fort William near the center of the N. portion of Green- wich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 59°51’W. Charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, but the name appears to have been first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon this survey. POA COVE: small cove 1 mi. SW. of Mai Pt. in the SE. corner of Maiviken, Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°30’W. Roughly surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nor- denskjéld. Resurveyed in 1929 by DI personnel, and in 1951 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC after the genus Poa, which includes the tussock grass which grows near this cove in profusion. POD ROCKS: small compact group of about seven rocks, lying about 5 mi. W. of Millerand I. in Marguerite Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 67°30’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The rocks were GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA visited and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who established a sealing camp there. The name, pro- posed by FIDS, derives from the old sealers’ term pod, meaning a group of seals hauled ashore. Poindexter, Cape: see Reynolds, Mount. POINSETT, CAPE: ice-covered cape marking the northernmost point of land on Budd Coast, from which the coast recedes abruptly to the SW. and SE.; in about 63°30’S., 113°00’E. The posi- tion of Cape Poinsett correlates closely with the high seaward extremity of “Budd’s High Land” as charted by Wilkes in 1840. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. MGip., 1946-47, and named by the US—-ACAN for Joel R. Poinsett, Sec. of War under Pres. Van Buren, who was instrumental in the compilation and publica- tion of the large number of scientific reports based on the work of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Poinsett was also instrumental in the preservation of the USEE specimens and the subsequent foun- dation of the Smithsonian Institution. Pointe: for names beginning thus see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Pointe Concepcion see Concepcion, Pointe. (Pointe is a French word for “point.’’) Pointing Cliff: see Ponting Cliff. POLARARBOKEN GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and over 5 mi. long, flowing W. from the continental ice and terminating at the E. side of Sandefjord Ice Tongue, midway between Polar Record Gl. and the Larsemann Hills on In- grid Christensen Coast; in about 69°35’S., 75°28’E. This glacier is marked by a prominent glacier tongue about 3 mi. wide which in March 1947 extended W. for about 12 mi. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by Roscoe after Polardrboken, a polar journal published by the Norsk Polarklubb at Oslo, Norway. POLARFORSCHUNG GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and over 8 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the continental ice and terminating at the SE. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay, midway between Il Polo and Polar Record Glaciers on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°50’S., 74°30’E. This glacier is marked by a prominent glacier tongue about 6 mi. wide, which in March 1947 ex- tended NNW. for about 5 mi. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by Roscoe after Polarforschung, a polar journal published since 1930, by the Archiv fiir Polarforschung at Kiel, Germany. 245 POLAR RECORD GLACIER: channel glacier about 15 mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW. from the continental ice and termi- nating at the SE. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay, mid- way between Polarforschung and Polararboken Glaciers on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°00’S., 75°10’E. This glacier is marked by a massive glacier tongue about 10 mi. wide, which in March 1947 extended NNW. for about 40 mi. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by Roscoe after The Polar Record, a polar journal published, since 1931, by the Scott Polar Research Institute at Cambridge, England. POLAR TIMES GLACIER: channel glacier about 6 mi. wide and over 15 mi. long, flowing NE. from the continental ice and terminating at the SE. side of Sandefjord Ice Bay, midway between Mt. Caroline Mikkelsen and Il Polo Gl. on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°48’S., 74°02’E. This glacier is marked by a prominent glacier tongue about 7 mi. wide, which in March 1947 extended N. for about 10 miles. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Named by Roscoe after Polar Times, a polar journal published, since 1938, by the American Polar Society at New York City. POLLOCK, CAPE: cape which forms the N. end of Dixson I., at the W. side of the mouth of Ninnis Gl., along George V Coast; in about 68°03’S., 146°46’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE Main Base party under Mawson, and named for Prof. J. A. Pollock of the Expedition Advisory Committee. Polotsk Island: see Robert Island. POLYNESIA POINT: ice-free point forming the N. side of the entrance to Paal Hbr. on the E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’W. Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC in 1954 after the floating factory Polynesia, of the Rethval Whaling Co. of Oslo, which worked in the South Orkney Is. in 1913-14. Pomona Island: see Coronation Island. POMONA PLATEAU: ice-covered plateau, over 1,000 ft. in el., extending between Sandefjord Peaks and Deacon Hill in the western part of Cor- onation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 45°56’W. Named by the Br—APC following a survey by the FIDS in 1948-50. This naming revives in an altered form a name given by James Weddell in 1822. Being unaware of the prior discovery of Coronation I. by Capt. Nathaniel Palmer and Capt. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA George Powell, and its naming at that time, Wed- dell renamed the island ‘Pomona’ or “Mainland” after the island in the northern Orkney Islands. That name was published by Weddell in 1825 but did not survive. POND, MOUNT: peak about 1,700 ft. in el., standing about 1 mi. E. of Pendulum Cove, on Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°57’S., 60°34’W. The name appears on a 1829 chart based upon survey work by the Br. exp. under Foster, 1828-31. Probably named for John Pond, noted English astronomer and director of the Royal Ob- servatory at Greenwich at that time. PONTING CLIFF: steep cliff about 1,500 ft. in el., lying E. of Dennistoun Gl. on the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°12’S., 168°30’E. First charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, and named for Herbert G. Ponting, photographer of the expedition. Not adopted: Pointing Cliff. PORPOISE BAY: ice-filled embayment about 80 mi. wide and 50 mi. long, indenting the E. end of Banzare Coast between Cape Mose and Cape Good- enough; in about 66°25’S., 128°30’E. The USEE under Wilkes applied the name Porpoise Bay, after the USHE brig Porpoise, to a large bay in about 66°S., 130°E. Identification of Porpoise Bay is based on correlation of Wilkes’ chart of 1840 with the US-ACAN reconnaissance map of 1955, com- piled from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The name Porpoise Bay is adopted for the large embayment lying close SW. in 66°25’S., 128°30’E. in keeping with Wilkes’ original naming. PORTEOUS POINT: point which forms the SW. end of Signy I. and the N. side of the NW. en- trance to Fyr Chan., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°41’W. Charted in 1933 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, and named for A. N. Porteous, second engineer of the ship. Posadowsky Bay: (in about 66°35’S., 89°50’E.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED as no substantial bay exists in this immediate area. See: Posadowsky Glacier. POSADOWSKY GLACIER: channel glacier about 7 mi. wide and 9 mi. long, flowing N. from the continental ice to Wilhelm II Coast, immediately E. of Gaussberg; in about 66°50’S., 89°30’E. Charted and photographed from the summit of Gaussberg by the GerAE under Drygalski, 1901-3. The name Posadowsky was applied to.an open bay immediately E. of Gaussberg by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14. However, recent US-ACAN 246 studies of the aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, show no substantial bay ex- isting in this immediate area. The committee recommends that the name Posadowsky be re- assigned to this hitherto unnamed glacier. Count Arthur von Posadowsky-Wehner, Imperial Home Secretary, secured a government grant to cover the cost of the GerAE under Drygalski. Possesion, Cape: see Possession, Cape. POSSESSION, CAPE: cape which forms the NW. end of Hoseason I., at the N. end of the Palmer Arch.; in 63°44’S., 61°48’W. This cape appears in rough outline on a chart published by Laurie in 1828, and was presumably explored by James Hoseason in the Br. sealer Sprightly in 1824. Cape Possession was sighted and named by a Br. exp. under Foster, 1823-31. It was more accurately charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Not adopted: Cape Possesion. POSSESSION BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide which recedes SW. about 7 mi., lying between Antarctic Bay and the Bay of Isles along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 37°06’W. Disc. and named by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. Cook made the first known landing on South Georgia in this vicinity. POSSESSION ISLANDS: group of about nine islands and islets, lying S. of Cape McCormick about 4 mi. off the NE. end of Victoria Land in the W. part of the Ross Sea; in about 72°00’S., I -107445)) )Dise: by, the! Br exp) jundermeoss: 1839-43, and so named by him in commemoration of the planting of the British flag on January 12, 1841. Possession Nunataks: see Possession Rocks. POSSESSION ROCKS: two small rock outcrops _ lying about 4 mi. SW. of Cape Harrisson, and rising about 200 ft. above the ice-covered slopes lying about 0.5 mi. inland from the S. shore of Robinson Bay, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°47’S., 98°50’E. Disc. by the Eastern Sledge Party under Frank Wild of the AAE, 1911-14, and so named following a ceremony in December 1912 of claiming this area for the British Crown. Not adopted: Possession Nunataks. POSTE POINT: point about 1 mi. SE. of Hervéou Pt., forming the S. side of the entrance to Sal- pétriére Bay, on the W. side of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°02’W. First charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for L. Poste, stoker on the exp. ship Frangais. Not adopted: Point Poste. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA POSTILLION ROCK: small ice-free rock lying 2 mi. S. of the summit of Mt. Nemesis and close S. of Roman Four Promontory, near the N. shore of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°14’S., 66°53’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS and so named by them because of its outlying position. POTTER COVE: cove indenting the SW. side of King George I. about 2 mi. ESE. of Marian Cove, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°13’S., 58°42’W. Potter Cove was known to sealers as early as 1821, and the name is now well established in interna- tional usage. Not adopted: Havre Petter [French], Potters Cove, Potter’s Cove. POULTER GLACIER: glacier about 15 mi. long and 2 to 3 mi. wide at its terminus, flowing from the polar plateau eastward along the S. flank of the Rawson Mtns. of the Queen Maud Range, and joining Robert Scott Gl. near its head; in about 86°50’S., 153°30’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Black- burn, and named by Byrd for Thomas C. Poulter, second-in-command of the expedition. POURQUOI PAS GLACIER: glacier about 4 mi. wide and 15 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the con- tinental ice and terminating in a prominent tongue near the E. end of Clarie Coast; in about 66°10’S., 1385°45’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Name proposed by the French antarctic sub-committee for the Pourquoi-Pas?, polar ship of the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and later used by Charcot in expeditions to Greenland. POURQUOI PAS GLACIER TONGUE: promi- nent glacier tongue about 4 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, extending seaward from Pourquoi Pas Gl., near the E. end of Clarie Coast; in about 66°05’S., 135°45’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for the French polar ship Pourquoi-Pas?. POURQUOI PAS ISLAND: island about 16 mi. long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and decreasing in width from about 11 mi. in the W. portion to about 11 mi. wide, lying close W. of Ridge I. off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°41’S., 67°28’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. The island was charted more accurately by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who named it for Charcot’s exp. ship Pourquoi Pas?. POWDER ISLET: islet lying 8 mi. SSE. of Cape Jeremy and 2 mi. off the W. coast of Palmer Pen., in George VI Sound; in 69°32’S., 68°47’W. First surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by 247 them because of the friable nature of the rock found on the islet. Powellboen: see Powell Rock. Powell Group; Powell Islands: see South Orkney Islands. POWELL ISLAND: narrow island about 7 mi. long and about 2 mi. wide, lying between Corona- tion and Laurie Islands in the central part of the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°03’W. Disc. on the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. Charted but left unnamed on Powell’s map published by Laurie in 1822. Powell’s name was first applied in 1821 as a group name for the South Orkney Is.; it was reassigned in 1839 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville and has since become well established for the cen- tral island in the group. Not adopted: Cruchleys Island, Dibdins Island, Powell Islands. POWELL ROCK: small submerged rock on the E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°36’W. It lies off the mouth of Starfish Cove, about 600 yards NE. of Balin Pt. First charted by Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13 and named ‘Powell- boen,” after his whale catcher Powell. The FIDS fixed the position of breakers here during rough weather in 1947. Not adopted: Powellboen [Norwegian]. POWER GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing N. from the conti- nental ice at the W. flank of Norths Highland to the head of Maury Bay, where it terminates in a prominent tongue between Bell and Hudson Glaciers, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°45’S., 125°10’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for James S. Power, pursers steward on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. POYNTER COL: snow-filled col about 1,900 ft. in el., situated about 6 mi. ESE. of Cape Kjellman and joining Poynter Hill with the spur extending N. from Ivory Pinnacles, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°45’S., 59°06’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of its association with nearby Poynter Hill. POYNTER HILL: conspicuous hill about 2,700 ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. E. of Cape Kjellman at the N. side of Poynter Col, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°44’S., 59°06’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS, who named it for the mate on the brig Williams, exp. ship of the Br. exp. under Bransfield which made explorations in the South Shetland Is. and Bransfield Str. in 1820. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA PRAM POINT: low, rounded point projecting from the SE. side of Hut Point Peninsula about 1.5 mi. NE. of Cape Armitage, on Ross I.; in about 77°50’S., 166°44’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who so named it because it is neces- sary during the summer months to use a pram in the open water adjacent to the point when traveling between the S. end of Hut Point Pen- insula and Ross Ice Shelf. PRATT, MOUNT: peak at the N. end of one of the exposed ridges of the Grosvenor Range, rising at the edge of the south polar plateau ice to about 10,500 ft. in el., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°55’S., 179°00’E. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in Novem- ber 1929, and named by him for Thomas B. Pratt, American financier and contributor to the expe- dition. President’s Harbor: see New Plymouth. Presqwile Jougla: see Jougla Point. PRESSURE BAY: small arm in the W. side of Robertson Bay, lying between Cape Wood and Birthday Pt. along the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°25’S., 169°15’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. The Northern Party under Cdr. Victor L. A. Campbell, RN, experienced great difficulty in sledging across the pressure ice fringing the shore of Robertson Bay. PRESTON POINT: ice-covered point with mar- ginal rock exposures, which marks the N. end of Gillock I., near the junction of Lars Christensen and Ingrid Christensen Coasts; in about 70°03’S., 70°52’H. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in March 1947, and named by him for J. C. Preston, Jr., air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. PRESTRUD, MOUNT: one of a group of low- lying peaks barely protruding through the ice of the south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft. in el., at the SW. end of the group containing Mounts Hassel and Bjaaland, which stand about 20 mi. SW. of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°35’S., 163°15’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Lt. K. Prestrud, first officer on the exp. ship Fram and leader of the Eastern Sledge Party. Not adopted: Mount K. Prestrud. 248 PRESTRUD INLET: a re-entrant in the S. side of Edward VII Pen., at the NE. corner of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°25’S., 156°00’W. Named by the USAS, 1939-41, in honor of Lt. K. Prestrud, leader of the Eastern Sledge Party of the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, who first traversed this region in 1911. PREUSCHOFF RANGE: a N.-S. range of moun- tains about 20 mi. long projecting through the icecap at the edge of the polar plateau in New Schwabenland; in about 72°10’S., 4°20’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Franz Preuschoff, airplane engineer on the Passat, one of the flying boats used by the expe- dition. PRIDE, CAPE: cape which forms the E. side of the entrance to Elsehul, small bay along the N. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 37°59’°W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel who surveyed Elsehul in 1930. PRIESTLEY, MOUNT: mountain peak lying WNW. of Mt. Neumayer in the massif at the N. side of David Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 75°12’S., 161°25’E. First charted by the BrAE un- der Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for Raymond E. Priestley, geologist with the expedition. PRIESTLEY GLACIER: large valley glacier about 2.5 mi. wide, flowing from the interior high- land SE. of Mt. Baxter in a SE. direction to the N. end of the Nansen Sheet, on the E. Coast of Vic- toria Land; in about 74°25’S., 163°22’E. First ex- plored by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Raymond E. Priest- ley, geologist with the Northern Party. Not adopted: Priestly Glacier. Priestly Glacier: see Priestley Glacier. Primero de Mayo, Isla: see Lambda Island. PRINCE ALBERT MOUNTAINS: coastal range extending some 200 mi. northward of McMurdo Sound along the coast of Victoria Land; centering near 75°45’S., 161°30’E. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross on Feb. 17, 1841, and named by him for Prince Albert, consort of Queen Victoria of England. Not adopted: Prinz Albert Gebirge. PRINCE CHARLES STRAIT: strait about 5 mi. wide, between Cornwallis and Elephant Islands, in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°04’S., 54°40’W. This strait was known to sealers as early as 1821, but first record of its navigation was in 1839 by the brig Porpoise of the USEE squadron under Wilkes. Soundings of the strait were made by the vessel John Biscoe and the frigate H.M.S. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Sparrow in December 1948. Named for Prince Charles, son of Queen Elizabeth II of Great Britain. PRINCE GUSTAV CHANNEL: strait about 80 mi. long and from 4 to 15 mi. wide, separating James Ross and Vega Islands from that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen. lying between Cape Longing and the Tabarin Pen.; centering in 63°50’S., 58°15’W. Disc. in October 1903 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who named it for Crown Prince (later King) Gustav of Sweden. Not adopted: Crown Prince Gustav Channel, Kron- prins Gustav Channel, Kronprinz Gustaf Kanal [German], Kronprinz Gustav Kanal [German]. PRINCE HARALD COAST: that portion of the coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 34°E. and 40°E. Disc. during a flight on Feb. 4, 1937 by Viggo Widerge, Nils Romnaes, and Mrs. Ingrid Christensen of the Nor. exp. under Christensen, 1936-37, and named after the infant son of the Crown Prince of Norway. Not adopted: Prince Harald Land, Prins Harald Land [Norwegian]. Prince Harald Land: see Prince Harald Coast. Prince Olaf Harbor: see Prince Olav Harbor. Prince Olaf Mountains: see Prince Olav Moun- tains. Prince Olaf Rock; Prince Olav Rocks: see Olav Rocks. PRINCE OLAV COAST: that portion of the coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 40°E. and 45°E. Disc. by the Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen on a flight from the Norvegia in January 1930. Named for Crown Prince Olav of Norway. Not adopted: Crown Prince Olaf Land, Crown Prince Olav Coast, Crown Prince Olav Land, Kronprins Olav Land [Norwegian]. PRINCE OLAV HARBOR: small harbor in the SW. portion of Cook Bay, entered between Point Abrahamsen and Sheep Pt., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. The name was in use as early as 1912 and was given, prob- ably by Norwegian whalers, for Crown Prince Olav of Norway. Not adopted: Prince Olaf Harbor, Prins Olavs Havn [Norwegian]. Prince Olav Mountains: see Bush Mountains. PRINCE OLAV MOUNTAINS: mountain group of the Queen Maud Range stretching from Shackleton Gl. to Liv Gl. at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°05’S., 172°30’W. Disc. in 1911 by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named for the then Crown Prince of Norway. Not adopted: 424589 O -57 -17 249 Crown Prince Olaf Mountains, Crown Prince Olav Mountains, Crown Prince Olav’s Mountains, Kronprinz Olaf Berge [German], Prince Olaf Mountains. Prince Olavs Havn: see Prince Olav Harbor. Prince-Regent Luitpold Land: see Luitpold Coast. PRINCESS ASTRID COAST: that portion of the coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 5°00’E. and 20°30’E. Disc. in March 1931 by a Nor. whal- ing exp. under Halvorsen, and named for Princess Astrid of Norway. Not adopted: Princess Astrid Land, Prinsesse Astrid Land. Princess Astrid Land; Prinsesse Astrid Land: see Princess Astrid Coast. PRINCESS MARTHA COAST: that portion of the coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 5°E. and 20°W. The name Crown Princess Martha Land was originally applied by Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen to that section of the coast in the vicinity of Cape Norvegia which he disc. in Febru- ary 1930. Not adopted: Crown Princess Martha Land, Kronprinsesse Martha Land [Norwegian]. PRINCESS RAGNHILD COAST: that portion of the coast of Queen Maud Land lying between 20°30’E. and 34°00’E. Disc. in February 1931 by a Nor. exp. under Isachsen and Riiser-Larsen, and named by Riiser-Larsen for Princess Ragnhild of Norway. Not adopted: Princess Ragnhild Land, Prinsesse Ragnhild Land [Norwegian]. Principal, Canal: see Sound, The. Prinsesse Ragnhild Land; Princess Ragnhild Land: see Princess Ragnhild Coast. Prins Harald Land: see Prince Harald Coast. Prinz Albert Gebirge: see Prince Albert Moun- tains. Prinzregent Luitpold Land: see Luitpold Coast. PRION ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. N. of Luck Pt., lying in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°16’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, and so named because he observed petrels of the genus Prion on the island. Not adopted: Prion Islet. PRIOR ISLAND: ice-covered island about 1 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, lying close E. of Lamplugh I. and the mouth of Davis Gl., off the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°40’S., 162°58’E. First charted and named by the BrAE under Shackleton, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1907-9. Probably named for Dr. George Thurland Prior, Keeper of the Department of Minerals, Brit- ish Museum, 1909-27. PROCLAMATION ISLAND: small rocky island lying about 3 mi. W. of Cape Batterbee and about 1 mi. off the coast of Enderby Land; in about 65°50’S., 53°39’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson, 1929-31, and so named following the reading of a proclamation on its summit on Jan. 13, 1930 claiming the area for the British Crown. PROSPECT PASS: gently inclined, snow-covered pass at the SE. side of the Kinnear Mtns., on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 69°34’S., 67°35’W. Disc. and first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The name arose because, from the summit of the pass, there is a fine prospect across George VI Sound to the Douglas Range. PROTECTION COVE: small bay lying between Cape Klovstad and Newnes Gl. at the head of Rob- ertson Bay, along the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°38’S., 170°13’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, and so named because the exp. ship Southern Cross found protection here during a gale. PROVIDENCE COVE: small bay, bounded by ice cliffs, which lies at the foot of Remus Gl. in the SE. corner of Neny Fjord, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°19’S., 66°45’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was resurveyed in 1940-41 by members of the USAS, and so named by them because on first arrival it seemed providential that a site for the East Base was found so quickly and easily. It was soon de- termined, however, that the cove did not provide a suitable site for the base. PRYDZ BAY: deep embayment about 150 mi. wide, lying E. of Amery Ice Shelf off Lars Christen- sen and Ingrid Christensen Coasts; in about 69°00’S., and extending from about 73°00’E. to 79°00’E. Disc. and explored in February 1935 by a Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen in the Thorshaven. Named for Olaf Prydz, general manager of the Hvalfangernes Assuranceforening, Sandefjord, Norway. Not adopted: Mackenzie Sea, Olaf Prydz Bukt [Norwegian]. PSI ISLETS: group of small islets which lie close to the W. coast of Lambda I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 63°01’W. The name Psi, derived from the 23rd letter of the Greek al- phabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of these islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islotes Ballesteros [Spanish]. 250 PUBLICATION ICE TONGUES: a group of large glacier tongues extending generally NW. from In- grid Christensen Coast which merge and fill the E. half of Sandefjord Ice Bay; centering in about 69°40’S., 74°30’E. The following glaciers, reading from NE. to SW., have prominent tongues which form this group: Polararboken, Polar Record, Polarforschung, I] Polo, and Polar Times Glaciers. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and so named by him because the associated glacier names commemorate polar publications. Puerto: for names beginning thus see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Puerto Anderson see Anderson, Puerto. (Puerto is a Spanish word for “harbor,” “port.’’) PUFFBALL ISLETS: scattered group of small, low, mainly ice-covered islets and rocks which ex- tend about 10 mi. in a NESW. direction, lying in southern Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palm- er Pen. The center of the group lies about 23 mi. NNE. of Cape Jeremy; in 69°02’S., 68°30’W. First visited and surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The named, applied by FIDS, derives from asso- ciation with Mushroom I. which lies 14 mi. NE. of this group. PULITZER, MOUNT: mountain rising to about 4,500 ft. in el., distinguished by sharp, serrated ridges, standing about 15 mi. W. of Robert Scott Gl., about 25 mi. S. of its terminus at the Ross Ice Shelf, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°45’S., 154°30’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Joseph Pulitzer, publisher of the St. Louis Post-Dispatch, and a patron of the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. PULLEN ISLAND: snow-covered island about 5 mi. long, which rises to about 1,600 ft. in el. at its N. end, lying near the center of Violante Inlet, — along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°35’S., 60°57’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940, and named for William A. Pullen, Aviation Machinist’s Mate at the East Base. PULPIT MOUNTAIN: conspicuous, red-colored mountain, about 2,900 ft. in el., standing 2 mi. W. of Spence Hbr. at the E. end of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°14’W. Named by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49. The feature resembles a pulpit when seen from the east. Punch Bowl: see Devils Punchbowl. PURVIS GLACIER: glacier flowing generally E. into the W. side of Possession Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°10’W. Charted GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, and named for John Murray. It was renamed Purvis Glacier, possibly to avoid confusion with Murray Glacier in northern Victoria Land, for a seaman on the Alert, a motor boat used for survey work in South Georgia by DI personnel in 1928-30. Not adopted: John Murray Gletscher.[German]. PYLON POINT: rocky promontory about 2,800 ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. SW. of Three Slice Nunatak and marking the N. end of the main mountainous mass of Joerg Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°06’S., 65°05’W. Pylon Point lies in the area first seen by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and crossed by Lincoln Ellsworth on his flight of Nov. 21, 1935. So named by the US-SCAN because the various flights and sledge trips of the USAS, 1939-41, rounded it on their way S. along the E. coast of Palmer Peninsula. Not adopted: Clarkson Point. PY POINT: point about 1 mi. long and 0.25 mi. wide, forming the S. end of Doumer I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°52’S., 63°36’W. Disc. by the FrAEK under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for Monsieur Py, Pres. of the French Chamber of Commerce in Buenos Aires at that time. Pyramid, The: see Pyramid Island. PYRAMID, THE: pyramidal-shaped nunatak about 1,900 ft. in el., standing about 1 mi. E. of Mt. Carrel and 1.5 mi. SE. of the head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°01’W. Disc. and named by a party under J. Gunnar An- dersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Not adopted: Pyramiden [Swedish]. Pyramiden: see Pyramid, The. PYRAMID ISLAND: conspicuous, pillar-shaped island, about 675 ft. in el. and 0.5 mi. in diameter, lying about 2 mi. NNE. of Williams Pt., Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°24’S., 60°09’W. ‘This island, presumably known to sealers in the area since about 1820, was charted and given this descriptive name by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. Not adopted: The Pyramid. Pyramid Mountain; Pyramid Peak: see Rhamnus, Mount. PYRAMID MOUNTAIN:-conspicuous, pyramidal peak about 9,000 ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. N. of Mt. Albert Markham, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°26’S., 157°15’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4. PYRAMID PEAK: peak, about 1,300 ft. in el., surmounting Cape Buller at the W. side of the en- trance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 251 54°00’S., 37°23’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in the 1929-30 season. Pyramid Point: see Tilt Rock. PYRAMID ROCK: rock lying in the S. part of the entrance to Lapeyrére Bay, along the NE. coast of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°22’S., 63°09’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery in 1927. PYROX ISLET: horseshoe-shaped islet lying 5 mi. E. of the summit of Mt. Nemesis at the head of Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 66°41’W. First surveyed by the USAS, 1939-41. Resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, who so named it because of pyroxenic rocks found there. Not adopted: Neny Glacier Island. Quarters Bay: see Winter Quarters Bay. QUEEN ALEXANDRA RANGE: range of dome- shaped mountains, intermingled with a few sharp conical peaks, lying W. of Beardmore Gl. at the head of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°S., 169°E. Disc. in December 1908 by the BrAE under Shackle- ton, and named for Alexandra, Queen of England, 1901-10. Not to be confused with Alexandra Mountains in 77°30’S., 152°00’W. Not adopted: Alexandra Mountains, Alexandra Range, Konigin Alexandra Gebirge [German]. QUEEN MARY COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica lying between Cape Filchner, in about 92°18’E., and Cape Hordern, in about 100°26’E. Disc. in February 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, who named it for Queen Mary of England. Not adopted: Dronning Mary Land [Norwegian], Konigin Mary Land [German], Queen Mary Land. Queen Mary Land: see Queen Mary Coast. QUEEN MAUD BAY: small bay about 1 mi. S. of King Haakon Bay, along the S. coast of South Georgia;. in about 54°14’S., 37°21’W. Roughly charted in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellings- hausen. It was named prior to 1922 for Queen Maud, wife of King Haakon VII of Norway, prob- ably by Norwegian whalers who frequented this coast. Not adopted: Kénigin Maud Bucht [Ger- man], Queen Maud Harbor. Queen Maud Harbor: see Queen Maud Bay. QUEEN MAUD LAND: that part of Antarctica lying between Coats Land and Enderby Land, from 20°00’W. to 45°00’E. This name, given for Queen Maud of Norway, represents an expansion of the original core area, between 37°00’E. and 50°00’E. Disc. in 1930 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen. Not adopted: Dronning Maud Land [Norwegian]. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Queen Maud Mountains: see Queen Maud Range. QUEEN MAUD RANGE: major range of moun- tains standing at the head of Ross Ice Shelf in the general vicinity of Beardmore Gl., in about 84°S., 174°E. and extending in a SE. direction for an indeterminate distance beyond 87°S., 145°W. Disc. in 1911 by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for the Queen of Norway. Not adopted: Dronning Mauds Fjell [Norwegian], Konigin Maud Gebirge [German], Queen Maud’s Range, Queen Maud Mountains. Queen Mountain: see Queer Mountain. Queens Bay: see Borge Bay. QUEENSLAND, MOUNT: high peak about 25 mi. WNW. of Mt. Melbourne, standing to the E. of Mt. New Zealand, in Victoria Land; in about 74°00’S., 163°35’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who named this peak because of the generous as- sistance given the exp. by both the govt. and people of Queensland. QUEER MOUNTAIN: mountain about 3,400 ft. in el., standing at the head of Miller Gl. about 1 mi. W. of Killer Ridge, in Victoria Land; in about 77°08’S., 161°48’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Not adopted: Queen Mountain. Querthal: see Cross Valley. QUERY ISLET: prominent rocky islet lying be- tween the foot of Clarke Gl. and Keyhole It. on the S. side of Mikkelsen Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°47’S., 67°12’W. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who so named it because of the difficulty in deciding from a distance whether the feature was an islet or part of the mainland. QUILP ROCK: small, isolated rock in Laubeuf Fjord, lying 3.5 mi. SSE. of the S. tip of Pinero I. and 1.5 mi. off the NW. side of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°38’S., 67°46’W. First surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them after the dwarf, Daniel Quilp, a vicious, ill- tempered character in The Old Curiosity Shop, by Charles Dickens. QUINTANA ISLETS: group of islets and rocks about 5 mi. N. of the Betbeder Islets and some 17 mi. WNW. of the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°11’S., 65°00’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for Manuel Quintana, Pres. of the Argentine Re- public, 1904-6. Charted by the BGLE under Ry- mill, 1934-37. Not adopted: Quintana Islands. 252 RABOT ISLAND: island about 12 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, lying about 1 mi. SW. of Renaud I., in the Biscoe Is.; in 65°52’S., 66°09’W. Rabot Island was first charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Char- cot, who named it for Charles Rabot. RABOT, MOUNT: southernmost of three moun- tains lying about 45 mi. inland from the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf, in the Queen Alexandra Range, and about 30 mi. SSE. of Mt. Markham; in about 83°25’S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for Charles Rabot, editor of La Géographie, of the Geo- graphical Soc. of Paris, an outstanding glaciologist of that period. Rade Point: see Kade Point. RADFORD MOUNTAINS: mountains about 3,000 ft. in el., standing W. of Mt. Saunders in the Edsel Ford Ranges, and occupying a relatively isolated frontal position on Sulzberger Bay, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°52’S., 146°40’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the Eastern Flight of Dec. 5, 1929, and named for V. Adm. Arthur W. Radford, USN, Deputy Chief of Naval Operations (Air) during the exploration by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and later Adm. and Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. RAE, POINT: point marking the N. side of the entrance to Scotia Bay on the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°37’W. First charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, who named it for John Rae, Scottish Arctic ex- plorer and member of the Sir John Richardson exp., 1854, who learned the fate of the Sir John Franklin Arctic exp., 1847. Ragged Island: see Rugged Island. Ragnhild Coast: see Princess Ragnhild Coast. Rainoff’s Island: see Gibbs Island. RALLIER DU BATY ISLET: islet about 0.25 mi. in extent, with a smaller islet off its N. side, lying 0.25 mi. W. of the NW. extremity of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°04’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, and named by him for R. Rallier du Baty, merchant marine cadet who signed on as seaman on the exp. ship Frangais. Not adopted: Rallier du Baty Islets. RAMP ROCK: the westernmost of a number of rocks which extend 2.5 mi. N. and NW. of Johan- nesen Pt., Main I., at the W. extremity of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°21’W. The name “Laavebrua” has been used for this feature by GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA whalers and sealers at South Georgia. It is a descriptive Norwegian term, meaning literally “threshing floor bridge” or “barn bridge.” In Norwegian barns used for storing hay, there is a ramp up which the wagons are driven before tipping. ‘“Laavebrua,” which is not strictly trans- latable is this ramp. The Br-APC recommended in 1954 that the name Ramp Rock be approved for this feature. The name Lavebrua Islet is al- ready approved for an islet near Deception Island. Not adopted: Laavebrua [Norwegian]. RAMSAY, MOUNT: peak about 1,600 ft. in el., about 0.5 mi. W. of Uruguay Cove, on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°45’W. Charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and named after Allan Ramsay, chief en- gineer of the exp. ship Scotia, who died on Aug. 6, 1903 and was buried at the foot of the peak. RANDALL ROCKS: group of rocky islets and small rocks situated 0.5 mi. off the SW. corner of Millerand I. and trending in a WNW.-ESE. di- rection for 1 mi., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°17’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and named for Terence M. Randall, FIDS radio opera- tor at Stonington I., 1947-49. RANVIKA: cove indenting the E. coast of Peter I Island, near the NE. corner of the island; in about 68°46’S., 90°25’W. Disc. in 1927 by Nor. exp. under Tofte in the Odd I. The name may derive from the estate of Lars Christensen, sponsor of the exp., situated at the head of Ranvik, a bay in Norway. The word vik or vika are Norwegian for bay or cove. Not adopted: Ranvik, Ranvik Bay. Ranvik Bay: see Ranvika. RANVIK BAY: open bay, about 13 mi. wide, lying between Rauer Is. and Ranvik Ice Tongue, along Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°02’S., 77°30’E. Disc. and charted in February 1935 by a Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen in the Thorshavn. Named for the estate of Lars Christensen, sponsor of the exp., situated at the head of Ranvik, a bay in Norway. Not adopted: Ranvik [Norwegian]. Ranvikbreen: see Ranvik Ice Tongue. RANVIK ICE TONGUE: small ice tongue, about 4 mi. long and from 4 to 6 mi. wide, extending NW. from the continental ice overlying Ingrid Chris- tensen Coast and filling the SE. portion of Ranvik Bay; in about 69°10’S., 77°20’E. Charted by Nor- wegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under 253 Lars Christensen, and named Ranvikbreen because of its close association with Ranvik Bay. The generic ice tongue is approved as a more appro- priate term on the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947. Not adopted: Ranvikbreen [Norwegian]. RANVIK ISLAND: small, rocky island, about 1.7 mi. long, which rises to about 400 ft. in el., mark- ing the second largest of the Rauer Is. and lying near the S. end of the group, close NW. of Brown Gl. on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°54’S., 77°43’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Ranviktangen, as the feature was believed to form part of a coastal ridge at that time. The name Ranvik Island was proposed by John H. Roscoe, who determined, from his 1952 study of USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, that the feature lies offshore from the coastal outcrops. Not adopted: Ranviktangen [Norwegian]. Ranviktangen: see Ranvik Island. RASMUSSEN, CAPE: black cliff almost 800 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to Waddington Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°06’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Rauer Group: see Rauer Islands. RAUER ISLANDS: group of rocky islands, islets and rocks, which measures about 9 mi. across, lying between Sgrsdal Glacier Tongue and Ranvik Bay, close off Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°50’S., 77°38’E. Disc. and roughly charted in February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, who applied the name Rauer, probably after the island by that name lying in Oslofjord opposite Tgnsberg, Norway. Recompiled by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christen- sen, and later by John H. Roscoe from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947. Not adopted: Rauer [Norwegian], Rauer Group. RAVN ROCK: submerged rock lying in the cen- ter of Neptunes Bellows, the entrance to Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°00’S., 60°34’W. Charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Named for the whale catcher Ravn, based at Deception I. at that time. RAWSON MOUNTAINS: crescent-shaped range of tabular, ice-covered mountains about 16 mi. long which rise to about 9,000 ft. in el., standing GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SE. of the SE. end of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns., and terminating in Mt. Wyatt; in about 86°43’S., 155°00’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for Frederick H. Rawson, American banker and contributor to the Byrd Antactic Ex- peditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted: Frederick H. Rawson Mountains. RAYMOND, MOUNT: peak at the SE. end of the Dominion Range, rising above the plateau ice to about 8,500 ft. in el., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°58’S., 174°00’E. Disc. and named in December: 1908 by the Southern Journey Party of the BrAE under Shackleton. Raymond Fosdick Mountains; Raymond Fosdick Range: see Fosdick Mountains. RAYNER PEAK: mountain about 5,500 ft. in el., visible at sea from a great distance, standing S. of the head of Edward VII Bay near the junction of Enderby Land and Kemp Coast; in about 67°27’S., 55°52’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby and named for George W. Rayner, zoologist on the DI staff and leader of this expedition. Not adopted: Kjuringen | Norwegian]. RAYNER POINT: point marked by a rocky peak forming the N. side of the entrance to Gibbon Bay, on the E. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 45°12’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Capt. Petter Sdrlle, a Norwegian whaler. Recharted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Dis- covery II, and named by them for George W. Rayner. Razorback Island: see Big Razorback Island; Little Razorback Island. REA, MOUNT: prominent mountain about 3,700 ft. in el., with a vertical face on its W. side called The Billboard, standing between Arthur Davis and Boyd Glaciers in the Edsel Ford Ranges, and front- ing on Sulzberger Bay, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°03’S., 145°35’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on the Eastern Flight of Dec. 5, 1929, and named for Mr. and Mrs. Rea, of Pittsburgh, Pa., contribu- tors to the expedition. RECLUS, CAPE: cape forming the N. tip of the peninsula between Wilhelmina Bay and Charlotte Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°23’S., 61°48’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, who named it for Elisée Reclus, noted French geographer and author. 254 RED BAY: small, open bay lying close S. of the W. extremity of Red Rock Ridge, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°18’S., 67°11’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The bay was resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them for its association with Red Rock Ridge. REDCLIFF NUNATAK: red granite ridge about 1,800 ft. in el., rising about 4 mi. E. of Mt. Suess along the S. flank of Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°02’S., 162°04’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and so named because of its color. Not adopted: Redcliff, Redcliffs Nunakol. Redcliffs Nunakol: see Redcliff Nunatak. RED ISLAND: circular, flat-topped island, about 1 mi. in diameter and about 1,600 ft. in el., with reddish cliffs of volcanic rock, lying about 3.5 mi. NW. of Cape Lachman, James Ross I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°44’S., 57°52’W. Disc. and named by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4. Not adopted: Rodon [Swedish], Rote Insel [German]. RED ISLAND: conspicuous red lava island, about 300 ft. in el., which lies about 0.5 mi. N. of Laurens Pen., Heard I., and to which it is tied by a low isthmus; in 52°58’S., 73°18’E. It was so named because of its color, probably by American sealers at Heard I. in the period following their initiation of sealing there in 1855. The name ap- pears on the chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. RED ROCK RIDGE: conspicuous reddish- colored promontory, about 2,300 ft. in el., which projects from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and separates Neny Fjord and Rymill Bay; in 68°18’S., 67°08’W. Surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, who so named it because of its color. Further surveys in 1948 by the FIDS have identi- fied this ridge as the feature first sighted in 1909 and named “Ile Pavie” or “Cap Pavie” by the FrAE under Charcot, but the name Red Rock Ridge is now too firmly established to alter. The name Pavie Ridge has been assigned to the prominent rocky ridge at 68°34’S., 66°59’W. REECE, MOUNT: sharp, ice-free peak about 3,600 ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. W. of Pitt Point. It is the highest point of a ridge forming the S. wall of Victory Gl., on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°50’S., 58°32’W. Charted in 1945 by the FIDS, and named for Lt. A. Reece, leader of the FIDS Deception I. base in 1945, and meteorologist and geologist at the Hope Bay base in 1946. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA REECE PASS: a N.-S. col between the main massif and the eastern member of the Fosdick Mtns., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°31’S., 144°35’W. Disc. on aerial flights made from West Base of the USAS in 1940 and visited by the Edsel Ford Mountains Biological Party. Named for J. A. Reece, radio operator at West Base. REEF POINT: point bounded by a small reef forming the W. end of Cook I., in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°13’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. REEVES, MOUNT: mountain about 5,380 ft. in el., in the Britannia Range, standing SW. of Cape Murray on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°40’S., 158°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, who probably named this feature for Edward Ayearst Reeves, Map Curator and Instruc- tor in Practical Astronomy and Surveying to the Royal Geographical Soc., 1900-33. REEVES, MOUNT: mountain about 6,300 ft. in el. on the E. side of Adelaide I., standing 5.5 mi. NE. of Mt. Bouvier and 7 mi. W. of The Gullet; in 67°10’S., 67°58’W. First sighted and roughly sur- veyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Re- surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for Edward A. Reeves, Map-curator and Instructor in Survey at the Royal Geographical Soc., 1900-33. REEVES GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. wide and 25 mi. long, descending from the high in- terior upland between Mt. Nansen and Mt. Larsen, and merging with the confluent ice of Nansen Sheet along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°45’S., 162°27’E. Disc. by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. Probably named for Edward Ayearst Reeves. REFERENCE ISLET: rocky islet 2 mi. WNW. of the W. tip of Neny I. and 1.5 mi. SE. of Millerand I., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°10’W. First roughly charted in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The islet was surveyed by the FIDS in 1947, and so named by them because it served as a convenient reference point for survey work. REFERRING PEAK: conspicuous black peak about 3,800 ft. in el., standing on the N. side of Mackay Gl. about 1.5 mi. W. of the mouth of Cleve- land Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 76°56’S., 161°54’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. The name suggests the easy identification of the peak and its possible use as a landmark. 255 REFUGE ISLETS: small group of islets lying about 0.5 mi. from the ice cliffs at the SW. side of Red Rock Ridge, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°21’S., 67°10’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who used these islets as a depot for sledge journeys S. from the southern base in the Debenham Islands. Not adopted: Refuge Islands. REGNARD PEAKS: group of rounded, snow- covered peaks probably over 4,000 ft. in el., stand- ing about 4 mi. NW. of Mt. Peary and 5 mi. ESE. of Mt. Scott, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°11’S., 63°53’W. Disc. and named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. Not adopted: Regnard Peaks. Regreso, Cap: see Return Point. REGULA RANGE: mountain range about 9,500 ft. in el., extending about 30 mi. in a NW.-SE. di- rection across the mouth of Penck Trough, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°40’S., 3°30’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Herbert Regula, chief meteorologist with the expedition. REICHELDERFER, CAPE: rounded headland which is almost completely ice covered lying at the W. side of the N. entrance to Stefansson Str., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°22’S., 62°43’W. This cape was seen by Sir Hubert Wilkins, who explored this coast on his aerial flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Charted in 1940 by the USAS, and errone- ously called Cape Rymill at that time. Resighted in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it for Francis W. Reichelderfer, Chief of the U. S. Weather Bureau, which loaned weather instru- ments and instructed RARE members in their operation. Not adopted: Cape Rymill (q.v.). REID, MOUNT: mountain about 10,160 ft. in el., standing about 11 mi. SE. of Mt. Longstaff in the Queen Alexandra Range, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°05’S., 166°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, who named it for Alfred Reid, manager of the expedition. REID GLACIER: glacier, about 2.5 mi. wide and at least 5 mi. long, which flows S. to enter Bigour- dan Fjord opposite The Narrows, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°29’S., 67°16’W. First roughly charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. The lower reaches of the glacier were surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and named by them for Harry F. Reid (1859-1944), prof. of geology at Johns Hopkins Univ., Baltimore, noted for his studies of glacier flow and stratification in Alaska and the Alps. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA REID GLACIER: steep glacier descending be- tween Melba and Davis Peninsulas to the Shackle- ton Ice Shelf, on Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°40’S., 98°30’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the Eastern Sledge Party under Wild of the AAE, 1911-14, and named for Sir George Reid, Common- wealth High Commissioner in London in 1911. REID ISLET: islet at the E. side of the entrance to Iceberg Bay, along the S. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°30’W. The name Reid appears on a map of these islands by Capt. Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. Not adopted: Reid Islets. REINBOLT HILLS: group of rocky hills, of low to moderate height, about 3 mi. wide and of un- determined length, standing at the S. side of the confluence of Kreitzer and Baker Three Glaciers, near the junction of Lars Christensen and Ingrid Christensen Coasts; in about 70°20’S., 72°32’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for Lt. Fred L. Reinbolt, USN, co-pilot on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. REIST ROCKS: small group of coastal rocks projecting above the continental ice, fronting on Knox Coast midway between Robinson and Haw- kins Glaciers; in about 66°33’S., 107°26’E. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Wilbur H. Reist, tractor driver with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in transporting shore parties which established astronomical control stations from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. RELAY BAY: bay on the SW. side of Robertson Bay, lying between Penelope Pt. and Islands Pt., along the coast of northern Victoria Land; in about 71°30’S., 169°32’E. First charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAK, 1910-13, under Scott. RELIEF INLET: narrow, winding re-entrant, about 10 mi. long, in the NE. side of the Drygalski Ice Tongue, formed along a shear plane caused by differential ice movement lying along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°18’S., 163°40’E. So named by the South Magnetic Polar Party of the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, because, after al- most giving up hope of rescue, the Nimrod picked up the party. REMENCHUS GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing WNW. from the continental ice overlying Knox Coast and termi- nating in a small, but prominent tongue at the SE. 256 end of the Highjump Arch.; in about 66°02’S., 101°22’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for John F. Remenchus, chief aviation pilot, who assisted USN Op. Wml. shore party op- erations and made photographic flights along Wil- helm II, Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts in January-February 1948. REMUS GLACIER: glacier, about 5 mi. long, which flows from the N. slopes of Mt. Lupa north- westward along the NE. end of the Blackwall Mtns. into Providence Cove, Neny Fjord, on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 68°20’S., 66°43’W. The lower reaches of the glacier were first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, who so named it for its asso- ciation with Romulus GIl., whose head lies near the head of this glacier. RENARD, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the entrance to Flandres Bay and separating the Danco and Graham Coasts, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°01’S., 63°43’W. Disc. in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, and named for Pro- fessor Renard, of the Univ. of Gent, a member of the Belgica Commission and the Belgian Royal Academy. RENAUD ISLAND: island about 22 mi. long and averaging about 6 mi. wide, situated between the Pitt Is. and Rabat I., in the Briscoe Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 65°50’W. The island was roughly charted and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Rendezvous Bluff: see Discovery Bluff. Renier, Cap; Renier, Point: see Pin Point. RENNICK BAY: extensive embayment of the Oates Coast immediately W. of Cape Cheetham; in about 70°10’S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Scott, when the exp. ship Terra Nova explored west- ward of Cape North in 1911. Named for Lt. Henry E. de P. Rennick, RN, an officer on the Terra Nova. Aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946- 47, indicate that this bay extends inland as much as 50 miles. Rescapés, Iles des: see Rescapé Islets. RESCAPE ISLETS: small group of rocky islets lying in the entrance to Port Martin, about 0.8 mi. W. of Manchot It. and about 0.6 mi. NW. of Cape Margerie, off Adélie Coast; in 66°49’S., 141°22’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946- 47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because the small motor boat Skgd- ern, used with some risk to complete hydrographic GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA and geodetic surveys of the Port Martin area, sank at her moorings during an extended storm. Res- capé is the French spelling for escape. Not adopted: Iles des Rescapés [French]. RESCUE ROCK: submerged rock marked by breakers, about 1 mi. NE. of Skua Islet, in the entrance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 37°14’°W. The rock was charted in 1930 by DI survey personnel. It was so named because a whale catcher passing near this rock sighted a flag on Skua Islet, eventually leading to the rescue of the survey party at Camp Bay where their ves- sel had run aground. RESOLUTION POINT: point on the NE. side of Cook I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S., 27°07’W. Cook I. was probably first sighted by Capt. James Cook in 1775. The point was charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named after Cook’s ship H.M.S. Resolution. RESSAC ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about 0.9 mi. E. of Houle It. and about 4 mi. NE. of Zélée Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in about 66°42’S., 141°14’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Lio- tard, 1949-51, and so named because the surf breaks over the islet. Ressac is the French word for surf. RESTITUTION POINT: point marking the N. side of the entrance to South Bay in Prince Olav Hbr., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’'W. The name Factory Point, derived from the nearby whaling station (now no longer operat- ing) was given for this feature by DI personnel in 1927. There is also a Factory Point at Leith Hbr., less than 20 mi. to the NW. Since Factory Point in Leith Hbr. is better known locally, it has been retained. To avoid confusion the name Fac- tory Point is rejected for the feature now described, and a new name Restitution Point is approved. The S.S Restitution, a floating factory ship, worked for many years at Prince Olav Hbr. before the shore station was built there. Not adopted: Factory Point. RETHVAL POINT: ice-free point forming the S. side of the entrance to Paal Hbr. on the E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°36’W. Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC in 1954 after the Rethval Whaling Co. of Oslo, the first company to start whaling in the South Ork- ney Is. in 1911-12. RETURN POINT: rocky slope forming the SW. tip of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 46°02’W. Disc. on Dec. 7, 1821 by Capt. 257 George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer. Named by Powell who, after making a landing on this point of land, returned directly aboard ship after viewing the coast to the eastward. Not adopted: Cap Regreso [French]. REUSCH GLACIER: glacier less than 1 mi. wide descending into the W. part of Relay Bay, an in- dentation of Robertson Bay in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°29’S., 169°25’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named this feature for Dr. H. Reusch, then Pres. of the Norwegian Geographical Society. Not adopted: Doctor Rusch Glacier, Reush Glacier. Reush Glacier: see Reusch Glacier. Revelle Bay: see Revelle Inlet. REVELLE INLET: broad, ice-filled inlet which recedes W. some 15 mi. between Capes Agassiz and Keeler, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°40’S., 63°26’W. The inlet lies in the area ex- plored from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, but it was first charted by the USAS in 1940. It was resighted by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for Roger Revelle, oceanographer at the Scripps Inst. for Oceanographic Research, who gave tech- nical assistance during the fitting out of the Ronne expedition. Not adopted: Revelle Bay. REY, CAPE: dark rocky promontory standing between the SW. side of Marin Darbel Bay and the NE. side of Lallemand Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°44’S., 66°30’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Lt. Joseph J. Rey, French Navy, meteorologist of the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. REYNOLDS, CAPE: rocky point several hundred ft. in el., lying along the SW. shore of Geikie Inlet and marking the W. side of the mouth of Clarke Gl., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 75°34’S., 162°48’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who probably named this feature for Jeremiah (John) N. Reynolds, who long agitated for American exploration in the Antarctic, and who was one of the principal promoters of the USEE, 1838-42. REYNOLDS, MOUNT: snow-capped mountain about 3,700 ft. in el., marked by steep, rocky lower slopes, standing at the S. side of Violante Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°42’S., 61°16’W. Disc. by members of the USAS in a flight from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Jeremiah (John) N. Reynolds, long-time protag- onist (1826-38) of American exploration and ex- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA pansion in the Pacific and the Antarctic. Not adopted: Cape Poindexter, Cape Reynolds. REYNOLDS TROUGH: low trough about 6 mi. wide and 65 mi. long, extending WSW. from the SW. end of Paulding Bay, and situated between a low, ice-covered ridge on the N. and a moderately steep, ice-covered escarpment of the interior pla- teau to the S., close behind the E. end of Sabrina Coast; centering in about 66°55’S., 121°00’E. The trough is marked by an elongated series of promi- nent meltwater ponds along the lower end of its S. flank, and except for its seaward end close S. of Cape Southard, the trough is relatively free from crevasses as it rises gradually westward to the con- tinental ice slopes. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Ens. Allan J. Reynolds, USN, navigator of one of the three USN Op. Hjp. crews which completed trimetrogon photographic cover- age of the major portion of the Antarctic coast be- tween 15° and 165°, east longitude. REX, MOUNT: mountain about 10,500 ft. in el., standing E. of Mt. Peterson in the Ellsworth High- land; in about 74°57’S., 76°55’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for Lt. Cdr. Daniel F. Rex, USN, of the Of- fice of Naval Research, who made important con- tributions to the planning of the scientific research program and the equipment of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Daniel Rex. RHAMNUS, MOUNT: mountain, about 2,900 ft. in el., which lies 2 mi. NE. of Mt. Nemesis on the N. side of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 66°50’W. Seen from the W. it appears as a mainly snow-covered pyramid. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, who applied the name. The name Mount Rhamnus derives from association with Mt. Nemesis. According to the mythological story, the Greek goddess Nemesis had a celebrated sanctuary at Rhamnus in Attica. Not adopted: Pyramid Mountain, Pyramid Peak. Rhino Horn Rock: see Rhino Rock. RHINO ROCK: prominent black rock with steep sides rising to about 2,300 ft. in el., situated about 5 mi. SSW. of Cape Rymill on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°34’S., 62°32’W. It was named Rhino Horn Rock for its suggestive appearance by members of the East Base of the USAS who charted the area on land and from the air in 1940, but the name has been shortened to Rhino Rock. Not adopted: Rhino Horn Rock. 258 RHO ISLETS: group of small islets and rocks which lie immediately N. of Lambda I. and mark the NW. extremity of the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°17’S., 63°00’W. The name Rho, de- rived from the 17th letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of these islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islotes Boulier [Spanish]. RHYOLITE ISLETS: group of islets and rocks, which extend in an E—W. direction about 4 mi., lying about 9 mi. SE. of Powder It. and close off the N. side of the mouth of Eureka GI. in George VI Sound; in 69°40’S., 68°35’W. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because the islets are largely composed of rhyolite. RICHARD BLACK COAST: that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Boggs, in 70°33’S., 61°23’W., to Cape Mackintosh, in 72°53/S., 60°03’W. This coast was disc. and photographed from the air by members of East Base of the USAD, 1939-41, on a flight, Dec. 30, 1940. The most southerly point reached was Wright Inlet in 74°05’S., but features as far S. as Bowman Pen. are identifiable in the aerial photo- graphs taken on the flight. Named for Cdr. Rich- ard B. Black, USNR, leader of the December 30 flight and commanding officer of the East Base. RICHARDSON, MOUNT: peak on the SE. cor- ner of the main massif of the Fosdick Mtns., just W. of Reece Pass, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°32’S., 144°38’W. Disc. on aerial flights from West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for Harrison H. Richardson, meteor- ological observer of the Edsel Ford Mountains Bio- logical Party, which visited this area in November-— December 1940. Richard Russell, Mount: see Russell, Mount. Richthofen Sound: see Richthofen Valley. RICHTHOFEN VALLEY: glacier-filled valley about 4 mi. wide at its mouth and extending W. for an undetermined distance, at the N. side of Cape McCarroll on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 65°58’S., 62°45’W. Disc. in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who named it for Baron Fer- dinand von Richthofen, German geographer and geologist. Not adopted: Richthofen Sound. RIDGE ISLAND: ridge-shaped island about 6 mi. long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 1 mi. wide, lying 3 mi. N. of Horseshoe I. in the center of Bourgeois Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°42’S., 67°06’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA RIDGE PEAK: pyramidal rocky peak, about 1,700 ft. in el., from which a prominent ridge ex- tends E., standing 6 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay and 3 mi. E. of the N. portion of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°31’S., 57°03’W. This area was first explored by a party of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Ridge Peak was charted and named by the FIDS, 1946. RIDLEY BEACH: a cuspate beach feature form- ing a triangle about 1 mi. long on each side, lying about 1 mi. S. of Cape Adare, on the W. side of the peninsula, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°18’S., 170°13’E. This was the camp site of the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who gave the camp his mother’s maiden name. The name was applied to the entire feature in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. RIDLEY ISLAND: island about 2 mi. N. of False Round Pt., northern King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°50’S., 57°57’W. This is- land was known to both the American and British sealers as early as 1822, and the name Ridley has been well established in international usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Ridley’s Isle. RIGHT WHALE BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide, lying S. of Nameless Pt., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°41’W. The name dates back to at least 1922 and is now well estab- lished in international usage. The right whale is a species of whale found in this area. RIGHT WHALE ROCKS: group of rocks about 0.25 mi. N. of Barff Pt., at the E. side of the en- trance to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°24"W. The name Merton Rocks was used for this feature on a chart of Cumberland Bay by personnel of H.M.S. Sappho in 1906, but the name Right Whale Rocks is retained because of wider and more recent acceptance. Not adopted: Merton Rocks. RIISER-LARSEN, MOUNT: the highest peak, about 6,100 ft. in el., of the Tula Range, in Enderby Land; in about 67°00’S., 50°50’E. Named by the BANZARE under Mawson, in January 1930, for Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen,. leader of a Nor. exp. in the Norvegia which was also exploring in this region in that season. Not adopted: Mount Riiser Larsen. RIISER-LARSEN PENINSULA: a broad projec- tion of the continental margin marking the NE. end of Princess Ragnhild Coast and forming the W. portal to Ltitzow-Holm Bay; in about 68°30’S., 33°50’E. Named for Capt. Hjalmar Riiser-Larsen 259 who disc. it in a flight on Feb. 21, 1931. adopted: Cook Peninsula. Not RILEY GLACIER: heavily crevassed glacier, about 14 mi. long and 17 mi. wide, flowing westward from the W. side of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound between the Traverse Mtns. and Mt. Dixey; in 70°03’S., 68°10’W. First sighted and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS and named for Quintin T. P. M. Riley, assistant meteorologist of the BGLE, 1934-37. RIME PEAK: the summit, about 3,700 ft. in el., of a mountain at the E. side of Sunshine Gl., Coro- nation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 45°26’W. The name, applied by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49, is descriptive of the permanent appearance of the peak which is heavily covered with hoarfrost, or rime. RIO BRANCO, MOUNT: mountain about 3,200 ft. in el., about 2.5 mi. E. of Cape Trois Perez, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°26’S., 64°01’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Baron Rio Branco, at that time Minister of Foreign Affairs of Brazil. Not adopted: Mount Branco, Sommet Rio Branco [French]. Rio Branco, Sommet: see Rio Branco, Mount. Ritscher-Land: see Ritscher Upland. RITSCHER PEAK: prominent peak about 9,900 ft. in el., situated about 7 mi. WSW. of Mt. Mentzel in the NE. portion of the Wohlthat Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in about 72°22’S., 13°25’E. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, and named for Captain Alfred Ritscher, leader of the expedition. RITSCHER UPLAND: an upland consisting of a heterogeneous collection of mountain ranges, peaks, and associated depressions in New Schwabenland, extending NE. from about 74°30’S., 9°00’W. along the W. border of the Mihlig-Hof- mann Mtns. to about 71°00’S., 1°00’W. Disc. by the GerAE, 1938-39, and named for Capt. Alfred Ritscher, leader of the expedition. Not adopted: Ritscher-Land [German]. RIVETT, MOUNT: bare, rugged peak about 1,900 ft. in el., the most northern and eastern of the Gustav Bull Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°49’S., 66°13’E. Early in January 1930, the BANZARE under Mawson sighted land in this area and made an aerial observation flight. The exp. landed on nearby Scullin Monolith on Feb. 13, 1931 and named this peak, probably for Sir A. C. David Rivett, Deputy Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Commonwealth (Aus- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA tralia) Council for Scientific and Industrial Re- search since 1927. Not adopted: Rivett Mountain. Ronald Amundsen Sea: see Amundsen Sea. ROALD GLACIER: glacier which flows from the S. slopes of Mt. Noble into Gibbon Bay on the E. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°15’W. The glacier was charted and named by the Norwegian whaling captain Petter S¢rlle in the period 1912-15. It was surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. Robben Nunataks: see Seal Nunataks. ROBERT, CAPE: ice-covered point at the W. side of Marret Gl., on Adélie Coast; in about 66°23’S., 137°39’E. Disc. and named by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville in 1840. The cape was roughly charted by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, and more recently delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Robert English Coast: see Eights Coast. ROBERT ENGLISH COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica extending from the base of Palmer Pen., in about 67°W. to the cape at the W. side of the entrance to Carroll Inlet in 79°W. Disc. and explored, in December 1940, on the ground by Finn Ronne and Carl R. Eklund, and in flights by other members of the East Base of the USAS. Named for Capt. Robert A. J. English, USN, Executive Sec. of the Executive Committee, USAS, 1939-41, and captain of the Bear of Oak- land on the ByrdAE, 1933-35. ROBERT ISLAND: island about 12 mi. long and 6 mi. wide, lying between Nelson I. and Green- wich I. in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°24’S., 59°34’W. The name dates back to at least 1821 and is now established international usage. Not adopted: Mitchells Island, Polotsk Island, Roberts Island, Robert’s Island. Robert Palmer Bay: see Palmer Inlet. ROBERT POINT: point marking the SE. tip of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°28’S., 09°23’W. This point, which probably has been known to sealers and whalers in the area for over 100 years, takes its name after the island. Not adopted: Cape Roberts, Roberts Point. ROBERTS CAPE: cape at the S. side of the en- trance to Granite Hbr., on the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°00’S., 162°50’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named it for William C. Roberts, asst. zoologist and cook to the expedition. 260 ROBERTS, MOUNT: dark, mostly ice-free rock peak with a flat, sloping top, about 3,200 ft. in el., which is isolated from the Detroit Plateau to the W. and lies about 3 mi. inland from Prince Gustav Chan., some 14 mi. N. of Sjogren Gl., on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 64°00’S., 58°49’W. First charted by the FIDS, in 1945, and named for D. W. Roberts, Manager of the Falkland Islands Co. in 1945, who was of assistance to the expedition. ROBERT SCOTT, MOUNT: mountain in the Commonwealth Range, lying between Mt. Har- court and Mt. Kathleen and overlooking the E. side of Beardmore Gl. at its junction with Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°43’S., 174°00’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named this feature for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Shackleton had been a member of the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Not adopted: Mount Scott. ROBERT SCOTT GLACIER: major glacier, from 5 to 15 mi. wide and about 90 mi. long, descending from the polar plateau in long sweeping curves to the head of Ross Ice Shelf between Amundsen and Leverett Glaciers; in about 85°40’S., 152°00’W. Disc. in December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Gould. Named by the US—ACAN for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN, leader of the BrNAE, 1901-4, and the BrAE, 1910-13, who lost his life in March 1912 on the return journey from the South Pole, which he had reached on Jan. 18, 1912. Not adopted: Scott Glacier (q.v.), Thorne Glacier. ROBERTS ICE PIEDMONT: large ice piedmont, about 20 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and about 15 mi. wide, lying to the N. and NW. of Mt. Calais and occupying the NE. corner of Alexander I Is- land; in 69°00’S., 70°20’W. First seen from a dis- tance and roughly surveyed by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. It was photographed from the air by the BGLE during a flight on Aug. 15, 1936, and roughly mapped from these photographs. Named by the Br—APC in 1955 for Brian B. Roberts, ornithologist of the BGLE, 1934-37, and later Sec- retary of the British Antarctic Place-names Com- mittee. ROBERTSON, CAPE: cape about 1 mi. E. of Route Pt., marking the NE. end of Mackenzie Pen., which forms the W. part of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°48’W. On the map of Laurie I. by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, the name Cape Robertson appears in the position of Route Pt., previously named by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer in 1821. The name Route Pt. is retained for the NW. end of Mackenzie Pen.; Cape Robertson is the NE. end of this peninsula. The name commemorates GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Thomas Robertson, captain of the Scotia, exp. ship of the ScotNAE, 1902-4. Not adopted: Route Point (q.v.). ROBERTSON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,100 ft. in el., lying NW. of the head of Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 74°41’S., 64°14’°W. Disc. by the RARE 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for James B. Robertson, aviation mechanic with the expedition. Not adopted: Mount James Robertson. ROBERTSON BAY: bay about 23 mi. wide and 25 mi. long, lying between Cape Barrow and Cape Adare, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°20’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Dr. John Robertson, sur- geon on the exp. ship Terror. ROBERTSON ISLAND: ice-covered island, about 12 mi. long in a NW.-SE. direction and 6 mi. wide, lying at the E. end of the Seal Nunataks and some 30 mi. S. of Cape Sobral, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S., 59°40’W. Disc. on Dec. 9, 1893 by Capt. C. A. Larsen, who named it for William Robertson, co-owner of the firm of Woltereck and Robertson of Hamburg which sent out Larsen’s ship, the Jason. ROBERTSON ISLANDS: group of islands ex- tending about 2 mi. southward of the SE. end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 45°10’W. Disc. and roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in De- cember 1821. Recharted and named by James Weddell in 1823. Not adopted: Robertsons Islands, Robertson’s Islands. ROBERTSON POINT: point forming the E. side of the entrance to Fortuna Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 36°46’W. Robertson Point is an established name which dates back to at least 1920. Not adopted: Cape Robertson. ROBILLARD GLACIER: narrow glacier flowing ENE. and entering the N. side of the head of Sol- berg Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°19’S., 65°30’W. Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS, 1939-41. It was photographed from the air in 1947 by the RARE, under Ronne, and charted in 1948 by the FIDS. Named by Ronne for Capt. George Robillard, USN, of the legal sec- tion of the Bureau of Ships, who assisted in gain- ing Congressional support which resulted in pro- curing the expedition ship. ROBIN PEAK: sharply defined rocky summit, about 900 ft. in el., which is the northernmost peak on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°38’W. Named by the Br-APC in 1954 for Gordon de 261 Quetteville Robin of the FIDS, leader at Signy I. base in 1947, who made the first detailed survey of the island. ROBINSON, CAPE: cape marking the E. end of an icecapped promontory between Cabinet and Mill Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°52’S., 63°43’W. Sir Hubert Wilkins, while on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928 along this coast, named an island for W. S. Robinson of London and Aus- tralia, which he reported to lie in about 67°20’S., 61°40’W. Absence of photographs of this island by Wilkins has prevented its positive re-identifica- tion. For this reason, and for the sake of his- torical continuity, it is recommended that the E. end of the promontory in 66°52’S. be given the name Cape Robinson. This cape was charted by the FIDS and photographed from the air by the RARE in 1947. Not adopted: Cape Duemler. ROBINSON, MOUNT: peak about 10,000 ft. in el., standing S. of Robertson Bay in northern Vic- toria Land; in about 71°45’S., 169°43’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named this feature for the Reverend Dr. Robinson, of Armagh, one of the more active promoters of mag- netic research in the Antarctic. ROBINSON BAY: glacier-filled embayment, about 11 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape De Gerlache and Cape Harrisson, along Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°40’S., 98°50’E. Disc. by the Eastern Sledge Party operating from the West Base of the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, and named for Lionel Robinson of Australia, a patron of the expedition. ROBINSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the continental ice to the Knox Coast, midway be- tween Merritt It. and Reist Rocks; in about 66°32’S., 107°18’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for R. P. Robinson, pursers stew- ard on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USHE under Wilkes, 1838-42. ROBINSON GROUP: group of two large and sevy- eral small islands, from 100 to 200 ft. in el., lying off Mac-Robertson Coast about 3 mi. W. of Cape Daly; in about 67°28’S., 63°48’E. Disc. on about Feb. 15, 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson, who applied the name. Robinson Island: see Francis Island. Robinson Island: (in about 67°20’S., 63°40’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since subsequent survey has shown that no island exists in the position indicated. Instead, the name Rob- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA inson has been applied to a cape in 66°52’S., 63°43’W. Robke Berg: see Ropke, Mount. ROCA, CAPE: cape about 1.8 mi. NW. of Cape Davidson at the W. end of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°49°W. The W. end of Laurie I. was sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in December 1821. Cape Roca was charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named for Julio A. Roca, Pres. of Argentina, 1880-86 and 1898-1904. Not adopted: Cape Rock. ROCA ISLETS: group of islets about 2 mi. NW. of the Argentine Is.; lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°12’S., 64°20’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Julio A. Roca, Pres. of Argentina, 1880-86 and 1898-1904. Not adopted: Roca Islands, Rocca Islands. Roca Nueva: see New Rock. Roca Reef; Roca Rock: see Rocca Reef. Rocca Islands: see Roca Islets. ROCCA REEF: two small, low rocks which lie 4.5 mi. WSW. of Cape Alexandra, and 1.5 mi. off the S. coast of Adelaide I., in the N. part of Mar- guerite Bay; in 67°47’S., 68°47’W. Disc. in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, and named by him for Monsieur Rocca, an acquaintance in Punta Arenas. Not adopted: Roca Reef, Roca Rock. Rocher Conique: see Conical Rock. Rocher Noir: see Tristan Islet. Rocher Nouveau: see New Rock. Rochers de VOrn: see Ornen Rocks. Rocher Voile: see Sail Rock. Rock, Cape: see Roca, Cape. Rockby: see Rocky Bay. ROCKEFELLER MOUNTAINS: group of low- lying, scattered granite peaks and ridges, almost entirely snow-covered, lying in the interior of Ed- ward VII Pen.; in about 78°00’S., 155°22’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on Jan. 26, 1929, and named by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd for John D. Rockefeller, Jr., a patron of the expedition. 262 ROCKEFELLER PLATEAU: the Marie Byrd Land portion of the Antarctic plateau; centering in about 80°S., 135°W. Much of its extensive, ice- covered surface averages from 2,500 to 4,500 ft. in elevation. Disc. by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, in 1934 and named for John D. Rockefeller, Jr., patron of the Byrd expeditions. ROCK PILE PEAKS: small peninsula consisting of a jumbled mass of rocky peaks and ridges jut- ting from the E. coast of Palmer Pen. between Mobiloil and Solberg Inlets; in 68°25’S., 65°10’W. This feature was photographed from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928, and by Lin- coln Ellsworth on his flight of Nov. 23, 1935. Much greater detail, however, was obtained in aerial and trail pictures taken in 1940 by members of the East Base of the USAS. The name was given by the US-SCAN for this feature which, because of its peculiarly jumbled appearance, stood out as a notable and easily distinguishable landmark on the aerial photographs of the USAS. As such, it was particularly valuable in the work of correla- tion. Not adopted: Rock Pile Point. Rock Ridge: see Red Rock Ridge. Rock X: see X, Rock. ROCKY BAY: small bay, with numerous rocks lying in the bay and at its entrance, situated im- mediately N. of Ducloz Head, along the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 36°39’W. The pres- ence of this bay seems to have been first noted in 1819 by Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen, who roughly charted a small inlet in this approximate position. The name was in use prior to 1930, and was probably applied by sealers and whalers working in the area. Not adopted: Rockby, Rok- Bucht [German]. Rocky Point: see Carey Point; Dunlop, Cape; Kanin Point. ; ROCKY POINT: rocky point marking the SE. extremity of Vindication I., South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°45’W. It was named by DI per- sonnel following their survey in 1930. Rodeada, Isla: see Beta Island. R6don: see Red Island. ROGERS GLACIER: channel glacier about 10 mi, wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW. from the continental ice and entering the E. side of Baker Three Gl. close S. of McKaskle Hills, on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 170°00’S., 72°30’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in March 1947, and named by him for Lt. Cdr. William J. Rogers, Jr., USN, plane commander of one of three aerial crews which obtained photo- graphic coverage of this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. ROGERS HEAD: conspicuous headland marking the N. extremity of the peninsula between Atlas Cove and Corinthian Bay on the N. coast of Heard I.; in 53°00’S., 73°24’E. Named for the Rogers family of New London, Conn., including Capt. Erasmus Darwin Rogers, who in 1855 made the first landing on Heard I. in the ship Corinthian, Capt. James H. Rogers, master of the brig Zoe, and Henry Rogers, first mate of the Zoe, who in 1856 was leader of the first party to winter on the island. The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. Not adopted: Rogers’ Head, Roger’s Head. ROGET, CAPE: cape in northeastern Victoria Land, formed by the termination of Mt. Hershel and marking the N. side of the entrance to Mou- bray Bay; in about 72°05’S., 170°58’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross and named for Dr. Peter Mark Roget, noted English lexicographer who was Sec. of the Royal Society. ROGGED BAY: small bay lying immediately N. of Cape Disappointment, near the S. tip of South Georgia; in 54°52’S., 36°07’W. The name Rogged Bay, which was probably used by early sealers, was recorded by Arnaldo Faustini on a 1906 map, and applied to a wider embayment in this vicinity. Following its survey in 1951-52, the SGS reported that the small bay immediately N. of Cape Disap- pointment required a name. The existing name Rogged Bay was recommended, as limited to this small bay, by the Br—APC in 1954. ROHSS BAY: bay about 11 mi. wide at its mouth, decreasing to 3 mi. wide near its head, which re- cedes NE. for about 12 mi. between Capes Broms and Obelisk in the SW. part of James Ross I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°12’S., 58°16’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold, and named by him for August and Wilhelm Rohss, patrons of the expedition. Roi Georges, Ile du: see King George Island. Roi Oscar, Terre du: see Oscar II Coast. Rok-Bucht: see Rocky Bay. ROLAND BAY: a cove, the S. shore of which is Hervéou Pt., indenting the W. end of the peninsula that separates Port Charcot from Salpétriére Bay, on the W. side of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer 263 Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°03’W. First charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for F. Roland, a seaman on the exp. ship Francais. ROLAND BONAPARTE POINT: point on the SW. coast of Anvers I., about 6 mi. NW. of Cape Lan- caster and marking the W. side of the entrance to Biscoe Bay, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°55’'W. The point was charted by the FrAH, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Prince Roland Bonaparte, then Pres. of the Paris Geographical Society. Not adopted: Bonaparte Point. ROLF ROCK: small isolated rock in Hound Bay, about 1.5 mi. SSE. of Tijuca Pt., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°12’W. Named by the Br—APC, following mapping by the SGS, 1951- 52, after the Rolf, one of the vessels of the Com- pania Argentina de Pesca which participated in es- tablishing the first permanent whaling station at Grytviken, South Georgia, in 1904. Roman Figure Four Mountain; Roman Four Rock: see Roman Four Promontory. ROMAN FOUR PROMONTORY: rocky promon- tory about 2,700 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°13’S., 66°58’W. The promontory was first charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. The name appears to have been applied by members of East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, whose base was located on nearby Stonington I., and derives from snow-filled clefts along the face of the promontory giving the appearance of a Roman numeral IV. Not adopted: Roman Figure Four Mountain, Roman Four Rock. Romero, Cape; Romerof, Cape; Romeroff, Cape: see Romerof Head. ROMEROF HEAD: prominent headland, with steep rock cliffs, forming the W. side of the entrance to Schlieper Bay, on the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°53’W. The name, which probably was given by early whalers, dated back to at least 1912. Not adopted: Cape Romero, Cape Romerof, Cape Romeroff. ROMNAES, MOUNT: prominent isolated moun- tain between the shore and the S¢r Rondane Mtns., on Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about 71°395’S., 22°55’E. Disc. and charted on Feb. 6, 1937, by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen and named for Nils Romnaes, aerial photographer of this expedition. ROMULUS GLACIER: glacier, about 7 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which flows from the N. slopes of Mt. Lupa westward to Rymill Bay between the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Blackwall Mtns. and Black Thumb Mtn., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°23’S., 66°50’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re- surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, who so named it for its association with Remus Gl., whose head lies near the head of this glacier. RONDE ISLET: small rocky islet lying close off the NE. side of Zélée Glacier Tongue, about 2.6 mi. WNW. of Rescapé Islets, off Adélie Coast; in about 66°47’S., 141°15’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named because of its round shape. Ronne Bay: see Ronne Entrance. RONNE ENTRANCE: the broad SW. entrance of George VI Sound where it opens on Bellingshausen Sea between Alexander I Island and Robert English Coast; in about 72°00’S., 76°00’W. This feature was disc. on a sledge journey through the sound in December 1940 by Finn Ronne and Carl Eklund of the USAS, 1939-41. At that time it was named Ronne Bay, the feature forming an open bay front- ing on the ice shelf at the SW. end of the sound. Since 1940, the head of Ronne Bay has receded east- ward into George VI Sound altering the relation- ships on which the name Ronne Bay was based. The name Ronne Bay has therefore been dropped and the name Ronne Entrance applied to the broad SW. entrance of George VI Sound in keeping with the physical characteristics of the feature. Named for the Ronne family, of which the father, Martin Ronne, was a member of the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, 1910-12, and the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and the son, Finn Ronne, was a member of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and the USAS, 1939-41, and leader of the RARE, 1947-48. Not adopted: Ronne Bay. Roocker, Mount: see Rucker, Mount. Rookery Islands: see Haswell Islets. Roosen Channel: see Neumayer Channel. ROOSEVELT ISLAND: ice-covered island, about 90 mi. long in a N.-S. direction and about 40 mi. wide, lying in the E. part of the Ross Ice Shelf, with its N. extremity about 3 mi.S. of the Bay of Whales; in about 79°30’S., 162°00’W. Disc. in 1934 by the ByrdAE, and named by R. Adm. Byrd for Franklin D. Roosevelt, then President of the United States. Roosevelt Sea: see Amundsen Sea. ROOTS, MOUNT: mainly snow-covered moun- tain in the Allardyce Range, South Georgia, stand- ing near the head of Nordenskjéld Gl., about 6 mi. ESE. of Mt. Paget; in 54°28’S., 36°24’W. Its west- 264 ern peak rises to about 7,500 ft. in el.; its eastern peak to about 7,000 ft. The mountain is a promi- nent feature and presumably was known to whalers and sealers in South Georgia at an early date. It was roughly surveyed in the period 1925-30 by DI personnel, and resurveyed by the SGS, 1951-52. Named by the Br—APC for James W. Roots, a mem- ber of the SGS, 1951-52. ROPKE, MOUNT: mountain spur about 8,200 ft. in el., on the W. side of the range forming the W. wall of Penck Trough, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°22’S., 5°30’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Karl-Heinz Ropke, second officer of the exp. ship Schwaben- land. Not adopted: RobKe Berg [German], Ropke Mountain. ROQUEMAUREL, CAPE: prominent rocky head- land on the W. coast of Louis Philippe Pen., about 16 mi. NE. of Cape Kjellman; in 63°33’S., 58°56’W. Disc. by a Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for Lt. Louis De Roquemaurel, second-in-command of the exp. ship Astrolabe. ROSA, CAPE: cape marking the S. side of the en- trance to King Haakon Bay, on the S. coast of South Georgia; in about 54°13’S., 37°22’W. The name first appears about 1920 on charts of South Georgia and has since become established by usage. ROSCOE GLACIER: channel glacier about 12 mi. long and 3 to 5 mi. wide, flowing N. from the con- tinental ice overlying Queen Mary Coast, and de- bouching from a small valley onto the W. portion of Shackleton Ice Shelf, midway between Cape Moyes and Junction Corner; in about 66°495’S., 95°30’E. Charted as a valley depression during a southern reconnaissance in March 1912 by F. Wild and other members of the Western Base Party of the AAE under Mawson. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for John H. Roscoe, geog- rapher, author of Antarctic Bibliography (Wash- ington, 1951), and scientific advisor to the director of United States Antarctic Programs. Roscoe served as photogrammetrist with the central task group of USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and with USN Op. Wmil., 1947-48, and assisted the latter group in es- tablishing astronomical control stations along Wil- helm II, Queen Mary, Knox and Budd Coasts. ROSENWALD, MOUNT: prominent peak in the higher foothills of the Queen Maud Range, stand- ing NNW. of Mt. Black, on the W. side of Shackleton Gl.; in about 85°08’S., 178°00’E. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on ByrdAE flights to the Queen Maud Range in November 1929, and named by him for Julius Rosenwald of Chicago, contributor to the Byrd Ant- arctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Rosita Bay: see Sunset Fjord. ROSAMEL ISLAND: circular island about 1 mi. in diameter with precipitous cliffs of voleanic rock rising to a snow-covered peak about 1,400 ft. in el., lying W. of Dundee I. at the E. side of the S. en- trance to Antarctic Sound, off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°34’S., 56°17’W. Disc. by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him for V. Adm. Claude de Rosamel, French Min- ister of Marine under whose orders the exp. sailed. ROSENTHAL ISLETS: string of N.-S. trending islets fringing the W. coast of Anvers I. between De Gerlache Pt. and Cape Albert de Monaco at a distance of about 1 mi., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°38’S., 64°12’W. Disc. by the Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann, and named by him for Albert Rosenthal, Dir. of the Soc. for Polar Navigation, who with the society sponsored the expedition. Not adopted: Rosenthal Islands. ROSITA HARBOR: small bay lying 1 mi. N. of Camp Bay in the W. side of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°27’W. The names Rosita Harbor and Allardyce Harbor were given for this bay in the period 1905-12, and both names have since appeared on maps for this feature. Follow- ing a survey of South Georgia in 1951-52, the SGS reported that this feature is known locally as Rosita Harbor. This latter name is approved on the basis of local usage. The name Allardyce is rejected as applied to this feature; the main mountain range at South Georgia is already named for William L. Allardyce. The name Rosita Harbor is named after the Rosita, one of the whale catchers of Messrs. Salvesen and Co., which started operating with the company in 1905, and which anchored in this bay. Not adopted: Allardyce Harbor. ROSS, CAPE: granite headland, 200 ft. in el., about 10 mi. NE. of Granite Hbr., on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°45’S., 163°02’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, who named this feature for Sir James Clark Ross, noted British Antarctic explorer. Ross, Mount: see Haddington, Mount. ROSS GLACIER: glacier flowing E. to the head of Royal Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°32’S., 36°06’W. Charted by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader, and named for Sir James Clark Ross. Ross Ice Barrier: see Ross Ice Shelf. ROSS ICE SHELF: vast ice shelf, to a large part grounded, occupying the entire S. part of the Ross Sea embayment and ending seaward in a cliffed 424589 O -57 -18 265 ice front about 400 mi. long; in 81°30’S., 175°00’W. Disc. by Capt. (later Sir) James Clark Ross, RN, for whom it is named, on Jan. 28, 1841. Ross mapped the ice front eastward to 160°W. Not adopted: Grosse Eisebene [German], Ross Ice Barrier, Ross Shelf Ice. Ross Island: see James Ross Island. ROSS ISLAND: island about 43 mi. long and 45 mi. wide, located E. of McMurdo Sound at the outer edge of the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 77°30’S., 168°00’E. Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, who named it for Sir James Clark Ross. ROSS PASS: narrow but well-defined pass be- tween the SE. end of the Allardyce Range and the NW. end of the Salvesen Range, South Georgia; in 54°32’S., 36°16’W. It is about 2,000 ft. in el., and provides a sledging route between Ross Gl. and Brogger Gl. The feature was first charted by the Ger. exp. under Schrader in 1882-83. The name Ross Pass, which derives from association with nearby Ross GIl., was given by the SGS fol- lowing their survey of 1951-52. Not adopted: Gletcher-Joch [German], Royal Pass. ROSS POINT: point on the SW. side of Nelson I., about 1.5 mi. SE. of Harmony Cove, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°21’S., 59°09’W. The point was charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. Probably named for Sir James Clark Ross. ROSS SEA: large embayment of the Pacific Ocean, extending deeply into Antarctica between Cape Adare on the W. and Cape Colbeck on the E.; in about 75°S., 175°W. Named for Sir James Clark Ross. Ross Shelf Ice: see Ross Ice Shelf. Rote Insel: see Red Island. Rothschild, Cape; Rothschild, Mount: see Roths- child Island. ROTHSCHILD ISLAND: island lying W. of the N. end of Alexander I Island in the N. entrance to Wilkins Str.; in about 69°25’S., 72°45’W. Disc. from a distance and named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Examination of aerial photo- graphs of this feature taken by the USAS, 1939-41, suggests that it may be connected by a low ice- covered land mass at its E. side to a mountainous mass, making this island much larger than 10 mi. in extent as previously represented. Not adopted: Cape Rothschild, Mount Rothschild. Rouge Island: see De Rongé Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ROULLIN POINT: point marking the S. tip of Booth I., which is separated from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. by Lemaire Chan.; in 65°07’'S., 64°02’W. This point was probably first seen by the Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74. It was charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Capt. Roullin, French Navy. Not adopted: Point Roullin. ROUND ISLAND: circular islet about 0.5 mi. in diameter, lying 1.5 mi. W. of Hummock I. and 8 mi. NW. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°54’S., 65°37’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37. ROUND POINT: point about 10 mi. WSW. of False Round Pt., on the N. coast of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°55’S., 58°16’W. The name dates back to at least 1822 and is established international usage. ROUSE, CAPE: ice-covered cape, fronted by ice cliffs, lying about 14 mi. ENE. of Murray Mono- lith on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°45’S., 67°10’E. Named by the BANZARE under Maw- son, who disc. this feature on about Feb. 13, 1931. Not adopted: Point Rouse. ROUSE ROCKS: small group of rocks fringing Mac-Robertson Coast close S. of Welch I.; in about 67°35°S., 62°58’E. Discovered and named by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson. Route Point: see Robertson, Cape. ROUTE POINT: rocky point marking the NW. end of Mackenzie Pen., which forms the W. part of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 44°50’W. Disc. and named by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in December 1821. ROUX, CAPE: cape marking the NW. extremity of Pasteur Pen., northern Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°01’S., 62°36’W. Disc. by the FrAB, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Emile Roux, noted French physician and bacteri- ologist, then Dir. of the Pasteur Inst., Paris. Not adopted: Cap E. Roux [French]. Roux Island: see Charles-Roux Island. Rowe Island: see Row Island. ROWETT ISLET: rocky islet about 1 mi. long, about 2 mi. SW. of Cape Lookout, Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°20’S., 55°20’W. This islet was known to both the American and British sealers as early as 1822. It was named by members of a Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1921-22, 266 for John Quiller Rowett, the chief patron of that expedition. Not adopted: Rowett Island. ROW ISLAND: one of the Balleny Is., small, flat, and ice-covered, about 0.5 mi. long and about 600 ft. in el., lying about 1 mi. S. of Young I.; in about 66°32’S., 162°50’E. John Balleny assigned the name in 1839 to an island which he reported to be about 10 mi. N. of Young I.; naming it for Mr. J. Row, one of the merchants who united with Charles Enderby, Esq., in sending out the expedi- tion. Since the island reported by Balleny has not been found by other explorers in the vicinity, the name was assigned to another island, disc. by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1936. Not adopted: Rowe Island. Royal, Cape: see Harcourt, Cape. ROYAL BAY: bay, about 4 mi. wide and indent- ing 6 mi., entered between Capes Charlotte and Harcourt along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°32’S., 36°00’W. Disc. and named by a Br. exp. under Cook in 1775. Royal Bay was surveyed by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, which was based on the N. shore of the bay in 1882-83. Royal Pass: see Ross Pass. ROYAL SOCIETY RANGE: range of mountains lying near the head of McMurdo Sound, between Koettlitz Gl. and Ferrar Gl.; in about 78°10’S., 163°00’E. Disc. in January 1902 by the BrNAE under Scott, who named it in honor of the Royal Society, giving names of its members to the indi- vidual peaks. ROYDS, CAPE: dark rock cape forming the W. extremity of Ross I.; in about 77°33’S., 166°07’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named this feature for Lt. Charles W. R. Royds, RN, who acted as meteorologist for the expedition. ROZO POINT: point marking the NW. end of Cholet Islet, an islet which lies immediately N. of the NW. part of Booth I. and forms the W. limit of Port Charcot, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°02’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for M. Rozo, the cook on the exp. ship Francais. Not adopted: Point Rozo. Rubbenspitze: see Seal Point. RUCKER, MOUNT: mountain about 11,260 ft. in el., in the Royal Society Range, lying SW. of Mc- Murdo Sound, along the W. side of Ross Sea; in about 78°11’S., 162°39’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named this feature for Sir Arthur Riicker, Honorary Sec. of the Royal So- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ciety. Not adopted: Mount Rucker. Mount Roocker, RUDMOSE BROWN PEAK: peak about 5 mi. SSW. of Mt. Hurley and 7 mi. back of the coast, in Enderby Land; in about 66°22’S.,51°05’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the BANZARE, 1929-1931, under Mawson, who named this feature for Dr. R. N. Rud- mose Brown, naturalist of the ScotNAEH, 1902-4, member of the Scott Polar Research Committee, 1939-41, and author of numerous books and articles on Antarctica. RUDMOSE ROCKS: group of rocks about 0.3 mi. NNW. of Cape Geddes, off the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°35’W. The rocks were first charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named them for R. N. Rudmose Brown, naturalist of the expedition. Rugged Harbor: see New Plymouth. RUGGED ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, lying W. of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°36’S.,61°17’W. This island was known to both the American sealers and the Brit- ish as early as 1820, and the name Rugged has been well established in international usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Lloyds Island, Lloyd’s Island, Ragged Island. RUGGED ROCKS: small group of rocks at the W. side of the S. entrance to McFarlane Str., ex- tending about 1 mi. in a NW. direction from Pin Pt., Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°37’S., 59°50’W. These rocks were known to early sealers in the area and are roughly charted on Powell’s map of 1822. They were accurately charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and given this descriptive name. RUHNKE, MOUNT: peak projecting through the icecap between the Sauter and Preuschoff Ranges at the N. edge of the polar plateau in New Schwa- benland; in about 72°25’S., 3°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Herbert Ruhnke, radio operator on the flying boat Passat used by the expedition. RUMBOLDS POINT: point which marks the E. side of thie entrance to Doubtful Bay, at the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°52'S., 36°02’W. The name appears on a chart based upon surveys of this area in 1930 by DI personnel, but may reflect an earlier naming. RUNAWAY ISLET: rocky islet 0.7 mi. W. of the W. tip of Neny I. and 0.2 mi. NW. of Surf Rock, lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°07’W. The islet was roughly 267 charted in 1936 by the BGLE, and was surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because a runaway dog team left this islet and returned to base. RUNCIMAN ROCK: rock marked by breakers, lying about 300 yards E. of Black I. at the SE. ap- proach to Black Island Chan., in the Argentine Is.; in 65°16’S., 64°17’W. Disc. in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill, who named it for Philip Runciman, Chairman of the Board of Directors of Whites Southhampton Yachtbuilding and Engineering Company Limited, where the exp. ship Penola was refitted before sailing south in 1934. RUND BAY: semicircular bay about 3 mi. wide, indenting the SE. shore of Edward VIII Bay im- mediately E. of Kvarsnes Foreland, along Kemp Coast; in about 67°04’S., 57°10’E. Mapped by Nor- wegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January— February 1937, and so named by them because of its round shape. Rundneset: see Green Point. RUNNELSTONE ROCK: rock lying in Grandidier Chan., about 2.5 mi. NW. of Larrouy I. and some 17 mi. WSW. of Cape Garcia, Palmer Pen.; in 65°47’S., 65°22’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. RUPPERT COAST: that portion of the coast of Marie Byrd Land extending from the northern en- trance of Paul Block Bay, in about 76°S., 147°W.., east-northeastwards to Emory Land Bay at about 75°45’S., 140°30’W. Named for Col. Jacob Ruppert, of New York, a supporter of the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Not adopted: Jacob Ruppert Coast. RUSSELL, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Maud Range, on the E. flank of Robert Scott Gl., in about 86°18’S., 148°45’W. Disc. by members of the Southern Sledge Party of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and named for Richard S. Russell, Jr., one of the members of that party, and his father, Richard S. Russell, Sr., a supporter of the Byrd Antarctic Ex- peditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted: Mount Richard Russell. RUSSELL OWEN, MOUNT: mountain standing W. of Hilton Inlet and inland from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 71°50’S., 63°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this mountain for Russell Owen, newspaper correspond- ent with the ByrdAE, 1928-30, Russell Peak: see Brown Peak. Rusty, Cape: see Howard, Cape. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA RUSTY BLUFF: prominent cliffs rising to a rounded summit, about 740 ft. in el., on the W. side of Paal Hbr. on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°37’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by FIDS, was suggested by the color of the bluff and by a rusty iron post found on the summit. Ruth, Cape: see Ruth Ridge. RUTH BLACK, MOUNT: ridge-shaped mountain about 6,000 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi. W. of Mt. Gardiner, at the SE. side of the lower reaches of Bartlett Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°17’S., 151°35’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named at that time by R. Adm. Byrd for Mrs. Ruth Black, deceased wife of Richard B. Black, exp. member who assisted with seismic, survey, and ra- dio operations in the vicinity of Little America II. Ruth Bugge Islands: see Bugge Islands. RUTH GADE, MOUNT: pyramidal massif, about 11,960 ft. in el., standing in the Queen Maud Range between Cooper and Isaiah Bowman Glaciers, at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°40’S., 163°30’W. Disc. in November 1911 by Capt. Roald Amundsen who named it for one of the daughters of the Norwegian Minister to Brazil, a strong sup- porter of Amundsen. RUTH RIDGE: black, rocky ridge about 1.5 mi. long in a NNE.-SSW. direction, terminating at its S. end in a small peak about 4,500 ft. in el. The ridge forms part of the plateau escarpment along the E. coast of Palmer Pen. and marks a change in direction of the escarpment where it turns W. to form the N. wall of Drygalski Gl.; in about 64°40’S., 60°49’W. Dr. Otto Nordenskjold, leader of the SwedAE, 1901-4, gave the name Cape Ruth in honor of his sister, to what appeared to be a cape at the N. side of Drygalski Gl. The feature was determined to be a ridge in 1947 by the FIDS, and the name is approved accordingly. Not adopted: Cape Ruth. Ruth Siple, Mount: see Siple, Mount. RYAN REEF: isolated reef lying off the N. coast of South Georgia, about 0.75 mi. N. of the E. en- trance point of Doris Bay; in 54°26’S., 36°08’W. The reef appears on a chart based upon surveys by DI personnel in the period 1925-31, but it may have been charted earlier. It was named by the Br—APC, following a survey by the SGS, 1951-52, for Alfredo R. C. Ryan, Pres. of the Compania Argentina de Pesca, which operates the whaling station at Gryt- viken, South Georgia. 268 RYDER BAY: bay, about 6 mi. wide at its mouth and indenting 5 mi., situated 5 mi. E. of Mt. Gaudry on the SE. coast of Adelaide I.; in 67°34’S., 68°22’W. The Léonie Is. lie across the mouth of this bay. Disc. and first surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and in 1948 by the FIDS. The bay is named for Lisle C. D. Ryder, second mate on the Penola during the BGLE, 1934-37. RYDER GLACIER: gently sloping glacier, about 13 mi. long and wide, flowing W. from the Dyer Plateau of Palmer Pen. into George VI Sound to the S. of Gurney Pt.; in 71°07’S., 67°20’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for Capt. Robert E. D. Ryder, RN, who as Lieutenant, was commander of the Penola dur- ing the BGLE, 1934-37. Rymill, Cape: see Reichelderfer, Cape. RYMILL, CAPE: steep, metamorphic rock cliff about 700 ft. in el., lying opposite Hearst I. and jutting out from the icecap along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°30’S., 62°25’W. The cape was named for John Rymill by members of the East Base of the USAS who charted this coast by land and from the air in 1940. Rymill was the leader of the BGLE, 1934-37, and in 1936 sledged eastward across Palmer Pen. to 69°45’S., 63°28’W. RYMILL BAY: bay, about 9 mi. wide at its mouth and indenting 5 mi., entered between Red Rock Ridge and the Bertrand Ice Piedmont along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°24’S., 67°05’W. Probably first seen from a distance by the FrAE under Charcot in 1909. The bay was first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE, and was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. The name, proposed by members of the BGLE, is for John R. Rymill, Australian leader of the BGLE, 1934-37. Rymill’s Col: see Safety Col. RYRIE ROCK: isolated rock, about 30 ft. in el., lying about 12 mi. NE. of Kidson I., off Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°00’S., 61°25’E. Disc. and named by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson. SABINE, MOUNT: mountain about 10,000 ft. in el., standing N. of Mt. Herschel in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 72°05’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in 1841 by the Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Lt. Col. (later Gen. Sir) Edward Sabine of the Royal Artillery, and Foreign Secretary of the Royal Society. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SABRINA COAST: that portion of the coast of Antarctica lying between Cape Waldron, in about 116°02’E., and Cape Southard, in about 122°05’E. A Br. exp. under John Balleny has long been cred- ited with having seen land in March 1839 in about 117°E. The USEE under Wilkes approached this coast in February 1840 and indicated its general configuration as shown, in part, by his ‘‘Totten High Land” landfall on his 1840 chart. In 1931 the BANZARE under Mawson saw what appeared to be land in this longitude about one degree farther south than that reported by Balleny and Wilkes. In recognition of Balleny’s effort, Mawson retained the name of the cutter Sabrina, one of Balleny’s ships which was lost in a storm in 95°EH. in the latter part of March 1839. Not adopted: Sabrina Land, Totten High Land (in part). SABRINA ISLET: largest of three islets lying about 2 mi. S. of Cape McNab on Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°55’S., 163°20’E. Named after the cutter Sabrina, commanded by H. Free- man, which sailed with John Balleny’s schooner Eliza Scott in 1839 when the Balleny Is. were dis- covered. Sabrina Land: see Sabrina Coast. Sacramento Bay: see Sacramento Bight. SACRAMENTO BIGHT: an open bight, about 3 mi. wide, between Calf Head and Cape Harcourt on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°29’S., 36°01’W. The name “Pinguin-Bay” was given by a Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, to a small bay within the bight now described. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that a name is not necessary for this bay, and that the bight, which is known to whalers and sealers as Sacramento Bay, does requirea name. In order to indicate the correct nature of the feature, and at the same time to conform to local usage, the name Sacramento Bight is approved. Not adopted: Pinguin-Bay, Sacramento Bay. SADDLE BLUFF: point about 1.3 mi. NW. of Irving Pt. on the NE. coast of Visokoi I., South Sandwich Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°09’W. It was named by DI personnel following their survey in 1930. SADDLE ISLAND: small island, consisting of twin summits which are almost separated by a nar- row channel strewn with boulders, lying about 6 mi. N. of the W. end of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°38’S., 44°50’W. Disc. in 1823 by a Br. sealing exp. under Weddell, and so named be- cause of its unusual shape. Not adopted: Ile Mon- tura [French], Saddle Islands. Saddle Island: see Brutus Island. 269 SADDLE POINT: point separating Corinthian Bay and Mechanics Bay on the N. coast of Heard I., in 53°01’S., 73°29’E. The name was applied by American sealers at Heard I. following their initia- tion of sealing there in 1855. The name appears on the chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. Saens Pena, Cape: see Saenz Pena, Cape. Saens Valiente, Mount; Saens Valiente, Sommet: see Saenz Valiente Peak. SAENZ PENA, CAPE: cape surmounted by a con- ical peak about 4,200 ft. in el., forming the N. side of the W. entrance to Bigourdan Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°34’S., 67°37’/W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named by him for Dr. Roque Saenz Pena, Pres. of the Ar- gentine Republic, 1910-13. Not adopted: Cape Saens Pena. SAENZ VALIENTE PEAK: peak about 7,100 ft. in el., being the more westerly of two snow-capped peaks lying at the SE. end of the long ridge which separates Trooz Gl. from Beascochea Bay, about 10 mi. ESE. of Cape.Trois Pérez on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°28’S., 63°42’W. Disc. by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and named by him, probably for Capt. J. P. Saenz Valiente of Argen- tina. The feature was re-identified and precisely located by the BGLE under Rymill during surveys in Beascochea Bay in August 1935, and on a journey to Trooz Gl. in January 1936. Not adopted: Mount Saens Valiente, Sommet Saens Valiente [French]. SAFETY COL: snow-covered col, about 600 ft. in el., between Red Rock Ridge and the Blackwall Mtns., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°20’S., 66°57’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because the col affords a safe sledging route between Neny Fjord and Rymill Bay when there is open water off the W. end of the Red Rock Ridge. Not adopted: Bingham Col, Rymill’s Col. SAIL ROCK: insular rock about 180 ft. in el., lying about 7 mi. WSW. of the SW. part of Decep- tion I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°02’S., 60°58’W. This name, which dates back to at least 1822, was probably given by sealers. From a dis- tance, the rock is reported to resemble a ship under sail, but at close range it is more like a house with a gable roof. Not adopted: Rocher Voile [French], Sail Rocks, Steeple Rock. Sail Rocks: see Sail Rock. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SAILS, BAY OF: bay about 7 mi. wide, which recedes W. about 2.5 mi. between Spike Pt. and Gneiss Pt., along the E. coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°22’S., 163°42’E. The name was suggested by members of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, who while sledging across the ice at the mouth of the bay erected makeshift sails on their man-drawn sledge, thereby increasing their speed. SAINT ANDREWS BAY: small bay between Mt. Skittle and Doris Bay, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°26’S., 36°11’W. This bay was prob- ably first sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook who ex- plored the N. coast of South Georgia in 1775. The name dates back to at least 1920 and is now well established in international usage. On charts where abbreviations are used, the name may be abbreviated to St. Andrews Bay. Not adopted: Little Bucht [German], St. Andrew Bay. SAINT MICHAEL, MOUNT: prominent rocky point at the head of the bay lying immediately SW. of Broka I., on Kemp Coast; in about 67°09’S., 58°27’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and probably named by them for its resemblance to Mont Saint Michel on the French coast. Not adopted: Skagen [Nor- wegian]. SALPETRIERE BAY: embayment about 1 mi. wide and receding about 0.75 mi. between Hervéou Pt. and Poste Pt., along the W. side of Booth L., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°04’S., 64°01’W. First charted by the FrAE under Dr. Jean B. Char- cot, 1903-5, and named by him after the Hopital de la Salpétriére, a Paris hospital where his father, Dr. Jean Martin Charcot, founded a clinic for the treatment of nervous diseases. Not adopted: Salpétriére Bay. SALTONSTALL, MOUNT: tabular mountain about 8,500 ft. in el., standing about 2 mi. S. of Mt. Innes-Taylor which lies at S. side of the junction of Robert Scott and Poulter Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°52’S., 153°30’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for John Saltonstall, contributor to the expedition. Salvesen Bay; Salveson Cove: see Salvesen Cove. SALVESEN COVE: cove about 6 mi. SW. of Brialmont Cove, forming the S. extremity of Hughes Bay, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°20’S., 61°22’W. ‘The cove was partially out- lined on the charts of the BelgAE under De Ger- lache, 1897-99. Probably named by whalers oper- ating in this vicinity after Salvesen and Company, whalers of Leith, Scotland. Not adopted: Salvesen Bay, Salveson Cove. 270 SALVESEN RANGE: rocky mountain range, about 18. mi. long and 7,000 ft. in el., which ex- tends from Ross Pass in a SE. direction to a point about 6 mi. W. of Cape Vahsel; in 54°40’S., 36°07’W. This range is roughly delineated on several charts of South Georgia. It was surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52, and named for Sir Harold Salvesen, a director of Messrs. Chr. Salvesen and Co., Leith, who gave great assistance to the SGS, 1951-52 and 1953-54. Sanctuary Pinnacle: see Spire, The. SANDEFJORD BAY: narrow body of water, about 2 mi. long, extending in a general N.—S. direction between the W. end of Coronation I. and Monroe I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°03’W. The northern entrance is narrow and has Spine It. in the middle. Disc. and roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer during their joint cruise in December 1821. The name Sandefjord, presumably for Sandefjord, Norway, center of the Norwegian whaling industry, appears to have been first used on a 1912 chart by Petter S¢rlle, Norwegian whaling captain. The feature was surveyed by DI personnel in 1933. Not adopted: Sandefjord. SANDEFJORD BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide, lying between Cape Ingrid and Tofte Gl. along the W. side of Peter I Island; in about 68°50’S., 90°44’W. In 1821 the Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen ap- proached the island from the SW. and sketched the coast from a distance. A Nor. exp. under Tofte in the Odd I circumnavigated the island in 1927. The bay was charted by the Nor. exp. under Nils Larsen, 1928-29, and named for Sandefjord, Nor- way, center of the Norwegian whaling industry. Not adopted: Sandefjords Bay. Sandefjord Bay: see Sandefjord Ice Bay. SANDEFJORD ICE BAY: a bay formed in ice, whose limits are restricted by the Amery Ice Shelf on the W., Ingrid Christensen Coast on the S., and a group of glacier tongues on the E., forming the narrow SW. portion of Prydz Bay; in about 69°35/S., 73°45’E. Disc. and named Sandefjord Bay in February 1935 by a Nor. exp. under Mikkel- sen in the Thorshavn, a whaling ship sent out by Lars Christensen. Further delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The term “ice bay’ is applied to this feature because of its formation in ice and to eliminate duplica- tion with Sandefjord Bay at Peter I Island. Named for the town of Sandefjord, Norway. Not adopted: Sandefjord Bay (q.v.). GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SANDEFJORD PEAKS: two conical peaks, the highest about 2,100 ft. in el., marking the SW. end of Pomona Plateau at the W. end of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°01’W. The more southern and lower of these two peaks was named Sandefjord Peak after nearby Sandefjord Bay by DI personnel in 1933. The collective name, Sandefjord Peaks, way recommended by the Br- APC following a survey of the peaks by the FIDS in 1950. Not adopted: Sandefjord Peak. Sandell, Mount: see Wood, Mount. Sanders, Mount: see Saunders, Mount. SANDFORD GLACIER: channel glacier about 8 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, flowing WNW. from the continental ice to the E. side of Porpoise Bay, about 12 mi. SSW. of Waldron GIl., on Banzare Coast; in about 66°35’/S., 129°50’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Joseph P. Sandford, passed midshipmen on the brig Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. SANDOW, MOUNT: rocky summit about 4,000 ft. in el., protruding above the continental ice about 10 m. SSW. of Mt. Amundsen, at the E. side of Denman Gl., on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°29’S., 100°15’E. Disc. in December 1912 by Frank Wild and other members of the Western Base party of the AAE under Mawson. Named by Mawson for Eugene Sandow, of London, patron of the expedition. Sandwich Bay: see Iris Bay. SANDWICH BLUFF: flat-topped mountain about 2,000 ft. in el., broken sharply at its W. side by a steep dark bluff, standing slightly W. of center on Vega I., which lies S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°50’S., 57°30’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, 1901-4. Charted in 1945 by the FIDS, and so named because a horizontal snow- holding band of rock breaks the western cliff giving it the appearance of a sandwich when viewed from the north. Sandwich Group; Sandwich Islands; Sandwich Land: see South Sandwich Islands. SANTA ROCK: rock about 120 ft. in el., lying about 1.5 mi. NNW. of Vindication I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°48’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. SAPPHO POINT: point which marks the W. side of the entrance to Cumberland East Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°28’W. Probably first sighted by a Br. exp. under Cook, 271 who explored the N. coast of South Georgia in 1775. Named for H.M.S. Sappho, British ship used in charting portions of Cumberland Bay in 1906. Sarg-Berg. see Coffin Top. Sartorius Island: see Greenwich Island. SASTRUGI, CAPE: sharply projecting point forming the SW. extremity of a small plateau lying close W. of Campbell Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 74°44’S., 163°32’E. First explored by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and so named because sastrugi impeded the ap- proach to this point. SATELLITE, THE: small rock peak about 4,200 ft. in el., protruding slightly above the icecap about 4 mi. SSW. of Pearce Peak and about 7 mi. E. of Baillieu Peak, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°51’S., 61°09’E. Disc. and named by the BAN- ZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 17, 1931. The approximate position of this peak was verified in aerial photographs taken by the USN Op. Hjp. on Feb. 26, 1947. SATURN GLACIER: glacier in SE. Alexander I Island, at least 9 mi. long and about 9 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing E. into the ice shelf of George VI Sound between Two-Step Clifis and Corner Cliffs; in 71°59’S., 68°30’W. The coast in this vicinity was first explored from the air and par- tially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and was roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This glacier was surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and was named by them after the planet Saturn. SAUNDERS, CAPE: cape forming the W. side of the entrance to Stromness Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 36°38’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook and named for his close friend Sir Charles Saunders, First Lord of the Admiralty. SAUNDERS, MOUNT: peak about 10,500 ft. in el., standing about 6 mi. SE. of Mt. Mills, in the N. part of the Dominion Range; in about 85°18’S., 167°30’E. Disc. by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and named for Edward Saunders, secre- tary to Shackleton, who assisted in preparing the narrative of the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Sanders. SAUNDERS, MOUNT: rugged, serrated mass of peaks about 4,450 ft. in el., standing W. of Mounts Stancliff and Passel in the Edsel Ford Ranges, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°52’S., 145°45’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in a flight on Dec. 5, 1929, and named by Byrd for Capt. Harold E. Saunders, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA USN, chief cartographer of the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Not adopted: Saunders Mountain, Saunders Mountains. SAUNDERS ISLAND: an arc-shaped island about 5.5 mi. long and 3 mi. in its greatest width, in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°47’S., 26°27’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook, who named it for Sir Charles Saunders, First Lord of the Admiralty. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. SAUNDERS POINT: the S. point of the islet lying 1 mi. W. of Tophet Bastion, along the S. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°20’W. Charted in 1933 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II, who named it for A. Saunders, who took numerous photographs of these islands at this time. SAUTER RANGE: range of mountains project- ing through the icecap of New Schwabenland at the N. edge of the polar plateau. The range ex- tends about 12 mi. in an E._W. direction, transverse to the general structural grain of the area, and rises to about 10,500 ft. in el. near the W. end; centering near 72°30’S., 2°20’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Seigfried Sauter, aerial photographer on the Boreas, one of the exp. flying boats. SAW ROCK: rock about 80 ft. in el., lying about 0.4 mi. NNW. of Vindication I. in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 57°03’S., 26°47’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Sawtooth: see Armadillo Hill. SCAIFE MOUNTAINS: group of mountains on Joerg Plateau, lying S. of Gardner Inlet and im- mediately W. of the Orville Escarpment; in about 75°30’S., 63°25’°W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named these mountains for A. M. Scaife, of Pittsburgh, a contributor to the expedition. SCAR HILLS: small ridge of hills, with nu- merous glacial striae, extending from the E. side of the head of Hope Bay about 1 mi. NE. along the SE. shore, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°25/S., 57°01’W. Disc. and named by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Not adopted: Schrammenhtgel [German]. SCARLETT POINT: point forming the W. side of Phyllis Bay at the S. end of Montagu I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 58—28’S., 26°20’W. Disc. in 1775 by a Br. exp. under Cook. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named 272 for E. W. A. Scarlett, accountant on the staff of the Discovery Committee. SCHIRMACHER PONDS: group of shallow ponds of melt-water on the surface of the icecap, situated at the foot of the minor escarpment close N. of the Wohlthat Mtns., in New Schwabenland; in about 70°30’S., 11°40’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Richardheinrich Schirmacher, pilot of the Boreas, one of the exp. seaplanes. SCHIST POINT: conspicuous point about 2 mi. NW. of The Divide on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°15’W. First sur- veyed by DI personnel in 1933. The name, applied by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49, marks the eastern limit at sea level of the meta- morphic rocks in this part of Coronation Island. SCHLIEPER BAY: bay about 1.5 mi. wide, en- tered between Romerof Head and Weddell Pt., along the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°52’W. Schlieper Bay was named between 1905-12 after the director of the Compania Argen- tina de Pesca. SCHLOSSBACH, CAPE: cape forming the S. side of the entrance to Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 75°09’S., 62°54’W. Disc. by the RARE under Ronne, 1947-48, who named it for Cdr. Isaac Schlossbach, USN (Ret.), second- in-command of the exp. and commander of the Port of Beaumont, Texas. SCHLOSSBACH, MOUNT: peak standing about 1.3 mi. SE. of Mt. Nilsen, near the S. end of the N. group of the Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°02’S., 155°16’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in a flight on Jan. 27, 1929, and named for Cdr. Isaac Schlossbach, USN, member of the Ice Party on the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and member of the USAS party which occupied the Rockefeller Mountains seismic station during November and December 1940. Schneider Range: (in about 73°40’S., 3°20’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as it is not possible to correlate the feature with sub- sequent survey work. SCHOKALSKY BAY: bay, about 9 mi. wide at its entrance and indenting 6 mi., between Mt. Calais and Cape Brown along the E. coast of Alex- ander I Island; in 69°15’S., 69°55’W. Hampton Gl. discharges tremendous amounts of ice into the head of Schokalsky Bay at a steep gradient causing the ice there to be extremely broken and irregular, and discourages use of this bay and glacier as an inland sledging route onto NE. Alex- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ander I Island. This feature was first sighted from a distance and roughly charted by the FrAE under Charcot who, thinking it to be a strait, gave the name “Détroit Schokalsky” after Yuliy M. Shokal’skiy, Russian geographer, meteorologist and oceanographer. In giving this name he fol- lowed the spelling Schokalsky used by the man himself when writing in Roman script. The coast in this vicinity was photographed from the air and this bay roughly charted in 1937 by the BGLE, but Charcot’s “Détroit Schokalsky” was not iden- tified. Further surveys by FIDS in 1948 have defi- nitely identified this bay as the feature originally named by Charcot. Not adopted: Détroit Scho- kalsky [French], Shokalski Strait. SCHOLLAERT CHANNEL: channel between Anvers I. on the SW. and Gand and Brabent Islands on the NE., connecting Dallmann Bay and De Gerlache Str., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 62°50’W. Disc. in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who named it for Francois Schollaert, 1851-1917, Belgian statesman. SCHOTT GLACIER: glacier which flows in a NW. direction to the SE. side of Wilson Hbr., about 1 mi. SW. of Schrader Gl., on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°43’W. Charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, and named for Gerhard Schott, oceanographer at the German Hydrographic Office, Hamburg. SCHOTT INLET: small ice-filled inlet indenting the E. side of Merz Pen. immediately S. of Cape Darlington, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°10’S., 60°52’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by the USAS. Charted in 1947 by a joint party consisting of members of the RARE under Ronne and the FIDS. Named by the FIDS for Gerhard Schott. SCHRADER GLACIER: glacier which flows in a W. direction to the head of Wilson Hbr., on the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°42’W. Charted by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, and named for Dr. K. Schrader, leader of the Ger. exp. based at Royal Bay in 1882-83. Schrammenhiigel: see Scar Hills. Schubert Peak: (in about 72°54’S., 3°20’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as it is not possible to correlate the feature with sub- sequent survey work. SCHULZ MOUNTAINS: mountains about 40 mi. SW. of Mt. Rodpke, in New Schwabenland; in about 72°45’S., 6°40’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Robert Schulz, 273 second engineer of the exp. ship Schwabenland. Not adopted: Schulz Mountain. Schwarze Insel: see Black Island. SCHWEITZER GLACIER: northern of two gla- ciers descending from the interior heights of Luit- pold Coast to Duke Ernst Bay; in about 77°48’S., 34°40’W. Disc. in January-February 1912 by the GerAE under Filchner, who named it for Major Schweitzer, first president of the German Antarc- tic Expedition Society. SCORESBY, CAPE: cape marking the N. end of Borradaile I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°33’S., 162°50’E. Charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II who made running surveys of the N. portion of the Balleny Is. in 1936-38. Named for the William Scoresby, companion ship of the Discovery II in carrying out oceanographic work in Antarctic waters at that time. Scoresby Bay: see William Scoresby Bay. SCOTIA BAY: bay about 2.5 mi. wide, lying im- mediately E. of Mossman Pen. along the S. side of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°40’W. Disc. and roughly charted during the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in 1821. More accurately charted by the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4, and named for the exp. ship Scotia. SCOTIA SEA: a sea which lies between South Georgia and the South Orkney Is., and is bounded on the E. by the South Sandwich Is. and on the W. by the meridian of 55°W. It centers near 57°30’S., 40°00’W. Named in about 1932 after the Scotia, exp. ship of the ScotNAE under Bruce, 1902-4. Not adopted: Sudantillen See [German]. SCOTT, CAPE: cape, with an ice tongue extend- ing about 15 mi. northward, lying about 6 mi. ESE. of Cape Oakeley, on the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°S., 168°E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Peter A. Scott, mate on the exp. ship Terror. Scott, Mount: see Robert Scott, Mount. SCOTT, MOUNT: horseshoe-shaped massif about 3,400 ft. in el., open to the SW. with its convex side fronting on Girard Bay and its NW. side on Lemaire Chan., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°10’S., 64°04’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99. Named by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, for Capt. Robert F. Scott, leader of the BrNAE, 1901-4, and the BrAE, 1910-13, who lost his life in March 1912 on the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA return journey from the South Pole, which he had reached on Jan. 18, 1912. SCOTT CONE: conical hill about 100 ft. in el., standing about 2 mi. NNE. of Cape McNab on Buckle I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°48’S., 163°09’E. Located adjacent to Eliza Cone, the two features appear to have been named after the schooner Eliza Scott, exp. ship of the Br. exp. under Balleny, 1839. SCOTT GLACIER: glacier about 7 mi. wide and over 20 mi. long, flowing in a NNW. direction to the Queen Mary Coast between Capes Hoadly and Grace, and terminating in part in Edisto Ice Tongue and in another large ice tongue to the westward; in about 66°35’W., 100°09’E. Disc. in November 1912 by the Main Base party led by Frank Wild of the AAE under Mawson, and named for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Scott Glacier: see Robert Scott Glacier. SCOTT ISLAND: island about 0.25 mi. long and about half as wide, lying about 315 mi. NE. of Cape Adare, the NE. extremity of Victoria Land; in about 67°24’S., 179°55’W. Disc. in December 1902 by Capt. William Colbeck, RNR, commander of the BrNAE relief ship Morning, who named it for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Not adopted: Scott Islands. SCOTT ISLAND BANK: submarine bank lying N. of Ross Sea and surrounding Scott I.; in about 67°24’S., 179°55’W. SCOTT KELTIE, CAPE: rounded headland with vertical cliffs which rise to a small ice dome about 1,300 ft. in el., forming the NW. end of Vega I., south of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°47’S., 57°41’W. Disc. by the SwedAE under Norden- skj6ld, 1901-4, and named by him for Sir John Scott Keltie, Sec. of the Royal Geographical Soc., 1892-1915. SCOTT KELTIE GLACIER: small glacier de- scending steeply to Robertson Bay about 2 mi. SE. of Penelope Pt., on the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°32’S., 169°49’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE under C. E. Borchgrevink, who named it for Sir John Scott Keltie, then secretary of the Royal Geographical Society. Scott Mountains: see Scott Range. SCOTT NUNATAKS: conspicuous twin eleva- tions, rising to about 1,700 ft., which form the N. end of the Alexandra Mtns. on Edward VII Pen.; in about 77°10’S., 153°35’W. , Disc. in 1902 by the BrNAE under Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN, and named 274 in his honor by Lt. K. Prestrud, leader of the East- ern Sledge Party of the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, who ascended the features while exploring Edward VII Pen. in 1911. Not adopted: Scott Nunatak, Scotts Nunataks, Scott’s Nunataks. SCOTT RANGE: range of mountains at the head of Ice Bay, lying SSW. of the Tula Range on the coast of Enderby Land; in about 67°40’S., 50°00’E. Disc. on Jan. 13, 1930 by the BANZARE under Sir Douglas Mawson, and named by Mawson for Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN. Not adopted: Scott Mountains. SCREE PEAK: conspicuous, flat-topped peak with talus-covered slopes, about 1,800 ft. in el., standing at the NE. end of Eagle I. in Prince Gustav off the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°38’S., 57°27’W. Disc. by the FIDS and so named follow- ing their 1945 survey. The name is descriptive of the slopes of the peak. Scripps Island; Scripps Peninsula: see Scripps Ridge. SCRIPPS RIDGE: rocky divide which is largely ice covered, lying between Casey and Lurabee Glaciers on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°06’S., 63°35’W. Deeply scarred by tributary glaciers, it terminates on the E. in Cape Walcott. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in his pioneer flight on Dec. 20, 1928. Thinking it was a large island lying between two great transverse channels which completely severed Palmer Pen., he named it Scripps Island for William Scripps of Detroit, Mich. Correlation of aerial photographs taken by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935 and preliminary reports of the findings of the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, led W. L. G. Joerg to interpret this to be a peninsula. In pub- lished reports, members of the BGLE have con- curred in this interpretation which was also borne out by the results of subsequent flights and a sledge trip from East Base by members of the USAS in. 1940. The ridge was surveyed by the joint party consisting of members of the FIDS and RARE in 1947-48. Not adopted: Scripps Island, Scripps Peninsula. SCRIVENER GLACIER: small tributary glacier flowing in a SE. direction from the vicinity of Mounts Woolnough and Morrison to the N. side of Mackay Gl. immediately W. of Mt. Allan Thom- son, in Victoria Land; in about 76°57’S., 161°50’E. Charted and named by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. SCRYMGEOUR, CAPE: high conspicuous cliffs of red colored volcanic rock, forming the E. end of Andersson I., lying in Antarctic Sound off the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA NE. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°36’S., 56°22’W. The cape was named by Thomas Robertson, captain of the Active of Dundee, Scotland, in 1893. It was re-identified and charted by the FIDS during 1947. Scullin Monolith: see Mikkelsen Peak. SCULLIN MONOLITH: crescent-shaped rock fronting the sea about 2.5 mi. W. of Torlyn Mtn., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S., 66°43’E. Early in January 1930 the BANZARE under Mawson made an aerial flight from the exp. ship Discovery and reported a mountainous shore- line in this area. Mawson landed on the rock on Feb. 13, 1931 and named it for James Henry Scullin, Prime Minister of Australia, 1929-31. Charted in January-February 1931 from Norwegian whale catchers exploring along this coast, and named Mount Klarius Mikkelsen for Capt. Klarius Mikkel- sen, master of the whale catcher Torlyn. Mikkel- sen Peak is hereby retained as the name of the highest peak of this feature. Not adopted: Mount Klarius Mikkelsen. SEAL BAY: bay lying in the corner of the ice cliffs SW. of Cape Norvegia, along Princess Martha Coast; in about 71°45’S., 12°20’W. Discovered in 1930 by a Nor. exp. under Riiser-Larsen, and so named because of the abundance of seals in the bay. Not adopted: Sel Bucht [German], Selbukta [Nor- wegian]. SEA LEOPARD FJORD: inlet about 1 mi. wide, between Bellingshausen and Luck Points, in the SE. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°04'S., 37°15’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy, who gave this name because he observed sea leopards there. Not adopted: Sealeopard Fjord, Seeleoparden Fjord [German]. SEA-LEOPARD PATCH: shoal near the center of Visca Anchorage, Admiralty Bay, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°23’W. Charted and probably named by DI personnel on the Discovery who took soundings in Visca Anchorage during 1927. Sealer Cove: see Diaz Cove. Seal Island: see Seal Islands. SEAL ISLANDS: group of small islands lying from 3 to 5 mi. NW. of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°03’S., 55°43’W. The group takes its name from the largest island, which Capt. William Smith named Seal Island in 1820 because of the number of seals caught there. Not adopted: Iles des Phoques [French], Seal Island, Seal Rocks. 275 SEAL NUNATAKS: chain of nunataks extend- ing in a WNW. direction from Robertson I., and protruding above Larsen Ice Shelf off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; centering in 65°03’S., 60°18’W. Disc. and named Seal Islands in December 1893 by a Nor. whaling exp. under C. A. Larsen, who also named several individual features in the group. They were more accurately charted in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold, who determined them to be nunataks, and by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Robben Nunataks [German], Sel Oene [Norwegian]. SEAL POINT: point which extends N. from the SE. shore of Hope Bay between Eagle Cove and Hut Cove, at the NE. end of the Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 56°59’W. Disc. by a party under J. Gun- nar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4, and so named because the party relieved their shortage of food and fuel by killing a seal on this point. Not adopted: Robbenspitze [German]. SEAL POINT: point lying about 3.7 mi. S. of Ridley Beach on the W. side of the peninsula ter- minating in Cape Adare, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°22’S., 170°14’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott. Seal Rocks: see Seal Islands. SEAL ROCKS: rocks, about 50 ft. in el., lying about 0.3 mi. NE. of Cape Ellsworth, the N. end of Young I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 66°15’S., 162°25°R. SEA SERPENT COVE: small-cove about 1 mi. SE. of Vulcan Pt. on the W. side of Candlemas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°42’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. SEAWARD ROCK: northernmost and most sea- ward rock in a group of islands which occupy the central part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia, lying immediately NE. of Mollyhawk It.; in 54°00’S., 37°19’W. First charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. Probably named by DI personnel who surveyed the Bay of Isles in 1929-30. SECOND MILESTONE: rock marked by break- ers, about 1.25 mi. ESE. of Robertson Pt., off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°06’S., 36°44’W. Charted and named by DI personnel during the period 1927-30. SEDGWICK GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 7 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which flows E. from the foot of Mt. Stephen- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA son into George VI Sound immediately N. of Mt. King; in 69°51’S., 69°22’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for Adam Sedgwick, English geologist and prof. of geology at Cambridge Univ., 1818-73. Seeleoparden Fjord: see Sea Leopard Fjord. Seilkopf Mountains: (in about 72°45’S., 3°30’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as it is not possible to correlate the feature with subse- quent survey work. SELBORNE, CAPE: steep, rounded snow cape with high cliffs from which hills rise to the moun- tains about 30 mi. southwestward, forming the S. side of the entrance to Barne Inlet, on the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 80°20’S., 160°50’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. William Waldegrave Palmer Selborne, 2d Earl of Selborne, entered the Cabinet as First Lord of the Admiralty in 1900. Not adopted: Cape Selbourne. Selbourne, Cape: see Selborne, Cape. Sel Bucht; Selbukta: see Seal Bay. SELIGMAN INLET: broad inlet which recedes about 6 mi. inland between Capes Choyce and Free- man, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°50’S., 65°30’W. The inlet was photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. It was charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Gerald Seligman, founder and president of the British Glaciological Society. Sel Oene: see Seal Nunataks. SENTINEL ISLETS: small group of rocky islets, lying immediately off the coastal ice cliffs about 2 mi. E. of the E. end of the Curzon Its., off Adélie Coast; in 66°47’S., 141°42’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, who established an astronomical control station here, and so named because these islets mark the easternmost rock outcrops, as yet known, along Adélie Coast. SENTINEL MOUNTAINS: group of high moun- tains projecting through the icecap in Ellsworth Highland between 77°S. and 78°S., and between 86°00’W. and 92°30’W. They consist of a major NE.-SW. trending range, flanked by subranges and outliers. Near the N. end of the main range Mt. Ulmer reaches an estimated el. of 12,500 ft. First sighted and photographed from the air, on Nov. 23, 1935, by Lincoln Ellsworth who in naming them recognized their prominent position as a landmark 276 on an otherwise featureless ice surface. Not adopted: Sentinel Range. SENTINEL NUNATAK: black, pyramid-shaped nunatak, about 2,100 ft. in el., which is the eastern- most of the Tillberg Nunataks, lying in the mouth of Drygalski Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°47’S., 60°46’W. The nunatak was charted by the FIDS in 1947 and so named because of its commanding position at the mouth of Drygalski Glacier. SENTINEL PEAK: conspicuous, pointed peak about 6,200 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Ferrar Gl. and forming the highest point in the south-central part of the Kukri Hills, in Victoria land; in about 177°46’S., 162°38’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Sentinel Range: see Sentinel Mountains. SENTINELS, THE: small group of rocks lying in the entrance to Godthul, a bay along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°17’W. Rocks in this approximate position have been indi- cated on charts since about 1912, but they were first accurately charted by personnel of the Nor. exp., 1927-28. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel who recharted this area in 1929. SERAPH BAY: broad bay formed by the E. coast of Thurston Pen. where it joins Eights Coast on the SW. side of Bellingshausen Sea, lying close S. of the Fletcher Is.; in about 72°15’S., 95°00’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Feb. 27, 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for the brig Seraph, of Stonington, Conn., which in 1830, under the command of Capt. Benjamin Pendleton, participated in a private exp. to the SW. of the South Shetland Is., southward of 60°S., and as far west as 101°W. SEVEN BUTTRESSES: series of seven rock but- tresses, about 500 ft. in el., which are separated by narrow icefalls and extend for about 4 mi. along the S. part of the W. coast of Tabarin Pen., at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°36’S., 57°10’W. Probably first sighted by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. The Seven Buttresses were surveyed and named by the FIDS, 1946. SEWARD MOUNTAINS: isolated mountains, about 5,000 ft. in el., standing about 20 mi. S. of Goodenough Gl. on the SW. shore of Palmer Pen.; in about 72°26’S., 66°15’W. Disc. in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Named by Rymill for Sir Albert Charles Seward, Prof. of Botany at Cam- bridge, 1906-36. Not adopted: Seward Nunataks. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Seward Nunataks: see Seward Mountains. SEYMOUR ISLAND: island about 10 mi. long and about 5 mi. wide at its greatest breadth, lying 1 mi. NE. of Snow Hill I. and S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°17’S., 56°45’W. The NE. end of this feature was sighted by a Br. exp. under Ross, Jan. 6, 1843, and named Cape Seymour after R. Adm. George Francis Seymour. Its insular nature was determined by Capt. C. A. Larsen in 1892-93 and the name Seymour has since been extended to the entire island. SHACKLETON GLACIER: major glacier, about 12 mi. wide at its mouth and perhaps 80 to 100 mi. long, descending from the polar plateau, approxi- mately along the 175th meridian west longitude, to the head of Ross Ice Shelf. Disc. by the USAS on the flight of February 29-March 1, 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Sir Ernest H. Shackleton, fa- mous British Antarctic explorer. Not adopted: Wade Glacier. SHACKLETON ICE SHELF: an extensive ice shelf fronting for about 105 mi. on the Queen Mary Coast from about 94°55’E. to about 99°25’E., and projecting seaward in the west-central portion for an undetermined distance of more than 60 miles. The extreme W. portion, namely the 20-mile section fronting on the coast between Junction Corner and Roscoe Gl., was determined from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in February to extend seaward for about 20 mi. to a point close S. of Bigelow Rock. The E. end was determined from these photographs to extend seaward for about 33 mi. from the 20-mile section between Davis Pen. and Delay Point. Additional study is required to determine whether the large tongue opposite Den- man Gl. should be included as forming the E. end of the ice shelf, as small open water areas (dead water) lie within the portion of the tongue close NNE. of Jones Ridge, a prominent nunatak stand- ing above the lower reaches of Denman Glacier. The existence of this ice shelf was first made known by the USEE under Wilkes, who explored along its E. and NE. front in the Vincennes in February 1840. It was named by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, for Sir Ernest Shackleton. Not adopted: Shackleton Shelf, Shackleton Shelf Ice, Termina- tion Barriere Eis [German]. SHACKLETON INLET: a re-entrant about 10 mi. wide, with Nimrod Gl. at its head, lying between Cape Wilson and Cape Lyttelton, at the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°22’S., 163°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and named for Lt. (later Sir) Ernest Shackleton, RNR, who, with Dr. Edward A. Wilson, accompanied Scott on his attempted journey to the pole. 277 SHACKLETON PEAK: mountain with perpen- dicular cliffs facing W., about 4,800 ft. in el., stand- ing about 2 mi. E. of Chaigneau Peak on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°13’S., 63°56’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Sir Ernest Shackleton. Shackleton Shelf Ice: see Shackleton Ice Shelf. SHAGNASTY ISLET: small, rocky ice-free islet lying about 0.4 mi. W. of Lenton Pt. in the N. part of Clowes Bay, close off the S. coast of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°38’W. Roughly charted in 1933 by DI personnel, and surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, applied by FIDS, arose from the unpleasant state of the islet due to its occupation by a large colony of blue-eyed shags (Phalacrocoraz atriceps) . SHAG ROCK: rock about 0.1 mi. ESE. of Cliff Islet and some 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. SHAG ROCKS: group of insular rocks about 240 ft. in el., lying some 115 mi. WNW. of South Geor- gia; in about 53°33’S., 42°02’W. Shag Rocks, prob- ably so named because shags and other sea birds frequent them, were known to sealers prior to 1823 and probably are identical with the ‘Aurora Islands” reported in this vicinity by the ship Aurora in 1762. They were charted by DI person- nel on the William Scoresby in 1927. SHALLOW BAY: bay about 10 mi. wide formed by a recession of limited depth in the ice cliffs in the E. part of Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°48’S., 67°36’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on Feb. 12 or 13, 1931 and so named be- cause it formed only a shallow indentation in the coast line. ( SHAMBLES GLACIER: steep glacier with very prominent hummocks and crevasses, about 6 mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing SE. be- tween Mt. Bouvier and Mt. Mangin to Stonehouse Bay on the E. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°20’S., 68°15’W. The lower reaches of the glacier were first sighted and surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, and resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because of the very broken nature of its surface. SHANNON POINT: point marking the W. side of the entrance to Esbensen Bay, at the SE. end of South Georgia; in 54°52’S., 36°00’W. The point was charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby. Named for Lt. Cdr. R. L. V. Shannon, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA RN, captain of the William Scoresby at the time of the survey. SHARBONNEAU, CAPE: rounded, snow-covered headland forming the S. side of the entrance to Lehrke Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen:; in 70°50’S., 61°27’W. Members of the East Base of the USAS who explored this coast in 1940 charted this feature as an island, which they named for Charles W. Sharbonneau, carpenter at East Base. It was determined to be a cape of Palmer Pen. in 1947 by a joint sledge party consisting of members of the RARE and the FIDS. Not adopted: Shar- bonneau Island. Sharbonneau Island: see Sharbonneau, Cape. SHARP PEAK: sharp peak about 1,500 ft. in el’, situated in the NE. part of Livingston I., about 2.5 mi. NW. of High Pt., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S., 60°07’'W. The name was applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted the peak in 1935. SHARP PEAK: peak probably over 4,000 ft. in el., about 4 mi. S. of Ferin Head, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°03’S., 65°18’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. The name is descriptive. SHEEHAN ISLANDS: group of small islands in the William Scoresby Arch., the highest about 300 ft. in el., lying E. of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°22’S., 59°51’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on Feb. 18, 1931, but erroneously charted as Sheehan Nunatak, lying behind the coast line. Their insularity was determined by DI personnel on the William Scoresby on Feb. 27, 1936. They were more fully mapped by Norwegian cartogra- phers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen in January and February 1937. Not adopted: Hamarggalten [Norwegian], Sheehan Nunatak. Sheehan Nunatak: see Sheehan Islands. SHEEP POINT: point along the S. side of Cook Bay, marking the S. side of the entrance to Prince Olav Hbr., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°08’W. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1929 survey of Prince Olav Hbr. by DI personnel, but may reflect an earlier naming. SHEILA COVE: cove in the SW. part of Jessie Bay on the N. coast of Laurie I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°46’W. Surveyed and named by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, for Sheila Bruce, daughter of William S. Bruce, leader of the expedition. - 1939-41. 278 SHELBY, MOUNT: mountain about 5,000 ft. in el., standing between Daspit Gl. and Bills Gulch at the head of Trail Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 65°50’W. Disc. by members of East Base of USAS, 1939-41. It-was photographed from the air in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, and charted in 1948 by the FIDS. Named by Ronne for Marjorie Shelby who contributed her services as typist and editor in drafting the RARE prospectus, and assisted in general exp. work prior to departure. Shelby Glacier: see East Gould Glacier. SHELTER ISLANDS: group of islets about 0.5 mi. W. of Winter I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°18’W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. SHELTER POINT: point on the W. side of Blue Whale Hbr., about 0.3 mi. S. of the entrance, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°01’W. Charted by DI personnel in 1930, and so named because the point affords shelter to vessels anchor- ing on the S. side of it. ; SHEPARD ISLAND: small island lying at the W. edge of the Getz Ice Shelf off the E. extremity of Hobbs Coast; in about 74°25’S., 132°00’W. Disc. in December 1940 by the USAS and named for John Shepard, Jr., a contributor to the USAS, Not adopted: John Shepard Island. SHEPPARD NUNATAK: conical nunatak about 200 ft. in el., standing near Sheppard Pt., the N. side of the entrance to Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°22’S., 56°59’W. This area was first explored by a party of the SwedAE, 1901-4. The nunatak was charted by the FIDS and named for R. Sheppard, master of the ship Eagle, who landed the party which established the FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1945. SHEPPARD POINT: point marking the N. side of the entrance to Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°22’S., 56°58’W. Disc. by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-04, who wintered at Hope Bay in 1903. Named by the FIDS for R. Sheppard. Sheriff, Cape; Shireff, Cape: see Shirreff, Cape. Shetland du Sud, Iles; Shetland Islands: see South Shetland Islands. Shetland Islands: see South Shetland Islands. SHIDELER, MOUNT: peak standing about 1.2 mi. SE. of Mt. Fitzsimmons in the northern group of the Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VIII Pen.; GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in about 77°55’S., 155°15’W. Disc. on Jan. 27, 1929 by members of the ByrdAE on an exploratory flight over this area. SHINGLE COVE: small, sheltered cove in the NW. corner of Iceberg Bay, on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 45°35’W. First surveyed by DI personnel in 1933. The name, applied by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49, arose from the fine shingle on the landing beach on the S. shore of the cove. SHIPLEY GLACIER: glacier descending from the high plateau of northern Victoria Land to the W. side of Robertson Bay, where it fronts on Pressure Bay and against Flat and Turret Islands; in about 71°25’S., 169°12’E. This feature was charted by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. SHIRLEY, MOUNT: crescent-shaped summit- ridge resulting from the glacial sculpturing of a prominent snow-covered cirque overlooking Emory Land Bay, on Ruppert Coast; in about 75°40’S., 142°00’W. Disc. and mapped by the USAS in 1940. Named for Charles C. Shirley, chief photographer at the USAS West Base. Not adopted: Mount Ann Shirley. SHIRREFF, CAPE: cape at the N. tip of the small rocky peninsula which separates Blythe and Barclay Bays, lying near the W. end of the N. coast of Livingston I.; in 62°27’S., 60°48’W. Named by Edward Bransfield in 1820 for Capt. William H. Shirreff, at that time the British commanding officer in the Pacific. Not adopted: Cape Sheriff, Cape Shireff. SHIRREFF COVE: small cove or anchorage, situated immediately SW. of Cape Shirreff, along the N. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°27’S., 60°49’W. Edward Bransfield, Master, RN, named a cove in this vicinity for Capt. William H. Shirreff, British commanding officer in the Pacific in 1820. Present application of the name is based upon the location shown on Capt. George Powell’s map published by Laurie in 1822. Not adopted: Shirreff’s Cove. Shiskoff’s Island: see Clarence Island. SHIVER POINT: point, surmounted by a peak about 2,100 ft. in el., marking the N. side of the entrance to Evans Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 61°25’W. Evans Inlet was first sighted from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928. The point was charted during 1947 by the FIDS and named by the Br—APC in 1950. The name is not a personal name. 279 SHMIDT, CAPE: cape on the W. coast of Palmer Pen., marking the NW. extremity of the peninsula which separates Hanusse Bay and Lallemand Fjord; in 66°55’S., 67°06’W. First seen and rough- ly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was sketched from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Named in 1954 by the Br—APC for Prof. Otto Yu. Shmidt, Dir. of the Arctic Inst. at Leningrad, 1930-32, Head of the Chief Administra- tion of the Northern Sea Route, 1932-39, and leader of many Arctic expeditions. Shokalski Strait: see Schokalsky Bay. SHROVE POINT: the SE. tip of Candlemas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°39’W. The name of the point derives from the day on which it was charted by DI personnel on the Dis- covery II, Shrove Tuesday, March 4, 1930. Sibbald, Cape: see Johnson, Cape. SIBBALD, CAPE: sheer, bare cliffs, 2,000 ft. in el., at the S. margin of Lady Newnes Ice Shelf, in Victoria Land; in about 74°00’S., 166°50’E. Named in February 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross for Lt. (later Cdr.) John Sibbald, of the Erebus. SICKLE MOUNTAIN: mountain standing on the S. side of Clarke Gl. and about 13 mi. E. of Cape Berteaux, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°53’S., 66°50’W. So named by Finn Ronne of the East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, because its peculiar shape was suggestive of that of a sickle. Sidders, Islotes: see Pi Islets. SIDLEY, MOUNT: peak about 12,000 ft. in el., the most imposing summit of the Executive Com- mittee Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°25’S., 129°00’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd, Nov. 18, 1934, and named by him for Mrs. Mabelle Sidley, the daughter of William Horlick, manufacturer, who was a contributor to the Byrd- AE, 1933-35. Not adopted: Mount Mabelle Sidley, Mount Maybelle Horlick Sibley, Mount Maybelle Horlick Sidley, Mount Maybelle Sidley. SIDNEY HERBERT SOUND: a sound extending from Capes Lachman and Scott Keltie on the NW. to the narrows between The Naze and False Island Pt. on the SE., separating Vega I. from James Ross I. and connecting Prince Gustav Chan. with Erebus and Terror Gulf; in about 63°55’S., 57°40’W. On Jan. 6, 1843 Capt. James Clark Ross disc. a broad embayment E. of the sound, which he named Sidney Herbert Bay after the Hon. Sidney Herbert, M.P., First Secretary to the Admiralty. The sound proper was disc. and charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, who included it with GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the broad embayment under the name Sidney Herbert Sound. The recommended application restricts the name of the area W. of the narrows be- tween The Naze and False Island Pt.; the embay- ment disc. by Ross forms the W. margin of Erebus and Terror Gulf. Not adopted: Herbert Sound, Sydney Herbert Sound. Sierra du Fief: see Du Fief, Sierra. SIFFREY, CAPE: cape about 7 mi. NW. of Mt. Bransfield, forming the extreme N. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 63°13’S., 57°19’W. Disc. and named by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville. SIGHING PEAK: prominent, isolated, rocky peak, about 2,100 ft. in el., marking the S. side of the entrance to Stonehouse Bay on the E. side of Adelaide I.; in 67°24’S., 67°59’'W. First sighted and surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the persistent sighing of wind from the summit-of this peak even when appar- ently calm at sea level. SIGMA ISLETS: group of small islets and rocks which lie about 2.5 mi. N. of Eta I. and mark the N. limit of the Melchior Is., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°16’S., 62°55’W. The name Sigma, derived from the 18th letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of these islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islotes Avion [Spanish]. SIGNY ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long and less than 3 mi. wide, lying close S. of the middle of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S.,. 45°38’W. Unnamed, the appearance of this island was first roughly plotted in 1823 by Matthew Brisbane, under the direction of James Weddell. It was more carefully charted by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, who made a running survey of the island in the 1912-13 season. Named after Capt. Sgrlle’s wife, Mrs. Signy Sgrlle. The island was roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and was surveyed by the FIDS in the period 1947-50. SILLARD ISLETS: two ice-covered islets lying about 1 mi. NW. of Cape Mascart, the NE. ex- tremity of Adelaide I.; in 66°40’S., 67°45’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Named for Director Sillard of the French Montevideo Co., Montevideo, Uruguay, whose company made re- pairs on Charcot’s exp. ship, the Powrquoi-Pas?. Not adopted: Sillard Islands. Silveyra, Islas: see Omicron Islets. 280 SIMMERS PEAKS: group of three peaks rising above the icecap in Enderby Land to about 2,700 ft. in el., about 17 mi. SE. of Cape Close and about 12 mi. N. of Mt. Codrington; in about 66°06’S., 52°45’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson in January 1930, and named for R. G. Simmers, meteorologist of the expedition. SIMPSON, CAPE: conspicuous rock bluff on the N. end of Ufs I., which rises to a sharp peak about 920 ft. in elevation. This cape forms the E. side of the entrance to Howard Bay along Mac-Robert- son Coast; in about 67°27’S., 61°09’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 18, 1931. SIMPSON GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue projecting about 2.5 mi. from the N. coast of Vic- toria Land, between Nelson Cliffs and Atkinson Cliffs; in about 71°15’S., 168°47’E. Charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Dr. (later Sir) George C. Simpson, then meteorologist of the expe- dition. He was Dir. of the Meteorological Office, 1920-38, and Pres. of the Royal Meteorological Soc., 1940-42. SIMPSON HEAD: conspicuous promontory about 3,500 ft. in el., which projects S. into the N. side of New Bedford Inlet about 4 mi. NW. of Cape Kidson, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°21’S., 60°59’'W. Disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS. During 1947 the promontory was pho- tographed from the air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Sir George C. Simpson. Simpson Islands: see Simpson Rocks. SIMPSON ROCKS: group of rocks, some of which are submerged, lying about 6 mi. NE. of Cape Melville, King George I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in 61°57’S., 57°23’W. The name Simpson appears on a chart of August 1825 by the British sealer James Weddell, and is now well established in international usage. Not adopted: Simpsons Islands. SIMS ISLAND: small but conspicuous island about 0.5 mi. long and 1,000 ft. in el., lying in Carroll Inlet along George Bryan Coast; in about 73°15’S., 78°45’W. Sighted from the air by mem- bers of the USAS, in December 1940, and named for Lt. (jg) L. S. Sims, USMC, surgeon on the expedition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SINBAD ROCK: low rock about 1.25 mi. WNW. of Square End I., off the NW. side of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°09’S., 59°02’W. The rock was charted in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, but the name appears to be first used on a 1948 Admiralty chart based upon this survey. SINKER ROCK: rock lying off the N. tip of Goudier Islet, near the center of the harbor of Port Lockroy, in the Palmer Arch; in 64°50’S., 63°31’W. Rocks were charted in this position by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. So named by the FIDS in 1944 because a sinker was laid near this rock for a boat mooring. SIPLE, MOUNT: massive, conical, snow-covered mountain, about 10,200 ft. in el., lying in the angle of the coast line at the E. side of the entrance of Wrigley Gulf, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 73°15/S., 123°00’W. Disc. in December 1940 by members of the USAS in a flight from West Base. Paul A. Siple, for whom the mountain is named, served on the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and 1933-35, and was in command of the West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. He was navigator on all major explora- tory flights from the base, including that on which Mount Siple was first sighted. Not adopted: Mount Ruth Siple, Mount Walker. SIREN BAY: small bay lying in front of Shipley Gl. between Flat and Turret Islands, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°22’S., 169°12’E. Charted in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and so named by them because they heard a noise like a ship’s siren while surveying this area. Not adopted: Syren Bay. Sir George Newnes Glacier: see Newnes Glacier. SIRIUS KNOLL: conspicuous, ice-covered knoll about 3,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of West Russell Gl. and marking the NE. end of the Detroit Plateau, in the central part of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°43’S., 58°36’W. Charted in 1946 by the FIDS and named after Sirius, the dog star. Sir John Murray Glacier: see Murray Glacier. Sisters, The: see Sgstrene Islands. SISTERS, THE: two stacks, or pillar rocks, lying close to the N. tip of Cape Adare, in north- ern Victoria Land; in about 71°17’S., 170°15’E. First charted and named in 1899 by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under Borchgrevink. Not adopted: Sisters, Sisters’ Rocks. 424589 0-57-19 281 Sisters Point: see Three Sisters Point. Sisters’ Rocks: see Sisters, The. SITKA BAY: small bay about 1 mi. W. of Cape Buller, along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°24’°W. The names Sitka Bay and Buller Bay have both appeared on maps for this feature for many years. Following a survey of South Georgia in 1951-52, the SGS reported that this feature is known locally as Sitka Bay. This latter name is approved on the basis of local usage. Not adopted: Buller Bay. Sjogren Fiord: see Sjogren Glacier. SJOGREN GLACIER: glacier at the SE. end of Louis Philippe Pen. on Palmer Pen., that is nurtured by numerous radial tributaries at its W. side, which merge and move E. to Prince Gustav Chan. some 15 mi. S. of Mt. Roberts; in 64°14’S., 58°52’W. This feature was disc. and charted as a fjord by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under the Norden- skjold. Its true nature was determined in a sur- vey by the FIDS during August 1945. The name commemorates Hj. Sjogren, a patron of Norden- skjold’s expedition. Not adopted: H. J. Sjogren Fiord, Hj. Sjogren Fiord, Sjorgren Fiord, Sjogren Fiord. Skagen: see Saint Michael, Mount. SKELTON INLET: a re-entrant about 10 mi. wide, lying in the NW. part of the Moore Em- bayment between Mt. Cocks and the Worcester Range, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°50’S., 161°45’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named this feature for Lt. Reginald W. Skelton, RN, chief engineer of the exp. ship Discovery. SKILLING ISLET: islet lying immediately NE. of Atriceps It., in the Robertson Is. group of the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 45°09’W. Although roughly charted at a much earlier date, the islet was first surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Named by the Br—-APC after Charles J. Skilling (1931-52) of the FIDS, general assistant at Signy I., 1949, and member of the sledge party which visited the Robertson Is. in 1949. Skilling died aboard the John Biscoe on April 17, 1952. SKITTLE, MOUNT: prominent rocky moun- tain, about 1,500 ft. in el., forming the N. limit of Saint Andrews Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°24’S., 36°11’W. The name “Kegel- Berg” (meaning skittle mountain) was given for this feature by a Ger. exp. under Schrader in 1882-83. During the SGS, 1951-52, the moun- tain was identified and located. The English form GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA of the name, Mount Skittle, was recommended by the Br—-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Kegel-Berg [German]. Sknapsskjar Rocks: see Skrap Skerries. Skollsberg, Cap: see Skottsberg, Cape. Skomaker Hullet: see Cobblers Cove. SKONTORP COVE: cove in Paradise Hbr., lying about 2 mi. SE. of Bryde I. along the W coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°54’S., 62°53’W. Probably named for Edvard Skontorp, an outstanding Nor- wegian whale gunner, who commanded a whaler for Salvesen and Co. of Leith, Scotland. Not adopted: Skontrop Cove. Skontrop Cove: see Skontorp Cove. SKOTTSBERG, CAPE: cape forming the S. end of Trinity I., which is separated from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. by Orléans Chan.; in 63°53’S., 60°47’W. The cape was first charted by the Swed- AE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, and named by him for Carl Skottsberg, botanist of the expedition. Not adopted: Cap Skollsberg [French]. Skrabskjaer Ricks; Skrapskjar: see Skrap Sker- ries. SKRAP SKERRIES: two small groups of islets and rocks lying midway between Cape George and Barff Pt., close off the N. coast of South Georgia; centering in about 54°15’S., 36°19’W. The present name, which dates back to about 1930, derives from the Norwegian term “skrapskjaer” or “skrapskjar” formerly used for these islets. Not adopted: Skrabskjaer Ricks, Skrapskjar, Sknaps- skjar Rocks. SKUA CREEK: narrow channel between Skua I. and Winter I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. Charted and named Skua Inlet in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill, but in recent years the name Skua Creek has overtaken the earlier name in usage. Not adopted: Skua Inlet. SKUA GULL PEAK: peak, probably about 2,000 ft. in el., with a small lake enclosed near the summit which partially thaws during the summer and is bordered by a skua gull rookery, standing about 12 mi. ENE. of Mt. Saunders, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°49’S., 145°29’W. Disc. and named in November 1934 by the Marie Byrd Land Sledging Party of the Byrd- AE, 1933-35. 282 Skua Inlet: see Skua Creek. SKUA ISLAND: triangular islet lying between Black I., to the SW., and Winter I. and Galindez I., to the N. and NE., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. SKUA ISLET: islet immediately NE. of Prion I., in the entrance to the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°15’W. The islet was charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. Named by DI personnel following their 1929-30 survey of the Bay of Isles. Not adopted: Skua Island. Skuary: see Evans, Cape. SKY ROCK: smali rock marking the southern extent of the Welcome Its., off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°29’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in 1930. SLADEN, MOUNT: conspicuous pyramid-shaped mountain, about 3,000 ft. in el., standing 1.5 mi. NW. of Saunders Pt. on the S. side of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°18’W. Sur- veyed by the FIDS in 1948-49. Named by the Br-APC for Dr. William J. L. Sladen of the FIDS, medical officer and biologist at Hope Bay in 1948, and at Signy I. in 1950. SLEIPNIR GLACIER: glacier about 10 mi. long, flowing in an easterly direction close S. of Mt. Odin into the W. side of Cabinet Inlet between Balder and Spur Points, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°29’S., 63°59’W. Charted in 1947 by the FIDS, who named it after the horse of the mytho- logical Norse god Odin. It was photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. SLESSOR PEAK: a mainly ice-covered peak, about 7,600 ft. in el., standing at the SW. end of Bruce Plateau on Palmer Pen., and close N. of West Gould GIl.; in 66°31’S., 64°58’W. It rises about 1,000 ft. above the general level of the plateau ice sheet and has a steep rock face on its N. side. First surveyed in 1946-47 by a FIDS sledge party led by Robert S. Slessor, FIDS medical officer at Stonington I., for whom the peak is named, Slosarczyk Bay; Slossarczyk Bay: see Doubtful Bay. Smaaland Bay: see Doubtful Bay; Smaaland Cove. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SMAALAND COVE: cove lying 1.5 mi. WSW. of Doubtful Bay (q.v.) along the SE. coast of South Georgia; in 54°53’S., 36°05’W. The name Doubt- ful Bay was given to this feature during the survey by DI personnel in 1927, and the name Smaaland Bay appeared on their chart for the bay 1.5 mi. ENE. The SGS, 1951-52, reported that the names Doubtful Bay and Smaaland Bay are both well established locally, but that they are always used in the reverse positions shown on the DI chart. In order to conform to local usage, the name Smaa- land is approved for the feature now described, and the name Doubtful Bay as applied to this fea- ture, is rejected. Cove is considered a more suitable descriptive term than bay. Not adopted: Doubtful Bay (q.v.), Smaaland Bay. SMALL ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in extent, lying 1 mi. S. of Intercurrence I. in the Christi- ania Is., at the NE. end of the Palmer Arch.; in 63°57’S., 61°25’W. Though the origin of this name is unknown, it has appeared on maps for over 100 years and its usage has been established inter- nationally. Small Razorback Island: see Little Razorback Island. SMALL ROCK: small rock about 0.2 mi. N. of Berntsen Pt., lying in the entrance to Borge Bay, off the E. side of Signy I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°36’/W. The name was probably applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted Borge Bay in 1933. Smedland Bay: see Doubtful Bay. SMILLIE PEAK: rock peak, about 5,800 ft. in el., which lies on the S. side of the Kohl-Larsen Plateau, at the western end of the Allardyce Range in South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°57’W. The peak was surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52. Named by the Br-APC for Gordon Smillie, surveyor with the SGS, 1951-52. SMITH, CAPE: cape forming the NE. end of Smith I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°52’S., 62°20’W. The discovery of the South Shetland Is. was first reported in 1819 by Capt. William Smith, for whom the cape is named. Not adopted: Smiths Cape. SMITH, MOUNT: peak in the Prince Albert Mtns., about 4,500 ft. in el., rising above a moun- tain mass about 10 mi. inland from the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°03’S., 161°45’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who probably named this peak for W. E. Smith, Chief, Naval Constructor, who prepared the plans and super- 283 vised construction of the exp. ship Discovery. Not adopted: Smith Mountains. Smith, Mount: see Barr Smith, Mount. Smith Bay: see Smith Inlet. SMITH INLET: ice-filled inlet receding about 15 mi. in a westerly direction between Cape Boggs and Cape Collier, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°25’S., 62°00’W. This inlet was disc. and charted in 1940 by the USAS, but it was later erroneously shown on charts as “Stefansson In- let.” During 1947 the inlet was photographed from the air by the RARE, under Ronne, who in con- junction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for R. Adm. Edward H. Smith, USCG, noted Arctic oceanographer and explorer, leader of the Marion expedition to Labrador Sea and Baffin Bay in 1928, and Dir. of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institute. Not adopted: Smith Bay, Stefansson Inlet. SMITH INLET: inlet about 8 mi. wide, lying between Capes Moore and Oakeley, in Victoria Land; in about 70°55’S., 167°30’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Alex- ander J. Smith, mate on the exp. ship Erebus. Not adopted: Smyth Inlet. SMITH ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long and about 6.5 mi. wide, lying about 42 mi. W. of Decep- tion I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 62°32’W. The discovery of the South Shetland Is. was first reported in 1819 by Capt. William Smith, for whom this island was named. This island was known to both the American sealers and the Brit- ish as early as 1820, and the name Smith has been established in international usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Borodino Island, James Is- land, Mount Pisgah Island, Smith’s Isle. SMITH PENINSULA: ice-covered, ‘‘dog-legged”’ peninsula about 25 mi. long and 10 mi. wide, ex- tending in an easterly direction between Keller and Nantucket Inlets, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°25’S., 61°15’W. The peninsula was photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of the USAS, and in 1947 by members of the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for Walter Smith, ship’s mate, navigator, and trail man with Ronne’s expedition. SMITH POINT: small point about 150 yards NE. of Besnard Pt. on the SE. side of the harbor’ of Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°30’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot. The name appears on a chart GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. Smiths Island: see Livingston Island. Smitty, Cape: (in about 74°40’S., 61°43’W.) the decision of August 1949 has been VACATED, since no prominent cape exists in the position indicated. Instead, the name Smith has been applied to the peninsula in 74°25’S., 61°15’W. SMOKY WALL: a prominent mountain block, about 6,100 ft. in el., in the Salvesen Range, South Georgia; in 54°35/S., 36°11’W. The descriptive name “Wetterwand” (meaning Weather Wall) was given to this mountain by a Ger. exp., 1882-83, under Schrader. It was surveyed by the SGS, 1951-52. When viewed from the NE., its summit is level and regular and has the appearance of a wall. The descriptive name Smoky Wall was recom- mended by the Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Wetterwand [German]. Smolensk Island: see Livingston Island. SMYLEY, CAPE: cape marking the SW. side of the entrance to Ronne Entrance, lying at the W. side of the N. end of the large, irregular-shaped island fronting on Bellingshausen Sea between Carroll Inlet and Ronne Entrance; in about 72°26’S., 78°10’W. Disc. by members of the USAS in December 1940 and named after Capt. William H. Smyley, American master of the sealing vessel Ohio during 1841-42. Capt. Smyley, in February 1842, recovered the self-recording thermometer left at Pendulum Cove, Deception I., by Capt. Henry Foster of the Chanticleer, in 1829. The minimum reading was reported to be —5° F. SMYTH, CAPE: the S. tip of Sturge I., in the Balleny Is.; in about 67°37’S., 164°35’E. In 1841, Capt. James Clark Ross, viewing Sturge I. from a considerable distance, thought it a group of three islands and named the southernmost Smyth Island, after his friend Capt. William Henry Smyth, RN, Pres. of the Royal Astronomical Soc. Ross’ error was discovered in 1904 by Capt. Robert F. Scott, who applied the name to the southern- most point on Sturge Island. Smyth Inlet: see Smith Inlet. SNEDEKER GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 10 mi. long, flowing NNE. from the continental ice to Knox Coast, about 6 mi. E. of DuBeau Gl.; in about 66°28’S., 106°30’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Robert H. Snedeker, photo interpreter with USN 284 Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in establishing astronomical control stations along the coast from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. SNIPE PEAK: peak, about 740 ft. in el., which is the main peak on Moe I., situated close SW. of Signy I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°41’W. Surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. Re- surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, and so named by them after H.M.S. Snipe, under Cdr. J. G. Forbes, RN, which visited Signy I. on Feb. 7, 1948. SNOW HILL: snow-covered peak about 800 ft. in el., about 0.3 mi. W. of the S. part of Borge Bay, in the east-central part of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1933. SNOW HILL ISLAND: an almost completely snow-capped island, about 20 mi. long, in a NE.- SW. direction, and 6 mi. wide, lying immediately SE. of James Ross I., from which it is separated by Admiralty Sound, and S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 64°28’S., 57°12’W. It was disc. on Jan. 6, 1843 by a Br. exp. under Ross who, thinking it a part of the mainland, named it Snow Hill because its snow cover stood out in contrast to the bare ground of nearby Seymour Island. Its insular character was determined in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjold. SNOW ISLAND: a completely ice-covered island about 11 mi. long and 8 mi. wide, lying about 5 mi. S. of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°45’S., 61°23’W. This island was known to both the American sealers and the British as early as 1820, and the name Snow has been well established in international usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Basil Halls Island, Monroe Island, Snow Isle. Snow Nunataks: see Ashley Snow Nunataks. SNOW PEAK: conspicuous, snow-covered peak about 2,700 ft. in el., about 2 mi. ESE. of Cape Pride, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 37°57’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in the period 1926-27. SNOWY POINT: point forming the SE. end of the small plateau lying W. of Campbell G1., in Vic- toria Land; in about 74°45’S., 163°43’E. Charted and named by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. SNYDER ROCKS: small group of coastal rocks projecting above the continental ice, fronting on Knox Coast at the N. end of the ice-covered escarp- ment along the W. side of Underwood Gl.; in about 66°37’S., 107°53’W. Delineated from aerial photo- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA graphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Mark G. Snyder, who assisted USN Op. Wml. parties which established astro- nomical control along Wilhelm II, Knox and Budd Coasts in January-February 1948. SOBRAL, CAPE: cape about 2,000 ft. in el., which is almost entirely snow-covered, marking the W. side of the entrance to Larsen Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°37’S., 59°40’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld, who named it for Lt. José M. Sobral of the Argentine Navy, asst. physicist and meteorologist with the expedition. The cape was recharted by the FIDS in 1947, but at that time it could not be determined whether the cape formed the S. tip of an island or a promontory projecting from the mainland. Sobral, Isla: see Omega Island. Society Range: see Royal Society Range. SOCKS GLACIER: small glacier entering the W. side of Beardmore Gl., about 18 mi. up the glacier from the Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°47’S., 170°20’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named for one of the ponies taken with the South Pole Party. Socks, the last pony to survive the journey, fell into a crevasse, and was lost on Beardmore Gl. near Socks Glacier. SOGEN ISLET: islet forming the E. side of Fran- cais Cove, lying in the SW. extremity of Port Charcot, which indents the N. part of Booth L., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°0i1’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named for one of the exp. dogs which died and was buried here. The name has been approved because of its long-time use. Not adopted: Sogen Islet. SOLBERG INLET: ice-filled inlet about 6 mi. wide, which recedes W. about 10 mi. between Rock Pile Peaks and Joerg Pen., along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°19’S., 65°10’W. Disc. by mem- bers of the USAS in 1940. It was resighted in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it for R. Adm. Thorvald A. Solberg, USN, Chief of Naval Research, who was of assistance to the expedition. SOLVAY MOUNTAINS: mountains, probably over 5,000 ft. in el., extending in a NE.—SW. direc- tion along the SE. side of Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°20’S., 62°17’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for Ernest Solvay, a supporter of the expedition. Not adopted: Monts Solway [French]. Solway, Monts: see Solvay Mountains. 285 SOMERVILLE ISLET: the southwesterly of a pair of islets situated about 3 mi. NW. of Darboux I. and about 6 mi. WNW. of Cape Tois Pérez, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°23’S., 64°20’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Crichton Somerville, a resident of Kristiania, Norway (now Oslo), who selected and supervised the making of much of the polar clothing and equipment used by the expedition. Sommet: for names beginning thus see under the specific part of the name. For example, for Sommet Gravier see Gravier, Sommet. (Sommet is a French word for “peak.”) S@RKAMMEN CREST: crescent-shaped range about 3,500 ft. in el., lying close SW. of Mekammen Crest and extending 3 mi. in a NE.-SW. arc, in the Masson Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°53’S., 62°50’E. It was mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under the direction of Lars Christensen in January 1937. The name is descriptive, meaning “south comb.” Not adopted: Sdérkammen [Norwegian], South Crest. S@RLLE, CAPE: rocky bluff marking the S. end of Fredriksen I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 45°00’W. ‘The cape was charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for Capt. Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaler who made a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. Not adopted: Cape Sorlle. SORN and BERNT: two conspicuous rocks lying close offshore, about 2 mi. NE. of Cape Pride, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°59’S., 37°55’ W. The name appears on a chart based upon surveys by DI personnel in the period 1926-30, but may reflect an earlier naming. Not adopted: The Brothers. S@R RONDANE MOUNTAINS: irregular escarp- ment assumed to be the front of the polar plateau which has been mapped from 21°40’E. to 25°30'E., in about 72°15’S., inland from Princess Ragnhild Coast. The plateau edge, which rises to an esti- mated 8,000 or 9,000 ft. as a southern wall back of the mountain-studded coastal piedmont, consists of the major re-entrants bordered by massive northward projections. Four of these latter have been mapped and named. From west to east these are Mt. Widerge, Mt. Walnum, Mefjell Mtn., and Mt. Bergersen. Disc. and photographed from the air by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen on Feb. 6, 1937 and named after Rondane, a moun- tain massif in southern Norway. Not adopted: Sor-Rondane [Norwegian], Southern Escarpments. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Sorrowness Bay: see Stromness Bay. S@RSDAL GLACIER: channel glacier, about 8 mi. wide and some 20 mi. long, flowing WNW. from the continental ice overlying Ingrid Christensen Coast, and terminating in a prominent tongue at the SE. side of Krok Inlet and the Vestfold Hills; in about 68°42’S., 78°30’E. Disc. and roughly charted in February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, and named by him for Lief S¢rsdal, Norwegian dentist and member of the party which landed at the N. side of the Vestfold Hills. Re- charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen. Not adopted: Sorsdal Glacier, Sdrsdal Glacier. S@RSDAL GLACIER TONGUE: prominent gla- cier tongue, about 7 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, ex- tending W. from S¢rsdal Gl., at the S. side of Krok Inlet and the Vestfold Hills, along Ingrid Christen- sen Coast; in about 68°43’S., 78°05’E. Disc. in February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named for Lief S¢grsdal. S@RTINDANE PEAKS: two peaks about 5,000 ft. in el., lying S. of Tritoppen Pk. in the S. part of David Range in the Framnes Mtns., on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 68°09’S., 62°29’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under the direc- tion of Lars Christensen in January 1937. The name, meaning “the southern peaks,” was applied because of the extreme S. position of the peaks in the area mapped. Not adopted: Sdrtindane [Nor- wegian]. S@MSTRENE ISLANDS: island group, including Debutante I. and a small chain of islets and rocks close N. which extend about 5 mi. in an E—W. direction, lying about 5 mi. W. of Ingrid Christen- sen Coast, between Polar Record and Polararboken Glacier Tongues; in about 65°35’S., 75°00’E. Disc. and charted in February 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, who applied the name S¢strene, after the islands by that name lying in the en- trance to Oslofjord, Norway. Not adopted: Sés- trene [Norwegian], Sostrene Islands, Sostvene Islands, The Sisters. Sostvene Islands: see Sdstrene Islands. SOUND, THE: a passage, about 3 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, which extends in a N.-S. direction between the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°58’W. It separates the Melchior Is. into West 286 Melchior Islands and East Melchior Islands. It was first roughly charted by the FrAE under Char- cot, 1903-5. The name was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the feature in 1927. It was resurveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Canal Prin- cipal [Spanish]. Sourrie, Ile: see Lambda Island. SOUTHARD, CAPE: ice-covered cape, separating Banzare and Sabrina Coasts, which marks the NE. end of the low, ice-covered ridge forming the W. side of Paulding Bay and the N. flank of Reynolds Trough; in about 66°35’S., 122°05’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Samuel Lewis Southard, Sec. of the Navy under Pres. John Quincy Adams. Southard was instrumental in initiating interest in a governmental scientific exp. and gaining congressional authorization of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42, while serving as Senator from New Jersey during the Van Buren Administration. South Arms: see Ferrar Glacier. South Bay: see Cumberland East Bay. SOUTH BAY: bay about 2.5 mi. wide, lying NW. of False Bay on the S. side of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°38’S., 60°30’W. This bay was known to both the American sealers and the British as early as 1820, and the name South has been well established in international usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Erebus Bay. SOUTH BAY: small bay forming the S. head of Prince Olav Hbr., along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°09’W. Probably named by DI personnel who charted Prince Olav Hbr. in 1929. SOUTH CAPE: cape marking the S. extremity of the Robertson Is., immediately S. of the SE. tip of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 45°09’W. Named by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, who disc. the South Orkney Is. while on a joint cruise in December 1821. Not adopted: South Point. South Crest: see S6rkammen Crest. SOUTH EAST POINT: point about 1 mi. ENE. of Neptunes Bellows, marking the SE. point of Decep- tion I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°31’W. The point was charted by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster. The name was proposed in 1949 by the Hydrographic Dept., Admiralty, follow- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA ing a survey of the island by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, in 1948-49. Southern Escarpments: see Sér Rondane Moun- tains. Southern Foothills: see Inexpressible Island. SOUTHERN THULE: group of islands Consisting of Thule, Cook, and Bellingshausen Islands, at the S. end of the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°26’S., 27°12’W. Southern Thule was named by Capt. James Cook, who disc. and roughly outlined its northern portions in 1775. Adm. Thaddeus Bel- lingshausen’s report, published about 1831, stating that Southern Thule consists of one high rock and three small islands, was confirmed in a survey by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1930. Not adopted: Southern Thule Group. Southern Thule Island: see Thule Island. South Foreland: see Melville, Cape. SOUTH GEORGIA: island about 105 mi. long and 20 mi. wide, with steep glaciated mountains and deeply indented coasts, extending in a NW.-SE. arc between about 54°00’S. and 54°55’S., and 35°45’W. and 38°05’W. It is generally ac- cepted that-South Georgia may have been sighted by Antonio de la Roche sailing an English mer- chant vessel in 1675, and by the Spanish ship Leon in 1756. The island was explored and roughly charted by Capt. James Cook in the Reso- lution in January 1775, and named for King George III of Great Britain. The S. coast was first explored and charted by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1819. Substantial additional mapping was accomplished by sealers, whalers and private expeditions. The coastal areas were roughly surveyed by DI personnel in the period 1925-30. The SGS continued the surveys, includ- ing inland areas, in 1951-52 and 1953-54. Not adopted: Isla Georgia Del Sur [Spanish], Isle of Georgia, South Georgia Island, Siid-Georgien [German]. SOUTH ORKNEY ISLANDS: a group of two larger and several smaller mountainous barren islands covered with ice and snow and surrounded by many rocks, lying NE. of Palmer Pen. between 60°20’S. and 60°50’S., and 44°20’W. and 46°45’W. Disc. on the occasion of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell, a British sealer in the sloop Dove, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, an American sealer in the sloop James Monroe, in December 1821. The islands were named Powell’s Group on Powell’s chart, published in England, Nov. 1, 1822. The islands were explored and roughly recharted by James Weddell, Master, RN, who as a British seal- 287 ing captain visited them in 1823. Weddell’s chart carried the name South Orkney Islands, which became accepted internationally. Subsequent charts of the islands were published by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, 1837-40, and by the Nor- wegian whaling captain Petter Sgrlle, 1912-13. A running survey of the islands was completed in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Fur- ther surveys were made by the FIDS in the period 1947-50. ‘Not adopted: Powell Group, Powell Islands, Powell’s Group, Siid-Orkney Inseln [Ger- man]. SOUTH POINT: point about 1.4 mi. SW. of Entrance Pt., marking the southernmost point of Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 63°01'S., 60°37’W. The point was charted by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster. The name was proposed in 1949 by the Hydrographic Dept., Admiralty, fol- lowing a survey of the island by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, in 1948-49. SOUTH POINT: point marking the S. end of Moe I., about 0.2 mi. SW. of Signy I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°41’W. Named by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the South Orkney Is. in 1933. South Point: see South Cape. South Sandwich Group: see South Sandwich Islands. SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS: chain of vol- canic islands lying N. of Weddell Sea; extending from 56°18’S. to 59°27’S., in about 26°30’W. Disc. and first roughly charted on Jan. 31, 1775 by Capt. James Cook, who gave them the name “Sandwich Land,” for the fourth Ear] of Sandwich, then First Lord of the Admiralty. Cook concluded that he had charted a group of islands or else a point of a continent. The islands were first roughly sur- veyed by Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen in 1819. The Traverse Islands, three islands forming the N. end of the chain, were not sighted by Cook but were disc. and first mapped by Bellingshausen in 1819. The South Sandwich Islands were surveyed by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1930. Not adopted: Sandwich Group, Sandwich Islands, Sandwich Land, South Sandwich Group, Sud- Sandwich Inseln [German]. SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS: group of islands lying N. of Palmer Pen. between 61°S. and 63°S., and extending about 280 mi. in an ENE.—WNW. direction between 54°W. and 63°W. Named by Capt. William Smith of the brig Williams in 1819 while cruising close to the N. edge of the islands. Not adopted: Iles Shetland du Sud [French], New GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA South Shetland, Shetland Islands, South Shet- land, Siid-Shetland Inseln [German], Sydshet- land [Norwegian]. South Victoria Land: see Victoria Land. SOUTH WEST POINT: the southwest point of Annenkov I., off the south-central coast of South Georgia; in 54°30’S., 37°06’W. Annenkov I. was disc. by Capt. James Cook in 1775, and re-sighted by Adm. Thaddeus Bellingshausen in 1819. The point appears to be first named on a chart based upon DI surveys undertaken in the period 1926-30. Not adopted: S. W. Point. SPAYD ISLAND: ice-covered island with promi- nent rock exposures, about 1 mi. long and 0.5 mi. wide, protruding above the main flow of Baker Three Gl. about 0.3 mi. SE. of the S. end of Gil- lock I., lying close W. of Ingrid Christensen Coast at the head of Amery Ice Shelf; in about 70°21’S., 71°11’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in March 1947, and named by him for A. W. Spayd, air crewman on USN Op Hijp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. Not adopted: Spayd Outlier. Spayd Outlier: see Spayd Island. Speiss Peak: see Spiess Peak. SPENCE HARBOR: small bay about 1.5 mi. S. of The Turret, along the E. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°10’W. Disc. in December 1821 by Capt. George Powell, a British sealer in the sloop Dove, who named the bay, and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, an American. sealer in the sloop James Monroe. Spence’s Harbor. Not adopted: SPENCER, CAPE: cape lying about 10 mi. W. of Buckley Bay and forming the E. corner of the depression occupied by the Ninnis Gl., on George V Coast; in about 68°23’S., 147°30’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named this point for Sir Baldwin Spencer, Dir. of the National Museum of Melbourne in 1911. SPENCER, MOUNT: peak in the Allegheny Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°17’S., 143°13’W. Disc. on aerial flights made from West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for Herbert R. Spencer, of Erie, Pa., the sea scout commander of Paul Siple, leader of the West Base party of that expedition. 288 Spencers Straits: see English Strait; Lewthwaite Strait. SPERM BLUFF: dark bluff about 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Cotton Gl. about 2 mi. SW. of Mt. Suess, in Victoria Land; in about 77°04’S., 161°42’E. The bluff, which protrudes about 1,500 ft. above the ice, is essentially flat in the central portion, but tapers eastward ending in a low rounded spur. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. When viewed from the E., the N. face of the bluff suggests the blunt head of the sperm whale. SPERRING POINT: rocky point about midway along the W. side of William Scoresby Bay, on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°25’S., 59°33’E. Named by personnel on the William Scoresby who charted this area in February 1936. SPEYER, MOUNT: mountain, about 8,900 ft. in el., lying between Mt. Harmsworth and Mt. Dawson-Lambton in the Worcester Range, and surmounting the W. side of Moore Embayment, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°45’S., 160°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named this feature for Sir Edgar Speyer, a contributor to the expedition. Sphinz: see Beehive Hill. SPHINX HILL: conspicuous, isolated black hill, standing 1.5 mi. NNW. of Demay Pt. on King George I., South Shetland Is.; in 62°11’S., 58°27’W. First charted by the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10. The descriptive name was given by the Br—APC fol- lowing a survey by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, in 1951-52. SPHINX ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long, in a NW.-SE. direction, and 0.5 mi. wide, having a bare rocky summit with vertical faces on all four sides, lying in the SW. half of the entrance to Barilari Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°53’S., 64°52’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. SPHINX ROCK: rock which lies immediately off the SW. end of Monroe I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°05’W. Charted and named by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1933. SPHINX ROCK: rock about 170 ft. in el. lying in front of Islands Point, along .the W. side of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°28’S., 169°28’E. Charted and named in 1911 by the Northern Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SPIEDEN, CAPE: cape marking the NE. end of a low, ice-covered ridge separating Holmes Gl., on the SE., and a small glacier, on the NW., which terminates in a prominent tongue close E. of Cape Goodenough, fronting on Porpoise Bay, on Ban- zare Coast; in about 66°20’S., 127°00’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for William Spieden, purser on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. SPIESS PEAK: peak about 12,100 ft. in el., in New Schwabenland; in about 72°55’S., 3°50’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for R. Adm. F. A. Spiess, oceanographer, leader of the Meteor exp. of 1925-26, and Dir. of the Deutsche Seewarte (German Hydrographic Office) in Hamburg. Not adopted: Speiss Peak. SPIKE CAPE: bare rocky point lying about 6 mi. S. of Dunlop I. and 13 mi. N. of Cape Bernacchi, in front of the Wilson Piedmont Glacier along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 177°18’S., 163°34’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Probably so named because of its appearance. Not adopted: Spike Point. SPINDRIFT ROCKS: group of ice-free rocks, about 50 ft. in el., lying 0.75 mi. SW. of North Pt., and close to the W. coast of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°40’W. Surveyed and named in 1947 by the FIDS. The name is descriptive of the spindrift, or sea spray, which forms over these rocks during westerly gales. SPINE ISLET: narrow islet composed of sev- eral aligned rock segments, lying between the W. end of Coronation I. and Monroe I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 46°02’W. The islet was roughly charted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer in 1821. It was so named because of its appearance by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the islet in 1933. Not adopted: Spine Island. SPIRE, THE: isolated rock pinnacle at the NW. end of the Blackwall Mtns. on the S. side of Neny Fjord, Palmer Pen.; in 68°18’S., 66°53’W. Prob- ably first seen by BGLE sledging parties in 1936-37, though not specifically mapped. First climbed on Jan. 17, 1948 by members of FIDS and RARE. The name, The Spire, was first used in 1949 by William Latady, aerial photographer with RARE. Not adopted: Needle, Pinnacle, Sanctuary Pin- nacle, The Needle. SPIT BAY: an open bight formed by the NE. coastline of Heard I. and Spit Pt., the E. extremity of the island; in 53°06’S., 73°45’E. The name derives from the conspicuous spit which forms the 289 S. and E. shore of the bight, and was applied by American sealers at Heard I. in the period fol- lowing their initiation of sealing there in 1855. The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. SPIT POINT: the E. tip of a conspicuous spit, about 4 mi. long and averaging about 0.25 mi. wide, which marks the E. extremity of Heard I.; in 53°07’S., 73°51’E. The feature was roughly charted by Br. exp. under Nares which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874. The descriptive name was apparently given some years later and is now well established in usage. The spit was surveyed by the ANARE in 1948. SPIT POINT: narrow gravel spit forming the S. side of the entrance to Yankee Hbr., Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°32’S., 59°48’W. Yankee Hbr. was known to American and British sealers as early as 1820. Spit Point was charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935 and given this descriptive name. SPIT POINT: a spit forming the N. tip of Candlemas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°01’S., 26°40’W. Charted and named by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II in 1930. SPIVEY, MOUNT: flat-topped, mainly ice-cov- ered mountain, about 7,000 ft. in el., standing on the W. side of Toynbee GI., and 9 mi. S. of Mt. Nicholas, in the N. part of the Douglas Range of Alexander I Island; in 69°31’S., 69°50’W. First photographed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS, and named for Robert E. Spivey, general assistant at Stonington I., who took part in the FIDS sledge journey to George VI Sound in 1949. SPRING, CAPE: point forming the S. side of the entrance to Brialmont Cove, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°15’S., 61°11’W. Disc. in 1898 by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, and named for Prof. W. Spring, of the Univ. of Liége, a mem- ber of the Belgica Commission. Not adopted: Cape W. Spring. SPUR POINT: point at the E. end of a black, rocky spur which extends SE. from a highland at the S. side of Sleipnir Gl. to the W. side of Cabinet Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°36’S., 63°48’W. This descriptive name was given by the FIDS following their survey in 1947. The feature was photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA SQUARE BAY: a roughly rectangular-shaped bay about 10 mi. wide, indenting the W. coast of Palmer Pen. for about 8 mi. in the NE. part of Marguerite Bay; in 67°51’S., 67°00’W. Most of the entrance to the bay is occupied by Horseshoe I., which limits access to a narrow southern strait opening onto Marguerite Bay and a narrower northwestern strait opening onto the mouth of Bourgeois Fjord. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. SQUARE END ISLAND: small island about 4.5 mi. NNE. of the W. tip of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°09’S., 58°59’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted the island in 1935. Not adopted: Square-end Island. STAHLMAN, MOUNT: mountain with a pre- cipitous western face, rising to about 4,500 ft. in el., standing close NNE. of Mt. Hamilton at the E. side of the lower reaches of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°37’S., 151°40’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for James G. Stahlman, newspaper publisher of Nashville, Tenn., a supporter of the expedition. STANCLIFF, MOUNT: peak. about 2,000 ft. in el., at the E. side of Mt. Saunders, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°49’S., 145°23’W. Disc. by the Marie Byrd Land Sledging Party of the ByrdAE in November 1934, and named for Olin D. Stancliff, a member of that party. Not adopted: Mount Stancliffe, Mount Starcliffe. Stancliffe, Mount: see Stancliff, Mount. STANCOMB-WILLS ICE TONGUE: (in about 74°10’S., 25°00’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as this tongue was found to be nonexistent in January 1955. St. Andrew Bay: see Saint Andrews Bay. STANLEY ISLAND: island about 2 mi. long and about 1,700 ft. in el., lying 4 mi. NE. of Spur Pt. in the W. part of Cabinet Inlet, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°32’S., 63°40’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Rt. Hon. F. G. Stanley, M. P., Sec. of State for the British Colonies, who played an important part in establishing the survey. This island was photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Not adopted: Bertrand Island. STANLEY KEMP PEAK: mountain peak, about 2,500 ft. in el., forming a break in the skyline SW. of Stefansson Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about 67°30’S., 59°00’E. Disc. Jan. 4, 1930 by the 290 BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson and named for Dr. Stanley W. Kemp, British marine biologist and oceanographer who was Dir. of Research of the Discovery Investigations, 1924-36. Not adopted: Kemp Peak. STANLEY PATCH: shoal lying in Port Foster, about 2 mi. WNW. of Fildes Pt., Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°38’W. Named after Port Stanley, Falkland Islands by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, following his survey in 1948-49. STANTON GROUP: group of small rocky islets lying about 3 mi. off Mac—Robertson Coast, about 7 mi. NE. of Falla Bluff; in about 67°27’S., 61°41’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson on about Feb. 17, 1931 and named for A. M. Stanton, a mem- ber of the expedition. Not adopted: Einstodingane [Norwegian]. Starcliffe, Mount: see Stancliff, Mount. STARFISH COVE: small cove close N. of Balin Pt. on the E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI personnel. So named by the FIDS, following their survey of 1947, because of the large number of starfish in the bottom fauna. START POINT: point marking the NW. end of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°31’S., 61°08’W. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Bransfield in January 1820. It was so named by him because of its resemblance to a point on the S. coast of England by the same name and because it was the place where his operations began. STATION NUNATAK: isolated ice-free nunatak near the N. coast of Snow Hill I., in the James Ross I. group; in 64°23’S., 57°03’W.’ It is nearly 500 ft. in el. and stands 4.5 mi. SW. of the NE. end of the island. First seen and surveyed in 1902 by the SwedAE under Nordenskjéld, who so named it because of its proximity to the expedition’s winter station. Not adopted: Stations Nunatak. STATLER HILLS: small group of low, rocky hills, standing close N. of Rogers Gl. and fronting on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°54’S., 72°38’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip. in March 1947, and named by him for L. R. Statler, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. STEELE ISLAND: a snow-covered mound, about 12 mi. long from east to west and about 10 mi. wide, rising above the ice off the E. coast of Palmer GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Pen. about 12 mi. SE. of Cape Sharbonneau; in 71°00’S., 60°40’W. The steeply-sloping sides of the island are crevassed, but no rock is exposed. Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS in 1940. Named for Clarence E. Steele, tractor driver for the East Base. STEEPHOLM: the southernmost islet in the northern group of the Robertson Is., South Orkney Is.; in 60°47’S., 45°09’W. The islet lies close N. of Skilling It. and marks the N. side of the navigable channel through the Robertson Is. The Robertson Is. were disc. by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer in December 1821. The north- ern group, consisting of three islets, was named “Bratholm” by Petter Sgrlle in 1912-13. The name was later corrected to the plural form, “Bratthol- mene” (Steep Islets), by S¢grlle. Subsequently “Bratholm” was restricted by others to the one islet described. The name Steepholm, derived from the forms used by S¢rlle but restricted to the one islet, was recommended by the Br—APC following surveys by the FIDS in 1948-49. Not adopted: Bratholm. STEEPLE, THE: rocky ridge, about 1,600 ft. in el., forming the NW. arm of horseshoe-shaped Mt. Carrel, which is on the E. side of Depot Gl., about 1.5 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°03’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. The de- scriptive name was applied by the FIDS, 1945. Steeple Rock: see Sail Rock. STEFANSSON BAY: a more-or-less landlocked pay at the E. edge of Kemp Coast, about 10 mi. WNW. of William Scoresby Bay. Stefansson Bay is about 6 mi. wide between Tryne Pt. on the W. and Cape Wilkins on the E., but widens to about 12 mi. in its upper reaches; in about 67°20’S., 59°12’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson, on about Feb. 18, 1931, and named for Vilhjalmur Stefans- son, Arctic explorer. Stefansson Inlet: see Smith Inlet; Stefansson Strait. Stefansson Sound: see Stefansson Strait. STEFANSSON STRAIT: an ice-filled strait about 40 mi. long, lying between the E.; coast of Palmer Pen. and Hearst Island.. It is omly 4 mi. wide at Cape Rymill near its center; in about 69°26’S., 62°25’W. This strait was first sighted by Sir Hubert Wilkins at the S. end of his flight of Dec. 20, 1928, and was named by him for Vilhjalmur Stefansson. He believed it to be,a strait cutting off what is now known to be the Palmer Pen. from the main land mass of Antarctica. The true orien- 291 tation of the strait was determined by members of the USAS who charted this coast by land and from the air in 1940. Not adopted: Boggs Strait, Stef- ansson Inlet, Stefansson Sound. STEIN NUNATAKS: group of low nunataks pro- jecting from the piedmont ice in New Schwaben- land and scattered over an area about 20 mi. long; in about 71°40’S., 1°20’W. They lie about 75 mi. inland from the coast. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Willy Stein, coxswain of the expedition. STELLA CREEK: narrow winding passage ex- tending from Thumb Islet to the SE. end of Winter I. and lying between Winter I. and Galindez I. in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. The expedi- tion motor boat was named the Stella. Not adopted: Stella Inlet. Stella Inlet: see Stella Creek. STENE POINT: point lying 1.5 mi. W. of Cape Vik on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°44’W. Surveyed by DI person- nel in 1933, and resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49. Named by the Br—APC for K. O. Stene, captain of the floating factory Normanna which operated in the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13. STENHOUSE BLUFF: southern face of a rocky knoll at the head of Visca Anchorage, Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°02’S., 58°22’W. First charted by the FrAE 1908-10, under Charcot. Named for Car. J. W. Stenhouse, RNR, captain of the Discovery in these waters in 1927. Stephen Austin, Mount: see Austin, Mount. Stephenson, Cape: (in about 72°25’S., 68°00’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since subsequent survey has shown that no cape exists in the position indicated. STEPHENSON, MOUNT: highest mountain in the Douglas Range, about 9,800 ft. in el., standing at the heads of Toynbee and Sedgwick Glaciers about 8 mi. W. of George VI Sound, on the E. side of Alexander I Island; in 69°49’S., 69°43’W. Prob- ably first seen in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, but not recognized as part of the Douglas Range. First surveyed in 1936 by Stephenson, Fleming, and Bertram of the BGLE under Rymill. The E. side of the mountain was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named the feature for Alfred Stephen- son, surveyor and leader of the BGLE party to George VI Sound in 1936. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA STEPHENSON NUNATAK: prominent, pyra- mid-shaped rock nunatak, about 2,100 ft. in el., which rises 1,000 ft. above the surrounding ice, standing at the NW. side of Kirwan Inlet and W. of George VI Sound in the SE. part of Alexander I Island; in 72°11’S., 69°05’W. Disc. and roughly surveyed in 1940-41 by members of the USAS. Resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS and named for Alfred Stephenson, surveyor with the BGLE, 1934-37, who led a sledge party S. into George VI Sound to about 72°S. in 1936. STERNECK, CAPE: bold, black cliff, 1,500 ft. in el., on a projecting point of land forming the N. side of the entrance to Hughes Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°05’S., 61°12’W. In 1898 the BelgAEK under De Gerlache explored this area and named this cape for the German geo- physicist whose apparatus was used on the expe- dition. Not adopted: Cape Charles, Cape von Sterneck. Sterneck, Cape von: see Charles, Cape; Sterneck, Cape. STEVENSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 2 mi. wide and of undetermined length, flowing NW. from the continental ice to the E. side of Baker Three Gl., between Peterson Ice Falls and Bran- stetter Rocks on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°08’S., 71°59’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and named by him for Lt. James C. Stevenson, co-pilot on USN Op. Hjp. pho- tographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. STEVENSON ISLAND: steep pinnacle rock about 300 ft. in el., lying off Mac-Robertson Coast about 4 mi. NNE. of Cape Simpson; in about 67°23’S., 61°14’E. Disc. on about Feb. 18, 1931 by the BANZARE, under Mawson, who applied the name. STEVENS ROCK: small bare rock about 25 ft. in el., lying off Mac-Robertson Coast about 5 mi. E. of the small glacier tongue at the mouth of Strahan Gl. and about 3 mi. N. of the coast; in about 67°37’'S., 64°56’E. Disc. and named in Feb- ruary 1931 by the BANZARE under Mawson. STEWART STRAIT: strait about 2 mi. wide between Bird I. and the Willis Is., off the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°10’W. The strait was navigated by Capt. James Cook in 1775, but the name seems to have been applied by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. St. Georges, Baie: see King George Bay. 292 St. George’s Bay: see King George Bay. St. Georges Bay: see George Bay; Hound Bay. STIGANT POINT: conspicuous point about 200 ft. in el., about 12 mi. WSW. of Round Pt., on the N. coast of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°59’S., 58°42’W. Charted and named in 1935 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, Probably named for G. B. Stigant, long-time member of the Hydrographic Department of the Admiralty. STILLWELL ISLAND: largest islet in the Way Arch., situated about 1.5 mi. NE. of Garnet Pt., off George V Coast; in about 66°55’S., 143°50’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAK under Mawson, and named for Frank L. Stillwell, geologist with the expedition. STIPPLE ROCKS: compact group of more than twenty rocks, lying 3 mi. NW. of Millerand I. in Marguerite Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°06’S., 67°22’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. The name, applied by FIDS, is de- scriptive of the representation on a map of the numerous rocks in this group. ST. LOUIS, MOUNT: mountain, about 4,200 ft. in el., which is mainly ice covered and forms a prominent landmark immediately E. of The Gullet, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°09’S., 67°30’W. First sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS who named it for Peter B. St. Louis, Canadian pilot who flew from the Argentine Is. to Stonington I. in January and February 1950 to relieve the FIDS base. STONEHOUSE BAY: bay, about 5 mi. wide and indenting 4.5 mi., entered between Hunt Pt. and Sighing Peak on the E. coast of Adelaide I.; in 67°21’S., 68°05’W. First sighted and surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Named for Bernard Stonehouse, meteorologist in 1947 and 1948 and biologist in 1949 at Stonington I., and leader of the FIDS sledge party which resurveyed the bay in 1948. STONE POINT: point, with a small islet lying off it, which marks the S. side of the entrance to Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 56°56’°W. Named by the Br—APC for H. W. Stone, First Mate on the Trepassey, 1946-47, following a survey by Lt. Cdr. F. W. Hunt, RN, in 1952. STONINGTON ISLAND: rocky islet lying about 1 mi. N. of the E. extremity of Neny I., in the E. part of Marguerite Bay and on the W. side of GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Palmer Pen.; in 68°11’S., 67°00’W. This islet, 2,500 ft. from NW. to SE. and 1,000 ft. wide, is connected by a drifted snow slope to Northeast Glacier on the mainland. It was chosen as the site for the East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, and named after Stonington, Conn., home port of the sloop Hero, in which Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer first sighted the Antarctic continent in 1820. STORE POINT: northernmost point of Neny I., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°02’W. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS, who so named it because FIDS main- tained an emergency food store on this point. STORER REEF: an isolated reef lying about 3 mi. SE. of Aspasia Pt. and about 1.5 mi. off the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 37°04’W. Named by the Br-APC, following mapping by the SGS, 1951-52, for Capt. Nathaniel Storer of New Haven, Conn., who in 1801 built a small schooner on the coast of Patagonia, sailed her to South Georgia, and spent two seasons taking 45,000 fur seal skins. STOR HANAKKEN MOUNTAIN: prominent mountain about 6,400 ft. in el., standing in the central part of the Napier Mtns. in Enderby Land; in about 66°33’S., 53°30’E. The mountain was charted from aerial photographs taken in January— February 1937 by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen and named “Stor Hanakken,” prob- ably by H. E. Hansen, cartographer of the expedi- tion. Not adopted: Great Hanakken, Stor Hanak- ken [Norwegian]. Strachans Island: see Nelson Island. STRAHAN GLACIER: glacier on Mac-Robertson Coast, lying midway between Cape Daly and Cape Fletcher; in about 67°39’S., 64°44’E. Disc. and named by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson. Stranded Moraines: see Strand Moraines, The. STRAND MORAINES, THE: moraines, about 3 mi. long and reaching elevations of 100 to 150 ft., deposited at the edge of the piedmont ice on the W. shore of McMurdo Sound, about 6 mi. SSE. of New Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°34’S., 164°26’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who first named this feature “‘The Eskers,” later learning its true nature. Not adopted: Eskers, Stranded Moraines, Strand Moraines, The Eskers, The Stranded Moraines. STRATHCONA, MOUNT: massive mountain about 4,000 ft. in el., which is surmounted by a prominent group of peaks which rise above the continental ice aiong the W. side of middle reaches 293 of Denman Gl., standing about 12 mi. S. of Mt. Barr Smith on Queen Mary Coast; in about 67°22’S., 98°58’E. Disc. by the AAE under Maw- son, 1911-14, and named for Lord Strathcona, High Commissioner for Canada in 1911 and a patron of the expedition. STRIPED HILL: small, ice-free hill, about 300 ft. in el., on the SE. side of Louis Philippe Pen., some 7 mi. NNW. of Cape Lachman, the N. tip of James Ross I.; in 63°40’S., 57°53’W. Charted and named by the FIDS, 1946. The name is descrip- tive and is derived from the stratifications on a small cliff on the seaward side of the hill. STROM GLACIER: steep valley glacier flowing NE. from the N. side of Mt. Fridtjof Nansen to the head of the Ross Ice Shelf, flanked on the NW. by the Duncan Mtns. and on the SE. by the mountainous ridge terminating in Mt. Betty; in about 85°12’S., 165°15’W. The glacier derives its name from “Strom Camp” near its foot, occupied at various times during December 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Gould. Strom Camp was named by that party for Sverre Strom, first mate of the exp. ship City of New York, who remained ashore as a member of the winter party and headed the snowmobile party which hauled supplies in support of the two field parties. Stromnes Bay; Stromnes Bucht: see Stromness Bay. STROMNESS BAY: bay about 3 mi. wide, lying about 3 mi. W. of Cumberland Bay along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°38’W. This bay was probably first seen in 1775 by Capt. James Cook. Named prior to 1912, probably by whalers who frequented its harbors. Not adopted: Sorrow- ness Bay, Str6émnes Bucht [German], Stromnes Bay. STROMNESS HARBOR: central of three harbors in the W. side of Stromness Bay, South Georgia; in 54°09’S., 36°41’W. This harbor was shown as Nansen Harbour on some early charts, but since about 1920 the name Stromness Harbor has been consistently used. Not adopted: Fridtjof Nansen Hafen [German], Nansen Harbour. Stuart Doyle Point: see Doyle Point. STUART POINT: ice-covered point on the head- land at the E. side of the entrance to Maury Bay, on Banzare Coast; in about 66°20’S., 125°35’E. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Frederick D. Stuart, captains clerk on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42, who assisted Wilkes with correction of the survey data obtained by the expedition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA STUMP ROCK: rock in the W. portion of King George Bay which lies close offshore about 0.8 mi. NW. of Martello Tower, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°05’S., 58°10’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. STURGE ISLAND: the largest of the Balleny Is., about 27 mi. long and 8 mi. wide; in about 67°24’S., 164°15’E. Disc. in February 1839 by John Balleny, who named it for T. Sturge, one of the merchants who united with Charles En- derby, Esq., in sending out the expedition. STYGIAN COVE: cove lying immediately W. of Berry Head on the E. side of Signy I., South Ork- ney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. On its W. side steep rock clifis rise to Robin Peak. Roughly surveyed in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain, and again in 1933 by DI personnel. Re- surveyed and named in 1947 by the FIDS. The name arose from the fact that this cove is so overshadowed by the Cliffs of Robin Peak that a sense of stygian gloom is felt. SUCCESSION CLIFFS: a line of steep clifis, about 1.5 mi. long, on the E. coast of Alexander I Island. They face eastward onto George VI Sound, to the S. of Pluto Gl., about 10 mi. N. of Fossil Bluff; in 71°11’S., 68°16’W. This feature was prob- ably first sighted by Lincoln Ellsworth, who pho- tographed segments of the coast in this vicinity on Nov. 23, 1935. The cliffs were first roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and were resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because a geologic succession, or depositional sequence, is revealed by the accessible rock exposures of these cliffs. SUDAN BEACH: small shingle beach lying about 700 yards S. of Dartmouth Pt., on the E. side of Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°27’W. This vicinity was roughly surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskj6ld. The beach was sketch surveyed and named by the FIDS in 1951. The name is one in a group in the vicinity of Dart- mouth Pt., derived from the chemical stains used in preparation for histological examination of bio- logical material collected there by FIDS. Sudantillen See: see Scotia Sea. Sud-Georgien: see South Georgia. Stud-Orkney Inseln: see South Orkney Islands. Sud-Sandwich Inseln: see South Sandwich Islands. Sid-Shetland Inseln; Sydshetland: see South Shetland Islands. 294 SUESS, MOUNT: conspicuous mountain, capped by three black peaks about 3,700 ft. in el., situated on the S. side of Mackay Gl., in Victoria Land; in about 77°02’S., 161°47’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, and named for Prof. Eduard Suess, noted Austrian geologist and paleon- tologist. SUFFIELD POINT: conspicuous bluff about 2 mi. SW. of Collins Hbr., at the SW. end of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°11’S., 58°56’W. The name appears to have been ap- plied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted the bluff in 1935. SUGARLOAF ISLET: the southernmost of two islets lying about 1 mi. off the E. coast of Clarence I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°09’S., 53°52’W. This islet was known to both the Ameri- can and British sealers as early as 1822, and the name Sugarloaf has been well established in inter- national usage for over 100 years. Not adopted: Sugarloaf Island, Zuckerhut Insel [German]. SUGARTOP, MOUNT: prominent partly snow- covered mountain, about 7,600 ft. in el., standing 5 mi. NW. of Mt. Paget in the Allardyce Range of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°38’W. The name Sugarloaf Peak has appeared on maps for this feature for many years, but the SGS, following a survey of South Georgia in 1951-52, reported that the name Mount Sugartop is well established locally for this mountain. This latter name is approved on the basis of local usage. Not adopted: Mount Sugar Top, Sugarloaf Peak, Sukkertoppen [Norwegian]. Sukkertoppen; Sugarloaf Peak: see Sugartop, Mount. SULLIVAN, MOUNT: mountain about 6,800 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Bingham Gl. about 15 mi. NE. of Mt. Wakefield, inland from the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°39’S., 63°49’'W. This feature lies in the area explored from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, but it was first charted by the BGLE in 1936-37. It was photographed from the air in 1940 by the USAS and in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for Col. H. R. Sullivan of the Office of Research and Development of the then USAAF, which furnished equipment for the expedition. Sullivan Inlet: see Mill Inlet. SULPHUR POINT: prominent bluff lying 1.5 mi. N. of Wordie Pt. on the W. coast of Visokoi I., South Sandwich Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°16’W. It was named West Bluff, because of its position, by DI GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA personnel following their survey in 1930, but that name has been rejected because there is a West Bluff at nearby Zavodovski Island. The name Sul- phur Point was recommended in 1953 by the Br-APC. The ground here is reddish in color with patches and streaks of sulphur, and strong sul- phurous fumes have been noted by all visitors to this island. Not adopted: West Bluff. SULZBERGER BAY: large bay, about 100 mi. wide, in the NW. coast of Marie Byrd Land, lying between the NE. shore of Edward VII Pen. and the line defined by Guest I. and the peninsula on which Mt. Iphigene stands; in about 77°S., 151° W. Disc. by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd on Dec. 5, 1929 and named by him for Arthur H. Sulzberger, pub- lisher of the New York Times and a supporter of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and 1933-35. Not adopted: Arthur Sulzberger Bay, Biscoe Bay, Sulzberger Embayment. Sulzberger Embayment: see Sulzberger Bay. SUMMIT PASS: a col, about 1,200 ft. in el., between Passes Peak and Summit Ridge, situated about 2.5 mi. S. of the head of Hope Bay and 3.5 mi. NE. of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°02’W. This area was first explored by the SwedAE, 1901-4. Summit Pass was first charted and named by the FIDS, 1945. It is the highest point on the sledge route between Hope Bay and Duse Bay. SUMMIT RIDGE: ridge about 1,300 ft. in el., with a steep ice slope on the N. side and a rock cliff on the S. side, extending about 0.5 mi. E. from Passes Peak, situated about 2.5 mi. SSE. of the head of Hope Bay and 4 mi. NE. of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°27’S., 57°02’W. This area was first explored by the SwedAE, 1901-4. Summit Ridge was first charted and named by the FIDS, 1945. The feature takes its name from near- by Summit Pass. Sundholmen: see Hum Islet. SUNSET FJORD: inlet about 1 mi. wide, in the SW. corner of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°28’W. Sunset Fjord was charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. So named by Murphy because from his anchorage in the Bay of Isles the sun appeared to set directly behind this feature. Not adopted: Rosita Bay. SUNSHINE GLACIER: glacier, about 5 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, flowing S. into Iceberg Bay on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 45°30’W. It is the largest glacier on the S. side of Coronation I. and terminates in ice 295 cliffs up to 200 ft. high. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because, when all else was in shadow, small gaps in the clouds above frequently allowed patches of sunshine to appear on the surface of this glacier. SUPPORTING PARTY MOUNTAIN: peak stand- ing at the W. end of the Harold Byrd Mtns. which lie between the head of Ross Ice Shelf and Leverett Gl.; in about 85°27’S., 147°50’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and named by the Geological Sledging Party of that exp. in honor of the splendid cooperative work of their Supporting Party. Not adopted: Supporting Party Mountains. SURF ROCK: low rock 0.5 mi. W. of the W. tip of Neny I. and 0.2 mi. SE. of Runaway It., lying in Marguerite Bay off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 67°06’W. First roughly charted in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. It was surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS who so named it because of the noise of the surf breaking. SUSA POINT: low rocky point marking the sea- ward end of a small E.—W. ridge separating two tussock grass covered flats, lying 0.25 mi. S. of the S. side of the entrance to King Edward Cove in Cumberland East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°17’S., 36°30’W. The point was roughly surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. Named by the FIDS following their sketch survey in 1951. The name is one of a group in the vicinity of Dis- covery Pt., derived from the chemical fixatives used there in biological work by the FIDS. Svarthovden: see Falla Bluff. Svart Oya: see Black Island. SVART PEAK: peak with rock outcropping about 15 mi. WNW. of Stefansson Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about 67°15’S., 58°33’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January— February 1937 and so named by them because of its black appearance. Svend Foyn Coast: see Foyn Coast. SVENNER ISLETS: small group of rocky islets and rocks, marked by a large islet at its NE. end and extending about 4 mi. to the SW., lying about 13 mi. N. of Hovde Ice Tongue, off Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°01’S., 76°35’E. Disc. in Febru- ary 1935 by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, who charted the two main islets in the group and ap- plied the name Svenner, after the islands by that name lying off Sandefjordsfjord, Norway. Not adopted: Svenner [Norwegian], Svenner Islands. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Sverre Hassel, Mount: see Hassel, Mount. SVIP ROCKS: group of submerged rocks re- ported to lie about 10 mi. WNW. of Rugged I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 62°31’S., 61°40’W. The name seems first to appear on the charts of the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. It probably derives from the Svip, a whale catcher operating in the area at that time. Not adopted: Svip Rock. SWANN GLACIER: broad glacier of undeter- mined length flowing E. into Wright Inlet, to the N. of Mt. Tricorn, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°53°S., 61°48’W. The glacier was disc. and photographed from the air in December 1940 by members of East Base of the USAS. During 1947 it was photographed from the air by members of the RARE, under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Ronne for W. F. G. Swann, Dir. of the Barthol Re- search Foundation of Franklin Inst. of Swarth- more, Pa., a contributor to the expedition. SWANSON MOUNTAINS: range of mountains about 8 mi. long and about 3,000 ft. in el., lying about 8 mi. ENE. of Mt. Rea, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°58’S., 145°00’W. Disc. on aerial flights by the ByrdAE in 1934 and named for the Hon. Claude A. Swanson, Sec. of the Navy, 1933-39. Not adopted: Claude Swanson Mountains. SWARTLEY, MOUNT: peak in the Allegheny Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°15’S., 143°00’W. Disc. in aerial flights from West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for Prof. Stanley Swartley, of Allegheny College, Pennsylvania. SWEENEY MOUNTAINS: group of mountains rising above Joerg Plateau; in about 75°45’S., 67°40’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne,, who named these mountains for Mrs. Ed- ward C. Sweeney, a contributor to the expedition. Not adopted: Catherine Sweeney Mountains. SWELL POINT: small, narrow point, about 1.2 mi. S. of Resolution Pt., along the E. coast and near the SE. extremity of Cook I., South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’S., 27°06’W. It was named by DI personnel following their survey in 1930. Swift Balch, Mount: see Balch, Mount. SWINE HILL: the southernmost of two rugged, rocky knolls, about 1,800 ft. in el., standing about 10 mi. WNW. of the summit of Mt. Bagshawe on the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and overlooking Gada- rene Lake and George VI Sound; in 71°24'S., 67°33’W. This feature was first seen and photo- 296 eraphed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photo- graphs by W. L. G. Joerg. It was roughly sur- veyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and re- surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who erected a cairn on the summit. Named by FIDS for its association with Gadarene Lake (q.v.) and the incident of the Gadarene swine. Swinford Glacier: see Berwick Glacier. SWINFORD GLACIER: tributary glacier enter- ing the W. side of Beardmore Gl. between Mt. Adams and the Marshall Mtns.; in about 84°37’S., 165°45’W. This glacier was named Berwick Gla- cier by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, but a subsequent cartographic error exchanging the po- sitions of the Berwick and Swinford Glaciers on the charts of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, has caused the name Swinford to become well estab- lished for this glacier. The Berwick Glacier lies about 10 mi. SW. of Swinford Glacier. Not adopted: Berwick Glacier (q.V.). S.W. Point: see South West Point. Sydney Herbert Sound: Sound. see Sidney Herbert Syd Victoria Land: see Victoria Land. Syren Bay: see Siren Bay. SYREZOL, CAPE: cape at the E. side of the en- trance to Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Islands; in 62°11’S., 58°17'W. Charted and probably named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. TABARIN PENINSULA: peninsula about 14 mi. long and 10 mi. wide, lying S. of the trough be- tween Hope Bay and Duse Bay and forming the S. portion of the NE. extremity of Palmer Pen.; in 63°30’S., 57°00’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. It was charted in 1946 by the FIDS and named after Operation Tabarin, the naval code name for the FIDS from 1943 to 1945. TABLE ISLAND: conspicuous flat-topped island about 2.5 mi. NW. of Cape Morris, the NW. tip of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S., 59°52’W. This name, which is descriptive, dates back to at least 1822 and is now established inter- national usage. Table Mountain: see Two-Step Cliffs. TABLE NUNATAK: flat-topped, rectangular nunatak lying about 0.5 mi. E. of Cape Agassiz, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°30’S., 62°57’W. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA This is probably the feature first seen in 1940 by members of the USAS and described as a snow- covered island close EH. of Cape Agassiz. The nunatak was again sighted by Lt. Charles J. Adams, of the then USAAF, pilot with the RARE on a flight in September 1947. The name is de- scriptive. TAIL ISLAND: circular island about 1.25 mi. in diameter and 500 ft. in el., lying about midway be- tween Egg I. and Eagle I. in the NE. part of Prince Gustav Chan.; in 63°40’S., 57°37’W. Islands in this area were first seen by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Tail Island was charted by the FIDS in 1945, and so named by them because of its relative position to Eagle and Beak Islands. TANGLEFOOT PEAK: prominent rocky peak, about 2,200 ft. in el., standing E. of Wyatt I. and 7 mi. NNE. of Longridge Head on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°22’S., 67°32’W. Probably first sighted by members of the FrAE under Charcot who roughly charted this area in 1909. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and given this descriptive name because the peak is associated (jointly by a spur) with a very rugged and broken ridge which extends SE. and S. from it. Tannaron, Cap: see Thanaron Hill. TAPLEY MOUNTAINS: mountain group of tri- angular platform, extending about 30 mi. in an E.-W. direction and marked by a base of about 18 mi. which fronts on the E. side of Robert Scott GL., standing between Albanus and Leverett Glaciers in the Queen Maud Range, near the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 85°40’S., 150°00’W. Disc. in De- cember 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for the Hon. Harold L. Tapley, of Dunedin, New Zealand, agent for the Byrd Antarctic Expeditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35. Tapley Plateau: (in about 76°30’S., 145°00’W.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, as this feature does not conform to a plateau descrip- tion as originally reported. TAU ISLETS: small group of islets and rocks which lie immediately off the NE. extremity of Eta I. in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°18’S., 62°55’W. The name Tau, derived from the 19th letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of the islets by Arg. expeditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islotes Trio [Spanish]. 424589 O-57 -20 297 TAY, FIRTH OF: sound, about 12 mi. long and averaging about 6 mi. wide, extending in a NW.-SE. direction between the NE. side of Dundee I. and the E. portion of Joinville I.; in 63°22’S., 55°45’W. It merges to the NW. with Active Sound with which it completes the separation of Dundee and Joinville Islands. Disc. in 1892-93 by Capt. Thomas Robertson of the Dundee whaling expedi- tion. Named by Robertson after the Firth of Tay of Scotland. TAYLOR, MOUNT: large, flat-topped mountain, about 3,200 ft. in el., having steep cliffs on the NE. side, standing 2 mi. WSW. of the head of Hope Bay and 2.5 mi. N. of the NE. end of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°26’S., 57°08’W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjdld. The mountain was charted by the FIDS, 1946, and named for Capt. A. Taylor, commander of the FIDS and leader of its base at Hope Bay in 1945. TAYLOR GLACIER: glacier about 2 to 3 mi. wide, lying E. of Hayes Peak on Mac-Robertson Coast and flowing N. into the sea just E. of Cape Bruce; in about 67°28’S., 60°53’E. Disc., Feb. 18, 1931, by the BANZARE under Mawson, who applied the name. TAYLOR GLACIER: glacier at least 35 mi. long and varying from 2 to 10 mi. wide, flowing from the plateau of Victoria Land into the W. end of Taylor Glacier Dry Valley, north of the Kukri Hills; in about 77°43’S., 162°14’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and at that time thought to be the upper part of Ferrar Glacier. The Western Journey Party of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, determined that the upper and lower portions of what was then known as Ferrar Glacier are apposed, i.e., joined in Siamese-twin fashion, north of Knobhead. With this discovery Scott named the upper portion for Griffith Taylor, ge- ologist of the exp. and leader of the Western Journey Party. Not adopted: North Fork, Upper Ferrar Glacier (in part). TAYLOR GLACIER DRY VALLEY: valley about 20 mi. long once occupied by the receding Taylor Gl., lying N. of the Kukri Hills between the Taylor Gl. and New Hbr., in Victoria Land; in about 77°40’S., 162°52’E. Disc. by the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and more fully explored by the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9, and the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13. Named after the Taylor Glacier. Not adopted: Dry Valley, New Harbour Dry Valley. TAYLOR ISLETS: group of rocky islets and rocks about 4 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, lying at the W. side of Edisto Ice Tongue and marking the W. end GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA of the Highjump Arch., off the W. end of Knox Coast; in about 66°10’S., 100°09’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named for Richard Spence Taylor, who served as surveyor with the USN Op. Wml. parties which established astronomical control sta- tions from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast in January-February 1948. Teale, Cape: see Teall, Cape. TEALL, CAPE: low, rocky headland forming the N. side of the entrance to Mulock Inlet, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 79°00’S., 161°15’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who probably named this cape for Sir Jethro Justinian Harris Teall, Dir. of the Geological Sur- vey and Museum of Practical Geology, London, 1901-13. Not adopted: Cape Teale. TEALL NUNATAK: rock outcrop at the mouth of Reeves Gl., about 5 mi. SE. of Hansen Nunatak, in Victoria Land; in about 74°48’S., 162°35’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. The area was more fully explored by the BrAE, 1907-9, un- der Shackleton, who named this feature for Sir Jethro Justinian Harris Teall. Not adopted: Bee- hive Nunatak. TEAL PONDS: series of ponds in a tussock grass covered valley about 600 yards S. of Dartmouth Pt., on the E. side of Moraine Fjord, South Georgia; in 54°19’S., 36°27’W. A sketch survey of this vi- cinity was made in 1951 by the FIDS, who so named the ponds because they are frequented by flocks of teal. TELEFON BAY: small bay in the NW. side of Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°56’S., 60°40’W. The name appears on the chart of the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, and de- rives from the Telefon, a salvaged vessel moored in the bay in 1909 awaiting repairs. TELEFON ROCKS: group of rocks about 1 mi. S. of Demay Pt., at the W. side of the entrance to Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in 62°13’S., 58°27’W. Named after the Telefon, a vessel which grounded there in 1908. Teil Island: see Deception Island. Tejas Glacier: see Beaumont Glacier. TENNANT, MOUNT: conspicuous peak about 4,300 ft. in el., situated on De Rongé I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°42’S., 62°41’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, who photo- graphed and charted De Rongé I. in 1898. Named by members of H.M.S. Snipe, following an Antarctic 298 cruise in January 1948, for V. Adm. Sir William Tennant, then Commander-in-Chief of the America and West Indies Station. TENNANT PEAK: peak standing about 2.5 mi. SW. of Charles Gould Peak in the S. part of the Rockefeller Mtns., on Edward VII Pen.; in about 78°08’S., 155°44’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and named for George W. Tennant, cook on the ex- pedition. Not adopted: Mount Tennant. TENNIEL, MOUNT: mountain about 5,300 ft. in el., standing about 7 mi. WNW. of the mouth of Clifford Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°20’S., 62°48’W. Disc. in 1936 by a BGLE sledge party under Rymill. During 1947 it was photo- graphed from the air by the RARE under Ronne, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by Sir Miles Clifford, Gov. of the Falkland Islands, for his great-uncle Sir John Tenniel, 1820-1914, noted English illustrating artist, humorist, and political cartoonist. TENNYSON, CAPE: cape on the N. coast of Ross I., about 25 mi. SE. of Cape Bird; in about 77°20’S., 168°15’E. Disc. in February 1900 by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, and named by him for the English poet Alfred Tennyson. Not adopted: Cape Campbell. TENT ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, the largest of the Dellbridge Is., lying S. of Cape Evans, Ross I., in McMurdo Sound; in about 77°41’S., 166°22’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who so named this island because of its tent- like appearance. TENT NUNATAK: conspicuous pyramidal nuna- tak marking the S. limit of Whirlwind Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°36’S., 65°21’W. First seen and photographed from the air by the USAS, in 1940, and described as a “distinctive tent- shaped rock nunatak.” It was charted by the FIDS in 1947. Termination Barriere Eis: see Shackleton Ice Shelf. TERMINUS NUNATAK: conspicuous nunatak, about 2,200 ft. in el., standing between Eureka and Riley Glaciers and about 0.5 mi. inland from George VI Sound, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°52’S., 68°20’W. This nunatak was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because the nunatak marks the end of the sledge route from GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the Wordie Ice Shelf, down Eureka Gl., to George VI Sound. TERN COVE: small cove, the entrance to which is blocked by submerged rocks, lying immediately SE. of Berry Head on the E. side of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. The cove con- tains three islets, and an area near the head dries at low water. Roughly charted in 1933 by DI per- sonnel. Named by the FIDS, following their sur- vey of 1947, after the colony of terns (Sterna vit- tata) on the southernmost islet in the cove. TERN ISLET: small, tussock grass covered islet, lying 1 mi. S. of Albatross I. and 0.5 mi. E. of Dot It. in the S. part of the Bay of Isles, South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°20’W. First charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. It was surveyed in 1929-30 by DI personnel, who named it Tern Island in as- sociation with Albatross I., Prion I. and other nat- ural history names in the Bay of Isles given by Murphy in 1912-13. The name Tern Islet is ap- proved because of the small size of the feature. Not adopted: Tern Island. TERNYCK NEEDLE: conspicuous nunatak standing about 2.5 mi. E. of Ullmann Range, at the base of the small peninsula separating Admiralty and King George Bays, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°15’W. Charted in December 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot, who presumably applied the name. Terrace Island: see Dunlop Island. TERRA FIRMA ISLANDS: small group of islands lying about 7 mi. N. of Cape Berteaux, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°42’S., 67°32’W. Disc. and named on June 18, 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Terra Firma II island: see Twig Rock. TERRA NOVA, MOUNT: snow-covered mountain standing between Mt. Erebus and Mt. Terror on Ross I.; in about 77°31’S., 168°05’E. First charted by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named it for the Terra Nova, relief ship for this exp.; also, exp. ship for the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. TERRA NOVA BAY: bay, often ice free, about 55 mi. long, lying between Cape Washington and Drygalski Ice Tongue along the E. coast of Vic- toria Land; in about 74°45’S., 164°15’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and named by him for the Terra Nova, one of the relief ships for this expedition. 299 TERRAPIN HILL: rounded, reddish-colored hill, 1,600 ft. in el., standing at the S. end of The Naze, a peninsula of northern James Ross I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°58’S., 57°32’W. This area was first explored by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Terrapin Hill was first charted by the FIDS, 1945, who applied this de- scriptive name. Terre du Roi Oscar: see Oscar II Coast. Terre Otto Nordenskjold: see Nordenskj6ld Coast. TERROR, MOUNT: an extinct volcano, about 10,750 ft. in el., standing about 20 mi. E. of Mt. Erebus on Ross I.; in about 77°30’S., 168°40’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for his second exp. ship, the Terror. TETHYS NUNATAKS: group of about five rock nunataks, lying 2 mi. NE. of Stephenson Nunatak near the SE. corner of Alexander I Island; in 72°10’S., 68°59’W. ‘These rocks were presumably first seen by members of the USAS who sledged through George VI Sound in 1940-41. They were visited and surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS. Named by the FIDS for their association with nearby Saturn Glacier; Tethys being one of the satellites of Saturn. Teufelsinsel: see Devil Island. THANARON HILL: ice-covered hill, 2,900 ft. in el., which with two lower summits forms an isolated mountain, about 4 mi. SE. of Cape Roquemaurel, on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°35’S., 58°48’W. Capt. Dumont D’Urville, leader of the Fr. exp., 1837-40, originally gave the name Than- aron, after Lt. Charles Thanaron of the exp. ship Zélée, toa cape in this area. A survey by the FIDS in 1946 determined that no cape exists. The name Thanaron, however, is retained for the ice-covered hill in the same area. Not adopted: Cap Tannaron [French]. THEODOLITE HILL: hill, about 2,600 ft. in el., with a small rock outcrop at its summit, standing at the SE. corner of a plateau-type mountain, about 4.5 mi. W. of the NW. end of Duse Bay and about 7 mi. NW. of View Pt., near the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°29’S., 57°35’W. Disc. by the FIDS, 1946, and so named during their survey of the area because it served as an important theodolite station. THEODOR ROCK: rock approximately midway between Annenkov I. and Pickersgill Is., off the S. coast of South Georgia; in about 54°36’S., 37°02’W. It was charted by DI personnel in 1930 and named GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA for Theodor Hansen, gunner on the Southern Pride, Norwegian whale catcher used in the survey. THETA ISLETS: several small islets and rocks which lie close W. of Kappa I. at the W. extremity of the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 63°01’W. The islets were roughly charted by DI personnel in 1927. The name Theta, derived from the eighth letter of the Greek alphabet, appears to have been first used on a 1946 Argentine govt. chart following surveys of the Melchior Is. by Arg. expe- ditions in 1942 and 1943. Not adopted: Islas Alzogaray [Spanish]. THIL ISLET: rocky islet about 0.4 mi. long, pro- truding above the E. flank of Baker Three Gl. about 1.5 mi. N. of the N. end of Jennings Promontory, close off the W. end of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 70°08’S., 71°49’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photo- graphs taken in March 1947, and named by him for R. B. Thil, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photo- graphic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. Not adopted: Thil Island. THIMBLE PEAK: truncated cone, about 1,500 ft. in el., consisting of rock and ice, standing about 3 mi. SW. of the head of Hope Bay and 1.5 mi. NE. of Duse Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°28’S., 57°06’W. First charted by the FIDS, 1946. The descriptive name was proposed by the Br-—APC in 1948. THOMAS, CAPE: a projection of the edge of Amery Ice Shelf in the S. part of MacKenzie Bay, separating Douglas Bay from Thorshavn Bay, along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°43’S., 70°50’E. The name was given by the BANZARE under Maw- son, who disc. this feature during a flight over Mac- Kenzie Bay on Feb. 10, 1931. THOMAS, POINT: point marking the S. side of the entrance to Ezcurra Inlet in Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°08’S., 58°29’W. Point Thomas was charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for a member of the expedition. THOMAS ISLAND: largest island in Highjump Arch, about 5 mi. long and from 1 to 3 mi. wide, lying near the center of the main cluster of islands off the N. flank of the Bunger Hills, off Knox Coast; in 66°07’S., 100°57’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Lt. (j.g.) Randolph G. Thomas, USN hydrographic officer with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who served as surveyor with the astronomical control parties. 300 Thomas Mountains: see Lowell Thomas Moun- tains. Thomas Watson Escarpment: see Watson Es- carpment. THOMPSON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,600 ft. in el., standing NW. of Lehrke Inlet and surmount- ing the central part of the base of Eielson Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 70°40’S., 62°20’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for Andrew A. Thompson, geo- physicist with the expedition. THOMPSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, flowing N. from the con- tinental ice overlying Banzare Coast to the S. side of Paulding Bay; about 15 mi. SW. of Clark Pt.; in about 66°45’S., 123°20’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Egber Thompson, midshipman on the sloop of war Peacock of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Thompson Point: see Thomson Point. THOMSON HEAD: steep, rocky headland, about 3,000 ft. in el., standing at the E. side of Bourgeois Fjord, Palmer Pen., about 4 mi. E. of the SE. ex- tremity of Blaiklock I.; in 67°35’S., 66°45’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re- surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS and named for William H. Thomson, FIDS air pilot at Stonington I. in 1947. THOMSON POINT: point on the E. side of Pirie Pen., about 1.7 mi. SE. of Cape Mabel, on the N. coast of Laurie I. in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°38°W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named for J. A. (later Sir Arthur) Thomson, Regius Prof. of Natural His- tory, Univ. of Aberdeen, at Aberdeen, Scotland. Not adopted: Thompson Point. Thorfin Islands: see Colbeck Archipelago. THORGAUT ISLANDS: large group of small islands, up to 100 ft. in el., lying off Mac-Robert- son Coast to the N. and NW. of Cape Daly and the Robinson Group. The islands lie in an area about 13 mi. long in an E.-W. direction, from about 63°25’E. to 63°58’E., and in about 67°27’S. Disc. by the crew of the Norwegian .whale catcher Thorgaut in late January 1931. The positions of the islands in the group were plotted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken on Jan. 31, 1937 by a Nor. exp. under Christensen. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA THORNE, MOUNT: peak in the Will Hays Mtns. of the Queen Maud Range, standing about 7 mi. NW. of Mt. Goodale on the W. side of Robert Scott Gl. and rising to about 6,000 ft. in el.; in about 85°56’S., 155°45’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1928-30, on the South Polar Flight of Nov. 28-29, and mapped by the Southern Sledging Party of the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Named for George A. Thorne, topographer and dog driver of the Geological Party of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, which visited this region. Thorne Glacier: see Robert Scott Glacier. Thorold Nielsen, Mount; Thorold Nilsen, Mount; Thorvold Nilsen, Mount: see Thorvald Nilsen Mountains. THORSHAVN BAY: an indentation about 15 mi. wide in the edge of Amery Ice Shelf between Cape Thomas and Cape Child in the S. part of Mac- Kenzie Bay, along Lars Christensen Coast; in about 68°45’S., 71°15’E. The Norwegian whale catcher Torlyn reached Thorshavn Bay on Feb. 13, 1931. Named for the Norwegian motor tanker Thorshavn from which Lars Christensen person- ally directed exploration in 1930-31, 1932-33, 1933-34, and 1936-37. THORVALD NILSEN MOUNTAINS: mountain massif of the Queen Maud Range, about 13,000 ft. in el., standing between the upper reaches of Robert Scott and Amundsen Glaciers; in about 86°20’S., 158°00’W. Disc. by a Nor. exp. under Amundsen, in 1911, and named for Capt. Thorvald Nilsen, commander of the exp. ship Fram. Not adopted: Mount Nilsen, Mount Thorold Nielson, Mount Thorold Nilsen, Mount Thorvold Nilsen. THREE BROTHERS: three mountain peaks aligned in a N.-S. direction, about 4 mi. W. of the head of Cumberland West Bay, in the central part of South Georgia; in 54°16’S., 36°48’W. Probably named by DI personnel following their surveys of South Georgia in 1926-30. Not adopted: The Three Brothers. THREE BROTHERS HILL: conspicuous hill about 700 ft. in el., which is the remnant neck of an extinct volcano, situated at the S. side of Potter Cove, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°14’S., 58°40’W. The name seems to have been first used by the Scottish geologist David Ferguson in a 1921 report based upon his in- vestigations of King George I. in 1913-14, but may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. The name may be suggestive of the summit, which resembles the knuckles of a firmly clenched fist. 301 THREE LAKES VALLEY: low valley, contain- ing three freshwater lakes, extending from the vicinity of Elephant Flats northward to Stygian Cove on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. Surveyed and given this descriptive name by the FIDS in 1947. THREE LITTLE PIGS: three islets about 0.5 mi. NW. of Winter I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°17’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. Not adopted: The Three Little Pigs. Three Point Island: see Jomfruene Island. THREE SISTERS POINT: point marked by three conspicuous boulders about 20 ft. in el., situated on the S. side of King George I. about 1 mi. NE. of Penguin I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 57°54’W. The point was charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Dis- covery II. Three Slice Island: see Three Slice Nunatak. THREE SLICE NUNATAK: conspicuous nunatak about 1,650 ft. in el., marking the low, ice-covered NE. extremity of Joerg Pen., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°02’S., 64°57’W. This distinctive landmark, in the form of a serrated NE.-SW. ridge about 2 mi. long, is snow covered, except for the three almost vertical rock faces which suggest its name. Disc. by members of East Base of the USAS who surveyed this area on land and from the air in 1940. Not adopted: Three Slice Island. THULE ISLAND: westernmost island of South- ern Thule, a group of three small islands at the S. end of the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°27’'S., 27°19’W. Southern Thule was disc. and named by Capt. James Cook in 1775. The westernmost island was named Thule Island by Adm. Thaddeus Bell- ingshausen, who made an accurate sketch of these islands in 1820. Not adopted: Morrel Island, Mor- rell Island, Southern Thule Island. THULE ISLETS: group of islets and rocks lying about 0.25 mi. SW. of Balin Pt. in the NW. part of Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. The name Thule Rocks was used as early as 1916, and appears to refer at least in part to this group. The Thule, one of the first floating factories to flense whales at sea, belonged to the Thule Whaling Co. of Oslo. It operated in the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13 and 1913-14 and anchored on the E. side of Signy I. during January 1913. The altered form of the name was recommended by the Br—APC following a survey GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Thule Rock, Thule Rocks. Thule Rocks: see Thule Islets. THULLA POINT: ice-free point lying 1 mi. NE. of Jebsen Pt. on the W. coast of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°40’W. Roughly sur- veyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC in 1954 after the Norwegian steamship Thulla, which searched for suitable anchorages for whale factory ships in the South Orkney Is. in 1911-12. Thumb, The: see Little Thumb. THUMB ISLET: islet lying between Winter I. and the NW. end of Galindez I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. Charted and named in 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. THUNDER GLACIER: a through glacier, about 4 mi. long, which extends in an EW. direction across Wiencke I. between the Sierra Du Fief and the Wall Range, in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°50’S., 63°24’W. The glacier has probably been known since the discovery of Wiencke I. by the BelgAE in 1898. It was charted in 1944 by the FIDS, and so named by them because a survey party was nearly overwhelmed there by an avalanche. Thurston, Mount: see Hjalmar Johansen, Mount. THURSTON PENINSULA: the peninsula be- tween Bellingshausen Sea and Amundsen Sea, at the NE. end of Marie Byrd Land, which terminated in about 71°50’S., 100°50’W. Disc. in flights from the Bear by members of the USAS in February 1940. Named by Byrd for W. Harris Thurston, of New York City, textile manufacturer and designer of the windproof “Byrd cloth,” and contributor to the expedition. Not adopted: Eights Peninsula. THWAITES ICE TONGUE: extensive ice tongue about 30 mi. wide, which is believed to be fed by a large continental glacier descending to the Wal- green Coast close SE. of Mt. Murphy, extending N. into Amundsen Sea for about 60 mi.; in about 74°15/S., 105°30’W. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in December 1946. Named by the US—ACAN for Fredrik T. Thwaites, glacial geologist, geomorphologist and professor emeritus at the Univ. of Wisconsin. TIBER ROCKS: group of about five rocks lying near the head of Rymill Bay, close W. of the mouth of Romulus Gl. and 2.5 mi. NW. of the highest summit of Black Thumb Mtn., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°23’S., 66°59’W. First seen 302 and roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the association of these rocks with nearby Romulus and Remus Gla- ciers. TICKLE CHANNEL: narrow channel in the S. part of Hanusse Bay, about 0.5 mi. wide and 2 mi. long, extending northward from The Gullet and separating Hansen I. from the E. extremity of Adelaide I.; in 67°08’S., 67°40’W. First seen from the air by the BGLE on a flight in February 1936. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS, who applied this descriptive name. In Newfound- land and Labrador a tickle is a narrow water passage as between two islands. TIJUCA POINT: prominent rock point forming the NW. side of the entrance to Hound Bay, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°20’S., 36°13’W. The name Penguin Point was probably applied to this feature by DI personnel who made a running survey of this coast in 1930. Following the SGS, 1951-52, it was recommended that this name be altered to avoid confusing this feature with the many other “Penguin” names. The name Tijuca Point was given by the Br—APC after the Tijuca, a three-masted barque built at Nantes in 1866. From 1908 onwards, she was used as a transport vessel by the Compania Argentina de Pesca, ply- ing between Buenos Aires and the whaling station at Grytviken. She foundered in 1946. Not adopted: Penguin Point. Tillberg Islands: see Tillberg Nunataks. TILLBERG NUNATAKS: group of four promi- nent nunataks, the highest about 2,800 ft. in el., lying at the S. side of Drygalski Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 64°48’S., 60°51’W. Dr. Otto Nordenskj6ld gave the name Tillberg Islands, after Judge Knut Tillberg, contributor to the SwedAE, 1901-4, to what appeared to be a group of islands at the mouth of Drygalski Gla- cier. These islands were determined to be nunataks protruding through the ice by the FIDS in 1947. Not adopted: Tillberg Islands. TILLETT ISLANDS: group of small islands, the largest of which rises about 230 ft. above the sea, lying about 5 mi. NNE. of Cape Wilkins, off Kemp Coast; in about 67°11’S., 59°25’E. Disc. in Febru- ary 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby. Not adopted: Tillet Isles, Tilletoéyane [Norwegian]. Tilletoyane: see Tillett Islands. TILLEY, MOUNT: flat-topped, ice-capped moun- tain, about 6,300 ft. in el., standing 7 mi. S. of Mt. Tyrrell and 3 mi. inland from George VI Sound GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA in the E. part of Alexander I Island: Despite its height, it is best described as a foothill of the Douglas Range, from which it is separated by Toynbee Gl.; in 69°45’S., 69°29’W. First photo- graphed from the air in 1936 by the BGLE. Sur- veyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS and named by them for Cecil E. Tilley, prof. of miner- alogy and petrology at Cambridge University. TILLEY NUNATAK: bold outcrop about 300 ft. in el., lying at the edge of the ice cliffs on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 67°24’S., 60°07’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby and named by them for Prof. C. E. Tilley, who studied the rock specimens brought back by the expedition. Not adopted: Nabbodden [Nor- wegian]. TILT ROCK: isolated rock mass, about 2,200 ft. in el., which rises 2 mi. inland from the ice shelf of George VI Sound and stands 2 mi. NE. of Block Mtn., with which it forms the S. limit of Sedgwick Gl., on the E. side of Alexander I Island; in 70°27’S., 68°44’°W. First photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and later mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. Roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS. So named by FIDS because of the tilted appearance of the whole mass. Not adopted: Pyramid Point. TINSEL DOME: small, ice-covered hill about 2,300 ft. in el., standing between Aureole Hills and the mouth of West Russell Gl., on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°43’S., 58°52’W. Charted in 1948 by the FIDS who gave this descriptive name. TIOGA HILL: rounded summit, about 950 ft. in el., standing at the W. side of the head of McLeod Gl. on Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°44’S., 45°39’W. The hill is the highest point on the island. Surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC in 1954 after the Tioga, owned by Messrs. Christensen and Co., Corral, Chile, which was one of the first floating factories to flense whales at sea. It was wrecked at nearby Port Jebsen during a gale on Feb. 4, 1913. TITAN NUNATAK: broad, rather fliat-topped nunatak, about 1,500 ft. in el., standing between Coal Nunatak and Tethys Nunataks in the SE. corner of Alexander I Island; in 72°09’S., 68°43’W. This nunatak was first photographed from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. Observ- ing this feature from the NW. (the direction from which Ellsworth photographed this nunatak) only the summit protrudes above the coastal ice, and 303 it was uncertain at that time whether this was a peak on Alexander I Island or an island in George VI Sound. Its true nature was determined by the FIDS who visited and surveyed this nunatak in 1949. Named by FIDS for its association with nearby Saturn Glacier; Titan being one of the satellites of Saturn. TOE, THE: point marking the S. side of the en- trance to Harmony Cove on the W. side of Nelson I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°20’S., 59°10’W. This descriptive name seems first to appear on a chart based upon a 1935 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery II. TOFE GLACIER: glacier immediately S. of Sandefjord Bay, descending between high, rocky cliffs to the W. coast of Peter I Island; in about 68°51’S., 90°44’W. Disc. in 1927 by a Nor. exp. in the Odd I and named for Eyvind Tofte, leader of the expedition. Tokroningen: see Kroner Lake. TOLLEY, MOUNT: peak in the Allegheny Mtns., in the E. part of the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°17’S., 143°00’W. Disc. on aerial flights from the West Base of the USAS, in 1940, and named for Pres. William Pearson Tolley, of Allegheny College, Pennsylvania. Not adopted: Mount Tolly. Tolly, Mount: see Tolley, Mount. TOMBSTONE HILL: hill about 170 ft. in el. on the N. side of the harbor of Port Lockroy, Wiencke I., about 0.25 mi. E. of Damoy Pt., in the Palmer Arch; in 64°49’S., 63°32’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who surveyed Port Lockroy. Named by the FIDS in 1944. The name is descriptive of some rocks on the top of the hill. TONKIN ISLAND: snow-capped island about 4 mi. long in a N.-S. direction, marked by ice-free peaks at each end, about 11 mi. SE. of Cape Choyce, off the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°49’S., 65°03’W. The island was disc. and photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940. It was charted by the FIDS in 1947, and named for J. E. Tonkin, member of the FIDS at the Stonington Island base. Not adopted: Lewis Island. Tonsberg Fiord: see Ténsberg Fjord. TONSBERG FJORD: small recession in the W. end of the bight between Penguin Pt. and Con- ception Pt., on the N. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°32’S., 45°55’W. Charted in 1912-13 by Petter Sgrlle, Norwegian whaling captain. Probably named for the Tgnsberg GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Hvalfangeri, of Tgnsberg, Norway, a company which operated a permanent whaling base in the South Orkney Is. in the period 1920-30. Not adopted: Tonsberg Fiord, Toénsberg Fjord. TONSBERG POINT: eastern extremity of a low rock peninsula projecting into Stromness Bay, separating Stromness Hbr. on the N. from Husvik Hbr. on the S., in South Georgia; in 54°10’S., 36°39’'W. The name was in use as early as 1912 and derives from the Ténsberg Hvalfangeri, Nor- wegian whaling company with works at Husvik Harbor. Not adopted: Tonsberg Point, Tonsberg Point. TOPHET BASTION: conspicuous, ice-capped rock wall, nearly 1 mi. long, with an apron of talus, lying 1 mi. E. of Saunders Pt. on the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°18’W. Roughly surveyed in 1933 by DI per- sonnel. The name, which is Biblical, was applied by the FIDS following their survey of 1948-49. TORLYN MOUNTAIN: rugged, bare ridge about 1,400 ft. in el., of which Murray Monolith is the detached front, on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°47’S., 66°55’E. In January and February 1931 several Norwegian whale catchers explored along this coast, making sketches of the land from their vessels. They named the mountain for their whale catcher, the Torlyn, from whose deck it was seen in February, although the coast was sketched as early as January 19 from the Bouvet II, another Norwegian whaler. The BANZARE under Maw- son, made an airplane flight over this area in Janu- ary 1930, returning for further exploration in Feb- ruary 1931. They named the mountain Murray Monolith, which name is hereby retained for the detached front. Not adopted: Mount Torlyn, Mur- ray Monolith. TORNQUIST BAY: small bay between Cape Con- stance and Antarctic Pt. along the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°59°W. The bay was charted in 1929-30 by DI personnel. They called it Windy Cove, because of strong gusts of wind experienced there, but the name Windy Hole was subsequently used on charts for the bay. Follow- ing a survey of South Georgia in 1951-52, the SGS reported that this feature is known to the whalers and sealers as Tornquist Bay, because the wreck of the Ernesto Tornquist, transport vessel which ran aground on Cape Constance on Oct. 16, 1950, liés near its W. shore. This latter name is ap- proved on the basis of local usage; the name Windy Hole is never used locally. The name Windy Cove, originally applied to this bay, has been transferred in local usage to the bay immediately SE. of Ant- arctic Pt. and it has since become established there. Not adopted: Windy Cove (q.v.), Windy Hole. 304 TORTULA COVE: cove close S. of Mai Pt., on the E. side of Maiviken in Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; in 54°14’S., 36°30’W. Roughly surveyed by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjéld. Re- surveyed in 1929 by DI personnel, and in 1951 by the FIDS. Named by the Br—APC after the moss (genus Tortula) which grows in this vicinity. Totten Coast: (in vicinity of 120°E.) the decision of May 1947 has been VACATED, since the config- uration of the coast does not permit delimitation of a segment of adequate length, and the name Totten has been applied to a large glacier in this approximate position. See: Totten Glacier. TOTTEN GLACIER: massive glacier about 20 mi. wide and 45 mi. long, flowing NE. from the continental ice overlying the upland behind the E. end of Budd Coast, and terminating in a prominent tongue at the W. end of Sabrina Coast; in about 66°25’S., 116°45’E. Totten Gl. resembles a valley glacier near its terminus, but in its upper reaches it closely resembles a channel glacier, a faster- moving ice stream in the continental icecap flow- ing at essentially the same level as the icecap itself. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US— ACAN for George M. Totten, passed midshipman on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42, who assisted Wilkes with correc- tion of the survey data obtained by the expedition. TOTTEN GLACIER TONGUE: prominent glacier tongue about 22 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, extend- ing N. from Totten Gl., along Sabrina Coast; in about 66°10’S., 116°45’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for George M. Totten. Totten High Land: see Sabrina Coast. TOURING CLUB, MOUNT: snow-capped peak about 4,000 ft. in el., standing at the SW. side of Mt. Peary and about 3.5 mi. E. of Waddington Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°17’S., 63°53’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot and named by him, probably for the Touring Club of France. TOW BAY: small bay about 0.2 mi. S. of Vulcan Pt. on the W. side of Candlemas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°42’W. Charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. TOWER, THE: mountain about, 1,300 ft. in el., which is snow covered except at the summit, sur- mounting Demay Pt. at the W. side of the entrance to Admiralty Bay, King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°12’S:, 58°30’W. Charted and GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA given this descriptive name by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Not adopted: La Tour [French]. TOWER HILL: sharp conical summit about 3,700 ft. in el., near the center of Trinity I., which is sepa- rated from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. by Orléans Chan.; in 63°46’S., 60°39’W. The origin of the name is not known, but it may be associated with the voyage in 1824-25 of the British sealer Sprightly under Capt. Edward Hughes. TOWER ISLAND: island about 4 mi. long, lying NE. of Trinity I., about 11 mi. off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°33’S., 59°51’W. Named on Jan. 30, 1820 by a Br. exp. under Bransfield. Not adopted: Pendleton Island. TOWER PEAK: peak, about 2,800 ft. in el., whose rock exposure stands out clearly from an evenly contoured ice field, standing about 9 mi. SW. of Sjogren Gl., on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°22’S., 59°08’W. First charted and given this descriptive name by the FIDS, 1945. TOYNBEE GLACIER: glacier in NE. Alexander I Island, about 20 mi. long and 5 mi. wide, lying between the mountains of the Douglas Range on the W. and Mt. Tyrrell and Mt. Tilley on the E. and flowing N. from Mt. Stephenson to George VI Sound; in 69°35’S., 69°35’W. First photographed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS, and named for Patrick A. Toynbee, FIDS air pilot at Stonington I. in 1948 and 1949. TRACY GLACIER: channel glacier about 7 mi. wide and 8 mi. long, marked by prominent ice falls along its E. flank, flowing NNW. from the conti- nental ice to the Knox Coast, about 8 mi. SW. of Cape Elliott, in about 66°02’S., 102°08’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Lt. Lloyd W. Tracy, USN, pilot with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, who assisted in operations which resulted in the establishment of astronomical control sta- tions from Wilhelm II Coast to Budd Coast. TRAFFIC CIRCLE, THE: an ice-filled depression at an elevation of 2,800 ft. centered in about 68°37’S., 66°00’W. on Palmer Pen., between Mar- guerite Bay and Mobiloil Inlet. From this depres- sion five glacier-filled troughs radiate like the spokes of a wheel. One connects on the N. with Neny Trough. Another is filled by Lammers Gl. and trends W. to an ice-covered upland in 66°40’W. which also nourishes the west-flowing glacier filling Windy Valley. A third trends SW. to the S. end of the ice-covered upland in 66°40’W. which nour- ishes the southwest-flowing glacier along the E. side of Sickle Mtn. The fourth, filled by Weyer- 305 haeuser Gl., trends SSW. to the N. flank of Bing- ham Gl. The fifth, filled by the outflow from Weyerhaeuser and Lammers Glaciers and the gla- cier filling Neny Trough, broadens as it descends E. to the head of Mobiloil Inlet. Disc. in 1940 by members of the East Base of USAS who used this system of troughs in traveling across the upland, hence its name. Trail Bay: see Trail Inlet. TRAIL INLET: ice-filled inlet which recedes SW. about 15 mi. between Three Slice Nunatak and Cape Freeman, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°05’S., 65°20’W. The inlet was sighted by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928. The width of Palmer Pen. is reduced to 20 mi. between the head of Trail Inlet on the east and Neny Fjord on the west. So named by the US-SCAN because it formed a natural route of travel for flights and sledge trips from the East Base of the USAS, 1939-41, to the E. coast of Palmer Peninsula. Not adopted: Trail Bay. TRANSITION GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 8 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which flows E. to George VI Sound along the N. side of Block Mtn. and Tilt Rock; in 70°26’S., 68°49’°W. This glacier was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. Surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and so named by them because this glacier marks the transition between igneous rocks to the north and sedimentary rocks to the south. TRAVERSE ISLANDS: group of three islands, consisting of Zavodovski, Leskov, and Visokoi Is- lands, at the N. end of the South Sandwich Is.; centering in 56°36’S., 27°43’W. The group was disc. in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who named them for Baron de Traversey, Russian naval minister who aided in the organization of the exp. The present spelling omitting the “y”’ is due to the variation in the form of Russian family names resulting from the type of Western Euro- pean transliteration used by the bearers of a given name and is now well established in international usage. TRAVERSE MOUNTAINS: group of almost ice- free mountains, about 4,100 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Eureka GI., about 6 mi. inland from George VI Sound, on the W. side of Palmer Pen.; in 69°51’S., 68°02’W. These mountains were first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and were mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and resurveyed in GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA 1948 by the FIDS. The name was first used by BGLE: sledging parties because these mountains are an important landmark in the overland trav- erse from the Wordie Ice Shelf, down Eureka Gl., to George VI Sound. TRENCH GLACIER: deeply entrenched glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 6 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, which flows eastward into George VI Sound immediately S. of Mt. Athelstan, in 70°12’S., 69°11’W. The mouth of this glacier was first photographed from the air on Nov. 23, 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, and it was mapped from these photographs by W. L. G. Joerg. Trench Glacier was surveyed in 1948 and 1949 by the FIDS, who applied this descriptive name. TREPASSEY ISLETS: two small rocky islets 0.6 mi. SE. of Stonington I. in Neny Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°12’S., 66°59’W. The islets were presumably first sighted in 1936 by the BGLE, and were roughly charted by them and by the USAS, 1939-41. They were surveyed in 1947 by the FIDS and named for the M.V. Trepassey, ship used by the FIDS in establishing a base on Stonington I. in 1946. TRETHEWRY POINT: rocky promontory about 400 ft. in el., projecting about 1 mi. N. into the sea along Mac-Robertson Coast, about 5 mi. E. of Wil- liam Scoresby Bay; in about 67°24’S., 59°51’E. Disc. and named in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby. Not adopted: Hamre- hovden [Norwegian]. TRIANGLE POINT: triangular headland form- ing the outer NW. side of the entrance to Yankee Hbr. on Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; 62°31’S., 59°52’W. Charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935 and given this descriptive name. TRICORN, MOUNT: distinctive massif whose vertical faces rise to about 4,000 ft. in el., and sur- round a snow-covered interior which is lower ex- cept for a 5,300 ft. peak in the NW. portion, stand- ing at the head of Wright Inlet on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°58’S., 61°45’W. Disc. by mem- bers of the USAS in a flight from East Base on Dec. 30, 1940, and named for its resemblance to a gigantic tri-cornered hat. Tricorn Inlet, Mount: see Wright Inlet. TRIGONIA ISLET: islet immediately off the S. tip of Beer I., lying about 9 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°01'S., 65°44’‘W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934— 37, Rymiill. Trillingnutane: see Trilling Peaks. TRILLING PEAKS: a series of three N.-S. trending ‘peaks, the highest about 4,400 ft. in el., standing in the S. part of the Masson Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°58’S., 62°47’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January 1937. The name is descriptive, meaning “the triplet peaks.” Not adopted: Trillingnutane [Norwegian]. Trinité, Ile de la: see Trinity Island. TRINITY ISLAND: island about 15 mi. long and 13 mi. wide, which is separated from the W. coast of Palmer Pen. by Orléans Chan.; in 63°45’S., 60°40’W. Named by Dr. Otto Nordenskjéld, leader of the SwedAE, 1901-4, in commemoration of Ed- ward Bransfield’s Trinity Land of 1820, which is now thought to be this island. Not adopted: Ie de la Trinité [French]. TRINITY ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. NE. of the NE. end of Main I., in the Willis Is. at South Georgia; in 54°00’S., 38°13’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. Not adopted: Trinity Island. Trinity Peninsula: see Louis Philippe Peninsula; Palmer Peninsula. Trio, Islotes: see Tau Islets. TRIPLE ISLETS: three small rocky islets, lying in a closely-spaced chain close E. of the tip of Zélée Glacier Tongue, about 0.4 mi. SSE. of Double Its., off Adélie Coast; in about 66°46’S., 141°12’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hijp., 1946- 47. Charted and named by the FrAE under Lio- tard, 1949-51. TRIPLETS, THE: a three-pointed peak at the SE. side of Coppermine Cove, near the NW. end of Robert I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°23’S., 59°45’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the peak in 1935. Tripode, Islote: see Tripod Islet. TRIPOD ISLET: small islet which lies close S. of the W. extremity of Eta I. and marks the N. side of the western entrance to Andersen Harbor in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 62°57’W. The name was probably given by DI personnel who roughly surveyed the islet in 1927. The islet was surveyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: Islote Tripode [Spanish]. 306 GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA TRIPP, MOUNT: mountain about 7,880 ft. in el., standing in the Queen Alexandra Range about midway between Shackleton Inlet and Beardmore Gl., on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 83°09’S., 166°25’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton who named this feature for Leonard Tripp, of New Zealand, who was of as- sistance to this exp. and to Shackleton’s ship- wrecked exp. of 1914-16. TRIPP BAY: bay about 5 mi. long and wide, formed by a recession in the coastal piedmont at the foot of Albrecht Penck and Fry Glaciers, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°398’S., 162°50’E. This bay was first charted by the BrAE, under Shackleton. The name Tripp Bay appears to have been first used by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and derives from Tripp Island, which lies within the bay. TRIPP ISLAND: glaciated island in the center of Tripp Bay, lying about 2 mi. from the shore on either side, off the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°38’S., 162°37’E. Disc. by the BrAE, 1907-9, un- der Shackleton, and named by him for Leonard Tripp. TRISTAN ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about 0.7 mi. W. of Yseult It. and about 0.3 mi. NNW. of the W. point on Cape Jules, off Adélie Coast; in 66°44’S., 140°54’E. Photographed from the air by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, and so named be- cause of its twin relationship with Yseult It. Tristan is the popular spelling of Tristram, leg- endary hero incorporated into Arthurian legend and later popularized by Wagner’s opera “Tristan und Isolde.” Not adopted: Rocher Noir [French]. TRITON POINT: rocky point forming the E. end of the high ridge separating Venus and Nep- tune Glaciers, on the E. coast of Alexander I Is- land; in 71°42’S., 68°12’W. The coast in this vicinity was first explored from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935, and was roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. The point was surveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and was named by them for its association with Neptune Glacier; Triton being a satellite of Neptune. TRITOPPEN PEAK: a triple-summit peak about 4,400 ft. in el., standing S.-of Mt. Hordern in the David Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac-Robert- son Coast; in about 68°00’S., 62°32’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January 1937. The name is descriptive, meaning “the three-peaked mountain.” Not adopted: Tritoppen [Norwegiar]. 307 TROIS PEREZ, CAPE: promontory forming the N. side of the entrance to Beascochea Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°26’S., 64°06’W. Disc. by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, but apparently not named by them until about 1904, when in working up their scientific reports they gave to it the name Trooz. In the meantime, the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, left for the Ant- arctic and in November 1904 re-sighted the same cape, to which they gave the name Trois Pérez, for the brothers Fernando, Leopoldo, and Manuelo Pérez of Buenos Aires. Maurice Bongrain in his report of 1914 acknowledges the Belgian name Trooz for this cape. However, the US-ACAN has retained the Charcot name of Trois Pérez because of its long usage, and has applied the name Trooz Glacier (q.v.) to the large glacier immediately N. of Cape Trois Pérez. Not adopted: Cap de Trooz [French], Cape Perez, Cape Trois Perez. TROOZ GLACIER: glacier about 5 mi. wide and some 15 mi. long, flowing W. and entering Gran- didier Chan. between Cape Tuxen and Cape Trois Pérez, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°22’S., 63°55’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char- cot. Named for J. de Trooz, Belgian Minister of the Interior and Public Instruction, who was instrumental in procuring funds for the publica- tion of the scientific results of the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. This name was suggested by the US-ACAN because of duplication of naming for what is now known as Cape Trois Pérez (q.v.). TROUBRIDGE, MOUNT: prominent mountain peak of the Admiralty Range in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°12’S., 168°00’E. Disc. in Janu- ary 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for R. Adm. Sir Edward Thomas Troubridge, one of the Junior Lords of the Admiralty at that time. Not adopted: Mount Trowbridge. TROUSERS ROCK: rock with a prominent wave- cut arch, lying immediately W. of Cook Rock, about 0.3 mi. NE. of Vindication I. in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°45°W. Charted in 1930 and -given this descriptive name by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Trowbridge, Mount: see Troubridge, Mount. TRUMP ISLETS: group of islets between Ex- tension Reef and Turtle Islet, lying some 11 mi. WNW. of Black Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°02’S., 66°05’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not adopted: Trump Islands. Tryggve Gran, Mount: see Gran, Mount. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA TRYGGVE POINT: rocky point about 0.75 mi. NW. of Turks Head, on the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°39’S., 166°42’E. First charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, who named it for Tryggve Gran, Norwegian ski expert with the ex- pedition. TRYNE CHANNEL: small channel, between the W. side of Tryne I. and Langnes Pen., which merges at its S. end with Tryne Inlet, lying off the Vest- fold Hills area of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°27’S., 78°19’E. Charted in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947, and so named by him because of the close association of this feature with Tryne Island. TRYNE INLET: irregular-shaped inlet, whose entrance is largely occupied by Tryne I., marked by three divergent coves at its S. end, indenting the N. side of Langnes Pen., along Ingrid Christen- sen Coast; in about 68°28’S., 78°24’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Tryne Fjord after nearby Tryne Island (then Langnestrynet). The generic inlet is approved as a more appropriate term on the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947. Not adopted: Tryne Fjord [Norwe- gian]. TRYNE ISLAND: low, rocky island, about 2 mi. long, marked by a prominent cove indenting its W. side, lying in the entrance to Tryne Inlet along the N. side of Langnes Pen., off the Vestfold Hills area of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°27’S., 78°23’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen, and named Langnestrynet, as this feature was believed to form the NE. end of Langnes Pen. In 1952 this extremity was determined to be an island by John H. Roscoe, following his study of USN Op. Hip. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, who named it Tryne Island. Tryne is a Norwegian word meaning snout. Not adopted: Langnestrynet [Norwegian]. TRYNE POINT: rocky point forming the W. side of the entrance of Stefansson Bay, on Kemp Coast; in about 67°17’S., 59°07’E. Charted by Nor- wegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by the Nor. exp. under Lars Christensen in January-February 1937, and named Trynet, a Nor- wegian word meaning “the snout.” The form Tryne, dropping the definite article, is approved with the added generic term point. Not adopted: Trynet [Norwegian], Trynet Point. 308 TRYNE STRAIT: small, narrow strait, between the E. side of Tryne I. and Langnes Pen., which merges at its S. end with Tryne Inlet, lying off the Vestfold Hills area of Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 68°27’S., 78°25’E. Charted by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken “in January 1937 by the Nor. exp. under Lars Chris- tensen, and named Tryne Sund after nearby Tryne Island (then Langnestrynet). The generic strait is approved as a more appropriate term on the basis of John H. Roscoe’s 1952 compilation from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp. in March 1947. Not adopted: Tryne Sund [Norwegian]. Tryne Sund: see Tryne Strait. Trynet; Trynet Point: see Tryne Point. TUCKER INLET: inlet in the coast of Victoria Land, between Capes Wheatstone and Diniell; in about 72°45’S., 170°00’E. Disc. in February 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Charles T. Tucker, master of the Erebus. TULA, CAPE: cape forming the NE. extremity of Renaud I. in the Biscoe Is.; in 65°33’S., 65°34’W. The Biscoe Is. were disc. in February 1832 by a Br. exp. under John Biscoe, and were first roughly surveyed by the FrAE, 1903-5, and FrAE, 1908-10, both under Charcot. Renaud I. was again roughly surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill. The cape was named in 1954 by the Br—APC after the Tula, one of the two vessels of Biscoe’s 1830-32 expedition. TULA RANGE: range of mountains reaching an el. of 6,100 ft. at its highest point, Mt. Riiser- Larsen. This range lies NE. of Ice Bay in Enderby Land; in about 67°S., 51°E. Disc. on Jan. 14, 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson. Named for John Biscoe’s brig, the Tula, from which Bis- coe disc. Enderby Land in 1831. TUMBLE GLACIER: glacier on the E. side of Alexander I Island, about 7 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, which flows E. from the cliffs of Mounts Eg- bert, Ethelwulf and Ethelred into the W. side of George VI Sound immediately S. of Mt. King; in 69°57’S., 69°20’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the extremely broken condition of the lower reaches of the glacier. TUPINIER ISLETS: group of pyramid-shaped islets lying off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen., about 3 mi. NW. of Cape Ducorps; in 63°22’S., 58°16’W. Disc. by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, who named them for an Official of the GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA French Navy Dept. who was instrumental in ob- taining government support for the expedition. The islets were charted by the FIDS, 1945-47. Not adopted: Tupinier Islands. TURKS HEAD: bold, rocky promontory about 520 ft. in el., situated about 5 mi. ESE. of Cape Evans, on the W. side of Ross I.; in about 77°40’S., 166°44’E. Disc. and named by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Not adopted: Turk’s Head. TURNABOUT ISLET: snow-capped islet lying about 2.5 mi. NW. of Black Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°05’S., 65°45’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. So named because it represents the turning point of a BGLE sledge journey in August 1935, when open water was encountered SW. of this islet. Not adopted: Turnabout Island. TU ROCKS: two low rocks lying in Fildes Str. about 3 mi. WSW. of Marian Cove, off the SW. end of King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°13’S., 58°33’W. The name appears to have been given by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who charted the rocks in 1935. TURQUET POINT: point marking the N. end of Booth I., located off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 63°58’W. Probably seen by the Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann. The point was charted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for J. Turquet, naturalist of the expedition. Not adopted: Point Turquet. TURRET, THE: conspicuous rocky headland, about 1,700 ft. in el., at the S. side of the entrance to Gibbon Bay, on the E. coast of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 45°11’W. This headland was probably first sighted by Capt. George Powell and Capt. Nathaniel Palmer, who disc. these islands in December 1821. It was charted and given this descriptive name by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II in 1933. TURRET ISLAND: small island, ice-covered ex- cept for the NE. face, lying about 1 mi. NW. of Flat I., off the N. coast of Victoria Land; in about 71°22’S., 169°12’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. TURRET ROCKS: group of rocks lying close off the S. coast of King George I. at the E. side of King George Bay and about 0.5 mi. NW. of the N. end of Penguin I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°04’S., 57°57’W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. Turtle Back Island: see Turtle Rock. 309 TURTLE ISLET: islet about 3 mi. ESE. of Trump Islets and 11 mi. WNW. of Black Head, lying in Grandidier Chan., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°04’S., 65°56’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not adopted: Turtle Island. TURTLE ROCK: islet about 100 ft. in el. lying in Erebus Bay close W. of Hut Point Pen., Ross I.; in about 77°44’S., 166°44’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and so named because of its low rounded appearance. Not adopted: Turtle Back Island. TUVE, MOUNT: mountain above 9,000 ft. in el., lying inland from the W. end of George Bryan Coast; in about 74°S., 85°W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for Merle A. Tuve, Dir. of the Dept. of Terrestrial Mag- netism of Carnegie Inst., Washington, D. C., who furnished instruments for the expedition. TUXEN, CAPE, rocky promontory forming the S. side of the entrance to Waddington Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°16’S., 64°08’W. Disc. and named by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. TVISTEIN PILLARS: two dark pillars, the larger being conspicuously flat topped, about 1 mi. SW. of Cape Eva, the NW. extremity of Peter I Island; in about 68°42’S., 90°39’W. The rocks were sighted and described by a Nor. exp. in the Odd I. under Tofte, which circumnavigated the island in 1927. The name Tvistein (two stones) was applied by a Nor. exp. in the Norvegia, under Nils Larsen, which charted the island in 1929. Not adopted: Tvistein [Norwegian], Tvistern. Tvistern: see Tvistern Pillars. TVITOPPEN PEAK: peak with twin summits about 5,000 ft. in el., standing in the S. part of the David Range of the Framnes Mtns., on Mac- Robertson Coast; in about 68°06’S., 62°27’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen- sen in January 1937. The name is descriptive, meaning “the twin peak.” Not adopted: Tvitoppen [Norwegian], Tvistern. TWIG ROCK: small rocky mass, more than 300 ft. in el., between Alamode I. and Hayrick It. in the Terra Firma Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°42’S., 67°31’W. The Terra Firma Is. were first visited and surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Twig Rock was surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, who named it because of the branching nature of the dike system exposed on its N. face. Not adopted: Terra Firma II Island. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA TWIN PEAKS: two sharply defined peaks, about 2,300 ft. in el., standing together about 1.5. mi. N. of Mt. Taylor and 2 mi. W. of the head of Hope Bay, at the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°24’S., 57°07’°W. Disc. by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskj6ld. Named by the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1946. TWIN PINNACLES: rock about 75 ft. in el. marked by two summits, lying 0.1 mi. NE. of Cape Lions Rump, at the W. side of the entrance to King George Bay, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°07’S., 58°06’°W. Charted and named during 1937 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. TWINS, THE: two close-lying rocks, about 0.5 mi. S. of the S. end of Monroe I., off the W. end of Coronation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 46°04’°W. Charted and named in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. TWITCHER GLACIER: glacier, about 4 mi. long, which flows eastward to the E. coast of South Georgia, immediately S. of Iris Bay; in 54°43’S., 35°56’°W. The glacier was surveyed in 1951-52 by the SGS. Named by the Br-APC after John Montagu, fourth Earl of Sandwich, First Lord of the Admiralty, 1771-82, who was popularly known as “Jemmy Twitcher.” TWITCHER ROCK: rock about 180 ft. in el. lying in Douglas Str., about 0.7 mi. NE. of Hewison Pt., Thule I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 59°28’S., 27°14’W. The rock was disc. by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen in 1820. It was charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, who named it for John Montagu, fourth Earl of Sand- wich, who was popularly known by the nickname “Jemmy Twitcher.” Two Hammock Insel: see Two Hummock Island. TWO HUMMOCK ISLAND: ice-covered island, about 5 mi. long, in a N.-S. direction, and 2 mi. wide, conspicuous because of two rocky summits about 2,500 ft. in el., lying some 12 mi. WSW. of Cape Sterneck, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°08’S., 61°40’W. This name has appeared on maps for over 100 years and its usage has become established internationally. Not adopted: Ile des deux Hummocks [French], Two Hammock Insel [German]. Two Hummock Island: see Two Summit Island. TWO-STEP CLIFFS: east face of an almost flat- topped sedimentary block, about 2,200 ft. in el., situated immediately E. of Mars Gl. and close N. of the mouth of Saturn GIl., on the E. coast of Alexander I Island; in 71°54’S., 68°13’W. The 310 coast in this vicinity was first explored from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ells- worth on Nov. 23, 1935. These cliffs were first roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1940-41 by the USAS, who used the names Two Step Moun- tains and Table Mountain for this feature. The name Two-Step Clifis derives from the original name used by USAS, and was proposed by FIDS following surveys in 1949 as being particularly de- scriptive of this feature. Not adopted: Table Mountain, Two Step Mountains. Two Step Mountains: see Two-Step Clifis. TWO SUMMIT ISLAND: small island marked by two prominent summits, lying at the E. side of the entrance to Fildes Strait in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°15’S., 58°57’'W. It was named Two Hum- mock Island by DI personnel following their survey in 1935, but this name has been rejected because of probable confusion with Two Hummock Island in the N. entrance to De Gerlache Strait. The name Two Summit Island, which is equally de- scriptive of the feature, was recommended by the Br-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Two Hummock Island. TYRRELL, MOUNT: mountain with two sum- mits, the highest about 4,300 ft. in el., standing 3 mi. inland from the E. coast of Alexander I Island, on the E. side and near the mouth of Toynbee Gl1.; in 69°38’S., 69°31’W. First photographed from the air in 1937 by the BGLE under Rymill. Surveyed from the ground in 1948 by the FIDS and named by them for George W. Tyrrell, British geologist at Glasgow University. UFS ISLAND: rocky island about 2 mi. in diam- eter and about 900 ft. in el., lying at the E. side of Howard Bay, off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°28’S., 61°09’E. Cape Simpson, the N. end of this island, was disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson .on about Feb. 18, 1931, but the island nature of this feature was first recognized by Nor- wegian cartographers, working from aerial photo- graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937. The word “Ufs’” means bluff in Norwegian. Ufsdyvdgen: see Howard Bay. UHLIG PEAK: mountain spur about 10,500 ft. in el., lying close NE. of Kleinschmidt Peak and projecting N. from the edge of the polar plateau in New Schwabenland; in about 73°10’S., 3°20’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Karl Uhlig, chief engineer of the expe- dition. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Uksvika: see Oom Bay. ULLMANN POINT: point marking the SW. end of Ullmann Range, situated centrally at the head of Martel Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°21’W. The point was charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, but was named for the Ullmann Range. Not adopted: Ullman Point. ULLMANN RANGE: mountainous ridge about 1,200 ft. in el., situated centrally at the head of Martel Inlet, Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°21’W. Ullmann Range was charted and probably named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Not adopted: Ullman Range. Ullman Point: see Ullmann Point. Uliman Range: see Ullmann Range. ULMER, MOUNT: sharp peak marking the high- est elevation, estimated at 12,500 ft., of the Sen- tinel Mtns. in Ellsworth Highland; in about 77°30’S., 86°00’W. Disc. in his trans-Antarctic flight, Nov. 23, 1935, by Lincoln Ellsworth who called it Mount Mary Louise Ulmer, after his wife. Not adopted: Mount Mary Louise Ulmer, Mount Mary Ulmer. UNDERWOOD GLACIER: channel glacier about 15 mi. long and from 3 to 5 mi. wide, flowing NNW. from the continental ice to the Knox Coast between Cape Nutt and Reist Rocks; in about 66°43’S., 108°04’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Lt. Joseph A. Underwood, USN, who served on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. UNDINE HARBOR: small harbor along the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°02’S., 37°59°W. This may be the harbor charted as Adventure Bay by James Weddell in 1823. The recommended name Undine Harbor, after the sealing ship Undine of the Cia. Argen- tina de Pesca, has been consistently used for this harbor since about 1912. Not adopted: Adventure Bay, Adventure Harbor, North Undine Harbour. UNDINE SOUTH HARBOR: bay, about 7 mi. wide and indenting 2 mi., which is entered between Ducloz Head and Leon Head along the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°31’S., 36°33’°W. The name appears to have been given by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12. The Undine was a sealing ship of the Cia. Argentina de Pesca whaling station at Grytviken. 311 Ungvar Neilsen Glacier: see Nielsen Glacier. Upper Ferrar Glacier: see Taylor Glacier. UPPER ISLET: narrow islet at the NE. side of Mutton Cove, lying between Cliff and Harp Islets, about 8 mi. W. of Ferin Head, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°00’S., 65°42’W. Charted and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. Not adopted: Upper Island. URANUS GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 6 mi. long and 6 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing E. into George VI Sound to the S. of Fossil Bluff; in 71°24’S., 68°20’W. The coast in this vicinity was first explored and par- tially photographed from the air by Lincoln Ells- worth on Nov. 23, 1935. This glacier was first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Ry- mill. The name, after the planet Uranus, was given by the FIDS following their surveys in 1948 and 1949. URUGUAY COVE: cove at the head of Jessie Bay, E. of Mt. Ramsay, along the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°43’W. The cove was charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named for the Argentine corvette Uruguay, which for many years after 1904 was used in carrying relief parties to the Argentine meteorological station near the cove. Uruguay Island: see Andersson Island. URUGUAY ISLAND: islet with a cove indenting its W. side, lying between Irizar I. and the Corner Is. in the NE. part of the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°14’S., 64°14’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him after the Argentine corvette Uruguay, which effected the rescue of the SwedAE in 1903. The island was charted during 1935 by the BGLE under Rymill. U. S. Army Range: see Le May Range. USEFUL ISLET: islet about 2 mi. W. of De Rongé I., with a string of islets between, lying off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°44’S., 62°52’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. USHER, MOUNT: mountain about 9,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. end of the Commonwealth Range and along the NE. side of Keltie Gl., near its confluence with Beardmore GIl.; in about 84°55’S., 172°00’E. This mountain is charted on the map of the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA but the name Mount Usher is there applied to the peak situated southeastward at the head of Keltie Gl. The recommended application of this name follows the chart of the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and is consistently used on recent maps. U. S. Navy Range: see Colbert Range. UTSTIKKAR BAY: an indentation about 5 mi. wide in Mac-Robertson Coast, at the head of which lies Falla Bluff; in about 67°30’S., 61°30’E. Mapped by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photo- graphs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christensen in January-February 1937, and named after the Utstikkar Glacier Tongue which borders the bay on the west. UTSTIKKAR GLACIER: broad glacier flowing N. from the vicinity of Moyes Pk. and terminating in Utstikkar Glacier Tongue on the Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°33’S., 61°19’E. This glacier was mapped, and named Utstikkarbreen (out-jutting glacier), by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen- sen in January-February 1937. UTSTIKKAR GLACIER TONGUE: a glacier tongue forming the seaward extension of Utstikkar Gl., on Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°28’S., 61°24’"E. The glacier tongue was mapped and named by Norwegian cartographers from aerial photographs taken by a Nor. exp. under Christen- sen in January-February 1937. The word Utstik- kar refers to something jutting out and is descrip- tive of the conspicuous projection of the glacier tongue. VAHSEL, CAPE: cape formed by an angle of the ice wall along Luitpold Coast, located about 25 mi. SW. of Dawson-Lambton Gl.; in about 76°41’S., 30°25’W. Named by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, for Capt. Richard Vahsel. VAHSEL, CAPE: cape forming the E. tip of South Georgia; in 54°45’S., 35°47’W. This cape was roughly charted by Capt. James Cook in 1775. It was remapped by the GerAE under Filchner, 1911-12, and named for Capt. Richard Vahsel, master of the exp. ship Deutschland. Vahsel Bay: see Duke Ernst Bay. VAKOP, CAPE: cape between Hound Bay and Luisa Bay on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°22’S., 36°10’W. Charted by the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner. The name appears on a chart based upon surveys of South Georgia in 1926-30 by DI personnel, but may represent an earlier naming. 312 VALAVIELLE, CAPE: cape marking the N. end of Watson Pen., on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°41’S., 44°32’,W. Charted and named by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville. Not adopted: Cape Buchanan. VALENTINE, CAPE: cape forming the NE. ex- tremity of Elephant I., in the South Shetland Is.; in about 61°03’S., 54°47’W. This cape was known to both the American sealers and the British as early as 1822, and the name Valentine has been well established in international usage for over 100 years. VALETTE ISLAND: islet about 0.2 mi. long lying at the W. side of the entrance to Mill Cove, off the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°36’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for L. H. Valette, Argentine meteorologist at the Laurie Island sta- tion during 1904. Vallavielle, Cape: see Buchanan Point. VAN BENEDEN, CAPE: cape on the W. side of Arctowski Pen., forming the E. side of the entrance to Andvord Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°46’S., 62°42’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, who named it for Prof. E. Van Beneden, president of the Belgica Commission and author of several of the zoological reports of the expedition. VANDERFORD GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and over 12 mi. long, flowing NW. from the continental ice overlying Budd Coast to the E. side of Vincennes Bay, close S. of the Windmill Is.; in about 66°35’S., 110°35’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Benjamin Vander- ford, pilot of the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. VANG, MOUNT: isolated mountain, about 8,000 ft. in el., standing southward of George VI Sound and Robert English Coast; in about 173°50’S., 69°15’W. Disc. by Finn Ronne and Carl R. Eklund of the USAS, 1939-41, during their sledge journey through George VI Sound. It was resighted from the air during a flight on Dec. 3, 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for Knut Vang of Brooklyn, N. Y., who contributed photographic ma- terials to the RARE, 1947-48, and who was of great assistance to RARE before its departure and on its return. VAN RYSWYCK POINT: rocky ridge marking the E. extremity of Anvers I. and the S. side of the SE. entrance to Schollaert Chan., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°34’S., 62°48’W. Disc. and named by GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. Not adopted: Van Ryswycke Point. Vanssay, Point de: see Vanssay Point. VANSSAY POINT: extremity of a small penin- sula which extends N. into the W. portion of Port Charcot, lying about 0.25 mi. NW. of Mt. Jeanne in the N. part of Booth I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°03’S., 64°01’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Monsieur De Vassay de Blavous. Not adopted: Point de Vanssay. VAN VALKENBURG, MOUNT: mountain in the S. part of the Clark Mtns., at the edge of the Rockefeller Plateau in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°18’S., 141°59’W. Disc. on aerial flights from the West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for Prof. Samuel Van Valkenburg, Dir. of the School of Geography of Clark University. Van Wyck Island: see Wyck Island: VARTDAL, MOUNT: snow-capped peak about 5,300 ft. in el., surmounting and forming part of the plateau escarpment along the E. coast of Palmer Pen., about 4 mi. NE. of Karpf Pt. on the N. side of Mill Inlet; in 66°51’S., 64°23’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Hroar Vartdal, Norwegian polar bibliographer. This feature was photographed from the air during 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. VAUGHAN, MOUNT: peak about 8,200 ft. in el., standing between Mounts Goodale and Crockett in the Will Hays Mtns., which lie between Amund- sen and Robert Scott Glaciers in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°58’S., 155°10’W. Disc. by the Geological Party of the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and named for Norman D. Vaughan, dog driver for the geological party. Not adopted: Mount Vaughn. Vaughn, Mount: see Vaughan, Mount. VAUREAL, CAPE: cape about 1 mi. WNW. of Cape Syrezol, at the E. side of the entrance to Ad- miralty Bay, in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°10’S., 58°19’W. Charted and probably named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot. Not adopted: Cape Vaureal. Veddels: see Weddell Islands. VEDEL ISLETS: group of islets in the Danne- brog Is., lying about 3 mi. W. of Hovgaard I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 64°15’W. The largest islet of this group was disc. in 1898 and given the name Vadel by the BelgAK under 424589 O -57 - 21 313 De Gerlache. Dr. Jean B. Charcot charted the remaining islets in 1904, and again in 1909 when he extended the name Vedel to include the entire islet group. Not adopted: Vedel Islands, Wedel Islands. VEGA ISLAND: island some 17 mi. long, in an E.-W. direction, and about 6 mi. wide, which is the northernmost of the James Ross I. group and lies in the W. part of Erebus and Terror Gulf; in about 63°50’S., 57°25’W. It is separated from James Ross I. by Sidney Herbert Sound and from the NE. end of Palmer Pen. by Prince Gustav Channel. The island was named by Dr. Otto Nordenskjéld, leader of the SwedAE, 1901-4, ap- parently for the ship Vega used by his uncle, Baron A. E. Nordenskidld, in making the first voyage through the Northeast Passage, 1878-79. VEGETATION ISLAND: narrow island about 1 mi. long, lying N. of Inexpressible I. and W. of Mt. Abbott peninsula, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°55/S., 163°39’E. Disc. by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and probably so named by them because of the lichens found on this island. Not adopted: Lichen Island. Veier Island: see Jason Island. VEITCH POINT: point situated centrally along the NE. end of Monroe I., off the W. end of Corona- tion I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°36’S., 46°03’W. The point was charted in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and named for R. S. Veitch, sounding machine technician of the ship. VELAIN, MOUNT: mountain with an isolated, black triangular summit showing through its snow mantle, about 2,300 ft. in el., standing in the NE. end of Adelaide I.; in about 66°49’S., 67°51’W. This mountain may have been seen by John Bis- coe, who disc. Adelaide I. in 1832. First charted and named by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, for Charles Vélain, French geologist and geog- rapher, and professor of physical geography at the Sorbonne. Not adopted: Mount Velain, Vélain Peak. VENUS GLACIER: glacier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, about 6 mi. long and 6 mi. wide at its mouth, flowing E. into George VI Sound between Keystone Cliffs and Triton Pt.; in 71°38’S., 68°12’W. The coast in this vicinity was first explored from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth, on Nov. 23, 1935, and was roughly surveyed from the ground in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. This glacier was first sur- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA veyed in 1949 by the FIDS, and named by them after the planet Venus. VERDANT ISLET: islet about 1 mi. E. of the NE. end of Main I., in the Willis Is. at South Georgia; in 54°00’S.,38°13’W. Charted and named by DI personnel in the period 1926-30. Not adopted: Verdant Island. VERNE, MOUNT: mountain, about 5,400 ft. in el., standing about 6.5 mi. E. of Cape Bongrain and dominating the S. part of Pourquoi Pas I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°45’S., 67°29’W. First sighted and roughly surveyed in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. Resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and named by them for Jules Verne, author of Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea. Other features on Pourquoi Pas I. are named after characters in this book. VERNON HARCOURT, MOUNT: conical peak standing N. of Mt. Northampton in the Admiralty Range, in northern Victoria Land; in about 72°32’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named this feature for the Reverend W. Vernon Harcourt, one of the founders of the British Association. VER-SUR-MER INLET: small inlet in the E. portion of the Bay of Whales, indenting Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°40’S., 164°10’W. Little Amer- ica, the base for the ByrdAE, 1928-30 and 1933-35, was located at the head of this inlet. Although forward movement of the ice shelf is constantly changing the detailed configuration of the Bay of Whales, the general outlines remain essentially unchanged. Named by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd in 1929 for the village in France where he landed at the end of his trans-Atlantic flight in 1927. VERTE ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about 1 mi. N. of Double Its. and about 1.5 mi. ENE. of the tip of Zélée Glacier Tongue, off Adélie Coast; in about 66°44’S., 141°11’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and so named be- cause of its greenish appearance. Verte is the French word for green. Veslekulten: see Hayes Peak. VESTFOLD HILLS: barren, rounded hills, from 150 to 450 ft. in el., extending about 15 mi. NNE. from the N. side of Sgrsdal Glacier Tongue, situ- ated on Ingrid Christensen Coast and marked by three small peninsulas which extend W. into Prydz Bay; in about 68°33’S., 78°15’E. Disc. and named by the Nor. exp. under Mikkelsen, who landed in this area at the reported position of about 68°29’S., 78°11’E. Vestfold is a county in Norway where 314 Sandefjord, headquarters of the whaling industry, is located. Not adopted: Vestfold Mountains. Vestfold Mountains: see Vestfold Hills. Vestskotet: see West Stack. VICARS ISLAND: island lying about 10 mi. E. of Proclamation I. and about 5 mi. off the coast of Enderby Land; in about 65°50’S., 54°15’E. Disc. and named in January 1930 by the BANZARE under Mawson. VICTOR BAY: bay about 16 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, indenting the W. end of Adélie Coast close W. of Mathieu Rock, and marked by an extensive chain of icebergs breaking away from the high tongue of Commandant Charcot Gl. at the SE. side of the bay; in 66°20’S., 136°30’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hip., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Paul- Emile Victor, Director of the Expéditions Polaires Francaises, who organized E.P.F. expeditions to Greenland in 1948-51 and Antarctica in 1948-53 and 1955-56. Victor served as leader of French expeditions to Greenland in 1934-35 and 1936-37, and as leader of the summer parties of the E.P.F. Greenland operations. VICTOR HUGO ISLAND: ice-covered island, about 1 mi. in extent, with several rocky islets and pinnacles off its E. side, lying in the W. approach to Bismarck Str. and some 42 mi. WSW. of Cape Albert de Monaco, Anvers I.; in about 64°58’S., 65°46’W. Probably disc. by C. J. Even- sen, captain of the Hertha, who explored along the W. coast of Palmer Pen. in 1893, because an unnamed island of similar extent and location first appeared on the charts at that time. The island was sighted by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, who named it for the French poet and novelist Victor Hugo. VICTORIA, MOUNT: snow-covered peak about 2,500 ft. in el., situated about 2 mi. BE. of Mt. Bulcke in southern Brabant I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°30’S., 62°35’W. First seen and photo- graphed by the BelgAEH, 1897-99, under De Ger- lache. The name seems to have first appeared on charts in about 1921 and has since become estab- lished through common usage. VICTORIA LAND: that part of Antarctica which fronts on the W. side of the Ross Sea, extending northward from about 78°00’S. to 70°30’S., in about 164°00’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named for Queen Victoria. Not adopted: South Victoria Land, Syd Victoria Land [Nor- wegian]. ag” NN GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA VICTORY GLACIER: gently sloping glacier, about 8 mi. long, flowing ESE. from the N. end of the Detroit Plateau on Louis Philippe Pen. and opening on Prince Gustav Chan. immediately N. of Pitt Pt.; in 63°49’S., 58°25’W. Disc. by the FIDS, who so named it because the discovery was made in the week following the surrender of Japan in World War II, in August 1945. VIEUGUE ISLAND: island about 3 mi. long and about 1,000 ft. in el., lying in Grandidier Chan. about 1 mi. NW. of Duchaylard I. and some 14 mi. WNW. of Cape Garcia, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 65°13’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Monsieur Vieugué, then French Chargé d’Af- faires at Buenos Aires. Not adopted: Vieugue Island. VIEVILLE GLACIER: glacier lying between Cape Vauréal and Point Hennequin and terminat- ing in Admiralty Bay, on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°08’S., 58°20’W. Viéville Glacier was charted and named by the FrAk, 1908-10, under Charcot. VIEW POINT: eastern tip of a promontory, about 500 ft. in el., forming the W. side of the entrance to Duse Bay, near the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°33’S., 57°22’W. Disc. by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. So named by the FIDS following their survey of the area in 1945, because from this promontory, good panoramic photographs were obtained. VIK, CAPE: cape marking the W. side of the entrance to Marshall Bay on the S. coast of Coro- nation I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°40’S., 45°41’W. The cape appears to be first shown and named on a chart made by the Norwegian whaler Capt. Petter Sgrile in 1912-13. VINCENNES BAY: large, V-shaped bay, about 65 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape Nutt and Cape Folger, marked by several large, steep glaciers near its head, lying between Knox and Budd Coasts; in about 66°35’S., 109°00’E. Photo- graphed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. The bay was entered in January 1948 by USN Op. Wmil. icebreakers Burton Island and Edisto which assisted in establishing astrenomical stations in the Windmill Is. in the NE. portion of the bay. Named by the US-ACAN for the sloop of war Vincennes, flagship of the USEE under Wilkes, from which a series of coastal landfalls along Wilkes Land were disc. and plotted during Janu- ary—February 1840. Wilkes’ chart suggests a pos- sible coastal recession corresponding closely with the longitudinal limits for Vincennes Bay, al- 424589 O -57 - 22 315 though pack ice conditions prevented close recon- naissance by the USEE of the coast in this imme- diate area. Not adopted: Kreitzer Bay. Vincent Astor, Mount: see Astor, Mount. Vincent Gutenko Mountains: see Gutenko Moun- tains. VINDICATION ISLAND: island about 1 mi. in diameter, lying about 2 mi. SW. of Candlemas I. in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°04’S., 26°46’W. Vindication Island was disc. in 1775 by Capt. James Cook, who reported it to be one of the two Candlemas Islands. Reports indicating that the Candlemas Islands contained three islands or a single island for many years overshadowed Cook’s earlier description. A survey in 1930 by DI per- sonnel on the Discovery II confirmed Cook’s report, thus suggesting the name for this island. VIOLANTE INLET: ice-filled inlet about 15 mi. long, in an E.-W. direction, and 12 mi. wide, lying between Cape Fanning and Cape Herdman along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°35’S., 61°05’W. Disc. and photographed from the air in Decem- ber 1940 by members of the USAS and named for Maj. (later Col.) Andre L. Violante, USA, who designed the prefabricated buildings used by the expedition. Particularly because of a false floor, they proved to be the most satisfactory quarters used by American Antarctic expeditions. VISCA ANCHORAGE: northwestern portion of Martel Inlet, Admiralty Bay, which is entered between La Plaza Pt. and Ullmann Pt., on King George I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°03’S., 58°23’W. Visca Anchorage was charted by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot, and named by him for Dr. Visca, an acquaintance in Montevideo. Not adopted: North Anchorage. VISOKOI ISLAND: island about 4.5 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, capped by Mt. Hodson, a volcanic peak about 3,000 ft..in el., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°42’S., 27°12’W. Disc. in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, who named the island Visokoi (High), because of its conspicuous height. Vogel Insel: see Bird Island. Voile, Rocher: see Sail Rock. von Sterneck, Cape: see Charles, Cape; Sterneck, Cape. Vorgebirge der guten Begegnung: see Well-met, Cape. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA VORPOSTEN PEAK: isolated peak about 7,200 ft. in el., rising through the icecap at the N. edge of the polar plateau in New Schwabenland; in about 71°20’S., 16°00’E. Disc. by members of the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, who gave the name Vorposten (the outpost) because of the marginal location of this peak with respect to the German area of operations. Not adopted: The Outpost, Vorposten [German]. VORTEX ISLET: islet about 0.5 mi. long and 800 ft. in el., lying in the NE. part of Prince Gustav Chan. about 2 mi. WSW. of Corry I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°44’S., 57°38’W. Islands in this area were first seen by a party under J. Gunnar Andersson of the SwedAE, 1901-4. Vortex Islet was first charted by the FIDS in August 1945. The FIDS survey party was forced to lie idle there by a whirlwind snowstorm, thus suggesting the name. VULCAN POINT: northwestern point of Candle- mas I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 57°02’S., 26°43’W. The point was charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II, and so named be- cause a lava plateau occupies the N. portion of the island, giving evidence of earlier volcanic activity. WADDINGTON BAY: bay about 2 mi. long, in a NW.-SE. direction, and 1 mi. wide, indenting the W. coast of Palmer Pen. between Cape Ras- mussen and Cape Tuxen: in 65°16’S., 64°05’W. This bay is partially defined on the charts of the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. It was more fully delineated by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Char- cot, who named it for Senator Waddington, Pres. of the Chamber of Commerce at Rouen. WADE, MOUNT: massive mountain about 15,000 ft. in el., standing in the Prince Olav Mtns. of the Queen Maud Range and dominating the E. flank of Shackleton Gl., at the head of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 84°40’S., 173°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE on several flights to the Queen Maud Range in November 1929. Named by the US-SCAN for F. Alton Wade, geologist with the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and senior scientist at the West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. Not adopted: Mount Bush. Wade, Mount: see Gray, Mount. Wade Glacier: see Shackleton Glacier. WADE POINT: rocky mass, more than 3,000 ft. in el., marking the W. extremity of the rock ridge separating Millett and Bertram Glaciers on Palmer Pen., overlooking George VI Sound; in 70°41’S., 67°40’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named by the members 316 of the expedition for Mrs. Muriel H. Wade, who was secretary to the BGLE. Wadsworth, Cape: see Wadworth, Cape. WADWORTH, CAPE: northern tip of Coulman I., in the Ross Sea just off Victoria Land; in about 73°20’S., 169°30’E. Disc. on Jan. 17, 1841 by a Br. exp. under Capt. James Clark Ross, who named it in compliment to his wife’s uncle, Robert John Coulman, Esq., of Wadworth Hall, Doncaster. Not adopted: Cape Wadsworth. WAESCHE, MOUNT: snow-covered summit standing at the SW. end of the Executive Commit- tee Range, in Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°30’S., 130°00’W. Disc. by the USAS on a flight, Dec. 15, 1940, and named for V. Adm. Russell R. Waesche, U. S. Coast Guard, member of the USAS Execu- tive Committee. WAGER GLACIER: small, heavily crevassed gla- cier on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, which occupies a trench-like valley and flows E. into George VI Sound immediately S. of Marr Bluff; in 69°48’S., 69°23’W. Surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and named by them for Lawrence R. Wager, prof. of Geology at Oxford University. WAIFS, THE: group of islets and rocks lying in the middle of the SE. entrance to Schollaert Chan., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°33’S., 62°42’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache. The name appears on a chart based upon a 1927 sur- vey by DI personnel on the Discovery, but may reflect an earlier naming. Not adopted: Les Waifs [French]. WAITABIT CLIFFS: a line of sedimentary cliffs on the E. coast of Alexander I Island, which face eastward onto George VI Sound and extend 3 mi. N. from the mouth of Mercury Gl.; in 71°3V’S., 68°14’°W. The coast in this vicinity was first ex- plored from the air and partially photographed by Lincoln Ellsworth on Nov. 23, 1935. The cliffs were first roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. They were resurveyed in 1949 by the FIDS, at which time the rock strata were in- dependently examined by members of the party at two different points; an important investigation causing the delay which gave rise to the name. WAKEFIELD, MOUNT: prominent mountain about 9,400 ft. in el., standing S. of the great trans- verse depression occupied by Fleming and Bing- ham Glaciers, on Palmer Pen.; in 69°46’S., 64°34’W. This mountain and the prominent peaks immedi- ately to the N. and S. were sighted from the air by Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, and are probably synonymous with the feature which he called GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA “Eternity Range.” Mount Wakefield was charted in 1936 by a BGLE sledge party under Rymill, and named for Viscount Wakefield of Hythe, a contribu- tor to the expedition. WALCOTT, CAPE: bold, ice-covered headland about 2,000 ft. in el., forming the E. end of Scripps Ridge on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°05’S., 63°18’W. Disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and named by him for Frederic C. Walcott, of the Coun- cil of the American Geographical Society. Waldeck Island: see Waldeck-Rousseau Peak. Waldeck-Rousseau, Cap; Waldeck Rousseu Peak: see Waldeck-Rousseau Peak. Waldeck Rousseau, Cape: see Evensen, Cape. WALDECK-ROUSSEAU PEAK: conspicuous monolith about 4 mi. ENE. of Cape Evensen, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°09’S., 65°39’W. The FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5, observed a cape in this area which they named for Pierre Wal- deck-Rousseau, noted French statesman. On re- exploring this area the FrAE under Charcot, 1908-10, applied the name to a small island off the coast. The BGLE under Rymill charted this por- tion of the coast by land and from the air in 1935, correlating their work with that of Charcot. Waldeck-Rousseau Peak as here applied is in ac- cord with the interpretation of the BGLE. Not adopted: Cap Waldeck-Rousseau [French], Mount Waldeck Rousseau, Pillar Peak, Waldeck Island, Waldeck Rousseau Peak, Waldeck Rousseu Peak. WALDRON, CAPE: ice-covered cape, separating Budd Coast and Sabrina Coast, which marks the N. end of the ice-drowned escarpment bounding the W. side of Totten Gl.; in about 66°05’S., 116°05’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for R. R. Waldron, purser on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. WALDRON GLACIER: channel glacier about 5 mi. wide and 10 mi. long, flowing NW. from the continental ice to the E. side of Porpoise Bay, mid- way between Sandford and Mose Glaciers, on Ban- zare Coast; in about 66°20’S., 129°55’E. Delin- eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Thomas W. Waldron, captain’s clerk on the brig Porpoise of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Walgreen Coast: see Eights Coast. WALGREEN COAST: that portion of the coast of Marie Byrd Land terminating on the E. in Cape Flying Fish, in about 100°50’W., and extending S. 317 and W. from Thurston Peninsula. The W. bound- ary is to be determined after more detailed in- formation is available. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Dec. 27, 1940. Named by Byrd for Charles R. Walgreen, Pres. of the Wal- green Drug Co. of Chicago, who was a supporter of the ByrdAE, 1933-35, and who assisted in equipping the Bear for the USAS, 1939-41. Walker, Mount: see Sible, Mount. WALKER MOUNTAINS: range of mountains about 3,000 ft. in el., which forms the axis of Thurston Pen.; in about 72°05’S., 98°30’W. Disc. by the USAS in a flight from the Bear on Feb. 27, 1940. Named by the US-SCAN for Lt. William M. Walker, captain of the USEE ship Flying Fish which reached within 100 mi. of the peninsula in March 1839. Not adopted: Demas Mountains. WALKER POINT: point marking the S. extrem- ity of the E. end of Elephant I., in the South Shet- land Is.; in about 61°08’S., 54°46’°W. The name appears on Powell’s map of 1822, based upon the joint cruise of Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer, in the sloop James Monroe, and Capt. John Powell, in the sloop Dove, in December 1821. Probably named for Capt. John Walker, whose assistance in the construction of the map was acknowledged by Powell. Not adopted: Pointe Walter [French], Walker’s Point. WALLACE, CAPE: cape marking the SEH. end of Low I., the southwesternmost of the South Shet- land Is.; in 63°21’S., 62°17’W. Though the origin of the name Cape Wallace is unknown, it has ap- peared on charts for over a hundred years and its usage has been established internationally. Wallaston, Cape; Walleston, Cape: see Wollaston, Cape. Wallis Island: see Willis Islands. WALLOWS, THE: low-lying area about 0.3 mi. S. of Berry Head in the NE. part of Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 45°37’W. It is sheltered by low ridges on all sides, and has a small freshwater pond in the center. This area was roughly sur- veyed in 1933 by DI personnel, and resurveyed in 1947 by the FIDS. The name, given by the FIDS, arose because the bulk of moulting elephant seals on Signy I. wallow here in the summer. WALL RANGE: mountainous ridge, about 3 mi. long in a NE._SW. direction, with steep wall-like cliffs and jagged peaks about 3,600 ft. in el., stand- ing about 1 mi. NE. of the Sierra Du Fief near the center of Wiencke I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°49’S., 63°22’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA under De Gerlache. Charted in 1944 by the FIDS, who applied this descriptive name. WALNUM, MOUNT: mountain mass in the cen- tral portion of the Sgr Rondane Mtns., on Prin- cess Ragnhild Coast; in about 72°10’S., 23°00’E. Disc. and charted by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen on Feb. 6, 1937, and named for Ragn- vald Walnum, one-time chairman of the Nor- wegian Whaling Board, who prepared an ice chart of Antarctica. Walter, Pointe: see Walker Point. Walter Kohler Range: see Kohler Range. WALTON MOUNTAINS: mountains on the northern coast of the western part ‘of Alexander I Island; in about 71°15’S., 74°20’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named these mountains for Lt. Col..R. C. Walton, USMC, of the Office of Naval Research, who was instru- mental in obtaining the loan of the exp. ship from the Navy, and in securing Navy assistance for the expedition. WALTON PEAK: sharp peak, about 2,700 ft. in el., which stands 2 mi. NNE. of Mt. Rhamnus and is part of the irregular ridge separating Northeast Gl. from Neny Fjord, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°09’S., 66°48’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Resurveyed in 1946 and 1948 by the FIDS, and named for Eric W. K. Walton, FIDS engineer at Stonington I. in 1946 and 1947, who in 1946 rescued J. E. Tonkin of FIDS from a crevasse in Northeast Glacier. Wandel Island: see Booth Island. WARD, MOUNT: mountain about 8,500 ft. in el., standing SE. of the Batterbee Mtns. in the S. part of Palmer Pen.; in about 71°55’S., 66°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named it for W. W. Ward, editor of the Beaumont Journal, Beaumont, Texas, and a supporter of the expe- dition. WARD, MOUNT: peak about 10,500 ft. in el., standing about 9 mi. SE. of Mt. Nimrod, in the Dominion Range; in about 85°33’S., 169°15’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. WARNER, MOUNT: isolated L-shaped mountain near the head of Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°05’S., 143°55’W. Disc. by members of the Edsel Ford Mountains Geological Survey Party of the USAS, 1939-41, and named for Lawrence A. Warner, geol- 318 ogist at the USAS West Base and leader of the survey party which visited this mountain. WARNING GLACIER: glacier descending steeply from the Cape Adare peninsula into the E. part of Robertson Bay, in northern Victoria Land; in about 71°31’S., 170°22’E. First charted in 1899 by the BrAE, 1898-1900, under C. E. Borchgrevink, who so named it because southerly gales at Cape Adare were always heralded by a cloud of snow sweeping over this glacier into Robertson Bay. WARNOCK ISLANDS: two small offshore islands north of the William Scoresby Arch., lying about 1 mi. S. and SW. of Dales I. and about 12 mi. N. of Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°12’S., 59°47’E. Disc. and named in February 1936 by DI person- nel on the William Scoresby. Warpasgiljo Glacier: see Arthur Davis Glacier. WARREN ISLET: islet lying in William Scoresby Bay immediately S. of the W. end of Bertha L., off Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°24’S., 59°38’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936. WASHINGTON, CAPE: bold truncated headland, about 1,000 ft. in el., with vertical sides, forming the tip of the long peninsula which separates Wood Bay and Terra Nova Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 74°42’S., 165°45’E. Disc. by a Br. exp. under Ross, Feb. 18, 1841, and named for Captain Wash- ington, a former secretary of the Royal Geographi- cal Society. Washington, Mount: see Helen Washington, Mount. WASHINGTON STRAIT: passage about 2 mi. wide between Laurie I. and Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 44°55’W. Disc. in December 1821 on the occasion of the joint cruise by Capt. George Powell, a British sealer in the sloop James Monroe. Supposedly, it was named for George Washington, first President of the United States. WATCHKEEPER, THE: low rock fringed on the N. side by sunken rocks, lying about 2 mi. N. of Table I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°18’S., 59°52’W. This feature was known to early sealers in the area as Flat Isle, but in recent years the name The Watchkeeper has overtaken the early name in usage. It was charted by DI personnel on the Discovery II in 1935. Not adopted: Flat Isle. WATERFALL BAY: small, unsheltered bay, marked by a conspicuous waterfall at its head, lying about 1.5 mi. SW. of Blue Whale Hbr. in the E. side of Possession Bay, along the N. coast of South GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Georgia; in 54°05’/S., 37°03’W. Named by DI per- sonnel who charted Possession Bay in 1930. Waterloo Island: see King George Island. WATERPIPE BEACH: flat shingle beach on the W. side of Borge Bay, Signy I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°43’S., 45°37’W. Suryeyed in 1933 by DI per- sonnel. Resurveyed and named in 1947 by the FIDS. An old pipe line from a pumping station by the southernmost lake in Three Lakes Valley leads down to this beach and was used by the Tgnsberg Hvalfangeri for watering whaling vessels during the period 1920-30. WATKINS ISLAND: low, ice-covered island about 8 mi. long, in a NE.-SW. direction, and 3 mi. wide, lying SSW. of Nansen I. in the Biscoe Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°22’S., 67°05’W. This island was first charted by the FrAE under Charcot, in 1903-05 and 1908-10, but it remained unnamed until resighted by the. BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, who gave the name Mikkelsen Is- land after Ejnar Mikkelsen, Danish Arctic ex- plorer. When applying the name, however, they were unaware of the existence of the Mikkelsen Islets about 75 mi. south-southwestward, named in 1908-10 by Charcot. The US-ACAN concurs in the opinion of the Br—-APC that these two names are so close together and so similar that the re- tention of both of them will lead to confusion. Since Mikkelsen Islets, to the south, were named earlier and have had wider usage, the name Mik- kelsen Island is withdrawn from the northern fea- ture. The new name Watkins Island, commemo- rating Henry G. Watkins, British Arctic explorer and leader of the British Arctic Air Route Expedi- tion, 1930-31, is reeommended for this island. Not adopted: Mikkelsen Island. WATSON BLUFF: dark bluff about 900 ft. in el., forming the E. end of David I., off Queen Mary Coast; in about 66°28’S., 98°52’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson and named for Andrew D. Watson, geologist with the expedition. WATSON ESCARPMENT: a scarp beginning E. of Robert Scott Gl., and standing at the S. side of Albanus GI. in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°S., 148°W. and extending E. to about 130°W. Disc. by the ByrdAE in 1934 and named for Thomas J. Watson, American business executive, a patron of this expedition. Not adopted: Thomas Watson Escarpment. WATSON PENINSULA: narrow peninsula about 1.8 mi. long terminating in Cape Valavielle, sep- arating Macdougal and Marr Bays on the N. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°42’S., 44°32’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under 319 Bruce, who named it for G. L. Watson, yacht builder and redesigner of Bruce’s exp. ship, the Scotia. WATT BAY: bay about 12 mi. wide lying W. of Cape De la Motte, along George V Coast; in about 67°00’S., 144°00’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named the bay for W. A. Watt, Premier of Victoria in 1911. WAUTERS, CAPE: ice-covered cape forming the N. end of Two Hummock I., lying in the NE. part of DeGerlache Str., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°06’S., 61°42’,W. Cape Wauters was charted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for a supporter of the expedition. Wauwermanns Islands: see Wauwermans Is- lands. WAUWERMANS ISLANDS: string of small, low, snow-covered islands lying in Bismarck Str. and extending from about 3 mi. WSW. to about 11 mi. W. of the S. end of Wiencke I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°55’/S., 63°53’W. The islands were disc. by a Ger. exp., 1873-74, under Dallmann. They were sighted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named for Lieutenant General Wauwermans, Pres. of the Societe Royale de Geo- graphie, Antwerp, and a supporter of the expedi- tion. Not adopted: Wauwermann Island, Wauwer- manns Islands. WAVE PEAK: conspicuous peak, about 3,300 ft. in el., which rises precipitously from the head of Laws Gl., about 2 mi. inland from the S. coast of Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°37’S., 45°37’W. The feature has a prominent ridge run- ning in a southwesterly direction. To the north and east it slopes gently to the level of Brisbane Pla- teau. Surveyed in 1948-49 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the resemblance of this peak to a wave about to break. WAVERLY GLACIER: narrow glacier flowing along the SE. flank of Mt. Tricorn and entering Wright Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°01’/S., 61°38’W. This glacier was photographed from the air by members of the USAS in December 1940, and by the RARE under Ronne in 1947. Named by Ronne after Waverly, New York, home of the Kasco Mills. Mr. Marc Ivy and Mr. Edwin Knapp, officers of the Kasco Mills, contributed twenty tons of dog food to Ronne’s expedition. Not adopted: Kasco Glacier. WAY ARCHIPELAGO: scores of islets and rocks skirting George V. Coast in the form of an arc at a distance of 1 to 4 mi., lying in the vicinity of Cape Gray, at the E. side of the entrance to Common- wealth Bay, and extending E. to the vicinity of GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Cape-Pigeon Rocks on the W. side of Watt Bay; centering in about 66°51’S., 143°38’E. Disc. from the Aurora in January 1912 by the AAE under Mawson, and later charted and photographed from the ground by the AAE party under F. L. Stillwell. Named by Mawson for Sir Samuel Way, Chancellor of Adelaide University. W. Christopherson, Mount: see Engelstad, Mount. WEAVER, MOUNT: mountain in the Queen Maud Range, about 10,000 ft. in el., marking the S. portal of Robert Scott Gl. at the south polar pla- teau; in about 86°57’S., 153°00’W. Disc. by the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Named for Charles E. Weaver, Prof. of Paleontology at the Univ. of Washington. WEBB, CAPE: cape separating Ainsworth Bay and Doolette Bay, on the George V Coast; in about 67°50’S., 146°51’E. Disc. in 1912 by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who named it for E. N. Webb, chief magnetician of the Main Base Party of the expedition. WEBB ISLAND: rocky island about 1 mi. long, lying in Laubeuf Fjord about 2 mi. S. of the entrance to Stonehouse Bay, Adelaide I.; in 67°27’S., 67°57’W. Disc. by the FrAE tinder Char- cot, 1908-10, and named by him for Capt. (later Adm. Sir) Richard C. Webb, RN, commanding officer of an English cruiser in Argentine waters at that time. Not adopted: Webb Islet. WEBSTER KNOB: prominent rock outcrop, about 8,000 ft. in el., which lies on the NE. shoulder of Mt. Fridtjof Nansen, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°21’S., 166°10’W. Disc. and visited in November 1929 by the ByrdAE geological party under Laurence Gould and named by Byrd for Mrs. Laurence J. Webster, contributor to the expedition. WEBSTER PEAKS: group of four rocky peaks about 3,000 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi. W. of Whitecloud Cove, the S. head of Charcot Bay, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°53’S., 59°37 W. Charted by the FIDS in 1948, and named for W. H. B. Webster, medical officer and naturalist on the Chanticleer, which approached Tower and Trinity Islands off this coast in 1829. Weddell, Cape: see Weddell Point. WEDDELL GLACIER: glacier flowing in a N. direction to the S. side of Royal Bay, about 4 mi. SE. of Ross Gl., on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°35’S., 36°00’W. ‘The glacier was charted by the Ger. exp. under Schrader, 1882-83, and named for James Weddell, Master, RN, who as a British sealing captain visited South Georgia in 1823. 320 WEDDELL ISLANDS: two islands fringed by rocks, lying about 2 mi. S. of Saddle I. and some 6 mi. E. of Cape Faraday, Powell I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°39’S., 44°51’W. These islands were probably first sighted on the occasion of a joint cruise by Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer and Capt. George Powell in December 1821. The name first appears on James Weddell’s chart, made fol- lowing his voyage to the South Orkney Is. in 1823. Not adopted: Veddels [Norwegian], Weddell Island. WEDDELL POINT: low tussock grass covered point forming the E. side of the entrance to Schlie- per Bay, on the S. coast and near the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 37°51’W. The name “Cape Weddell” was given by David Ferguson, Scottish geologist, during his visit to South Georgia in 1911-12, after James Weddell, Master, RN, who visited South Georgia in 1823. The term point is a more suitable descriptive term for this feature than cape. Not adopted: Cape Weddell. WEDDELL SEA: great ice-filled sea which in- dents Antarctica between Palmer Pen. and Coats Land; centering in about 73°S., 45°W. This sea was disc. in 1823 by James Weddell, Master, RN, who named it George IV Sea. The present name, honoring the discoverer, was proposed by Dr. Karl Fricker in 1900, and it has been universally accepted. Not adopted: George IV Sea. Weddell Shelf Ice: see Filchner Shelf Ice. Wedel Islands: see Vedel Islets. WEDEL-JARLSBERG, MOUNT: mountain ris- ing to about 11,500 ft. in el., standing about 3 mi. SSW. of Mt. Ruth Gade, between Isaiah Bowman and Cooper Glaciers, in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°42’S., 164°20’W. Disc. in December 1911 on the journey to the South Pole by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Alice Wedel-Jarlsberg, wife of the Norwegian diplomat and one of the last members of the Norwegian nobility. Not adopted: Mount Alice Wedel-Jarls- berg. WEDNESDAY ISLAND: island about 1.5 mi. long, which is the easternmost of the Wauwermans Is., lying about 3 mi. WSW. of Cape Errera, Wiencke I., at the SW. end of the Palmer Arch.; in 64°56’S., 63°45’W. The Wauwermans Is. were disc. by the Ger. exp. under Dallmann, 1873-74, and were later roughly charted by the BelgAE under De Gerlache, 1897-99, and the FrAE under Charcot, 1903-5. Wednesday Island was charted by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, and so named because Rymill’s exp. first sighted the island on a Wednesday. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA WEIR GLACIER: glacier, about 6 mi. long, flowing N. into the SE. corner of Barilari Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 66°01’S., 64°42’W. First sighted and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was surveyed in 1935-36 by the BGLE under Rymill, and later named for William D. Weir, 1st Viscount Weir of Eastwood and his son, the Hon. James K. Weir, who con- tributed toward the cost of the BGLE, 1934-37. Weisse Insel: see White Island. WELCH ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long with a prominent pinnacle rock about 400 ft. in el., lying about 20 mi. W. of Cape Daly and about 2 mi. off the shore of Mac-Robertson Coast at the E. side of Holme Bay; in about 67°34’S., 62°57’E. Disc. by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson. B. F. Welch was the ship’s second engineer on this expedition. WELCHNESS: gravel spit forming the W. ex- tremity of Dundee I., located off the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°29’S., 56°14’W. The feature was probably first sighted by the Dundee whaling exp., 1892-93, and is described in the report of Dr. C. W. Donald who sailed on the Active. WELCOME ISLETS: group of rocky islets lying about 4 mi. WNW. of Cape Buller, off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 53°58’S., 37°29’W. These islets were disc. by Capt. James Cook in 1775. The name dates back to at least 1912 and is now well established in international usage. Not adopted: Welcome Islands. Welhelmina Bay: see Wilhelmina Bay. WELL-MET, CAPE: dark, conspicuous headland near the center of the N. side of Vega I., close S. of the NE. end of Palmer Pen.; in 63°47’S., 57°19’W. Cape Well-met was disc. and named by the SwedAE, 1901-4, and commemorates the long delayed union at this point of a relief party under J. Gunnar Andersson and the winter party under Dr. Otto Nordenskjold after twenty months of enforced separation. Not adopted: Cape Well- Met, Motesudden [Swedish], Vorgebirge der guten Begegnung [German]. WELLS RIDGE: rocky ridge about 2.5 mi. long rising to an estimated 2,000 ft. in el., lying a few miles N. of the Swanson Mtns. on the N. side of Arthur Davis Gl., in the Edsel Ford Ranges in Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°57’S., 144°50’W. Disc. in aerial flights made from the West Base of the USAS in 1940 and named for Loran Wells, photographer and observer of the Edsel Ford 321 Mountains Geological Survey Party which visited this mountain in November—December 1940. Wensley Beacon: see Wensleydale Beacon. WENSLEYDALE BEACON: hill about 325 ft. in el., situated about 1.5 mi. SSW. of Telefon Bay, on the W. side of Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°57’S., 60°42’W. The hill was charted by a Br. exp., 1828-31, under Foster. Named by Lt. Cdr. D. N. Penfold, RN, following his survey of the island in 1948-49, after Wensleydale in Yorkshire, England. Not adopted: Wensley Beacon. WEST BALCH GLACIER: glacier, about 10 mi. long and 3 mi. wide, lying S. of West Gould Gl. on Palmer Pen. and flowing WNW. into Marin Darbel Bay; in 66°42’S., 65°25’W. This glacier together with East Balch Gl1., to the E., fill a trans- verse depression across Palmer Pen. Partially sur- veyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS and named by them, like its counterpart, for Edwin Swift Balch, Ameri- can Antarctic historian. West Barrier: see West Ice Shelf. WEST BAY: small bay on the S. coast and near the W. end of Heard I., indenting the base of Laurens Pen. about 0.5 mi. W. of Atlas Cove; in 53°02’S., 73°21’E. The name was applied by American sealers at Heard I. in the period follow- ing their initiation of sealing there in 1855. So named because of its position. The name appears on a chart by the Br. exp. under Nares, which visited the island in the Challenger in 1874 and utilized the names then in use by the sealers. West Bay: see Cumberland West Bay. WEST BLUFF: conspicuous bluff marking the W. extremity of Zavodovski I., in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 56°20’S., 27°38’W. West Bluff was charted and named in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. West Bluff: see Sulphur Point. West Cumberland Bay: see Cumberland West Bay. WEST GOULD GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi. long and 6 mi. wide, lying immediately S. of Bruce Plateau on Palmer Pen. and flowing W. into Marin Darbel Bay; in 66°34’S., 65°15°W. This glacier together with East Gould Gl., to the E., fill a trans- verse depression across Palmer Pen. Partially surveyed in 1946-47 by the FIDS and named by them, like its counterpart, for Lt. Cdr. Rupert T. Gould, British polar historian and cartographer. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA WEST ICE SHELF: an ice shelf of undetermined extent, projecting northward from the coast to approximately the 66th parallel, and bordering Wilhelm II Coast from about 88°30’E. for an un- determined distance westward. Disc. and named by the GerAE, 1901-3, under Drygalski. Not adopted: West Barrier, West Shelf Ice. West Melchior Archipelago: see West Melchior Islands. WEST MELCHIOR ISLANDS: a group of small ice-covered islands and rocks which lie W. of The Sound in the Melchior Is., Palmer Arch.; in 64°19’S., 63°00’W. The islands E. of The Sound are called East Melchior Islands. The name was probably given by DI personnel who roughly sur- veyed these islands in 1927. The islands were sur- veyed by Argentine expeditions in 1942, 1943 and 1948. Not adopted: West Melchior Archipelago. WESTMINSTER, MOUNT: peak about 11,500 ft. in el. standing at the W. side of Mt. Kinsey be- tween Keltie Gl. and Mill Gl. and overlooking the E. side of Beardmore Gl.; in about 85°00’S., 170°20’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton, probably after Westminster, a borough in the central part of London containing the Houses of Parliament and other civic buildings. WEST RUSSELL GLACIER: glacier, about 11 mi. long and 4 mi. wide, which lies immediately N. of Detroit Plateau and flows from Mt. Canicula westward into Bone Cove on the W. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°40’S., 50°50’W. This glacier together with East Russell Glacier, which flows eastward into Prince Gustav Channel on the E. side of Louis Philippe Pen., form a through glacier across the N. part of Palmer Pen. It was first surveyed in 1946 by the FIDS. Named by the Br-APC for V. I. Russell, surveyor and leader of the FIDS base at Hope Bay in 1946. West Shelf Ice: see West Ice Shelf. WEST SKERRY: small group of islets and rocks, forming the W. part of Skrap Skerries, about 2.5 mi. ESE. of Barff Pt., off the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°15’S., 36°20’.W. The name appears on a chart based upon a survey of this area by DI personnel in the period 1926-30, but it may reflect an earlier naming by whalers. Not adopted: West Skrapskjar. West Skrapskjar: see West Skerry. WEST STACK: a rock outcrop, about 450 ft. in el., on the W. side of an ice-covered promontory on Kemp Coast that lies about 25 mi. SE of the en- trance of Edward VIII Bay; in about 67°04’S., 322 58°07’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, and probably so named by them because of its distinctive appearance. Not adopted: Vestskotet [Norwegian]. Westye Egeberg Glacier: see Egeberg Glacier. WETMORE GLACIER: large glacier flowing in a SSE. direction and paralleling in its lower reaches the W. side of Irvine Gl. The two glaciers merge northward of Mt. Austin before entering the head of Gardner Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 74°38’S., 63°35’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this feature for Dr. Alexander Wetmore, Sec. of the Smithsonian Inst., who assisted Ronne in laying out the scien- tific research program of the expedition. Not adopted: Alexander Wetmore Glacier. Wetterwand: see Smoky Wall. WEYERHAEUSER GLACIER: large glacier flow- ing in a NE. direction and merging with several other large glaciers close W. of Mobiloil Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 68°45’S., 66°00’W. This glacier lies in the area first ex- plored from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins in 1928 and Lincoln Ellsworth in 1935, but it was first clearly delineated in aerial photographs taken by the USAS in 1940. The glacier was resighted in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, who named it for F. K. Weyerhaeuser of the Weyerhaeuser Lumber Co., which contributed lumber and insulating ma- terial to the expedition. WEYPRECHT MOUNTAINS: mountain group about 9,500 ft. in el., standing immediately W. of the N. edge of the polar plateau in New Schwaben- land; centering in about 71°55’S., 13°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Karl Weyprecht, Austrian polar explorer who in company with Julius Payer discovered Franz Josef Land in 1873, and initiator of the first Inter- national Polar Year expedition in 1882-83. Whaleback: see Marston, Mount. WHALEBACK ISLET: low, rounded rocky islet lying about 2 mi. SSW. of Blake Islet and close SW. of Bone Cove, off the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°40’S., 59°00’W. Charted in 1948 by members of the FIDS who gave this descrip- tive name. WHALE BAY: small bay along the S. coast of Coronation I., about 2 mi. NW. of the SE. end of the island, in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°45’S., 45°11’W. The bay was charted and named on a map based upon a running survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1912-13 by Capt. Petter Sgrlle, a GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Norwegian whaler. [Norwegian]. Not adopted: Hvalbugten WHALE ROCK: rock lying about 4 mi. S. of Signy I. and some 4 mi. E. of Cachalot Rock, in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°48’S., 45°40’W. Whale Rock appears to be first charted and named on a map based upon a survey of the South Orkney Is. in 1933 by DI personnel on the Discovery II. WHALERS BAY: small bay entered between Fildes Pt. and Penfold Pt. at the E. side of Port Foster, Deception I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°59’S., 60°34’W. The bay was so named by the FrAE, 1908-10, under Charcot because of its use at that time by whalers. Not adopted: Anse des Baleiniers [French]. WHALES, BAY OF: natural harbor indenting Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°35’S., 164°20’W. The configuration of the bay is continually changing. It served as a base for Amundsen’s successful dash to the South Pole, 1911, the Byrd Antarctic Ex- peditions of 1928-30 and 1933-35, and for the West Base of the USAS, 1939-41. So named by the BrAE under Shackleton, Jan. 24, 1908, because of the large number of whales found there. Not adopted: Hval Bukta [Norwegian]. WHALE SKERRIES: small group of islets and rocks in Lewthwaite Strait, South Orkney Is., ly- ing close W. of Cape Disappointment, Powell I.; in 60°42’S., 45°07’W. First surveyed and named “Hvalskjaer” by Petter Sgrile in 1912-13. The name was later corrected to the plural form, “Hvalskjaerene” (Whale Skerries), by Sgrille. The English form of the name was recommended by the Br—-APC in 1954. Not adopted: Hvalskjaer [Norwegian], Hvalskjaerene [Norwegian]. WHARTON, MOUNT: mountain about 8,850 ft. in el., standing about 12 mi. SW. of Mt. Field and about 30 mi. WSW. of Cape Douglas, on the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°06’S., 157°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named this mountain for Sir William Wharton, Hydrographer to the Navy, 1884-1904. Whatahope Bay: see Windy Cove. WHEATSTONE, CAPE: steep rogky bluff capped by a dome of ice, marking-the N: side of the en- trance to Tucker Inlet, in Victoria Land; in about 72°42’S., 170°48’E. Disc., Jan. 15, 1941, by a Br. exp. under Ross, who named it for Sir Charles Wheatstone, English physicist and inventor. WHEELER, CAPE: abrupt rock scarp about 1,500 ft. in el., marking the S. end of the ice-covered ridge which forms the N. side of the entrance to Wright 323 Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 73°58’S., 61°05’W. The cape was photographed from the air in 1940 by the USAS, and in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for John N. Wheeler, Pres. of the North American Newspaper Alliance and a contributor to the expedition. Not adopted: Cape John Wheeler. WHETTER NUNATAK: conspicuous rock out- crop protruding through the continental ice over- lying George V Coast, standing about 8 mi. NE. of Cape Denison along the E. side of Commonwealth Bay; in about 66°57’S., 142°58’E. Disc. by the AAE under Mawson, 1911-14, who named it for Dr. Leslie H. Whetter, surgeon with the expedi- tion. WHEWELL, MOUNT: prominent peak standing NE. of Mt. Sabine in the Admiralty Range, in north- ern Victoria Land; in about 71°54’S., 169°35’E. Disc. in January 1841 by Br. exp. under Ross, who named this mountain for the Reverend Dr. William Whewell, Master of Trinity College, Cambridge. WHIRLWIND GLACIERS: four prominent con- verging glaciers flowing into the W. side of Whirl- wind Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°24’S., 65°32’W. The glaciers were disc. by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928 and so named because their relative position was sug- gestive of the radial cylinders of his Wright Whirl- wind engine. The Whirlwind Glaciers, comprising the Flint, Demorest, Matthes, and Chamberlin Glaciers, were photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940, and charted by the FIDS in 1948. WHIRLWIND INLET: ice-filled inlet, about 7 mi. long in an E.—W. direction, and about 12 mi. wide at its entrance between Cape Northrop and a small cape close W. of Tent Nunatak, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°30’S., 65°25’W. Sir Hubert Wilkins disc. the inlet on his flight of Dec. 20, 1928. Wilkins reported four large glaciers flowing into the inlet, which he named Whirlwind Glaciers because their relative position was sug- gestive of the radial cylinders of his Wright Whirl- wind engine. The inlet was photographed from the air by the USAS in 1940, and charted by the FIDS in 1947. WHISNANT NUNATAK: small coastal nunatak protruding above the terminus of Rogers Gl., mid- way between McKaskle Hills and Maris Nunatak on Ingrid Christensen Coast; in about 69°59’S., 72°26’E. Delineated in 1952 by John H. Roscoe from USN Op. Hjp. aerial photographs taken in March 1947, and named by him for J. R. Whisnant, air crewman on USN Op. Hjp. photographic flights in this area and other coastal areas between 14° and 164°, east longitude. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA WHISTLING BAY: an open bay, about 4 mi. wide and indenting 2.5 mi., between Longridge Head and Cape Saens Pena, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°30’S., 67°35’W. First roughly surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill. Re- surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS and so named by them because of the curious and unidentified whistling sounds heard there at the time of the survey. WHITE, MOUNT: peak, probably 10,000 ft. in el., standing E. of Mt. Iveagh and Beardmore Gl. between the Keltie and Mill Glaciers; in about 85°08’S., 172°00’E. Disc. and named by the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. WHITECLOUD COVE: cove about 2 mi. wide, situated immediately W. of Almond Pt. at the head of Charcot Bay, along the NW. side of Louis Phil- ippe Pen.; in 63°52’S., 59°28’W. Charted and named in 1948 by the FIDS. The name is descrip- tive of prevailing cloud conditions in the vicinity during the survey. White Cross Mountain: see Guernsey, Mount. WHITE ISLAND: island about 10 mi. long and about 2,300 ft. in el., protruding through Ross Ice Shelf close S. of Ross I. and about 3 mi. E. of Black I.; in about 78°10’S., 167°20’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who so named it because of its mantle of snow. Not adopted: Hvit Gen [Nor- wegian], Weisse Insel [German]. WHITESIDE, MOUNT: low, conical peak about 620 ft. in el. on Fold I., about 0.5 mi. W. of Green Pt. off Kemp Coast; in about 67°20’S., 59°32’E. Disc. and named by DI personnel on the William Scoresby in February 1936. WHITESIDE POINT: wedge-shaped point covered by ice, about 1,100 ft. in el., marking the S. side of the entrance to Evans Inlet, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°08’S., 61°35’W. Evans Inlet was first sighted from the air by Sir Hubert Wilkins on Dec. 20, 1928. The point was charted during 1947 by the FIDS and given this descriptive name by the Br—APC in 1950. WHITSON, CAPE: cape at the S. end of the pen- insula separating Methuen and Aitken Coves, on the S. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°32’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, and named for T. B. (later Sir Thomas) Whitson, treasurer of the expedition. WHITTEN PEAK: pyramidal peak, about 1,500 ft. in el., forming the NE. end of Blade Ridge at the W. side of the head of Hope Bay, on the NE. end of the Palmer Pen.; in 63°25’S., 57°04’W. Disc. by 324 the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskjold. Named by the FIDS for R. Whitten, first mate of the ship Eagle, which participated in FIDS operations in 194445. WHITTLE GLACIER: channel glacier about 4 mi. wide and 4 mi. long, flowing NE. from the con- tinental ice which drains into the head of Col- vocoresses Bay, and terminating in a small tongue about 6 mi. NW. of Williamson Glacier Tongue, on Budd Coast; in about 66°00’S., 114°40’E. De- lineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for Dr. J. S. Whittle, asst. surgeon on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. WHITTLE GLACIER TONGUE: small glacier tongue about 4 mi. wide and 3 mi. long, extending NE. from Whittle Gl. into Colvocoresses Bay, which is generally ice filled, along Budd Coast; in about 65°55’S., 114°45’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for Dr. J. S. Whittle. WIDER@E, MOUNT: mountain mass, about 5,000 ft. in el. or more, standing in the W. portion of the Sgr Rondane Mtns. near the W. edge of Princess Ragnhild Coast; in about 72°15’S., 22°00’E. Disc. and charted on Feb. 6, 1937 by members of a Nor. exp. under Christensen and named for Viggo Widerge, airplane pilot of the expedition. Not adopted: Wider6e Fjell [Norwegian]. Wider6e Fjell: see Widerge, Mount. WIEDENMANN GLACIER: glacier lying N. of the Moltke Nunatak and descending W. from the in- terior heights of Luitpold Coast to merge with the Filchner Ice Shelf; in about 78°05’S., 36°00’W. Disc. by the GerAE, 1911-12, under Filchner, who named this feature for Baron von Wiedenmann, supporter of the expedition. WIENCKE ISLAND: the southernmost of the major islands of the Palmer Arch., lying between Anvers I. and the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°50’S., 63°25’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache and named for Auguste-Karl Wiencke, a seaman who lost his life on the ex- pedition. WIENER PEAKS: group of nunataks rising on the S. side of Crevasse Valley Gl. and representing a portion of a submerged ridge which separates the main glacier from a southern tributary, in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 76°45’S., 144°23’W. Disc. by members of the USAS, 1939-41, on flights over this area and named for Murray GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA A. Wiener, auroral observer of the West Base of this expedition. WILBUR, MOUNT: flat-topped, irregular mass rising to about 9,000 ft. in el., standing about 4 mi. E. of Mt. Weaver, at the head of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°58’S., 151°45’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named by Byrd for the Hon. Curtiss D. Wilbur, Sec. of the Navy from 1925 to 1929. WILCOX, MOUNT: mountain with a sharp, rocky, triangular peak, about 4,600 ft. in el., sur- mounting the SE. corner of Square Bay, 9 mi. E. of Camp Pt., on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°58’S., 66°55’W. The mountain was apparently first seen and roughly charted in 1909 by the FrAE under Charcot. It was first surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, and was photographed from the air in 1940 by the USAS. The name, proposed by Col. Lawrence Martin, is for Phineas Wilcox, mate on the Hero, in which Capt. Nathaniel B. Palmer explored the Antarctic mainland S. of Deception I. in 1820. WILD, CAPE: prominent cape lying about 30 mi. E. of Ninnis Gl. along George V Coast; in about 68°20’S., 149°10’E. This is probably the cape viewed from the Vincennes on Jan. 19, 1840 from a great distance, as a result of “looming” or a superior mirage, by the USEE under Wilkes, and named by him for then Lt. George F. Emmons on the Vincennes. Its location was more accurately determined in December 1912 by the Eastern Coastal Party of the AAE under Mawson. Frank Wild was leader of the AAE Western Base and later a member of two expeditions under Shackleton in 1914-16 and 1921-22. Not adopted: Point Em- mons. WILD, MOUNT: sharply defined rock ridge about 5 mi. long, with several summits, the highest about 3,100 ft. in el., standing at the N. side of Sjogren Gl. on the SE. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 64°12’S., 58°50’W. First charted by the FIDS in 1945, and named for Frank Wild. WILD, POINT: small point marked by a low rocky hill at its N. end, located about 1 mi. SE. of Cape Belsham, on the N. side of Elephant I., in the South Shetland I.; in about 61°02’S., 54°59’W. This point was named Cape Wild by the Br. exp. under Shackleton, 1914-16, but the name Point Wild is recommended because of the small size of the feature and to avoid confusion with Cape Wild on the George V Coast. Named for Frank Wild, leader of the party from Shackleton’s shipwrecked exp. which camped at this site for four months 325 during the 1916 winter season before being rescued. Not adopted: Cape Wild. Wilh. Carlson Island: see Carlson Island. Wilh. Carlsons O: see Carlson Island. Wilhelm Barrier; Wilhelm Shelf Ice: see Filchner Shelf Ice. Wilhelm Christophersen, Mount: see Engelstad, Mount. WILHELM CHRISTOPHERSEN, MOUNT: mound-shaped knob rising to about 11,000 ft. in el. from the edge of the polar plateau at the head of Axel Heiberg Gl., standing between Mount Fridtjof Nansen and Mount Engelstad in the Queen Maud Range; in about 85°30’S., 168°20’W. Disc. by a Nor. exp., 1910-12, under Amundsen, and named by him for Wilhelm C. C. Christophersen, Nor- wegian diplomat and Minister of Foreign Affairs, 1908-10. Apparently an error in the position of Mount Wilhelm Christophersen and Mount Engel- stad on the map in Amundsen’s book, Sydpolen, gave rise to transposition in subsequent carto- graphic application of these names. The US-— ACAN application of these names is based on an analysis of Amundsen’s narrative. Not adopted: Mount Engelstad (q.v.), Mount Englestad, Mount Ole Engelstad. WILHELM II COAST: that portion of Antarctica lying between Cape Penck, in about 66°40’S., 87°35’E., and Cape Filchner, in about 66°28’S., 92°18’E. Named for Kaiser Wilhelm II by the GerAE under Drygalski who landed in the vicinity of Gaussberg, in 89°19’E., in February 1902. Not adopted: Kaiser Wilhelm II Coast, Kaiser Wilhelm II Land. WILHELMINA BAY: bay about 20 mi. wide, entered between Cape Reclus and Cape Anna along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°35’S., 62°05’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named for Wilhelmina, Queen of the Nether- lands, 1890-1948. Not adopted: Welhelmina Bay, Baie de Wilhelmine [French]. Wilhelmine, Baie de: see Wilhelmina Bay. WILKES LAND: a large area in Antarctica, as yet not fully delimited, fronting on the Indian Ocean between Queen Mary Coast and George V Coast, extending from about 100°26’E. to about 142°05’E. Named for R. Adm. Charles Wilkes, American explorer who was in command of the USEE in 1838-42. The name has been applied over this extent in recognition of the fact that Wilkes recognized the phenomena of the conti- GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA nental margin over a distance of 1,500 miles of coast and thus first provided substantial proof that Antarctica is a continent. This definition of extent excludes the area E. of 142°05’E. which was sighted by Wilkes but has been shown by later expeditions to be farther S. than the positions originally assigned by him. WILKINS, CAPE: the extreme NW. tip of Fold I., forming the E. side of the entrance to Stefans- son Bay, off Kemp Coast; in about 67°15/S., 59°19’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby and named by them for Sir Hubert Wilkins, Arctic and Antarctic explorer. Not adopted: Cape Hearst. WILKINS COAST: that portion of the E. coast of Palmer Pen. extending from Cape Agassiz, in 68°30’S., 62°58’W., to Cape Boggs, in 70°33’S., 61°23’W. Named by the US—ACAN for Sir Hubert Wilkins, who in a pioneer Antarctic exploratory flight on Dec. 20, 1928 flew southward from Decep- tion I., crossed the Palmer Pen. to the E. side, and continued southward to Stefansson Str. and Hearst I. which lie midway along Wilkins Coast. Wilkins Island: see Hearst Island. WILKINS MOUNTAINS: mountains on Joerg Plateau lying SSW. of Scaife Mtns., immediately back of the Orville Escarpment; in about 75°54’S., 64°00’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named these mountains for Sir Hubert Wilkins. WILKINS STRAIT: that body of water lying between the concave W. coastline of Alexander I Island and Charcot Island, in the E. part of Bellingshausen Sea; in about 70°30’S., 72°30’W. This strait was determined by exploratory flights by the members of the East Base of the USAS in November and December 1940, and was named by the exp. after Sir Hubert Wilkins, who in 1929 first proved Charcot Land to be an island and who, therefore, indirectly discovered this strait. WILLEMS, CAPE: cape forming the N. side of the entrance to Flandres Bay, on the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°56’S., 63°13’W. First charted by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named by him for Pierre Willems. Not adopted: Cap Pierre Willems [French]. WILL HAYES MOUNTAINS: mountain group of the Queen Maud Range, surmounting the divide between the lower ends of Robert Scott Gl. and Amundsen Gl.; in about 85°57’S., 155°20’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Richard E. Byrd on the South Polar Flight of Noy. 28-29, 1929, and mapped by the 326 Southern Sledging Party of the ByrdAE, 1933-35. Named for Will Hays, former head of Motion Pic- ture Producers and Distributors. WILLIAM, MOUNT: prominent snow-covered mountain about 5,300 ft. in el., standing about 5 mi. NNE. of Cape Lancaster, the S. extremity of Anvers I., in the Palmer Arch.; in 64°47’S., 63°42’W. This feature was disc. by John Biscoe on Feb. 21, 1832. He believed it to be part of the mainland of Palmer Peninsula. Biscoe named the mountain for King William IV, then King of England. William Bay: see Borgen Bay. WILLIAM BLOCK, MOUNT: peak rising to about 10,200 ft. in el., standing about 10 mi. SSE. of Mt. Pratt, in one of the southern ridges of the Gros- venor Range; in about 86°05’S., and on the 180th meridian. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929, and named by him at that time for William Block, son of Paul Block, patron of the expedition. WILLIAM BRUCE, CAPE: cape at the head of Charcot Bay, at approximately the point where Mawson Gl. forms the Nordenskjéld Ice Tongue, on the coast of Victoria Land; in about 76°09’S., 162°30’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, who named this feature for Dr. William S. Bruce, leader of the ScotNAE, 1902-4. WILLIAM GLACIER: glacier flowing S. from the interior highlands of Anvers I. to the head of Borgen Bay on the SE. coast of the island, in the Palmer Arch; in 64°42’S., 63°28’W. This glacier was disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Ger- lache, and charted by them simply as a “grand gla- cier.’ The name first appears on a chart based upon a 1927 survey by DI personnel on the Dis- covery. WILLIAM HENRY MAY, CAPE: conspicuous rocky point marked by sheer red granite cliffs, lying below Mt. Christmas along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 81°55’S., 162°00’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Admiral of the Fleet Sir William Henry May was a Lord of the Admiralty and Controller of the Navy 1901-5. Not adopted: Cape May. ~ WILLIAMS, CAPE: headland at the E. end of Bowers Hills, on the Oates Coast; in about 70°08’S., 163°15’E. Disc. in February 1911 by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, when the Terra Nova ex- plored westward of Cape North. William Williams, Engineer, RN, was Chief Engineer-room Artificer on the Terra Nova. Not adopted: Williams Head. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA WILLIAMS, POINT: bluff point. forming the E. side of the entrance to Shallow Bay, on the E. part of Mac-Robertson Coast; in about 67°48’S., 67°50’E. Disc. by the BANZARE under Mawson, on Feb. 12 or 13, 1931, and named for A. J. Williams, wireless officer on the exp. ship Discovery. Williams, Port: see FoSter, Port. WILLIAM SCORESBY ARCHIPELAGO: group of islands lying off Mac-Robertson Coast just E. of the entrance to William Scoresby Bay, extending about 7 mi. in a NW.-SE. direction, the largest of which are Islay, Gouling Island, and the Sheehan Islands; centered in about 67°20’S., 59°47’E. Most of the islands in this archipelago were disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby who named them for the exp. ship. WILLIAM SCORESBY BAY: bay about 5 mi. long and about 3.5 mi. wide, with shores marked by steep rock headlands and snow-free hills rising to about 700 ft. in el., lying at the junction of Kemp and Mac-Robertson Coasts; in about 67°25’S., 59°37’E. Disc. in February 1936 by DI personnel on the William Scoresby, for which the bay was named. Not adopted: Innfjorden [Norwegian], Scoresby Bay. Williams Head: see Williams, Cape. WILLIAMSON GLACIER: channel glacier about 3 mi. wide and 10 mi. long, flowing NE. from the continental ice which drains into the head of Colvo- coresses Bay, and terminating in a prominent tongue, on Budd Coast; in about 66°05’S., 114°50’E. Delineated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US-ACAN for John G. Williamson, gunner on the sloop of war Vincennes of the USEE under Wilkes, 1838-42. Williamson reported that he was sure of sighting land on Jan. 19, 1840 in the Oates Coast region. Work by later expeditions has shown that land does not exist as far northward as the Oates Coast posi- tions reported by the USEE, although adequate surveys of this coast have not been undertaken. WILLIAMSON GLACIER TONGUE: prominent glacier tongue about 3 mi. wide and 12 mi. long, extending NE. from Williamson Gl. into Colvo- coresses Bay, which is generally ice filled, along Budd Coast; in about 66°00’S., 115°10’E. Delin- eated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named by the US—ACAN for John G. Williamson. WILLIAMSON HEAD: prominent headland lying W. of Cape Kinsey along Oates Coast; in about 69°05’S., 158°10’E. Disc. in February 1911 by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, when the Terra Nova 327 explored westward of Cape North. Thomas S. Wil- liamson was a petty officer on the Terra Nova. Not adopted: Williamson Point. Williamson Point: see Williamson Head. WILLIAMSON ROCK: rock lying about 7 mi. ESE. of Cape Campbell, close off the NE. coast of Ross I.; in about 77°23’S., 168°46’E. Charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Named for Thomas S. Williamson, who as able seaman and petty officer accompanied Scott’s expeditions of 1901-4 and 1910-13. WILLIAMS POINT: point forming the NE. tip of Livingston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°26’S., 60°11’W. The discovery of the South Shetland Is. was first reported by William Smith, master of the brig Williams, in 1819. In John Miers’ account of Smith’s voyage, published in 1820, he states that Smith gave the name Williams to a point of land in this vicinity. In recent years the name Williams Point has been established in inter- national usage for the NE. tip of Livingston Is- land. Not adopted: William’s Point. WILLIS ISLANDS: group of islands and rocks lying about 3 mi. W. of Bird I., off the W. end of South Georgia; in 54°01’S., 38°15’'W. The Willis Islands were discovered in 1775 by Capt. James Cook and named for the crew member who first sighted them. Not adopted: Wallis Island, Willis Island, Willis’s Island. WILSON, CAPE: cape at the E. side of the en- trance to the Bay of Isles, on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°03’S., 37°11’W. The Bay of Isles was charted in 1912-13 by Robert Cushman Murphy, American naturalist aboard the brig Daisy. The cape was named by Murphy for Wood- row Wilson, President of the United States, 1913-21. WILSON, CAPE: bold, rocky, snow-covered cape, forming the N. side of the entrance to Shackleton Inlet, along the W. edge of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 82°17’S., 163°00’E. Disc. by Capt. Robert F. Scott, RN, in December 1902, while on his attempted trip to the South Pole. He was accompanied on this trip by S. Lt. (later Sir) Ernest H. Shackleton, RNR, and Dr. Edward A. Wilson, for whom the cape was named. WILSON, MOUNT: mountain about 5,500 ft. in el., surmounting the base of Rock Pile Peaks, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 68°27’S., 65°35’W. This mountain appears indistinctly in a photograph taken by Sir Hubert Wilkins on his flight of Dec. 20,1928. The feature was rephotographed in 1935 by Lincoln Ellsworth, in 1940 by the USAS, and in 1947 by the RARE under Ronne, and was charted GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA by the FIDS in 1948. Named by Ronne for Maj. Gen. R. C. Wilson, chief of staff to Lt. Gen. Curtis LeMay, head of the Office of Research and Develop- ment of the then Army Air Forces, which furnished equipment for the RARE. Wilson Glacier: see Breitfuss Glacier. WILSON HARBOR: bay about 1.5 mi. wide which recedes eastward for about 3 mi., lying immedi- ately S. of Ice Fjord along the S. coast of South Georgia; in 54°07’S., 37°45’W. This coast was roughly charted by a Russ. exp. under Bellings- hausen in 1819. Wilson Harbor was named about 1912, probably for J. Innes Wilson, who sketched some of the inland portions of the island at about that time. WILSON HILLS: hills which trend west-north- westward, lying back of Archer Pt. along Oates Coast; in about 69°10’S., 158°00’E. Disc. in Feb- ruary 1911 by the BrAE under Scott, when the Terra Nova explored westward in Cape North. Named for Dr. Edward A. Wilson who perished with Scott on the return journey from the South Pole. WILSON PIEDMONT GLACIER: a great pied- mont glacier, varying in width from 6 to 14 mi. and extending about 36 mi. between Granite Hbr. and Marble Pt., along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 77°15’S., 163°20’E. This piedmont glacier was disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott. Scott’s second exp., the BrAE, 1910-13, named the feature for Dr. Edward A. Wilson, surgeon and artist with Scott’s first expedition and chief of the scientific staff of the second. Not adopted: Great Piedmont Glacier, Wilson Piedmont. WILSON: ROCK: rock about 500 ft. in el., lying about 1.4 mi. W. of Bristol I., in the South Sand- wich Is.; in 59°03’S., 26°39’W. Charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for Sir Samuel H. Wilson, Permanent Under-Secretary of State for the British Colonies. WILTON BAY: bay lying between Cape Davidson and Cape Hartree along the SW. coast of Laurie I., in the South Orkney Is.; in 60°46’S., 44°45’W. Charted by the ScotNAE, 1902-4, under Bruce, who named it for D. W. Wilton, zoologist of the expe- dition. WIMPLE DOME: ice-covered hill about 2,500 ft. in el., standing about 2 mi. S. of Thanaron Hill and 2 mi. E. of Bone Cove, on the NW. side of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°37’S., 58°49°W. The name was applied by members of the FIDS following their survey in 1948 and is descriptive of the shape of the feature, a wimple being a type of headdress worn by nuns. 328 WINDMILL ISLANDS: a group of rocky islands, islets and rocks, about 6 mi. wide and paralleling the coast immediately N. of Vanderford Gl. for about 15 mi., lying off Budd Coast close inside the E. side of the entrance to Vincennes Bay; in 66°20’S., 110°28’E. Delineated from aerial photo- graphs taken by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47, and so named by the US-ACAN because personnel with USN Op. Wml., 1947-48, landed on Holl I. at the SW. end of the group to establish ground control for USN Op. Hjp. photographs. The term Operation Windmill is a popular expression which developed after the exp. disbanded, and refers to the extensive use of helicopters made by this group. The official title of this exp. was Second Antarctic Development Project, U.S. Navy Task Force 39, 1947-48. WINDS, BAY OF: embayment about 19 mi. wide between Cape Dovers and Jones Rocks, indenting the Queen Mary Coast about 10 mi.; in about 66°35’S., 97°35’E. Disc. by the AAE, 1911-14, under Mawson, who so named it because of the almost constant outflow of cold dense air from the plateau into the bay. WINDVANE HILL: small hill about 0.2 mi. NE. of the extremity of Cape Evans, Ross I.; in about 77°38’S., 166°24’E. Windvane Hill was charted by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott, and so named because an anemometer station was established at this site. WINDY COVE: small bay close NW. of Antarctic Bay, entered 1 mi. SE. of Antarctic Pt. on the N. coast of South Georgia; in 54°04’S., 36°58’W. The bay was named Whatahope Bay, probably by DI personnel who charted this coast in 1929. How- ever, this feature is known locally as Windy Cove. It is probable that this latter name, which was originally given by DI personnel in 1929 to the next bay to the northwest (now Tornquist Bay, q.v.), was erroneously transferred to this feature. Since Whatahope Bay is unknown locally, the name Windy Cove as applied to this feature is approved. Not adopted: Whatahope Bay. Windy Cove; Windy Hole: see Tornquist Bay. WINDY GAP: pass about 3,200 ft. in el., lying about 3 mi. SSE. of Mt. D’Urville and forming the meeting place of three valleys of- Louis Philippe Pen., namely Broad Valley leading eastward to Duse Bay, a valley leading northward to Bransfield Str., and another southward to Prince Gustav Chan.; in 63°34’S., 58°09’W. Disc. by the FIDS and so named because of the very bad weather experienced by them in the pass during a survey journey in April 1946. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA WINDY VALLEY: glacier-filled valley opening onto Marguerite Bay on the W. coast of Palmer Pen. and providing access via its head to the pla- teau and The Traffic Circle area; in 68°37’S., 66°50’W. So named by the BGLE under Rymill, 1934-37, because of the strong winds which descend from the high plateau and blow out of this valley with great force. Winifred Cumming, Mount: see Cumming, Mount. WINTER ISLAND: islet about 0.5 mi. long, lying 0.1 mi. N. of Skua I., in the Argentine Is., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°16’W. Winter Island was named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill, who made this islet the site of their winter base during 1936. WINTER QUARTERS BAY: small bay imme- diately E. of Hut Pt., at the S. end of Ross I.; in about 77°51’S., 166°37’E. Disc. by the BrNAE, 1901-4, under Scott, and so named because their exp. ship Discovery was moored in the bay and “frozen-in” during the winter seasons of 1902 and 1903. Winter Quarters Peninsula: see Hut Point Pen- insula. WISTING, MOUNT: one of a group of low-lying peaks barely protruding through the ice of the south polar plateau, rising to about 10,700 ft. in el. about 6 mi. NW. of the group containing Mounts Hassel, Bjaaland and Prestrud, which stand about 20 mi. SW. of the Thorvald Nilsen Mtns. in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°28’S., 163°45’W. Disc. in November 1911 by the Nor. exp. under Amundsen, and named by him for Oscar Wisting, a member of the South Pole Party. Not adopted: Mount Oscar Wisting, Mount O. Wisting. WITTE PEAKS: group of two or three small peaks, standing at the N. side of Stein Nunataks and rising above the piedmont ice in New Schwabenland; in about 71°30’S., 1°00’W. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Dietrich Witte, motor mechanic on the expe- dition. WOHLTHAT MOUNTAINS: large group of asso- ciated mountain features, including such major ranges as the Petermann Range and the Alexander Humboldt Mtns., lying immediately N. of the polar plateau in the E. part of New Schwabenland; cen- tering in about 71°30’S., 11°30’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for Councilor of State Helmuth C. H. Wohlthat, who in his capacity as economist and fiscal officer dealt with the organization of the expedition. 329 WOLLASTON, CAPE: cape forming the eastern- most point of Trinity I., off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 63°43’S., 60°21’W. The name was origi- nally applied to the N. tip of Trinity I. on a map by the Br. exp. in the Chanticleer, 1829-31, under Capt. Henry Foster, but in recent years usage has restricted the name to the E. tip of the islAnd. Named by Foster for William Hyde Wollaston, com- missioner of the Royal Society on the Board of Longitude, 1818-28. Foster’s early experience with astronomical and pendulum observations (an ob- jective of the Chanticleer voyage) was facilitated by a loan of astronomical instruments from the Board of Longitude to his former ship, the Conway. Not adopted: Cape Wallaston, Cap Walleston [French]. WOOD, CAPE: point which marks the SE. ex- tremity of Flat I., at the W. side of the entrance to Robertson Bay, in Victoria Land; in about 71°21’S., 169°10’E. Disc. in January 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross and named after Charles Wood, Esq., First Secretary of the Admiralty. WOOD, MOUNT: mountain about 4,000 ft. in el., standing W. of Gardner Inlet and about 15 mi. W. of Mt. Austin, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in about 74°51’S., 64°07’W. Disc. by the RARE, 1947-48, under Ronne, who named this mountain for E. A. Wood, ship’s engineer with the expedition. Not adopted: Mount Sandell. WOOD BAY: bay lying between Cape Johnson and Cape Washington, along the coast of Victoria Land; in about 74°20’S., 165°40’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross, and named by him for Lt. James F. L. Wood, of the exp. ship Erebus. WOODWARD, MOUNT: mountain with broad twin summits, about 2,500 ft. in el., standing be- tween Hammond Gl. and Boyd Gl. in the Edsel Ford Ranges of Marie Byrd Land; in about 77°17'S., 145°45’W. Disc. on Dec. 5, 1929 by the ByrdAE, 1928-30, and named for Donald Woodward, a patron of the expedition. Not adopted: Donald Woodward Mountains, Mount Donald Woodward. WOOLNOUGH, MOUNT: mountain about 4,700 ft. in el., situated about 3 mi. N. of Mackay Gl. and about midway between Mt. Morrison and Mt. Gran, in Victoria Land; in about 76°56’S., 161°20’E. Charted and named by the BrAE, 1910-13, under Scott. Probably named for Dr. Walter G. Wool- nough, British geologist who assisted in writing the scientific reports of the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. WOOLPACK ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, lying in Grandidier Chan. about 5 mi. E. of the N. end of Vieugué I. and 9 mi. NW. of Cape Garcia, off GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°40’S., 64°59’W. Disc. and named by the BGLE, 1934-37, under Rymill. WORCESTER RANGE: a coastal range about 30 mi. long, with steep sharp peaks, lying W. of Moore Embayment along the W. side of Ross Ice Shelf; in about 78°50’S., 160°30’E. Disc. by the BrNABE, 1901-4, under Scott. The name seems to be first applied on the charts of the BrAE, 1907-9, under Shackleton. WORDIE ICE SHELF: a confluent glacier pro- jecting as an ice shelf into the SE. part of Mar- guerite Bay, between Cape Berteaux and Mt. Edgell, along the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 69°15’S., 67°45’W. Disc. by the BGLE under Ry- mill, 1934-37, who named this feature for James M. Wordie, Honorary Sec. (later Pres.) of the Royal Geographical Soc., member of the Discovery Com- mittee, and Chairman of the Scott Polar Research Institute. He also had been geologist and Chief of the Scientific Staff of the Br. exp., 1914-16, un- der Shackleton. Not adopted: Wordie Shelf Ice. WORDIE NUNATAK: rock outcrop lying about 10 mi. E. of Mt. Biscoe, in Enderby Land; in about 66°19’S., 51°50’E. Disc. in January 1930 by the BANZARE, 1929-31, under Mawson, and named for James M. Wordie. WORDIE POINT: the SW. tip of Visokoi I., in the South Sandwich Is.; in 56°44’S., 27°15’W. The point was charted in 1930 by DI personnel on the Discovery II and named for James M. Wordie. Wordie Shelf Ice: see Wordie Ice Shelf. WORSLEY, CAPE: dome-shaped cape about 700 ft. in el., with snow-free cliffs on the S. and E. sides, standing about 22 mi. WSW. of Cape Sobral, on the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°39’S., 60°25’ W. Charted by the FIDS in 1947 and named for Cdr. Frank A. Worsley, British polar explorer and mem- ber of Sir Ernest Shackleton’s expeditions of 1914-16 and 1921-22. WORSWICK HILL: rounded summit, more than 2,000 ft. in el., at the W. end of Brisbane Plateau, Coronation I., South Orkney Is.; in 60°34’S., 45°46’W. The peak appears on some early charts of the South Orkney Is. but is not accurately lo- cated. It was roughly surveyed by DI personnel in 1933, and resurveyed by the FIDS in 1948-49. Named by the Br-APC for Robert F. Worswick of the FIDS, meteorologist at Signy I. in 1950 and 1951, who reached this hill during a sledge journey in 1950. 330 WRIGHT, MOUNT: peak in the Admiralty Range in northern Victoria Land, standing NE. of Mt. Adam; in about 71°20’S., 169°20’E. This peak was charted by the Northern Party of the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Charles S. Wright, physicist with the expedition. WRIGHT GLACIER: glacier flowing into the S. part of Wilson Piedmont Gl., on the coast of Vic- toria Land; in about 77°30’S., 163°08’E. This fea- ture appears on the charts of the BrNAE under Scott, 1901-4, and the BrAE under Shackleton, 1907-9. It was recharted by the BrAE under Scott, 1910-13, and named for Charles S. Wright. WRIGHT INLET: ice-filled inlet receding west- ward between Capes Little and Wheeler, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 74°00’S., 61°20’W. The inlet was photographed from the air in 1940 by the USAS, and 1947 by the RARE under Ronne. Named by Ronne for John K. Wright, Dir. of the American Geographical Soc., which lent its aus- pices to Ronne’s expedition. Not adopted: Mount Tricorn Inlet. WRIGLEY GULF: an embayment E. of Hobbs Coast, in Marie Byrd Land, the greater part of which appears to be occupied by Getz Ice Shelf; in about 74°S., 129°W. The topographical definition of this feature must remain indefinite until clari- fied by further exploration. Disc. in December 1940 by the USAS. Named for Philip Wrigley, Chicago manufacturer who helped support the ex- pedition. Not adopted: Philip Wrigley Gulf. W. Spring, Cape: see Spring, Cape. WUST INLET: ice-filled inlet about 5 mi. wide, indenting the E. side of Merz Pen. between Cape Christmas and Old Mans Head, along the E. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 72°20’S., 60°50’W. This inlet was photographed from the air in 1940 by mem- bers of the USAS. During 1947 the inlet was pho- tographed from the air by members of the RARE, who in conjunction with the FIDS charted it from the ground. Named by the FIDS for Prof. Georg Wiist, German oceanographer. WYATT, MOUNT: fiat-topped mountain rising to about 9,000 ft. in el., standing at the SE. end of the Rawson Mtns., in the Queen Maud Range; in about 86°46’S., 153°15’W. Disc. in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn, and named at that time by R. Adm. Byrd for Miss Jane Wyatt, friend of Richard S. Russell, Jr.,a member of that party. Not adopted: Mount Jane Wyatt. GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA WYATT ISLAND: island, about 5 mi. long and 2 mi. wide, lying 2 mi. S. of Day I. near the center part of Laubeuf Fjord, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 67°20’S., 67°40’W. First surveyed in 1936 by the BGLE under Rymill, who used the provi- sional name South Island for this feature. The is- land was resurveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and re- named by them for V. Adm. Sir Arthur G. N. Wyatt, Hydrographer to the Navy, 1945-50. Not adopted: South Island. WYCK ISLAND: island about 1 mi. long, lying about 1 mi. S. of the W. part of Brooklyn I. in the E. portion of Wilhelmina Bay, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 64°36’S., 61°54’W. Disc. by the BelgAE, 1897-99, under De Gerlache, and named on the recommendation of Dr. Frederick A. Cook, surgeon of the exp.; in honor of R. A. Van Wyck, first mayor of Greater New York City. Not adopted: Van Wyck Island. X, ROCK: prominent, offshore rock about 0.4 mi. long, lying close inside the E. side of the en- trance to Victor Bay, about 1 mi. NW. of Gravenoire Rock, off Adélie Coast; in 66°20’S., 136°42’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hijp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Marret, 1952-53, and so named because the rock was indi- cated by a cross or “xX” mark in selected prints of the Operation Highjump photographs for the pur- pose of identifying it to the FrAEK party which established an astronomical control station there. X-Ray Range; X-Ray, Mount: see Kohler Range. YALOUR ISLETS: group of islets and rocks about 1.5 mi. in extent, lying in the middle of Penola Str. about 1 mi. NW. of Cape Tuxen, off the W. coast of Palmer Pen.; in 65°15’S., 64°10’W. Disc. by the FrAE, 1903-5, under Charcot, and named by him for Lt. Jorge Yalour, Argentine Navy, an officer of the Argentine corvette Uruguay, which came to the rescue of the shipwrecked SwedAE in Novem- ber 1903. Not adopted: Jallour Islands, Jallour Isles, Jallour Islets, Jalour Islets. YANKEE HARBOR: circular harbor indenting the W. coast of Greenwich I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°32’S., 59°49’W. Yankee Harbor was known to both American sealers and the British as early as 1820, and this name is now established international usage. Port Foster, the crater har- bor of Deception I., has at times also been referred to as Yankee Harbor. Not adopted: Fannings Harbor, Hospital Cove. Yankee Harbor: see-Foster, Port.° Yankee Sound: see McFarlane Strait. 331 Yngvar Nielsen Glacier; Yugvar Nielsen Glacier: see Nielsen Glacier. YOUNG ISLAND: island about 19 mi. long and 5 mi. wide which rises to a plateau about 4,000 ft. in el., lying in the NW. extremity of the Balleny Is.; in about 66°25’S., 162°30’E. Disc. in February 1839 by a Br. exp. under Balleny who named it for G. F. Young, one of the merchants who united with Charles Enderby in sending out the expedi:ion. YOUNG POINT: rocky point forming the N. side of the entrance to Bone Cove, on the NW. coast of Louis Philippe Pen.; in 63°36’S., 58°55’W. Charted by the FIDS in 1948 and named for Dr. Adam Young, surgeon on the brig Williams which made explorations in the South Shetland Is. and Brans- field Str. in 1820. YSEULT ISLET: small rocky islet, lying about 0.7 mi. E. of Tristan It. and about 0.4 mi. NNE. of the E. point on Cape Jules, off Adélie Coast; in 66°44’S., 140°56’E. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Barré, 1951-52, and so named because of its twin relationship with Tristan It. Yseult is the French spelling of Isolde, legendary heroine incor- porated into Arthurian legend and later popular- ized by Wagner’s opera “Tristan and Isolde.” YULE BAY: bay between Cape Hooker and Cape Dayman, lying about 19 mi. ESE. of Cape North, along the northern coast of Victoria Land; in about 70°40’S., 166°30’E. Disc. in 1841 by a Br. exp. under Ross who named it for Henry B. Yule, second master on the ship Erebus. ZANUCK, MOUNT: large mountain, about 4 mi. wide and 10 mi. long surmounted by three sharp peaks in an E.—-W. line, the highest of which rises to about 7,500 ft. in el., standing at the S. side of Albanus GI. at the point where it joins the E. side of Robert Scott Gl., in the Queen Maud Range; centering in about 85°58’S., 150°04’W. Disc. by R. Adm. Byrd on the ByrdAE flight to the South Pole in November 1929, and visited in December 1934 by the ByrdAE geological party under Quin Blackburn. Named by Byrd for Darryl F. Zanuck, official of Twentieth Century-Fox Pictures, who assisted the ByrdAE, 1933-35, in assembling motion-picture records, and later supplied the USAS, 1939-41, with motion-picture projectors. Zavodovskii Island; Zavodovsk Island: see Zavo- dovski Island. ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND: circular island about 3 mi. in diameter surmounted by an active volcanic cone about 1,600 ft. in el., in the South Sandwich GEOGRAPHIC NAMES OF ANTARCTICA Is.; in 56°20’S., 27°35’W. Disc. in 1819 by a Russ. exp. under Bellingshausen, and named by him for Ivan Zavodovski, second-in-command of the exp. ship Vostok. Not adopted: Zavodovskii Island, Zavodovsk Island. ZEBRA RIDGE: small but prominent rock ridge, about 2 mi. long and 2,500 ft. in el., situated 3 mi. S. of the mouth of Tumble Gl. where it rises above the coastal ice piedmont of eastern Alexan- der I Island; in 70°02’S., 69°14’W. First surveyed in 1948 by the FIDS, and so named by them because of the striped appearance of the rock strata. ZED ISLANDS: small group of islands, the west- ernmost rising to about 950 ft. in el., lying about 1.5 mi. NW. of Williams Pt., the NE. tip of Living- ston I., in the South Shetland Is.; in 62°25’S., 60°12’W. The name appears to have been applied by DI personnel on the Discovery II who charted the islands in 1935. ZELEE GLACIER: glacier about 3 mi. wide and 6 mi. long, flowing NNW. from the continental ice along the W. side of Lacroix Nunatak and termi- nating in a prominent tongue at the W. side of Port Martin, on Adélie Coast; in 66°52’S., 141°16’E. Probably first sighted in 1840 by the Fr. exp. under D’Urville, although no glaciers were noted on D’Urville’s chart of this coast. Photographed from the air by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47. Charted by the FrAE under Liotard, 1949-51, and named for the Zélée, corvette which accompanied D’Urville’s flag- ship, the Astrolabe. Not adopted: Zelee Glacier. 332 ZELEE GLACIER TONGUE: glacier tongue about 2 mi. wide and 7 mi. long, extending NW. from Zélée Gl. into the W. portion of Port Martin, along Adélie Coast; in 66°47’S., 141°10’E. Deline- ated from aerial photographs taken by USN Op. Hjp., 1946-47, and named for the French corvette Zélée. Not adopted: Zelee Glacier Tongue. ZELEE ROCKS: group of rocks, some of which are above water and others near the surface, lying about 17 mi. N. of Cape Siffrey, the extreme N. tip of Palmer Pen.; in 62°54’S., 57°18’W. Disc. by the Fr. exp., 1837-40, under D’Urville, and named by him after the exp. ship Zélée. Not adopted: Zelee Rocks, Zelée Rocks. ZENKER RIDGE: low moraine ridge extending NE. from Osmic Hill to Discovery Pt., in Cumber- land East Bay, South Georgia; in 54°18’S., 36°30’W. This moraine was charted by the SwedAE, 1901-4, under Nordenskj6ld. Named by the FIDS follow- ing their sketch survey in 1951. The name is one of a group in the vicinity of Discovery Pt., derived from the chemical fixatives used there in biological work by the FIDS. ZIMMERMANN, MOUNT: mountain about 9,200 ft. in el., standing immediately E. of the N. end of the Petermann Range, at the seaward edge of the bastion extension of the polar plateau that is formed by the Wohlthat Mtns. of New Schwaben- land; in about 71°18’S., 13°24’E. Disc. by the GerAE under Ritscher, 1938-39, and named for the vice-president of the Deutschen Forschungs- gemeinschaft (German Research Society). Zuckerhut Insel: see Sugarloaf Islet. GPO—DSSO—5522 U, S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1957 O -424589 eet ey ise 4 ENON a. { \ Pate { eae ~